PROJECT MANUAL

Mooresville
185 Williamson Rd
Mooresville, NC 28117

BDG Architects
400 N Ashley Dr Suite 600
Tampa, FL 33602

CHASE DESIGN STANDARDS BASIS: v20.4

 CHASE
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 0 – INTRODUCTORY PAGES

000000 TITLE PAGE

000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 – BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

006313 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION FORM

006323 REQUEST FOR TRANSFER OF DOCUMENTS
006325 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

PART 2 – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

012300 ALTERNATES
013000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
013324 STRUCTURAL SUBMITTALS
013528 IBC 2012 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS- NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS
013564 GREEN REQUIREMENT SUMMARY
014000 QUALITY ASSURANCE
014524 STRUCTURAL SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
017800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
018119 INDOOR AIR QUALITY

DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

NOT USED

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

033505 CURING, SEALING AND HARDENING CONCRETE FLOORS

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

042000 UNIT MASONRY

047215 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE
047300 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER

DIVISION 5 – METALS

051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL

052100 STEEL JOISTS
053100 STEEL DECKING
054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

TOC-1
 CHASE
TABLE OF CONTENTS

054400 PRE-ENGINEERED, PRE-FABRICATED COLD FORMED STEEL ROOF TRUSSES

055000 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTIC AND COMPOSITES

061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

061643 EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING
062000 FINISH CARPENTRY
064113 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064460 MANUFACTURED COLUMN COVERS
066116 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS

TOC-2
 CHASE
TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

072113 BOARD INSULATION

072117 FIBROUS BUILDING INSULATION
072129 SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSE INSULATION
072140 SPRAY-APPLIED FOAM INSULATION
072400 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
072423 DIRECT-APPLIED FINISH SYSTEMS
072500 WEATHER BARRIERS
074213 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE MATERIAL BUILDING PANELS
074243 FIBER CEMENT PANELS
075400 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076526 SELF-ADHERING SHEET FLASHING
077113 MANUFACTURED COPINGS
077123 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES
077253 SNOW GUARDS
079200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS

081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
083100 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084400 CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES
087100 DOOR HARDWARE
088000 GLAZING
088700 GLAZING SURFACE FILMS

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

092200 LIGHTGAGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING

092350 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS
092423 PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO
092900 GYPSUM BOARD
093100 THIN-SET TILING
095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
096513 RESILIENT WALL BASE
096516 RESILIENT VINYL SHEET FLOORING
096520 RESILIENT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING
096813 TILE CARPETING
097200 WALL COVERINGS
098100 ACOUSTIC INSULATION
099100 PAINTS
099300 STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES

TOC-3
 CHASE
TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

102219 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITION SYSTEM

102600 CORNER GUARDS
102801 TOILET AND UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES
104415 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
105300 ARCHITECTURAL CANOPIES
105623 WIRE STORAGE SHELVING
107113 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

113113 APPLIANCES

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

122413 ROLLER SHADES

124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MAT
129300 SITE FURNISHINGS

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT USED

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS

NOT USED

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

NOT USED

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

220013 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

220700 PLUMBING INSULATION
221116 DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
221316 STORM DRAINAGE, STANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

TOC-4
 CHASE
TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

230013 HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS

230593 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
230713 DUCT INSTALLATION
231123 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
233113 METAL DUCTS
233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
236400 CONDENSING UNITS
237223 PACKAGED AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY-RECOVERY UNITS
237436 ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
238239 UNIT HEATERS

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

260013 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260519 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260531 CONDUITS
260532 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
260534 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
260943 NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)
262001 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
262419 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262813 FUSES
262819 DISCONNECTS (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT)
265000 LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

270500 QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

270503 TECHNOLOGY SPACE CLEANING
270526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR STRUCTURED CABLING
270528 PATHWAYS FOR STRUCTURED CABLING
271100 EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271300 BACKBONE CABLING
271500 STRUCTURED CABLING - HORIZONTAL CABLING
275319 CELLULAR ANTENNA

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

312200 GRADING

TOC-5
 CHASE
TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

320190 MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING

321123 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
321313 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
321413 UNIT PAVING
321716 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING
328010 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
347100 BOLLARDS

END TABLE OF CONTENTS

TOC-6
 REPORT OF
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION

PROPOSED CHASE BANK W/ DRIVE-UP ATM

185 Williamson Road
Town of Mooresville, Iredell County, North Carolina

Prepared for:

BDG Architects, LLP

400 N. Ashley Drive, Suite 600
Tampa, Florida 33602

Prepared by:

245 Main Street, Suite 110

Chester, New Jersey 07930

Peter H. Howell, P.E. Patrick Granitzki

Principal Principal
NC PE License No. 049647

Project #2521-99-014E
August 17, 2021
 REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
PROPOSED CHASE BANK W/ DRIVE-UP ATM
185 Williamson Road
Town of Mooresville, Iredell County, North Carolina

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 SUMMARY OF FINDINGS ............................................................................ 1

2.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ 3

2.1 Authorization ................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Purpose ............................................................................................................................ 3
2.3 Scope ............................................................................................................................... 3
2.3.1 Field Exploration .................................................................................................. 3
2.3.2 Laboratory Testing Program .................................................................................. 4

3.0 SITE DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................... 6

3.1 Location and Description .................................................................................................. 6
3.2 Existing Conditions .......................................................................................................... 6
3.3 Proposed Construction...................................................................................................... 6

4.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ........................................................................ 8

4.1 Site Geology..................................................................................................................... 8
4.2 Subsurface Soil Profile ...................................................................................................... 8
4.3 Groundwater .................................................................................................................... 9

5.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS ................................................10

5.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 10
5.2 Site Preparation and Earthwork....................................................................................... 10
5.3 Structural Fill and Backfill .............................................................................................. 12
5.4 Groundwater Control ..................................................................................................... 13
5.5 Foundation Recommendations ....................................................................................... 13
5.6 Floor Slab ...................................................................................................................... 15
5.7 Pavement Design Criteria ............................................................................................... 15
5.8 Retaining Walls and Lateral Earth Pressures .................................................................... 17
5.9 Seismic and Liquefaction Considerations ......................................................................... 17
5.10 Temporary Excavations .................................................................................................. 17
5.11 Supplemental Post-Investigation Services......................................................................... 17

BDG Architects, LLP i 2521-99-014E

 REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
PROPOSED CHASE BANK W/ DRIVE-UP ATM
185 Williamson Road
Town of Mooresville, Iredell County, North Carolina

TABLE OF CONTENTS
(continued)

6.0 GENERAL COMMENTS ..............................................................................18

APPENDICES

Boring Location Plan

Records of Subsurface Exploration
Laboratory Results
Geotechnical Terms and Symbols
USCS Standard Classification System

BDG Architects, LLP ii 2521-99-014E

 1.0 SUMMARY OF FINDINGS

Dynamic Earth, LLC (Dynamic Earth) has completed an exploration and evaluation of the
subsurface conditions for the proposed site redevelopment located at 185 Williamson Road in the
Town of Mooresville, Iredell County, North Carolina. The site is further identified as Parcel ID
Number 4647355199.000. The subject site is shown on the Boring Location Plan included in the
appendix of this report.

The subject site was formerly developed with a residential structure and was partially wooded. At
the time of Dynamic Earth’s investigation, the residential structure had been removed. The
proposed site redevelopment will include construction of a Chase Bank building with a drive-up
ATM and associated pavement and utilities. The proposed building will occupy a footprint area of
3,293 square feet. Site development details were provided on a June 15, 2021 Site Fit Plan prepared
by Chase Bank. Site grading plans were not developed at this time, however, we anticipate that the
proposed site development will be constructed near existing site grades, with only minor cuts and
fills.

The subsurface exploration included reconnaissance of the project site, drilling soil borings,
performing laboratory testing and evaluating the geotechnical conditions relevant to the proposed
construction details provided. A summary of Dynamic Earth’s findings and recommendations is
presented below:

➢ Generalized Subsurface Conditions: Borings were performed within existing gravel areas
and within the area of the demolished former building. Borings performed within existing
gravel areas encountered up to two inches of gravel at the surface. The remainder of the
borings encountered existing fill material at the surface. Beneath the surficial cover,
existing fill material was encountered that generally consisted of clay, sand and gravel. The
existing fill material was encountered to depths ranging between approximately two feet
and six feet below the ground surface. Beneath the existing fill material, natural residual
deposits were encountered that generally consisted of highly plastic silt (USCS: MH), clay
(USCS: CL) and sand (USCS: SM and SC). The natural residual deposits were encountered
to termination depths ranging between approximately ten feet and 20 feet below the ground
surface.

➢ Overexcavation/Replacement of Unsuitable Soils: Existing fill material and highly

plastic soils were encountered that are not suitable for direct support of the proposed
building without the risk of excessive settlement and/or potential vertical rise.
Overexcavation depths will need to extend below the existing fill material or at least
three feet below proposed foundations (where highly plastic natural soils are
encountered). Overexcavations will need to be backfilled as detailed herein with treated
on-site soils and/or imported low plastic soils.

BDG Architects, LLP 1 2521-99-014E

 ➢ Foundations and Floor slabs: Following overexcavation of the existing fill material, the
proposed building may be supported on conventional shallow foundations bearing within
newly placed compacted structural fill material and/or approved natural deposits.
Foundations may be designed to exert a maximum allowable net bearing pressure of 2,000
pounds per square foot.

➢ Pavements: The majority of the on-site soils are preliminarily expected to be suitable for
support of proposed pavements provided these materials are properly evaluated and
inspected during construction. Due to the existing fill material encountered and highly
plastic/elastic of the on-site soils, partial overexcavation and replacement and/or moisture
conditioning should be expected below proposed pavements.

➢ Use of Site Soils as Structural Fill: The majority of the on-site soils include highly plastic
soils. Highly plastic soils are typically not suitable for reuse as structural fill material unless
moisture conditioning techniques, such as lime/cement mixing are utilized. As such, the
contractor should include a unit rate cost to import low plastic granular soils.

➢ Groundwater Control: Dynamic Earth expects that the groundwater level will be deeper
than the proposed foundation and utility excavations and extensive groundwater control is
not expected to be required for the project. Surface water runoff must be controlled and
diverted away from construction areas by grading and limiting the exposure of excavations
to rainfall.

➢ Supplemental Evaluation of Existing Fill Material: Based on the results of this

investigation, existing fill material was encountered to a maximum depth of approximately
six feet below the ground surface within or near the area of the proposed building. The
composition and lateral extents of these materials will need to be further evaluated during
the early construction phase to confirm the suitability of the existing fill material for reuse
as structural fill material. Additional overexcavation and replacement could be required
where areas of unsuitable fill material are encountered.

Detailed design criteria and construction recommendations for proposed foundations, floor slabs,
pavements and related earthwork are discussed in the following report. Dynamic Earth should
remain involved to provide consultation and review during final design.

BDG Architects, LLP 2 2521-99-014E

 2.0 INTRODUCTION

2.1 Authorization

Dynamic Earth, LLC (Dynamic Earth) was authorized to conduct a geotechnical investigation in
accordance with Dynamic’s July 13, 2021 proposal to Ms. Trish Nearhoof of BDG Architects,
LLP.

2.2 Purpose

The purpose of this subsurface exploration and analysis was to:

➢ ascertain the various soil profile components at test locations;

➢ estimate the engineering characteristics of the proposed foundation bearing and subgrade
materials;

➢ provide geotechnical criteria for use by the design engineers in preparing the foundations,
floor slab and pavement designs;

➢ provide recommendations for required earthwork and subgrade preparation;

➢ record groundwater levels at the time of the investigation and discuss the potential impact
on the proposed construction; and

➢ recommend additional investigation, if warranted.

2.3 Scope

The scope of the exploration and analysis included site geologic research and evaluation,
subsurface exploration, field testing and sampling and geotechnical engineering analysis and
evaluation of the subsurface materials. This Report of Geotechnical Investigation is limited to
addressing the site conditions as they relate to the physical support of the proposed construction.
Environmental conditions were not evaluated by Dynamic Earth.

2.3.1 Field Exploration

Field exploration of this investigation was conducted by means of seven soil borings (identified as
borings B-1 through B-7). The borings were drilled using hollow stem auger drilling techniques
with a truck drill-rig equipment. Test locations are summarized in the following table and are
shown on the accompanying Boring Location Plan.

BDG Architects, LLP 3 2521-99-014E

 TEST LOCATION SUMMARY TABLE
Final Depth
Number Proposed Location
(feet)
B-1 Southwestern portion of Building 20.0
B-2 Northern Portion of Building 20.0
B-3 Northeastern portion of Building 20.0
B-4 Southern Portion of Building 20.0
B-5 Pavement Area 10.0
B-6 Canopy/Trash Enclosure 10.0
B-7 Pavement Area 10.0
1
Auger Refusal

The soil borings were completed in the presence of a Dynamic Earth engineer who performed field
tests, recorded visual classifications, and collected samples of the various strata encountered. The
test locations were located in the field using conventional taping procedures with estimated right
angles, and are presumed to be accurate within several feet of the location plotted on the plans.

Soil borings and standard penetration tests (SPTs) were conducted in general accordance with
ASTM D6151 (Standard Practice for Using Hollow-Stem Augers for Geotechnical Exploration and Soil
Sampling) and ASTM D1586 (Standard Test Method for Standard Penetration Test and Split Barrel
Sampling of Soils). The SPT resistance value (N) may be correlated with the engineering behavior
of soils to develop foundation and earthwork recommendations. Unconfined compressive strength
(Qp) values were assessed with a pocket penetrometer within the fine-grained soils and are
correlated with the engineering behavior of soil to develop foundation and earthwork
recommendations in fine-grained soils.

Groundwater level observations were recorded during and at the completion of field operations
prior to backfilling the borings. Seasonal variations, temperature, anthropogenic, seasonality, soil
permeability, and precipitation will influence the actual and observed groundwater levels.
Groundwater elevations derived from sources other than seasonally observed groundwater
monitoring wells may not be representative of true groundwater levels.

2.3.2 Laboratory Testing Program

Physical/Textural Analysis: Each sample was visually classified in general accordance with
ASTM D-2488 (visual-manual procedure). In addition, representative samples of selected strata
encountered were subjected to a laboratory testing program which included moisture content
determinations (ASTM D-2216), particle size distribution (ASTM D-6913), Atterburg Limits
(ASTM D4318), and washed gradation analyses (ASTM D1140) in order to perform
supplementary engineering soil classifications in general accordance with ASTM D-2487. The soil
strata tested were classified by the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) and results of the
laboratory testing are summarized in the following table:
BDG Architects, LLP 4 2521-99-014E
 PHYSICAL/TEXTURAL RESULTS SUMMARY
Natural Liquid Plastic Percent
Sample Depth USCS
Boring Moisture Limit Index Passing
No. (feet) Classification
Content (%) (%) (%) No. 200 (%)
S-2 2-4 24.4 84 44 90.6 MH
B-3
S-6 10-12 33.0 62 20 81.9 MH

The engineering classifications are useful when considered in conjunction with the additional site
data to estimate other properties of the soil types encountered and to predict the soil’s behavior
under construction and service loads.

BDG Architects, LLP 5 2521-99-014E

 3.0 SITE DESCRIPTION

3.1 Location and Description

The subject property is located at 185 Williamson Road in the Town of Mooresville, Iredell
County, North Carolina. The site is further identified as Parcel ID Number 4647355199.000. The
subject site is bound to the north by a residential dwelling with commercial buildings beyond; to
the west by Williamson Road with commercial buildings beyond; to the southwest by an empty lot
with commercial buildings beyond; and to the southeast by a wooded lot with commercial
buildings beyond. The site of the proposed construction is shown on the attached Boring Location
Plan.

3.2 Existing Conditions

Surface Cover: At the time of Dynamic Earth’s investigation, the site was partially wooded and
partially gravel covered. The former residential structure was removed prior to our investigation.
Remnant piles of demolition debris and the resultant excavation were observed within the area of
the subject site.

Topography: Topographic information was not available at the time of this investigation,
however, based on observations made during our subsurface exploration, the site is relatively flat
lying.

Site Drainage: Surface runoff generally appears to follow existing site topography toward inlet
structures located along adjacent roadways. The terminus of the pipes were not determined.

3.3 Proposed Construction

Site development details were provided on a June 15, 2021 Site Fit Plan prepared by Chase Bank
and will include the construction of a Chase Bank with drive-up ATM and associated new
pavement and utilities. The proposed building is expected to occupy a footprint area of 3,293
square feet. Site grading plans were not developed at this time; however, we anticipate that the
proposed site development will be constructed near existing site grades, with only minor cuts and
fills.

The maximum anticipated loads were preliminarily assumed based on similar projects and are
expected to be as follows:

BDG Architects, LLP 6 2521-99-014E

 ➢ wall loads – 2.0 kips per linear foot;
➢ column loads - 60 kips;
➢ floor slab loads – 100 pounds per square foot; and
➢ pavement loads – 60,000 18-kip Equivalent Single Axle Loads (ESAL).

The scope of Dynamic Earth’s investigation and the professional advice contained in this report
were generated based on the project details and loading noted herein. Any revisions or additions
to the design details enumerated in this report should be brought to the attention of Dynamic Earth
for additional evaluation as warranted.

BDG Architects, LLP 7 2521-99-014E

 4.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

4.1 Site Geology

The subject site is located within a region of the Piedmont physiographic province of North
Carolina. Based on a State Geologic Map Sheet prepared by the North Carolina Department of
Environmental Quality, the subject site is mapped within the Charlotte and Milton Belts. This
formation is described as massive to strongly foliated; minor layers of amphibolite and muscovite
schist. Overburden materials include residual soils consisting of clayey soils near the surface (where
soil weathering is more advanced) and underlain by sandy silts and silty sands that are a product
of in-place chemical weathering of the underlying rock.

4.2 Subsurface Soil Profile

Details of the subsurface materials encountered are presented on the Records of Subsurface Exploration
presented in the Appendix of this report. The subsurface soil conditions encountered in the soil
borings consisted of the following generalized strata in order of increasing depth.

Surface Cover: Borings were performed within existing gravel areas and within the area of the
formerly demolished structure. Borings performed within existing gravel areas encountered up to
approximately two inches of gravel at the surface. The remainder of the borings encountered
existing fill material or natural residual soil at the surface (as detailed below).

Existing Fill Material: Beneath the surficial cover, existing fill material was encountered that
generally consisted of clay, sand and gravel. The existing fill material was encountered to depths
ranging between approximately two feet and six feet below the ground surface. Standard
Penetration Test (SPT) N-values ranged between eight blows per foot (bpf) and 33 bpf. Unconfined
Compressive Strength (Qp) pocket penetrometer values of 4.5 ton per square foot (tsf) were
recorded within the fine-grained soils.

Residual Deposits: Either at the surface or beneath the existing fill material, natural residual
deposits were encountered that generally consisted of highly plastic silt (USCS: MH), clay (USCS:
CL) and sand (USCS: SM and SC). The natural residual deposits were encountered to termination
depths ranging between approximately ten feet and 20 feet below the ground surface. SPT N-values
ranged between five bpf and 32 bpf, and averaged 13 bpf; generally indicating a relatively medium
dense condition within the coarse-grained soils. Unconfined Compressive Strength (Qp) pocket
penetrometer values ranged between 1.5 tsf and 4.5 tsf, and averaged three tsf; generally indicating
a relatively stiff consistency within the fine-grained soils.

BDG Architects, LLP 8 2521-99-014E

4.3 Groundwater

Groundwater were not during our investigation. Groundwater levels are expected to fluctuate
seasonally, and following significant periods of precipitation.

BDG Architects, LLP 9 2521-99-014E

 5.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

5.1 General

Existing fill materials were encountered within/near the proposed building footprint that are not
suitable for direct building support without the risk for excessive total and differential settlements.
In addition, on-site soils include highly plastic silts and fine-grained soils with a relatively high risk
of shrink/swell. As such, these materials will need to be overexcavated and replaced with approved
structural fill material. Overexcavation depths will need to extend below the existing fill material
and/or three feet below proposed foundations where highly plastic soils are encountered
(whichever is deeper). Following overexcavation and replacement, the proposed structure may
be supported on a conventional shallow foundation system and ground supported floor slab.

Overexcavation should be performed prior to placing new fill material if site grades are raised.
Furthermore, the proposed building footprint and interior column locations should be located by a
professional surveyor prior to performing overexcavation operations.

Shrink/Swell Potential: The upper portion of the on-site soils contained liquid limits and plastic
limits that are considered to have a relatively high risk of shrink/swell potential. As such, site
grades should provide positive drainage toward inlet structures so that water does not accumulate
or flow towards the proposed structures. Landscape irrigation systems and vegetation planting
adjacent to the proposed structure should be limited as the introduction of water may negatively
impact the underlying extremely moisture sensitive soils and promote shrink/swell related damage.

The recommendations presented herein are sufficient to support the initial design and planning
phase. These recommendations are contingent on the assumption that Dynamic Earth will remain
involved in the final design process and that Dynamic Earth will be engaged to conduct the
necessary construction phase geotechnical testing and inspection to ensure these recommendations
are properly implemented.

5.2 Site Preparation and Earthwork

Surface Cover Stripping: Prior to the start of construction, all utilities should be identified and
secured. Existing structural elements, such as concrete foundations, slabs and remnant basement
walls (if encountered), should be removed entirely from below proposed foundations and slabs and
excavated to at least two feet below pavement subgrades. Remnant structural elements may remain
in-place below these depths beneath pavements provided they do not interfere with future
construction. Any slabs left in-place should be thoroughly fractured to promote vertical drainage

BDG Architects, LLP 10 2521-99-014E

in the presence of a qualified Geotechnical Engineer and should be backfilled with structural fill in
accordance with the recommendations of Section 5.3.

Prior to stripping operations, all utilities should be identified and secured. The surface cover
materials, including, but not limited to, existing asphalt pavement, should be removed from within,
and at least five feet beyond, the limits of the proposed building and new pavement areas as well
as any other area which will require fill placement.

Surface Preparation/Proofrolling: Prior to placing any fill or subbase materials to raise or restore
grades to the desired building pad or pavement subgrade elevations, the existing exposed soils
should be compacted to a firm and unyielding surface with several passes in two perpendicular
directions with a vibratory, smooth drum roller during favorable moisture conditions. The drum
roller should be operated in the static mode or a kneading “sheepsfoot” roller should be used if
fine-grained soils are encountered at the subgrade elevation. The surface then should be proofrolled
with a loaded tandem axle truck in the presence of Dynamic Earth to help identify soft or loose
pockets which may require removal and replacement or further investigation. Dynamic Earth
anticipates at least partial overexcavation if the subgrade is wetted or subjected to repeated
construction traffic. Any fill or backfill should be placed and compacted in accordance with Section
5.3.

Subgrade Protection and Inspection: Every effort should be made to minimize disturbance by
construction traffic and surface runoff, otherwise, exposed subgrade soils will likely become
unsuitable. The on-site soils are considered extremely moisture sensitive. If these materials
become overly wetted, the on-site soils will require increased handling such as discing and
drying during extended periods of favorable weather, partial overexcavation, geogrid
stabilization, and/or chemical stabilization (e.g. lime or portland treatment). Stabilization or
moisture conditions should be completed as directed by the geotechnical engineer and in
compliance with manufacturers specifications and requirements. The subgrades should be sealed
daily, construction traffic be minimized to designated non-structural areas, and following periods
of precipitation, traffic limited on all subgrade areas to minimize deterioration of otherwise suitable
subgrade soils.

Earthwork during Freezing Weather (If Required): When temperatures fall below freezing for
periods of time, the moisture within the soil matrix will freeze. Fine grained soils have a higher
susceptibility to frost than well drained granular soils and could freeze at fast rates. Frost
susceptible soils will often become unstable once they thaw, even if the material is properly placed
and compacted. As such, special construction methods, additional handling and/or construction
sequencing should be planned when weather forecasts predict periods of freezing ambient air
temperatures. Fill and subbase material should not be placed on water, snow, ice, or frozen
soil. Subgrade materials that freeze will need to be removed and replaced with suitable structural

BDG Architects, LLP 11 2521-99-014E

fill material prior to placement of subsequent fill layers, subbase material and/or surficial cover
material as detailed throughout this report. Frozen soils are not suitable for placement as structural
fill material and generally need to be exported from the site, unless construction schedules allow
for stockpiling and drying of these materials during warmer weather. The contractor should be
responsible for including budgetary rates for earthwork during periods of potential freezing weather
and for protection against freezing subgrades.

5.3 Structural Fill and Backfill

Import/On-site Structural Fill Material: Soils placed as structural fill material should consist of
well graded sand or gravel with a maximum particle size of three inches in diameter and less than
15 percent of material passing the number 200 sieve. These materials should be free of
objectionable debris (clay clumps, organic and/or deleterious material, etc.) and within moisture
contents suitable for compaction. Imported structural fill material should consist of lean clay,
sandy lean clay or clayey sands with a plastic index ranging between seven and 20. We should be
notified if imports of blended or mixed soils are proposed so that trial batch testing can be
performed. If encountered, proper blending and/or mixing of highly plastic soils will require
additional testing and evaluation to confirm the suitability for use as structural fill material.

Materials wetted beyond the optimum moisture content; containing oversized rock or debris;
and/or containing increased amounts of objectionable debris will not be suitable for reuse as
structural fill material without special handling. As such, the contractor should be responsible for
importing structural fill material and/or processing on-site soils as required so that these materials
are suitable for structural fill placement.

Cobbles/boulders, excavated rock and/or oversized debris greater than three inches in diameter
will need to be separated from on-site soils to be placed as structural fill. Approved material
between three to 12 inches in diameter may be crushed or individually placed in fill layers deeper
than two feet below proposed subgrade levels. Care must be taken to individually seat any large
particles and to compact soil around large particles with hand operated equipment to minimize the
risk of void formation. The larger material should not be placed near areas of the proposed utility
or planned excavation. Boulders larger than approximately 12 inches are not expected to be
adequate for use as fill or backfill and should be removed from the site or crushed to an adequate
size.

The on-site soils included existing fill material and fine-grained natural soils. Based on the
laboratory testing performed as part of this investigation, the plasticity index of the on-site soils was
greater than 40 and increased moisture contents. As such, reuse of the materials as structural fill
material will require extensive handling and/or moisture conditioning (such as with lime or
cement) to be suitable for reuse as structural fill material. As such, the contractor should include

BDG Architects, LLP 12 2521-99-014E

a unit rate to import low plastic structural fill material. Reuse of these materials will be
contingent upon further evaluation during construction.

Compaction and Placement Requirements: Structural fill and backfill should be placed in
maximum 12 inch loose lifts and compacted to 95 percent of the maximum dry density as
determined by ASTM D 1557 (Modified Proctor). Variations in moisture content may be
acceptable subject to Dynamic Earth’s on site geotechnical engineer’s approval if the contractor is
able to achieve the necessary compaction. Dynamic Earth recommends using a smooth drum
roller or sheepsfoot roller to compact subgrade soils beneath larger areas such as pavements or
slabs. Hand operated vibratory jumping jacks and plate compactors should be used in confined
excavations for foundations or utilities. Fill material compacted with relatively light weight
equipment or in the static mode may require additional passes and/or the material may need to be
placed in thinner, loose lifts.

Structural Fill Testing: Before filling operations begin, representative samples of each proposed
fill material (on-site and imported) should be collected. The samples should be tested to determine
the maximum dry density, optimum moisture content, natural moisture content, gradation and
plasticity of the soil. These tests are needed for quality control during compaction and also to
determine if the fill material is acceptable. The placement of all fill and backfill should be
monitored by Dynamic Earth’s geotechnical engineer or technician to ensure that the specified
material and lift thicknesses are properly installed. A sufficient number of in-place density tests
should be performed during fill placement to ensure that the specified compaction is achieved
throughout the height of the fill or backfill.

5.4 Groundwater Control

Groundwater levels are expected to be deeper than proposed foundation and utility excavations
and the need for extensive or permanent groundwater control is not anticipated for this project.

The contractor should anticipate the need for at least temporary construction phase dewatering of
surface runoff, perched and infiltrating water, especially following wet weather periods. Typically,
such temporary groundwater control can be accomplished with strategically placed sump pumps
either directly or adjacent to the excavation. However, surface water runoff must be controlled and
diverted away from construction areas by grading and limiting the exposure of excavations to
rainfall.

5.5 Foundation Recommendations

Anticipated Bearing Strata: As detailed throughout this report, existing fill material and highly
plastic soils were encountered that are not suitable for foundation support. Therefore, these

BDG Architects, LLP 13 2521-99-014E

materials will need to be overexcavated and replaced below proposed foundations. Overexcavation
depths will need to extend below the existing fill material and/or three feet below proposed
foundations where highly plastic soils are encountered (whichever is deeper).

Shallow Foundation Design Criteria: Following the overexcavation of the existing fill material,
Dynamic Earth recommends supporting the proposed structures on conventional shallow
foundations bearing within compacted structural fill material and/or approved natural soils.
Foundations may be designed to impart a maximum allowable net bearing pressure of 2,000
pounds per square foot (psf). Regardless of loading conditions, proposed foundations should be
sized no less than minimum dimensions of 24 inches for continuous wall footings and 36 inches
for isolated column footings.

Any footings subject to tension loads should be designed so that the maximum toe pressure due to
the combined effect of vertical loads and overturning moment does not exceed the recommended
maximum allowable net bearing pressure recommended above. In addition, positive contact
pressure should be maintained throughout the base of the footings such that no uplift or tension
exists between the base of the footings (vertically along the face of the foundation) should be
neglected.

Lateral resistance should be provided by friction on the base of the footing with a recommended
coefficient of friction against sliding:

➢ Formed concrete on gravel subbase material – 0.40;

➢ Mass concrete on gravel subbase material – 0.50; and
➢ Mass concrete on on-site natural glacial deposits - 0.30.

Inspection/Overexcavation Criteria: The suitability of the bearing soils along and below the
footing bottoms must be verified by Dynamic Earth’s geotechnical engineer prior to placing
concrete, especially to confirm that existing fill materials are removed and new fills are adequately
placed and compacted. Any overexcavation to be restored with structural fill (on-site or imported)
will need to extend at least one foot laterally beyond footing edges for each vertical foot of
overexcavation. The bottom of overexcavations should be compacted with smooth drum rollers,
walk-behind compactors, vibrating plates or plate tampers (“jumping jacks”) to compact locally
disturbed materials and densify underlying natural soil zones. Lean concrete/Controlled low-
strength material (CLSM) or light-weight flowable fill material may be used if lateral
overexcavation or compacting of the bottom of the excavation is not possible.

Settlement: Dynamic Earth estimates post construction settlements of proposed building

foundations to be on the order of one inch if the recommendations outlined in this report are
properly implemented. Differential settlements of building foundations should be less than one-

BDG Architects, LLP 14 2521-99-014E

half inch. Settlement estimates should be confirmed following the development of final site plans
and loading coordinates of the structure.

Minimum Embedment/Frost Coverage: Footings subject to frost action should be placed at least
24 inches below adjacent exterior grades or as required by the local building code to provide
protection from frost penetration. Interior footings not subject to frost action (including during the
period of construction) may be placed at a minimum depth of 18 inches below the slab subgrade.

5.6 Floor Slab

As detailed throughout this report, the existing fill material and upper highly plastic soils are not
suitable for support without the risk of shrink/swell. Overexcavation depths will need to extend
below the existing fill material and/or three feet below proposed foundations where highly
plastic soils are encountered (whichever is deeper). Any areas that become softened or disturbed
as a result of wetting and/or repeated exposure to construction traffic should be removed and
replaced with compacted structural fill. The properly prepared on-site soils are expected to yield a
minimum subgrade modulus (k) of 100 psi/in.

A minimum four-inch layer of stone should be installed below the floor slabs to provide a capillary
break. A vapor barrier beneath the floor slab is recommended. Total and post-construction
settlements of floor slabs installed in accordance with the recommendations outlined in this report
are estimated to be less than one-quarter inch.

5.7 Pavement Design Criteria

General: We expect that approved portions of the on-site soils are preliminarily expected to be
suitable for support of proposed pavements provided that the risk of potential settlement and/or
shrink/swell are acceptable. Due to the existing fill material and highly plastic soils, at least
partial overexcavation and replacement or subgrade stabilization should be anticipated.

Subgrade Stabilization: Portions of the on-site soils have highly plastic and could require chemical
treatment and/or subgrade stabilization. Chemical treatment would be performed within the upper
six inches of the proposed subgrade to decrease the moisture content and increase the structural
support of the fine-grained material. For initial planning purposes, we estimate the subgrade may
be treated with six percent lime (approximately 30 pounds of lime per square yard per six inch
depth). Actual subgrade treatment quantities should be determined by additional laboratory testing
prior to or during the early part of construction. Alternatively, the proposed subgrades may be
overexcavated typically to a depth of two feet and backfilled with a granular fill material and
geotextile fabric (such as a Tensar TX5 or TX7) as directed by the on-site geotechnical engineer.

BDG Architects, LLP 15 2521-99-014E

This pavement design is based on the assumed traffic, loading per Section 3.3. If heavier traffic is
anticipated, such as more extensive truck traffic, Dynamic Engineering should be contacted to
provide a specific heavy-duty pavement section.

Design Criteria: A design California Bearing Ratio (CBR) value of seven has been assigned to the
anticipated properly prepared fill soils for pavement design. This value was correlated with
pertinent soil support values and assumed traffic loads to prepare flexible and rigid pavement
designs per the AASHTO Guide for the Design of Pavement Structures.

Pavement Sections: The recommended flexible pavement section is presented below in tabular
format:

RECOMMENDED FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT SECTION

Layer Material Thickness (Inches)

Surface NCDOT SF-9.5A 1.5

Base NCDOT I-19.0B or S9.5B 2.5

Crushed Aggregate Base Coarse

Subbase 8.0
(NCDOT CABC Type 1 or Type 2)

A rigid concrete pavement should be used to provide suitable support at areas of high traffic or
severe turns (such as loading docks and driveway aprons). The recommended rigid pavement is
presented below in tabular format:

RECOMMENDED RIGID PAVEMENT

Layer Material Thickness (Inches)

Surface 4,000 psi air-entrained concrete 5.0

Base (NCDOT CABC Type 1 or Type 2) 8.0

Additional Design Considerations: The pavement section thickness designs presented in this
report are based on the design parameters detailed herein and are contingent on proper
construction, inspection, and maintenance. The designs are contingent on achieving the minimum
soil support value in the field. To accomplish this requirement, all subgrade soil and supporting
fill or backfill must be placed, prepared, and evaluated as detailed in Sections 5.2 and 5.3 of this
report. Proper drainage must be provided for the pavement structure including appropriate grading
and surface water control, as well as measures to drain water from the subgrade such as bleeder
drains at inlets.

BDG Architects, LLP 16 2521-99-014E

The performance of the pavement also will depend on the quality of materials and workmanship.
Dynamic Earth recommends that North Carolina Department of Transportation (NCDOT)
standards for materials, workmanship, and maintenance be applied to this site. Project
specifications should include verifying that the installed asphaltic concrete material composition is
within tolerance for the specified materials and that the percentage of air voids of the installed
pavement is within specified ranges for the respective materials. All rigid concrete pavements
should be suitably air-entrained, jointed, and reinforced as applicable by state and local codes.

5.8 Retaining Walls and Lateral Earth Pressures

Retaining walls and structures requiring lateral earth pressures were not identified at this time.
Dynamic Earth should be notified if structures requiring lateral earth pressure estimates
subsequently are proposed.

5.9 Seismic and Liquefaction Considerations

The soils are most consistent with a Site Class D defined by the 2015 International Building Code.
Based on the seismic zone and soil profile, liquefaction considerations are not expected to have a
substantial impact on design.

5.10 Temporary Excavations

The natural granular soils encountered during the investigation are consistent with Type C Soil
Conditions as defined by 29 CFR Part 1926 (OSHA) which require a maximum unbraced
excavation angle of 1.5:1 (horizontal:vertical). Actual conditions encountered during construction
should be evaluated by a competent person (as defined by OSHA) to ensure that safe excavation
methods and/or shoring and bracing requirements are implemented.

5.11 Supplemental Post-Investigation Services

Construction Monitoring and Testing: The recommendations presented herein are contingent on
the owner retaining Dynamic Earth to perform inspection, testing and consultation during
construction as described in previous sections of this report. Construction phase evaluation by
means of proofroll inspections, soil probes, static cone penetrometer probes, and/or dynamic
cone penetrometer (DCP) testing should be performed on the foundation subgrade soils in order
to confirm design bearing capacities for the proposed structure. Monitoring and testing should
also be performed to verify that suitable materials are used for controlled fill, and that they are
properly placed and compacted over suitable subgrade soils. Testing of fill placement will also be
critical to limiting differential settlement.

BDG Architects, LLP 17 2521-99-014E

 6.0 GENERAL COMMENTS

Supplemental recommendations may be required upon finalization of construction plans or if

significant changes are made in the characteristics or location of the proposed structure. Dynamic
Earth should be included as a consultant to the design team and should be provided final plans for
review to confirm these criteria apply or to modify recommendations as necessary.

The recommendations presented herein should be utilized by a qualified engineer in preparing the
project plans and specifications. The engineer should consider these recommendations as
minimum physical standards that may be superseded by local and regional building codes and
structural considerations. These recommendations are prepared for the use of the client for the
specific project detailed and should not be used by any third party. These recommendations are
relevant to the design phase and should not be substituted for construction specifications.

The possibility exists that conditions between borings may differ from those at specific boring
locations, and conditions may not be as anticipated by the designers or contractors. In addition,
the construction process may itself alter soil conditions. Therefore, Dynamic Earth’s Geotechnical
Engineers or their representatives should observe and document the construction procedures used
and the conditions encountered, as well as conduct testing and inspection to ensure the design
criteria are met or recommendations to address deviations are implemented.

Dynamic Earth assumes that a qualified contractor will be employed to perform the construction
work, and that the contractor will be required to exercise care to ensure all excavations are
performed in accordance with applicable regulations and good practice. Particular attention should
be paid to avoiding damaging or undermining adjacent properties and maintaining slope stability.

The exploration and analysis of the foundation conditions reported herein are presented to form a
reasonable basis for foundation design. The recommendations submitted for the proposed
construction are based on the available soil information and the preliminary design details
furnished or assumed. Deviations from the noted subsurface conditions encountered during
construction should be brought to the attention of the geotechnical engineer.

The geotechnical engineer warrants that the findings, recommendations, specifications, or professional advice
contained herein have been promulgated after being prepared in accordance with generally accepted professional
engineering practice in the fields of foundation engineering, soil mechanics, and engineering geology. No other
warranties are implied or expressed.

BDG Architects, LLP 18 2521-99-014E

Boring Location Plan
 AD
O
R
S
B-2

AM
LI
IL
W B-3

B-1

B-4

B-7
B-5

B-6

N.T.S.
2521-99-014E
BORING LOCATION PLAN LEGEND:
B-X
MM APPROXIMATE
BDG Architects, LLP LOCATION OF

1
SOIL BORING
Proposed Chase Bank w/ drive-up ATM
185 Williamson Road NOTES: 245 Main Street - Suite 110
Mooresville, Iredell County, NC 1. THIS PLAN IS NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION AND WAS PREPARED TO ILLUSTRATE TEST Chester, NJ 07930
PJG LOCATIONS ONLY AND MAY NOT REFLECT THE MOST CURRENT REVISION OF THE BASE
PLAN. T: 908.879.7095 - F: 908.879.0222
2. THIS PLAN HAS BEEN PREPARED BASED ON AN JUNE 15, 2021 SITE TEST PIT PLAN
8/3/21 0 2521 www.dynamic-earth.com
PREPARED BY CHASE BANK.
Records of Subsurface Exploration
 Boring No : B-1
BOREHOLE LOG
Page 1 of 1

Project: Proposed Chase Bank with Drive-Up ATM Proj. No.: 2521-99-014E
Location: 185 Williamson Road, Town of Mooresville, Iredell County, NC Client: BDG Architects, LLP
Surface Elevation: Not surveyed/Provided Date Started: 08-03-2021 Depth El. Additional Depth El.
Groundwater Data Groundwater
Termination Depth: 20.0 feet Date Completed: 08-03-2021 (ft) (ft) Data (ft) (ft)
Proposed Location: Building Pad Logged by: M. Mickley While Drilling: NE
Drill/Test Method: HSA/SPT Contractor: Bridger At Completion: NE
Hammer Type: Auto Rig Type: CME 55
Sample Information
Blows per 6" Depth Strata DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS
Depth Rec RQD or drill time (ft) Remarks
Number Type N (Classification)
(Feet) (in) % (mm:ss)

Surface Cover 2 inches of gravel surface cover

5 9
Reddish yellow medium to fine sand, and clayey silt, moist, medium
0.0-2.0 S-1 SS 16 -- 14 dense (Fill) Qp = 4.5 tsf
FILL
5 7

Reddish yellow silt, and medium to fine sand, moist, very stiff (MH)
9 10
2.0-4.0 S-2 SS 16 -- 21 Qp = 4.5 tsf
11 13

As above (MH)
6 9
4.0-6.0 S-3 SS 16 -- 19 5 Qp = 4.5 tsf
10 14

As above (MH)
2 5
6.0-8.0 S-4 SS 16 -- 12 Qp = 3.5 tsf
7 7

As above (MH)
2 5
8.0-10.0 S-5 SS 16 -- 10 Qp = 2.0 tsf
5 7
10
As above (MH)
4 5
Residual
10.0-12.0 S-6 SS 14 -- 10 Qp = 2.0 tsf
Deposits
5 7

Reddish yellow and yellow fine sand, and clayey silt, moist, loose
2 3 (SM)

14.0-16.0 S-7 SS 22 -- 7 15
4 5

As above (SM)
1 2
18.0-20.0 S-8 SS 20 -- 6
4 5
20
Boring B-1 was terminated at approximately 20 feet below the ground
surface.
 Boring No : B-2
BOREHOLE LOG
Page 1 of 1

Project: Proposed Chase Bank with Drive-Up ATM Proj. No.: 2521-99-014E
Location: 185 Williamson Road, Town of Mooresville, Iredell County, NC Client: BDG Architects, LLP
Surface Elevation: Not surveyed/Provided Date Started: 08-03-2021 Depth El. Additional Depth El.
Groundwater Data Groundwater
Termination Depth: 20.0 feet Date Completed: 08-03-2021 (ft) (ft) Data (ft) (ft)
Proposed Location: Building Pad Logged by: M. Mickley While Drilling: NE
Drill/Test Method: HSA/SPT Contractor: Bridger At Completion: NE
Hammer Type: Auto Rig Type: CME 55
Sample Information
Blows per 6" Depth Strata DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS
Depth Rec RQD or drill time (ft) Remarks
Number Type N (Classification)
(Feet) (in) % (mm:ss)

Surface Cover 2 inches of gravel surface cover

9 8
Reddish yellow silt, and medium to fine sand, moist, stiff (MH)
0.0-2.0 S-1 SS 14 -- 15 Qp = 4.5 tsf
7 8

As above (MH)
10 15
2.0-4.0 S-2 SS 14 -- 32 Qp = 4.5 tsf
17 20

As above (MH)
5 13
4.0-6.0 S-3 SS 14 -- 28 5 Qp = 4.5 tsf
15 20

As above, stiff (MH)

5 5
6.0-8.0 S-4 SS 20 -- 13 Qp = 4.0 tsf
8 9

As above (MH)
4 5
8.0-10.0 S-5 SS 10 -- 13 Qp = 2.5 tsf
8 9
10 Residual Reddish brown fine sand, and silt, moist, medium dense (SM)
3 5 Deposits

10.0-12.0 S-6 SS 12 -- 11
6 6

As above (SM)
4 6
14.0-16.0 S-7 SS 12 -- 13 15
7 8

Reddish yellow and yellow clay, and medium to fine sand, moist,
2 3 medium stiff (CL)

18.0-20.0 S-8 SS 22 -- 7 Qp = 2.5 tsf

4 5
20
Boring B-2 was terminated at approximately 20 feet below the ground
surface.
 Boring No : B-3
BOREHOLE LOG
Page 1 of 1

Project: Proposed Chase Bank with Drive-Up ATM Proj. No.: 2521-99-014E
Location: 185 Williamson Road, Town of Mooresville, Iredell County, NC Client: BDG Architects, LLP
Surface Elevation: Not surveyed/Provided Date Started: 08-03-2021 Depth El. Additional Depth El.
Groundwater Data Groundwater
Termination Depth: 20.0 feet Date Completed: 08-03-2021 (ft) (ft) Data (ft) (ft)
Proposed Location: Building Pad Logged by: M. Mickley While Drilling: NE
Drill/Test Method: HSA/SPT Contractor: Bridger At Completion: NE
Hammer Type: Auto Rig Type: CME 55
Sample Information
Blows per 6" Depth Strata DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS
Depth Rec RQD or drill time (ft) Remarks
Number Type N (Classification)
(Feet) (in) % (mm:ss)

Surface Cover 2 inches of gravel surface cover

3 3
Reddish yellow silt, trace fine sand, moist, medium stiff (MH)
0.0-2.0 S-1 SS 16 -- 6 Qp = 2.5 tsf
3 5

As above stiff (MH)

8 7
2.0-4.0 S-2 SS 20 -- 15 Qp = 3.5 tsf
8 8

As above, stiff (MH)

5 6
4.0-6.0 S-3 SS 24 -- 13 5 Qp = 4.5 tsf
7 12

As above, stiff (MH)

3 6
6.0-8.0 S-4 SS 22 -- 13 Qp = 3.5 tsf
7 10

As above, stiff (MH)

2 4
8.0-10.0 S-5 SS 12 -- 10 Qp = 3.0 tsf
6 7
10 Residual As above, little medium to fine sand, stiff (MH)
3 5 Deposits

10.0-12.0 S-6 SS 24 -- 10 Qp = 2.5 tsf

5 7

As above, medium stiff (MH)

2 3
14.0-16.0 S-7 SS 24 -- 8 15 Qp = 2.5 tsf
5 6

As above, medium stiff (MH)

2 2
18.0-20.0 S-8 SS 24 -- 5 Qp = 1.5 tsf
3 5
20
Boring B-3 was terminated at approximately 20 feet below the ground
surface.
 Boring No : B-4
BOREHOLE LOG
Page 1 of 1

Project: Proposed Chase Bank with Drive-Up ATM Proj. No.: 2521-99-014E
Location: 185 Williamson Road, Town of Mooresville, Iredell County, NC Client: BDG Architects, LLP
Surface Elevation: Not surveyed/Provided Date Started: 08-03-2021 Depth El. Additional Depth El.
Groundwater Data Groundwater
Termination Depth: 20.0 feet Date Completed: 08-03-2021 (ft) (ft) Data (ft) (ft)
Proposed Location: Building Pad Logged by: M. Mickley While Drilling: NE
Drill/Test Method: HSA/SPT Contractor: Bridger At Completion: NE
Hammer Type: Auto Rig Type: CME 55
Sample Information
Blows per 6" Depth Strata DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS
Depth Rec RQD or drill time (ft) Remarks
Number Type N (Classification)
(Feet) (in) % (mm:ss)

Surface Cover 2 inches of gravel surface cover

3 5
Reddish yellow clayey silt, and medium to fine sand, moist (Fill)
0.0-2.0 S-1 SS 12 -- 12 Qp = 4.5 tsf
7 5

As above (Fill)
6 9
2.0-4.0 S-2 SS 18 -- 21 Qp = 4.5 tsf
FILL
12 16

Brown coarse to fine sand, and coarse to fine gravel, some clayey silt,
4 7 trace debris (concrete and fine roots), moist, medium dense (Fill)

4.0-6.0 S-3 SS 10 -- 18 5
11 10

Reddish yellow silt, and medium to fine sand, moist, stiff (MH)
4 7
6.0-8.0 S-4 SS 22 -- 18 Qp = 4.0 tsf
11 10

Reddish yellow and yellow fine sand, and silt, moist, medium dense
2 5 (SM)

8.0-10.0 S-5 SS 12 -- 11
6 7
10
As above (SM)
3 6
10.0-12.0 S-6 SS 20 -- 12
6 7

Residual
Deposits

Yellow medium to fine sand and silty clay, moist, medium stiff (SC)
2 5
14.0-16.0 S-7 SS 20 -- 10 15
5 5

As above, medium stiff (SC)

2 2
18.0-20.0 S-8 SS 20 -- 5 Qp = 2.0 tsf
3 4
20
Boring B-4 was terminated at approximately 20 feet below the ground
surface.
 Boring No : B-5
BOREHOLE LOG
Page 1 of 1

Project: Proposed Chase Bank with Drive-Up ATM Proj. No.: 2521-99-014E
Location: 185 Williamson Road, Town of Mooresville, Iredell County, NC Client: BDG Architects, LLP
Surface Elevation: Not surveyed/Provided Date Started: 08-03-2021 Depth El. Additional Depth El.
Groundwater Data Groundwater
Termination Depth: 10.0 feet Date Completed: 08-03-2021 (ft) (ft) Data (ft) (ft)
Proposed Location: Pavement Area Logged by: M. Mickley While Drilling: NE
Drill/Test Method: HSA/SPT Contractor: Bridger At Completion: NE
Hammer Type: Auto Rig Type: CME 55
Sample Information
Blows per 6" Depth Strata DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS
Depth Rec RQD or drill time (ft) Remarks
Number Type N (Classification)
(Feet) (in) % (mm:ss)

Reddish yellow coarse to fine sand, and clay, trace fine roots, moist Surface cover
8 5 (Fill) stripped

0.0-2.0 S-1 SS 12 -- 11
6 5

Reddish yellow clay, and coarse to fine sand, moist (Fill)

3 7
2.0-4.0 S-2 SS 14 -- 16 FILL
9 11

Brown coarse to fine sand, and coarse to fine gravel, some clay,
5 8 moist, medium dense (Fill)

4.0-6.0 S-3 SS 12 -- 21 5 Qp = 4.5 tsf

13 11

Reddish yellow medium to fine sand, and silt, moist, medium stiff (SM)
6 8
6.0-8.0 S-4 SS 24 -- 18
10 10
Residual
Deposits As above (SM)
2 3
8.0-10.0 S-5 SS 12 -- 9 Qp = 4.0 tsf
6 7
10
Boring B-5 was terminated at approximately 10 feet below the ground
surface.

15

20
 Boring No : B-6
BOREHOLE LOG
Page 1 of 1

Project: Proposed Chase Bank with Drive-Up ATM Proj. No.: 2521-99-014E
Location: 185 Williamson Road, Town of Mooresville, Iredell County, NC Client: BDG Architects, LLP
Surface Elevation: Not surveyed/Provided Date Started: 08-03-2021 Depth El. Additional Depth El.
Groundwater Data Groundwater
Termination Depth: 10.0 feet Date Completed: 08-03-2021 (ft) (ft) Data (ft) (ft)
Proposed Location: Pavement Area Logged by: M. Mickley While Drilling: NE
Drill/Test Method: HSA/SPT Contractor: Bridger At Completion: NE
Hammer Type: Auto Rig Type: CME 55
Sample Information
Blows per 6" Depth Strata DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS
Depth Rec RQD or drill time (ft) Remarks
Number Type N (Classification)
(Feet) (in) % (mm:ss)

Reddish yellow medium to fine sand, and clayey silt, trace debris Surface cover
6 4 (wood), moist, stiff (FILL) stripped

0.0-2.0 S-1 SS 12 -- 8
4 5

As above, very stiff (FILL)

6 7
2.0-4.0 S-2 SS 16 -- 19 FILL
12 13

As above, little fine gravel, trace debris (leaves, wood, concrete)

6 11 (FILL)

4.0-6.0 S-3 SS 12 -- 26 5
15 17

Reddish yellow medium to fine sand, and silt, moist, stiff (SM)
4 5
6.0-8.0 S-4 SS 20 -- 10
5 8
Residual
Deposits As above (SM)
3 5
8.0-10.0 S-5 SS 10 -- 11
6 8
10
Boring B-6 was terminated at approximately 10 feet below the ground
surface.

15

20
 Boring No : B-7
BOREHOLE LOG
Page 1 of 1

Project: Proposed Chase Bank with Drive-Up ATM Proj. No.: 2521-99-014E
Location: 185 Williamson Road, Town of Mooresville, Iredell County, NC Client: BDG Architects, LLP
Surface Elevation: Not surveyed/Provided Date Started: 08-03-2021 Depth El. Additional Depth El.
Groundwater Data Groundwater
Termination Depth: 10.0 feet Date Completed: 08-03-2021 (ft) (ft) Data (ft) (ft)
Proposed Location: Pavement Area Logged by: M. Mickley While Drilling: NE
Drill/Test Method: HSA/SPT Contractor: Bridger At Completion: NE
Hammer Type: Auto Rig Type: CME 55
Sample Information
Blows per 6" Depth Strata DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS
Depth Rec RQD or drill time (ft) Remarks
Number Type N (Classification)
(Feet) (in) % (mm:ss)

Reddish yellow clayey silt, some medium to fine sand, moist, stiff (MH) Surface cover
5 5 stripped

0.0-2.0 S-1 SS 16 -- 10
Qp = 4.5 tsf
5 7

As above, very stiff (MH)

10 15
2.0-4.0 S-2 SS 22 -- 33 Qp = 4.5 tsf
18 19

As above, very stiff (MH)

9 12
Residual
4.0-6.0 S-3 SS 20 -- 26 5 Qp = 4.5 tsf
Deposits
14 16

Reddish yellow clay, some medium to fine sand, moist, stiff (CL)
4 6
6.0-8.0 S-4 SS 24 -- 13 Qp = 4 tsf
7 11

As above (CL)
4 5
8.0-10.0 S-5 SS 12 -- 11 Qp = 3.0 tsf
6 9
10
Boring B-6 was terminated at approximately 10 feet below the ground
surface.

15

20
Laboratory Test Results
 Particle Size Distribution Report
U.S. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES U.S. STANDARD SIEVE NUMBERS HYDROMETER
1½ in. ¾ in. 3/8 in. #140
6 in. 3 in. 2 in. 1 in. ½ in. #4 #10 #20 #30 #40 #60 #100 #200
100

90

80

70
PERCENT FINER

60

50

40

30

20

10

0
100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.
% Gravel % Sand % Fines
% +3"
Coarse Fine Coarse Medium Fine Silt Clay
90.6
81.9

Source Sample # Depth/Elev. Date Sampled USCS Material Description NM % LL PL

B-3 S-2 2-4 8/3/21 MH Reddish yellow silt, trace fine sand 24.4 84 40
B-3 S-6 10-12 8/3/21 MH Reddish yellow silt, little medium to fine sand 33.0 62 42

Client BDG Architects, LLP

Project Proposed Chase Bank with Drive-up ATM
185 Williamson Road, Mooresville, NC
Project No. 2521-99-014E Figure 1
 LIQUID AND PLASTIC LIMITS TEST REPORT
60
Dashed line indicates the approximate
upper limit boundary for natural soils

50

H
O
or
CH
40
PLASTICITY INDEX

30
L
O

20
or
CL

10

CL-ML
ML or OL MH or OH
4
7

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
LIQUID LIMIT

SOIL DATA
NATURAL
SAMPLE DEPTH WATER PLASTIC LIQUID PLASTICITY
SYMBOL SOURCE USCS
NO. CONTENT LIMIT LIMIT INDEX
(%) (%) (%) (%)
B-3 S-2 2-4 24.4 40 84 44 MH
B-3 S-6 10-12 33.0 42 62 20 MH

Client: BDG Architects, LLP

Project: Proposed Chase Bank with Drive-up ATM
185 Williamson Road, Mooresville, NC
Project No.: 2521-99-014E Figure 2
Geotechnical Terms and Symbols
 245 Main Street; Suite 110
Chester, NJ 07930
908-879-7095: Fax 908-879-0222

GEOTECHNICAL TERMS AND SYMBOLS

SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION

The Unified Soil Classification System is used to identify the soil unless otherwise noted.

SOIL PROPERTY SYMBOLS

N: Standard Penetration Value: Blows per ft. or a 140 lb. hammer falling 30” on a 2” O.D. split-spoon.
Qu: Unconfined compressive strength, TSF.
Qp: Penetrometer value, unconfined compressive strength, TSF.
Mc: Moisture content, %
LL: Liquid limit, %
PI: Plasiticity index, %
įd: Natural dry density, PCF.
ź: Apparent groundwater level at time noted after completion of boring.
=

DRILLING AND SAMPLING SYMBOLS

NE: Not Encountered (Groundwater was not encountered)

SS: Split-Spoon – 1Ǫ” I.D., 2” O.D., except where noted
ST: Shelby Tube – 3” O.D., except where noted
AU: Auger Sample
OB: Diamond Bit
CB: Carbide Bit
WS: Washed Sample

RELATIVE DENSITY AND CONSISTENCY CLASSIFICATION

Term (Non-Cohesive Soils) Standard Penetration Resistance

Very Loose 0-4

Loose 4-10
Medium Dense 10-30
Dense 30-50
Very Dense Over 50

Term (Cohesive Soils) Qu (TSF)

Very Soft 0-0.25

Soft 0.25-0.50
Firm (Medium) 0.50-1.00
Stiff 1.00-2.00
Very Stiff 2.00-4.00
Hard 4.00 +

PARTICLE SIZE

Boulders 8 in. + Coarse Sand 5mm-0.6mm Silt 0.074mm-0.005mm

Cobbles 8 in. – 3 in. Medium Sand 0.6mm-0.2mm Clay - 0.005mm
Gravel 3 in. – 5mm Fine Sand 0.2mm – 0.074mm
USCS Standard Classification System
 CHASE
SECTION 003160 – Engineering Report

A Geotechnical report has been performed by Dynamic Earth, dated August 17, 2021, and is attached to
the project manual.

Report of Geotechnical Investigation

Proposed Chase Bank w/ Drive up ATM
Mooresville, North Carolina
Project No. 2521-99-014E

Prepared for:
BDG Architects
Tampa FL

003160-1
 CHASE
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION FORM

This section will be governed the provisions stated in the General Contractor’s Master Service Agreement
(MSA) between Project Management Supplier and General Contractor.

END OF SECTION

006313-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 006325 - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

This section will be governed the provisions stated in the General Contractor’s Master Service Agreement
(MSA) between Project Management Supplier and General Contractor.

END OF SECTION

006325-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 013324 – STRUCTURAL SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Structural submittals include shop drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance

charts, nomenclature charts, samples, brochures and other data prepared by the Contractor or
any subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, fabricator, or distributor and which illustrate some
portion of the Project.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 1 Sections

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Submittals shall be accompanied by a transmittal letter with the following information:

1. Project name.
2. Contractor's name.
3. Date submitted.
4. Description of items submitted; identify Work and product by Specification Section.
5. Number of drawings and other pertinent data.

B. Provide blank space on each submittal for the Architect/Structural Engineer's review stamp.

C. Submit four prints of each shop drawing and four copies of other structural submittals.

D. Contractor shall direct specific attention on the submittal to any deviation from the Construction
Documents.

1.4 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY

A. Contractor shall make all submittals in advance of installation or construction to allow the
Architect/Structural Engineer sufficient time for review.

B. Contractor shall review all submittals and shall stamp and sign each sheet of shop drawings and
product data and sign each sample to certify compliance with requirements of Construction
Documents. SUBMITTALS RECEIVED WITHOUT THE CONTRACTOR'S STAMP OF REVIEW
WILL BE RETURNED TO THE CONTRACTOR FOR REVIEW AND RESUBMITTAL.

C. Contractor shall understand that the submittal of the required documents does not constitute
compliance with the requirements of the Construction Documents; only submittals reviewed by
the Architect/Structural Engineer constitute compliance.

D. It is the Contractor's responsibility to furnish equipment, materials, and labor for the Project which
meets the requirements of the codes and authorities quoted as well as the Construction
Documents. Proprietary items specified herein only establish a minimum functional and aesthetic
standard and it is incumbent upon the Contractor to ascertain conformance of these proprietary
items or any proposed substitution with the codes and authorities.

013324 -1
 CHASE
SECTION 013324 – STRUCTURAL SUBMITTALS

E. By reviewing, approving and submitting shop drawings, product data, or samples, Contractor
thereby represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction
criteria, materials, member sizes catalog numbers, and similar data and that he has checked and
coordinated shop drawings with the requirements of the Project and of the Construction
Documents.

F. Work requiring shop drawings, whether called for by the Construction Documents or requested by
the Contractor, shall not commence until the Architect/Structural Engineer has reviewed the
submission. Work may commence if the Contractor verifies the accuracy of the
Architect/Structural Engineer's corrections and notations and complies with them without
exception and without requesting change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.

1.5 ARCHITECT / STRUCTURAL ENGINEER REVIEW

A. Architect/Structural Engineer will review submittals with reasonable promptness.

B. Architect/Structural Engineer's review or corrections refer only to the general arrangement and
conformance of the subject of the submittals with the design concept of the Project and with the
information given in the Construction Documents. Under no conditions should the Contractor
consider the review to include the dimensions, quantities, and details of the items nor the
approval of an assembly in which the item functions.

C. Architect/Structural Engineer's review shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors
or omissions in the submittals.

D. Architect/Structural Engineer's review of submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of

responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Construction Documents unless the
Contractor has directed specific attention to the deviation at the time of submission and the
Architect/Structural Engineer has given written approval to the specific deviation.

E. Architect/Structural Engineer's review of submittals shall not be construed as authorizing any

change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with Project name and number;
identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail of Construction
Documents.

B. Reproduction of Structural Drawings for shop drawings is not permitted. Electronic drawing files
will not be provided to the Contractor.

C. Identify field dimensions; show relationship to adjacent or critical features of Work or products.

D. A copy of the marked structural shop drawings with the Architect/Structural Engineer's review
stamp is to be maintained at the job site.

1.7 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit only pages that are pertinent; mark each copy of standard printed data to identify
pertinent products, referenced to Specification Section and Article number. Show reference
standards, performance characteristics, and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls;
component parts; finishes; dimensions; and required clearances.

013324 -2
 CHASE
SECTION 013324 – STRUCTURAL SUBMITTALS

B. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard

information and to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. Delete information that
is not applicable.

C. Provide manufacturer's preparation, assembly, and installation instructions.

1.8 SAMPLES

A. Submit full range of manufacturer's standard finishes, except where more restrictive requirements
are specified, indicating colors, textures, and patterns.

B. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of products, including parts and

attachments as required by Architect/Structural Engineer.

C. Approved samples that are of proper size may be incorporated in Work.

D. Label each sample with identification.

E. Field Finishes: Provide full samples at Project, at location acceptable to Architect/Structural

Engineer, as required by individual Specification Section. Install each sample complete and
finished. Acceptable finishes in place may be retained in completed Work.

1.9 RESUBMITTALS

A. When submittals are returned to the Contractor with the Architect/Structural Engineer's
corrections the Contractor shall make the required corrections. Upon request, resubmit one
corrected set.

B. Contractor shall direct specific attention on the resubmittal to all revisions including those
requested by the Architect/Structural Engineer on previous submission.

1.10 DISTRIBUTION

A. Distribute reproductions of shop drawings, copies of product data, and samples which bear the
Architect/Structural Engineer's review stamp to job site file, Record Documents file,
subcontractors, suppliers, other affected contractors, and other entities requiring information.

B. Work shall be in accordance with and performed from the reviewed drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

013324 -3
 CHASE
SECTION 013528 – SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PREFACE

A. Nonstructural components that are permanently installed in or on the building shall be and
installed to resist vertical loads and lateral forces stated in the IBC 2018/ ASCE 7-16 Chapter 13.

B. Project is located on a site with the following Seismicity:

Structural Risk Category = II IBC 2018, Table 1604.5, page 336

Seismic Importance Factor,
1.00 ASCE 7-16 Table 1.5-2, page 5
I=
ASCE 7-16 Table 20.3-1 page 204, or as provided
Soil Site Class = D
by Geotechnical Eng.
ASCE 7-16 Figures 22-1 to 22-6, or USGS Seismic
Spectral Acceleration, SS = 0.278
Maps
ASCE 7-16 Figures 22-2 to 22-6, or USGS Seismic
Spectral Acceleration, S1 = 0.106
Maps
SDS = 0.292 SDS = 2*SMS/3, IBC 2018 Eqn. 16-39, page 367
SD1 = 0.169 SD1 = 2*SM1/3, IBC 2018 Eqn. 16-40, page 367
Seismic Design Category = C

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Division 01, Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures.

1.3 EQUIPMENT AND NON-STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

A. Equipment and non-structural elements shall comply with the requirements of the referenced
codes above. Suppliers of equipment, assemblies, and systems shall be responsible for proper
design and for furnishing adequate proof of proper design in accordance with the applicable
building codes.

B. Pieces of equipment are to be constructed so that seismic bracing items are concealed, as may
be the case with transformers, vacuum systems, pumps, HVAC units and other mechanical
equipment, and shall be installed, braced and anchored to meet the requirements of the
applicable building codes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

013528 -1
 CHASE
SECTION 013564 - GREEN REQUIREMENT SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

PART 2 - REQUIREMENT SUMMARY

2.1 SUSTAINABLE SITES:
A. Construction Activity Pollution Prevention.
1. During Construction:
a. Preventive measures and remediation are specified in Section 015713.
b. Dust control and basic surface drainage are specified in Section 017000.
2. Permanent erosion and sedimentation prevention features are to be provided:
a. Turf (for lawns) is specified on drawings.
b. Plants are specified on drawings.
2.2 WATER EFFICIENCY:
A. Water Efficient Landscaping: Reduce by 50%.
1. The landscaping does not require irrigation and no permanent irrigation system is provided.
2. Plants that do not require any irrigation are specified on drawings.
B. Water Use Reduction, 20% Reduction:
1. Appropriate high efficiency fixtures are scheduled on the drawings
2.3 ENERGY & ATMOSPHERE:
A. Minimum Energy Performance. The building envelope, HVAC, lighting, etc., have been designed to
meet ASHRAE 90.1-2004.
B. Fundamental Refrigerant Management: New equipment: No CFC-based refrigerants are used in any
equipment. Non-CFC refrigerants are specified in the following sections:
C. Optimize Energy Performance.
1. Whole building energy simulation shows that the design reduces energy cost compared to the
specified standard by 14 percent.
2. The overall design solution is implemented in the drawings and many sections of the
specifications.
D. Enhanced Refrigerant Management.
1. HVAC: No HCFC-based refrigerants are used in any new equipment.
2. Fire Suppression: Fire extinguishers specified in Section 104415 use agents other than Halon.
2.4 MATERIALS & RESOURCES:
A. Storage & Collection of Recyclables: Bins, waste cans, can crushers, etc., are considered furnishings
and are therefore not part of the construction contract.
B. Recycled Content: 10% (post-consumer plus 1/2 pre-consumer).
1. The definition of recycled content for the purposes of the contract documents is included in
Section 016000; qualifying products do not include plumbing, HVAC, electrical, or
communications equipment, piping, conduit, ductwork, or wiring.
2.5 INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY:
A. Minimum IAQ Performance.
1. The building ventilation has been designed to meet the minimum requirements of ASHRAE
62.1-2004.
2. The overall design solution is implemented in the drawings and many sections of the
specifications.
B. Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control.
1. Owner intends to prohibit smoking in the building.
2. Exterior smoking areas are located at least 25 feet away from entries, outdoor air intakes,
and operable windows.

013564-1 2/13/09
 CHASE
SECTION 013564 - GREEN REQUIREMENT SUMMARY

C. Low-Emitting Materials, consists of 4 parts:

1. Low-Emitting Materials, Adhesives & Sealants.
a. Overall requirements for joint sealants, including duct sealers, with VOC content
meeting the Green requirements, are specified in Section 016000.
b. Architectural joint sealants with maximum VOC content meeting the Green requirements
are specified in Section 079200.
c. Overall requirements for adhesives, with VOC content meeting the Green requirements,
are specified in Section 016000.
2. Low-Emitting Materials, Paints & Coatings.
a. Paints and stains are specified in Section 099000.
1) Water-based paints or solvent-based paints with VOC content meeting the Green
requirements are used for all interior opaque applications.
3. Low-Emitting Materials, Carpet Systems.
a. Carpet tile that complies with requirements of CRI Green Label Plus program is
specified in Section 096813.
b. Adhesives used in connection with carpet systems comply with VOC limit of 50 g/L.
4. Low-Emitting Materials, Composite Wood & Agrifiber Products.
a. The products covered by this requirement include ONLY particleboard, plywood,
medium density fiberboard (MDF), wheatboard, strawboard, panel substrates, door
cores, and laminating adhesives used on-site or in the shop.
b. A project-wide prohibition on use of these products if they contain added urea-
formaldehyde is specified in Section 016000.
D. Thermal Comfort: Design.
1. Thermal comfort, meeting the Green requirements, is to be provided, with ventilation by
mechanical means only.
2. The overall design solution is implemented in the drawings and many sections of the
specifications.
E. Daylight & Views
1. Daylighting, to meet the Green requirements, is to be provided.
2. The overall design solution is implemented in the drawings with light-admitting materials
specified in many sections of the specifications, including:
a. Glazed aluminum storefront specified in Section 084113.
b. Glazed aluminum curtain walls specified in Section 084400.
c. Fixed glazing specified in Section 088000.
d. Interior automatic shading devices for glare control specified in Section 122413.
F. Daylight & Views
1. Views, meeting the Green requirements, are to be provided.
2. The overall design solution is implemented in the drawings with vision glazing specified in
many sections of the specifications, including:
a. Glazed aluminum storefront specified in Section 084113.
b. Glazed aluminum curtain walls specified in Section 084400.
c. Fixed glazing specified in Section 088000.

END OF SECTION

013564-2 2/13/09
 CHASE
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY ASSURANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing and inspection services.
B. Manufacturers' field services.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 003153 – Owner Paid Testing and Inspection Services
B. Section 007200 – General Conditions: Inspections and approvals required by public authorities
C. Section 013000 – Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.
D. Section 016000 – Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use
in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2006a.
B. ASTM D 740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing
and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2004a.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Testing Agency: Prior to starting of work; Contractor shall communicate with Owner's Testing
Agency. Contact: [Testing Service Corporation; Tom Morris (630) 784-4075; email:
tmorris@tsccorp.com.]
B. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to
Contractor. Include:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name of inspector.
4. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
5. Identification of product and specifications section.
6. Location in the Project.
7. Type of test/inspection.
8. Date of test/inspection.
9. Results of test/inspection.
10. Conformance with Contract Documents.
11. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results.
C. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the
manufacturer and Contractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data.
1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting
reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable
to Architect.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the
Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention,
and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES
A. [Testing Services Corporation (TSC)] has been employed by the Owner to perform specified testing
and inspection. General Contractor shall contact [TSC] for assigned technician name and contact
information. Contractor shall be responsible for notifying testing agency of needed inspection/ testing
site visits.

014000-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with
requirements of Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required.
B. Testing Agency Duties:
1. Provide qualified personnel at site.
2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.
3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
4. Notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or
products.
5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect.
6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.
C. Testing/Inspection Agency Construction Testing/ Inspection Schedule includes site visits/ testing for
Soil, Paving, Concrete, Steel, and Masonry as follows:
1. Site grading: Minimum 2 site visits.
2. Soil bearing capacity and concrete for footings: Minimum 3 site visits.
3. Concrete for trench, cap, and foundation walls: Minimum one site visit.
4. Concrete for floor slab: Minimum one site visit.
5. Mortar for masonry: Minimum one site visit.
6. Structural steel: Minimum 2 site visits.
7. Parking/ driveway subgrade proof roll: Minimum one site visit.
8. Concrete for aprons, curbs, and walks: Minimum 2 site visits.
9. Concrete for drive thru islands: Minimum 2 site visits.
10. Bituminous paving: Minimum 2 site visits.
D. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:
Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
E. Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used
that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.
3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.
b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected.
c. To facilitate tests/inspections.
d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
4. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples,
tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the
same agency on instructions by Architect.
G. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by
Contractor.
3.2 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces
and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment
as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

014000-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
3.3 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.
B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an
appropriate remedy or adjust payment.

END OF SECTION

014000-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 014524 – STRUCTURAL SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Section summarizes the responsibility of the Contractor and the Special Inspector in the
performance of the special inspections required in the Construction Documents.

B. Neither the observation of the Architect/Structural Engineer in the administration of the contract,
nor tests/inspections by the Special Inspector, nor approvals by persons other than the
Architect/Structural Engineer shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the Work
in accordance with the Construction Documents.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 013324 - Structural Submittals.

B. Section 014500 - Quality Control.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or
Testing.

B. American Council of Independent Laboratories – Recommended Requirements for Independent

Laboratories Qualifications.

1.4 SELECTION AND PAYMENT

A. Owner will employ and pay for the structural testing/inspection services that are required by the
Construction Documents.

B. Contractor shall pay for any additional structural testing/inspection required for Work or materials
not complying with Construction Documents due to negligence or nonconformance.

C. Contractor shall pay for any additional structural testing/inspection required for his convenience.

1.5 STRUCTURAL TESTING/INSPECTION REQUIREMENT SUMMARY

A. Refer to the Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the Structural Drawings for the required
tests/inspections.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

Not Used.

014524-1
 CHASE
SECTION 014524 – STRUCTURAL SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 STRUCTURAL PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. A structural preconstruction meeting may be conducted at the construction site by the Structural
Engineer to discuss quality issues. The parties involved may be the Architect, Contractor, Special
Inspector, appropriate subcontractors, suppliers, and detailers.

3.2 SPECIAL INSPECTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Cooperate with the Contractor and provide timely service.

B. Upon arriving at the construction site, sign in and notify the Contractor of presence.

C. Select the representative samples that are to be tested/inspected.

D. Perform tests/inspections as outlined in Construction Documents, the applicable codes, and as

directed by the Structural Engineer.

E. Report results of tests/inspections in accordance with the Construction Documents and the
Building Code. Work and materials not complying with Construction Documents shall be
immediately reported to the Contractor and Structural Engineer.

F. Leave copies of field notes with the Contractor prior to leaving the construction site. Field notes
shall include the message given to the Contractor, date, time of message, name of Contractor's
representative informed, type and location of Work or materials tested/inspected, whether the
work or materials complies with Construction Documents and name of the Structural
Testing/Inspection Agency's representative.

G. Report and distribute results of tests/inspections promptly in the form of written reports as
directed by the Structural Engineer.

H. Special Inspector shall not alter requirements of Construction Documents, approve or reject any
portion of the Work, or perform duties of the Contractor.

I. Submit written confirmation at end of construction that, to the best of their knowledge, the
structural Work conforms to the Construction Documents.

3.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide copy of Construction Documents to the Special Inspector.

B. Arrange the preconstruction meeting to discuss quality issues.

C. Notify the Special Inspector sufficiently in advance of operations to allow assignment of personnel
and scheduling of tests.

D. Cooperate with Special Inspector and provide access to Work.

E. Provide samples of materials to be tested in required quantities.

F. Furnish copies of mill test reports when requested.

014524-2
 CHASE
SECTION 014524 – STRUCTURAL SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

G. Provide storage space for Special Inspector’s exclusive use, such as for storing and curing
concrete testing samples.

H. Provide labor to assist the Special Inspector in performing tests/inspections.

3.4 OPTIONS

A. If the Structural Testing/Inspection Agency is located at such a distance from the Project that
travel expenses will be a consideration, or if the amount of sampling performed is minor, and by
mutual agreement of the Architect/Structural Engineer and Contractor, the Contractor may be
requested to take samples and forward them to the Structural Testing/Inspection Agency for
testing/inspection.

END OF SECTION

014524-3
 CHASE
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Temporary utilities.
B. Temporary telecommunications services.
C. Temporary telephone service.
D. Temporary sanitary facilities.
E. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.
F. Waste removal facilities and services.
G. Project identification sign.
1.2 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required
for construction purposes.
B. New permanent facilities may be used.
1.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project
mobilization.
B. Telecommunications services shall include:
1.4 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.
B. New permanent facilities may be used during construction operations.
C. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
D. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition as originally found.
1.5 FENCING
A. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular gates with locks.
1.6 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working
conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required
ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of
unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.
1.7 WASTE REMOVAL
A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly
condition.
B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.
C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-
combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless
otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.
1.8 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. Erect on site at location indicated.
B. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.

015000-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

1.9 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS

A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials, prior to Substantial Completion
inspection.
B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated.
C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

015000-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 015713 - TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities.
B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due
to construction activities.
C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures.
D. Performance bond.
E. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance by
Contractor.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary: Requirements relating to erosion and sedimentation control.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with all requirements of U.S. Environmental Protection Agency for erosion and sedimentation
control, as specified for the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Phases I and
II, under requirements for the 2003 Construction General Permit (CGP), whether the project is
required by law to comply or not.
B. Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodic inspection
reports.
C. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until
applicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable
permits.
D. Provide to Owner a Performance Bond covering erosion and sedimentation preventive measures
only, in an amount equal to 100 percent of the cost of erosion and sedimentation control work.
E. Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface cover and
before precipitation occurs.
F. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due to
construction activities for this project.
1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in
excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is less.
2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events that might occur in 25 ye
G. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to
construction activities for this project.
1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil.
2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic.
3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no
cost to Owner.
H. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by
water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project.
1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site.
2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site.
3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements.
4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no
cost to Owner.
I. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site,
including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers.
1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner;
remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

015713-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 015713 - TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove deposited
sediment after each storm.
J. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site,
including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers.
1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner;
remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
K. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant.
L. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been
established.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan:
1. Include:
a. Site plan identifying soils and vegetation, existing erosion problems, and areas vulnerable to
erosion due to topography, soils, vegetation, or drainage.
b. Site plan showing grading; new improvements; temporary roads, traffic accesses, and other
temporary construction; and proposed preventive measures.
c. Where extensive areas of soil will be disturbed, include storm water flow and volume
calculations, soil loss predictions, and proposed preventive measures.
d. Schedule of temporary preventive measures, in relation to ground disturbing activities.
e. Other information required by law.
f. Format required by law is acceptable, provided any additional information specified is also
included.
2. Obtain the approval of the Plan by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Obtain the approval of the Plan by Owner.
C. Certificate: Mill certificate for silt fence fabric attesting that fabric and factory seams comply with
specified requirements, signed by legally authorized official of manufacturer; indicate actual minimum
average roll values; identify fabric by roll identification numbers.
D. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure, indicate
condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Mulch: Use one of the following:
1. Straw or hay.
2. Erosion control matting or netting.
B. Grass Seed for Temporary Cover: Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season, and
intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not use species
known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons.
C. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and insects;
non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; fabric including seams with the following minimum
average roll lengths:
1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
D4751.
2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec^-1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491.
3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 4355 after 500 hours exposure.
4. Tensile Strength: 100 lb-f, minimum, in cross-machine direction; 124 lb-f, minimum, in machine
direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632.
5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632.
6. Tear Strength: 55 lb-f, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4533.

015713-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 015713 - TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

7. Color: Manufacturer's standard, with embedment and fastener lines preprinted.

D. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet long:
1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 lb per linear foot.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such
existing features to greatest extent possible.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time.
3.3 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURES
A. In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive
measures are not required.
B. Construction Entrances: Traffic-bearing aggregate surface.
1. Width: As required; 20 feet, minimum.
2. Length: 50 feet, minimum.
3. Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way.
4. Where necessary to prevent tracking of mud onto right-of-way, provide wheel washing area out
of direct traffic lane, with drain into sediment trap or basin.
C. Linear Sediment Barriers: Made of silt fences.
1. Provide linear sediment barriers:
a. Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles.
2. Space sediment barriers with the following maximum slope length upslope from barrier:
a. Slope of Less Than 2 Percent: 100 feet..
b. Slope Between 2 and 5 Percent: 75 feet.
c. Slope Between 5 and 10 Percent: 50 feet.
d. Slope Between 10 and 20 Percent: 25 feet.
e. Slope Over 20 Percent: 15 feet.
D. Storm Drain Curb Inlet Sediment Trap: Protect each curb inlet using one of the following measures:
1. Filter fabric wrapped around hollow concrete blocks blocking entire inlet face area; use one piece
of fabric wrapped at least 1-1/2 times around concrete blocks and secured to prevent dislodging;
orient cores of blocks so runoff passes into inlet.
2. Straw bale row blocking entire inlet face area; anchor into pavement.
E. Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings.
F. Temporary Splash Pads: Stone aggregate over filter fabric; size to suit application; provide at
downspout outlets and storm water outlets.
G. Soil Stockpiles: Protect using one of the following measures:
1. Cover with polyethylene film, secured by placing soil on outer edges.
2. Cover with mulch at least 4 inches thickness of pine needles, sawdust, bark, wood chips, or
shredded leaves, or 6 inches of straw or hay.
H. Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months.
I. Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Traffic-Bearing Aggregate Surface:
1. Excavate minimum of 6 inches.
2. Place geotextile fabric full width and length, with minimum 12 inch overlap at joints.
3. Place and compact at least 6 inches of 1.5 to 3.5 inch diameter stone.
B. Silt Fences:

015713-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 015713 - TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D 4873.

2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use nominal
16 inch high barriers with minimum 36 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric
embedded at least 4 inches in ground.
3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, use nominal
28 inch high barriers, minimum 48 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric
embedded at least 6 inches in ground.
4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers is more
than 20 feet, use nominal 32 inch high barriers with woven wire reinforcement and steel posts
spaced at 4 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground.
5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified.
6. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at post only, overlapping at
least 18 inches, with extra post.
7. Fasten fabric to steel posts using wire, nylon cord, or integral pockets.
8. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash pad or
other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier not more than
12 inches high with post spacing not more than 4 feet.
C. Mulching Over Small and Medium Areas:
1. Dry Straw and Hay: Apply 4 to 6 inches depth.
2. Erosion Control Matting: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Temporary Seeding:
1. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required.
2. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut slopes, and
conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifying sufficiently to allow
seed to lodge and germinate.
3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizer at 1
pound per 1000 sq ft.
4. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sq ft.
5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding.
6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 1/2 to 1 inch deep.
7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination, without causing
runoff or erosion.
8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established.
3.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5
inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall.
B. Repair deficiencies immediately.
C. Silt Fences:
1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed.
2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence.
3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other
causes.
D. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site.
E. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site.
3.6 CLEAN UP
A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to
remain by Architect.
B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures.
C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable
grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces.

END OF SECTION

015713-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General product requirements.
B. Green-related product requirements.
C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.
D. Product option requirements.
E. Substitution limitations and procedures.
F. Procedures for Owner-supplied products.
G. Spare parts and maintenance materials.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Document 002113 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior to bid
date
B. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. GS-36 - Commercial Adhesives; Green Seal, Inc.; 2000.
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify
applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to
provide information specific to this Project.
B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical
characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional
equipment and appliances.
C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral
parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's
standard colors, textures, and patterns.
D. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility
outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NEW PRODUCTS
A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.
B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics:
1. Made outside the United States, its territories, Canada, or Mexico.
C.
F. Urea-Formaldehyde Prohibition:
1. Overall Project Requirement: Provide composite wood and agrifiber products having no
added urea-formaldehyde resins.
b. Require each installer to certify compliance and submit product data showing product
content.
2. Specific Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere.

016000-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

G. Adhesives and Joint Sealants:

1. Definition: This provision applies to gunnable, trowelable, and liquid-applied adhesives,
sealants, and sealant primers used anywhere on the interior of the building inside the
weather barrier, including duct sealers.
2. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required
by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.
b. Require each installer to certify compliance and submit product data showing product
content.
3. Specific Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere.
H. Aerosol Adhesives:
1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required
by GreenSeal GS-36.
b. Require each installer to certify compliance and submit product data showing product
content.
2. Specific Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere.

2.2 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those
standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the
manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit
a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
2.3 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products of types and in quantities specified in individual
specification sections.
B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the
bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section.
B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
Contract Documents.
C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of
the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to
be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent.
D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product
data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the
Contract Documents.
E. Refer to Section 07200 – General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Section 7.4 – Minor
Changes in the Work for contractual qualifications for substitution requests.
F. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one
proposed substitution.

016000-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product
equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
3. Submit completed ‘Substitution Request Form’- refer to Section 006325.
4. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.
3.2 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS
A. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with Owner.
3. Handle, store, install and finish products.
4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.
3.3 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site
storage time and potential damage to stored materials.
B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding
areas.
D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct,
and products are undamaged.
E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or
damage.
F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.
3.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to
installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive
materials handling and misapplication.
B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable
to product.
E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent
condensation and degradation of products.
G. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.
H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or
damage.
I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are
undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

END OF SECTION

016000-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B. Cutting and patching.
C. Surveying for laying out the work.
D. Cleaning and protection.
E. Starting of systems and equipment.
F. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.
G. Closeout procedures and Final Payout request.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures.
B. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.
C. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures.
D. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data,
warranties and bonds.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work.
1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.
2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of
the work are in conformance with Contract Documents.
3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.
C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and
acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in
the form of an Insurance Certificate.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping
equipment.
B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil
erosion.
C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.
Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.
E. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from
cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.

017000-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

F. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction
operations.
G. Pest Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests, rodents, and insects from
damaging the work.
H. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and
atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction
operations.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure
efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions
for accommodating items installed later.
B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with
building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for
installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are
indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as
closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize
accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and
work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start
of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied
or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste
due to over-ordering or misfabrication.
E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.
F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to
damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions
affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to
applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

017000-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

3.3 LAYING OUT THE WORK

A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.
C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.
D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings.
E. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during
construction.
F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
G. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points.
Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents.
H. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate
means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility
locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.
I. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey illustrating
dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work.
3.4 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal
lines, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
3.5 ALTERATIONS
A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and
existing record documents only.
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.
3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove items indicated on drawings.
2. Relocate items indicated on drawings.
3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and
prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary
for successful application of new finish.
4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to
match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible.
C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and
Telecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new
construction.
1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment
and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access
panel.

017000-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require
reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as
required.
3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services,
maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service.
a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of
outages.
b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.
4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.
5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible
ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with
identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction.
D. Protect existing work to remain.
1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
4. Patch as specified for patching new work.
E. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.
F. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface
finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that the
substrate is ready for the new finish.
G. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated:
1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces to
remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.
2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish to
match.
3. Patch as specified for patching new work.
H. Clean existing systems and equipment.
I. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do not
burn or bury.
J. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.
K. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.
C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:
1. Complete the work.
2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.
3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.
4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.
5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.
6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.
7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
D. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in
order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work,
to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for
penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and
to fit products together to integrate with other work.
E. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces
to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.

017000-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior
approval.
G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with
fire rated material in accordance with Section 07840, to full thickness of the penetrated element.
J. Patching:
1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces,
refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
2. Match color, texture, and appearance.
3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due
to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing
finish.
K. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or
natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
L. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new
work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.
3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to
enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to
eliminate dust.
D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-
site; do not burn or bury.
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work
area to prevent damage.
D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
E. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.
3.9 SYSTEMS STARTUP
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation,
belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.
C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the
equipment or system manufacturer.
D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's
representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed & functioning correctly.

017000-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION

A. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and
shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.
B. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and
instruction of owner personnel.
C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with
Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional
data becomes apparent during instruction.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems: See Section 230593.
3.12 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.
B. Use cleaning materials that are non-hazardous.
C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and
foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface
and material being cleaned.
E. Replace filters of operating equipment.
F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in
legal manner; do not burn or bury.
3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
B. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.
C. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected,
and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review.
D. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with
requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.
E. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete.
F. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection.
G. Submit Closeout Manuals, Warranties, As-Built Drawings, and other submittals designated in Section
017800.
H. After Closeout Submittals are submitted and approved, submit Final Payment Request with all Final
Waivers of Lien attached.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections for 1 year from
date of Substantial Completion.
B. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and
lubricate as required.

017000-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts
whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
D. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or Subcontractor without prior
written consent of the Owner.

END OF SECTION

017000-7 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Project Record Documents.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data.
C. Warranties and bonds.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 007200 – General Conditions: Performance bond and labor and material payment bonds,
warranty, and correction work.
B. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data,
and samples.
C. Section 017000 - Execution Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.
D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for
Payment.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start
of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.
2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.
3. Provide one set of equipment manuals on site, no later than 30 days after equipment approval, to
insure manuals are available during owner training.
4. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be
reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all
document sets as required prior to final submission.
5. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.
C. Warranties and Bonds:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with
Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
Application for Payment.
3. Date of Substantial Completion for Warranty Start Date shall be Date of Turnover, or Date of
Certificate of Occupancy, which ever is later.
4. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion,
submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the
warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.

017800-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.

6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products
installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced
to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract drawings.
G. Project Record Documents (as-built drawings) – To Owner / Architect
1. Contractor to submit within 30 days of project Substantial Completion and prior to Final
Completion.
2. The Contractor’s original and complete set of Redlined Drawings including all as-built information
shall be copied into 3 complete printed and one scanned on disk sets. The original As-Built
Drawing, with Contractor’s mark-ups, shall be sent to the Architect.
3. Contractor shall submit one (1) full set of the As-Built Drawings scanned on disk to the Owner’s
Designated Representative (Project Manager) with a copy of the transmittal letter sent to the
Architect containing date, Project title, Contractor’s name and address, list of documents, and
signature of Contractor.
4. The final full set of As-Built Drawings shall be placed into a section of 6” PVC pipe and securely
mounted to the wall in the Data Room. Include screw-on caps to the pipe, and clearly label the
pipe “As-Built Drawings”.
5. All copied drawings, specifications, and O&M manuals to be presented to the Facility Manager
(FM) and to be left in the Data Room as specified. For FM contact for specific region, contact
Chase Project Manager.
3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA (Submit within 30 days of Substantial Completion)
A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and
suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data
applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and
systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance
drawings.
D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for
each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.
E. The Contractor’s Original O&M Manual(s) shall be copied into electronic portable document format
(.pdf) and placed on a compact disk. The original O&M Manual(s) shall be delivered to the site and
placed in the Data Room.
F. Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of the compact disk containing the O&M Manual in electronic
(.pdf) format to the Architectwith a copy of the transmittal letter to Owner’s Designated Representative
(Project Manager) containing date, Project title, Contractor’s name and address, list of documents,
and signature of Contractor.

017800-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

G. The electronic O&M Manual files shall be indexed or bookmarked in the same manor as the binder
delivered to the site.
H. Label compact disk with project name, location, completion date, and financial center number.
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and
methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule
for cleaning and maintenance.
3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:
1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.
2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.
4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications; typed.
C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and
sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include
summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and
trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting,
balancing, and checking instructions.
E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for
maintenance.
I. Include test and balancing reports.
J. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described
products.
B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2
inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent
groupings. Provide a minimum of 2 binders per project.
D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.
E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and
major component parts of equipment.
F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper.
G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size
of text pages.
H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project
Manual.

017800-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description
identified, in three parts as follows:
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of:Architect, Contractor,
Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
a. Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
b. Landlord/ Developer/ Municipal Contact information.
c. Copies of Building Permits, any Inspection Cards, Municipal Inspection Forms & Reports,
and Certificate of Occupancy.
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by
specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and
materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a. Shop drawings and product data. Include in this group:
1) Masonry Type and information.
2) EIFS and other Exterior systems.
3) Roofing.
4) Joint sealants.
5) Storefront & Curtain Wall.
6) Doors, Hardware and Locks. Including Push Button locks used.
7) Ceilings.
8) Flooring.
9) Appliances, Refrigerator & Microwave.
10) HVAC systems and equipment including Test & Balance Reports.
11) Plumbing, including fixtures and toilet accessories.
12) Fire Protection, sprinkler systems and/ or fire panel information.
13) Interior lighting.
14) Other items included in the project.
b. Air and water balance reports.
c. Certificates.
d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
J. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of
data.
K. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,
Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems,
indexed to content of the volume.
3.6 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Special Warranty: Non-prorated, non-transferable, 50 year limited warranty against defective raw
materials and defects in manufacturing
1. Include warranty against color change due to normal atmospheric conditions that exceed the
limits established by ASTM D 4726
B. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put
into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of
Substantial completion is determined.
C. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
D. Co-execute submittals when required.
E. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

017800-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

F. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic
covers.
G. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of
Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of
responsible company principal.
H. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with
each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the
name of product or work item.
I. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide
full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and
manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.
J. Include warrantees for the following items and follow the format and order as it is given here:
1. SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS
a. Window Sills, and Other Flat Items: Manufacturer's standard ten-year limited warranty on
defective materials.
2. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM
a. Provide manufacturer's labor and material warranty:
1) Warranty period: 15 years.
3. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
a. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
b. Limit of liability: No Dollar Limitation. Scope of coverage shall be to repair any leak in the
TPO roofing system caused by the ordinary wear and tear of the elements, manufacturing
defect in system's Manufacturer's brand materials, and the workmanship used to install
these materials, and cuts and punctures caused by rooftop service and maintenance
activities.
c. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
d. Provide 20 year manufacturer's material and labor warranty to cover failure to prevent
penetration of water. Warranty shall include membrane, roof insulation and membrane
accessories.
4. ASPHALT FIBERGLASS SHINGLES
a. Warranty: 50 year limited warranty plus 5 year, full labor and material, SureStart warranty.
5. ALUMINUM COMPOSTIE WALL PANELS
a. Warranty Period: Twenty years, commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
6. JOINT SEALANTS
a. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
b. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve
airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
7. FLUSH WOOD DOORS
a. Provide warranty for the following term:
1) Interior Doors: Life of installation.
b. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation
tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
8. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
a. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
b. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
c. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass
units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed
units.
d. Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty against degradation of exterior finish. Include
provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
9. DOOR HARDWARE
a. All exit devices shall carry manufacturer's one-year warranty.
b. All door closers shall carry a ten-year 10 year warranty.

017800-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

c. To maintain warranties and preserve fire-ratings, fasteners used for installation are to be
those provided with respective hardware items by hardware manufacturer. Self-drilling, self-
tapping “TEK” screws are not to be used for any item of hardware unless packaged with
hardware item by manufacturer.
10. GLAZING
a. Provide a 5 year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure,
interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same.
b. Provide a 5 year warranty to include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and
replacement of same.
11. RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT
a. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
b. Provide 5 year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators.
c. Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty on magnetron tube of microwave ovens.
12. MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
a. Each Contractor shall and hereby does guarantee and warranty all work and material
performed and installed by him directly or by any of his subcontractors against defective and
inferior materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance.
All guarantees shall be in writing and delivered to the Owner before final certificates are
issued. Contractor shall make good at his own expense and without cost of the Owner and
all defective and inferior materials and workmanship that develop within the guarantee
period
13. CONDENSING UNITS
a. Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within
warranty period, motors/compressors with inadequate or defective materials and
workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as
required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and
maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is limited to
component replacement only, and does not include labor for removal and reinstallation.
b. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of substantial completion.
14. ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
a. Warranty of compressor and heat exchanger
1) Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace or repair, within
warranty period, compressors and heat exchangers with inadequate and defective
materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure
to perform as required; provide manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing,
protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period.
Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and does not include labor for
removal and reinstallation.
2) Warranty Period: 5 years from date of substantial completion.
15. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
a. Warranty service for the equipment shall be provided by the system supplier's factory
trained representative during normal working hours, Monday through Friday, excluding
holidays. Emergency service provided at times other than as stipulated above shall be
available from the same source at additional cost to the owner.

END OF SECTION

017800-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for:
1. Roofing, waterproofing, and other weather-exposed or moisture protection products.
2. Finishes, including flooring, wall finishes, ceiling finishes.
3. Fixtures and fittings.
4. Items specified in individual product Sections.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals.
B. Section 019100 - Commissioning: Additional requirements applicable to demonstration and training.*
C. Other Specification Sections: Additional requirements for demonstration and training.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 – Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures; except:
1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning
purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority.*
2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned.*
3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority.*
4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in
preparation of overall Training Plan; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word 2003
preferred.*
B. Draft Training Plans: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill-
level of attendees.
1. Submit to Commissioning Authority for review and inclusion in overall training plan.*
2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training.
3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable.
4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions.
5. Include at least the following for each training session:
a. Identification, date, time, and duration.
b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered.
c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications.
d. Intended audience, such as job description.
e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training.
f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc.
g. Media to be used, such as slides, hand-outs, etc.
h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by
Contractor.
C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per
training session.
1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals.
2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included
in O&M manuals.
3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance
data.
D. Training Reports:
1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration.
2. Sign-in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees.
3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to
supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that could not
be answered in original training session.
4. Include Commissioning Authority's formal acceptance of training session.*

017900-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the
relevant products and systems.
1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who
actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment.
2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary
qualifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TRAINING - GENERAL
A. Commissioning Authority will prepare the Training Plan based on draft plans submitted.*
B. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated.
C. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor.
D. Do not start training until Functional Testing is complete, unless otherwise specified or approved by
the Commissioning Authority.
E. Provide training in minimum two hour segments.
F. The Commissioning Authority is responsible for determining that the training was satisfactorily
completed and will provide approval forms.*
G. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-schedule
training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to
conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel
"show-up" time.
H. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss:
1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies.
2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system
narratives, and product specific information.
3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals.
I. Product- and System-Specific Training:
1. Review the applicable O&M manuals.
2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and
operational strategies.
3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal
changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative
maintenance.
4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance.
5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues
and emergency procedures.
6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions.
7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage.
9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers.
10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor.
11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures.
J. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training
session, provide written response within three days.

017900-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

* (TEXT HIGHLIGHTED IN GREEN DENOTES REQUIREMENTS WHICH ARE APPLICABLE ONLY TO

PROJECTS PURSUING LEED CERTIFICATION. ELIMINATE IF NOT APPLICABLE)

END OF SECTION

017900-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 018119 - INDOOR AIR QUALITY

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction.
B. Building flush-out after construction and before occupancy.
C. Testing indoor air quality after completion of construction.
1.2 PROJECT GOALS
A. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC ducts and
equipment.
1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract.
2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and equipment
from construction dust.
B. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air
pollutants.
1. Furnish products meeting the specifications.
2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products leading to
indoor air pollution.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: HVAC filters; testing HVAC systems for proper
air flow rates, adjustment of dampers and registers, and settings for equipment.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics,
fibrous insulation, and other similar products.
B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, as
specified.
C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter.
D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic
compounds during installation, drying, or curing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by:
1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until wet
work is completed and dry.
2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging.
3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame.
B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed.
C. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms.
D. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris
generated by construction activities.
1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust.
2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes and
conduit.
3. Clean tops of doors and frames.

018119-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 018119 - INDOOR AIR QUALITY

4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit, equipment,
and supports.
5. Clean return plenums of air handling units.
6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete.
E. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters.
F. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under
Construction for avoiding unnecessary contamination due to construction procedures.
3.2 BUILDING FLUSH-OUT
A. Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is
required, not both.
B. Perform building flush-out before occupancy.
C. Do not start flush-out until:
1. All construction is complete.
2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation.
3. Inspection of inside of return air ducts and terminal units confirms that cleaning is not necessary.
4. New HVAC filtration media have been installed.
D. Building Flush-Out: Operate all ventilation systems at normal flow rates with 100 percent outside air
until a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of floor area has been supplied.
1. Obtain Owner's concurrence that construction is complete enough before beginning flush-out.
2. Maintain interior temperature of at least 60 degrees F and interior relative humidity no higher
than 60 percent.
3. If additional construction involving materials that produce particulates or any of the specified
contaminants is conducted during flush-out, start flush-out over.
4. If interior spaces must be occupied prior to completion of the flush-out, supply a minimum of 25
percent of the total air volume prior to occupancy, and:
a. Begin ventilation at least three hours prior to daily occupancy.
b. Continue ventilation during all occupied periods.
c. Provide minimum outside air volume of 0.30 cfm per square foot or design minimum outside
air rate, whichever is greater.
E. Install new HVAC filtration media after completion of flush-out and before occupancy or further testing.

END OF SECTION

018119-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 031000 – CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 01 Sections

B. Section 032000 - Concrete Reinforcing.

C. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES

ACI 117 – Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

ACI 301 – Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete.

ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

ACI 347 – Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

ASTM D1751 – Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

ASTM E154 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth
Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover.

ASTM E1643 – Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water
Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.

ASTM E1745 – Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or
Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.

ASTM E1993 – Standard Specification for Bituminous Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact
with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.

ASTM F1249 – Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film
and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer’s data for:

1. Vapor Retarder
2. Expansion/Isolation Joint Filler.

1.4 DESIGN OF FORMWORK

A. Design of formwork, shoring, and reshoring and its removal is the Contractor's responsibility.

B. Design of formwork, shoring, and reshoring shall conform to ACI 117, ACI 301, ACI 318, and ACI
347.

031000- 1
 CHASE
SECTION 031000 – CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

C. Design formwork in a manner such that existing or new construction is not overloaded.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Form Material: Wood, plywood, metal, fiberglass or a combination of these, with sufficient
strength to prevent distortion.

B. Form Definitions
1. Standard Forms: No form-facing material required. Standard forms are acceptable
everywhere.

2.2 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Formwork Accessories: Commercially manufactured products, including ties and hangers. Do not
use nonfabricated wire form ties.

2.3 FORM RELEASE AGENT

A. Form release agent shall not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces.

2.4 VAPOR RETARDER

A. Vapor Retarder
1. Polyethylene sheet, not less than 15 mils thick, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A, B, and
C.
2. Maximum Permeance: ASTM E96: 0.04 perms (US).
3. Seam Tape: High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive; minimum
width of 4 inches.
4. Pipe Boots: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and seam tape in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions.

2.5 EXPANSION / ISOLATION JOINT FILLER

A. Expansion / Isolation Joint Filler: ASTM D1751, asphalt impregnated premolded fiberboard, 3/8-
inch thick by full thickness of slab or joint, unless indicated otherwise in the Structural Drawings.

2.6 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

A. Slabs On Grade: Steel plate dowel (1/4” thick) such as manufactured by PNA Construction
Technologies, Inc., Greenstreak Group, Inc., or approved equal.
1. Plate Thickness: 1/4-inch thick for slabs up to 6 inches in thickness; 3/8-inch for slabs over 6
inches and up to 8 inches in thickness; 3/4-inch thick for slabs over 8 inches in thickness and
up to 12 inches in thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Erect formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 347.

031000- 2
 CHASE
SECTION 031000 – CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

B. Finished work shall comply with tolerances of ACI 117.

C. Provide 3/4-inch chamfer at all formed corners.

3.2 FOUNDATION ELEMENTS

A. Form foundation elements if soil or other conditions are such that earth trench forms are
unsuitable.

B. Sides of turned-down slabs shall be formed.

C. Maintain minimum coverage of reinforcing steel as indicated in Structural Drawings.

3.3 VAPOR RETARDER

A. Where indicated on Structural Drawings, place vapor retarder over granular subbase and behind
expansion / isolation joints at walls. Place electrical conduits and ducts in granular subbase.

B. Install vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E1643.
1. Lap vapor retarder six inches minimum at splices and seal with seam tape.
2. Lap vapor retarder over footings and seal to walls.
3. Seal all pipe penetrations with pipe boot.
4. No penetration of vapor retarder is permitted except for reinforcing steel and permanent
utilities.
5. Do not puncture vapor retarder; repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor retarder,
overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides.

C. Install waterproof and vaporproof membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.

3.4 FORM PREPARATION

A. Seal form joints to prevent leakage.

B. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood,
sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed.

C. Before reinforcement is placed, coat contact surfaces of form with form release agent in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not allow excess form release agent to
accumulate in forms or come in contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will
be placed.

3.5 INSERTS AND EMBEDMENT ITEMS

A. Install and secure in position required inserts, embeds, hangers, sleeves, anchors, and nailers.

B. Locate anchor bolts/rods in position in accordance with approved setting drawings and secure to
prevent displacement during concrete placement.

3.6 PROVISIONS FOR OTHER TRADES

A. Install openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and
location of openings and recesses from trades requiring such items. Obtain approval from
Structural Engineer for openings not shown in Structural Drawings.

031000- 3
 CHASE
SECTION 031000 – CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

B. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

3.7 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

A. Slabs On Grade: Install steel plate dowels in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Place plate dowels at mid-depth of slab (+/-1/4-inch), unless noted otherwise in the Structural
Drawings.

3.8 FORMWORK REMOVAL

A. Remove formwork carefully in such manner and at such time as to ensure complete safety of
structure. Do not remove formwork, shoring, or reshoring until members have acquired sufficient
strength to support their weight and the load thereon safely.

3.9 FINISHES OF FORMED SURFACES

A. Standard Form Finish: Patch tie holes and defects. Chip or rub off fins exceeding ¼ inch in
height. Leave surface with the texture imparted by the forms.

END OF SECTION

031000- 4
 CHASE
SECTION 032000 – CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 1 Sections

B. Section 031000 – Concrete Forming and Accessories.

C. Section 033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES

ACI 117 – Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

ACI 301 – Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete.

ACI 315 – Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.

ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

ASTM A1064 – Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Plain and Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement.

ASTM A615 – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.

ASTM A706 – Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.

AWS D1.4 – Structural Weld Code - Reinforcing Steel.

AWS D12.1 – Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforcing Steel Metal Inserts, and
Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction.

CRSI – Manual of Standard Practice.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the Structural Drawings for additional submittal
requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:
1. Notify Structural Engineer prior to detailing reinforcing steel shop drawings.
2. Indicate size, spacing, location and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric, bending and
cutting schedules, splice lengths, stirrup spacing, supporting and spacing devices. Detail
reinforcing steel in accordance with ACI 315 and CRSI Standards.
3. Written description of reinforcement without adequate sections, elevations, and details is not
acceptable.
4. Reproduction of Structural Drawings for shop drawings is not permitted. Electronic drawing
files will not be provided to the Contractor.

C. Submit manufacturer's data for tension and compression splicers.

032000 - 1
 CHASE
SECTION 032000 – CONCRETE REINFORCING

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to the Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the Structural Drawings.

1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTING

A. Store reinforcing steel above ground so that it remains clean. Maintain steel surfaces free from
materials and coatings that might impair bond.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Deformed Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, refer to Structural Drawings for grade (Grade 60
minimum).

B. Welded Steel Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064.

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Annealed Steel Tie Wire: 16½ gage minimum.

B. Bar Supports: Plastic-tipped steel Class I bar supports conforming to CRSI Specifications.
Concrete brick may be used to support reinforcement to obtain proper clearance from earth.

2.3 SPLICERS

A. Tension Splicers: Capable of developing 125% of the reinforcing steel ASTM specified minimum
yield strength.

B. Compression Splicers: Mechanical type such that the compression stress is transmitted by end
bearing held in concentric contact.

2.4 DOWEL ADHESIVE

A. Dowel Adhesive: Simpson AT-XP (IAPMO-UES ER-263), Simpson SET-XP (ICC-ES ESR-2508),
Powers PE1000+ Epoxy Adhesive (ICC-ES ESR-2583), Powers AC100+ Gold Adhesive (ICC-ES
ESR-2582), Hilti HIT-HY 200 SAFE Set Fast Cure Adhesive (ICC-ES ESR-3187), Hilti HIT-RE
500-SD Epoxy Adhesive (ICC-ES ESR-2322) or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with ACI 318 and CRSI standards.

B. Bend bars cold. Do not heat or flame cut bars. No field bending of bars partially embedded in
concrete is permitted, unless specifically approved Structural Engineer and checked by Testing
and Inspection Agency for cracks.

C. Weld only as indicated. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4 and AWS D12.1.

D. Tag reinforcing steel for easy identification.

032000 - 2
 CHASE
SECTION 032000 – CONCRETE REINFORCING

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Before placing concrete, clean reinforcement of foreign particles and coatings.

B. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement in accordance with ACI 318 and
CRSI standards. Do not deviate from alignment or measurement.

C. Place concrete beam reinforcement support parallel to main reinforcement.

D. Locate welded wire reinforcement in the top third of slabs. Overlap mesh one lap plus two inches
at side and end joints.

E. Furnish and install dowels or mechanical splices at intersections of walls, columns and piers to
permit continuous reinforcement or development lengths at such intersections.

F. Maintain cover and tolerances in accordance with ACI and CRSI Specifications, unless indicated
otherwise on Structural Drawings.

3.3 SPLICES

A. Do not splice reinforcement except as indicated on Structural Drawings.

B. Tension couplers may be used and installed in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.

3.4 DOWELS IN EXISTING CONCRETE

A. Install dowels and dowel adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Minimum embedment length into the existing concrete shall be 12 bar diameters, unless noted
otherwise.

END OF SECTION

032000 - 3
 CHASE
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete formwork.
B. Floors and slabs on grade.
C. Under slab vapor barrier.
D. Concrete foundation walls.
E. Concrete reinforcement.
F. Joint devices associated with concrete work.
G. Concrete curing.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 033505 – Curing, Sealing and Hardening Concrete Floors.
C. 079200 - Joint Sealants.
D. 321313 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Concrete paving, sidewalks, curbs and gutters.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002).
2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2005.
3. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute
International; 2004 (errata 2007).
4. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
Concrete Institute International; 2000.
5. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999.
6. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988
(Reapproved 2002).
7. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001.
8. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement; American Concrete Institute
International; 1992
9. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2008.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. A185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete;
2006.
2. A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement; 2007.
3. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003.
4. C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2005.
5. C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2007.
6. C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2005a.
7. C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2005.
8. C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2003.
9. C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2001.
C. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2006.

033000-1
 CHASE
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

D. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete;
2006.
E. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2005a.
F. ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete;
2002.
G. ASTM C1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete;
1999.
H. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink); 2007.
I. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004.
J. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or
Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 1997 (Reapproved 2004).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with
specified requirements.
C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.
D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components
that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK
A. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand
hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.
1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor's choice of materials that will provide
smooth, stain-free final appearance.
2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with application
of coatings.
3. Form Ties: Flat tie type that will leave no metal within 1/2 inches of concrete surface.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed billet-steel bars; ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420).
B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type.
C. Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage.
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
3. Conform to Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Standard Practice.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal portland type.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. Use recycled aggregates as available.

033000-2
 CHASE
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

C. Slag: ASTM C-989

1. Provide 50% Max pound for pound cement replacement.
2. Check with concrete provider for information on amout of curing time required.
3. Maintain PSI requirements per concrete mix design.
D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.4 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of
cement.
B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type E.
D. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type D.
E. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type A.
2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: 15 mil Stego Wrap, or approved; maximum 0.012 perms; multi-layer,
fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E 1745,
Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under
concrete slabs. Single ply polyethylene is prohibited.
B. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic
aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; regular curing paper, white curing paper, clear
polyethylene, white polyethylene, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent.
2.6 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-dispersible acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C 1059 Type II.
B. Epoxy Bonding System: Complying with ASTM C 881/C 881M and of Type required for specific
application.
C. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with
ASTM D1751, 1/2 inch thick and full depth of slab less 1/2 inch.
D. Construction Joint Devices: Integral extruded plastic; 1/4 inch thick, formed to tongue and groove
profile, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, knockout holes spaced at 6 inches, ribbed
steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge.
2.7 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended
by manufacturer.
C. Normal Weight Concrete:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3,000
psi. except at interior floor slabs which should be 3500 psi and exterior slabs which should be
4000 psi.
2. Slag 50% maximum pound for pound cement replacement.
3. Check with concrete provider for information on amout of curing time required.
4. Use recycled aggregates as available.
5. Cement Content: Minimum 564 lb per cubic yard.
6. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
7. Total Air Content: 4 to 6 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M.
8. Maximum Slump: 3 inches.

033000-3
 CHASE
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

2.8 MIXING
Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied
loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.
B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
C. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by
cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing
applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required.
2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.
D. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight
by taping edges and ends.
3.3 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and
accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage
required for protection.
B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions.
Splice laps with tie wire.
C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are
accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement.
3.4 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.
C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.
D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be
disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with
vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
F. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler.
G. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to
resist movement by wet concrete.
H. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section
07900 for finish joint sealer requirements.
I. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
J. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top
to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
K. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab
thickness.
L. Screed slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/8 inch in 10 ft.

033000-4
 CHASE
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
B. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in
height. Provide finish as follows:
1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not
more than 24 hours after form removal.
C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:
1. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, and thin set ceramic tile.
2. Steel trowel surfaces that will be left exposed.
3. Medium broom surfaces that are exterior to the building.
D. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100
nominal.
3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature
drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary
for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days.
C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other surface
coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. If such
materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring and adhesive manufacturers
prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to flooring manufacturer's satisfaction.
2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep
continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-fog spray, or saturated
burlap.
3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.
a. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive.
b. Curing compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended
by manufacturer. Use curing compound or moisture-retaining cover in areas to receive finish
flooring. Remove curing compound residue before installation of finish flooring. Refer to
Section 033505 – Curing, Sealing and Hardening Concrete Floors.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests as specified in Section 014000.
B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed mix design to testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations.
D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with
specified requirements.
E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test
cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of concrete placed.
F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same
conditions as concrete it represents.
G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM
C143/C143M.
3.8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within
24 hours of test.

033000-5
 CHASE
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or
specified requirements.
C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.

END OF SECTION

033000-6
 CHASE
SECTION 033505 - CURING, SEALING, AND HARDENING CONCRETE FLOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single application cure-seal-hardener for new concrete floors.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete slabs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets, including product specifications, test data, preparation
instructions and recommendations, storage and handling requirements and recommendations, and
installation methods.
C. Maintenance instructions, including precautions for avoiding staining after application.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. No satisfactory procedures are available to remove petroleum or rust stains from concrete.
Prevention is therefore essential. Take precautions to prevent staining of concrete prior to application
of cure-seal-hardener and for minimum of three months after application:
1. Prohibit pipe cutting using pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab.
2. Prohibit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slab.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Curecrete Distribution, Inc; (Springville, UT; 800-998-5664; email:
techsupport@ashfordformula.com. www.ashfordformula.com)
B. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cure-Seal-Hardener: Ashford Formula; water-based chemically-reactive penetrating sealer and
hardener, that seals by densifying concrete so that water molecules cannot pass through but air and
water vapor can, while allowing concrete to achieve full compressive strength, minimizing surface
crazing, and eliminating dusting.
1. Colorless, transparent, odorless, non-toxic, non-flammable.
2. Containing no solvents or volatile organic compounds.
3. Allowing traffic on floors within 2 to 3 hours, with chemical process complete within 3 months.
4. No change to surface appearance except a sheen developed due to traffic and cleaning.
B. Water: Clean, potable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

033505-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 033505 - CURING, SEALING, AND HARDENING CONCRETE FLOORS

B. Prevent damage to and soiling of adjacent work.

C. New Concrete: Apply cure-seal-hardener to new concrete as soon as the concrete is firm enough to
work on after troweling, except on colored concrete wait minimum of 30 days.
1. Spray on at rate of 200 square feet per gallon.
2. Keep surfaces wet with cure-seal-hardener for minimum soak-in period of 30 minutes, without
allowing drying out or becoming slippery. In hot weather slipperiness may appear before the 30
minute time period has elapsed. If that occurs, apply more cure-seal-hardener as required to
keep entire surface in a non-slippery state for the first 15 minutes. For the remaining 15 minutes,
mist the surface as needed with water to keep the material in a non-slippery state.
3. After this period, when treated surface becomes slippery lightly mist with water until slipperiness
disappears.
4. Wait for surface to become slippery again and then flush entire surface with water removing all
residue of cure-seal-hardener.
5. Squeegee surface completely dry, flushing any remaining slippery areas until no residue
remains.
6. Wet vacuum or scrubbing machines may be used to remove residue, provided manufacturer's
instructions are followed.

END OF SECTION

033505-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 036200 – NON-SHRINK GROUTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 1 Sections

1.2 REFERENCES

CRD-C621 – Specification for Non Shrink Grout Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout.

ASTM C109 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
(Using 2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens).

ASTM C1107 – Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to the Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the Structural Drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the Structural Drawings for additional submittal
requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUT

A. Grout: Flowable, non-shrink, non-metallic in accordance with CRD-C-621 and ASTM C1107.

B. Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi minimum at 28 days.

2.2 WATER

A. Water: Clean, potable water.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANDLING

A. Store and protect from moisture and contamination.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove foreign materials including mud and dirt from areas to be grouted.

B. Use forms to contain grout. Forms shall be a minimum 1½ inch larger on all sides than the item
grouted.

036200 -1
 CHASE
SECTION 036200 – NON-SHRINK GROUTING

3.3 MIXING

A. Mix grout to its fluid, self-leveling consistency in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. Mix grout in a paddle-type mortar mixer; do not mix by hand.

B. Do not re-temper grout. Do not exceed manufacturer’s maximum limit on water content or use at
a consistency that produces free bleeding.

3.4 PLACEMENT

A. Consolidate to provide grout uniformity. Do not vibrate grout.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect grout and areas to be grouted from excessive heat and cold in accordance with
manufacturer's Specifications. Protect grout from excessive drying shrinkage resulting from wind
or direct sunlight. Protect areas grouted from excessive vibrations.

END OF SECTION

036200 -2
 CHASE
SECTION 042200 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 1 Sections

B. Section 032000 – Concrete Reinforcing.

C. Section 033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

D. Section 042000 – Unit Masonry.

1.2 REFERENCES

TMS 602 – Specification for Masonry Structures.

ASTM A82 – Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.

ASTM A153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

ASTM A615 – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.

ASTM A951 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement

ASTM C90 – Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.

ASTM C109 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
(Using 2-in. Cube Specimens).

ASTM C140 – Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and
Related Units.

ASTM C144 – Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

ASTM C270 – Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.

ASTM C404 – Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.

ASTM C476 – Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.

ASTM C1019 – Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.

ASTM C1314 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.

ASTM D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications.

ASTM D2287 – Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer
Molding and Extrusion Compounds.

042200-1
 CHASE
SECTION 042200 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Structural Quality Assurance Plan in Structural Drawings for additional submittal
requirements.

B. Submit coarse grout mix design.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit for masonry reinforcement complying with Section 032000.

D. Submit procedures for construction of masonry walls to be filled with coarse grout. Procedures
should include low lift grouting as applicable to Project.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Masonry construction and materials shall conform to all the requirements of TMS 602, except as
modified by the requirements of the Construction Documents.

B. Refer to the Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the Structural Drawings.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, handle, and store materials in a dry condition to protect from elements and prevent
contamination, deterioration, or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants,
corrosion, and other causes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY

A. Specified Compressive Strength, f’m: See Structural Notes in the Structural Drawings.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete masonry units: Comply with ASTM C90.

B. Weight: Lightweight.

C. Net Area Compressive Strength of unit: As listed in Table 2 of TMS 602 required for the specified
f’m.

D. Face Dimensions: 16” long x 8” high nominal, unless indicated otherwise.

E. Special shapes: Where indicated on the Drawings.

F. Fire Rating: Where indicated in the Architectural Drawings, provide concrete masonry units that
comply with the specified fire ratings.

2.3 MORTAR

A. Mortar: Type M or Type S in accordance with ASTM C270. Refer to Structural Drawings for
locations.

B. Do not use admixtures that contain chlorides.

042200-2
 CHASE
SECTION 042200 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

2.4 COARSE GROUT

A. Coarse Grout: In accordance with ASTM C476.

B. Compressive Strength: See Structural Notes in the Structural Drawings.

C. Slump: 8 and 11 inches.

D. Do not use admixtures that contain chlorides.

2.5 WATER

A. Water: Clean potable water free of deleterious substances.

2.6 REINFORCEMENT

A. Horizontal and Vertical Reinforcing Bars: Comply with Section 032000.

2.7 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: Manufactured with longitudinal, parallel, deformed side wires in
accordance with ASTM A951 and of the size specified in the Structural Drawings. Cross wires
shall be No. 9 gage, plain, in accordance with ASTM A82, unless noted otherwise in Structural
Drawings.

B. Provide as a minimum, one side wire for each face shell of hollow masonry units. Provide
additional side wires or eye sections for adjustable wall ties as specified for multiwythe wall
construction.

C. Ladder type reinforcement shall be used in walls with vertical reinforcement.

D. Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153, Class B-2.

E. Provide prefabricated corner and tee section accessories.

2.8 CONTRACTION JOINT MATERIAL

A. Contraction joint material:

1. Rubber shear keys complying with ASTM D2000, M2AA-805 and with a minimum durometer
hardness of 80, or
2. PVC shear keys complying with ASTM D2287, Type PVC 654-4 and with a minimum
durometer hardness of 85.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Cold weather masonry construction shall comply with TMS 602, Section 1.8, Paragraph C when
either of the following conditions exist:
1. The ambient air temperature falls below 40 degrees Fahrenheit, or
2. The temperature of masonry units is below 20 degrees Fahrenheit.

042200-3
 CHASE
SECTION 042200 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

B. Hot weather masonry construction shall comply with TMS 602, Section 1.8, Paragraph D when
either of the following conditions exist:
1. The ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees Fahrenheit, or
2. The ambient air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit with a wind velocity greater
than 8 mph.
3. When the ambient temperature exceeds 115 degrees Fahrenheit, or exceeds 105 degrees
Fahrenheit with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, implement the requirements of Article 1.8
D.1.a and shade materials and mixing equipment from direct sunlight.

3.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT PLACEMENT

A. Use dry masonry units. No frozen or wet units shall be used.

B. Discard cracked, chipped, and spalled masonry units.

C. Lay hollow units as follows:

1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns,
pilasters, and in walls where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
3. For starting course on footings where cells are not to be grouted, spread out full mortar bed
including area under cells.
4. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations to maintain joint alignment. If not
indicated, lay walls with 3/8 inch joints.
5. Buttering corners of joints, deep or excess furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.

D. Lay units in running bond, unless noted otherwise in the Structural Drawings.

E. Fully bond external corners of concrete masonry.

F. Where non-loadbearing masonry partitions extend to underside of floor, roof deck or structural
system, stop masonry short 3/8 inch to ½ inch to allow for live load deflection. Fill gap with soft
joint filler.

3.3 GROUT PLACEMENT

A. Execute placement of grout in accordance with TMS 602, Section 3.5.

B. Place coarse grout in maximum 4’-0” lifts, unless specifically approved in writing by the
Architect/Structural Engineer.

C. Do not fill reinforced cells with mortar.

3.4 MOVEMENT JOINTS

A. Place expansion joints at locations indicated in the Structural Drawings.

1. Do not run any horizontal reinforcing through expansion joints.

B. Place contraction joints at locations indicated in the Structural Drawings.

1. Install contraction joint material.
2. Do not run horizontal reinforcement through contraction joints, except reinforcement in bond
beams at floor and roof levels shall be continuous across contraction joints.

042200-4
 CHASE
SECTION 042200 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

3.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Place reinforcing bars as indicated in the Structural Drawings and in accordance with TMS 602,
Section 3.4.

3.6 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. Place horizontal joint reinforcement in the horizontal mortar beds at spacings noted in the
Structural Drawings and noted below.

B. For masonry below grade, space horizontal joint reinforcing at 8 inches vertically.

C. Place horizontal joint reinforcement above lintels and below sills at openings. Extend two feet
beyond opening.

D. Joint reinforcement shall be continuous. Lap joint reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

3.7 ERECTION BRACING

A. Design, provide, and install temporary erection bracing during construction as required to stabilize
erected masonry until complete structural system is constructed.

3.8 CLEANING AND POINTING

A. Dry brush masonry surfaces before mortar has set hard to remove mortar crumbs and
accumulation.

B. Clean masonry with commercial brick cleaner approved by brick manufacturer. Protect other work
from cleaning materials.

C. Cut out defective mortar and repoint.

3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. During erection cover top of wall, projections, and sills with strong waterproof membrane at end of
each day’s work.
1. Extend and secure cover a minimum of 24 in. down both sides.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after placing masonry columns or
walls.

C. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry columns or walls.

END OF SECTION

042200-5
 CHASE
SECTION 047215 - ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Architectural cast stone; application on exterior walls.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 042000 – Unit Masonry: Installation of cast stone in conjunction with masonry.
C. 079200 – Joint Sealants: Materials and execution methods for sealing soft joints in cast stone work;
control joints.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C90: Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; latest edition.
2. ASTM C140: Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and
Related Units; latest edition.
3. ASTM C270: Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; latest edition.
4. ASTM C666: Standard Test Method for Resistance  of  Concrete  to  Rapid  Freezing  and 
Thawing; latest edition.
5. ASTM C 1148: Standard Test Method for Measuring the Drying Shrinkage of Masonry Mortar;
latest edition.
6. ASTM C1194: Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Architectural Cast Stone;
latest edition.
7. ASTM C1195: Standard Test Method for Absorption of Architectural Cast Stone; latest edition.
8. ASTM C 1314: Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; latest
edition.
9. ASTM C 1357: Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength; latest edition.
10. ASTM C1364: Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone; latest edition.
11. ASTM E 514: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry;
latest edition.
B. ACI 301: Specifications for Structural Concrete; American Concrete Institute; latest edition.
C. National Concrete Masonry Association
1. NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-02A: Removal of Stains from Concrete Masonry
2. NCMA TEK #8-03A: Control and Removal of Efflorescence
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, dimensions, layouts, profiles, cross sections reinforcement,
exposed faces, arrangement of joints, anchoring methods, anchors and piece numbers.
C. Mortar Color Selections Samples.
D. Test Reports prepared by a qualified independent laboratory indicating compliance with the
performance requirements for integral mortar water repellency as tested using:
1. ASTM E 514-74.
2. ASTM C 1357.
3. ASTM C 1314.
4. ASTM C 1148.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A current manufacturing member of Illinois Concrete Products
Association manufacturing cast stone products for over 5 years.

047215-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 047215 - ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver cast stone components secured to shipping pallets and protected from damage and
discoloration. Protect corners from damage.
B. Store cast stone components on pallets with non-staining waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers
to prevent condensation. Prevent contact with dirt.
C. Protect cast stone components during handling and installation to prevent chipping, cracking, or other
damage.
D. Schedule and coordinate production and delivery of cast stone components with unit masonry work to
optimize on-site inventory and to avoid delaying the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE
A. Nominal 12” x 24” x 4” high-density, severe weathering, limestone screening dry tamp simulated stone
masonry unit w/ Portland cement and water penetration resistance admixture compliant with ASTM
C1364.
1. Compressive strength: Min. 6500 psi at 28 days per ASTM C1194.
2. Absorption: max. 6% at 28 days per ASTM C1195.
3. Density: min. 125 lb/cu. ft. per ASTM C125.
4. Freeze–thaw resistance: max. 5% at 300 cycles per ASTM C666.
5. Field material surface texture: Rock face texture with no bugholes, air voids or other surface
blemishes visible from a distance of 20 feet.
6. Sill, water table and trim surface texture: Smooth texture with no bugholes, air voids or other
surface blemishes visible from a distance of 20 feet.
7. Color: Limestone.
8. Reinforcement and anchorage: provide reinforcement as required to withstand handling and
structural stresses; comply with ACI 301.
9. Special shapes as indicated on drawings.
B. Manufacturer, product
1. Harvey Cement Products, www.harveycement.com, SavannaStone.
2. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.2 MORTAR
A. Portland cement-lime with water-repellant admixture, compliant with ASTM C270, Type S.
B. Sealant: As specified in Section 079200.
C. Cleaner: General-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and
other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry
surfaces; approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and by cleaner manufacturer for use
on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials.
1. Power washing is not permitted.
2.3 WATER-REPELLANT MORTAR ADMIXTURE
A. Integral liquid polymeric admixture for mortar added during mixing.
B. Performance and testing requirements
1. Water permeance: ASTM E514, minimum Class E rating.
2. Flexural bond strength: ASTM C1357, no statistically lower masonry flexural bond strength.
3. Compressive strength: ASTM C1314, no statistically lower compressive strength of prisms.
4. Drying shrinkage of mortar: ASTM C1148, no statistically higher drying shrinkage.
C. Manufacturer, product
1. ADM Chemistries, Inc., www.acmchem.com, Rainbloc.
2. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.

047215-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 047215 - ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE

PART 3 - PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cast stone components in conjunction with masonry, complying with requirements of Section
042000.
B. Installer shall use only concrete masonry units containing compatible integral water-repellent CMU
admixture for exterior wall construction.
C. Installer shall use only mortar containing integral water-repellent mortar admixture at the
manufacturer’s recommended addition rate and mixed according to the manufacturer’s recommended
instructions.
D. Setting:
1. See manufacturer’s recommendations for wetting of units previous to installation.
2. Use faceshell bedding. Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fill vertical joints with mortar.
E. Cover the top of unfinished masonry work to protect it from the weather and to prevent accumulation
of water in the cores of the CMU.
F. Joints: Make all joints 3/8” except as otherwise detailed.
1. Tool with a slight concave profile.
2. Tool the mortar joints when they are thumbprint hard
G. Sealant Joints: Install sealants as specified in Section 079200.
3.2 CLEANING & PROTECTION
A. Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 20 feet.
1. Repair with matching touchup material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Repair methods and results subject to Architect’s approval.
B. Clean exposed cast stone after mortar is thoroughly set and cured.
1. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaner.
2. Apply cleaner to cast stone in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
C. Protect from splashing by mortar and other damage.
D. Remove “primary” efflorescence from masonry walls exposed in the finished work in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations and the NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-3A.
E. Remove dirt or stains from masonry walls exposed in the finished work in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations and the NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-2A.
F. Promptly remove excess wet mortar containing integral water repellent mortar admixture from the face
of the masonry as work progresses.
G. Do not use strong acids, overaggressive sandblasting or high-pressure cleaning methods.
H. Comply with applicable environmental laws and restrictions.

END OF SECTION

047215-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 047300 – MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manufactured stone veneer and related accessories and installation materials.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
C. 042000 – Unit Masonry
D. 054000 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing
E. 061000 – Rough Carpentry
F. 061643– Exterior Gypsum Sheathing
G. 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
H. 079200 – Joint Sealants
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
1. ASTM C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
2. ASTM C 67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile
3. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Head Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus
4. ASTM C 190 - Method of Test for Tensile Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
5. ASTM C 192 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory
6. ASTM C 482 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement
Paste
7. ASTM C 567 - Standard Test Method for Determining Density of Structural Lightweight Concrete
8. ASTM C 1329 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
9. ASTM C 1670 - Standard Specification for Adhered Manufactured Stone Masonry Veneer Units.
10. ASTM C 1780 - Standard Practice for Installation Methods for Adhered Manufactured Stone
Masonry Veneer
B. International Code Council (ICC)
1. ICC AC 38 Acceptance Criteria for Water Resistive Barriers
2. ICC ESR 2598 Coronado Stone Products Evaluation Report
C. LEED: US Green Building Council’s Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design Green Building
Rating System
D. Texas Department of Insurance: Product Evaluation - EC101
E. UBC Standard No. 14-1, Kraft Waterproof Building Paper
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit following in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specification and data sheets for each product used, including:
1. Preparation instructions.
2. torage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation guidelines.
4. Cleaning and maintenance methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit elevations and cross-section details showing proper installation methods.
D. Sample Selection

047215-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 047300 – MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER

1. Standard sample board with selected stone profile and color should be submitted for each
product specification.
2. Selection of approved grout colors and styles (if applicable).
E. Sample Verification: A field panel sample with the minimum size of 3’ x 3’ should be installed for
every product selection showing: styles, colors, textures and grout colors.
F. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Closeout Submittals: Provide manufacturer’s warranty and maintenance recommendations.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Coronado Stone Products
B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience with similar scope of work and must be able to
furnish list of previous jobs and references if requested by Architect.
C. Certifications: Products approved by ICC-ES Evaluation Service.
D. Mock-Up: Provide field panel sample to evaluate preparation and application techniques.
E. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct a pre-installation meeting to verify all products, application
methods, site conditions and warranty terms no less than thirty days prior to stone veneer installation.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Coordination of on-site delivery and storage should be arranged in advance to avoid work delays.
B. Store and handle stone products in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. All material stored on-site should be protected from the elements before and during the installation
process. Store material under cover and in a dry location.
D. Store mortar, sealant and other installation material in compliance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain manufacturer’s recommended environmental conditions to ensure optimum results.
B. Cold Weather Requirements: Installations should be performed in temperatures exceeding 40
degrees Fahrenheit prior to, during and for 48 hours after completion of work. If temperatures are
below 40 degrees Fahrenheit, masons should use heaters and tents during the installation process to
regulate temperature.
C. Hot Weather Requirements: If temperatures exceed 90 degrees Fahrenheit during the installation,
additional moisture will need to be added to the backs of the stone veneer and scratch coated
surface. Shade and/or frequent misting of the wall and stone may be required.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s 50 year limited warranty.PRODUCTS
1.9 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Coronado Stone Products (Corporate Office), which is located at: 11191
Calabash Ave, Fontana, CA 92337; Toll Free Tel: 800-847-8663; Fax: 909-357-7362; Email:
sales@coronado.com; Web: www.Coronado.com
B. Substitutions: Not permitted.
1.10 MATERIALS
A. Manufactured Stone Veneer:
B. Profile / Color: Chiseled / Cream.
C. Manufactured Stone Veneer - Properties: Units consisting of Portland cement, lightweight aggregates
and oxide pigments.

047215-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 047300 – MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER

1. Compressive Strength: Tested in accordance with ASTM C39 and ASTM C192, greater than
1800 psi.
2. Shear Bond Test: Tested in accordance with ASTM C482, greater than 50 psi.
3. Water Absorption: Tested in accordance with section 3.1.4 and 4.6 of ICC-ES AC51.
4. Freeze / Thaw: Tested in accordance with ASTM C67, less than 3% mass loss.
5. Unit Weight: Shipping weight is less than 15 lbs. per sq ft, density is determined in accordance
with ASTM C567.

PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin the installation process until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Notify architect of any unsatisfactory preparation of substrate before proceeding.
C. Correct all unsatisfactory substrate conditions before installation begins.
D. Verify roofs use proper water displacement methods to direct moisture away from the installed stone
veneer.
E. If substrate surface is questionable, bonding tests should be performed before installation to assess
adhesion and confirm proper bonding strength.
F. Flashing must be installed at wall penetrations and terminations of the stone veneer. Assure that all
flashing and kickouts are corrosion resistant, integrated with the WRB properly (when used), and
installed in accordance with the local building code requirements.
2.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean all surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Use manufacturer surface preparation recommendations to achieve best result.
2.3 INSTALLATION
A. Product should be pulled from a variety of boxes and blended on site during installation to ensure a
consistent overall project color on the wall.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Visit this page for detailed
installation instructions - https://www.coronado.com/InstallationGuide
C. Application details and mortar recommendations may vary depending on the stone style. Consult
manufacturer for proper installation instructions.
D. All dry-stacked and large format standard stones should be installed using a polymer-modified mortar
meeting ANSI A118.4 or ANSI 118.15.
E. All Classic Series and WoodStone products must be applied with a polymer-modified thinset bonding
mortar meeting ANSI A118.4 or ANSI 118.15.
F. All applications in freeze-thaw environments require a polymer-modified mortar.
2.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Installed manufactured stone veneer can be cleaned with a mild soap and water solution.
B. Cleaning efflorescence can be done by lightly scrubbing the face of the stone with a soft bristle brush
and water. In some cases, a 25% vinegar 75% water solution may need to be used. Do not use any
harsh cleaning methods to remove efflorescence.
C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged stone before completion of project.
D. Water repellents and enhancers can be used to further protect a finished project. Only breathable,
penetrating water-based silane water repellents should be used.

END OF SECTION

047215-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 1 Sections

B. Section 052100 – Steel Joist Framing.

C. Section 053100 – Steel Decking.

1.2 REFERENCES

AISC – Steel Construction Manual, 14th Edition.

AISC 303 – Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

AISC 341-10 – Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings dated June 22, 2010.

AISC 360-10 – Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

AISC – Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts prepared by the
Research Council on Structural Connections.

AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code.

AWS A5.1 – Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding.

AWS A5.5 – Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding.

AWS A5.17 – Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding.

AWS A5.20 – Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding.

SSPC – Steel Structures Painting Manual.

ASTM A6 – Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars,
Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling.

ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

ASTM A53 – Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded
and Seamless

ASTM A108 – Standard Specification for steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished.

ASTM A123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products.

ASTM A153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

ASTM A307 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod
60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.

051200 -1
 CHASE
SECTION 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

ASTM A325 – Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 KSI
Minimum Tensile Strength.

ASTM A490 – Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat-Treated, 150 KSI
Minimum Tensile Strength.

ASTM A500 – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

ASTM A501 – Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing.

ASTM A563 – Standard Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM A572 – Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium Vanadium

Structural Steel.

ASTM A673 – Standard Specification for Sampling Procedure for Impact Testing of Structural
Steel

ASTM A780 – Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Coatings.

ASTM A992 – Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.

ASTM A1085 – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded Carbon Steel Hollow Structural
Sections (HSS)

ASTM B695 – Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and
Steel

ASTM F436 – Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.

ASTM F844 – Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General
Use.

ASTM F1554 – Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-Ksi Yield
Strength.

ASTM F1852 – Standard Specification for “Twist Off” Type Tension Control Structural
Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.

ASTM F2280 – Standard Specification for “Twist Off” Type Tension Control Structural
Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the Structural Drawings for additional submittal
requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:
1. Contact Structural Engineer’s Construction Administrator prior to detailing structural steel
shop drawings.
2. Shop drawings shall be submitted on a 24” x 36” sheet minimum.

051200 -2
 CHASE
SECTION 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

3. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the profiles, sizes, ASTM Grade, spacing and locations
of structural steel members, including connections, attachments, anchorages, framed
openings, sizes and types of fasteners, method of tightening fasteners, cambers, and the
number, type and spacing of the stud shear connectors and headed studs.
4. Beam sizes shall be shown on the erection drawings (plans).
5. Submit shop drawings for review.
6. Reproduction of Structural Drawings for shop drawings is not permitted. Electronic drawing
files will not be provided to the Contractor.

C. Submit written welding procedures for each type of welded joint used in accordance with AWS
D1.1. Fabrication of structural steel shall not commence until the Structural Engineer and the
Special Inspector have approved the written welding procedures.

D. Submit certification that the fabricator meets the required qualifications and ultrasonic testing
reports for complete penetration welds. If fabricator has an independent testing agency inspect
fabrication as required by these specifications, submit the name and qualifications of the
independent testing agency.

E. Upon request, submit the erection sequence and procedures to be used by the steel erector.

F. Submit certification that the erector meets the required qualifications.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to the Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the Structural Drawings.

1.5 STORAGE

A. Store materials off ground to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Store steel
members and packaged items in a manner that provides protection against contact with
deleterious materials.

1.6 FABRICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS

A. Steel fabricator shall meet the requirements in the Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the
Structural Drawings.

1.7 ERECTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS

A. Steel fabricator shall meet the requirements in the Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the
Structural Drawings

B. Erector shall be experienced in erecting structural systems similar in complexity to this Project as
evidenced by 10 completed projects.

C. Erector shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the erection of structural steel or is an
AISC Certified Advanced Steel Erector.

D. For qualification of welders, refer to the Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the Structural
Drawings.

051200 -3
 CHASE
SECTION 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ANCHOR RODS

A. Anchor Rods: Headed rod or a threaded rod with a heavy hexagonal nut and plate washer
welded to the bottom of the threaded rod conforming to ASTM F1554.

B. Nuts and Washers: Two hexagonal nuts and two plate washers conforming to ASTM A36 for
each anchor rod assembly.

2.2 ROLLED STEEL SHAPES, PLATES, AND BARS

A. Rolled Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36; ASTM A572, Grade 50; or ASTM A992 as
indicated by the Structural Drawings. ASTM A572, Grade 50 may be substituted for ASTM A992.

2.3 SQUARE, RECTANGULAR AND ROUND STEEL HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTIONS (HSS)

A. Hollow structural sections:

1. Rectangular and Square: ASTM A500 Grade B, 46 ksi minimum yield strength
2. Round: ASTM A500 Grade B, 42 ksi minimum yield strength

2.4 NON-HIGH-STRENGTH FASTENERS

A. Non-High-Strength Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A, 60 ksi minimum, where noted on the Structural
Drawings.

B. Hardened Steel Washers: ASTM F436.

2.5 HIGH-STRENGTH FASTENERS

A. High-Strength Bolts: ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 as noted on the Structural Drawings. 3/4-inch
minimum diameter.

B. Hardened steel washers shall conform to ASTM F436.

C. Spline-Type Tension Control Bolts: ASTM spline-type tension control bolts with plain hardened
washers and suitable nuts are an acceptable alternate design bolt assembly.

D. Do not use load indicating washers.

2.6 EXPANSION ANCHORS

A. Expansion Anchors: See Structural Notes.

2.7 SCREW ANCHORS

A. Screw Anchors: See Structural Notes.

2.8 HEADED STUDS

A. Headed Studs: ASTM A108, comply with AWS D1.1. Provide studs with the diameter shown on
the Structural Drawings.

051200 -4
 CHASE
SECTION 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

2.9 WELD ELECTRODES

A. Weld Electrodes: AWS A5.1, A5.5, A5.l7, or A5.20 E-70 series low hydrogen electrodes.

B. Properly store electrodes to maintain flux quality.

2.10 PAINT

A. Oxide Primer: AISC Specifications, Code of Standard Practice, and SSPC Steel Structure
Painting Manual, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Paint Primer: Free of lead and chromate and comply with State and Federal volatile organic
compound (VOC) requirements.

C. Paint Primer: Compatible with finish coating.

2.11 GALVANIZE

A. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A123.

B. Galvanize Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A153 when used to connect steel members that are
specified to be galvanized.

C. Expansion Anchors, Adhesive Anchors, or Screw Anchors: Where specified to be galvanized,

anchors shall be mechanically galvanized in accordance with ASTM B695, Class 65, Type I.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Fabricate and erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and Code of Standard
Practice.

B. Notify Architect/Structural Engineer and Structural Testing/Inspection Agency at least 48 hours

prior to structural steel fabrication and erection.

3.2 ANCHOR ROD SETTING

A. Provide templates for setting anchor rods. Position anchor rods by using templates with two nuts
to secure in place prior to placement of concrete.

B. Do not erect steel where anchor rod nuts will not have full threads.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Provide a minimum of two fasteners at each bolted connection.

B. Ensure fasteners are lubricated prior to installation.

C. Provide high-strength bolted connections in accordance with AISC Specifications for Structural
Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.

051200 -5
 CHASE
SECTION 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

D. Provide connections for expansion and contraction where steel beams connect to concrete walls
or concrete columns and at expansion joints. Secure nuts on bolts against loosening. (Dent
threads with a chisel.)

3.4 FASTENER INSTALLATION

A. Bolts shall be installed in holes of the connection and brought to snug tight condition. Tighten
connection progressing systematically from the most rigid part to the free edges of the connection
to minimize relaxation of the bolts.

B. High-strength bolts installed shall have a hardened washer under the element turned in
tightening.

C. Installation and tightening of bolts shall conform to the AISC Specifications for Structural Joints.

3.5 EXPANSION ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and the ICC ESR report for the
particular anchor used.

B. Minimum Embedment: See Structural Notes on Drawings.

3.6 SCREW ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and the ICC ESR report for the
particular anchor used.

B. Minimum Embedment: See Structural Notes on Drawings.

3.7 HEADED STUDS

A. Headed studs shall be installed in accordance with AWS D1.1 with the resulting in-place length
after burn-off as shown on the Structural Drawings.

B. Do not locate headed studs closer than 1-1/4 inches from the edge of embedded steel member to
the centerline of the stud.

C. Remove ceramic arc shields after welding studs.

3.8 WELDING

A. Welding procedures, welder qualifications, and welding electrodes for structural steel shall be in
accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1 and as specified herein. Approved written
welding procedures shall be clearly posted at the job site and strictly adhered to during
construction. The ability of each welder to produce sound welds of all types required by the Work
shall be established by on-site welder qualifications satisfactory to the Structural Engineer, the
local building authority, and the welding inspector.

B. Provide end returns where fillet welds terminate at ends or sides. Returns shall be continuous for
a distance of not less than two times the nominal size of the weld.

C. Remove all slag and weld splatter from deposited weld metal.

051200 -6
 CHASE
SECTION 051200 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

3.9 SPLICING

A. Splice members only where indicated unless authorized in writing by Structural Engineer.

B. Provide shim plates at bottom flange splice at continuous beam splices with different depths.

3.10 CUTTING

A. Do not use flame cutting to correct errors unless authorized in writing.

B. Re-entrant corners shall have a minimum radius of one inch and be free of notches. Notches and
gouges resulting from flame cutting shall be finished to a smooth appearance.

3.11 MILL SCALE

A. Remove loose mill scale.

3.12 BOLT HOLES

A. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not enlarge holes by burning. Drill
or punch holes in bearing plates. Remove burrs.

3.13 PAINTING

A. Paint steel that is not encased in concrete, plaster, or sprayed fireproofing. Do not shop paint in
areas to be field welded, contact surfaces of slip critical connections, or areas to receive special
finishes.

B. Field paint as required steel that has been welded or that is unpainted after connections have
been tightened.

3.14 GALVANIZING

A. Galvanize shelf angles that support the exterior building veneer, for example brick shelf angles.

B. Galvanize environmentally exposed steel, for example mechanical equipment supports.

C. Touch-up welds and abrasions in galvanized members in accordance with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION

051200 -7
 CHASE
SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOISTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Open web steel joists and shear stud connectors, with bridging, attached seats and anchors.
B. Loose bearing members, such as plates or angles, and anchor bolts for site placement.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 051200 – Structural Steel: Superstructure framing.
C. 053100 – Steel Decking: Support framing for openings less than 18 inches in decking.
D. 055000 – Metal Fabrications: Non-framing steel fabrications attached to joists.
E. 092200 – Lightgage Metal Support Framing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2003.
2. A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware;
2005.
3. A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength;
2004.
B. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding
Society; 2006.
C. Steel Joist Institute (SJI
1. SJI (SPEC) - Catalog of Standard Specifications and Load Tables for Steel Joists and Joist
Girders; Steel Joist Institute; 2005.
2. SJI Technical Digest No. 9 - Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist
Institute; 2006.
D. Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective
Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate standard designations, joist coding, configurations, sizes, spacings,
cambers, locations of joists, joist leg extensions, bridging, connections, and attachments.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work, including that for headers and other supplementary framing, in accordance with SJI
Standard Specifications Load Tables and SJI Technical Digest No.9.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 5 years experience.
C. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3
years experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Transport, handle, store, and protect products to SJI requirements.

000000-1
 CHASE
SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOISTS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Joists:
1. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com (basis of design).
2. Any other manufacturer meeting the requirements of this Section.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Open Web Joists: SJI Type K Joists:
1. Provide bottom and top chord extensions as indicated.
2. End bearing of 2-1/2 inches on steel supports.
3. Finish: Shop primed.
B. Accessories: Comply with SJI Specifications.
C. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A 307, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class
C.
D. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars.
E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
F. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
G. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of size and
type required by SJI Specifications for type of joist, chord size and span.
2.3 FINISH
A. Shop prime joists as specified. Do not prome surfaces that will be field-welded or in contact with
concrete.
B. Prepare surfaces to be finished in accordance with SSPC-SP 2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Erect joists with correct bearing on supports.
B. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in
true alignment.
C. Coordinate the placement of anchors for securing loose bearing members furnished as part of the
work of this section.
D. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seats to steel bearing surfaces.
E. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seats to bearing plates.
F. Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends
of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminated at walls or beams.
G. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced bridged, and secured or until completion of
erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing.
H. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer.
I. After erection, prime welds, abrasions and surfaces not primed, except surfaces to be in contact with
concrete.
3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch.

000000-2
 CHASE
SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOISTS

B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

000000-3
 CHASE
SECTION 053100 – STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 1 Sections

B. Section 051200 – Structural Steel Framing.

C. Section 052100 – Steel Joist Framing.

1.2 REFERENCES

AISI – Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code.

AWS A5.5 – Specifications For Low Alloy Steel Covered Arc-Welding.

SDI 31 – Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks

SDI RDCH1 – Roof Deck Construction Handbook

SDI DDMO3 – Diaphragm Design Manual, Third Edition

ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

ASTM A1008 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and
Bake Hardenable.

ASTM C1513 – Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel-Framing
Connections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Notify the Structural Engineer prior to detailing shop drawings.

B. Submit detailed shop drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, weld sizes, weld
patterns and conditions requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strips,
cut openings, special jointing or other accessories.

C. Submit manufacturer’s information including section properties, deck gage, material yield
strength, etc. for each type of steel deck required. The submittal shall demonstrate that the deck
complies with the minimum section and material properties indicated in the structural notes and
this Specification.

D. Submit supporting documentation and manufacturer’s information for deck that does not comply
with the minimum section and material properties specified. Deck shall be designed for the design
criteria outlined herein and the submittal shall be stamped and signed by an Engineer licensed in
the project state.

E. Upon request, submit mill certification that the steel supplied meets these Specifications.

053100 -1
 CHASE
SECTION 053100 – STEEL DECKING

F. Upon request, submit written welding procedures.

G. Submit manufacturer's certification of compliance with supplementary framing, sump pans, cant
strips, curb openings, special jointing and other accessories.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to the Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the Structural Drawings.

B. Welders shall be certified by AWS for the welding process involved.

1.5 STORAGE

A. Store materials off ground to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Store steel
members and packaged items in a manner that provides protection against contact with
deleterious materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide steel deck sheets of three spans minimum wherever possible.

2.2 DECK ATTACHMENT

A. Use E-60 series electrodes conforming to AWS A5.5.

B. Provide weld washers for material thinner than 22 gage.

C. Provide screws conforming to ASTM C1513.

2.3 ROOF DECK

A. Roof Deck: Steel sheets, minimum yield strength of 33,000 pounds per square inch, ASTM
A653, Grade 33 or higher, deck types and gages as indicated on Drawings.

B. Finish: Galvanized, G60 coating.

C. End and Side Laps: 2-inch flush, nested unless otherwise indicated or specified.

2.4 ROOF SUMP PANS

A. Roof Sump Pans: Single piece of 14 gage galvanized sheet steel with level bottoms and sloping
sides to direct water flow to drain, when required by Architect. Size to receive roof drains and with
bearing flanges not less than 3 inches wide

053100 -2
 CHASE
SECTION 053100 – STEEL DECKING

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which metal decking is to be installed and
notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the
work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. Steel deck shall be installed in accordance with the approved shop drawings, requirements of the
Steel Deck Institute, the manufacturer’s recommendations, and any applicable regulatory, safety
guidelines.

3.2 PLACEMENT

A. Place steel deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position before
permanently fastening. Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and the Drawings, and as specified herein.

3.3 CUTTING

A. Cut holes in deck indicated by the Drawings. Other holes required shall be supplied by those
requiring them. Obtain written authorization for additional holes and cutting not indicated on
erection drawings.

3.4 WELDING

A. Perform welding in accordance with AWS Structural Welding Code.

B. Install weld washers for deck thinner than 22 gage.

3.5 CONCENTRATED LOADS

A. Concentrated loads suspended from the steel deck shall not exceed 50 pounds. No more than
one suspended load shall be located in the sheet width in any span.

3.6 DECK SUPPORTS

A. Fasten deck to steel framework at ends and at each intermediate support by welding according to
manufacturer’s specifications unless indicated otherwise on structural drawings or otherwise
specified herein. Do not weld deck in place until all bolted and welded connections for the
structural frame are complete. A minimum of one floor over the area to be decked is to be bolted
and welded prior to welding deck in place.

3.7 ROOF DECK

A. Place roof deck in straight alignment. Lap ends of sheets two inches.

B. Attach side laps of roof deck with screws spaced at a maximum of 24 inches on center for spans
greater than 4 feet unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.

B. Weld roof deck in place by welding with 5/8-inch puddle welds spaced 12 inches on center at
each support, unless shown otherwise by the Drawings.

053100 -3
 CHASE
SECTION 053100 – STEEL DECKING

C. Where screws are required in the drawings, screw fasteners shall extend through the steel
connection a minimum of three exposed threads.

3.8 ROOF SUMP PANS

A. Recess pans not less than 1½ inches below roof deck surface, unless otherwise shown or
required by deck configuration. Holes for drains will be cut in the field.

END OF SECTION

053100 -4
 CHASE
SECTION 054000 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formed steel stud exterior wall framing.
B. Formed steel joist framing and bridging.
C. ‘Sill Sealer’ sole plate gasket insulation.
D. Framing connectors and fasteners.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 042000 – Unit Masonry: Veneer masonry supported by wall stud metal framing.
C. 051200 – Structural Steel: Structural building framing.
D. 053100 – Steel Decking.
E. 054400 – Pre-engineered, Pre-fabricated Cold Formed Steel Roof Trusses.
F. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: Wood roof sheathing, blocking and miscellaneous framing.
G. 0616430-0Gypsum Sheathing.
H. 072117 – Fibrous Building Insulation.
I. 072124 – Spray-Applied Foam Insulation.
J. 072129 – Spray-Applied Cellulose Insulation.
K. 092200 – Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud framing, and
exterior wall sheathing.
L. 092900 – Gypsum Board.
M. 095113 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings: Ceiling suspension system.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
1. SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members;
2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)
2. AISI SG-971 - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; ; 1996,
with 2000 supplement.
3. AISI SG-973 - Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual; 1996.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM A153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2005.
2. ASTM A653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2006a.
3. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,
Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and
Metal Plaster Bases; 2006.
4. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial)
Steel Studs and Related Accessories; 2004.
C. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2006.
D. Society for Protective Coatings SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II,
"Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004).
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Size components to withstand design loads as follows:

054000-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 054000 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

1. Vertical Assembly: 18 psf positive and 18 psf negative. 90 MPH winds exposure C.
2. Horizontal Assembly: 30 psf live loads.
B. Horizontal Deflection: Design to permit maximum deflection of 1/600 of span.
C. Design wall system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals,
undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night
temperature ranges.
D. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members,
and clearances of intended openings.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product
criteria, limitations.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawings and calculations bearing the certification of a professional Structural Engineer
licensed in the state in which the project is located shall be submitted to the Architect of Record
for review and shall contain the following information:
a. Erection drawings showing location and spacing for all framing members.
b. Size and gauge of all members.
c. Detail drawings of all prefabricated assemblies.
d. Loading conditions used in design.
e. Calculated forces for all members.
f. Component details, anchorage details, connection details, splice details and temporary
bracing, welds, type and location of fasteners and accessories, or items required of related
work.
2. The information provided shall take into account and show all special design, framing, and
connection requirements, such as at concentrated loads, unbalanced or unsymmetrical load
conditions, and other non-typical framing details.
3. The plans and details indicate the general configuration of framing for typical conditions only.
Final configuration of details as well as all supplementary framing to obtain the roof profiles
shown on the plans shall be as determined by design.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special
attention.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional Structural
Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
B. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with requirements of AISI North
American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified
in this section, and with minimum 5 years of experience.
D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5
years of experience.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
1. Dietrich Metal Framing: www.dietrichindustries.com.
2. Marino\Ware: www.marinoware.com.

054000-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 054000 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

3. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEM
A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings,
reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.
B. Metal Framing Connectors and Accessories: same manufacturer as framing.
2.3 FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Studs and Track: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel, "C," or "Sigma" shape with punched web;
U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height.
1. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings.
2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M G90/Z275 coating.
B. Joists and Purlins: Fabricated from ASTM A 653/A 653M steel sheet, with G90/Z275 hot dipped
galvanized coating.
1. Base Metal: Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50/340, Class 1.
2. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings.
C. Framing Connectors: Factory-made formed steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M SS Grade 50, with
G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating and factory punched holes.
1. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicable code,
when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold
Formed Steel Structural Members; minimum 16 gage, 0.06 inch thickness.
2. Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation, roof-to-wall tie-down, joist to
beam attachment, gusset plates, and stiffeners.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered;
finish to match framing components.
B. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC
limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. ‘Sill Sealer’ sole plate gasket insulation
1. Material: roll-form closed cell plastic foam.
2. Location: at the top of foundation / slab or as otherwise indicated in the drawings, installed in
continuous strips without gaps in coverage.
3. Size: 1/4” thick, matching the width of the sole plate or base track.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A
153M.
B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated.
C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF STUDS
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C 1007 requirements.
B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum 24
inches on center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.
C. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install multiple studs at wall openings, door and
window jambs as indicated. Provide minimum 2 studs at each side of door and window openings.

054000-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 054000 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

D. Install load bearing studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted.
E. Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design
requirements.
F. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection.
G. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.
H. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load
bearing framing.
I. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls.
J. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud
rotation.
K. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOISTS
A. Install framing components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing.
C. Place joists at 24 inches o.c.max.; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls. Connect joists to
supports using fastener method.
D. Locate joist end bearing directly over load bearing studs or provide load distributing member to top of
stud track.
E. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points.
F. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch.
B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/8 inch.

END OF SECTION

054000-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 054100 – COLD-FORMED EXTERIOR STEEL STUD FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 1 Sections.

B. Section 054000 – Cold-Formed Steel Framing.

1.2 REFERENCES

AISI S100-07 – North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Form Steel Structural
Members.

AISI S200-07 – North American Standard for Cold-formed Steel Framing – General Provisions.

ANSI Z49.1 – Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes.

ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy
Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

ASTM A924 – Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process.

AWS D1.3 – Structural Welding Code: Sheet Steel.

SSMA – Steel Stud Manufacturers Association Product Technical Information.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design of the following is the sole responsibility of the Contractor:

1. Cold-formed exterior steel studs including tracks, bridging, and window or door framing.
2. Any required temporary and permanent restraint/bracing.

B. Cold-formed exterior steel stud framing shall be designed by a Structural Engineer licensed in the
Project state. Design criteria includes, but not limited to, the following:
1. Deflection of steel studs shall not exceed L/600 at Masonry Veneer and L/360 at the Metal
Panels.
2. Wind pressure for Components and Cladding as indicated in the Structural Drawings.

C. Cold-formed steel design, fabrication and erection shall conform to AISI S100 and AISI S200.

D. Stud depth, layout and configuration of cold-formed exterior steel studs shall be compatible with
the plans, sections, and details of the Construction Documents.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the Structural Drawings for additional submittal
requirements.

B. Shop Drawings
1. Shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
a. Plans, cross-sections, or elevations as necessary to adequately depict component
locations.

054100-1
 CHASE
SECTION 054100 – COLD-FORMED EXTERIOR STEEL STUD FRAMING

b.Framing details at wall openings including jamb members, headers, sills, and
connections.
c. Connection details showing screw types and locations, weld lengths or other fastener
requirements.
d. Bracing locations and details. Any required bracing to the primary structure that is not
shown in the Construction Documents shall be specifically identified.
2. Design loads.
3. Shall be sealed by an Engineer licensed in the Project state.

C. Submit manufacturer's product information clearly describing quality, performance and finish for
steel studs.

D. Submit manufacturer and Installer qualifications.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to the Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the Structural Drawings.

B. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of three years documented experience in the manufacturing
of products required by the Construction Documents.

C. Installer shall have a minimum of three years documented experience.

1.6 MOCKUP

A. Provide a minimum of one mockup of exterior wall framing sufficient in size to illustrate various
construction conditions and as directed by the Architect. Construct mock-up to include, but not be
limited to, the following components:
1. Stud framing, including runners, bridging, outlet box framing and other farming accessories.
Include interior and exterior corner conditions, and intersections with interior rated stud walls.
2. Typical window frame, door frame and expansion joint.
3. Insulation, sheathing and vapor retarder. Install sheathing with veneer anchors to receive
subsequent veneer mock-up.

B. The approved sample will serve as the standard of quality, as well as for coordination with related
components.

C. Leave approved mock-up ready to receive masonry veneer mock-up.

D. Do not place mock-up to remain as a part of the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Studs and accessories which are 12, 14, or 16 gage shall meet the requirements of ASTM
A653/653M, Grade D with a minimum yield of 50,000 psi. Studs and accessories which are 18 or
20 gage shall meet the requirements of ASTM A446, Grade A with a minimum yield of 33,000 psi.

B. Studs and accessories shall have a G60 galvanized coating meeting the requirements of ASTM
A525.

054100-2
 CHASE
SECTION 054100 – COLD-FORMED EXTERIOR STEEL STUD FRAMING

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: 1-1/2-inch deep by 16 gage minimum.

B. Strap Bracing: Minimum of 1-1/2-inch wide by 18 gage unless noted otherwise.

C. Tracks: Deep leg type, unpunched, same gage, size, and finish as studs with minimum 18 gage
thickness.

D. Compensation Tracks / Slip Tracks: Deep leg type with a flange width of 2½ inches. Track shall
be same nominal depth as stud/track with allowance for slip of standard deep leg track. Minimum
14 gage.

E. Plates, Gussets, Clip Angles: Minimum 14 gage. Clip angles shall be a minimum of 2 inches x 2
inches.

F. Self-drilling, Self-tapping Screws: Hot-dip galvanized conforming to values given in the referenced
SSMA document.

G. Anchorage Devices:
1. Powder Actuated Fasteners shall be manufactured from AISI 1062 or AISI 1065 steel
austempered to a minimum core hardness of 50-54Rc and possess the following properties:
Tensile strength = 270,000 psi
Shear strength = 162,000 psi
All fasteners shall meet the requirements of ASTM B-633-78.
Fasteners shall be a minimum 9/64-inch diameter.
Fasteners shall be zinc plated.
Fastener minimum design values shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2. Expansion anchors shall be stud type, and shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM
B633, Type III Fe/Zn 5. Expansion anchors shall be a minimum of 3/8-inch diameter with 2-
1/2-inch embedment into concrete unless noted otherwise in the Drawings.

H. Welding: AWS D1.3-8 Structural Welding Code-Sheet Metal (field welding of material shall not be
permitted for 20 gage material or thinner).

I. Acoustical Sealant: USG, or approved equal.

J. Sizes and thicknesses are minimum acceptable, regardless of load. Actual sizes shall be
determined by Steel Stud manufacturer in accordance with loads given in the Structural Notes.
Minimum listed size shall not be construed to be the actual designed component size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

A. General:
1. Framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular members or, as
required, for angular fit against abutting members.
2. Erect framing plumb, level, and square.
3. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned, and securely attached to the flanges or web of both the
upper and lower tracks.

054100-3
 CHASE
SECTION 054100 – COLD-FORMED EXTERIOR STEEL STUD FRAMING

4. Fastening of components shall be with self-drilling screws or welds. Wire tying of components
shall not be permitted. Touch-up field welds and scratched or damaged finish to studs with
zinc rich paint.
5. Splices in framing components shall not be permitted other than in runner tracks.
6. Runner tracks shall be securely anchored to the supporting structure.

B. Studs Spacing: Stud manufacturer shall determine stud spacing at interior and corner zones to
resist Component and Cladding Loads given in the Structural Notes. Stud spacing shall not
exceed 16 inches, center-to-center, regardless of design loads.

C. Stud Tracks: Before installing stud tracks for exterior walls, apply two 1/2- inch round beads of
acoustical sealant longitudinally under stud tracks to seal runner to floor.
1. Anchor stud tracks to floor with powder-driven fasteners sized and spaced to resist the
design loads. Spacing shall not exceed 16 inches, center-to-center.
2. Attach flange of stud to track with screw(s) through each flange, as required to resist the
design loads. Screws shall not be smaller than #8.

D. Door Openings: Install multiple studs each side of door openings as shown on the approved Shop
Drawings.
1. Install headers between door jambs at top of doors as shown on the approved Shop
Drawings.
2. On top of headers, install runners to receive bottom ends of studs over door openings.

E. Window Openings: Install multiple studs each side of window openings as shown on the
approved Shop Drawings.
1. Install headers and sills between window jambs shown on the approved Shop Drawings.
2. On top of headers and bottom of sills, install runners to receive short studs.
3. Where shown on the Architectural Drawings, attach wood blocking to stud framing with 1/2-
inch diameter galvanized bolts 12 inches on-center. Coordinate attachment of window
system to blocking/stud framing prior to erection of metal stud framing.
4. Where indicated on the Structural Drawings (for example, at windows over 8 feet wide and at
cantilevered parapets), attach studs / track to structural steel reinforcement with self-drilling
screws.

F. Corners: Construct using a minimum of three studs designed to resist the design loads.

G. Between Studs: Install framing for attachment of electrical boxes, mechanical and for other items
to be anchored to walls.

H. At Butting Walls: Place studs not more than 2 inches from walls.

I. Insulation: In all multiple jamb studs and multiple headers not accessible to insulation contractors,
insulation equal to that specified elsewhere shall be provided.

END OF SECTION

054100-4
 CHASE
SECTION 054000 - PRE-ENGINEERED, PRE-FABRICATED COLD-FORMED STEEL ROOF TRUSSES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pre-engineered, pre-fabricated cold-formed steel open web roof trusses.
B. Anchorage, bracing and bridging.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 042000 – Unit Masonry: Veneer masonry supported by wall stud metal framing.
C. 051200 – Structural Steel: Structural building framing.
D. 053100 – Steel Decking.
E. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: Wood roof sheathing, blocking and miscellaneous framing.
F. 061643 – Gypsum Sheathing.
G. 092200 – Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud framing, and
exterior wall sheathing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM:
1. ASTM A653/A653M: Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Glavanealed) by the Hot Dip Process; latest edition.
2. ASTM A1008/1008M: “Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled; latest edition.
3. ASTM A780-93a: Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings;
latest edition.
B. American Welding Society (AWS)
1. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code - Steel; latest edition.
2. AWS D1.3: Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; latest edition.
C. Structural Building Components Association - Cold-Formed Steel Building Component Safety
Information (CFSBCSI)
D. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
1. AISI S100: North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members; latest edition.
2. AISI S214: Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Truss Design; latest edition.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AISI “Specifications”: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel truss members
according to AISA S100: North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members.
B. Structural Performance: Design, fabricate, and erect cold-formed steel trusses to withstand
specified design loads within limits and under conditions required.
1. Design Loads: As specified.
2. Deflections: Live load deflection meeting the following (unless otherwise specified):
a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection less than or equal to Length/240.
b. Floor Trusses: Vertical deflection less than or equal to Length/480.
3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage
or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and
anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature
change (range) of 120 deg F (67 deg C).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 013000 for general submittal requirements.

054400-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 054000 - PRE-ENGINEERED, PRE-FABRICATED COLD-FORMED STEEL ROOF TRUSSES

B. S
ubmit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for each type of cold-formed steel
framing and accessory required.
C. Submit detailed floor truss and roof truss layouts indicating placement of trusses.
D. Submit individual truss drawings, sealed and signed by a qualified Professional Engineer licensed
in the stat in which the project is located, verifying accordance with local building code and design
requirements. Include:
1. Description of design criteria.
2. Engineering analysis depicting member stresses and truss deflection.
3. Truss member sizes and thickness and connections at truss joints.
4. Truss support reactions.
E. Top chord, Bottom chord and Web bracing requirements.
F. Submit final roof and floor plan drawings sealed and signed by a qualified Professional Engineer
licensed in the stat in which the project is located, depicting final installed truss assembly. Include:
1. All truss to truss connections.
2. All truss to structure (bearing) connections.
3. Plan and details for the location of all permanent lateral and diagonal bracing and/or blocking
required in the top chord, web, and bottom chord planes. (Diaphragms excluded).
4. Field measurements of the as-built bearing conditions.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the
Project is located.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Fabrication shall be performed in a quality controlled manufacturing
environment by a cold-formed steel truss fabricator with minimum 5 years experience fabricating
Cold-Formed Steel trusses equal in material, design, and scope to the trusses required for this
Project.
C. Installer qualifications: Installation of Cold Formed steel truss roof or floor assembly shall be
performed by an installer with minimum 5 years experience installing Cold-Formed Steel trusses
equal in material, design and scope to the trusses required for this Project.
D. Welding Standards
1. Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code – Steel and AWS
D1.3: Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel.
2. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification
Procedure.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers or bundles, fully identified by name,
brand, type and grade. Exercise care to avoid damage during unloading, storing and erection.
B. Store trusses on blocking, pallets, platforms or other supports off the ground and in an
upright position sufficiently braced to avoid damage from excessive bending.
C. Protect trusses and accessories from corrosion, deformation, damage and deterioration when
stored at job site. Keep trusses free of dirt and other foreign matter.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated in the shop drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Aegis Metal Framing, LLC, www.Ultraspan.com (basis of design).

054400-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 054000 - PRE-ENGINEERED, PRE-FABRICATED COLD-FORMED STEEL ROOF TRUSSES

B. Tremco, Inc., www.tremcoroofing.com.

C. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Shop-fabricated cold-formed steel roof truss and floor truss components.
B. Provide manufacturer’s standard steel truss members, bracing, bridging, blocking, reinforcements,
fasteners and accessories with each type of steel framing required, as recommended by the
manufacturer for the applications indicated and as needed to provide a complete cold-formed steel
truss roof or floor assembly.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Materials
1. For all chord and web members : Fabricate components of structural quality steel sheet per
ASTM A653 with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.
2. Bracing, bridging and blocking members: Fabricate components of commercial quality steel
sheet per ASTM A653 with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi.
B. Truss components: Provide sizes, shapes and material thickness indicated in construction
documents.
C. Finish: Provide components with protective zinc coating complying with ASTM A653, minimum G60
coating.
D. Fastenings
1. Manufacturer recommended self-drilling screws with corrosion-resistant plated finish. Fasteners
shall be of sufficient size and number to ensure the strength of the connection.
2. Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 when applicable and AWS D1.3 for welding base metals less
than 1/8” thick.
3. Other fasteners as accepted by truss engineer.

2.4 FABRICATION
A. Factory fabricate cold-formed steel trusses plumb, square, true to line, and with connections
securely fastened, according to manufacturer’s recommendations and the requirements of this
Section.
1. Fabricate truss assemblies in jig templates.
2. Cut truss members by sawing or shearing or plasma cutting.
3. Fasten cold-formed steel truss members by screw fastening, or other methods as standard with
fabricator.
a. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-formed steel truss component
manufacturer’s instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3
exposed screw threads.
B. Care shall be taken during handling, delivery and erection. Brace, block, or reinforce truss as
necessary to minimize member and connection stresses. Refer to SBCA - CFSBCSI.
C. Fabrication Tolerances
1. Overall Length: Fabricate each cold-formed steel truss to the maximum allowable tolerance as
follows
a. Truss length up to 30 ft.: 1/2” tolerance.
b. Truss length over 30 ft.: 3/4” tolerance.
2. Overall Height: Fabricate each cold-formed steel truss to the maximum allowable tolerance as
follows:
a. Truss height up to 5 ft.: 1/4” tolerance.
b. Truss height over 5 ft.: 1/2” tolerance.
3. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel truss to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of
1/8”.

054400-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 054000 - PRE-ENGINEERED, PRE-FABRICATED COLD-FORMED STEEL ROOF TRUSSES

2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered;
finish to match framing components.
B. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC
limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153/A
153M.
B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated.
C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine structure, substrates and installation conditions. Do not proceed with cold-formed steel
truss installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory
performance.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General
1. Erection of trusses, including proper handling, safety precautions, installation bracing and other
safeguards or procedures is the responsibility of the Contractor and Contractor’s installer. Refer
to SBCA - CFSBCSI.
2. Exercise care and provide installation bracing required to prevent toppling of trusses during
erection. Where applicable, provide truss manufacturer’s pre-fabricated bracing members for
lateral bracing.
B. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical and parallel to each other, accurately located at
design spacing indicated.
C. Provide proper lifting equipment, including spreader bar, suited to sizes and types of trusses
required, applied at lift points recommended by truss fabricator. Exercise care to avoid damage to
truss members during erection and to keep horizontal bending of the trusses to a minimum.
D. Provide framing anchors as indicated or accepted on the engineering design drawing or erection
drawings. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points.
E. Install trusses plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to
manufacturer’s recommendations.
1. DO NOT cut truss members without prior approval of truss engineer.
2. Fasten cold-formed steel trusses by screw fastening, welding or other methods, as standard with
fabricator.
a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-formed truss manufacturer’s
instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw
threads.
3. Install trusses in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated.
4. Provide installation bracing and leave in place until trusses are permanently stabilized.
F. Erection Tolerances:
1. Install trusses to a maximum allowable tolerance variation for level and true to line of 1/8 inch in
10 feet (1:960).

054400-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 054000 - PRE-ENGINEERED, PRE-FABRICATED COLD-FORMED STEEL ROOF TRUSSES

2. Space individual trusses no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location.
Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other
finishing materials.
3. Limit out-of-plane bow and plumb per SBCA – CFSBCSI.
G. Adequately distribute all loads applied to trusses so as not to exceed the carrying capacity of any
one truss.
3.3 ROOF TRUSS INSTALLATION
A. Install trusses per installation documents provided for in Section 1.5 (D)
B. Space trusses per sealed truss drawings.
C. Do not alter, cut, or remove truss members or connections of truss members.
D. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately
position at spacing indicated.
E. Erect trusses without damaging truss members or connections.
F. Anchor trusses securely at all points of support, per installation documents provided for in Section
1.5 (D)
G. Install all continuous bridging and permanent truss bracing per installation documents provided for
in Section 1.5 (D).
H. Perform all truss to truss connections per installation documents provided for in Section 1.5 (D).
3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed
cold-formed steel framing with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A780 and the
manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION

054400-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Permanently mounted ladders.
B. Handrails, guards, etc.
C. Loose masonry veneer lintels.
D. Miscellaneous shop- or field-fabricated metal items indicated in the drawings or other construction
documents.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 014000 – Quality Assurance: Requirements for testing and inspections.
C. 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.
D. 042000 – Unit Masonry: Building in of metal fabrications.
E. 051200 – Structural Steel: Steel elements indicated on the Structural Drawings.
F. 084400 – Curtain Wall and Glazed Assemblies.
G. 099100 – Paints: Field painting of metal fabrications shop primed in this section.
H. 347100 – Bollards
I. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section
016000.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A36 - Specification for Structural Steel.
2. A53 - Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.
3. A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
4. A143 - Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot Dipped Galvanized Structural Steel Products
and Procedures for Detecting Embrittlement.
5. A153 - Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
6. A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
7. A366 - Specification for Carbon Steel Cold Rolled Sheet.
8. A384 - Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot Dip Galvanizing of Steel
Assemblies.
9. A385 - Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot Dip).
10. A500 - Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Rounds and Shapes.
11. A501 - Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
12. A569 - Specification for Commercial Quality Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip Carbon (0.15 Maximum
Percent) Steel.
13. A570 - Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality.
14. A1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013000.
B. Product Literature: Submit product literature for all prefabricated products.
C. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation; indicate materials, thicknesses,
dimensions, methods of reinforcement and embedment, attachments, shop finishes, provisions for
work of other trades, and other pertinent information as requested by Architect.

055000-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

D. Quality Control Submittal: Submit written certification that items been designed to meet the specified
requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced and regularly engaged in producing metal fabrications of the
type specified; must employ only skilled personnel using proper equipment to produce work.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Metal fabrications shall be designed to meet the requirements of the jurisdictional code
authorities.
2. Furnish all calculations, engineer's stamps, drawings, and other items required by the code
authorities to obtain approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Carbon Steel:
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36.
2. Sheet: ASTM A366.
3. Pipe: ASTM A53, seamless, Type S, plain end; schedule 40 unless indicated otherwise.
B. Fasteners: Types as indicated, specified, or required for the assembly and installation of fabricated
items.
1. Bolts: ASTM A307, unless indicated otherwise; include nuts and plain hardened washers.
2. Drilled-In Concrete Anchors: Ramset "Trubolt Stud Anchor," Hilti Fastening Systems "Kwikbolt,"
or approved.
C. Interior Primer: Modified alkyd type (VOC compliant); lead and chromate free; gray or white color;
one of the following unless approved otherwise.
1. "Azeron Primer Series 88HS" by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400).
2. "Amercoat 5105" by Ameron Protective Coatings (Brea, CA; 714-529-1951).
3. "Carbocoat 150HG" by Carboline Company (St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000; 800-848-4645).
D. Exterior Finish Materials:
1. Manufacturer: Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400).
2. Zinc Primer: "Series 394 PerimePrime"; single component moisture cured primer.
3. Finish: refer to Section 099100 – Paints.
E. Cold Galvanizing Compound: "Galv-Weld," "Galvican," "ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound," or
equivalent zinc-rich primer.
F. Miscellaneous Materials: Furnish incidental accessory materials, tools, and equipment as necessary
for fabrication and installation of miscellaneous metal items as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Non-Shrink Grout: Master Builder's "Master Flow 713," Sonneborn "Sonogrout," or approved
equal.
2.2 PREFABRICATED COMPONENTS
A. Gate Hinges: refer to Door Hardware Schedule.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate as follows, unless specified or indicated otherwise.
1. Verify all dimensions and fabricate to detail with accurate sizes and shapes, straight lines,
smooth curves, and sharp angles.
2. Welds shall have sufficient strength to withstand the loads applied.
3. For items exposed to view or subject to contact, grind welds smooth and level with adjacent
surfaces; remove all burrs from cut edges. Fill imperfections with body putty as necessary for a
smooth even finish.
4. Bend curved sections to a smooth radius free from buckles and twists.
5. Fabrications in exterior locations shall be fabricated to shed water.
6. All welds on fabrications to receive organic zinc primer shall be continuous, full length of joint.

055000-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

B. Fabrication of Elements to Receive Galvanized Coatings:

1. Fabricate in accordance with the applicable requirements of ASTM A143, A384, and A385.
2. Remove welding slag and burrs prior to galvanizing.
3. Avoid fabrication techniques which could cause distortion or embrittlement of the steel.
2.4 SHOP FINISHES
A. Hot Dip Galvanizing:
1. Steel fabrications shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bolts, nuts, washers, and
other hardware shall be galvanized in accordance with A153.
2. Surface Finish: The galvanized coatings shall be continuous, firmly adhered, smooth, and free
from defects.
3. Locations: Provide hot dip galvanizing for all metal fabrications in exterior or moist conditions,
unless otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, plug and cold galvanize
ventilation and lifting holes which will be exposed to moisture penetration in the finished work.
B. Interior Primed finish:
1. Preparation: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC-SP1. Remove rust and scale by wire
brushing, scraping, and sanding down to bare metal in accordance with SSPC-SP2 and SP3.
Where SP2 and SP3 measures are insufficient, provide commercial blast cleaning in accordance
with SSPC-SP6. Immediately apply specified prime coat.
2. Apply interior primer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Locations: Provide at all interior metal fabrication exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
Do not prime surfaces to be embedded in concrete, and surfaces to be field welded.
C. Interior Special Finish: Prepare and apply prime coat as specified in Section 099100 - Paints.
D. Exterior Special Finish:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the finish coat manufacturer's recommendations, and as
specified below.
2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean per SSPC SP1.
3. Commercial blast ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP10. Abrade
surfaces with 3M "Scotchbrite Heavy Duty" (brown) pad, or as necessary to achieve sufficient
profile for paint adhesion.
4. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP-1; commercial blast ungalvanized ferrous metal
surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP10. Abrade galvanized surfaces with a metal preparation
pad.
5. Apply primers to receive field application of finish coats as specified in Section 099000.
6. Except for surfaces indicated to be field welded, coat all surfaces of fabrication, whether or not
exposed to view in installed position.
7. Maintain at least one coat of primer at all times during installation. Immediately patch damaged
coatings.
8. Finish coat shall be free of dirt, flow lines, sags, blisters, pinholes, and other surface
imperfections.
9. Locations: Provide at all exterior metal fabrication exposed to view, and other fabrications as
scheduled. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded.
2.5 PROTECTION
A. For metal in contact with concrete, masonry, and other dissimilar materials, coat contact surfaces with
zinc-rich primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.

055000-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Precisely install metal fabrications in locations shown. Unless indicated otherwise, fabrications shall
be installed plumb and level.
B. Provide all anchorage devices as indicated and required for a secure installation.
C. Touch-up all surfaces damaged during installation. Patch all welds and damage marks with matching
primer(s).
D. Coordinate with Section 033000 for concrete fill at pipe bollards.
E. Erection Tolerances (as Applicable)
1. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
2. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
3. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

055000-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Structural and non-structural dimension lumber framing.
B. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.
C. Roof decking and sheathing and wall sheathing.
D. Structural-use wood panels.
E. Preservative treated wood materials.
F. Fire retardant treated wood materials.
G. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing, including nailers, cants, blocking, supports, furring and
grounds.
H. Communications and electrical room mounting boards.
I. Air infiltration barrier (building wrap).
J. ‘Sill Sealer’ sole plate gasket insulation.
K. Metal framing connectors and fasteners.
L. Construction adhesives.
M. Pre-fabricated decorative fiberglass columns.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 051200 – Structural Steel: Prefabricated beams and columns for support of wood framing.
C. 055000 – Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for wood framing.
D. 061754 – Plate Connected Wood Trusses.
E. 072500 – Weather Barriers.
F. 075400 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: deck sheathing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AFPA T10 - Wood Frame Construction Manual; American Forest and Paper Association; latest
edition.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A153/A153M: Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; latest edition.
2. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
latest edition.
C. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA)
1. AWPA C2: Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties Preservative Treatment by Pressure
Processes; latest edition.
2. AWPA C9: Plywood Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; latest edition.
3. AWPA C20: Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; latest edition.
4. AWPA C27: Plywood Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; latest edition.
D. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC).
E. U.S. Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)
1. NIST PS 1: Structural Plywood; latest edition.
2. NIST PS 20: American Softwood Lumber Standard; latest edition.
F. SPIB GR: Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB), Inc.; latest edition.

061000-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

G. WWPA G-5: Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; latest edition.
H. APA E30: Engineered Wood Construction Guide0 American Plywood Association (APA); latest
edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product data for each type of process and factory-fabricated product indicated
1. Include data foe wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatments from chemical treatment
manufacturers and certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements.
C. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses.
D. Research / evaluation reports
1. Treated wood.
2. Power-driven and powder-actuated fasteners and expansion anchors.
3. Metal framing anchors.
4. Air Infiltration Barrier / Building Wrap and associated fasteners, sealants and tapes.
5. Construction adhesives.
6. ‘Sill Sealer’ gasket insulation.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies.
B. Each piece of lumber delivered from the vendor shall bear grade mark, stamp or other identifying
mark indicating grade of material and grading agency rules under which the material was produced.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Protect lumber and other products from dampness both during and after delivery at site.
B. Stack lumber in such manner as to provide air circulation around surfaces of each piece.
C. Stack plywood and other board products so as to prevent warping.
D. Locate stacks on well drained areas, supported at least 150 mm (6 inches) above grade and cover
with well ventilated sheds having firmly constructed over hanging roof with sufficient end wall to
protect lumber from driving rain.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies for dimension lumber.
B. Species
1. Douglas Fir-Larch and Hem-Fir: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).
2. Southern Pine: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB).
3. Spruce-Pine-Fir: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association (NLMA).
C. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
D. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19 (19% maximum).
E. Minimum grades
1. Stud framing (2 x 2 through 2 x 6): No. 2 and better.
2. Joist, rafter, and small beam framing (2 x 6 through 4 x 16): No. 2 and better.
3. Miscellaneous load-bearing framing, blocking, nailers, grounds, and furring: No. 2 and better.
4. Miscellaneous non-load-bearing framing, blocking, nailers, grounds, and furring: No. 3 / Utility /
Standard and better.

061000-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

2.3 STRUCTURAL-USE WOOD PANELS

A. Where structural-use panels are indicated, provide APA-performance-rated panels complying with the
requirements designated under each application for grade, span rating, exposure durability
classification and edge detail.
B. Roof decking: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure 1, Structural I, span rating 40/20, thickness as
indicated.
C. Wall and roof sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure I, thickness as indicated.
D. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Interior grade, A-D plywood; 3/4 inch thick;
fire retardant treated, flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
E. All construction panels shall be Formaldehyde Free.
2.4 DECORATIVE FIBERGLASS COLUMNS
A. Manufacturers, products
1. HB&G, www.hbgcolumns.com, Permacast Round No-Taper factory-split columns.
2. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
B. Accessories
1. Column manufacturer’s standard installation kit or otherwise specified hardware, adhesives and
sealants.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Metal framing connectors, fasteners and anchors
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless
steel where rough carpentry is exposed to weather or for high humidity and/or preservative-
treated wood locations, standard galvanized steel elsewhere. Unfinished steel is not acceptable.
2. Nails, wire, brads and staples: FS FF-N-105.
3. Power-driven fasteners: CABO NER-272.
4. Wood screws: ASME B18.6.1.
5. Lag bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
6. Bolts: steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A, with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
7. Refer to Section 055000 – Metal Fabrications.
B. Sill sealer gasket on top of foundation wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from
continuous rolls.
C. Air infiltration barrier: Refer to Section 072600 – Weather Barriers, Air Barrier Sheet.
D. Construction adhesives: As recommended by the lumber manufacturer and grading agency use guide
for the intended use, meeting the ASTM testing requirements for the use and exposure.
2.6 WOOD-RESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply
with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item
with the quality mark requirements of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
1. Do not use chemicals containing Chromium or Arsenic, except where specifically noted as “CCA
Planks”, which shall be treated with Chromated Copper Arsenate, in accordance with the
standards listed above.
2. For exposed items indicated to receive stained finish, use chemical formulations that do not
bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
B. Above-ground preservative-treated-wood materials shall be treated with waterborne preservatives to a
minimum retention of 0.25 lb./cu.ft. and kiln-dried to a maximum moisture content of 19% for lumber
and 15% for plywood. Treat all materials as indicated in the construction documents and the
following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and water proofing.

061000-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
3. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs in direct contact with earth.
C. Pressure-treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a
minimum retention of 0.40 lb./cu.ft.
D. Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. Of cut after treatment, apply
field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood
after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
2.7 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Where fire-retardant-treated wood is indicated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C20
(lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification
marking of U.L.; U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Research or Evaluation reports: Provide fire-retardant-treated wood acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and for which a current model code research or evaluation report exists that
evidences compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood for application indicated.
2. For exposed items indicated to receive stained finish, use chemical formulations that do not
bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
B. Interior Type: For interior locations, use chemical formulation that produces treated lumber and
plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation:
1. Bending strength, stiffness and fastener-holding capacities are not reduced below values
published by manufacturer of chemical formulation under elevated temperature and humidity
conditions simulating installed conditions when tested by a qualified independent testing agency.
2. No form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to treatment.
3. Contact with treated wood does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
C. Exterior Type: Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
D. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective
pieces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket cleanly to fit
tightly around protruding anchor bolts.
B. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.
3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after
installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.3 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower
required strength.
B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to
maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of
permanent bracing.
C. Install structural members full length without splices.

061000-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing
indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction
Manual.
E. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing at
each end.
F. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.
G. Discard material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use with
minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
H. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Coordinate
location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow for attachment of other
construction.
I. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and
plywood.
J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the most restrictive requirements of the following:
1. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
2. International Building Code Chapter 23 fastening schedules for dimension lumber and structural-
use panels.
3. Factory Mutual standards specified in Section 076200 – Flashing and Sheet Metal Trim.
K. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select
fasteners of a size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view
or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood; predrill as required.
3.4 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by
applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and
roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood
blocking.
C. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless
item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated.
D. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling,
unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.
E. Attach to substrates to support applied loading and meet applicable referenced standards. Recess
bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation
for masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
F. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less that 1 1/2”
wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove
temporary grounds when no longer required.
G. Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking:
1. Cabinets and shelf supports.
2. Grab bars.
3. Towel and bath accessories.
4. Wall-mounted door stops.
5. Gypsum board interior finish system edges and corners.
3.5 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY
A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and
roofing assembly installation.

061000-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

3.6 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD

A. Coordinate installation of wood decking and prefabricated wood trusses.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS
A. Roof decking: Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with ends
staggered and over firm bearing.
1. At panel edges between roof framing members, use sheathing "H" clips between sheets,
minimum 1 per span.
2. Screw panels to metal framing and nail panels to wood framing; staples are not permitted.
B. Wall and roof sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm
bearing and staggered, using screws.
1. Place air infiltration barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and ends.
C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over
firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of
board.
1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.
2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel
to studs.
3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
B. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION

061000-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 061643 – EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fiberglass-mat faced, moisture- and mold-resistant gypsum sheathing.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 053100 – Steel Decking.
C. 054000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing.
D. 061000 - Rough Carpentry.
E. 061000 – Rough Carpentry.
F. 072113 – Board Insulation.
G. 072400 – Exterior Insulation and Finish System.
H. 072500 – Weather Barriers.
I. 092200 – Lightgage Metal Support Framing.
J. 092423 – Portland Cement Stucco.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM C473: Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products; latest
edition.
2. ASTM C518: Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; latest edition.
3. ASTM C920: Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; latest edition.
4. ASTM C1002: Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application
of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; latest edition.
5. ASTM C1177: Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing;
latest edition.
6. ASTM C1184: Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants; latest edition.
7. ASTM C1280: Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing; latest edition.
8. ASTM D3273: Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; latest edition.
9. ASTM D6329: Standard Guide for Developing Methodology for Evaluating the Ability of Indoor
Materials to Support Microbial Growth Using Static Environmental Chambers; latest edition.
10. ASTM E72: Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building
Construction; latest edition.
11. ASTM E96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; latest edition.
B. GA-253 Application of Gypsum Sheathing; Gypsum Association (GA); latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each product specified.
1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide products that offer twelve months of coverage against in-place exposure damage
(delamination, deterioration and decay).
B. Manufacturer’s Warranty:
1. Five years against manufacturing defects.

061643-1
 CHASE
SECTION 061643 – EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING

2. Ten years against manufacturing defects when used as a substrate in architecturally specified
EIFS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Fiberglass-mat faced gypsum sheathing
1. Manufactured in accordance with ASTM C1177.
2. Thickness: 1/2” or 5/8” as noted in drawings.
3. Provided in largest available panels to minimize joints.
4. Edges: square.
5. Surfacing: fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges.
6. Mold resistance 10 per ASTM D3273.
7. Microbial resistance: Will not support microbial growth per ASTM D6329, GREENGUARD 3-
week protocol).
8. Manufacturers, products
a. Georgia-Pacific; www.gp.com; DensGlass.
b. United States Gypsum Corp.; www.usg.com; Securock.
c. Certainteed Corporation; www.certainteed.com; GlasRoc.
d. National Gypsum Company; www.nationalgypsum.com; Gold Bond eXP.
e. Substitutions: refer to section 016000.
B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing, Type X
1. Manufactured in accordance with ASTM C1177, Type X.
2. Thickness: 5/8.
3. Provided in largest available panels to minimize joints.
4. Edges: square.
5. Surfacing: fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges.
6. Mold resistance 10 per ASTM D3273.
7. Microbial resistance: Will not support microbial growth per ASTM D6329, GREENGUARD 3-
week protocol).
8. Manufacturers, products
a. Georgia-Pacific, www.gp.com, DensGlass.
b. United States Gypsum Corp., www.usg.com, Securock.
c. Certainteed Corporation, www.certainteed.com, GlasRoc.
d. National Gypsum Company; www.nationalgypsum.com; Gold Bond eXP.
e. Substitutions: refer to section 016000.
C. Screws: ASTM C1002, corrosion resistant treated.
D. Joint and penetration sealant: cured single- or multi-component cold-applied elastomeric structural
silicone joint sealant compliant with ASTM C920 and ASTM C1184.
1. Classifications: Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, A and O.
2. Manufacturers, products
a. Dow Corning Corporation; www.dowcorning.com; #795.
b. Pecora Corporation; www.pecora.com; #890 and #890-TBS.
c. GE / Momentiv Performance Materials; www.siliconeforbuilding.com; SilPruf SCS2000.
d. Substitutions: refer to section 016000.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.

061643-2
 CHASE
SECTION 061643 – EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING

C. Verify that framing is ready for installation of sheathing.

3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Install boards parallel or perpendicular to framing. Install boards parallel to framing at fire rated walls.
Apply sheathing with joints staggered. All edges shall be firmly supported.
B. Install sheathing boards parallel or perpendicular to framing. Install parallel to framing at fire rated
walls. Apply sheathing with vertical joints staggered. All edges shall be supported as follows:
1. Maximum span: 24 inches.
2. Maximum cantilever: 2 inches.
C. Install sheathing with coating towards exterior.
D. Screw to framing. Space fasteners 8 inches o.c. in field and 4 inches o.c. at ends along each framing
member.
E. Do not bridge expansion or seismic joints.
F. Coordinate with Division 26 work for cutouts for electrical penetrations.
G. Install gypsum sheathing to exterior soffits indicated for portland cement plaster.
H. If sheathing is not to be covered by finish material within 6 months after purchase, cover the material
as necessary to maintain the manufacturer's warranty.
I. General: In accordance with GA-253, ASTM C1280 and the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect gypsum board installations from damage and deterioration until date of Substantial
Completion.

END OF SECTION

061643-3
 CHASE
SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Custom wood millwork.
B. Wood door and glazing frame assemblies.
C. Interior standing and running wood and laminate trim.
D. Interior wood and laminate panel assemblies.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 061000 – Rough Carpentry.
C. 064116 – Plastic Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets.
D. 088000 – Glazing.
E. 099100 – Paints.
F. 099300 – Stains and Transparent Finishes.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Woodwork Standards; Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork
Manufacturers Association of Canada / Woodwork Institute (AWI/AWMAC/WI); latest edition.
B. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood
& Veneer Association; latest edition.
C. U.S Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)
1. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; latest edition.
2. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; latest edition.
D. NHLA Grading Rules for North American Hardwoods; National Hardwood Lumber Association; latest
edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings in conformance with the requirements of the Architectural Woodwork
Standards.
2. Submit two copies, one of which will be returned with reviewed notations. Make corrections noted
(if any), and distribute required copies prior to the start of work.
B. Samples:
1. Submit four samples of each species and profile of wood to be used. Lumber samples to be
minimum 6” length, plywood samples to be minimum 12” by 12”. Samples shall represent the
range of color and grain expected to be provided.
2. Submit four additional samples of each material for the use of the paint trade.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work shall be in accordance with the Grade or the Grades Specified of Architectural Woodwork
Standards.
B. Qualification:
1. Firm (woodwork manufacturer) with no less than 5 years of production experience similar to this
Project, whose qualifications indicate the ability to comply with the requirements of this Section.
2. The woodwork manufacturer must have had at least one project in the past 5 years where the
scope of the woodwork was similar to this project.
C. Single Source Responsibility: A single manufacturer shall provide and install the work of this Section.

000000-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials only when the project is ready for installation and the general contractor has
provided a clean storage area.
1. Delivery of architectural millwork shall be made only when the area of operation is enclosed, all
plaster and concrete work is dry and the area broom clean.
2. Maintain indoor temperature and humidity within the range recommended by the Architectural
Woodwork Standards for the location of the project.
3. Protect work from moisture damage.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate fabrication, delivery, and installation with the general contractor and other applicable
trades.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI Architectural Woodwork
Standards for Custom grade.
B. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.2 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Lumber shall be sound, kiln dried, and in accordance with the Architectural Woodwork Standards
requirements for its use and the Grade specified.
B. Softwood lumber: not permitted.
C. Hardwood lumber for paint finish: Poplar species, maximum moisture content 9%, NHLA Grade No. 1
Common or better.
D. Hardwood lumber for stain and clear finish: Species as indicated on drawings, NHLA Grade FAS/1F.
E. Particleboard and similar low-density manufactured wood products are not acceptable.
2.3 SHEET MATERIALS
A. All plywood shall be fabricated with adhesives free from added urea-formaldehyde.
B. Softwood plywood: not permitted.
C. Hardwood plywood: PS 1 Grade A-B; veneer core; species as indicated in drawings, rotary cut.
D. Veneer plywood for paint finish: MDF, MDO or PS1 Grade A-B; veneer core; rotary cut; Poplar, Alder
or Birch species.
E. Veneered components shall be in accordance with the Architectural Woodwork Standards
requirements for the Grade specified.
2.4 ADHESIVE
A. Component adhesive: Type II.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; Galvanized finish in concealed locations and bright
finish in exposed locations.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Glass: As indicated in the drawings and as specified in Section 088000.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.

000000-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY

B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide
trim for scribing and site cutting.
C. Interior Millwork shall be Architectural Woodwork Standards Custom Grade
D. Door and glazing frame assemblies shall be solid wood flat jamb with applied stop.
E. Exposed edges of sheet materials shall be edge banded with closed grain hardwood veneer
matching the species of the panel veneer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B. Verify that mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and other building components effecting work in this
Section are in place and ready.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install all work in conformance with the Architectural Woodwork Standards, latest edition.
1. Installation shall conform to the AWS Grade of the items being installed.
B. All work shall be secured in place, square, plumb, and level.
C. All work abutting other building components shall be properly scribed.
D. Mechanical fasteners used at exposed and semi-exposed surfaces shall be countersunk.
3.3 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Set exposed fasteners. Sand work smooth.
B. All nicks, chips and scratches shall be sanded out or filled and re-touched. Damaged items which
cannot be repaired shall be replaced
C. Refer to Sections 099100 – Paints and 099300 – Stains and Transparent Finishes.
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
3.5 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of installation, the installer shall clean all installed items of pencil and ink marks, and
broom clean the area of operation, depositing debris in containers provided by the general contractor.

END OF SECTION

000000-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 064113 – WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wood-veneer-faced architectural cabinets.
B. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing architectural cabinets that are not
concealed within other construction.
C. Shop finishing of architectural cabinets.
D. Cabinet hardware.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 055000 – Metal Fabrications
C. 061000 – Rough Carpentry
D. 064116 – Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets
E. 092800 – Gypsum Board
F. 079200 – Joint Sealants
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; latest edition.
B. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; latest edition.
C. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; latest
edition.
D. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada /
Woodwork Institute (AWI/AWMAC/WI) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; latest edition.
E. American National Standards Institute / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA)
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware;latest edition.
2. ANSI/BHMA A156.11 - Cabinet Locks; latest edition.
F. GSA CID A-A-1936 - Adhesive, Contact, Neoprene Rubber; Federal Specifications and Standards;
latest edition.
G. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
latest edition.
H. WI (MAN) - Manual of Millwork; Woodwork Institute; latest edition.
I. SPIB (GR) – Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; latest edition.
J. Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; latest edition.
K. Eastern White Pine Grading Rules; Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Show details full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking and hanging strips, including concealed blocking
and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing and electrical fixtures and devices,
and other items installed in plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets.
4. Shoe veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers
indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.

064113-1
 CHASE
SECTION 064113 – WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

5. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to shop drawings.

C. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, finishes, and cabinet hardware and
accessories.
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification
from treatment plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
D. Samples:
1. For each exposed product and for each color and finish specified, including edge banding,
12”x12” min.; 2 of each type.
2. Pulls, hinges, drawer slides, shelf pins; 2 of each type.
3. Other exposed hardware; 2 of each type.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform all work and manufacture all products in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural
Woodwork Standards, Premium Grade, unless other quality is indicated for specific items.
B. Cabinet manufacturer qualifications.
1. Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 5
years of experience.
2. Licensed participant in AWI Quality Certification Program or WI Certified Compliance Program.
3. Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project
and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Cabinet installer qualifications.
1. Manufacturer of products.
D. Hardware manufacturer qualifications.
1. A manufacturer capable of fabricating hardware that meets or exceeds performance
requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels,
test reports, and calculations.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect units from moisture damage.
B. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been
completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in
areas where environmental conditions match those required by this Article.
C. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 86 deg. F and
relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 VERIFICATION OF FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements
1. Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction
by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on shop drawings.
2. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work.
3. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on shop drawings.
B. Established Dimensions
1. Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where
cabinets are to fit.
2. Provide allowance for trimming at site.
3. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
4. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
work specified in other sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as
indicated.

064113-2
 CHASE
SECTION 064113 – WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Cabinets and shop finishes: Cabinets will be free in defects from material and workmanship under
normal use to the original consumer for a period of five years from the date of Substantial Completion.
If the cabinetry fails during the predetermined warranty period due to normal use, the manufacturer will repair the
defect or provide replacement parts, including labor.
B. Hardware: Manufacturer agrees to replace hardware components that fail in materials or
workmanship within one year from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Exclusions.
1. Abuse and normal wear and tear.
2. Colorfastness of clear finishes.
3. Variations in finish characteristics due to the use of natural wood.

PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 Not Used
2.2 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Exposed surfaces.
1. Architectural woodwork standards grade: Premium.
2. Type of construction: Frameless.
3. Door and drawer-front style: Flush overlay.
4. Wood for exposed surfaces: American red oak, select and better, quarter-sliced and plank-
matched.
5. Grain direction: Vertical for doors and fixed panels; Horizontal for drawer fronts; as indicated
otherwise on drawings.
B. Semi-exposed surfaces.
1. Architectural woodwork standards grade: Custom.
2. Surfaces other than drawer bodies: plastic laminate as indicated in Section 064116 – Plastic-
Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets.
3. Drawer subfronts, backs, sides, and bottoms: plastic laminate as indicated in Section 064116 –
Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets.
4. Toe kick boards: plastic laminate as indicated in Section 064116 – Plastic-Laminate-Clad
Architectural Cabinets.
2.3 WOOD CABINETS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Exposed surfaces.
1. Architectural woodwork standards grade: Custom.
2. Type of construction: Frameless.
3. Door and drawer-front style: Flush overlay.
4. Wood for exposed lumber surfaces: Any closed-grain hardwood.
5. Panel product for exposed surfaces: Medium-density fiberboard.
B. Semi-exposed surfaces.
1. Architectural woodwork standards grade: Custom.
2. Surfaces other than drawer bodies: plastic laminate as indicated in Section 064116 – Plastic-
Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets.
3. Drawer subfronts, backs, sides, and bottoms: plastic laminate as indicated in Section 064116 –
Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets.
4. Toe kick boards: plastic laminate as indicated in Section 064116 – Plastic-Laminate-Clad
Architectural Cabinets.
2.4 WOOD MATERIALS
1. Wood products.
a. Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each
type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
b. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches
wide.

064113-3
 CHASE
SECTION 064113 – WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

c. Wood moisture content: 8 to 13 percent.

2. Composite wood and agrifiber products.
a. Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde.
b. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
c. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
3. Softwood plywood: DOC PS 1
4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1
5. Thermoset decorative panels: As indicated in Section 064116 – Plastic-Laminate-Clad
Architectural Cabinets.
2.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Cabinet Shelf pins: Formed steel or brass spoon-shaped pins; 5mm pin diameter; zinc, chrome, or
nickel plated; satin finish.
1. Quality standard: BHMA A156.9, Grade 1.
2. Manufacturer, product: Knape & Vogt, 332 Series or equal.
3. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
B. Drawer and door pulls: As indicated in drawings.
C. Cabinet Locks
1. Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, steel with chrome finish. Keyed alike as noted on drawings.
2. Quality standard: BHMA A156.11, Grade 1.
3. Manufacturer, product: Timberline, Interchangeable Lock Plug System.
4. Substitutions: none permitted.
D. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, commercial grade, 100 lb. capacity, full extension, ball bearing.
1. Quality standard: BHMA A156.9, Grade 1HD-100.
2. Sized for drawer loading with paper (30 lb / cu. ft.).
3. Manufacturers
a. Dynaslide
b. Accuride
c. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
E. Hinges: Concealed (fully mortised) type, self closing, steel with satin chrome finish.Drawer Slides:
1. Quality standard: BHMA A156.9, B01602, Grade 2.
2. Manufacturers: any.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: [Softwood or hardwood lumber] [Fire-retardant-treated
softwood lumber], kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal
or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
1. Laminate adhesive: Contact adhesive as recommended by laminate manufacturer and
compatible with the specified substrate and service conditions.
2. Wood adhesive: as recommended by AWI for the materials being joined and service conditions.
D. Fasteners: as recommended by AWI or, if recommendation not provided, size and type to suit
application.
1. Galvanized or chrome-plated steel in concealed locations.
2. Stainless steel or chrome-plated steel in exposed locations.
3. Furring, blocking, shims and hanging strips: softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried.
4. Anchors: select material, type, size and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use non-ferrous
metal or hot dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
F. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface.

064113-4
 CHASE
SECTION 064113 – WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

2.7 CABINET FABRICATION

A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges and
corners to 1/16-inch radius unless otherwise indicated.
B. Assemble drawer systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible
before shipment to project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and
fitting.
D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and
similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
2.8 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Finish architectural cabinets at manufacturer's shop as specified in this Section. Defer only
final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B. Preparation for finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk
fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural cabinets, as
applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed
surfaces of cabinets.
C. Transparent finish:
1. Architectural woodwork standards grade: Same as item to be finished.
2. Finish system: Conversion varnish.
3. Apply wash-coat sealer to cabinets made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.
4. Staining: As indicated in drawings.
5. Sheen: Flat, 15-30 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D523.
D. Opaque Finish:
1. Architectural woodwork standards grade: Premium.
2. Finish system: Catalyzed acrylic lacquer.
3. Apply wash-coat sealer to cabinets made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.
4. Color: As indicated in the drawings.
5. Sheen: Flat, 15-30 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. PREPARATION
1. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas for not less than 72 hours.
2. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as
required.
3. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
4. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in
the shop.
C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level
and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing.

064113-5
 CHASE
SECTION 064113 – WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
G. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation
from a straight line.
H. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400
mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into
wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips, or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal
backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects;
where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi exposed surfaces.

END OF SECTION

064113-6
 CHASE
SECTION 064116 – PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL) (‘plastic laminate’) and Thermofused Melamine Laminate
(TFM) (‘melamine’) fabrications:
1. Plastic laminate cabinet units and components
2. Plastic laminate post formed countertops, splashes, aprons, etc.
3. Plastic laminate shelving.
4. Suspended wood ceiling panels and associated hardware and mounting system.
B. Cabinet hardware.
C. Wood furring, blocking, shims and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-clad architectural
cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 055000 – Metal Fabrications
C. 061000 – Rough Carpentry
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; latest edition.
B. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; latest edition.
C. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; latest
edition.
D. Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada /
Woodwork Institute (AWI/AWMAC/WI) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; latest edition.
E. American National Standards Institute / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA)
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware;latest edition.
2. ANSI/BHMA A156.11 - Cabinet Locks; latest edition.
F. GSA CID A-A-1936 - Adhesive, Contact, Neoprene Rubber; Federal Specifications and Standards;
latest edition.
G. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
latest edition.
H. WI (MAN) - Manual of Millwork; Woodwork Institute; latest edition.
I. SPIB (GR) – Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; latest edition.
J. Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; latest edition.
K. Eastern White Pine Grading Rules; Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Show details full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking and hanging strips, including concealed blocking
and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing and electrical fixtures and devices,
and other items installed in plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets.
C. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high pressure decorative laminate,
adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, and cabinet hardware and accessories.

064116-1
 CHASE
SECTION 064116 – PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification
from treatment plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
D. Samples:
1. Laminated panels, including laminated edges, 12”x12” min.; 2 of each type.
2. Pulls, hinges, drawer slides, shelf pins; 2 of each type.
3. Other exposed hardware; 2 of each type.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform all work and manufacture all products in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural
Woodwork Standards, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items.
B. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been
completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in
areas where environmental conditions match those required by this Article.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum 5 years of experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect units from moisture damage.
B. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been
completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in
areas where environmental conditions match those required by this Article.
C. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 86 deg. F and
relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 VERIFICATION OF FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements
1. Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction
by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on shop drawings.
2. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work.
3. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on shop drawings.
B. Established Dimensions
1. Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where
cabinets are to fit.
2. Provide allowance for trimming at site.
3. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
4. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
work specified in other sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as
indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; medium density industrial type as specified in AWI/AWMAC
Architectural Woodwork Standards, composed of wood chips bonded with moisture resistant adhesive
under heat and pressure; sanded faces; thickness as required; use for components indicated on
Drawings.
B. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural
Woodwork Standards; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to
suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required.

064116-2
 CHASE
SECTION 064116 – PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inch thick,
smooth two sides (S2S); use for drawer bottoms, dust panels, and other components indicated on
drawings.
D. All panel material must be Formaldehyde Free.
E. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.2 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL) (‘Plastic Laminate’): NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not
indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Cabinet exterior faces and other surfaces exposed to view.
a. Faces and edges: manufacturers, products, patterns and colors as indicated in the
drawings.
b. Edges shall be HPDL laminate- PVC edge banding not permitted.
2. Semi-exposed surfaces (cabinet interiors, concealed shelves, etc.).
a. Faces and drawer edges: manufacturers and products as indicated in the drawings.
b. Adjustable shelf edges: .012” (3mm) min. thickness PVC edge banding color-matched to
laminate faces.
c. Color: white.
3. Countertops, splashes and aprons.
a. Faces and edges: manufacturers, products, patterns and colors as indicated in the
drawings.
b. Edges shall be HPDL laminate matching the face material. PVC edge banding not
permitted.
4. Toe kick board (where not indicated as vinyl base)
a. Faces and edges: manufacturers, products, patterns and colors as indicated in the
drawings.
b. Edges shall be HPDL laminate matching the face material. PVC edge banding not
permitted.
B. Plastic Laminate shelf Edge Banding: 3mm PVC color-matched to surface laminate.
C. Thermofused Melamine (TFM) Laminate (‘Melamine’): NEMA LD 3, horizontal grade (HGS), color
white.
1. Drawer boxes (sub-front, back, sides and bottom).
2. Edge banding: 0.018” white PVC.
2.3 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Dimension softwood frame components in sizes indicated on drawings or as required, in grades
specified.
1. Douglas Fir, Hem-fir, SPF or similar species: WWPA grade #1 Common or better.
2. Southern Pine: SPIB grade Finish D and better.
3. Eastern White Pine: NLMA grade Premium and better.
B. Moisture content: 5%-10%.
2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Cabinet Shelf pins: Formed steel or brass spoon-shaped pins; 5mm pin diameter; zinc, chrome, or
nickel plated; satin finish.
1. Quality standard: BHMA A156.9, Grade 1.
2. Manufacturer, product: Knape & Vogt, 332 Series or equal.
3. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
B. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull; zinc, chrome or nickel; satin finish; 4 inch centers; solid
metal; bavk-mounted; 5/16” diameter.
C. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, steel with chrome finish. Keyed alike as noted on
drawings.
1. Quality standard: BHMA A156.11, Grade 1.
2. Manufacturer, product: Timberline, Interchangeable Lock Plug System.

064116-3
 CHASE
SECTION 064116 – PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

3. Substitutions: none permitted.

D. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, commercial grade, 100 lb. capacity, full extension, ball bearing.
1. Quality standard: BHMA A156.9, Grade 1HD-100.
2. Sized for drawer loading with paper (30 lb / cu. ft.).
3. Manufacturers
a. Dynaslide
b. Accuride
c. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
E. Hinges: Concealed (fully mortised) type, self closing, steel with satin chrome finish.Drawer Slides:
1. Quality standard: BHMA A156.9, B01602, Grade 2.
2. Manufacturers: any.
F. Grommets
1. Locations as noted in drawings.
2. Linear brush
a. Doug Mocket & Co., #BRKIT Brush Extrusion Kit, 12” length unless otherwise noted.
b. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
3. Round plastic
a. Doug Mocket & Co., #BG, 1 1/2” diameter, black, with flip-top cap.
b. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.5 CLEATS, BLOCKING AND MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS
A. Laminate adhesive: Contact adhesive as recommended by laminate manufacturer and compatible
with the specified substrate and service conditions.
B. Wood adhesive: as recommended by AWI for the materials being joined and service conditions.
C. Fasteners: as recommended by AWI or, if recommendation not provided, size and type to suit
application.
1. Galvanized or chrome-plated steel in concealed locations.
2. Stainless steel or chrome-plated steel in exposed locations.
3. Furring, blocking, shims and hanging strips: softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried.
4. Anchors: select material, type, size and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use non-ferrous
metal or hot dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
E. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface.
F. Applied wall base: where noted in cabinet sections, apply vinyl wall base to toe-kick blocking. Refer
to Section 096500 – Resilient Flooring.

2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINET FABRICATION

A. Cabinet quality standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for Custom grade of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets for construction, finishes,
installation, and other requirements.
B. Individual component quality standards: as specified in the relevant Article for those components.
C. Type of Construction: Frameless.
D. Cabinet doors and drawer fronts: 3/4 inch thick unless noted otherwise; flush overlay.
E. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible
before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and
fitting.
1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install
dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial

064116-4
 CHASE
SECTION 064116 – PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against
field measurements before disassembling for shipment.
F. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with plastic laminate edging. Do not use more than
one piece for any single length.
G. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
H. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners.
I. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive plumbing fixtures, hardware, appliances,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in
diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove
splinters and burrs.
J. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from
interior of body. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by
mechanical fasteners.
K. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as
required.
C. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
D. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in
the shop.
C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level
and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing.
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
G. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation
from a straight line.
H. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400
mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into
wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips, or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal
backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects;
where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

064116-5
 CHASE
SECTION 064116 – PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi exposed surfaces.

END OF SECTION

064116-6
 CHASE
SECTION 064460 – MANUFACTURED COLUMN COVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-structural factory-fabricated fiberglass and fiberglass-reinforced polymer (FRP) column covers
B. Framing, blocking and other installation materials used as backing substrate for finishes over
Architectural Composite Columns..
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 054000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing
B. 061000 – Rough Carpentry
C. 083323 – Overhead Coiling Doors
D. 093023 – Mosaic Tiling
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Installed architectural fiberglass column covers and fastening systems shall be designed, engineered,
fabricated, and installed to conform to the state codes, local codes, and the Architect’s design.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Guidelines and Recommended Practices for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Architectural Products;
Composites Fabricators Association (CFA); latest edition.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings: Shall illustrate dimensions, adjacent construction, materials, thickness, fabrications
details, required clearances, field jointing, tolerances, colors, finishes, methods of support,
attachments, anchorage to substrates, integration of components, and list of part numbers that
coordinate with labeled architectural column covers.
B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Submit manufacturer’s internal quality control and assurance procedures based upon provisions
published in the Guidelines and Recommended Practices for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic
Architectural Products upon request.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain architectural fiberglass column covers from a single source manufacturer that has the ability
and resources to comply with the requirements and schedule of the project.
B. Manufacturer shall comply with fabricate architectural column covers per Guidelines and
Recommended Practices for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Architectural Products.
C. Installer shall field-inspect each molded piece to ensure that it complies with specified requirements,
including nominal dimensions.
1.7 MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Provide products manufactured by a firm specializing in the manufacture of fiberglass
architectural ornamentation, in the United States with a minimum of ten (10) years experience.
B. Provide documentation that products meet or exceed products specified.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle, store and transport products according to manufacturer’s recommendations and in a manner
that prevents damage.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

064460-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 064460 – MANUFACTURED COLUMN COVERS

C. Except for damage caused by others, the installer is responsible for chipping, cracking, or other
damage to products, after delivery to the jobsite and until installation is completed, inspected and
approved by the Architect or owner’s representative.
D. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in
accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Warrant architectural column covers to be free from defect due to materials and workmanship for one
year minimum.
B. At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owners Representative a copy of the manufacturer’s limited
warranty outlining its terms and conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Architectural Fiberglass, Inc., 8300 Bessemer Ave, Cleveland, Ohio, 888-483-1775.
1. Structrual Fiberglass Column.
2. Architectural Fiberglass Column Cover.
B. HB&G, P. O. Box 589, Troy, Alabama, 800-264-4424; www.hbgcolumns.com.
1. Permacast Column.
C. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.2 COLUMNS
A. Shape: round, straight (no taper), factory-split into halves or otherwise as indicated in the Drawings.
B. Texture: Smooth.
C. Diameter and height: As indicated in the Drawings.
D. Capitals and bases: None.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Construction Adhesive: Non-acetone based, exterior grade.
B. Anchors and Fasteners.
1. Contractor to provide metal or wood framing, blocking, anchors, fasteners and other accessories
for proper installation of column covers as recommended and approved by the column
manufacturer.
2. All materials shall be verified compatible with products of tis Section and substrates to which the
materials are being secured.
C. Finishes: For application of finish materials to face of columns, such as tile over polymer modified
thinset acrylic adhesive, treat surface or provide surface coatings as required for proper adhesion.
Refer to tile adhesive manufacturer’s installations instructions for product recommendations. Ensure
that recommended products are compatible with column material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. EXAMINATION
1. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. Contractor shall verify on
site dimensions with shop drawings and assume full responsibility for fitting the components to
the structure.
2. Verify that support framing has been constructed to allow accurate placement, alignment and
connection of column covers to structure.
3. Report discrepancies between design dimensions and field dimensions to the Architect and/or
Owner’s Representative. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies are corrected, or

064460-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 064460 – MANUFACTURED COLUMN COVERS

until installation requirements are modified and approved by the Architect and/or Owner’s
Representative.
B. PREPARATION
1. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
2. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3. Pre-drill holes for attachment of adjacent hardware or materials before driving screws. Self-
tapping screws are not to be used.
C. INSTALLATION
1. Install column covers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved shop
drawings.
2. Do not fasten column covers to, or position in direct contact with, adjacent building materials or
systems that will experience movement or vibration, such as equipment housings or door frames
or tracks. Provide a 1/4” gap to these elements and fill with elastomeric sealant where required
to provide a continuous finish backing surface. Refer to Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.
D. CLEANING
1. Clean installed column covers using cleaning methods and material approved by manufacturer.
E. PROTECTION
1. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions for protecting installed column
covers during construction activities. Protect installed products until completion of project.
2. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

064460-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 066116 – SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Solid surface material: nonporous homogenous material of consistent composition throughout of
acrylic polymer, Aluminum Trihydrate filler and pigment.
B.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Solid surface materials and assemblies for counter tops, splashes and aprons.
B. Window stools.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 061000 – Rough Carpentry.
C. 062000 – Finish Carpentry.
D. 084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts.
E. 092900 – Gypsum Board.
F. 125000 – Furniture
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM -84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; current
edition.
B. ASTM – D 638 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastic; current edition
C. ASTM – D 2583 – Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a
Barcol Impressor; current edition.
D. ASTM – D 696 – Standard Test Method for Coefficent of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics
Between -30 degrees C and 30 degree C with a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer.
E. ASTM – G 21 – Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to
Fungi; current edition.
F. ASTM – G 22 – Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria; current edition.
G. ASTM – D 570 – Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; current edition.
H. ANSI Z124.3 / Z124.6 – Lavatory Compliance; current edition.
I. UL – 723 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; current
edition.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 – Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
4. Specimen warranty and warranty conditions.
5. Care and maintenance instructions and recommendations.
C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that any required forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
D. Shop Drawings: show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details,
attachment devices and other components.

066116-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 066116 – SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS

1. Show full-size scale details, edge details, forming requirements, attachments, etc.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement
specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers,
grommets and other items installed in the solid surface.
4. Produce drawings at minimum 1/2” = 1’-0” scale.
E. Samples:
1. For each type of product indicated.
a. Submit minimum 6-inch by 6-inch sample in specified gloss.
b. Cut sample and seam together for representation of inconspicuous seam.
c. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation.
2. Samples are to be reviewed and approved by the Architect of Record prior to fabrication.
3. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for work.
F. Maintenance data and supplies
1. Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning instructions.
2. Submit maintenance kit for finishes.
G. Include in project closeout documents.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator / installer qualifications:
1. Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for
this project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
2. Member of International Cast Polymer Association (ICPA).
3. Not less than 5 years experience in fabricating and installing products similar to those required
for this project.
4. Work of this section shall be by a certified fabricator/installer, certified in writing by the
manufacturer.
B. Installation and installed work shall comply with the following standards:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
C. Installed work shall meet the following Class A fire test response characteristics per UL 723 (ASTM
E84) or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction::
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's protective containers.
B. Store products indoors, under cover and elevated above grade.
C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in
accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces.
E. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration
of project.
1.8 1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s warranty against defects in materials.
1. Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or replace defective materials.
2. Damage caused by physical or chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat will not be
warranted.
B. Fabrication and installation must be performed by a manufacturer’s certified fabrication / installation
contractor who will provide a brand plate for the application.

066116-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 066116 – SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS

C. Warranty shall cover all fabrication and installation performed by the certified fabricator / installer
subject to the specific wording contained in the warranty card.
D. Minimum manufacturer’s warranty period: ten years from date of substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. DuPont, www.dupont.com, Corian.
B. Substitutions: not permitted.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. A. Solid polymer components
1. Cast, nonporous, filled polymer, not coated, laminated or of composite construction with through
body colors meeting ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI Z124.6, having minimum physical and performance
properties specified.
2. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010 inch (.25 mm) shall be repairable by sanding and/or
polishing.
3. Color / pattern: refer to Finish Materials Schedule in drawings.
4. Thickness: 1/2” or in built-up 1/2” thicknesses as indicated in drawings.
5. Edge detail: as indicated in drawings.
6. Dimensional tolerances: maximum deviation from thickness, width, and length of 0.01 inch.
7. Splash installation type: applied.
B. Performace characteristics
1. Flammability: ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 and UL 723; Class I and Class A
a. Flame Spread Index: <25.
b. Smoke Developed Index : <25.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Joint Adhesive: Manufacturer’s standard one- or two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous,
nonporous joints.
B. Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard mildew-resistant, UL-Listed latex-modified paintable silicone sealant
in colors matching components.
2.4 FACTORY FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly:
1. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance
with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s printed instructions and technical bulletins.
2. Form joints between components using manufacturer’s standard joint adhesive without
conspicuous joints. Reinforce with strip of solid polymer material, minimum 2 inches wide.
3. Route and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. Route cutouts, radii and contours to
template. Smooth edges. Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved
shop drawings and product data.
1. Provide product in the largest pieces available.

066116-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 066116 – SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS

2. Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in
finished work.
3. Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed.
4. Reinforce field joints with solid surface strips extending a minimum of 1 inch on either side of the
seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top.
5. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.
6. Rout radii and contours to template.
7. Anchor securely to base cabinets or other supports.
8. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer’s written
recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
9. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface.
10. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch sag, bow or other variation from a straight line.
B. Applied splashes:
1. Provide applied back and side splashes at all walls and adjacent millwork.
2. Adhere splashes to countertops using manufacturer’s standard color-matched silicone sealant.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean installed work to like-new condition.
B. Protect installed products until completion of project.
C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
D. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains.

END OF SECTION

066116-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072113 - BOARD INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Extruded polystyrene rigid board insulation (XPS).
B. Expanded polystyrene rigid board insulation (EPS).
C. Polyisocyanurate rigid board insulation (POLYISO).
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 072117 – Fibrous Building Insulation.
C. 072129 – Spray-Applied Cellulose Insulation.
D. 072140 – Spray-Applied Foam Insulation.
E. 072400 – Exterior Insulation and Finish System.
F. 072500 – Weather Barriers.
G. 075400 – Thermoplastic Membrane roofing.
H. 098100 – Acoustic Insulation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C272: Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich
Constructions; latest edition.
2. ASTM C518: Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by means of the
Heat Flow meter; latest edition.
3. ASTM C578: Standard specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; latest
edition.
4. ASTM D1621: Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics; latest edition.
5. ASTM E84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions under provisions of
Section 013300.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL EXTERIOR-FACE THERMAL INSULATION
A. Product standard: ASTM C578, Type IV Extruded Polystyrene Board (XPS)
B. Performance requirements and physical characteristics
1. Thermal resistance (R-Value): Minimum R-5.0 per inch per ASTM C518.
2. Compressive strength: Minimum 25 psi per ASTM D1621.
3. Water absorption: Maximum 0.10% per ASTM C272.
4. Product configuration: 16” min. X 96” boards; butt edges; 1”, 1 1/2” and 2” thicknesses as
indicated in the drawings.
C. Manufacturers, products
1. Dow Chemical Co., www.dow.com, Styrofoam Cavitymate.
2. Owens Corning, www.owenscorning.com, Foamular CW15.
3. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.2 WALL INTERIOR-FACE THERMAL INSULATION
A. Product standard: ASTM C578, Type X Extruded Polystyrene Board (XPS)

072113-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072113 - BOARD INSULATION

B. Performance requirements and physical characteristics

1. Thermal resistance (R-Value): Minimum R-5.0 per inch per ASTM C518.
2. Compressive strength: Minimum 15 psi per ASTM D1621.
3. Water absorption: Maximum 0.10% per ASTM C272.
4. Product configuration: 23 7/8” X 96” boards; butt edges; 1 1/2” and 2” thicknesses as indicated in
the drawings.
C. Manufacturers, products
1. Dow Chemical Co., www.dow.com, Styrofoam Z-Mate.
2. Owens Corning, www.owenscorning.com, Insulpink-Z.
3. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.3 FOUNDATION-FACE AND UNDER-SLAB THERMAL INSULATION
A. Product standard: ASTM C578, Type IV Extruded Polystyrene Board (XPS)
B. Performance requirements and physical characteristics
1. Thermal resistance (R-Value): Minimum R-5.0 per inch per ASTM C518.
2. Compressive strength: Minimum 25 psi per ASTM D1621.
3. Water absorption: Maximum 0.30% per ASTM C272.
4. Product configuration: 2” thick x 24” wide x 96” long boards; ship-lap or tongue-and-groove
edges.
C. Manufacturers, products
1. Dow Chemical Co., www.dow.com, Styrofoam Perimate
2. Owens Corning, www.owenscorning.com, Foamular 250.
3. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.4 ROOF DECK THERMAL INSULATION
A. Refer to Section 075400 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing.
2.5 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM THERMAL INSULATION
A. Refer to Section 072400 – Exterior Insulation and Finish systems.
B. Refer to Section 092423 – Portland Cement Stucco.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Impaling Pins: 12 gage pins, length as necessary for penetration through insulation; heads for
attachment to deck; circular clinch shields.
B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application; compatible with insulation
and substrate.
C. Furnish other accessories, not specifically described but required for a complete installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adjacent materials are secure, properly spaced, dry, and ready to receive installation.
B. Verify rough ducting, piping and conduit systems for mechanical, electrical, data and other services
within spaces to be insulated have been installed and tested.
C. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence. Notify the General
Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
D. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.

072113-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072113 - BOARD INSULATION

3.2 RIGID INSULATION AT WALLS

A. Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's
current installation instructions.
B. Trim insulation to tightly fit between the furring and framing and to fit around penetrations.
C. At Locations Where No Framing is Present:
1. Mechanically or adhesively bond impaling pins to the substrate in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Spot weld pins to bottom flutes of metal deck.
2. Space pins at maximum 24 inches on center along the edges and within the field of the board.
Place edge pins within 6 inches from the edge of the board
3. Install boards tightly butted. Impale boards and secure with clinch shields, set to hold boards in
contact with deck.
4. Repair all fireproofing damaged by installation of insulation, as necessary to restore fire rating.
3.3 PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION
A. Place perimeter insulation as indicated. Joints shall be tightly butted.
B. Secure the insulation in position sufficiently to hold the material in place against retaining walls, prior
to and during backfill operations.
C. Do not damage waterproofing system.
D. Install polystyrene perimeter insulation over compacted granular fill as detailed, prior to installation of
slab on grade.

END OF SECTION

072113-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072117 - FIBROUS BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fibrous thermal batt and roll insulation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 054000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing.
C. 054400 – Steel Roof Trusses.
D. 061000 – Rough Carpentry.
E. 061754 – Plate Connected Wood Trusses.
F. 072113 – Board Insulation.
G. 072500 – Weather Barriers.
H. 092200 – Lightgage Metal Support Framing.
I. 098100 – Acoustic Insulation.
J. 230713 – Duct Insulation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C518: Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; latest edition.
2. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and
Manufactured Housing; latest edition.
3. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; latest edition.
B. Life Safety Code; National Fire Protection Association; latest edition.
C. UL 2079: Standard Test Method for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals under provisions of Section 013300.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each type of
insulation.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturers of all products in this section shall have a minimum 10
years experience manufacturing these products.
B. Installer qualifications: Products listed in this section shall be installed by a single organization with at
least 5 years experience successfully installing these products on projects of a similar size and scope.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging bearing the brand name and
manufacturer’s identification until ready for installation.
B. Storage: Store materials in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from water, and in such a
manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling.
C. Handling: Handle materials in such a manner as to avoid damage.
1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate with the installation of vapor retarders and air seal materials specified in Section 072500 –
Weather Barriers.

072117-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072117 - FIBROUS BUILDING INSULATION

B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of
construction progress.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits recommended
by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside
manufacturer’s absolute limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Unfaced batt and blanket insulation:
1. Type: ASTM C665, Type I; preformed unfaced glass fiber batts.
2. Flame spread 25 or less and smoke developed of 50 or less when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84.
3. Thermal resistance (R-value): as indicated on the drawings, or if not indicated, the maximum R-
Value product available for the indicated size.
4. Furnish oversize widths for friction-fit between metal framing members.
5. Manufacturer, products
a. Basis of Design: Johns Manville Corp.
b. Acceptable Options (subject to compliance with Contract Document requirements and
Architect's approval of conformance to design intent.):
1) CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
2) Knauf Insulation, www.knaufinsulation.us.
3) Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
4) Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor retarder: refer to Section 072600.
B. Impaling Pins: 12 gage pins; length as required with mounting plates for welding or adhesive
mounting; include retainer shields.
C. Provide other accessories, not specifically described, but required for secure and tight installation of
insulation with complete insulation fill within cavities, and continuous vapor retarder.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adjacent materials are secure, properly spaced, dry, and ready to receive installation.
B. Verify mechanical and electrical services within spaces to insulated have been installed and tested.
C. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the General
Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
D. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install batt insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install insulation without gaps or voids.
C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage.
D. At metal stud framing, insert the insulation edges tightly into the stud channels for a friction fit.
Provide additional supports as necessary to prevent sliding of batts in the stud cavity.

072117-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072117 - FIBROUS BUILDING INSULATION

E. Fill voids in framing members, such as hollow spaces in metal framing box beams, to provide a
continuous thermal envelope.
F. Mechanical Fastening:
1. At locations where no framing is present to support the insulation, provide impaling pins and
retainers to hold the insulation firmly in position.
2. Mechanically or adhesively bond the impaling pins to the substrate in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Space pins at maximum 24 inches on center along the edges and within the field of the blanket.
Place edge pins within 6 inches from the edge of the batt.
G. Pack batt insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of window assembly to maintain continuity of thermal
barrier.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

072117-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072129 – SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSE BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sprayed cellulose thermal insulation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. 053100 – Steel Decking.
B. 054000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing.
C. 061000 – Rough Carpentry.
D. 072500 – Weather Barriers.
E. 092200 – Lightgage Metal Support Framing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM); latest edition unless noted otherwise:
1. ASTM C739 – Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Loose-fill Thermal Insulation.
2. ASTM E736: Standard Test Method for Cohesion / Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials
Applied to Structural Members.
3. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
4. ASTM E759 – Standard Test Method for Effects of Deflection on Sprayed Fire-Resistive
Materials Applied to Structural Members.
B. International Code Council
1. International Building Code, latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals per the provisions of Section 013300.
B. Submit manufacturer’s product data indicating that the product meets or exceeds the following
requirements:
1. ASTM E736: bond strength greater than 100psf.
2. ASTM E84: Class 1 / Class A.
3. ASTM C739: non-corrosive.
4. ASTM E759: 6” deflection in 10’ span- no spalling or delamination.
5. IBC 803.3: complies with stability requirements for interior finishes.
C. Minimum recycled fiber content shall be 75%.
D. Manufacturer’s written certification that the product contains no asbestos, firberglass or other man-
made mineral fibers, or urea-formaldehyde resins.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver in original, unopened containers bearing the name of the manufacturer, product identification
and reference to U.L. or other laboratory testing conforming to the ASTM standards indicated above.
B. Store materials dry, off ground, and under cover.
C. Protect liquid adhesive from freezing.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience manufacturing
products in this section shall provide all products listed.
B. Installer qualifications.
1. Products listed in this section shall be installed by a single organization with at least five years
experience successfully installing insulation on projects of similar type and scope.
2. Installer must be licensed by the product manufacturer.

072129-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072129 – SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSE BUILDING INSULATION

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits recommended
by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside
manufacturer’s absolute limits.
B. Do not apply insulation when substrate temperatures are under 40 deg. F (4.4 deg. C) prior to
installation.
C. Surfaces must be dry prior to product spray application. Excess humidity may cause poor adhesion
and result in product failure.
D. To avoid overspray, product should not be applied in windy conditions.
1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate with the installation of vapor retarders and air seal materials specified in Section 072500 –
Weather Barriers.
B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of
construction progress.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. International Cellulose Corporation; www.spray-on.com.
B. Nu-Wool Company; www.nuwool.com.
C. United Fibers; http://www.unitedfibers.com/contractors
D. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.2 INSTALLERS
A. As recommended by the selected manufacturer.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Stabilized low-dust spray-applied cellulose thermal insulation in compliance with the Submittals
section.
B. Select materials in compliance with building codes enforced by the jurisdiction where the material is
installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions. Work in the application area required to be complete by others prior to the work in this
section includes:
1. Roof and deck penetrations.
2. Clips, hangers, supports, sleeves and other attachments to substrates.
3. All other thermal insulation.
B. Ducts, piping, conduit or other suspended equipment shall not be positioned until after the application
of sprayed insulation.
C. Verify adjacent materials are secure, properly spaced, dry, and ready to receive installation.
D. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the General
Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

072129-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072129 – SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSE BUILDING INSULATION

E. Examine surfaces to receive spray insulation to determine if priming / sealing is required to ensure
bonding and/or prevent discoloration caused by migratory stains.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide masking, drop cloths or other satisfactory coverings for materials/surfaces that are not to
receive insulation to protect from over-spray.
B. Coordinate installation of the sprayed cellulose fiber with work of other trades.
C. Prime surfaces as required by manufacturer’s instructions or as determined by examination.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install spray applied insulation according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Install spray applied insulation to achieve an average thermal resistance value of R-38 at roof areas
and R-21 at wall areas, unless indicated otherwise in the drawings.
C. Cure insulation with continuous natural or mechanical ventilation.
D. Re-cycle on-site or remove and dispose of over-spray.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

072129-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072140 – SPRAY-APPLIED FOAM BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Closed cell spray foam insulation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. 053100 – Steel Decking.
B. 054000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing.
C. 061000 – Rough Carpentry.
D. 072500 – Weather Barriers.
E. 092200 – Lightgage Metal Support Framing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM); latest edition unless noted otherwise:
1. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
2. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
3. ASTM C1029 – Standard Specification for Spray-Applied Rigid Polyurethane Thermal Insulation.
4. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
5. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
6. ASTM D 1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
7. ASTM D 1622 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
8. ASTM D 1623 - Standard Test Method for Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid
Cellular Plastics.
9. ASTM D 2126 - Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and
Humid Aging.
10. ASTM D 2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
B. International Code Council
1. International Building Code, latest edition.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke, concealment, and over coat requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals per the provisions of Section 013300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience manufacturing
products in this section shall provide all products listed.
B. Installer qualifications: Products listed in this section shall be installed by a single organization with at
least five years experience successfully installing insulation on projects of similar type and scope as
specified in this section.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging bearing the brand name and
manufacturer's identification until ready for installation.

072140-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072140 – SPRAY-APPLIED FOAM BUILDING INSULATION

B. Storage: Store materials in dry locations with adequate ventilation, protected from freezing rain, direct
sunlight and excess heat and in such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling.
Store at temperature between 55 and 80 degrees F (12.7 to 26.6 degrees C).
C. Handling: Handle materials to avoid damage.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience manufacturing
products in this section shall provide all products listed.
B. Installer qualifications.
1. Products listed in this section shall be installed by a single organization with at least five years
experience successfully installing insulation on projects of similar type and scope.
2. Installer must be licensed by the product manufacturer.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits recommended
by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside
manufacturer’s absolute limits.
B. Do not apply insulation when substrate temperatures are under 40 deg. F (4.4 deg. C) prior to
installation.
C. Surfaces must be dry prior to product spray application. Excess humidity may cause poor adhesion
and result in product failure.
D. To avoid overspray, product should not be applied in windy conditions.
1.10 SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate with the installation of vapor retarders and air seal materials specified in Section 072500 –
Weather Barriers.
B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of
construction progress.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS, PRODUCTS
A. Certainteed Corporation: Certa-Spray; www.certainteed.com/products/insulation/spray-foam-
insulation/317388.
B. Dow Chemical Company: Styrofoam MX-Series; www.dow.com.
C. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Spray-applied closed-cell foam thermal insulation.
1. Physical and mechanical properties.
a. Core density: 1.9 pcf minimum per ASTM D1622.
b. Stabilized thermal resistance (R-Value): R-6 minimum per inch per ASTM C518.
c. Closed cell content: 88 % minimum per ASTM D2842.
d. Compressive strength: 25 psi minimum per ASTM D1621.
e. Tensile Strength: 23 psi minimum per ASTM D1623.
f. Water Absorption: Less than 2 percent by volume per ASTM D2842.
g. Dimensional Stability: Less than 9 percent by volume per ASTM D2126 at 75 degrees F/95
percent RH, 28 Days.
h. Water Vapor Transmission: 2.2 perm/inch maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM
E96.
i. Fungi Resistance: Pass, with no growth when tested in accordance with ASTM C1338.
2. Fire performance
a. Flame Spread: Less than 25 per ASTM E84.

072140-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072140 – SPRAY-APPLIED FOAM BUILDING INSULATION

b. Smoke: Less than 450 per ASTM E84.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify that all exterior and interior wall, partition, and floor/ceiling assembly construction has been
completed to the point where the insulation may correctly be installed.
C. Verify that substrate and cavities are dry and free of any foreign material that will impede application.
D. Verify that mechanical and electrical services in ceilings, walls and floors have been installed and
tested and, if appropriate, verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation.
E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify General Contractor of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from overspray or dusting.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Product must be installed according to local
code, and must be applied by a qualified applicator.
B. Apply insulation by spray method, to uniform monolithic density without voids.
C. Apply to minimum cured thickness as indicated on the drawings or as required to achieve compliance
with building, mechanical and energy codes applicable to the project.
D. Apply to achieve thermal resistance (R-value) of R-38 at roof installations and R-21 at wall
installations unless noted otherwise in the drawings.
E. Apply insulation to seal voids at truss ends to prevent wind scouring of ceiling insulation.
F. Seal plumbing stacks, electrical wiring and other roof and wall penetrations.
G. Apply insulation to fill voids around accessible service and equipment penetrations. Request General
Contractor to provide, where required, baffles or blocking to prevent spray-applied insulation from
impeding access to equipment service areas.
H. Do not install spray foam insulation in areas where it will be in contact with equipment or materials
with operating temperatures of 180 degrees F (82 degrees C) or greater.
I. Apply insulation in unvented roof spaces.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection will include verification of insulation and density.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

072140-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072400 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior insulation and finish system for walls and soffits.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: Sheathing.
C. 061643 – Exterior Gypsum Sheathing.
D. 072500 – Weather Barriers.
E. 072423 – Direct-Applied Exterior Finish Systems.
F. 076200 – Flashing and Sheet Metal Trim.
G. 079200 – Joint Sealants.
H. 081113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
I. 084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts.
J. 084400 – Curtain Wall and Glazed Assemblies.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. B 117: Test Method for Salt Spray (Fog) Testing; latest edition.
2. C 578: Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; latest edition.
3. C 1177: Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum for Use as Sheathing; latest edition.
4. C 1382: Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of Sealants When Used in
Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Joints; latest edition.
5. D 522: Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings; latest edition.
6. D 882: Standard Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting; latest edition.
7. D 968: Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive; latest
edition.
8. D 1784: Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Compounds; latest edition.
9. D 2247: Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity; latest
edition.
10. D 3273: Test for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an
Environmental Chamber; latest edition.
11. E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; latest edition.
12. E 96: Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; latest edition.
13. E 119: Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; latest edition.
14. E 283: Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; latest edition.
15. E 330: Test Method for Structural Performance of Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform
Static Air Pressure Difference; latest edition.
16. E 331: Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; latest edition.
17. E 1233: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls
and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; latest edition.
18. E 2098: Test Method for Determining Tensile Breaking Strength of Glass Fiber Reinforcing Mesh
for Use in Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish System after Exposure to a Sodium Hydroxide
Solution; latest edition.
19. E 2134: Test Method for Evaluating the Tensile-Adhesion Performance of an Exterior Insulation
and Finish System (EIFS) ; latest edition.
20. E 2273: Test Method for Determining the Drainage Efficiency of Exterior Insulation and Finish
System (EIFS) Clad Wall Assemblies ; latest edition.

072400-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072400 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

21. E 2430: Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Thermal Insulation Boards for use in
Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) ; latest edition.
22. E 2485: Standard Test Method for Freeze/Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish
Systems (EIFS) and Water Resistive Barrier Coatings; latest edition.
23. E 2486: Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Class PB and PI Exterior Insulation and
Finish Systems (EIFS) ; latest edition.
24. E 2570: Test Method for Water-Resistive (WRB) Coatings used Under Exterior Insulation and
Finish Systems (EIFS) or EIFS with Drainage; latest edition.
25. G 153: Recommended Practice for Operating Light-and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc
Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; latest edition.
26. G 154: Recommended Practice for Operating Light-and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Fluorescent
UV-Condensation Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; latest edition.
1.4 Building Code Standards
A. AC235: Acceptance Criteria for EIFS Clad Drainage Wall Assemblies; International Code Council
Evaluation Service (ICC-ES); latest edition.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 268, “Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitability of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source” ; latest edition.
2. NFPA 285, “Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of
Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies containing Combustible Components Using the
Intermediate-Scale, Multistory Test Apparatus” ; latest edition.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, details, installation instructions and product data.
1. Manufacturer's code compliance report.
2. Manufacturer's standard warranty.
3. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance with EIMA standards.
4. Manufacturer’s report indicating satisfactory results of required testing procedures.
C. Installer's qualifications documentation.
D. Samples: For selection of finish coat colors and textures.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. EIFS Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Member in good standing of the EIFS Industry Members Association (EIMA).
2. System manufacturer for a minimum of twenty (20) years.
3. Manufacturer's wall assembly listed in Gypsum Association Fire Resistance Design Manual.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Engaged in application of EIFS for a minimum of three (3) years.
2. Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of the materials specified and listed by the
material manufacturer as having attended manufacturer-provided continuing education.
3. Employ skilled mechanics who are experienced and knowledgeable in EIFS application, and
familiar with the requirements of the specified work.
4. Successful completion of minimum of three (3) projects of similar size and complexity to the
specified project.
5. Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the job site to install the system in
compliance with EIFS manufacturer's published specifications and details and the project plans
and specifications.
C. Insulation Board Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Recognized by EIFS manufacturer as capable of producing insulation board to meet system
requirements and holding a valid licensing agreement with EIFS manufacturer.
2. Listed by an approved agency.
3. Providing insulation board labeled with information required by EIFS manufacturer, the approved
listing agency and the applicable building code.

072400-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072400 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

D. Inspections: Visual and documented inspections shall coincide with Pre-construction meeting,
moisture barrier application, foam application, and basecoat application. Provide inspections by
proprietary EIFS product representative.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in their original sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name and identification
of product.
B. Protect coatings (pail products) from freezing and temperatures in excess of 90 degrees F. Store
away from direct sunlight.
C. Protect Portland cement based materials (bag products) from moisture and humidity. Store under
cover off the ground in a dry location.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide manufacturer's 15 year labor and material warranty:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS, PRODUCTS
A. EIFS
1. Furnish EIFS materials from a single manufacturer or approved supplier.
2. Manufacturers include but are not limited to:
a. Sto Corporation; www.stocorp.com
1) StoTherm ci Lotusan (basis of design).
b. Dryvit Systems, Inc.; www.dryvit.com
c. Parex USA, Inc.; www.parex.com.
d. BASF Senergy Wall Systems; www.senergy.basf.com
e. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
B. Accessories:
1. Provide metal beads, starter tracks, screeds, reveals and other components as indicated in the
drawings or as required for a complete systems recommendation
2. Furnish accessories from the EIFS system manufacturer or a single manufacturer or supplier
approved by the EIFS system manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Air and Water-Resistive Barrier: Either sheet-type material that constitutes an air retarder but which is
vapor permeable or fluid applied type as provided by EIFS system manufacturer and applicator as
part of a single source warranted installation. Refer to Section 076200 – Weather Barriers.
B. Insulation Board Adhesive: Provide adhesives as directed by the EIFS manufacturer and compatible
with the insulation board and weather barrier for the project’s climate.
C. Insulation Board
1. Expanded polystyrene (EPS) compliant with ASTM C578 Type I specifications and EIMA
Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS).
2. Physical and performance criteria
a. Density: 1.0 lb./cu.ft. minimum.
b. Flame spread: Class A, 25 minimum per ASTM E84.
c. Smoke developed: Class A, 450 minimum per ASTM E84.
d. Compressive strength: 10psi minimum per ASTM E2430.
D. Base Coat: One-component polymer modified cement based high build base coat with less than 33
percent Portland cement content by weight and capable of achieving minimum 1/16 inch thickness in
one pass.
E. Reinforcing Mesh

072400-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072400 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

1. High Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Nominal 15 oz/sq yd, ultra-high impact, double strand,
interwoven, open-weave glass fiber fabric with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with
EIFS coating materials; capable of achieving EIMA Ultra-High Impact Classification when applied
beneath standard mesh. Install to minimum height of 6 feet above finished grade at all areas
accessible to pedestrian traffic and other areas exposed to abnormal stress or impact.
2. Standard Reinforcing Mesh: Nominal 4.5 oz/sq yd, symmetrical, interlaced open-weave glass
fiber fabric made with minimum 20 percent by weight alkaline resistant coating for compatibility
with EIFS coating materials; capable of achieving EIMA Standard Impact Classification. Install at
all areas other than those covered by High Impact reinforcing Mesh.
F. Waterproof Base Coat: Two component fiber reinforced acrylic based waterproof base coat mixed
with Portland cement. Watertight Coat is an acceptable substitute.
1. Use on horizontal and sloped surfaces that project more than 2 inches from face of wall.
G. Primer: Required as part of the system: Acrylic based tinted primer.
H. Finish Coat: Silicone enhance textured wall coating with graded marble aggregate.
1. Color: As indicated on drawings.
2. Marble Color: As indicated on drawings.
I. Water: Clean and potable.
J. Joint Sealant: Non-sag polyurethane sealant that has 50 percent elongation after conditioning, when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 1382; compatible with EIFS materials and with compatible backer
rod. Refer to Section 079200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. EIFS installer shall provide coordination with installers of related and adjacent materials to ensure
that:
1. Finish grading of site is such that EIFS terminates above finished grade a minimum of 8 inches
(203 mm) or as required by code.
2. Penetrations through wall are protected from weather prior to installation of windows, doors, and
other closures.
3. Sill flashing is provided at all openings.
4. Head flashing is installed immediately after windows and doors are installed.
5. Diverter flashings are installed wherever water can enter the wall assembly to direct water to the
exterior.
6. Copings and related sealant are installed immediately after installation of EIFS when EIFS
coatings are dry.
7. Penetrations are attached using fasteners through EIFS to structural support, with water tight
seal.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install EIFS in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
B. Apply all materials listed in Materials section of this specification in the order of progression as listed
in the Materials section.
C. Trowel Insulation board adhesive vertically using notched channel for vertical drainage application.
D. Use Base Coat for general application. Substitute Waterproof Base Coat as needed according to
manufacturer's recommendations or as directed in the Materials Article above.
E. Provide minimum 3/4 inch wide expansion joints through EIFS where moving joints exist in the
substrate or supporting construction, where EIFS adjoins dissimilar construction or materials, at
changes in building height, and at floor lines in multi-level frame construction.
F. Provide minimum 1/2 inch wide sealant joints at all penetrations through the EIFS (windows, doors,
etc.).
G. Provide joints with secondary moisture protection and drain to the exterior.

072400-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072400 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them.
B. Protect installed materials from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and continuous high humidity until
they are fully dry.

END OF SECTION

072400-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072423 – DIRECT-APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Materials and installation of non-insulated exterior finish system for direct application to substrates at
soffits and weather-protected areas.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: Sheathing.
C. 072400 – Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems.
D. 072500 – Weather Barriers.
E. 076200 – Flashing and Sheet Metal Trim.
F. 079200 – Joint Sealants.
G. 084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts.
H. 084400 – Curtain Wall and Glazed Assemblies.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. C 150: Specification for Portland Cement; latest edition.
2. C 297: Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich Constructions; latest
edition.
3. C 1177: Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum for Use as Sheathing; latest edition.
4. D 1784: Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Compounds; latest edition.
5. D 3273: Test for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an
Environmental Chamber; latest edition.
6. E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; latest edition.
7. E 2486: Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Class PB and PI Exterior Insulation and
Finish Systems (EIFS) ; latest edition.
8. G 153: Recommended Practice for Operating Light-and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc
Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; latest edition.
B. Gypsum Association:
1. 1.GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual; latest edition.
2. 2.GA-253 Application of Gypsum Sheathing ; latest edition.
3. 3.GA-254 Fire Resistant Gypsum Sheathing; latest edition.
C. International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES)
1. AC 59, Acceptance Criteria for Direct-Applied Exterior Finish Systems (DEFS)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, details, installation instructions and product data.
1. Manufacturer's code compliance report.
2. Manufacturer's standard warranty.
3. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance with EIMA standards.
4. Manufacturer’s report indicating satisfactory results of required testing procedures.
C. Installer's qualifications documentation.
D. Samples: For selection of finish coat colors and textures.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. EIFS Manufacturer Qualifications:

072423-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072423 – DIRECT-APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM

1. Member in good standing of the EIFS Industry Members Association (EIMA).

2. System manufacturer for a minimum of twenty (20) years.
3. Manufacturer's wall assembly listed in Gypsum Association Fire Resistance Design Manual.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Engaged in application of EIFS for a minimum of three (3) years.
2. Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of the materials specified and listed by the
material manufacturer as having attended manufacturer-provided continuing education.
3. Employ skilled mechanics who are experienced and knowledgeable in EIFS application, and
familiar with the requirements of the specified work.
4. Successful completion of minimum of three (3) projects of similar size and complexity to the
specified project.
5. Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the job site to install the system in
compliance with EIFS manufacturer's published specifications and details and the project plans
and specifications.
C. Inspections: Visual and documented inspections shall coincide with Pre-construction meeting,
moisture barrier application, foam application, and basecoat application. Provide inspections by
proprietary EIFS product representative.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in their original sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name and identification
of product.
B. Protect coatings (pail products) from freezing and temperatures in excess of 90 degrees F. Store
away from direct sunlight.
C. Protect Portland cement based materials (bag products) from moisture and humidity. Store under
cover off the ground in a dry location.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide manufacturer's 15 year labor and material warranty.
1.8 COORDINATION SCHEDULING
A. Install flashings, copings and sealant immediately after installation of the system and when coatings
are dry

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Direct-Applied Exterior Finish System
1. Provide components from single source manufacturer or approved supplier.
2. Manufacturers
a. Sto Corporation; www.stocorp.com (basis of design).
b. Dryvit Systems, Inc.; www.dryvit.com
c. Parex USA, Inc.; www.parex.com.
d. BASF Senergy Wall Systems; www.senergy.basf.com
e. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
B. Accessories:
1. Provide metal beads, starter tracks, screeds, reveals and other components as indicated in the
drawings or as required for a complete systems recommendation
2. Furnish accessories from the EIFS system manufacturer or a single manufacturer or supplier
approved by the EIFS system manufacturer.

072423-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072423 – DIRECT-APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Air and Water-Resistive Barrier: Either sheet-type material that constitutes an air retarder but which is
vapor permeable or fluid applied type as provided by EIFS system manufacturer and applicator as
part of a single source warranted installation. Refer to Section 076200 – Weather Barriers.
B. Base Coat: One-component polymer modified cement based factory blend base coat with less than
33 % Portland cement content by weight.
C. Reinforcing Mesh: Nominal 4.5 oz/sq yd, symmetrical, interlaced open-weave glass fiber fabric made
with minimum 20 percent by weight alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with EIFS coating
materials; capable of achieving EIMA Standard Impact Classification.
D. Waterproof Base Coat: Two component fiber reinforced acrylic based waterproof base coat mixed
with Portland cement. Watertight Coat is an acceptable substitute.
1. Use on horizontal and sloped surfaces that project more than 2 inches from face of wall.
E. Primer: Required as part of the system: Acrylic based tinted primer.
F. Finish Coat: Silicone enhance textured wall coating with graded marble aggregate.
1. Color: As indicated on drawings.
2. Marble Color: As indicated on drawings.
G. Water: Clean and potable.
H. Joint Sealant: Non-sag polyurethane sealant that has 50 percent elongation after conditioning, when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 1382; compatible with EIFS materials and with compatible backer
rod. Refer to Section 079200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. EIFS installer shall provide coordination with installers of related and adjacent materials to ensure
that:
1. Finish grading of site is such that EIFS terminates above finished grade a minimum of 8 inches
(203 mm) or as required by code.
2. Penetrations through wall are protected from weather prior to installation of windows, doors, and
other closures.
3. Sill flashing is provided at all openings.
4. Head flashing is installed immediately after windows and doors are installed.
5. Diverter flashings are installed wherever water can enter the wall assembly to direct water to the
exterior.
6. Copings and related sealant are installed immediately after installation of EIFS when EIFS
coatings are dry.
7. Penetrations are attached using fasteners through EIFS to structural support, with water tight
seal.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install finish system in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
B. Apply all materials listed in Materials section of this specification in the order of progression as listed
in the Materials section.
C. Use Base Coat for general application. Substitute Waterproof Base Coat as needed according to
manufacturer's recommendations or as directed in the Materials Article above.
D. Provide minimum 3/4 inch wide expansion joints through EIFS where moving joints exist in the
substrate or supporting construction, where EIFS adjoins dissimilar construction or materials, at
changes in building height, and at floor lines in multi-level frame construction.
E. Provide minimum 1/2 inch wide sealant joints at all penetrations through the EIFS (windows, doors,
etc.).
F. Provide joints with secondary moisture protection and drain to the exterior.

072423-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072423 – DIRECT-APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM

3.3 PROTECTION
A. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them.
B. Provide protection of installed materials from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and continuous high
humidity until they are fully dry.

END OF SECTION

072423-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072500 – WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water-resistive barriers.
B. Air barriers.
C. Vapor retarders.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete: under-slab vapor retarder.
B. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: air infiltration barrier.
C. 072117 – Fibrous Building Insulation: Vapor retarder installed in conjunction with batt insulation.
D. 072129 – Spray-Applied Cellulose Insulation.
E. 072140 – Spray-Applied Foam Insulation.
F. 072400 – Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems.
G. 072423 – Direct-Applied Exterior Finish Systems.
H. 075400 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Vapor retarder installed as part of roofing system.
I. 072900 – Joint Sealants: Sealant materials and installation techniques.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form water-resistive barriers, vapor retarders, or air barriers.
B. Water-Resistive Barrier: Water-shedding barrier made of material that is moisture-resistant, to the
degree specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams.
C. Air Barrier: Air-tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor
permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent
surfaces.
D. Vapor Retarder: Air-tight barrier made of material that is relatively water vapor impermeable, to the
degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
1. Water Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa s sq m) = 1 perm.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. U.S. Code of Federal regulations (CFR)
1. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; latest edition.
B. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC)
1. AATC Technical Manual; latest edition.
2. AATCC Test Method 30 - Antifungal Activity, Assessment on Textile Materials: Mildew and Rot
Resistance of Textile Materials; latest edition.
3. AATCC Test Method 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test; latest edition.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C836 - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric
Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course; latest edition.
2. ASTM D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing; latest edition.
3. ASTM D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and
Agricultural Applications; latest edition.
4. ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion
Testers; latest edition.

072500-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072500 – WEATHER BARRIERS

5. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
latest edition.
6. ASTM E96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; latest
edition.
7. ASTME 2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; latest edition.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics indicating compliance with the referenced
standards or test results.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation methods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES
A. A continuous, uninterrupted weather barrier system is required in all building envelope assemblies.
B. The weather barrier system shall be designed for specific types of construction in response to
prevailing climatic conditions. Coordinate with exterior finish system manufacturer’s requirements or
recommendations for types and placements.
2.2 WATER-RESISTIVE AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (VAPOR-PERMEABLE)
A. Air Barrier Sheet, Mechanically Fastened (only to be used as directed in Construction Documents):
1. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per square foot, maximum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 2178.
2. Water vapor permeance: 20 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E
96M Procedure A (desiccant method).
3. Water penetration resistance: Withstand a water head of 21 inches, minimum, for minimum of 5
hours, when tested in accordance with AATCC 127.
4. Ultraviolet and weathering resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum of 4
months weather exposure.
5. Surface burning characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 50
or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
6. Products
a. DuPont Company; www.dupont.com; Tyvek CommercialWrap D.
b. Pactiv GreenGuard; www.trustgreenguard.com; RainDrop3D.
c. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
B. Air Barrier Coating: Cold-fluid-applied, vapor permeable, elastomeric waterproofing membrane.
1. Material: Water-based acrylic or polymer-modified bitumen, with VOC content of zero.
2. Adhesion to paper and glass mat faced sheathing: Sufficient to ensure against failure due to
delamination of sheathing.
3. Dry film thickness: 10 mils (0.010 inch), minimum.
4. Air permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per square foot, maximum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 2178.
5. Water vapor permeance: 10 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E
96M.
6. Products
a. Sto Corporation; www.stocorp.com; StoGuard
b. DuPont Company; www.dupont.com; Tyvek Fluid-applied WB System.
c. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.3 VAPOR BARRIER MATERIALS (VAPOR, AIR, AND WATER-IMPERMEABLE)
A. Class I vapor retarders (Barriers) (<0.1 perm) shall be used in wall and roof assemblies only where
prevailing climatic conditions indicate their use.
B. Class I vapor retarders shall be installed only where Class II vapor retarders would not provide
satisfactory performance.

072500-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072500 – WEATHER BARRIERS

C. Class II vapor retarders shall be installed only where Class III vapor retarders would not provide
satisfactory performance.
D. Vapor barrier sheet: 10 mil minimum polyethylene sheet, edges lapped and taped with 2” self-
adhering mesh-reinforced polypropylene except under floor slabs.
E. Vapor retarder coating for use on exterior wall surfaces: Sprayed, elastomeric, UV-resistant coating
capable of being applied to damp masonry and green concrete without adverse effect on adhesion;
complying with requirements of ASTM C 836 except for minimum film thickness.
1. Film Thickness: 8 mils, minimum.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.1 perm, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E
96M.
3. Adhesion: Not less than 350 pounds-force per square inch when tested in accordance with
ASTM D4541.
4. Resistance to Fungal Growth: Pass AATCC Test Method 30.
5. VOC Content: Less than 600 g/L when tested in accordance with 40 CFR 59 Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
6. Suitable for use on concrete, masonry, and gypsum sheathing.
7. Products
a. Henry Company; www.henry.com; Air-Bloc 06WB.
b. W.R. Grace & Company; www.grace.com; Perm-A-Barrier Liquid.
c. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.4 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER MATERIALS (AIR- AND VAPOR- PERMEABLE)
A. Asphalt Felt: ASTM D 226 Type I felt (No.15). [Not used.]

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Water-Resistive Barriers: Install continuous barrier over surfaces indicated, with sheets lapped to
shed water but with seams not sealed.
C. Air Barriers: Install continuous air-tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with
sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
D. Vapor Retarders: Install continuous air-tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and
with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
E. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior:
1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal.
2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches.
3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12 inches.
4. For applications specified to be air-tight, seal seams, laps, penetrations, tears, and cuts with self-
adhesive tape; use only large-headed, gasketed fasteners recommended by the manufacturer.
5. Install water-resistive barrier over jamb flashings.
6. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings.
7. Install head flashings under weather barrier.
8. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into opening; at
head, seal sheet over flange and flashing.
F. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - Vapor Retarder On Interior:
1. When insulation is to be installed in assembly, install vapor retarder over insulation.
2. Seal seams, laps, perimeter edges, penetrations, tears, and cuts with self-adhesive tape, making
air-tight seal.
3. Locate laps at a framing member; at laps fasten one sheet to framing member then tape
overlapping sheet to first sheet.

072500-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 072500 – WEATHER BARRIERS

4. Seal entire perimeter to structure, window and door frames, and other penetrations.
5. Where conduit, pipes, wires, ducts, outlet boxes, and other items are installed in insulation cavity,
pass vapor retarder sheet behind item but over insulation and maintain air-tight seal.
G. Coatings:
1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by coating manufacturer; fill and tape joints in
substrate and between dissimilar materials.
2. Sprayed Coating: Install to thickness recommended by manufacturer.
3. Use self-adhesive sheet flashing to seal to adjacent construction and to bridge joints.
H. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:
1. Install self-adhesive flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least
5 inches onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched
edges.
2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using a
continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with self-adhesive flashing
at least 4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange.
3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of opening
framing, using self-adhesive flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing.
4. At head of openings, install self-adhesive flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2
inches beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.
5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint
sealant over backer rod.
6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form self-adhesive flashing around penetrating item and seal
to weather barrier surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install air and vapor seal materials and assemblies in conjunction with materials described in other
sections to provide continuous sealed barrier in the exterior enclosure of the building.
C. Sheet Seal:
D. Over exterior surface of sheathing install sheet seal Type 1 with manufacturer's preferred attachment.
Seal laps with tape.

END OF SECTION

072500-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 074213 – ALUMINUM COMPOSITE MATERIAL BUILDING PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum-faced composite panels with mounting system. Panel mounting system including integral
parapet coping, anchorages, furring, fasteners, gaskets and sealants, related flashing adapters and
masking for a complete installation.
B. Shop-installed aluminum stiffeners on all panels of 20 square feet or larger, with one stiffener for each
20 sq. ft. of panel area.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: Sheathing.
C. 072400 – Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems.
D. 072500 – Weather Barriers.
E. 076200 – Flashing and Sheet Metal Trim.
F. 079200 – Joint Sealants.
G. 075400 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. E330: Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors under the Influence
of Wind Loads; latest edition.
2. D1781: Climbing Drum Peel Test for Adhesive Materials; latest edition.
3. E84: Surface-Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; latest edition.
4. D3363: Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test; latest edition.
5. D2794: Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact) ; latest
edition.
6. D3359: Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test; latest edition.
7. D2247: Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity; latest
edition.
8. B117: Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing; latest edition.
9. D822: Practice for Operating Light and Water Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) for Testing
Paint, Varnish, Lacquer and Related Products; latest edition.
10. D1308: Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes; latest edition.
11. D1735: Method for Water Fog Testing of Organic Coatings; latest edition.
12. D1929: Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics; latest edition.
13. D635: Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in
Horizontal Position; latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in conformance with section 013000.
B. Samples
1. Panel assembly: Two samples of each type of assembly, 304 mm (12”) x 304 mm (12”)
minimum, including mitered outside corner joint and dry-seal panel joint.
2. Two samples of each color or finish selected, 76 mm (3") x 102 mm (4") minimum.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing project layout and elevations; fastening and
anchoring methods relative to the building structure and adjacent finishes; detail and location of joints,
sealants and gaskets, including joints necessary to accommodate thermal movement; trim; flashing;
stiffeners; and accessories.
D. Manufacturer’s certification that material meets specifications.
E. Test reports as required to indicate building code compliance.

074213-1
 CHASE
SECTION 074213 – ALUMINUM COMPOSITE MATERIAL BUILDING PANELS

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer qualifications: minimum of 15 years’ architectural experience in the manufacture of this
product.
B. Fabrication and installation of composite panels shall be from a single source.
C. Fabricator and installer qualifications
1. Minimum 5 years’ experience in architectural metal panel work similar in scope and size to this
project.
2. Approved for this type of work by the composite panel manufacturer.
D. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed by the contractor to avoid
delay of work.
E. Maximum deviation from vertical and horizontal alignment of erected panels: 6 mm (1/4") in 6 m (20')
non-accumulative.
F. Panel fabricator / installer shall assume undivided responsibility for all components of the exterior
panel system, including but not limited to, attachment to sub-construction, panel-to-panel joinery,
panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery and joint seal associated with the panel system.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Follow manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Store material in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Fabricator / Installer: 1 year against fabrication and installation defects.
B. The aluminum composite material : manufacturer’s 20 years against Max 5 fade based on ASTM
D2244 and Max 8 chalk based on ASTM D4212 and delamination of the paint finish
1.8 COORDINATION SCHEDULING
A. Install flashings, copings and sealant immediately after installation of the system and when coatings
are dry

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPOSITE PANELS
A. Manufacturer, products
1. Arconic Architectural Products; www.arconicarchitecturalproducts.com.
2. Substitutions: refer to section 016000.
B. Panel characteristics and performance
1. Polyethylene Core (PE).
2. Panel Thickness: 0.157”
3. Panel Weight: 1.12 lbs/sq.ft.
4. Standard testing compliance
a. Bond integrity: ASTM D1781, pass.
b. Peel strength per ASTM D1781: 40 in.lb. / in. as manufactured, 40 in.lb. / in. after 21-day
soak test.
c. Fire Performance: Class A per ASTM E84.
C. Panel Finishes
1. Finish colors
a. As indicated in the drawings.
b. Pre-approved manufacturer’s colors for non-standard projects.
1) Arconic Architectural Products Colorweld 500 Pure White.
2) Arconic Architectural Products Colorweld 500 Deep Black.
3) Arconic Architectural Products Colorweld 500 Program Blue.
c. Substitutions: not permitted.

074213-2
 CHASE
SECTION 074213 – ALUMINUM COMPOSITE MATERIAL BUILDING PANELS

2. Finish characteristics and performance

a. Primary base coating shall be factory applied on a continuous-process paint line.
b. Pencil hardness: ASTM D3363: F minimum.
c. Flexibility T-Bend: ASTM D4145: 0T.
d. Adhesion: ASTM D3359: No adhesion loss.
e. Reverse Impact: ASTM D2794: No cracking or paint removal.
f. Salt Spray Resistance: ASTM B117: Pass 3,000 hrs.
g. Humidity Resistance: ASTM D2247: Pass 3,000 hrs.
h. Exterior Exposure: 10 years at 45º, South Florida. ASTM D2244 shall be Max. 5 fade and
ASTM D4214 shall be Max. 8 chalk.
i. Gloss: ASTM D523 standard at 60º ranges from 20% to >80%
j. (FEVE) Megaflon®, Coraflon®, Valflon®, Lumiflon® or any polyester-based paint systems
are not acceptable.
3. Finish warranty for film integrity, chalk resistance, color change and gloss retention:
a. ‘Chase Blue’: 10 years
b. ‘Chase Nickel’: 20 years
2.2 PANEL SYSTEM FABRICATION
A. System Type
1. Rout-and-Return Dry System
2. Provide an engineered pressure relief system including extruded perimeter frame; drainage
gutter; all extrusions, clips, fasteners, anchors, spacers, trim, flashings, gaskets, sealant, etc.
B. System characteristics and tolerances
1. System shall not have exposed fasteners, telegraphing or fastening on the panel faces or any
other compromise of a neat and flat appearance.
2. Fabricate panel system to dimension, size and profile indicated on the drawings based on a
design temperature of 68ºF (20ºC).
3. Fabricate panel system to avoid compressive skin stresses. The installation detailing shall be
such that the panels remain flat regardless of temperature changes and at all times remain air-
and watertight.
4. The finish side of the panel shall have a removable protective film applied prior to fabrication,
which shall remain on the panel during fabrication, shipping and erection to protect the surface
from damage.
5. Panel bow shall not exceed 0.8% of panel overall dimension in width or length.
6. All fabrication shall be performed under controlled shop conditions when possible. Panel
dimensions shall be such that there will be an allowance for field adjustment and thermal
movement.
7. Breaks and curves shall be sharp and true, and surfaces free of warps or buckles.
8. Panels shall be visually flat.
9. Panel Surfaces shall be free of scratches or marks caused during fabrication.
C. System Performance
1. System shall withstand building movements and weather exposures based on ASTM E330.
a. System shall be designed to withstand the design wind load based upon the local building
code, but in no case less than 20 pounds per square foot (psf) and 30 psf on parapet and
corner panels.
b. Normal to the plane of the wall between supports, deflection of the secured perimeter-
framing members shall not exceed L/175 or 3/4", whichever is less.
c. Normal to the plane of the wall, the maximum panel deflection shall not exceed L/60 of the
full span.
d. Maximum anchor deflection shall not exceed 1/16". At 1 1/2 times design pressure,
permanent deflections of framing members shall not exceed l/100 of span length and
components shall not experience failure or gross permanent distortion. At connection points
of framing members to anchors, permanent set shall not exceed 1/16".
e. System shall drain any water leakage occurring at the joints.

074213-3
 CHASE
SECTION 074213 – ALUMINUM COMPOSITE MATERIAL BUILDING PANELS

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Extrusions, formed members, sheet and plate shall conform with ASTM B209 and the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
B. Panel stiffeners, if required, shall be structurally fastened or restrained at the ends and shall be
secured to the rear face of the composite panel with silicone of sufficient size and strength to maintain
panel flatness. Stiffener material and/or finish shall be compatible with the silicone.
C. Fasteners
1. Fasteners shall be concealed.
2. Fastener materials shall be compatible with the panel framing system and waterproofing system.
3. Use fasteners sufficient length to penetrate the wood framing / blocking.
4. Select fastener finish that will not cause galvanic reaction with adjacent metal materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from defects detrimental
to work. Notify contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the
work. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Surfaces to receive panels shall be structurally sound. In no case shall metal structural supports be
less than 18 gauge.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Erect panels plumb and level. Anchor panels securely per engineering recommendations and in
accordance with approved shop drawings to allow for necessary thermal movement and structural
support.
B. Fabrication, assembly and erection procedure shall account for the ambient temperature at the time of
the respective operation.
C. Panels shall be erected in accordance with an approved set of shop drawings.
D. All fasteners shall be concealed from view.
E. Do not install component parts that are observed to be defective, including warped, bowed, dented,
scraped and broken members.
F. Do not cut, trim, weld or scrape component parts during erection in a manner that would damage the
finish, decrease strength or result in a visual imperfection or a failure in performance. Return
component parts that require alteration to shop for refabrication, or for replacement with new parts.
G. Separate dissimilar metals; use appropriate gaskets and fasteners to minimize corrosive or electrolytic
action between metals.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace panels damaged beyond repair as a direct result of panel installation. After
installation, panel repair and replacement shall become the responsibility of the general contractor.
B. Repair panels with minor damage.
C. Remove masking film (if used) as soon as possible after installation. Masking intentionally left in place
after panel installation on an elevation shall become the responsibility of the general contractor.
D. Any additional protection, after installation, shall be the responsibility of the general contractor to
remove.
E. Final cleaning shall not be part of the work of this section.

END OF SECTION

074213-4
 CHASE
SECTION 074243 – FIBER CEMENT PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior, panelized fiber cement cladding system and accessories to complete a drained and back-
ventilated rainscreen.
B. Interior fiber cement panelized cladding system and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 054000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing
B. Section 061000 – Rough Carpentry
C. Section 061643 – Exterior Gypsum Sheathing
D. Section 072113 – Board Insulation
E. Section 072500 – Weather Barriers
F. Section 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
G. Section 075526 – Self-Adhering Sheet Flashing
H. Section 079200 – Joint Sealants
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
1. AAMA 509-14 – Voluntary Test and Classification Method of Drained and Back Ventilated Rain
Screen Wall Cladding Systems
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
2. ASTM C 1185 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Non-Asbestos Fiber Cement.
3. ASTM C 1186 – Standard Specification for Flat Fiber-Cement Sheets.
4. ASTM E-84 - Standard Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
5. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
6. ASTM E 228 - Standard Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid Materials with a
Vitreous Silica Dilatometer.
7. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
8. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
C. Florida Building Code - Test Protocol HVHZ
1. Testing Application Standard (TAS) 202, 203 – HVHZ Test Procedures
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 285 - Fire Test Method for Exterior Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Material.
2. NFPA 268 – Ignition Resistance of Exterior Wall Assemblies.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product description, storage and handling requirements, and
installation instructions.
C. Product Test Reports and Code Compliance: Documents demonstrating product compliance with
local building code, such as test reports or Evaluation Reports from qualified, independent testing
agencies.

074243-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 074243 – FIBER CEMENT PANELS

D. Manufacturer’s Details: Submit drawings (.dwg, .rvt, and/or .pdf formats), including plans, sections,
showing installation details that demonstrate product dimensions, edge/termination
conditions/treatments, compression and control joints, corners, openings, and penetrations.
E. Samples: Submit samples of each product type proposed for use.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. All fiber cement panels specified in this section must be supplied by a manufacturer with a
minimum of 10 years of experience in fabricating and supplying fiber cement cladding systems.
a. Products covered under this section are to be manufactured in an ISO 9001 certified facility.
2. Provide technical and design support as needed regarding installation requirements and
warranty compliance provisions.
B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer trained
by manufacturer or representative.
C. Mock-Up Wall: Provide a mock-up wall as evaluation tool for product and installation workmanship.
D. Pre-Installation Meetings: Prior to beginning installation, conduct conference to verify and discuss
substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions and warranty requirements, and project
requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Panels must be stored flat and kept dry before installation. A waterproof cover over panels and
accessories should be used at all times prior to installation. Do not stack pallets more than two high.
Refer to the information included on each pallet.
B. If panels are exposed to water or water vapor prior to installation, allow to completely dry before
installing. Failure to do so may result in panel shrinkage at ship lap joints, and such action may void
warranty.
C. Panels MUST be carried on edge. Do not carry or lift panels flat. Improper handling may cause
cracking or panel damage.
D. Direct contact between the panels and the ground should be avoided at all times. It is necessary to
keep panels clean during installation process.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s 15-year warranty against manufactured defects in fiber cement panels.
Additional 5-year extension available when refinished in year 14-15.
B. Provide manufacturer’s 15-year warranty against manufactured defects in panel finish.
C. Warranty provides for the original purchaser. See warranty for detailed information on terms,
conditions and limitations.

PART 2 - PART II: PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Nichiha Corporation, 18-19 Nishiki 2-chome Naka-ku, Nagoya, Aichi 460-
8610, Japan.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer’s Representative: Nichiha USA, Inc., 6465 E. Johns Crossing, Suite 250,
Johns Creek, GA 30097. Toll free: 1.866.424.4421, Office: 770.805.9466, Fax: 770.805.9467,
www.nichiha.com.
C. Basis of Design Product: Nichiha VintageWood.
1. Profile colors: Bark and Ash.
2. Profiles: Wood plank texture with three, 3/8” grooves running lengthwise, spaced 5-5/8” apart.
3. Accessory/Component Options:
a. Manufactured Corners with 3-1/2” returns for each profile color.
b. Aluminum trim options: J-Mold, Compression Joint

074243-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 074243 – FIBER CEMENT PANELS

1) Finish: Bark and Clear Anodized.

c. Essential Flashing System: Starter, Overhang.
1) Finish: Matte black.
4. Dimensions:
a. AWP-1818: 455mm (17-7/8”) (h) x 1,818 mm (71-9/16”) (l).
b. AWP-3030: 455mm (17-7/8”) (h) x 3,030 mm (119-5/16”) (l).
5. Panel Thickness: 16 mm (5/8").
6. Weight: AWP-1818: 35.27 lbs. per panel, AWP-3030: 57.32 lbs. per panel.
7. Coverage: 8.88 sq. ft. per panel (1818), 14.81 sq. ft. per panel (3030).
8. Factory sealed on six [6] sides.
9. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Fiber cement panels manufactured from a pressed, stamped, and autoclaved mix of Portland cement,
fly ash, silica, recycled rejects, and wood fiber bundles.
B. Panel surface pre-finished and machine applied.
C. Panels profiled along 3030mm edges so that the long joints between the installed panels are ship-
lapped.
D. Factory-applied sealant gasket added to top panel edge; all 3030mm edge joints contain a factory
sealant.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Fiber Cement Cladding – Must comply with ASTM C-1186, Type A, Grade II requirements:
1. Wet Flexural Strength: Result: 1418 psi, Lower Limit: 1015 psi.
2. Water Tightness: No water droplets observed on any specimen.
3. Freeze-thaw: No damage or defects observed.
4. Warm Water: No evidence of cracking, delamination, swelling, or other defects observed.
5. Heat-Rain: No crazing, cracking, or other deleterious effects, surface or joint changes observed
in any specimen.
B. Mean Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion (ASTM E-228): Max 1.0*10^-5 in./in. F.
C. Surface Burning (CAN-ULC S102/ASTM E-84): Flame Spread: 0, Smoke Developed: 0.
D. Wind Load (ASTM E-330): Contact manufacturer for ultimate test pressure data corresponding to
framing type, dimensions, fastener type, and attachment clips. Project engineer(s) must determine
Zone 4 and 5 design pressures based on project specifics.
1. Minimum lateral deflection: L/120.
E. Water Penetration (ASTM E-331): No water leakage observed into wall cavity.
F. Steady-State Heat Flux and Thermal Transmission Properties Test (ASTM C-518): 16mm thick panel
thermal resistance R Value of 0.47.
G. Fire Resistance (ASTM E-119): The wall assembly must successfully endure 60-minute fire exposure
without developing excessive unexposed surface temperature or allowing flaming on the unexposed
side of the assembly.
H. Ignition Resistance (NFPA 268): No sustained flaming of panels, assembly when subjected to a
minimum radiant heat flux of 12.5 kW/m2 ± 5% in the presence of a pilot ignition source for a 20-
minute period.
I. Fire Propagation (NFPA 285): Wall assembly of Nichiha AWP, Ultimate Clips and Starter Track,
Tyvek Commercial Wrap, ½” Densglass Gold Sheathing, 16” o.c. 18 gauge steel studs, mineral wool
in-cavity insulation, and interior 5/8” Type X gypsum met the acceptance criteria of NFPA 285.
J. Fire Propagation (CAN/ULC S-134): Wall assembly of Nichiha AWP, Ultimate Clips and Starter Track,
Tyvek Housewrap, 5/8” FRT plywood, 16” o.c. 2x wood studs, fiberglass in-cavity insulation, and
interior 5/8” Type X gypsum met the acceptance criteria of CAN/ULC S-134.
K. Drained and Back Ventilated Rainscreen (AAMA 509-14): System classifications: W1, V1.

074243-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 074243 – FIBER CEMENT PANELS

L. Florida Building Code - Test Protocol HVHZ (TAS 202, 203): Horizontal Application Design Pressure:
95 psf, Vertical Application Design Pressure: 85 psf.
2.4 INSTALLATION COMPONENTS
A. Ultimate Clip System:
1. Starter Track:
a. Horizontal Panel Installations - FA 700 – 3,030mm (l) galvalume coated steel.
b. Vertical Panel Installations (AWP-3030 only) – FA 710T – 3,030mm (l) galvalume coated
steel.
2. Panel Clips: JEL 778 “Ultimate Clip II” (10mm rainscreen for 16mm AWP) – Zinc-Aluminum-
Magnesium alloy coated steel.
a. Joint Tab Attachments (included) – used at all AWP-1818 panel to panel vertical joints, NOT
used with AWP-3030 installations.
3. Corner Clips: JE 777C (10mm rainscreen for 5/8” AWP Manufactured Corners) -- Zinc-
Aluminum-Magnesium alloy coated steel.
4. Single Flange Sealant Backer – FHK 1015 R (10mm) – 6.5’ (l) fluorine coated galvalume.
5. Double Flange Sealant Backer – FH 1015 R (10mm) – 10’ (l) fluorine coated galvalume.
6. Corrugated Spacer – FS 1005 (5mm), FS 1010 (10mm) – 4’ (l).
B. Aluminum Trim (optional): Paint primed trim as specified in finish schedule.
C. Essential Flashing System:
1. Starter – main segments (3,030mm), inside corners, outside corners
2. Overhang – main segments (3,030mm), inside corners, outside corners, joint clips
D. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant fasteners, such as hot-dipped galvanized screws appropriate to local
building codes and practices must be used. Use Stainless Steel fasteners in high humidity and high-
moisture regions. Panel manufacturer is not liable for corrosion resistance of fasteners. Do not use
aluminum fasteners, staples or fasteners that are not rated or designed for intended use. See
manufacturer’s instructions for appropriate fasteners for construction method used.
E. Flashing: Flash all areas specified in manufacturer’s instructions. Do not use raw aluminum flashing.
Flashing must be galvanized, anodized, or PVC coated.
F. Sealant: Sealant shall comply with ASTM C920, Class 35.

PART 3 - PART III: EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Fiber cement panels can be installed over braced wood, steel studs and sheathing including
plywood, OSB, plastic foam (1” or less) or fiberboard sheathing. Fiber cement panels can also be
installed over Structural Insulated Panels (SIP’s), Concrete Masonry Units (CMU’s) and Concrete
Block Structures (CBS’s) with furring strips, and Pre-Engineered Metal Construction. Insulated
Concrete Forms (ICFs) require added measures. Consult with Nichiha Technical Services.
2. Allowable stud spacing: 16” o.c. maximum.
3. A weather resistive barrier is required when installing fiber cement panels. Use an approved
weather resistive barrier (WRB) as defined by the 2015 IBC or IRC. Refer to local building codes.
4. Appropriate metal flashing should be used to prevent moisture penetration around all doors,
windows, wall bottoms, material transitions and penetrations. Refer to local building codes for
best practices.
B. Examine site to ensure substrate conditions are within alignment tolerances for proper installation.
C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
D. Do not install panels or components that appear to be damaged or defective. Do not install wet
panels.
3.2 TOLERANCE
A. Wall surface plane must be plumb and level within +/- ¼ inch in 20 feet in any direction.

074243-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 074243 – FIBER CEMENT PANELS

1. One layer of Nichiha 5mm (~3/16”) Spacer may be used as shim.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install products in accordance with the latest installation guidelines of the manufacturer and
all applicable building codes and other laws, rules, regulations and ordinances. Review all
manufacturer installation, maintenance instructions, and other applicable documents before
installation.
1. Consult with your local dealer or Nichiha Technical Department before installing any Nichiha fiber
cement product on a building higher than 45 feet or three stories or for conditions not matching
prescribed standard installation guide requirements and methods. A Technical Design Review
(TDR) process is available to evaluate project feasibility.
2. Vertical Control/Expansion Joints are required with AWP-1818, for walls wider than 30 feet,
within 2-12 feet of outside corners finished with metal trim and approximately every 30 feet
thereafter.
3. Vertical Control/Expansion Joints are required at each AWP-3030 vertical joint.
4. Horizontal/Compression Joints are required for multi-story installations of AWP. Locate joints at
floor lines. Joints are flashed minimum ½” breaks. Do not caulk. Refer to installation guide(s).
a. Wood framed buildings of three or more floors require a compression joint at each floor.
b. Steel framed buildings (including reinforced concrete core with LGMF exterior walls) of more
than three floors (or 45 feet) require a compression joint every 25 feet at a floor line.
B. Panel Cutting
1. Always cut fiber cement panels outside or in a well ventilated area. Do not cut the products in an
enclosed area.
2. Always wear safety glasses and NIOSH/OSHA approved respirator whenever cutting, drilling,
sawing, sanding or abrading the products. Refer to manufacturer SDS for more information.
3. Use a dust-reducing circular saw with a diamond-tipped or carbide-tipped blade.
a. Recommended circular saw: Makita 7-1/4” Circular Saw with Dust Collector (#5057KB).
b. Recommended blade: Tenryu Board-Pro Plus PCD Blade (#BP-18505).
c. Shears (electric or pneumatic) or jig saw can be used for complicated cuttings, such as
service openings, curves, radii and scrollwork.
4. Silica Dust Warning: Fiber cement products may contain some amounts of crystalline silica, a
naturally occurring, potentially hazardous mineral when airborne in dust form. Consult product
SDS or visit https://www.osha.gov/dsg/topics/silicacrystalline/.
5. Immediately clean dust from cut panels as it may bind to the finish.
3.4 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE
A. A. Review manufacturer guidelines for detailed care instructions.

END OF SECTION

074243-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 075400 - THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) membrane roofing system.
B. Roof insulation, flat and tapered.
C. Roof decking and sheathing.
D. Roofing material flashing and boots.
E. Roofing system walkway pads, adhesives, tapes and other accessories and materials.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 053100 – Steel Decking.
C. 061000 – Rough Carpentry.
D. 074243 – Aluminum Composite Material Building Panels.
E. 076200 – Flashing and Sheet Metal Trim.
F. 077190 – Roof Edge Systems.
G. 077200 – Roof Accessories.
H. Division 22 – Plumbing: Roof drains.
I. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C1278 - Standard Specification for Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Panel, latest edition.
2. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
Sheathing, latest edition.
3. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board, latest edition.
4. ASTM D6878 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing, latest
edition.
B. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation, latest edition.
C. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors
Association; latest edition, with interim updates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, sheathing, insulation,
surfacing, and fasteners.
C. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches in size illustrating insulation.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeter
conditions requiring special attention.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name
and registered with manufacturer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section:

075400-1
 CHASE
SECTION 075400 - THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING

1. Approved by membrane manufacturer.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact.
B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
C. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace roofing that
leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes.
1. Warranty Term: 20 years.
2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFING MEMBRANE
A. Sheet material: Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) single-ply white membrane with internal fabric
reinforcing, 60-mil thickness minimum, factory-fabricated into largest sheets possible, complying with
ASTM D6878.
B. Seaming material: as recommended by the sheet material manufacturer.
C. Flexible flashing material: same material as sheet material membrane.
D. Manufacturers
1. Carlisle SynTec: www.carlisle-syntec.com.
2. Firestone Building Products Co., Ultra-Ply: www.firestonebpco.com.
3. GAF, www.gaf.com.
4. Versico Roofing Systems, VersiWeld: www.versico.com.
5. Johns Manville: https://www.jm.com/en/commercial-roofing/tpo-roofing-systems
6. Substitutions: refer to section 016000.
2.2 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Panels: 1/4” or 1/2” impact-resistant nonstructural fiber-reinforced gypsum panels compliant with
ASTM C1278 or C1177.
B. Joint tape: paper tape, 1 1/2” wide, self-adhering, as recommended by the panel manufacturer.
C. Fasteners as recommended by the panel manufacturer for the application and substrate, and
compatible with the roofing insulation.
D. Products
1. Georgia-Pacific, www.gp.com, DensDeck Prime
2. United States Gypsum Corp., www.usg.com, Securock.
3. Substitutions: refer to section 016000.
2.3 ROOF DECKING
A. Refer to Section 061000 or 053100.
2.4 INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate closed-cell rigid foam board insulation
1. Product standard: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2.
2. Facing: cellulose felt or glass fiber mat, both faces.
3. Thermal resistance (R-Value): R-6.1 minimum.
4. Form: 4’-8’ boards, flat and tapered, 1/2” minimum thickness.
5. Manufacturers
a. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com.
b. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com.
c. Dow Chemical Company: www.dow.com.

075400-2
 CHASE
SECTION 075400 - THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING

d. Owens Corning Corporation: www.owenscorning.com.

e. Versico Roofing Systems, Versicore MP-H: www.versico.com.
f. Firestone, Resista: www.firestonebpco.com.
B. Fasteners: appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing and insulation manufacturers.
Length as required for thickness of insulation material and penetration of deck substrate, with metal
washers.
C. Adhesive: as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Stack boots and similar pipe, conduit and equipment support penetration flashing: roof membrane
manufacturer’s approved matching-material pre-fabricated multi-size portal-type flashing collar, with
stainless steel ring clamp where applicable.
B. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with membrane.
C. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
D. Walkway pads: Textured heat-weldable continuous TPO walkway rolls, 30”-34” wide x 50’ long, as
manufactured by the roofing membrane manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.
C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or
occurring.
E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the
same day.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Verify deck is supported and secure.
C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and
suitable for installation of roof system.
D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.
E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips are in
place.
3.3 WOOD DECK PREPARATION
A. Verify flatness and tightness of joints of wood decking. Fill knot holes with latex filler.
3.4 METAL DECK PREPARATION
A. Install deck sheathing on metal deck:
1. Lay with long side at right angle to flutes; stagger end joints; provide support at ends.
2. Cut sheathing cleanly and accurately at roof breaks and protrusions to provide smooth surface.
3. Tape joints.
4. Mechanically fasten sheathing to roof deck, in accordance with Factory Mutual recommendations
and roofing manufacturer's instructions.

075400-3
 CHASE
SECTION 075400 - THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING

3.5 INSULATION BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation in accordance with Factory Mutual DS 1-28 for Class I and windstorm resistance of I-
90.
B. On metal deck, place boards parallel to flutes with insulation board edges bearing on deck flutes.
C. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter
blocking and around penetrations through roof.
D. At roof drains, use factory-tapered boards to slope down to roof drains over a distance of 18 inches.
E. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day.
F. Attachment of Insulation:
1. Mechanically fasten first layer of insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's
instructions and Factory Mutual requirements.
2. Embed second layer of insulation into full bed of adhesive in accordance with roofing and
insulation manufacturers' instructions.
G. Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered minimum 6 inch from joints of preceding
layer.
H. Place tapered insulation to the required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.6 MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching.
B. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage.
C. Fully Adhered Application: Apply adhesive to substrate at rate of 1.66 gal/square. Fully embed
membrane in adhesive except in areas directly over or within 3 inches of expansion joints. Fully
adhere one roll before proceeding to adjacent rolls.
D. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by heat welding, minimum 1-1/2 inches. Seal permanently
waterproof.
E. At intersections with vertical surfaces:
1. Extend membrane up a minimum of 8 inches onto vertical surfaces.
2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips.
F. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing.
G. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings.
H. Install walkway pads. Space pad joints to permit drainage, and as indicated by roof membrane
manufacturer.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Section 014000 for general requirements for field quality control and inspection.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.
B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces
for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions.
C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations.
B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials.

END OF SECTION

075400-4
 CHASE
SECTION 076100 – SHEET METAL ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preformed, prefinished metal roofing and flashings.
B. Miscellaneous trim, flashing, closures, drip flashing, and accessories.
C. Sealant.
D. Fastening devices.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 055000 – Metal Fabrications.
C. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: Plywood Roof Sheathing.
D. 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
E. 077123 – Gutters and Downspouts.
F. 077200 – Roof Accessories.
G. 077253 – Snow Guards.
H. 079200 – Joint Sealants.
I. Division 22 – Plumbing: Plumbing vents projecting through roof.
J. Division 23 – Mechanical: Mechanical combustion air intakes and exhausts projecting through roof.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron & Steel Institute
(AISI); latest edition.
B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot Dip Process; latest edition.
2. ASTM A924 – Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated
by the Hot Dip Process; latest edition.
3. ASTM B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate, latest
edition.
4. ASTM D226 – Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing; latest edition.
5. ASTM D1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet
Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; latest edition.
6. ASTM E1592 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and
Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; latest edition.
7. ASTM E1680 – Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof
Panel Systems; latest edition.
8. ASTM E1646 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel
Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; latest edition.
C. Galvalume® sheet metal product data sheet; United States Steel Corporation; latest edition.
D. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
(SMACNA); latest edition.
E. FM 4471 – Approval Standard for Class 1 Roof Panels; Factory Mutual; latest edition.
F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1. UL 580 – Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance to Roof Assemblies; latest edition.
2. UL 2218 – Impact Resistance of Prepared Roof Materials; latest edition.

076100-1
 CHASE
SECTION 076100 – SHEET METAL ROOFING

G. American Architectural Manufacturers Association

1. AAMA 620 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated
Architectural Aluminum
2. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated
Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing anchoring details, joint details, trim, flashing,
weatherproofing, terminations, and penetrations of metal work.
B. Product data: sheet metal, sealants and fasteners.
C. Samples: each type of roofing system, including factory finish and example of typical panel seam, 2
each.
D. Submit a sample of each type of roof panel, complete with factory finish.
E. Statements of compliance with minimum requirements of the following performance tests:
1. Structural performance: ASTM E1592; meets performance requirements identified by applicable
building codes for the designed loading conditions.
2. Air infiltration: ASTM E1680; maximum static air infiltration of 0,01 cfm at 6.24 psf pressure
differential.
3. Water infiltration: ASTM E1646; no water penetration at minimum 12.0 psf.
4. Impact resistance: UL 2218; Class 4, no openings.
5. Wind Uplift:
a. FM 4471; Class 1, minimum wind speed [90/105/120] mph as required by code.
b. UL 580; Class [90/105/120] as required by code.
6. Combustibility: FM 4471; Class 1.
F. Calculations with registered engineer seal, verifying roof panel and attachment method resists wind
pressures imposed on it pursuant to applicable building codes.
G. Warranty documents complying with finish, weather-tightness and corrosion requirements.
H. Jurisdictional approvals as applicable
1. Florida product approvals.
2. Miami-Dade Notice of Acceptance.
3. Texas Department of Insurance Product Evaluation.
4. Others as required.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in Architectural Sheet Metal Products with ten (10) years
minimum experience.
B. Fabricator / Installer: Installer with minimum 5 years experience performing work of this Section on
projects of similar scope.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Upon receipt of panels and other materials, installer shall examine the shipment for damage and
completeness.
B. Panels should be stored in a clean, dry place. One end should be elevated to allow moisture to run
off.
C. Panels with strippable film must not be stored in the open, exposed to the sun.
D. Stack all materials to prevent damage and to allow for adequate ventilation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Sheet metal finish: 20-year guarantee against cracking, peeling and fade (not to exceed 5 N.B.S.
units).
B. Sheet metal corrosion: 20-year guarantee against failure due to corrosion, rupture or perforation.

076100-2
 CHASE
SECTION 076100 – SHEET METAL ROOFING

C. Water-tightness: Applicator shall furnish guarantee covering watertightness of the roofing system for
the period of two (2) years from the date of substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS
A. Berridge Manufacturing Company, www.berridge.com.
B. Pac-Clad / Petersen Aluminum; www.pac-clad.com.
C. Englert, Inc., www.englertinc.com.
D. The Garland Company, Inc.; www.garlandco.com.
E. Substitutions: refer to section 016000.
2.2 ROOFING PANELS
A. Material
1. U.S. Steel Galvalume® Aluminum-Zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, gage and grade as required to
comply with performance requirements.
2. Aluminum sheet conforming to ASTM B209.
B. Finish
1. Factory-applied 70% minimum Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 fluoropolymer coating
Manufacturer Preferred Color If Preferred not Permitted
Berridge Matte Black Cityscape
Petersen / Pac-Clad Matte Black/Black Slate Gray
Englert Matte Black Slate Gray
Garland Carbon Black Pewter
2. Bottom side shall be coated with a primer and urethane coating.
3. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility and longevity as specified by the Kynar
500 or Hylar 5000 finish supplier.
2.3 ROOFING PANEL FABRICATION
A. General
1. All exposed adjacent flashing shall be of the same material and finish as the roof panels.
2. Hem all exposed edges of flashing on underside, 1/2 inch.
3. On-siteforming of panels shall be performed using the panel manufacturer’s recommended roll-
forming and brake-forming equipment.
4. When required by authorities having jurisdiction, panel assembly shall bear Underwriters
Laboratories Label UL90.
B. Standing seam roofing panels
1. 2" high vertical legs shall be spaced at 16" on-center.
2. Inverted ‘L’ standing seams (Berridge ‘Zee Rib’, Petersen ‘Tite-Loc’, etc.) shall be formed and
fastened to substrate per panel manufacturer’s instruction s using panel manufacturer’s pre-
fabricated deck clips and specified fasteners.
3. If required to achieve specified weather-tightness, provide panel manufacturer’s oprional
weather-sealing accessories.
4. Side laps shall be mechanically seamed with powered seaming equipment.
C. Flat seam roofing panels
1. Panels shall be installed over manufacturer’s metal hat channel furring system or as otherwise
directed by panel manufacturer. Provide expanded polystyrene rigid insulation board (XPS)
underlayment material between panel furring as directed.
2. Seam spacing: as indicated by roofing panel manufacturer.
3. Fasteners: Galvanized ring shank roofing nails and sheet metal screws as provided or
recommended by the roofing panel manufacturer.
4. Panel seams shall be sealed with panel manufacturer’s integral sealant tape.

076100-3
 CHASE
SECTION 076100 – SHEET METAL ROOFING

2.4 SHEET UNDERLAYMENT

A. ASTM D226 Type II compliant ‘No. 30’ asphalt-saturated organic felt roll underlayment.
B. Manufacturers
1. Tamko Building Products Inc., www.tamko.com.
2. Atlas Roofing Corporation, www.atlasroofing.com.
3. Certainteed Corporation, www.certainteed .com.
4. Owens Corning, www.owenscorning.com.
5. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.5 SHEET ICE DAM PROTECTION
A. ASTM D1970-compliant polymer-modified bituminous self-adhering roll sheet underlayment for
protection against ice damming at steep slope roofs.
B. Warranty duration shall match the shingle warranty.
C. Include with all metal roofing installations regardless of climate.
D. Manufacturers, products
1. W.R. Grace & Company, www.grace.com, Ice and Water Shield HT.
2. Certainteed Corporation, www.certainteed .com, WinterGuard HT.
3. GAF Materials Corporation, www.gaf.com, UnderRoof HT.
4. Atlas Roofing Corporation, www.atlasroofing.com, Weathermaster Polyseal.
5. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Flashing and drip edges
1. Refer to Section 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
2. Flashing may be factory-fabricated or field-fabricated. Unless otherwise specified all exposed
adjacent flashing shall be of the same material and finish as panel system.
B. Fasteners: Type, size and finish as recommended by the panel manufacturer for the panel material
and substrate.
C. Sealant
1. As recommended by the material manufacturer for the application, exposure and climatic
conditions.
2. Refer to section 079200 – Joint Sealants.
D. Touch-up paint: as approved by or provided by panel manufacturer.
E. Off-ridge roof vents: refer to Section 077200 – Roof Accessories.
F. Fascias: refer to Section 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roof decking to verify proper attachment to framing.
B. Inspect roof decking to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves or projections,
level to +/- 1/4" in 20', and properly sloped to provide drainage within limitations of roofing system.
C. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and
reglets in place, and nailing strips located.
D. Verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. Joints in wood deck to be solidly supported and nailed].
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Sheet ice dam protection
1. Place eave edge and gable edge metal flashing tight with fascia boards. Weather-lap joints as
indicated by manufacturer (2” minimum). Secure flange with nails spaced 8 inches on center.

076100-4
 CHASE
SECTION 076100 – SHEET METAL ROOFING

2. Apply approved sheet materials as eave, hip, ridge and valley protection in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3. Extend eave protection membrane minimum 36 inches up slope beyond interior face of exterior
wall.
4. Extend hip, ridge and valley protection membrane 36” each side of hip/valley/ridge.
5. Lap sheets and secure with fasteners (if required) compatible with metal roofing materials, as
directed by sheet manufacturer.
B. Sheet underlayment
1. Install sheet underlayment over all roof areas not covered by sheet ice dam protection.
2. Roof Slope 4:12 or Greater: Install 2 layers #30 unperforated asphalt saturated roofing felt
underlayment using metal fasteners compatible with metal roofing materials. Install
perpendicular to slope of roof and lap minimum 4 inches over eave protection.
3. Roof slopes between 2:12 and 4:12: install sheet ice dam protection throughout roof in lieu of
sheet underlayment.
4. Weather-lap and seal watertight with asphalt roofing cement items projecting through or mounted
on roof. Avoid contact of solvent-based cements with sheet materials
C. Install sidewall, headwall, penetration and miscellaneous flashings in accordance with Section 076200
– Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
D. Install metal panel roofing system.
1. Comply with manufacturers standard instructions and conform to standards set forth in the
SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, in order to achieve a watertight installation.
2. Install panels in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines are
plumb.
3. Install starter and edge trim before installing roof panels.
4. Remove protective strippable film prior to installation of roof panels.
5. Attach panels using manufacturer's standard clips and fasteners, spaced in accordance with
approved shop drawings.
6. Install sealants for preformed roofing panels as approved on shop drawings.
7. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials.
8. Do not allow traffic on completed roof. If required, provide cushioned walk boards.
9. Protect installed roof panels and trim from damage caused by adjacent construction until
completion of installation.
10. Remove and replace any panels or components which are damaged beyond successful repair.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean any grease, finger marks or stains from the panels per manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Remove all scrap and construction debris from the site.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 017000.
B. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface.

END OF SECTION

076100-5
 CHASE
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fabricated sheet metal building envelope drainage materials and assemblies, including but not limited
to fascias, scuppers, reglets, drip edges and miscellaneous metal flashings and trims.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for batten seams.
C. 072400 – Exterior Insulation and Finish System
D. 072500 – Weather Barriers
E. 072423 – Direct-Applied Exterior Finish system
F. 073113 – Asphalt Shingle Roofing
G. 073200 – Clay Tile Roofing
H. 075400 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing
I. 076100 – Sheet Metal Roofing
J. 076526 – Self-Adhering Sheet Flashing
K. 077100 – Roof Specialties
L. 077123 – Gutters and Downspouts.
M. 077190 – Roof Edge Systems- Coping
N. 077200 – Roof Accessories
O. 079200 – Joint Sealants
P. 081113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Q. 084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
R. 084400 – Curtain Wall and Glazed Assemblies
S. 092423 – Portland Cement Stucco
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
1. ASTM A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and General Applications, latest edition.
2. ASTM A653/A653M, Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Alloy Coated (Galvanized) by
the Hot-Dip Process, latest edition.
3. ASTM B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate, latest
edition.
4. ASTM A480, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and
Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip, latest edition.
5. ASTM B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal, latest edition.
6. ASTM D 226, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing, latest edition.
7. ASTM D478, Standard Specification for Zinc Yellow (Zinc Chromate) Pigments, latest edition.
8. ASTM D1187, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings
for Metal, latest edition.
9. ASTM D4586, Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free, latest edition.
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association

076200-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

1. AAMA 620 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated
Architectural Aluminum
2. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated
Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.
C. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association; latest edition
1.4 GENERAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind uplift: comply with the requirements of the associated roofing system. Refer to Section [073113
– Asphalt Shingle Roofing[073200 – Clay Tile Roofing][076100 – Sheet Metal Roofing].
B. Wind design standard: comply with the requirements of the associated roofing system. Refer to
Section [073113 – Asphalt Shingle Roofing[073200 – Clay Tile Roofing][076100 – Sheet Metal
Roofing].
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Catalog cuts and installation instructions for manufactured products, including metal
flashing materials and associated sealants, adhesives, tapes, etc.
C. Shop Drawings: For manufactured assemblies only- indicate materials, gages, profiles, jointing
patterns, jointing details, fastening methods, and installation details.
1. Through-wall scuppers
2. Other manufactured assemblies
D. Samples
1. Samples representative of material gauge, finish and color of prefinished and mill finish flashing
materials, three (3) for each of the included flashing and trim types
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and
standard details, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Manufacturer qualifications: Company with manufacturing facilities, materials and products compliant
with the referenced standards
C. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in sheet metal work with 3 years of experience.
2. Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of the materials specified.
3. Materials of each type shall be provided and installed by a sole source. Where shop or field
fabrication of custom types is required, the fabrication and installation shall be by a sole source.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver the products and materials in the manufacturers’ original containers, dry and undamaged,
seals and labels intact.
B. Store products and materials in a weather-protected environment out of direct sunlight, between 32
and 90 deg. F, and clear of ground and moisture.
C. All waterproof tarps shall be opaque.
D. Do not double-stack pallets.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard written material warranty upon completion of the work.
B. Provide installer’s 1-year labor and materials warranty upon completion of the work.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to the environmental requirements of Section 079200 – Joint Sealants where there use is
required by this section.

076200-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

B. Conform to the environmental requirements of the bituminous paint, primer and touch-up paint
manufacturers where there use is required by this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Galvalume®
1. Metal flashing, fascia, drip edge, and drainage control materials at Galvalume® metal panel
roofing systems- refer to Section 076100 - Sheet Metal Roofing
2. [Field- or shop-fabricated sheet metal assemblies at clay tile roofs.]
3. As indicated elsewhere in drawings.
4. Product: United States Steel Corporation cold-rolled steel sheet with aluminum-zinc alloy coating,
chromate pretreatment.
5. Source: provided by sheet metal roofing panel manufacturer- refer to Section 07600 – Sheet
Metal Roofing.
6. Thickness: 26 gauge minimum.
7. Finish: Factory-applied min. 70% Kynar 500 ® fluoropolymer coating
a. Compliant with AAMA 621.
b. Color to match the metal panel roofing system.
B. Pre-finished Aluminum
1. Compliant with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14, 0.024” thick minimum.
2. Metal flashing, fascia and drip edge materials at asphalt shingle and Aluminum metal panel
roofing systems- refer to Section 073113 – Asphalt Shingle Roofing.
3. Alternate metal flashing, fascia, drip edge and drainage control materials at Galvalume® metal
panel roofing systems- refer to Section 076100 - Sheet Metal Roofing
4. Through-wall scuppers and other field- or shop-fabricated sheet metal assemblies[, except those
at clay tile roofs].
5. As indicated elsewhere in drawings.
6. Finish: Factory-applied min. 70% Kynar 500 ® fluoropolymer coating
a. Compliant with AAMA 620.
b. Color to match the Aluminum metal panel roofing system
c. Color selected by Architectect of Record from manufacturer’s standard colors to match as
closely as possible the Glavalume® metal panel roofing system.
C. Galvanized Steel
1. Compliant with ASTM A653, Grade A, G90 Zinc coating, 26 gauge minimum.
2. Metal flashing, fascia and drip edge materials at clay tile roofing systems- refer to Section
073200 – Clay Tile Roofing Systems
3. Finish: Factory-applied min. 70% Kynar 500 ® fluoropolymer coating
a. Compliant with AAMA 621.
b. Color to match the clay roofing tile.
D. Stainless Steel Drip Edge
1. Compliant with ASTM A240, Type 316, 26 gauge minimum.
2. Applied at rubberized asphalt flashing terminations- refer to Section 076526 – Self-Adhering
Sheet Flashing.
3. As indicated elsewhere in drawings.
4. Edge detail: 3/8” 45-degree drip with 3/16” closed hem.
5. Finish: ASTM A480 Type 2D
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Solder: Compliant with ASTM B32, flux type and alloy composition as required for use with the metals
to be soldered.
B. Underlayment: Compliant with ASTM D 226, organic roofing felt, [Type I ("No. 15")][Type II (“No.
30”)]. Refer to Section [073113 – Asphalt Shingle Roofing[073200 – Clay Tile Roofing][076100 –
Sheet Metal Roofing].
C. Mechanical fasteners

076200-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

1. Install nails, rivets, expansion anchors, screws, etc. of materials as recommended by the flashing
manufacturer and compatible with the roofing material and substrate without galvanic corrosion.
a. Where not otherwise indicated, provide stainless steel fasteners at Aluminum materials.
b. Where not otherwise indicated, provide stainless steel fasteners at stainless steel materials.
c. Where not otherwise indicated, provide stainless steel or galvanized steel fasteners at
galvanized steel materials.
d. Where not otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel or stainless steel fasteners at
Galvalume® products.
2. Fastener lengths shall be as required to penetrate the substrate fully and secure the materials for
their anticipated service life.
D. Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.
E. Primer and touch-up paint: as provided or indicated by the flashing finish system manufacturer.
F. Wall cavity weep materials: refer to Section 042000 – Unit Masonry.
G. Isolating materials
1. ASTM D1187 Type I bituminous paint.
2. ASTM D478 Zinc chromate primer, followed by two coats finish paint.
H. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
I. Cavity support blocking: wood-preservative-treated dimension lumber or structural-use panel material-
refer to Section 061000 – Rough Carpentry.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch unless otherwise noted.
D. Apply sealants in accordance with Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.
E. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed,
lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.
G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates as required to provide surfaces that are smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from
defects that might affect slashing performance.
B. Remove or modify projections which would puncture the materials or form surfaces which would
collect water.
C. Coordinate with masons for the application of mortar skim coat to masonry surfaces where required
for proper flashing attachment.
D. Coordinate with roofers for the installation of metal base flashings and other metal items having roof
flanges for anchorage and watertight installation.
E. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim in accordance with the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual.
B. Install flashings in conjunction with other trades so that flashings are inserted in other materials and
joined together to provide a water-tight installation.

076200-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

C. Apply bituminous paint between dissimilar materials where required to prevent galvanic reaction and
corrosion.
D. Miter and seam corners of flashing assemblies.
E. Conform to drawing details.
F. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted.
G. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt or membrane flashings.
H. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
I. Seal metal joints watertight.
J. Remove adhered protective plastic coverings from metal materials immediately after installation.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Where adjacent finished surfaces are soiled by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces
for cleaning requirements and conform to their documented instructions.
B. Remove all debris, tools and equipment from the project site after completion of the work.

END OF SECTION

076200-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 076526 – SELF-ADHERING SHEET FLASHING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Flexible rubberized asphalt self-sealing through-wall and applied membrane flashing, drip edge and
accessory materials.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for batten seams.
C. 072400 – Exterior Insulation and Finish System
D. 072500 – Weather Barriers
E. [073113 – Asphalt Shingle Roofing]
F. [073200 – Clay Tile Roofing]
G. 075400 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing
H. [076100 – Sheet Metal Roofing]
I. 076526 – Self-Adhering Sheet Flashing
J. 077100 – Roof Specialties
K. 077190 – Roof Edge Systems- Coping
L. 077200 – Roof Accessories
M. 079200 – Joint Sealants
N. 084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
O. 084400 – Curtain Wall and Glazed Assemblies
P. 092423 – Portland Cement Stucco
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM D412 – Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber & Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic
Elastomers – Tension, latest edition.
2. ASTM D903 – Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds, latest
edition.
3. ASTM D1876 – Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives, latest edition.
4. ASTM D1970 – Standard Specifications for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet
Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection, latest edition.
5. ASTM E96 – Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials, latest edition.
6. ASTM E154 – Test Method for Water Vapor Retarders used in contact with Earth Under
Concrete Slabs, on Walls or as Ground Cover, latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Submit for each product; Spec-Data®/Data Sheets, details and
installation procedures.
B. Test Reports: Indicating compliance with the performance requirements of this section.
C. Samples of flashing, two of each type..
D. Refer to Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and
standard details, except as otherwise indicated.

076526-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 076526 – SELF-ADHERING SHEET FLASHING

B. Manufacturer qualifications: Company with manufacturing facilities, materials and products compliant
with the referenced standards
C. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in sheet metal work with 3 years of experience.
2. Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of the materials specified.
3. Materials of each type shall be provided and installed by a sole source. Where shop or field
fabrication of custom types is required, the fabrication and installation shall be by a sole source.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver the products and materials in the manufacturers’ original containers, dry and undamaged,
seals and labels intact.
B. Store products and materials in a weather-protected environment out of direct sunlight, between 32
and 90 deg. F, and clear of ground and moisture.
C. All waterproof tarps shall be opaque.
D. Do not double-stack pallets.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer’s warranty that flashing and accessories are free of defects at time of delivery,
and are manufactured to meet manufacturer’s published physical properties and material
specifications.
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of completion of the flashing installation.
C. Installer to warrant that flashing and accessories have been installed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to the environmental requirements of Section 079200 – Joint Sealants where there use is
required by this section.
B. Conform to the environmental requirements of the bituminous paint, primer and touch-up paint
manufacturers where there use is required by this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET MATERIAL
A. Self-adhesive rubberized asphalt bonded high-density polyethylene to form a min. 40-mil thick
waterproof membrane, with interleaved disposable silicone-coated release backing paper.
1. Performance Requirements
a. Water vapor transmission, ASTM E96, Method B: 0.05 perms maximum
b. Lap adhesion
1) ASTM D1876: 5.0 lbs/in. of width minimum
2) ASTM D903: 10 lbf/in minimum
c. Low-temperature flexibility, ASTM D1970: unaffected to -10ºF
d. Tensile strength: ASTM D412, Die C Modified: 750 psi minimum
e. Elongation: ASTM D412, Die C – Min. 200%
2. Manufacturers, products
a. W.R. Grace, Perm-A-Barrier
b. Tamko, TW Thru Wall Flashing
c. W.R. Meadows, Air-Shield
d. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.2 DRIP EDGE
A. Required at all rubberized asphalt flashing material terminations exposed to sunlight.
B. Refer to Section 076200 – Flashing and Sheet Metal Trim.

076526-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 076526 – SELF-ADHERING SHEET FLASHING

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer / surface conditioner: water- or solvent-based adhesive as recommended by membrane
manufacturer to impart an aggressive, high-tack finish on the treated substrate.
B. Termination mastic: rubberized asphalt-based mastic as recommended by the membrane
manufacturer for sealing penetrations and terminations of membrane.EXECUTION
2.4 PREPARATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive membrane. Notify architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin
surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation,
tolerances and other specific conditions affecting performance of flashing. Remove all deleterious
materials from surfaces to be flashed.
C. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive self-adhering flashing membrane.
D. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Do not apply membrane to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
F. All surfaces must be clean, smooth, and dry and must be clean of oil, dust, and excess mortar.
G. Strike masonry joints flush.
H. Patch all holes and voids and smooth out any surface misalignments.
I. Concrete surfaces must be cured for a minimum of 14 days.
J. If curing compounds are used, they must be clear, resin-based, and without oil, wax, or pigments.
K. When required by dirty or dusty site conditions or by surfaces having irregular or rough texture, apply
primer / surface conditioner by air spray, brush or roller. Allow the primer to dry completely before
flashing application.
2.5 INSTALLATION
A. Precut pieces of flashing to easily handled lengths for each location.
B. Remove silicone-coated release paper and position flashing carefully before placing it against the
surface.
C. When properly positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place by hand roller. Fully
adhere flashing to substrate to prevent water from migrating under flashing.
D. Overlap adjacent pieces and drip edge 2 in. and roll all seams with a steel hand roller.
E. Trim bottom edge 1/2” back from exposed face of the wall. Flashing shall not be permanently exposed
to sunlight.
F. At heads, sills and all flashing terminations turn up ends a minimum of 2 in. and make careful folds to
form an end dam, with the seams sealed.
G. Seal top edge of transition membrane with pointing mastic.
H. Do not allow the rubberized asphalt surface of the flashing membrane to come in contact with
polysulfide sealants, creosote, uncured coal tar products or EPDM.
2.6 PROTECTION
A. Do not expose flashing membrane to sunlight for more than thirty days prior to enclosure.
2.7 CLEANING
A. Where adjacent finished surfaces are soiled by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces
for cleaning requirements and conform to their documented instructions.
B. Remove all debris, tools and equipment from the project site after completion of the work.
END OF SECTION

076526-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 077113 – MANUFACTURED COPINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Factory-fabricated and finished sheet metal parapet copings and associated hardware and
accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 061000 – Rough Carpentry.
C. 072500 – Weather Barriers.
D. 072423 – Direct-Applied Exterior Finish System.
E. 075400 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing.
F. 076526 – Self-Adhering Sheet Flashing.
G. 079200 – Joint Sealants
H. 092423 – Portland Cement Stucco
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM A653/A653M, Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Alloy Coated (Galvanealed)
by the Hot-Dip Process, latest edition.
2. ASTM A792/A792M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy- Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process, latest edition.
3. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate, latest
edition.
4. ASTM E283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen
5. ASTM E331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors,
and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference, latest edition.
6. ASTM E1592 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding
Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference, latest edition.
7. ASTM E1646 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems
by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference, latest edition.
8. ASTM E1680 Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel
Systems, latest edition.
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association
1. AAMA 620 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated
Architectural Aluminum
2. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated
Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.
C. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association; latest edition
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
1. UL 263: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials, latest edition.
2. UL 580 Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance Resistance of Roof Assemblies, latest edition.
3. UL 790 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings, latest edition.
4. UL 1897 Uplift Tests for Roof Covering Systems, latest edition.
5. UL 2218 Standard for Impact Resistance of Prepared Roof Covering Materials, latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit detailed drawings showing anchoring, joint and termination details.
B. Product data: sheet metal, sealants and fasteners.

077113-1
 CHASE
SECTION 077113 – MANUFACTURED COPINGS

C. Submit two full-size coping system assembly samples, including factory finish as specified, one butt
joint with splice plates and sealant tape, secured to a substrate by the specified anchoring clip
system.
D. Submit Statements of compliance with minimum requirements of the following performance tests:
1. Structural performance: ASTM E1592; meets performance requirements identified by applicable
building codes for the designed loading conditions.
2. Air infiltration: ASTM E1680; maximum static air infiltration of 0,01 cfm at 6.24 psf pressure
differential.
3. Water infiltration: ASTM E1646; no water penetration at minimum 12.0 psf.
4. Impact resistance: UL 2218; Class 4, no openings.
5. Wind Uplift: UL 580; Class [90/105/120] or similar test-agency certification as required by code.
6. Combustibility: UL 790.
E. Calculations with registered engineer seal, verifying roof panel and attachment method resists wind
pressures imposed on it pursuant to applicable building codes.
F. Warranty documents complying with finish, weather-tightness and corrosion requirements.
G. Jurisdictional approvals as applicable. In jurisdictions where required, materials shall carry applied
labels indicating compliance with the required codes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials of this Section shall be provided by a single manufacturer, including installation
accessories and hardware.
B. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and
standard details, except as otherwise indicated.
C. Manufacturer qualifications: Company with manufacturing facilities, materials and products compliant
with the referenced standards.
D. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in sheet metal work with 3 years of experience.
2. Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of the materials specified.
3. Materials of each type shall be provided and installed by a sole source. Where shop or field
fabrication of custom types is required, the fabrication and installation shall be by a sole source.
E. Provide mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. Do
not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color and sheen are approved by Architect of
Record.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver the products and materials in the manufacturers’ original containers, dry and undamaged,
seals and labels intact.
B. Store products and materials in a weather-protected environment out of direct sunlight, clear of
ground and moisture.
C. Do not double-stack pallets.
1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Ensure that products of this section and information required for installation of products of this section
is furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.
B. Coordinate installation with roof membrane manufacturer’s instructions.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform work only when environmental conditions (temperature and humidity) are within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental
conditions beyond manufacturer’s absolute limits.

077113-2
 CHASE
SECTION 077113 – MANUFACTURED COPINGS

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard written material warranty upon completion of the work.
B. Provide a 20-year warranty for manufacturer’s factory-applied finish against color fade, chalk and film
integrity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Pre-finished Aluminum-Zinc alloy-coated (hot-dip galvanized) steel sheet
1. United States Steel Corporation Galvalume® 22-gauge minimum cold-rolled steel sheet with
aluminum-zinc alloy coating with chromate pretreatment, manufactured in accordance with
ASTM A792.
2. Factory-applied min. 70% Kynar 500® or Hylar 5000® fluoropolymer coating
a. Compliant with AAMA 621.
b. Color(s) as indicated in the drawings. Where metal roofing is specified, match the metal
roofing color.
1) Standard color preference: Matte Black.
2) Alternate color when black roofing not permitted: Slate Gray.
B. Pre-finished Aluminum sheet
1. Manufactured in accordance with ASTM B209, 0.050” minimum thickness.
2. Factory-applied min. 70% Kynar 500® or Hylar 5000® fluoropolymer coating
a. Compliant with AAMA 620.
b. Color(s) as indicated in the drawings. Where metal roofing is specified, match the metal
roofing color.
1) Standard color preference: Black.
2) Alternate color when black roofing not permitted: Slate Gray.
2.2 COPING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Petersen Aluminum / Pac-Clad; www.pac-clad.com; Pac-Continuous Cleat Coping.
B. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Concealed-fastener continuous cleats
1. Installed in non-continuous sections or modified with punched holes where required for
ventilation of parapet cavity.
2. Installed continuous at splices, corners and ends.
B. Shop- or factory-fabricated splice plates, color-matched to coping finish.
C. Adhesive neoprene splice plate strips.
D. Sealants: provided as required by installer, compatible with materials and finishes in contact and
meeting the requirements of the coping system manufacturer’s material warranty. Refer to Section
079200 – Joint Sealants.
E. Mechanical fasteners
F. Factory-fabricated corner units, extenders and endcaps, in matching finish.
G. Mechanical fasteners
a. As provided or recommended by the coping system manufacturer.
b. Compatible with the substrate being fastened to, including sheet and liquid membranes and
sealants in contact. Select fastener material to eliminate the possibility of galvanic
corrosion.
c. Fastener lengths as required to penetrate the substrate fully and secure the materials for
their anticipated service life.
H. Touch-up paint as provided by the coping system manufacturer.

077113-3
 CHASE
SECTION 077113 – MANUFACTURED COPINGS

I. Wall cavity weep materials: refer to Section 042000 – Unit Masonry.

J. Support blocking: wood-preservative-treated dimension lumber or structural-use panel material- refer
to Section 061000 – Rough Carpentry.
K. Bituminous paint, as provided by the flashing or steep-slope roofing contractor or materials vendor,
where required for isolation of materials to prevent galvanic reaction between dissimilar metals. Refer
to Section 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch unless otherwise noted.
D. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip.
E. Refer to drawings for coping profiles. Pitch tops of all copings toward roof, 1/4” per foot minimum.
F. Install coping system manufacturer’s splice plates and adhesive neoprene sealant strips at splices as
directed by coping system manufacturer.
G. Where not possible to utilize factory-fabricated corner and end components, fabricate corners and end
caps from a single piece, minimizing joints, splice to adjacent material runs and apply minimum
sealant as required for water-tight installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify that the substrate is dry, clean and free of foreign matter.
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify General Contractor of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates as required to provide surfaces that are smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from
defects that might affect slashing performance.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Verify that manufactured components fit properly in place as indicated in the drawings prior to
proceeding with installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet metal copings and associated components, accessories and hardware in accordance
with the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Install coping materials in conjunction with other trades so that adjacent flashing and membrane
positions are joined together and sealed as required to provide a water-tight installation.
C. Apply bituminous paint between dissimilar materials where required to prevent galvanic reaction and
corrosion.
D. Conform to drawing details.
E. Snap copings in-place without exposed fasteners. Fastener use is limited to the cleat system.
F. Fit copings tight in place in compliance with wind-uplift criteria. Make corners square, surfaces true
and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.
G. Remove adhered protective plastic coverings from metal materials immediately after installation or
from concealed surfaces prior to installation.

077113-4
 CHASE
SECTION 077113 – MANUFACTURED COPINGS

H. Apply sealants minimally as required to provide water-tight joints in accordance with Section 079200 –
Joint Sealants.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Where adjacent finished surfaces are soiled by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces
for cleaning requirements and conform to their documented instructions.
B. Remove all debris, tools and equipment from the project site after completion of the work.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed components until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

077113-5
 CHASE
SECTION 077123 - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Gutters, downspouts and related accessories.
B. Downspout splash blocks.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 061000 – Rough Carpentry.
C. 076200 – Flashing and Sheet Metal Trim.
D. 079000 - Joint Sealants
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
B. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (ASMM); Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National
Association (SMACNA); latest edition.
C. AAMA 1405.1 – Specification for Aluminum Raincarrying Systems; American Architectural
Manufacturers Association (AAMA); latest edition.
1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for size and method of rain water discharge.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; showing dimensions of metal gutters and
accessories, fastening details and connections and interface with other products.
D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150
mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Manufacturers warranties.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and installation of gutter and downspout components shall be by a sole source.
B. Fabricator / Installer shall have not less tan 5 years experience fabricating and installing gutters and
downspouts on projects of similar scope.
C. Fabricator / Installer shall perform all work in accordance with the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store products to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation.
C. Slope stored materials to drain.
D. During storage prevent contact with materials capable of causing discoloration, staining, or other
damage.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate installation with installation of adjacent roofing, siding and related materials.

077123-1
 CHASE
SECTION 077123 - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide the Manufacturer's Limited 20-Year, pro-rated and non-transferable Warranty covering labor
materials.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of floor finish materials to avoid damage to
installed underlayment and membrane materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Englert, Inc., www.englertinc.com.
2. Dimensional Metals, Inc., www.dmimetals.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 016000.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sheet metal: continuous and seamless roll-formed Aluminum sheet compliant with ASTM B 209, Alloy
3105-H24 with factory-applied min. 70% Kynar high performance organic fluoropolymer coating, color
as indicated on drawings.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Gutters: K-style, 0.032” min. thickness.
B. Downspouts: rectangular, corrugated, 0.032” min. thickness.
C. Endcaps, inside and outside miters: 0.027” min. thickness.
D. Gutter hangers and anchors, downspout brackets: 0.063” min. thickness.
E. Sealant: refer to Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.
F. Fasteners: Aluminum, color-matched to gutter and downspout materials.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Splash blocks: Architectural cast stone veneer remnants, minimum 12” x 12”, set flush with grade and
pitched minimum 1/2” per foot away from building.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated.
B. Fabricate with required connection pieces.
C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion or
defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
D. Hem exposed edges of metal.
E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories.
F. Seal all seams and joints watertight.
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally
cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled.
1. Color(s) as indicated in the drawings.
2. For downspouts at stone facades, match a manufacturer’s standard color to the stone.
3. Except at stone facades, and where metal roofing is specified, match the metal roofing color.
Manufacturer Preferred Color If Preferred not Permitted
Englert Matte Black Slate Gray
Dimensional Metals Matte Black Weathered Zinc

077123-2
 CHASE
SECTION 077123 - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify governing dimensions at building.
C. Verify surfaces are ready to receive gutters and downspouts.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Clean and repair if necessary any adjoining work on which this work is in any way dependent for its
proper installation.
C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install gutters using appropriate hangers to allow normal expansion and contraction.
C. Install gutter hangers using two 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) screw shank nails and fastened into solid lumber.
D. All gutters shall be in continuous length for each elevation (run). No end laps are allowed.
E. Exercise care in placing aluminum in contact with other dissimilar metals or materials that are not
compatible with aluminum.
F. Providing adequate insulation/separation where ever necessary, such as by painting or otherwise
protecting when they are in contact with aluminum or when drainage from them passes over
Aluminum surfaces.
G. Install sealants where indicated to clean dry surfaces only without skips or voids.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

077123-3
 CHASE
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manufactured roof equipment curbs, rails, and other mounting apparatus.
B. Manufactured pipe, duct, and conduit mounting pedestals.
C. Manufactured roof hatches / scuttles for roof access and equipment enclosure covers.
D. Manufactured off-ridge roof vents.
E. Custom-fabricated equipment screens.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 051200 – Structural Steel
B. 055000 – Metal Fabrications
C. 061000 – Rough Carpentry
D. 075400 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing
E. 079200 – Joint Sealants
F. 099000 – Paintings and Coatings
G. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products.
3. ASTM A325 – Standard Specification for Structural Steel Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120.105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength.
4. ASTM A500 – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
5. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
6. ASTM A 792 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated By The
Hot-Dip Process.
7. ASTM A 780 – Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
8. ASTM B 209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1. UL 790 – Standard for Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
C. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
1. AAMA 621 – Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coarted
Hot Dip Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.
2. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Installation methods.
3. Maintenance requirements.
4. Notice of acceptance: where required in hurricane zones, by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Shop drawings: all custom-manufactured assemblies.

077200-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOF HATCHES / SCUTTLES
A. Roof access hatch / scuttle (30”x36” clear opening) manufacturers, products
1. Bilco Co., www.bilco.com:
a. Non-hurricane zones: Model S-20
b. Hurricane zones: Model S-20HZ
2. Milcor Inc., www.milcorinc.com – Model RB-1
3. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
B. Roof equipment enclosure hatch / scuttle (54”x30” clear opening) manufacturers, products
1. Bilco Co., www.bilco.com – Model NB-20
a. Non-hurricane zones: Model NB-20
b. Hurricane zones: Model NB-20HZ
2. Milcor Inc., www.milcorinc.com – Model RB-2
3. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
C. Cover and and frame material: 14-gauge ASTM A653 G90 galvanized steel, factory primed for field
finishing. For painting requirements, refer to Section 099000 – Paints and Coatings.
D. Cover fabrication: Hollow-metal design with 1” minimum concealed fiberglass or rigid foam insulation
and flange with welded corners overlapping frame, internally reinforced for a 40 lb. minimum live load.
E. Curb: 12” minimum height, integral cap flashing, 1” minimum fiberboard insulation, welded corners,
with mounting flange including pre-drilled deck-fastening holes.
F. Hinges: Type 316 stainless steel with 3/8” min. diameter pin.
G. Operating hardware
1. Zinc, Chrome or Cadmium-plated interior and exterior lever handles with interior hasp.
2. Automatic hold-open lifting arm with grip handle release.
3. Compression spring struts in telescoping steel tubes secured to unit frame.
H. Gasket: extruded EPDM rubber strip permanently adhered to cover.
I. Performance ratings required
1. Roof material burning characteristics: UL 790, Class A.
2. Jurisdictional approvals in hurricane zones as required.
2.2 ROOF LADDER SAFETY POST
A. Manufacturers, products
1. Bilco Co., www.bilco.com – LadderUP LU-1
2. Milcor Inc., www.milcorinc.com – Upright Safety Bar
3. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
B. Product construction and operation options
1. Telescoping spring-loaded tubular steel sections with automatic locking device at full extension.
2. Non-telescoping tubular steel section hinge-mounted to roof hatch / scuttle frame with automatic
locking device at upright position.
C. Attachment options
1. Telescoping device: Post manufacturer’s u-bolts field-installed to center of roof access ladder
rungs.
2. Hinged device: factory-installed to inside face of roof hatch / scuttle frame.
3. Hinged device: field-installed to inside face of roof hatch / scuttle frame.
D. Finish options
1. Factory-applied yellow powder-coat finish- field finishing not required.
2. Factory-primed for field finish: refer to Section 099000 – Paints and Coatings.
2.3 MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT CURB AND RAIL SYSTEMS
A. Aluminum or galvanized steel rail equipment support systems
1. Manufacturers, products

077200-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

a. Avcoa., www.avcoausa.com – Hurricane Stand

b. Eberl Iron Works, eberliron.com,
c. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2. Base post and plate: flat Aluminum or hot-dip galvanized steel plate shop-welded to round
structural tube, capped water-tight by shop-welded top plate, length as required to extend
through roof insulation and allow proper installation of roofing membrane flashing boot.
3. Equipment support framing: extruded Aluminum tubes or structural shapes or drawn hot-dip
galvanized steel structural tubes or shapes- sized as required to support loads imposed.
4. Fasteners: A325 stainless steel.
5. Vibration isolation material: by HVAC contractor – refer to Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and
Air-Conditioning.
6. Flashing: by roofing contractor- refer to Section to 075400 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing.
7. Equipment tie-downs: by HVAC contractor – refer to Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air-
Conditioning.
8. Finish: not required.
9. Notice of acceptance: where required in hurricane zones, by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Curbs and curb rails
1. Curbs: manufacturers, products
a. Thybar, www.thybar.com, TC-3.
b. The Pate Co., www.patecurbs.com,PC-4-IL.
c. Curbs Plus, www.curbs-plus.com, CPC-3; requires additional 14-gauge counter-flashing.
d. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2. Curb rails: manufacturers, products
a. Thybar, www.thybar.com, TEMS 3.
b. The Pate Co., www.patecurbs.com, ES-2.
c. Curbs Plus, www.curbs-plus.com, CPES-3.
d. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
3. Product requirements
a. ASTM A653 G90 14-gauge galvanized steel based with continuous welded corner seams
and internal reinforcing as required to support loads imposed.
b. Wood-preservative-treated 2x4 nailer with 18-gauge ASTM A653 G90 galvanized steel
counter-flashing cover.
c. Height and base slope as required to maintain level top with minimum 8” height above
roofing membrane. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches, minimum.
d. Insulate inside curbs with 1-1/2 inch thick XPS or Polyiso rigid board, R-7.5 min.
e. Manufacture curb bottom and mounting flanges for installation directly on roof deck, not on
insulation; match slope and configuration of roof deck.
f. Fasteners: A325 stainless steel.
g. Vibration isolation material: by HVAC contractor – refer to Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating
and Air-Conditioning.
h. Flashing: by roofing contractor- refer to Section to 075400 – Thermoplastic Membrane
Roofing.
i. Equipment tie-downs: by HVAC contractor – refer to Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and
Air-Conditioning.
j. Finish: not required.
k. Notice of acceptance: where required in hurricane zones, by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.4 PIPE, DUCT AND CONDUIT MOUNTING PEDESTALS
A. Product requirements
1. 14-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel channel for attachment of pipe / duct installer’s clamp or
height-adjusting hardware, mill finish.
2. Clear height from roof surface to bottom of supported element: 6”, minimum.
3. Support base: UV-resistant rubber or plastic, approved for use with specified roofing material.
4. Manufacturers, products
5. Mifab, www.mifab.com, #C610
6. Dura-Blok, www.cooperindustries.com, #DB610.
7. Miro Industries, www.miroind.com, Model 2.5.
8. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.

077200-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

2.5 OFF-RIDGE STATIC ROOF VENTS

A. Slant-back style, self-flashing roof-mounted sheet metal attic exhaust vent with louvered sides and
bottom faces and weather-tight welded or seamed feck collar.
B. Product requirements
1. Sizes and quantities as required to economically achieve the free vent area determined and the
aesthetics indicated in the drawings.
2. Base metal compatible with the roofing materials indicated.
a. Aluminum sheet compliant with ASTM B209.
b. Galvanized steel sheet compliant with ASTM A653/A653M.
3. Finish: factory-finished manufacturer’s baked-enamel or powder-coat finish, standard color as
selected by Architect of Record.
4. Structural uplift and wind-driven rain infiltration: comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Manufacturers, products
1. Lomanco www.lomanco.com, 700-Series
a. Aluminum (double unit): 770-D.
b. Galvanized steel: 750-G.
2. Owens-Corning, www.owenscorning.com. ALSB and GVSB-Series.
3. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.6 METAL AND MISC. MATERIALS FOR CUSTOM SHOP-FABRICATED ELEMENTS
A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation and mill
phosphatized for field painting where indicated.
1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting
topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat. Comply with coating
manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
2. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color
topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.
3. Mill-Phosphatized Finish: Manufacturer's standard for field painting. Refer to Section 099000 –
Paints and Coatings.
B. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 (AZM150) coated.
1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting
topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat. Comply with coating
manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
2. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color
topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.
3. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and white or light-
colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2
mil (0.005 mm).
C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with
temper to suit forming operations and performance required. (Shop finishes)
1. Mill Finish: As manufactured.
2. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and white or light-
colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2
mil (0.005 mm).
3. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 620. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color
topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.
4. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of
1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
D. Aluminum extrusions and tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), manufacturer's standard alloy and
temper for type of use, field-painted- refer to Section 099000 – Paints and Coatings.

077200-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

E. Structural steel shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M,
field-painted- refer to Section 099000 – Paints and Coatings.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized, field-painted- refer to Section 099000 – Paints and
Coatings.
G. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A123 /
A123M, field-painted- refer to Section 099000 – Paints and Coatings.
H. Wood-preservative treated dimension lumber – refer to Section 061000 – Rough Carpentry.
I. Insulation: closed-cell rigid boards, extruded polystyrene or polyisocyanurate. Refer to Section
072113 – Board Insulation.
J. Fasteners: AISC A325 stainless steel
K. Flashings: single-ply adhesive sheet compatible with roofing membrane, with stainless steel ring
clamps where required- refer to Section 075400 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing.
L. Sealants: compatible with the materials in contact and as indicated in Section 079200 – Joint
Sealants.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in
alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.
3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete
installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening
of fasteners and seals.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact
with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by
other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated Aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating where in
contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates,
install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof
accessories for waterproof performance.
C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.
D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each other.
E. Roof-Hatch Installation:
1. Install roof hatch so top surface of hatch curb is level.
2. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating mechanism and
hardware.
3. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb.
4. Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.

077200-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

F. Gravity Ventilator Installation: Verify that gravity ventilators operate properly and have unrestricted
airflow. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating mechanisms.
G. Pipe Support Installation: Install pipe supports so top surfaces are in contact with and provide equally
distributed support along length of supported item.
H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer and compatible with
materials in contact.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.
B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting.
C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Clean off excess sealants.
E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish
touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
F. Protect installed products until completion of project.
G. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

077200-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 077253 - SNOW GUARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Snow guards on sloping roofs- refer to roofing material specification sections for climatic and material
requirements.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 073113 – Asphalt Shingles
C. 076100 – Sheet Metal Roofing
D. 073200 – Clay Tile Roofing
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
1. ASTM A653/A653M, Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated
(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, latest edition.
2. ASTM A924 – Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated
by the Hot Dip Process; latest edition.
3. ASTM B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate, latest
edition.
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association
1. AAMA 620 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated
Architectural Aluminum
2. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated
Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.
C. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association; latest edition
D. Galvalume® sheet metal product data sheet; United States Steel Corporation; latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Submit manufacturer's product data for each product to be used.
C. Selection samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of tile colors representing
manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
D. Manufacturer’s Warranty for all products in this Section.
E. For projects in high-speed wind areas, submit compliance documents as required by authorities
having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL SNOW GUARDS
A. Individual projecting bent sheet metal plates, set between roofing shingles/tiles, mechanically
fastened to roof deck or adhered to roofing.
B. Material
1. At Galvalume sheet metal roofing: 24-gauge minimum Galvalume® Zinc-Aluminum alloy-coated
steel sheet.
2. At Aluminum sheet metal roofing: Doubled .020” or single-thickness .032” Aluminum sheet
conforming to ASTM B209, pre-finished to match roofing color, adhered to roofing.

077253-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 077253 - SNOW GUARDS

3. At asphalt shingle roofing: Doubled .020” or single-thickness .032” minimum Aluminum sheet
conforming to ASTM B209, pre-finished to match roofing color, screw attachment through roofing
underlayment into roof decking / sheathing.
4. At clay tile roofing: 24-gauge minimum hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, conforming to ASTM
A653, Grade A, G90, pre-finished to match roofing color, screw attachment through roofing
underlayment into roof decking / sheathing.
C. Shape: triangular, pyramidal or half-round, with flat surface perpendicular to roof slope.
D. Finish
1. Factory-applied 70% minimum Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 fluoropolymer coating; texture and color
as indicated in the drawings.
2. Bottom side shall match exposed surfaces or be coated with a primer and urethane coating.
3. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility and longevity as specified by the Kynar
500 or Hylar 5000 finish supplier.
4. Color selected by Architect of Record to match the roofing material.
E. Placement: as recommended by manufacturer for climate, exposure, roofing material and slope.
F. Attachment
a. Sheet metal roofing: adhered to roofing surface.
b. Other roofing materials: screws through roofing underlayment into roof decking / sheathing.
G. Manufacturers
1. Sno-Gem, Inc.; www.snogem.com.
2. Alpine SnowGuards; www.alpinesnowguards.com.
3. Zaleski Snow Guards; www.snowguards.com.
4. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners
1. Fasteners shall be of metal compatible with snow guards and selected for compatibility with roof
decking / sheathing, roofing and underlayment materials.
2. Select fasteners to exclude the possibility of galvanic corrosion of roofing, flashing or decking
materials.
3. Minimum two fasteners per snow guard.
B. Adhesives
1. Double-coated acrylic foam tape by factory-applied to snow guards by manufacturer (for sheet
metal roofing installations only).
2. Liquid-applied sealants and adhesives
a. As provided or recommended by snow guard manufacturer.
b. Compatible with roofing, underlayments and decking / sheathing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. For adhesive installation, examine roofing to verify that work is complete. Notify GC immediately of
unsatisfactory conditions and do not proceed with installation until roofing work is complete.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. For adhesive installation, clean all contact surfaces thoroughly and carefully with isopropyl alcohol.
Do not damage roofing finish.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the roofing manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the roofing system installed under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Position snow guards as indicated in the Roof Plan.
B. Adhesive installations

077253-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 077253 - SNOW GUARDS

1. Snow guards shall be installed after metal roofing installation is complete.

2. Apply adhesive primers to roofing surface as directed by snow guard adhesive manufacturer.
3. Point up joint around perimeter of snow guard base with sealant.
4. Comply with adhesive tape and sealant manufacturers’ recommendations for suitable
temperature and humidity conditions for installation.
C. Fastener installation
1. Snow guards shall be installed concurrent with asphalt shingle and clay tile roofing.
2. Place snow guard base on shingle / tile such that plate extension reaches onto roof deck, and
the bottom of next course of shingles / tile will align with the face of the snow guard.
3. Apply bead of sealant as recommended by snow guard manufacturer and compatible with
roofing underlayment to backside of snow guard extension plates at fastener locations.
4. Fasten through snow guard plate extension, 2 screws minimum, through underlayment and into
roof decking / sheathing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean any grease, finger marks or stains from the roofing and snow guards per manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Remove all scrap and construction debris from the site.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 017000.
B. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface.

END OF SECTION

077253-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Liquid-applied joint sealants and related backing and release materials.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. Divisions 3-9, all sections.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
1. ASTM C719: Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants
Under Cyclic Movement; latest edition.
2. ASTM C834: Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; latest edition.
3. ASTM C920: Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; latest edition.
4. ASTM C1193: Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; latest edition.
5. ASTM C1382: Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of Sealants
When Used in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Joints; latest edition.
6. ASTM C1472: Standard Guide for Calculating Movement and Other Effects When Establishing
Sealant Joint Width; latest edition.
7. ASTM C1667: Standard Test Method for Using Heat Flow Meter Apparatus to Measure the
Center-of-Panel Thermal Resistivity of Vacuum Panels; latest edition.
8. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
latest edition.
9. ASTM E814: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; latest edition.
B. FMRC Approval Guide; FM Global; latest edition.
C. UL Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories; latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide product manufacturer’s data sheets for each type and use of sealant,
indicating applicability and compatibility with the materials in contact.
C. Samples: Submit two samples, 3/8 x 10 inches in size illustrating sealant colors for selection.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site.
B. Manufacturer qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Applicator qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and/or the
related section with minimum 5 years experience or as otherwise indicated in the related section.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in their original sealed containers bearing the manufacturer’s name and
identification of the material.
B. Store containers in a dry interior room, protected from moisture and humidity, and out of direct
sunlight.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant and base material manufacturers
during and after installation until sealants are fully cured.

079200-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. Execute sealant work concurrent with
the work of other trades as required to maintain construction sequencing.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800 for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Labor warranty: Sealant installer shall provide 1 year labor and materials warranty against sealants
and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not
cure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
B. 3M: www.solutions.3m.com.
C. General Electric: www.siliconeforbuilding.com.
D. Dow-Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com.
E. Sika Group: www.usa.sika.com.
F. BASF Building Systems (Sonneborn): www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
G. Tremco Commercial Sealants and Waterproofing: www.tremcosealants.com.
H. Dap Products, Inc.: www.dap.com.
I. C.R. Lawrence Co., Inc.: www.crlawrence.com
J. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.2 SEALANTS
A. General
1. Provide only sealant materials and primers having lower volatile organic compound (VOC)
content than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Where sealant type is not indicated in the drawings, product specifications, or in this Section,
select type in accordance with ASTM C1472 and C1193.
3. All exterior sealants shall be ASTM C920 Type S single-component products, liquid-applied and
gun-grade unless noted otherwise.
4. All interior sealants shall be ASTM C834 single-component products, liquid-applied and gun-
grade unless noted otherwise.
B. Sealant types
1. Type A – General-purpose exterior sealant
a. Single component silicone, ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, uses M, G, and A.
b. Standard color to match adjacent finish surfaces or as otherwise noted.
2. Type B – General-purpose interior sealant:
a. Single component acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF.
b. Paintable, manufacturer’s standard color to match adjacent finish surfaces or as otherwise
noted.
3. Type C – Sanitary sealant
a. Single component silicone; ASTM C920, Type S, uses I, M and A.
b. Mildew resistant.
c. Standard color to match adjacent finish surfaces or as otherwise noted.
4. Type D – Optically clear interior partition glazing adhesive
a. Single-component structural silicone adhesive sealant, ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25, uses
G and A.
b. Color: clear, unless otherwise noted.

079200-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

c. Use sealant manufacturer’s recommended solvent products for preparation and cleanup.
d. Mask glass panel faces with pressure-sensitive tape as directed by sealant manufacturer.
e. Products
1) C.R. Lawrence #WCS1, #WCS5: Water Clear silicone.
2) Sika Sikasil SG-10: Fast Cure Neutral Silicone Assembly Sealant.
5. Type E - Concrete paving joint sealant
a. Single-component non-sag polyurethane, ASTM C920, Type S, Class 50, Grade SG, Uses
T, I, M and A.
b. Color: Gray.
6. Type F – Intumescent sealants for penetrations of fire-resistance-rated assemblies
a. Single-component gun-grade elastomeric firestop sealant, ASTM E814.
b. Apply as indicated by UL assembly to achieve required fire resistance rating.
c. Color: red or red-brown.
7. Type G – EIFS and DEFS control joint and weather sealant
a. Single-component gun-grade elastomeric silicone or polyurethane sealant, ASTM C920,
Type S, Grade NS.
b. Compliant with ASTM C1382.
c. Backer rod shall be closed-cell polyethylene foam.
d. Verify compatibility with finish system manufacturer.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, as recommended by sealant and substrate manufacturers to suit
application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, as recommended by sealant and substrate
manufacturers, compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D1667, closed cell PVC or
polyethylene as indicated by sealant or substrate manufacturer; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger
than joint width.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
E. Solvents and other preparation and cleanup materials: as recommended by sealant manufacturer and
compatible with substrates, not causing deleterious effects to finish surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. Notify General Contractor immediately of
required preparation work. Do not proceed with sealant installation until surfaces are properly
prepared.
B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Prepare surfaces to receive sealants, clean and prime joints (where required) in accordance with
manufacturer's instruction and ASTM C 1193.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions
D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.
B. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and
surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are
indicated.

079200-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

C. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges.
F. Tool joints concave.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by performance of the work of this Section.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect sealants until cured.
B. Maintain air temperature and humidity at sealant materials as prescribed by sealant manufacturers
until sealants are fully cured.
3.6 SCHEDULE
A. Exterior joints for which no other sealant type is indicated: Type A.
B. Control and expansion joints in paving: Type E.
C. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry or stucco, and between masonry or stucco and
adjacent materials: Type A.
1. In masonry, color-match to mortar / grout.
2. In stucco, color-match to stucco.
D. Control, penetration and perimeter weather-resistant joints in EIFS and DEFS: Type G.
E. Joints between exterior metal frames and adjacent materials: Type A. Color-match to adjacent
material.
F. Under exterior door thresholds: Type A.
G. Interior joints for which no other sealant type is indicated: Type B.
H. Joints between plumbing fixtures or piping and walls or floors: Type C.
I. Joints between millwork, trim, counters, splashes or similar built-in finish materials and components
and walls: Type B.
J. Interior glass partition joints: Type D.
K. As firestop material in interior fire-resistance-rated construction assemblies: Type F.
L. Sound insulation or acoustic-control material: Type B.

END OF SECTION

079200-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.
B. Steel frames for wood doors.
C. Thermally insulated steel doors.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 079200 – Joint Sealants
C. 087100 – Door Hardware
D. 099100 – Paints
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute / International Code Council (ANSI/ICC)
1. ANSI/ICC A117.1: American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; latest edition.
B. American National Standards Institute / Steel Door Institute (ANSI/SDI)
1. ANSI A250.8 / SDI-100: Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames;
latest edition.
2. ANSI/SDI A250.10: Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
Steel Doors and Frames; latest edition.
C. American National Standards Institute / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA)
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.115: Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; latest edition.
D. American National Standards Institute / Door and Hardware Institute (ANSI/DHI)
1. ANSI/DHI A115 Series: Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware;
latest edition.
E. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
1. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; latest edition.
2. ASTM A1008: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability; latest edition.
F. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers / Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(NAAMM/HMMA)
1. NAAMM/HMMA 840: Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and
Frames; latest edition.
2. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames;
latest edition.
G. National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; latest edition.
H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1. UL10B: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Submit door and frame schedule, product data and details of each opening, showing elevations,
glazing, frame profiles, and finishes, if any, for approval by the Architect of Record, of each type of
door and frame.
C. Warranty, executed in Owner's name, at project close-out.

081113-1
 CHASE
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer shall be limited to companies specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards pertaining to installation of products
addressed by this Section.
C. All exterior doors and frames shall be provided by a single manufacturer, and installed by a sole-
source vendor.
D. All interior doors and frames shall be provided by a single manufacturer, and installed by a sole-
source vendor.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
B. All doors and frames delivered to the site for installation shall be stored vertically on 4” minimum high
non-pressure-treated wood skids, under cover, and protected from excess humidity. A 1/4" space
between the doors shall be provided to promote air circulation.
C. Doors and frames shall be delivered to the jobsite in manufacturer’s unopened protective wrapping.
Wrapping shall remain in place until time of installation. If the wrapper on the door becomes wet, it
must be removed immediately.
D. The use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that can create a humidity chamber is not permitted.
E. Factory-installed temporary shims and strike bolts in pre-hung doors intended to maintain required
tolerances between frame and door shall remain in-place until frame is permanently installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Doors and Frames:
1. Ceco Door Products: www.cecodoor.com (Assa-Abloy).
2. Curries: www.curries.com (Assa-Abloy).
3. Windsor Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com.
4. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com.
5. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
B. Accessory and hardware items
1. As provided by or as recommended by frame and door manufacturer, or as scheduled in the
drawings.
2. Substitutions: not permitted.
2.2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. General requirements for all metal doors and frames
1. Doors and frames shall be manufactured, prepared for hardware and delivered in accordance
with ANSI/SDI-100.
2. Frames shall be ‘double-rabbet’ type, manufactured of a single continuous steel sheet.
3. Where possible, doors shall be fabricated as complete assemblies within shop-welded frames for
delivery to the jobsite.
4. Frame corners shall be mitered and face-welded. Butt joints are not acceptable.
5. Mullions and shop or field splices shall have internally-reinforced connections welded to the
perimeter frame.
6. Sizes, hinging, handing and other features of doors and frames shall be as indicated in the Door
Schedule and Floor Plans in the drawings.
7. Anchorage to wall framing and finishes shall be as indicated in the manufacturer’s installation
instructions for the type of construction, as indicated in the Construction Drawings, and in
accordance with ANSI/SDI-100.
8. Accessibility: comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.

081113-2
 CHASE
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

9. Door top and bottom closures shall be flush with faces and edges. Shop- and field-undercuts
shall be internally reinforced by fabricator or installer with 16-gauge channels welded prior to
installation as required to prevent face deflection.
10. Doors shall be beveled on both vertical edges.
11. All door and frame surfaces shall be factory-primed, smooth texture, for field finishing by Painter.
12. Hardware preparation work shall be performed in accordance with BHMA A156.115, with
reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade
standard.
13. For frames set in masonry walls
a. Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high or as otherwise required to
fill opening without cutting masonry units.
b. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be grouted.
B. Exterior doors and frames
1. Minimum grade standard shall be ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2,
seamless construction.
2. Frame and door material shall be minimum 16-gauge / .053” thickness hot-dip Galvannealed
steel in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
3. Core material shall be solid polyurethane closed-cell foam thermal insulation.
4. Weather stripping: refer to Section 087100 – Door Hardware.
5. Frames shall be anchored to masonry with mechanical ties, utilizing minimal grout as required,
without thermal bridging to the interior. Remaining concealed frame voids shall be filled
completely with thermal insulation. Refer to Section 072140 – Spray-Applied Foam Insulation.
Insulation shall be applied by frame installer or coordinated by installer with insulation contractor
for completion prior to completion of interior wall finishes.
C. Interior doors and frames, non-fire-resistance rated, including steel frames for flush wood doors
1. Minimum grade standard shall be ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1,
seamless construction.
2. Frame and door material
a. Doors in high-humidity areas or otherwise exposed to moisture shall be minimum 16-gauge
/ .053” thickness hot-dip Galvannealed steel in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with
manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
b. Doors in other areas shall be minimum 16-gauge / .053” thickness cold-rolled steel sheet in
accordance with ASTM A1008.
3. Core material shall be honeycomb polyurethane or Kraft paper.
D. Fire-resistance-rated door and frame assemblies
1. Door and frame assemblies shall be tested and rated to the minimum fire resistance rating
indicated in the construction drawings.
2. The door and frame shall be a factory-assembled unit, manufactured, installed and labeled
according to the requirements of NFPA 80 and authorities having jurisdiction.
3. The door hardware installer shall be responsible for providing and installing all controls, hardware
and accessory materials required to meet the requirements of the assembly tested and labeled
in accordance with UL 10B.
E. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than
one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an
exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified
for exterior doors and for fire-resistance-rated doors. Where two requirements conflict, comply with
the most restrictive requirement.
2.3 HARDWARE
A. Factory- or shop-provided hardware shall be as indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the
construction drawings and Section 087100 – Door Hardware.
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Louvers shall be roll-formed steel or Aluminum with overlapping frame; sight-proof inverted V-shaped
blades; finish matching the door.

081113-3
 CHASE
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

B. Grout for frames set in masonry shall be Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand
troweling; thinner pump-grade grout is prohibited.
C. Silencers shall be resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center
mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
D. Temporary frame spreaders shall be provided for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.
E. Thresholds, weather stripping, head and sill flashing, and perimeter sealant shall be provided and
installed by the door installer as indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the construction
drawings and Section 087100 – Door Hardware.
F. Door frame framing anchors shall be as recommended or provided by the door frame manufacturer, of
material compatible with framing or masonry materials to exclude the possibility of galvanic corrosion.
2.5 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Primer shall be rust-inhibiting and compliant with ANSI A250.10, factory-applied by the door and
frame manufacturer.
B. Finish painting shall be by the painting contractor- refer to Section 099100 – Paints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to
installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Frames shall be installed plumb, level, rigid and in true alignment. Doors shall be installed and
fastened to maintain alignment with frames to achieve maximum operational effectiveness and
appearance. Doors shall be adjusted to maintain perimeter clearances. Shimming shall be performed
by the installer as needed to assure the proper clearances are achieved.
B. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA
840.
C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of
grout before setting will not deform frames.
E. Steel Frames, including fire-resistance-rated frames in interior walls do not require grouting.
F. Coordinate installation of hardware and electrical connections to electrical hardware items.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum diagonal distortion shall be 1/16” measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean any grease, finger marks or stains from the panels per manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Remove all scrap and construction debris from the site.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 017000.

081113-4
 CHASE
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

END OF SECTION

081113-5
 CHASE
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Solid-core flush wood doors with paint-grade faces.
B. Factory pre-machining for hardware, detailing, and factory priming.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 081113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
C. 087100 – Door Hardware
D. 099100 – Paints
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Woodwork Standards; Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork
Manufacturers Association of Canada / Woodwork Institute (AWI/AWMAC/WI); latest edition.
B. ANSI/WDMA IS 1A: Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers
Association (WDMA); latest edition.
C. National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; latest edition.
2. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies; latest edition.
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1. UL10B: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; latest edition.
E. Intertek Group PLC
1. Warnock Hersey certification listings for fire doors.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Submit to Architect of Record for review and approval
1. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer's product construction data, hardware attachment
performance data, specifications and installation instructions for each type of wood door,
including details of core and edge construction, trim for lite openings and similar components,
and finish primer specifications.
2. Shop drawings; include the following information:
a. Door type.
b. Door size.
c. Fire Rating
1) Neutral pressure.
2) Positive pressure.
d. Hardware types and locations, including blocking requirements and location.
3. Two samples of door construction, 12” x 12” cut from top corner of door.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall be limited to companies specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards pertaining to installation of products
addressed by this Section.
C. All interior solid core flush wood doors shall be provided by a single manufacturer, and installed by a
sole-source vendor.
D. Products and work of this Section shall comply with WDMA Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors
or AWI Architectural Woodwork Standards.

081416-1
 CHASE
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

E. Fire-resistance-rated wood doors shall comply with NFPA-80 and the requirements of local authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. Inspect and return any
damaged units.
C. Store doors vertically on 4” minimum high non-pressure-treated wood skids, under cover, and
protected from excess humidity. A 1/4" space between the doors shall be provided to promote air
circulation.
D. Break seal of manufacturer’s packaging on-site to permit ventilation. Do not store in damp or wet
areas, or in direct sunlight. If stored on-site for more than one week, seal top and bottom edges with
tinted sealer.
E. Do not subject interior doors to extremes in either heat or humidity. HVAC systems must be
operational and balanced, providing a temperature range of 50 to 80 degrees Fahrenheit and 25% to
55% relative humidity.
F. When handling doors, always lift and carry. Do not drag across other doors or surfaces. Handle with
clean hands or gloves.
G. At time of delivery, mark each door on top rail with opening number.
1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.
B. Field-verify dimensions and details of existing steel frames and indicate on shop drawings.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
B. Specific product warranty: The interior doors shall be warranted by the manufacturer to be free of
manufacturing defects for the life of the original installation. Warranty shall provide for repair or
replacement of the defective door(s) as originally furnished at manufacturer option. Manufacturer
may, per its discretion, elect to use either its own or third party resources to resolve warranty claims.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Solid-core flush wood doors
1. Eggers Industries; www.eggersindustries.com.
2. Masonite; www.architectural.masonite.com (consolidated from Algoma, Graham, Marshfield and
Weyerhaeuser).
3. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
B. Accessory and hardware items
1. As indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the construction drawings, or as provided by or
recommended by frame or door manufacturer,
2. Substitutions: not permitted.
2.2 DOORS
A. General requirements (including doors fire-resistance-rated up to 20 minutes)
1. Minimum performance standard: Extra Heavy Duty.
2. Fabricate the work of this section to WDMA “Premium Grade” or AWS “Custom Grade” for PC-5
bonded core.
3. Faces shall be medium-density overly (MDO), cold-press laminated to core with Type I
waterproof adhesive.
4. Stiles and rails shall be mill option solid wood complying with the referenced quality standard,
with 5” minimum top rail solid blocking.

081416-2
 CHASE
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

5. Cores may be the following materials, Type I glue bonded and sanded
a. ANSI A208.1-LD-2, Particleboard; PB.
b. Structural Composite Lumber; SCL-20.
c. Staves with one species per core; SLC-20.
6. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with
hardware requirements and dimensions, and the specified quality standard.
7. Factory fit and machine doors for frame and hardware in accordance with hardware and NFPA
80 requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Apply appropriate fire
labels where applicable.
8. Size and thickness as indicated in the Door Schedule in the construction drawings.
B. Requirements for doors fire-resistance-rated over 20 minutes
1. Interior solid core flush wood doors requiring 45-minute or 90-minute fire-resistance ratings shall
have mineral cores and shall be fabricated in compliance with NFPA 80 requirements.
C. Combined Requirements: If a particular door is indicated to comply with more than one type of
requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type. Where two requirements
conflict, comply with the most restrictive requirement.
2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Factory- or shop-provided hardware shall be as indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the
construction drawings and Section 087100 – Door Hardware.
B. Metal louvers:
1. Refer to Mechanical systems drawings for size, openness and operating requirements.
2. Material and finish: Roll formed steel or Aluminum frame and louvers; shop-painted to match
door color as indicated on drawings.
3. Louver blade: Inverted V blade, sight proof.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire-resistance-rated and non-fire-resistance-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80,
Manufacturers’ instructions and to Warnock-Hersey/UL requirements.
B. Trim non-fire-resistance-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.
C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum 3/4 inch (19-mm).
D. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. Allow a fitting
clearance of 1/8” at each side and at top of door.
E. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes using templates
provided by hardware manufacturer.
F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
G. Install door louvers plumb and level.
H. Re-prime any doors that required site alteration.
3.3 INSTALLATION AND WARRANTY TOLERANCES
A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B. Conform to WDMA standards and testing methods for warp, cup, bow and telegraphing.

081416-3
 CHASE
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust closers for full closure.

END OF SECTION

081416-4
 CHASE
SECTION 083100 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Access door and frame units.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
1. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; latest edition.
2. ASTM A1008: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability; latest edition.
B. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
C. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Submit manufacturer’s product data to Architect of Record for approval. Include sizes, types, finishes,
hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Following installation, document actual locations of all access panels and submit to Architect of
Record for inclusion in As-Built drawings.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of trades requiring access doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Access Doors:
1. Mifab, Inc.; www.mifab.com.
2. Milcor Inc: www.milcorinc.com.
2.2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. All units shall be factory-fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground
flush; square and without rack or warp.
B. Materials
1. Units for interior exposure shall be fabricated of 16-gauge minimum cold-rolled steel sheet in
compliance with ASTM A1008.
2. Units for exterior exposure shall be fabricated of 16-gauge minimum hot-dip galvanized or
galvanealed steel sheet in compliance with ASTM A653.
C. Hardware and operation
1. Concealed pin-type hinges.
2. Latches with screwdriver, Allen wrench or similar common tool operation shall be provided at all
access panels in employee-only areas.
3. Provide panel manufacturer’s keyed cylinder locks at all access panels in customer areas. Locks
shall all be keyed alike.
D. All units shall be factory-primed for field painting.

083100-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 083100 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

2.3 ACCESS DOOR TYPES

A. Non-fire-resistance-rated units in interior gypsum board walls and ceilings
1. ‘Flush’ type with door face aligned with wall finish, including integral mounting flange and
galvanized steel drywall edge bead, without an exposed perimeter frame.
2. Approved products
a. Milcor model DW.
b. Mifab model MDW.
c. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
B. Fire-resistance-rated units in interior gypsum board walls and ceilings
1. Tested and labeled in compliance with UL Class B fire resistance for use as a 90-minute
protective within a maximum 2-hour fire-resistance-rated wall or ceiling assembly.
2. ‘Flush’ type door with door face aligned with integral perimeter steel frame overlaying
surrounding wall or ceiling finish, with a gap for sealant application.
3. Integral coil spring door closer and latch paddle or turn ring.
4. Approved products
a. Milcor model UFR.
b. Mifab model MFRU.
c. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
C. Exterior units set in EIFS or stucco walls and DEFS ceilings, and interior tile walls
1. ‘Flush’ type door with door face aligned with integral perimeter steel frame overlaying
surrounding wall or ceiling finish, with a gap for sealant application.
2. Fasteners concealed at interior face of integral frame into adjacent framing.
3. Approved products
a. Milcor model M.
b. Mifab model UA.
c. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable, and that surface finishes will align as
intended.
B. Notify General Contractor immediately of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.
C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.
D. For keyed units, place both keys on a common ring and insert key into lock, locking door in closed
position

END OF SECTION

083100-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 083323 – OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manufactured overhead rolling clear panel door assemblies and associated operating mechanisms,
standby power systems and other miscellaneous work directly related to the overhead coiling door.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 051200 – Structural Steel (for products and execution of steel support components by overhead door
installer)
B. 054000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing
C. 055000 – Metal Fabrications
D. 061000 – Rough Carpentry
E. 079200 – Joint Sealants
F. 087100 – Door Hardware
1.3 REFERENCES
A. JP Morgan Chase; Chase Design Standards drawings; latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s complete product data for all specified components, including
specifications, finish information and installation instructions.
C. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, sizes and types, product materials,
components and accessories, fabrication data, operation and wiring diagrams for motor driven
operators, finishes, rough-in dimensions, anchorage and installation requirements and details.
D. Warranty, executed in Owner's name, at project close-out.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall be limited to companies specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. All overhead coiling doors and associated components shall be provided by a single manufacturer,
and installed by a sole-source vendor.
C. All Lexan Panel rolling shutters shall be designed to a minimum standard life cycle of 15,000
operating cycles not exceeding 10 cycles per day.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification
labels intact. Wrapping shall remain in place until time of installation. If the wrapper on the door
becomes wet, it must be removed immediately.
B. Store unwrapped packages on wood skids preventing contact of packages with ground or concrete,
under roof and protected from direct sunlight and precipitation.
C. Protect packages from damage by other construction activity.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field measurements: Verify actual measurements of openings by field measurement before
fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawing.

083323-1 XX/XX/XXXX
 CHASE
SECTION 083323 – OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Overhead coiling doors shall be warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for a period
of 1 year from date of shipment, provided designed cycle life is not exceeded. Painted and factory
finishes are excluded from warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. QMI Security Solutions, 1661 Glenlake Ave., Itasca, Illinois, 800-446-2500, www.qmiusa.com.
B. Substitutions: not permitted.
2.2 PRODUCTS
A. TR-4 Transparoll Transparent Slat Rolling Shutter.
B. Product characteristics.
a. Curtain slats/ribs: Extruded Aluminum, 6063 alloy, T5 temper, with double interlocking
hinges, and 0.090" x 2.00" vertical connecting links at 3’-0” on center max. End connecting
links to be of sufficient width for proper guide rail travel.
b. Clear panels: 0.093" x 1.812" clear, flame retardant, UV resistant polycarbonate secured
between the horizontal hinges through retaining channels and to the vertical links with
molded nylon dividers.
c. Base slat: Extruded tubular Aluminum, 6063 alloy, T5 temper. Openings in excess of 12'-0"
shall be reinforced.
d. Guide rails: Extruded Aluminum, 6063 alloy, T5 temper with insulating woven polypropylene
wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact during operation. Profile shall prevent curtain
pull-out under normal load conditions and include an adjustable internal stop to prevent
upward over-travel.
e. End cap bracket plates: 0.1875” steel or 3/16” Aluminum bolted to the support tubes with
manufacturer’s provided hardware. Operator-side plates shall include grease-filled sealed
roller bearing. Plates shall be of sufficient size to support curtain and drive barrel assembly.
f. Support tubes: 3”x3” steel tubes and base plates as recommended by manufacturer to
support shutter. Tube supports are not to be considered structural building components.
g. Counter-balance drive barrel: 5” min. diameter round steel tube- verify size to meet the
required maximum deflection of 0.035” per foot of width.
h. Spring balance: Oil-tempered helical torsion spring assembly including fittings mounted onto
a solid steel shaft designed for an overload factor of 25%.
i. Motor operator: Provide industrial duty V-belt primary drive operator with roller
chain/sprockets as recommended by manufacturer for size and type of shutter. Operator
shall be complete with factory pre-wired motor control terminals with provisions for auxiliary
push-up operation. The motor shall be high starting torque, protected internally against
overload with auto-reset thermal sensing device. Motor starter shall be housed in a NEMA
1 housing and include a magnetic reversing starter (size O), a 24 volt control transformer,
and a complete terminal strip to facilitate field wiring. Operator drive and driven sprockets
shall be provided by #50 roller chain. Motor shall have a fully adjustable linear driven screw
type cam limit switch to sync operator with shutter. The motor shall be activated by constant
pressure applied by a key switch in a NEMA 1 enclosure. Motor shall be 115V, single-
phase, min. 1/2 hp. All operators are UL listed.
j. Locking: Self-locking gearing and mechanical brakes within motor unit to hold shutter in
closed position. Shutter curtain locking shall not be provided with motor operated shutters
without an integrated lock sensing system or external guide rail mounted electrical
interlocks.
k. Egress: Provide wall mounted manual emergency release lever to activate partial opening
of shutter for emergency exit without the use of electrical power. Motor shall be restored to
full normal operating mode upon release of egress lever to starting position. Release lever
assembly must be installed with handle no higher than 48” above the finished floor.
l. Finishes: All exposed Aluminum shutter surfaces shall be clear anodized. Steel shall be mill
finish primed, minimum.

083323-2 XX/XX/XXXX
 CHASE
SECTION 083323 – OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Preparation of the opening shall be the responsibility of others and shall not be completed by the
manufacturer and/or its representative.
B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. Contractor shall verify on site
dimensions with shop drawings and assume full responsibility for fitting the components to the
structure.
C. Report discrepancies between design dimensions and field dimensions to the Architect and/or
Owner’s Representative. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies are corrected, or until
installation requirements are modified and approved by the Architect and/or Owner’s Representative.
D. Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project installation and coordination requirements, field
conditions, and manufacturer instructions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All products are to be installed by an authorized manufacturer’s representative.
B. Install all products with manufacturer approved hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions
C. Install plumb and level, free of warp and distortion, and within tolerances specified by manufacturer.
3.3 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Upon completion of installation, including work performed and completed by others, test and verify
proper operation.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean all surfaces soiled by installation as recommended by manufacturer. Remove all debris relating
to installation and dispose of properly.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct owner and/or his representative on proper use and maintenance. Demonstrate all operations
and verify acceptance.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturers recommendations and protect completed shutter installation from damage
during completion of remaining construction so as not to void warranty.

END OF SECTION

083323-3 XX/XX/XXXX
 CHASE
SECTION 084113 – ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum storefront exterior and interior framing and glazing system, including perimeter trims,
stools, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of storefront units.
B. Glazing materials, other than glazing units, for installation of glazing units in storefront framing.
C. Flush insulated Aluminum exterior doors and associated hardware and components for installation in
storefront framing.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 061000 – Rough Carpentry
C. 079200 – Joint Sealants
D. 087100 – Door Hardware
E. 084400 – Curtain Wall and Glazed Assemblies
F. 088000 – Glazing
G. 088700 – Window Film
H. 122413 – Roller Window Shades
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association
1. AAMA CW-10: Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; latest edition.
2. AAMA 501.2: Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for
Water Leakage (part of AAMA 501); latest edition.
3. AAMA 505: Dry Shrinkage and Composite Performance Thermal Cycling Test Procedure; latest
edition.
4. AAMA 506: Voluntary Specifications for Impact and Cycle Testing of Fenestration Products;
latest edition.
5. AAMA 507: Standard Practice for Determining the Thermal Performance Characteristics of
Fenestration Systems Installed in Commercial Buildings; latest edition.
6. AAMA 611: Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; latest edition.
7. AAMA 1801: Voluntary Specification for the Acoustical Rating of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Glazed Wall Sections; latest edition.
8. AAMA 1503: Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of
Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; latest edition.
9. AAMA TIR-A8: Structural Performance of Composite Thermal Barrier Framing Systems
B. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
1. ASTM E90: Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; latest edition.
2. ASTM B221: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; latest edition.
3. ASTM B 456: Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus
Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; latest edition.
4. ASTM B 633: Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel;
latest edition.
5. ASTM C 920: Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; latest edition.
6. ASTM E283: Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen;
latest edition.

084113-1
 CHASE
SECTION 084113 – ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

7. ASTM E330: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; latest edition.
8. ASTM E331: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; latest edition.
9. ASTM E1425: Standard Practice for Determining the Acoustical Performance of Windows,
Doors, Skylight, and Glazed Wall Systems; latest edition.
10. ASTM E1886: Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure
Differentials; latest edition.
11. ASTM E1996: Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes; latest
edition.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Aluminum-framed storefront system shall withstand the effects of the following design loading without
exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or
other defects in construction:
1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to the Project from basic wind
speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical
Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
a. Basic Wind Speed: [______] mph.
b. Importance Factor: [I/II/III].
c. Exposure Category: [A/B/C/D].
B. Minimum storefront system performance requirements, including glazing, doors, anchorage and other
components
1. Wind load design pressures based on [____] Building Code; [____] Edition
a. Inward: [____] psf.
b. Outward: [____] psf.
2. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 l/s · m2) at a static air pressure differential of
6.24 psf (300 Pa), as tested in accordance with ASTM E283.
3. Water infiltration shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331, with no leakage at a minimum
static air pressure differential of 8 psf (383 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501.
4. Uniform load testing shall comply with ASTM E330.
a. A static air design load of 20 psf (958 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative
direction without deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member.
b. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or
permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur.
5. Thermal transmittance (U-factor), when tested to AAMA Specification 1503, shall not be more
than:
a. Glass to exterior: 0.47 [or project-specific] BTU/hr/ft2/°F.
b. Glass to center: 0.44 [or project-specific] BTU/hr/ft2/°F.
c. Glass to interior: 0.41 [or project-specific] BTU/hr/ft2/°F.
d. Aluminum-framed flush doors: 0.48 [or project-specific] BTU/hr/ft2/°F.
6. The Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF), when tested to AAMA Specification 1503, shall not
be less than:
a. Glass to exterior – 70frame and 69 glass.
b. Glass to center – 62 frame and 68 glass.
c. Glass to interior – 56 frame and 67 glass.
d. Aluminum-framed flush doors: 48.
7. Sound Transmission Class (STC) and Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC) of glazed
units, when tested to AAMA Specification 1801 and in accordance with ASTM E1425 and ASTM
E90, the STC and OITC Rating shall not be less than:
a. Glass to exterior: 38 (STC) and 31 (OITC).
b. Glass to center: 37 (STC) and 30 (OITC).
c. Glass to interior: 38 (STC) and 30 (OITC).
8. Windborne debris impact resistance shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 1886 and ASTM
E 1996 and/or AAMA 506.
a. Large-missile impact for Aluminum-framed systems located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade.

084113-2
 CHASE
SECTION 084113 – ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

b. Small-missile impact or Aluminum-framed systems located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above
grade.
C. Storefront framing system shall accommodate expansion and contraction within system components
caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing
detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.
D. Storefront framing system installation tolerance shall accommodate movement between storefront
and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of
seals.
E. Storefront framing system shall include a weep drainage network to direct to the exterior any water
entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within
system.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Submit the following to Architect of Record for review and approval
1. Manufacturer’s product data sheets including construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation
instructions for each type of aluminum frame storefront system and flush door indicated.
2. Shop drawings including plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attachments to other
work, operational clearances and installation details.
3. Design data including framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering
calculations, dimensional limitations.
4. Material samples
a. Storefront framing system: two of each profile required, 6” length.
b. Two 12”x12” glass, two of each type.
c. Two 12”x12” metal infill panel, two of each type.
d. Two 12”x12” flush door corner.
e. Glazing gasketing and similar accessories: two of each type, 6” length.
5. Manufacturer's certificate indicating that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified
requirements.
6. Jurisdictional approvals as applicable
C. Closeout submittals
1. Report of field testing for water leakage.
2. Manufacturer’s warranty with forms completed in Owner's name and registered with
manufacturer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer shall have has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar units
required for the project at other projects of similar size and scope.
B. Manufacturer shall be capable of fabricating Aluminum storefront framing systems and flush doors
that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by
inclusion of test reports and calculations.
C. Obtain Aluminum storefront framing systems and flush doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum framed
storefront system and flush doors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01
Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements.
E. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect of Record, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Architect for review.

084113-3
 CHASE
SECTION 084113 – ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Convene pre-installation meeting with Architect of Record, General Contractor and fenestration
installer one week before starting work of this section.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings
that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.
C. Upon receipt of materials, installer shall examine the shipment for damage and completeness.
D. Store materials in a clean, dry location, out of direct sunlight.
E. Stack all materials to prevent damage and to allow for adequate ventilation.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify actual dimensions of Aluminum framed storefront openings by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate field measurements on shop drawings.
B. Coordinate the work with installation of firestopping components or materials.
C. Install sealants within sealant manufacturer’s required temperature and humidity conditions range.
Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty against degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for
replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-design product:
1. Manufacturer: Kawneer Company Inc.; www.kawneer.com.
a. Exterior storefront framing system: Trifab® VG 451T, 2” x 4 1/2” extruded Aluminum
framing, center-glazed, thermally broken with a 1/4" (6.4 mm) urethane separation
mechanically and adhesively joined to Aluminum, designed in accordance with AAMA TIR-
A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505.
b. Interior storefront partition system: Trifab® VG 451, 2” x 4 1/2” extruded Aluminum framing,
center-glazed.
c. Entrance, Vestibule and exterior Employee Access doors: 500 Standard series; 1-3/4” thick,
5” top rails, 5” vertical stiles, 10” non-standard bottom rails, square glazing stops; match
storefront framing finish.
d. Interior Employee Access doors: 500 Standard series; 1-3/4” thick, 5” top rails, 5” vertical
stiles, 10” non-standard bottom rails, square glazing stops; match storefront framing finish.
e. Flush exterior doors (“Egress”): Flushline®; door face sheet shall be 0.062” (1.6 mm)
Architectural quality 5005 alloy aluminum sheet, plain unpatterned.
B. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000. Acceptance will be in written form, either as an addendum or
modification, and documented by a formal change order signed by the Owner and Contractor.
1. U.S. Aluminum, C.R. Lawrence Co.; www.crlawrence.com.
2. Efco Corporation; www.efcocorp.com.
3. Arcadia, Inc.; www.arcadiainc.com.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum extrusions shall be alloy and temper recommended by Aluminum storefront manufacturer
for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.070” wall

084113-4
 CHASE
SECTION 084113 – ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

thickness at any location for the main frame and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6 alloy and
temper.
1. Exterior fenestration framing shall include thermal break with a 1/4" (6.4 mm) high-density
polyurethane separation mechanically and adhesively joined to Aluminum, designed in
accordance with AAMA TIR-A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505.
2. Finish shall be as noted in the drawings:
a. Class I AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick
(Kawneer #14).
b. Class I AAMA 611 AA-M10C21A44 Black anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick
(Kawneer #29).
3. Glazing stops shall be flush.
B. Fasteners shall be Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and
compatible with aluminum window members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components.
C. Anchors, clips, and other attachment accessories shall be Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or
zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other
suitable zinc coating. Provide fasteners of sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
D. Reinforcing members shall be Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel
complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron
complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating.
Provide fasteners of sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
E. For sealants required within fabricated storefront system, provide permanently elastic, non-shrinking,
and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement. Refer to
Section 079200 – Sealants.
2.3 HARDWARE
A. Door hardware shall be as specified in the Door Hardware schedule in the construction drawings.
Refer to Section 087100 – Door Hardware.
B. Door sweeps shall be included at all exterior storefront system doors as indicated in the Door
Hardware Schedule in the construction drawings. Refer to Section 08700 – Door Hardware.
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing shall be as specified in Section 088000 – Glazing.
B. Glazing gaskets shall be storefront framing system manufacturer’s standard replaceable, extruded
EPDM rubber compression type.
C. Spacers and setting blocks shall be elastomeric type.
D. Bond-breaker tape shall be TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not
develop adhesion.
E. Weatherseal sealant shall be ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O;
single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with other system components with
which it comes in contact; as recommended by and Aluminum storefront framing system manufacturer
for this use, color to match adjacent finish material when exposed to view.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate framing components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fit joints; make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain
required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing.

084113-5
 CHASE
SECTION 084113 – ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent
possible.
B. Fabricate storefront framing components for assembly using manufactures standard installation
instructions.
C. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in project according to shop
drawings.
D. Fabricate aluminum-framed flush entrance doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for
assembling components and anchoring doors.
E. Flush doors
1. Corner construction shall consist of mitered corners with angle alignment blocks secured with
3/8” full-width galvanized steel tie rods. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints
hairline in appearance.
2. Face sheets shall lap and interlock with stile and rails to create a hollow cavity for the froth-in-
place urethane core.
3. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware.
4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
5. Provide weather stripping locked into extruded grooves in door panels or frames as indicated on
manufactures drawings and details.
F. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet
enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
G. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
H. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
I. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals
with bituminous paint.
J. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
K. Reinforce components internally for door hardware.
L. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
M. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present,
for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational
clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in
components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight framed aluminum storefront system installation.
1. Masonry surfaces must be visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction
debris.
2. Frame Walls must be dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints.
Ensure that fastener heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm)
of opening.
3. Metal surfaces must be dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag;
without sharp edges or offsets at joints.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Comply with construction drawings, shop drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for
installing aluminum framed storefront system, flush doors, accessories, and other components.

084113-6
 CHASE
SECTION 084113 – ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

C. Install aluminum framed storefront system and flush doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without
distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in
proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.
D. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather tight construction.
E. Install aluminum framed storefront system, doors and components to drain condensation, water
penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within sliding door to the exterior.
F. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at
points of contact with other materials.
G. Attach storefront framing members to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate
construction tolerances and other irregularities.
H. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
I. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
J. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.
K. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
L. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal
barrier.
M. Install hardware using templates provided. See Section 087100 for hardware installation
requirements.
N. Install glass in accordance with Section 088000, using glazing method required to achieve
performance criteria.
O. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 079200.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from plumb shall be 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,
whichever is less.
B. Maximum misalignment of two adjoining members abutting in plane shall be 1/32”.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum framed storefronts. Avoid damaging
protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other
substances.
B. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations
for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
D. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
E. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily
repaired.
F. Protect finished work from damage.

END OF SECTION

084113-7
 CHASE
SECTION 084400 - CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum-framed curtain wall, with vision and spandrel glazing and metal infill panels.
B. Column covers.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 051200 – Structural Steel: Steel attachment members and integral posts, beams and connections.
C. 079200 – Joint Sealants: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
D. 084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts: Entrance framing and doors.
E. 088000 – Glazing.
F. 092220 – Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Metal stud and gypsum board wall at interior of curtain
wall.
G. 099000 – Paints and Coatings: Field painting of interior surface of infill panels.
H. 122413 – Roller Window Shades: Manual and motorized shade systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
1. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site; latest edition.
2. AAMA 501 – Method of Test for Exterior Walls; latest edition.
3. AAMA 501.1 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors Using Dynamic Pressure; latest edition.
4. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed
Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems; latest edition.
5. AAMA 501.4 – Recommended Static Test Method for Evaluating Curtain Wall and Storefront
Systems Subjected to Seismic and Wind Induced Inter-story Drifts and Recommended Dynamic
Test Method For Determining the Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout from a Wall System; latest
edition.
6. AAMA 503 – Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Storefronts, Curtain
Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems; latest edition.
7. AAMA 507 – Standard Practice for Determining the Thermal Performance Characteristics of
Fenestration Systems in Commercial Buildings; latest edition.
8. AAMA 611 – Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; latest edition.
9. AAMA 1503 – Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance
of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; latest edition.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM B209 / B209M – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate; latest edition.
2. ASTM B221 / B221M – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; latest edition.
3. ASTM C864 / C864M – Standard Practice for Surface Preparation of Aluminum Alloys to Be
Adhesively Bonded in Honeycomb Shelter Panels; latest edition.
4. ASTM E283 / E283M – Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; latest edition.
5. ASTM E330 / E330M – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; latest edition.
6. ASTM E331 / E331M – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; latest edition.

084400-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 084400 - CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of
glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but
not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly
distributed and concentrated live loads. Failure also includes the following:
a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
b. Glass breakage.
c. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
d. Failure of operating units.
B. Delegated Design: Design glazed aluminum curtain walls, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
C. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or
permanent set:
1. Positive Design Wind Load: 20 lbf/sq ft.
2. Negative Design Wind Load: 20 lbf/sq ft.
3. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/175 in any direction, and maximum of 3/4 inch,
with full recovery of glazing materials.
4. Measure performance by testing in accordance with ASTM E 330, using test loads equal to 1.5
times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum pressure.
5. Movement: Accommodate the following movement without damage to components or
deterioration of seals:
a. Movement of curtain wall relative to perimeter framing.
b. Deflection of structural support framing, under permanent and dynamic loads.
6. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured
at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with
ASTM E283.
7. Water Resistance, static: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331.
There shall be no leakage at a static air pressure differential of 12 psf (575 Pa) as defined in
AAMA 501.
8. Water Resistance, dynamic: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with AAMA 501.1.
There shall be no leakage at an air pressure differential of 12 psf (575 Pa) as defined in AAMA
501.
9. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal
transmittance (U-factor) shall not be more than: 0.66 BTU/hr/ft2/°F per AAMA 507.
10. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation
resistance factor shall not be less than 66 for the frame and clear glass.
11. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal
transmittance (U-factor) shall not be more than: 0.43 for the glass.
12. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation
resistance factor shall not be less than 71 for both the frame and glass.
13. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water
entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring
within system.
14. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components
caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing
detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.
15. Design system to eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, to prevent vibration
harmonics, and to prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.

084400-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 084400 - CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES

B. Product Data: For each type of product, provide construction details, material descriptions,
component profiles with dimensions, describe components within each assembly, anchorage and
fasteners requirements and positions, and internal drainage details.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected
related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required.
D. Samples:
1. Submit two 12” x 12” samples of each type of glazing and infill panel.
2. Submit two 12” long samples of each type of framing component.
E. Test Reports: Submit results of full-size mock-up testing. Reports of tests previously performed on
the same design are acceptable.
F. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics and engineering
calculations, and identify dimensional limitations.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified
requirements.
H. Report of field testing for water leakage of completed assembly at project site.
I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name
and registered with manufacturer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural
Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the State in which the Project is located.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing aluminum glazing systems with minimum
three years of documented experience.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating glazed aluminum curtain walls
that meet or exceed performance requirements.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum curtain wall system through one source from a single
manufacturer.
E. Pre-Installation Conference: Convene one week before starting work of this section. Conduct
conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section “Project Management
and Coordination”.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings
that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate the work with installation of air barrier components or materials.
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for glazed aluminum curtain walls
by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
1.10 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800 for additional warranty requirements.
B. Minimum manufacturer’s warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including
interpane dusting or misting: 5 years. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
C. Minimum manufacturer’s warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish: 10 years. Include
provision for replacement of components with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
D. Minimum installer’s warranty against defective workmanship: 2 years.

084400-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 084400 - CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Kawneer Company, Inc., www.kawneer.com; 1600 Wall System 1.
1. Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings,
anchorage and attachment devices.
2. Cross-Section: 2-1/2 x 6 inch nominal dimension.
3. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of structural
steel member.
4. Outside glazed, with pressure plate and mullion cover.
5. Finish shall be as noted in the drawings:
a. Class I AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick
(Kawneer #14).
b. Class I AAMA 611 AA-M10C21A44 Black anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick
(Kawneer #29).
B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M): 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
C. Column Covers: Aluminum, 0.040 inch thick, finish to match curtain wall framing members.
D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and
compatible with aluminum window members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components.
E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron
complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide
sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
F. Pressure Plate: Pressure plate shall be aluminum and fastened to the mullion with stainless steel
screws.
G. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel
complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron
complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide
sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
H. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated curtain wall system, provide permanently elastic,
non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and
movement.
I. Thermal Barrier: Thermal separator shall be extruded of a silicone compatible elastomer that provides
a minimum 1/4" (6.3) separation.
J. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of glazed
curtain wall members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data.
K. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members.
L. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000.
M. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration
requirements, and compliant with ASTM C864.
N. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,
nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
O. Framing Sealants: Shall be suitable for glazed aluminum curtain wall as recommended by sealant
manufacturer. Refer to Section 079200.
P. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 088000.
Q. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.

084400-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 084400 - CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES

2.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened,
undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
B. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions.
Handle curtain wall material and components to avoid damage. Protect curtain wall material against
damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after installation.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet
enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals
with bituminous paint.
E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
G. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed
assemblies, including joint edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this
section.
C. Verify that anchorage devices have been properly installed and located.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other
irregularities.
C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances,
aligning with adjacent work.
E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.
G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
H. Pressure Plate Framing: Install glazing and infill panels in accordance with Section 08800, using
exterior dry glazing method.
I. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum
temperature during and 48 hours after installation.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft,
whichever is less.

084400-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 084400 - CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES

B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.

C. Sealant Space Between Curtain Wall Mullions and Adjacent Construction: Maximum of 3/4 inch and
minimum of 1/4 inch.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests: Architect shall select curtain wall units to be tested as soon as a representative portion of
the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration
and water penetration with manufacturer’s representative present. Tests not meeting specified
performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract
amount.
B. Testing: Testing shall be performed per AAMA 503 by a qualified independent testing agency. Refer
to Testing Section for payment of testing and testing requirements.
C. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable air infiltration shall not
exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft2, which ever is
greater.
D. Water Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 1105. No uncontrolled water
leakage is permitted when tested at a static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration
pressure but not less than 8 psf (383 Pa).
E. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Upon Owner’s written request, provide periodic site visit by
manufacturer’s field service representative.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping
cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily
repaired.
D. Protect finished work from damage.
E. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Remove and replace glass that has been broken,
chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

END OF SECTION

084400-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Door hardware and other items as indicated in the drawings, including but not limited to all items in
the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.
B. All items specified or otherwise necessary to complete the work of this Section and Related Sections.
C. "Finish Hardware", including all items which are required for swing, sliding and folding doors, except
special types of unique and non-matching hardware specified in the same section as the door and
door frame. Extent of finish hardware required is indicated in schedules and elsewhere in the
drawings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The following sections of this specification should be examined in order to identify materials or
equipment which may be obtained through this section:
1. 081113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
2. 081416 – Flush Wood Doors
3. 084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
4. 064116 – Plastic Laminate Clad Architectural Woodwork (cabinet hardware and locks)
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. ANSI A117.1: Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; latest edition.
B. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association,
Inc. (BHMA)
1. Hinges ANSI/BHMA A156.1, latest edition; Grade 1
2. Cylinder locks, latches and associated trim ANSI/BHMA A156.2, latest edition; Grade 1
3. Exit devices ANSI/BHMA A156.3, latest edition; Grade 1
4. Door controls - closers ANSI/BHMA A156.4, latest edition; Grade 1
5. Cylinders and input devices for locks ANSI/BHMA A156.5, latest edition; Grade 1
6. Architectural door trim ANSI/BHMA A156.6, latest edition
7. Template hinge dimensions ANSI/BHMA A156.7, latest edition
8. Door controls - overhead stops and holders ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Grade 1
9. Power-operated doors ANSI/BHMA A156.10, latest edition
10. Mortise locks and latches ANSI/BHMA A156.13, latest edition; Grade 1
11. Pivots ANSI/BHMA A156.17, latest edition; Grade 1
12. General materials and finishes ANSI/BHMA A156.18, latest edition
13. Thresholds ANSI/BHMA A156.21, latest edition; Grade 1
14. Door gasketing and edge seal systems ANSI/BHMA A156.22, latest edition; Grade 1
15. Electromagnetic locks ANSI/BHMA A156.23, latest edition; Grade 1
16. Electrified Locking Devices ANSI/BHMA A156.25, latest edition; Grade 1
17. Continuous hinges ANSI/BHMA A156.26, latest edition; Grade 1
18. Alarms for exit devices ANSI/BHMA A156.29, latest edition; Grade 1
19. Electric strikes and frame mounted actuators ANSI/BHMA A156.31, latest edition; Grade 1
20. Auxiliary locks ANSI/BHMA A156.36, latest edition; Grade 1
C. National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 80: Standard For Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; latest edition.
2. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code; latest edition.
D. Underwriters Laboratories(UL)
1. UL 14C: Swinging Hardware for Standard Tin-Clad Fire Doors Mounted Singly and in Pairs;
latest edition.
2. Building Materials Directory; latest edition.
3. Accident Equipment List - Panic Hardware; latest edition.
E. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)

087100-1
 CHASE
SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

1. ASTM E283: Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; latest edition.
F. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) / Steel Door Institute (SDI)
G. ANSI/SDI A250.8: Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; latest edition.
H. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)
1. Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames;
latest edition.
2. Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. After the award of a formal contract, six (6) completed typewritten copies of the proposed Finish
Hardware Schedule shall be submitted to the Architect of Record for approval. This schedule shall be
prepared using the "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule" as approved and
recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). After approval of the schedule, the
Hardware Supplier shall provide two (2) copies of the approved schedule to the Architect of Record
for file and distribution purposes.
C. When submitting schedules for approval, include three (3) sets of manufacturers' cut sheets on
hardware item proposed.
D. Provide Architect of Record with hardware manufacturers’ statements of compliance with ANSI/BHMA
standards as noted in the References article of this Section.
E. Templates: The Hardware Supplier shall provide necessary templates and/or physical hardware to all
trades requiring them in order to cut, reinforce, or otherwise prepare their material or product to
receive the hardware item. In the event that physical hardware is required by any manufacturer, the
Hardware Supplier shall ship to them such hardware via prepaid freight in sufficient time to prevent
any delay in execution of their work.
F. Closeout submittals
1. Manufacturer warranty cards for all installed hardware, with limits as indicated in the Products
article.
2. Maintenance and care instructions for all installed mechanical hardware.
3. Finish maintenance and care instructions for all installed hardware.
4. All special adjusting and/or installation tools furnished with the hardware by the manufacturer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Hardware has been specified in the drawing schedules by manufacturers' name, brand and catalog
numbers for the purpose of establishing a basis for quality, finish, design and operational function.
B. To insure a uniform basis of acceptable materials, it is the intention that only manufacturers' items
specified as "Acceptable and Approved" be furnished for use on this project. Deviation from, or
modification of items will be permitted only for the special instances caused by reason of construction
characteristics and for the purpose of providing proper operational function. The Contractor shall be
responsible for checking any necessary deviation in order to assure that the hardware shall fit and
function properly.
C. Substitutions: Request for substitution of hardware items listed as "Acceptable and Approved" shall
be made to the Architect no later than ten (10) days prior to bid opening. Approval of substitutions will
only be made in writing or by addendum. Requests for substitutions shall be accompanied by samples
and/or detailed information clearly showing pertinent data for the proposed manufacturers' product(s).
D. Supplier: A recognized builders hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the project's
vicinity for a period of not less than five (5) years, and who is or has in employment an Architectural
Hardware Consultant (AHC) in good standing as certified by the Door and Hardware Institute or
equivalent. This consultant shall have experience in the preparation of Architectural hardware
specifications, estimating, detailing, ordering, and servicing of Architectural hardware and will be

087100-2
 CHASE
SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

available at reasonable times during the course of the work for hardware consultation with the Owner,
Architect and Contractor.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All items of hardware to be delivered to the job site shall be completely packaged in manufacturer’s
unopened packaging with all necessary screws, bolts, miscellaneous parts, instructions, and where
necessary, installation templates for manufacturers' suggested installation. They are to be clearly
labeled so as to conveniently identify them and their intended location in the building.
B. A representative of the General Contractor shall receive the hardware when delivered at the job site.
Store hardware in a dry, locked room.
C. Finish hardware shall be delivered to the General Contractor at the project site by the hardware
vendor or door hardware installer. Direct factory shipments to the job site are not acceptable.
D. Items damaged prior to acceptance by General Contractor shall be replaced promptly with proper
material, and without additional cost to the General Contractor.
E. All hardware shall be handled in a manner to minimize marring, scratching, or damage.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Minimum manufacturer warranty periods against material and workmanship shall be as follows, from
date of Substantial completion of the project
1. Finishes: match product warranty.
2. Automatic door operators: 2 years.
3. Locksets, latchsets and panic hardware: 3 years.
4. Electromechanical locksets: 1 year.
5. Closers and continuous hinges: 10 years.
6. Butt hinges: Lifetime
7. Pivots: 1 year
8. Other mechanical hardware: 1 year.
9. Thresholds: 5 years
10. Non-mechanical hardware: 1 year.
B. Hardware installer labor warranty shall be as indicated in Section 007200 – General Conditions or as
supplemented or modified in section 007300 – Supplementary Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Material and finish requirements
1. Finish hardware in this section shall meet the minimum ANSI/BHMA Grade standards as
indicated in the References article of this Section.
2. Product tests are to be administered by the ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc., Underwriters
Laboratories, or other official testing laboratories which have been designated by BHMA for the
testing of ANSI standards.
B. Fire-resistance-rated and egress hardware labeling requirements
1. Hardware which is to be installed in or on fire-resistance-rated doors and frames shall be tested,
listed and labeled as compliant by Underwriters Laboratories or Warnock Hersey Laboratories.
2. Exit devices used as ‘panic hardware’ shall be tested, listed and labeled as compliant in
Underwriters Laboratories "Accident Equipment List - Panic Hardware".
3. All listed hardware shall be in compliance with NFPA 80 and be properly stamped or labeled for
easy identification.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive characteristics of each type
of hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.

087100-3
 CHASE
SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

2.3 FINISHES
A. Finish of hardware items shall be as listed in the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings and shall
conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.18 unless otherwise noted.
2.4 KEYING
A. All locks and cylinders are to be core type, provided by the hardware supplier with keyed-alike full-size
interchangeable construction cores, specific to the lock manufacturer design. Permanent Master-
keyed cores shall be provided by the Owner and installed at substantial project completion by the
Owner. Hardware supplier shall provide 10 Construction Keys total.
2.5 HINGES
A. Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide
only template hinges which conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.7.
B. All butt hinges shall be ball-bearing type unless otherwise noted.
C. All exterior door butt hinges shall be stainless steel unless otherwise noted.
D. Hinge pins shall match hinge leaf material
1. For exterior doors, provide non-removable pins.
2. For interior doors, provide non-rising pins.
3. Hinge pin tips shall be flat button with matching plug, finished to match leaves.
E. Hinge sizes
1. Doors up to 36” wide: 4 1/2” x 4 1/2”.
2. Doors over 36” wide: 5” x 4 1/2”.
F. Hinge quantities
1. Doors up to 7’-6” tall: 1 1/2” pair.
2. Doors over 7’-6” tall: 2 pair.
G. When projection of door trim is such as to prevent desired degree of opening, modify the hinge width
specification as required to prevent the door or hardware from contacting the trim.
H. Manufacturers
1. As indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.
2. Stanley.
3. Bommer.
4. Ives.
5. Substitutions: not permitted.
2.6 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS
A. All latches and locks shall be manufactured by a sole source.
B. Mechanical locksets for this project shall be cylindrical type with lever handle trim as specified.
C. The lockset case shall be manufacturer's standard wrought steel with zinc dichromate finish.
D. Strikes shall be curved lip stainless steel ANSI Standard A115.1, 4-7/8"x1-1/4". Provide straight lip
strikes, 7/8" lip to center, at pairs of doors.
E. Provide cylinders with keyed-alike construction cores to be replaced by the Owner’s Locksmith.
F. At push-button locksets, provide concealed emergency override cylinders with keyed-alike
construction cores. as specified in the hardware sets at the end of this section. Locks to be provided
with override cylinder cores. Permanent cores to be furnished by Owner.
G. Manufacturers
1. As indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.
2. Substitutions: not permitted.
2.7 EXIT DEVICES
A. All exit devices (‘panic bars’) for this project shall have the chassis, end cap, and horizontal mounting
rail, mounted directly to, and flush with, the door surface. No gaps or space shall be permitted

087100-4
 CHASE
SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

between the back of the horizontal mounting rail and the door surface. If required, a continuous solid
spacer bar shall be used to fill the space between the back of the device and the door surface.
B. Manufacturers
1. As indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.
2. Substitutions: not permitted.
2.8 DOOR CLOSERS
A. All door closers for this project shall be manufactured by a sole source.
B. Physical and functional characteristics
1. Cast iron case
2. Rack-and-pinion type construction.
3. Adjustable opening force and closing speed compliant with ANSI A117.1.
4. Adjustable backcheck and/or delayed action.
5. Heavy-duty heat-treated steel spindle.
C. Door closers shall be installed such that they may be adjusted so as to comply with ANSI A117.1
requirements for closing speed and opening force.
D. Provide thru-bolts for fire-rated doors which do not have closer blockings.
E. All door closers shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for use on self-closing fire-resistance-
rated doors.
F. Manufacturer
1. As indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.
2. Substitutions: not permitted.
2.9 STOPS
A. Stops shall be provided for all doors, including doors with closers, as indicated in the Door Hardware
Schedule in the drawings.
B. Stops shall be positioned so as to prevent contact of door and hardware with adjacent surfaces.
C. Concealed overhead stops shall be used where specified, or where floor stops cannot be used.
Where specified, provide overhead stops which incorporate field adjustability between 85 and 110
degrees of door opening. Plastic end caps at overhead stops are not acceptable.
D. All stops to be fastened to concrete shall use expansion shields and machine screws.
E. Stop types shall be as specified in the Door Hardware schedule in the drawings.
F. Manufacturers
1. As indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.
2. Substitutions: not permitted.
2.10 KICKPLATES
A. Kickplates shall be .050” beveled-edge stainless steel sheet, sizes and finishes as indicated in the
Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.
B. Kickplates shall be applied on the push side of each door and on the pull side of doors where noted in
the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.
C. Manufacturers
1. As indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.
2. Hager.
3. Rockwell.
4. Substitutions: not permitted.
2.11 SEALS, WEATHERSTRIPPING, GASKETS, ETC.
A. Weather seal materials shall be manufactured from nylon brush insert with all extruded aluminum
retainer. Seals shall be designed to be installed on metal or wood door frames.
B. Manufacturers

087100-5
 CHASE
SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

1. As indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.

2. Zero.
3. Reese.
4. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.12 THRESHOLDS
A. Provide thresholds as indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule and other details in the drawings,
including at each exterior door.
B. Thresholds shall be mill finish extruded Aluminum flat saddle type with thermal break, compliant with
ANSI A117.1 accessibility requirements. Include machine screws with lead expansion shields for
installation.
C. Manufacturers
1. As indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.
2. Zero.
3. Reese.
4. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.13 DOOR SWEEPS
A. Door sweeps shall be included at all exterior door leaves and Aluminum storefront system Vestibule
doors, Employee Entrance doors and other similar doors.
B. Manufacturers
1. As indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.
2. Substitutions: not permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify as-built conditions in field and modify specified types and quantities of hardware prior to
submitting hardware schedule to Architect of Record for approval.
3.2 SEQUENCING
A. Where hardware is to be installed onto or into unfinished materials, the hardware shall be fully
installed to ensure proper fit, then removed and stored prior to painting or finishing. Re-install
hardware components only after material finishes are complete, including full drying times of paints
and other liquid-applied finishes.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware components at heights and backsets as indicated in "Recommended Locations for
Builders Hardware" for Standard Steel Doors and Frames, Custom Steel Doors and Frames, Wood
Doors and Frames by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI), except as otherwise specifically
indicated or to comply with authorities having jurisdiction, or as required for accessibility compliance.
B. All hardware shall be installed by tradesmen skilled in the application of commercial grade hardware.
C. Install each hardware item as indicated in the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
1. Securely fasten all parts to be attached.
2. Fit faces of mortised parts snug and flush.
3. All operating parts shall move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking or excessive
clearance.
D. Install hardware using fasteners provided or recommended by the hardware manufacturer. Self-
drilling, self-tapping “TEK” screws are not to be used for any item of hardware unless packaged with
hardware item by manufacturer.
E. At exterior doors and elsewhere as indicated, set thresholds in a bed of thermal and moisture sealant
to completely fill concealed voids. Do not plug drain holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant.
Refer to Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.

087100-6
 CHASE
SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust and check each hardware component to ensure correct operation and function. Replace
components which cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.
B. Final adjustment: Hardware installer shall return to the project after the date of Substantial Completion
and prior to final occupancy by the Owner during the Owner’s period of Turnover from Real Estate to
Retail to make final check and adjustment of all hardware items.
1. Hardware shall be cleaned as necessary to restore correct operation, function, and finish.
2. Door control devices shall be adjusted to compensate for the final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment, and to comply with accessibility codes.
3. Doors shall be adjusted to open fully as indicated in the floor plans or as otherwise noted.
4. Door closers shall be adjusted to comply with ANSI A117.1 for closing speed and opening force.
a. Door closers shall be adjusted such that from an open position of 90 degrees, the time
required to move the door to an open position of 12 degrees shall be 5 seconds minimum.
b. Exterior doors and fire doors shall have the minimum opening force permitted by the
authority having jurisdiction.
c. Interior hinged doors other than fire doors, and interior sliding or folding doors shall be shall
be adjusted to a maximum opening force of 5 pounds.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Hardware located in areas where it may be subject to damage during construction by handling,
cleaning, etc., (i.e., painting, cleaning of bricks) shall be protected and/or removed from its location
until the deleterious activities are complete.

END OF SECTION

087100-7
 CHASE
SECTION 088000 – GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work included: The Contractor shall furnish and install all glass and glazing work shown, noted or
indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein and not specified as a part of other Sections,
including all materials, labor, equipment and services necessary for the provision and proper
installation of the work required. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to:
1. Glass.
a. Building fenestration
b. Interior partitions
2. Specialty glass products.
a. Glass partition systems, including rails, channels, clips and miscellaneous mounting and
finish hardware.
b. Decorative applique films.
3. Glass door hardware.
4. Glazing sealants.
5. Glazing gaskets and tapes.
6. Miscellaneous glazing materials.
B. Work excluded: The contractor shall refer to the specifications and other resources for information
relative to conditions, which may affect his work.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 017800 - Closeout Submittals
C. 062000 – Finish Carpentry
D. 079200 – Joint Sealants
E. 087100 – Door Hardware
F. 084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
G. 088700 – Window Film
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI); latest edition unless otherwise noted
1. ANSI Z97.1: American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association, latest edition unless otherwise noted
1. AAMA CW-10: Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM); latest edition unless otherwise
noted
1. ASTM C 1036: Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
2. ASTM C1048: Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass.
3. ASTM E773: Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
4. ASTM E774: Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating
Glass Units.
5. ASTM E1300: Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings.
D. U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC)
1. 16CFR 1201: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
E. Glass Association of North America (GANA) ; latest edition unless otherwise noted

088000-1 XX/XX/2013
 CHASE
SECTION 088000 – GLAZING

1. GANA GM: Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America.

2. GANA SM: FGMA Sealant Manual.
3. GANA #89-1-6, Section 4.1: Specification for Environmental Durability of Fully Tempered or
Heat-Strengthened Spandrel Glass with Applied Opacifiers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Submit the following to Architect of Record for review and approval
1. Manuacturer’s product data sheets including construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation
instructions for each type of glass and glazing system indicated.
2. Shop drawings of interior glass partitions including plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware,
and attachments to other work, operational clearances and installation details.
3. Shop drawings of custom-fabricated and finished metal glazing clips, including dimensions, base
and finish materials, and standard finish designations.
4. Material samples, two of each type
a. Glass, 12”x12” including sealed insulating units.
b. Glazing rail, channel and similar material, 6” length each, including one end cap with each
sample, with finish as indicated in the construction drawings.
c. Glazing gaskets, spacers and similar accessories, 6” length.
5. Manufacturer's certificates for each material indicating that the products supplied meet or exceed
the specified requirements.
6. Jurisdictional approvals as applicable
C. Closeout submittals
1. Report of field testing for water leakage.
2. Manufacturer’s warranty with forms completed in Owner's name and registered with
manufacturer.

1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads
(where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following:
defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight
and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Glass units and freestanding glass support systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis
according to ASTM E 1300, shall be designed by a qualified professional engineer, using the following
design loading criteria
1. Design wind pressures and seismic loading as determined by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Maximum center‐of‐glass lateral deflection units supported on all four edges shall be limited to
1/200 times the short‐side length or the flexure limit of the glass, whichever is less.
3. Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass
lites.
4. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass
framing members and glazing components.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section at other projects
of similar size and scope with minimum 5 years documented experience.
B. Installer shall have has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar units
required for the project.
C. Manufacturer shall be capable of fabricating glazing units that meet or exceed performance
requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion of test reports and
calculations.

088000-2 XX/XX/2013
 CHASE
SECTION 088000 – GLAZING

D. Obtain glazing units through one source from a single manufacturer for each type.
E. Drawings indicate specific size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum framed storefront
system and flush doors. Refer to Division 01 Section – Product Requirements. Do not modify
dimensional requirements.
F. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect of Record, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Architect for review.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene pre-installation meeting with Architect of Record, General Contractor and fenestration
installer before starting work of this section, with adequate time to allow remaining preparation work at
the site to complete.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B. Upon receipt of materials, installer shall examine the shipment for damage and completeness,
including failure of insulated unit seals. Return damaged units for re-fabrication.
C. Store materials in a clean, covered, dry location, out of direct sunlight.
D. Stack all materials to prevent damage and to allow for adequate ventilation.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify actual dimensions of Aluminum framed storefront openings by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate field measurements on shop drawings.
B. Coordinate the work with installation of firestopping components or materials.
C. Install sealants within sealant manufacturer’s required temperature and humidity conditions range,
and never less than 50 deg. F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after
installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide installer warranty covering correction of defective work within a five year period after Date of
Substantial Completion. Warranty shall include seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and
replacement of same.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATING EXTERIOR GLASS UNITS
A. Physical and performance characteristics:
1. 1” total thickness 2-pane assemblies, with glass pane thicknesses as determined by the
manufacturer for the indicated span and loading.
2. All units shall be Energy Star compliant, meeting the minimum thermal transmittance (U-Factor)
and solar heat gain (SHGC) requirements for the project’s climate zone indicated by the National
Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC).
3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) shall be selected by the Architect or Engineer of Record as
appropriate for the building’s climate and exposure so as to allow the highest Visual
Transmittance (VT) possible while minimizing negative effects on the building’s environmental
control equipment.
4. All units shall include Low-E coating(s) at the interior surface(s), except spandrel glass units.
5. Spacer bars shall be mill-finish or clear anodized Aluminum.
6. Unit cavity shall be filled with Argon or Krypton gas.
7. Units shall comply with ASTM E773 and E774.

088000-3 XX/XX/2013
 CHASE
SECTION 088000 – GLAZING

B. Where required by building code or authorities having jurisdiction, provide ‘safety glass’ complying
with ASTM C1048, Kind FT and ANSI 97.1.
C. Units designated as ‘spandrel’ shall be insulated units with spray-applied water-based silicone opaque
coating applied to surface #3 (outward-facing surface of interior pane).
1. ICD High-Performance Coatings Opaci-Coat 300 #3-0770 ‘Warm Gray’. For substitutions, refer
to Section 016000.
2. Units shall comply with GANA #89-1-6, Section 4.1.
3. Spandrel units shall not receive Low-E coatings.
D. Manufacturers
1. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.; www.us.agc.com.
2. PPG Industries, Inc.; www.ppg.com.
3. Pilkington (Nippon Sheet Glass Co., Ltd.); www.pilkington.com/en/us
4. Oldcastle; www.oldcastlebe.com/products/architectural-glass
5. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.2 INTERIOR CLEAR FLAT GLASS UNITS
A. 1/2” thick clear annealed transparent flat float glass complying with ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1,
Quality Q3; used where not otherwise required by code to be ‘safety’ glass.
B. Where required by building code or authorities having jurisdiction, provide ‘safety glass’ complying
with ASTM C1048, Kind FT and ANSI 97.1.
C. Manufacturers: as indicated for Insulating Exterior Glass Units.
2.3 INTERIOR DECORATIVE GLASS UNITS
A. Obscured glass partition panels
a. 3/8” total thickness 2-lite low-iron transparent flat float glass complying with ASTM C1036,
Type I, Class 1, Quality Q3; laminated with patterned adhesive sheet between the glass,
pattern and color as indicated in the Interior Finish Materials Schedule in the Drawings.
Assembly shall comply with CPSC 16CFR 1201 Category II and ANSI 97.1.
b. Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide tempered glass compliant with
ASTM C1048.
c. Alternate: surface-applied glazing film over clear glass.
1) Glazing film as indicated in the Interior Finish Materials Schedule in the Drawings.
2) Clear glass panels as indicated in Section 2.2 Interior Clear Flat Glass Units above.
B. Manufacturer
1. As indicated in the Interior Finish Materials Schedule in the Drawings.
2. Substitutions not permitted.
2.4 GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Exterior glass units and interior glass units set in storefront framing.
1. Gaskets, spacers, sealants and other glazing materials and accessories shall be as specified in
084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts.
B. Interior glass units.
1. Joint sealant shall be Type D – interior partition glazing adhesive (clear structural silicone
adhesive) as specified in Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.
2. Gaskets, spacers, and other glazing materials and accessories shall be as specified in the
Interior Finish Materials Schedule in the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.

088000-4 XX/XX/2013
 CHASE
SECTION 088000 – GLAZING

B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede
moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing
installation methods.
B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain
full contact.
D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact.
3.4 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)
A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight
line.
B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.
D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.
E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous
contact.
F. Knife trim protruding tape.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after Work is complete.
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat
absorbing or reflective glass units.

END OF SECTION

088000-5 XX/XX/2013
 CHASE
SECTION 088700 – GLAZING SURFACE FILMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Field-applied anti-graffiti glazing films at exterior fenestration, for use by exception only as directed by
the Owner.
B. Field- and shop-applied decorative, obscuring and solar-control interior glazing films.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 017800 – Closeout Submittals
C. 088000 – Glazing
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Testing and Materials International (ASTM), latest edition unless noted
otherwise.
1. ASTM E84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2. ASTM E308: Standard Practice for Computing the Colors of Objects by Using the CIE System.
3. ASTM E903: Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and Transmittance of
Materials Using Integrating Spheres.
B. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code; National Fire Prevention Association; latest edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Submit the following to Architect of Record for approval
1. Product data sheet for each type of glazing surface film.
2. Two samples for each type of glazing film applied to 12” x 12” glass panes.
C. Closeout submittals, for each type of glazing surface film
1. Manufacturer’s warranty with forms completed in Owner's name and registered with
manufacturer.
2. One copy of manufacturer’s maintenance / use / care instructions.
D. LEED Submittals: Submit applicable LEED Submittal Form for each type of product used.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazing film shall be installed by personnel experienced in the field installation of glazing film of the
type specified.
B. Mock-up
1. Mock-up not required for shop-applied interior glazing surface films.
2. For exterior field-applied glazing film, install each type at a single glazed lite or interior partition
panel as indicated by the Architect of Record.
3. Mock-up shall be approved by the Architect of Record prior to proceeding with work.
4. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into the work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Upon receipt of materials, installer shall examine the shipment for damage and completeness. Return
damaged materials.
B. Store materials in a clean, covered, dry location, out of direct sunlight.
C. Stack all materials to prevent damage and to allow for adequate ventilation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field-application of glazing surface films shall be performed only under the following conditions:

088700-1
 CHASE
SECTION 088700 – GLAZING SURFACE FILMS

1. All types: after work of other dust-producing trades is complete or paused for surface cleaning
and installation of glazing surface films.
2. Exterior films: during environmental conditions acceptable to the glazing film manufacturer.
3. Interior films: After building mechanical systems are installed and operating, with control of
Interior temperature and humidity meeting the requirements of the glazing surface film
manufacturer.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide installer warranty covering correction of work found to be defective after Date of Substantial
Completion for the following periods:
1. Anti-graffiti film: 5 years.
2. Interior opaqueing film: 5 years.
3. Decorative glass partition film: 5years.
4. Solar control film: 15 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTERIOR ANTI-GRAFFITI GLAZING FILM
A. Product: Madico Graffiti Free LCL-600-XSRG; www.madico.com.
B. Use: sacrificial barrier to protect glass from graffiti.
C. Physical and performance properties: clear 6-mil self-adhesive polyester sheet with 83% visible light
transmittance, 10% solar reflectance and 11% solar absorbance.
D. Application: surface-applied to exterior faces of glass.
E. Compliance requirements
1. Tested for surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Rated ‘Class A’ under NFPA 101.
F. Substitutions not permitted.
2.2 INTERIOR GLASS OPAQUEING FILM
A. Product: refer to the Interior Finish Materials Schedule in the construction drawings.
B. Use: Obscures visibility while maintaining translucence for security and modesty applications.
C. Physical and performance properties: frosted self-adhesive sheet with 75% visible light transmittance,
69% solar transmittance, 20% solar reflectance and 11% solar absorbance.
D. Application: surface-applied to interior faces of glass at storefront systems.
E. Compliance requirements
1. Tested for surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Rated ‘Class A’ under NFPA 101.
F. Substitutions not permitted.
2.3 DECORATIVE INTERIOR GLASS PARTITION GLAZING FILM
A. Product: refer to the Interior Finish Materials Schedule in the construction drawings.
B. Use: Decorative surface-applied film as a substitute for laminated patterned glass interior partitions.
C. Physical and performance properties: 3-mil patterned self-adhesive sheet with 65% visible light
transmittance, 64% solar transmittance, 17% solar reflectance and 19% solar absorbance.
D. Application: surface-applied to a single face of interior glass partition panels.
E. Compliance requirements
1. Tested for surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E84.

088700-2
 CHASE
SECTION 088700 – GLAZING SURFACE FILMS

2. Rated ‘Class A’ under NFPA 101.

F. Substitutions not permitted.
2.4 SOLAR-CONTROL INTERIOR GLAZING FILM
A. Manufacturer: 3M; www.3m.com/windowfilm.
B. Product: Prestige series 2-mil clear self-adhesive sheet, specific product as determined necessary by
Architect of Record to meet the building design requirements.
C. Use: Surface-applied solar-control film installed at the interior face of storefront glazing by exception
only as a directive from the Owner where required to reduce glare or heat gain.
D. Physical properties
1. Minimum visible light transmission per ASTM E903 and E308: 60%.
2. Maximum exterior visible reflection per ASTM E903: 8%.
3. Minimum UV rejected per ASTM E903: 99.9%.
4. Minimum IR rejected per ASTM E903: 97%.
5. Minimum luminous efficacy per ASTM E903: 1.10%.
6. Minimum Shading Coefficient at 90 deg. per ASTM E903: 0.50.
7. Minimum total solar energy rejected at 90 degrees per ASTM E903: Not less than 50%.
8. Minimum total solar energy rejected at 60 degrees per ASTM E903: Not less than 59%.
E. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine glass and surrounding adjacent surfaces for conditions affecting installation. Report
conditions that may adversely effect installation. In report, include description of any glass that is
broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Beginning of installation constitutes installer's acceptance of conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Immediately before beginning installation of films, clean glass surfaces of substances that could
impair glazing film's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign materials.
C. Protect window frames and surrounding conditions from damage during installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)
A. For applications of sacrificial barrier films, use dilute detergent pretreatment as recommended by the
manufacturer for release enhancement properties.
B. Comply with glazing film manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
C. Install film to each distinct pane as a single sheet, free of scratches, dirt, and imperfections.
D. Accurately trim film even with glazing stops, pressure plate or glass edge for complete coverage of
visible exterior surface.
E. Provide straight and clean edge line where film is terminated within the field of a glass panel.
F. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
G. Install opaqueing films to interior glass surfaces. Install graffiti film to exterior glass surfaces.

088700-3
 CHASE
SECTION 088700 – GLAZING SURFACE FILMS

H. After installation, view film from a distance of 10 feet against a bright uniform sky or background. Film
shall appear uniform with no visible streaks, banding, thin spots or pinholes. If installed film does not
meet this criteria, remove and replace with new film.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove excess mounting solution at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
C. Remove labels after work is complete.
D. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. Use cleaning methods recommended by glazing film
manufacturer.
E. Replace films that cannot be cleaned.

END OF SECTION

088700-4
 CHASE
SECTION 092200 – LIGHT GAUGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Partition framing.
2. Steel backing.
3. Ceiling and soffit framing.
4. Furring.
B. Related Sections:
1. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
2. 054000 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Light Gauge Metal Framing indicated on the structural
drawings.
3. 055000 – Metal Fabrications: Partial height wall bracing.
4. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking; framing and sheathing.
5. 072113 – Board Insulation: Insulation between furring.
6. 072117 – Fibrous Building Insulation: Insulation between framing members.
7. 098100 – Acoustic Insulation: Insulation between framing members.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 641 – Zinc-Coated Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire; current edition.
B. ASTM C 635 – Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings; current
edition.
C. ASTM C 645 – Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; current edition.
D. ASTM C 754 – Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-
Attached Gypsum Panel Products; current edition.
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Standard 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Structural Design:
1. Select framing systems, gauges, supports, bracing, and connections as necessary to meet the
structural requirements specified.
2. Partition framing shall conform to the widths indicated, unless approved otherwise. Provide
thicker gages and decreased stud spacing as necessary to meet the design requirements.
3. Select framing members based on the manufacturer's published span tables.
B. Design Loads:
1. Interior Ceiling Assemblies: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live load, plus dead loads.
2. Exterior Soffit Assemblies: 30 per square foot positive and negative uniform live load, plus dead
loads.
3. Interior Partitions without Wall Mounted Casework: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live lateral
load.
4. Interior Partitions with Wall Mounted Casework: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live lateral
load, casework dead load, and casework live load of 25 pounds per square foot of shelf area.
5. Seismic Loads: Conform to the requirements of currently enforced edition of the jurisdictional
code authorities.

092200-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092200 – LIGHT GAUGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING

C. Deflection Requirements:
1. Maximum deflection of 1/240 for flexible finish materials such as gypsum board and veneer
plaster.
2. Maximum deflection of 1/360 for rigid finish materials including gypsum plaster, cement plaster,
ceramic tile, maximum 3/8" thick stone tile, or mirrors.
D. Fire Rated Partition Head Assemblies:
1. Successfully tested in accordance with ASTM E119, including hose stream test, to meet the
hourly fire ratings of the construction being sealed.
2. Successfully tested in accordance with the requirements of UL 2079, for dynamic movement.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Data: Submit complete published literature for framing systems and components. Include
span tables for proposed framing systems.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate typical and special framing sections and details. Indicate fastening systems,
gauges, framing spacing, bracing configurations and locations, anchorage to acoustical ceiling grid,
metal backing, attachment to overhead structure, and similar conditions.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special overhead stud framed conditions. Indicate typical
fastening systems, adjacent construction, gauges, framing spacing, bracing configurations, and
locations.
E. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Certification: Submit certification that the overhead framing systems have been designed in
accordance with the specified requirements.
F. Closeout Submittal:
1. In accordance with Section 017700.
2. Submit design engineer's certification that products and installation comply with design
requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, perform work in accordance with ASTM C754.
B. Code Requirements:
1. Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated and specified. Assemblies shall be
tested in accordance with ASTM E119, and shall be approved by the local jurisdictional code
authorities. Coordinate installation of other materials which are a part each assembly.
2. Fire rating requirements take precedence over the construction requirements indicated. In the
event of conflict, notify the Architect, and do not begin construction in the area of conflict until the
conflict has been resolved.
3. Provide calculations, drawings, product data, and other verification as required by the
jurisdictional code authority to obtain approval of the lightgage metal framing installation.
C. Structural Design: Framing systems shall be designed by a structural engineer licensed to practice in
the state where the Project is located.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Non-Load Bearing Light Gauge Metal Framing:
1. ASTM C645; galvanized; minimum 20 gauge unless indicated or specified otherwise.
2. Furnish "C" shaped studs, depth as scheduled, with return lip and not less than 1-1/4 inch
flanges; prepunched openings for the installation of stiffening channels and mechanical and
electrical items.
3. Furnish U shaped tracks (runners), hat and "Z" shaped furring channels, and other sizes and
shapes as indicated on the Drawings, and required by the referenced standards.

092200-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092200 – LIGHT GAUGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING

4. Gauges:
a. Furnish gages as necessary to meet deflection requirements, unless indicated or specified
otherwise.
b. Top runner for partitions extending only to the acoustical ceiling grid shall be 20 gauge.
c. Provide minimum 20 gauge for full height partition framing extending from structure to
structure.
d. Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 092900.
e. Insulation: As recommended by the assembly manufacturer.
f. Fire Rated Compound: National Gypsum Company "Gold Bond STA-Smooth FS-90 Fire
Shield Compound."
B. Exterior Wind Load Bearing: Types as noted on the structural drawings.
C. Channels: Hot or cold rolled channels; rust inhibitive paint coating; sizes in accordance with
ASTM C754.
D. Proprietary Ceiling Suspension System:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Basis of Design: Chicago Metallic (Los Angeles CA; 800-323-7164).
b. Acceptable Options (subject to compliance with Contract Document requirements and
Architect's approval of conformance to design intent.)::
1) USG Interiors, Inc. (Chicago, IL; 800-874-4968).
2) Armstrong (800-207-2321).
2. Suspension System: Similar to System 650, or 670; ASTM C635 heavy duty classification.
a. Furring Runners: Manufactured from 0.020 inch thick steel 1-3/8 inch wide with knurled face
by 1-1/2 inches high; factory punched cross tee slots, hanger holes, and non-directional
bayonet end tab couplings.
b. Furring Tees: Manufactured from 0.020 inch thick l-3/8 inch wide with knurled face by 1-1/2
inches high; factory punched cross tee slots and hanger holes.
c. Furring Cross Channel: 0.020 inch thick steel; 1-3/8 Inch wide with knurled face by 7/8
inches high by 48 inches long with straight locking end tabs.
d. Cross Tees: 0.020 inch thick steel 15/16 inch wide by 1-1/2 inches high; with staked-on dip
end tab couplings, factory punched cross tee slots.
e. Moldings: Manufacturer's standard.
f. Channel beam splice clip: Manufacturer’s standard.
E. Accessories:
1. Screws: Self tapping; low profile head; galvanized.
2. Hanger wire: ASTM A641; Class 1 zinc coating; soft temper; prestretched; 12 gauge.
3. Resilient Channels: USG "RC-1," or approved.
4. Backing: Dietrich Industries (Pittsburgh PA, 412-281-2805; Renton WA, 425-251-1497)
"Danback Flexible Wood Backing Plate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Steel Decking:
1. Where fastening into bottom of steel decking is required, fasten only into lower flutes.
2. Do not use fasteners in steel deck which penetrate more than 1 inch.
B. Verify location of conduit in poured concrete construction before making attachments.

092200-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092200 – LIGHT GAUGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING

3.3 INTERIOR PARTITION FRAMING

A. Runners:
1. Secure runners with fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center.
2. At concrete floors, use powder driven fasteners or drilled in concrete anchors.
3. Top Runner: Secure head track to structure with allowance for structural deflection.
a. Non Rated Partitions: Use proprietary compensating channel or deep leg track at
Contractor's option, as necessary to accommodate building deflection.
b. Fire Rated Partitions: Install proprietary fire rated runner and accessories as necessary to
meet the fire rating requirements indicated on the Drawings; comply with UL requirements
for listed assembly.
4. Align to tolerances specified.
B. Unless indicated otherwise, install studs vertically at 16 inches on center, and not more than 2 inches
from abutting construction, at each side of openings, and at corners.
C. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs at spacing of wall studs.
D. Brace partition framing system and make rigid. Provide diagonal stud bracing at maximum 8 ft on
center at framing which does not extend to structure.
E. Install double studs continuous from floor to ceiling track at the jamb of each door frame and cased
opening. Studs shall be no less than 20 gauge. Provide diagonal steel stud bracing to structure at
each jamb at partitions which do not extent to structure.
F. Install minimum 20 gauge studs at partitions indicated for support of modular wall-mounted casework.
G. Where control joints are indicated in fire rated partitions, provide double stud and gypsum board
backing or other tested assembly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations or Warnock-
Hersey WHI-651-0318-1. Coordinate with Section 092900.
H. Coordinate erection of studs with installation of service utilities. Align stud web openings.
I. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical, and mechanical work to be placed in or
behind stud framing.
J. Coordinate erection of stud system with requirements of door and window frames, fire extinguisher
cabinets, recessed toilet accessories, access doors, acoustical insulation, and other construction
within partition.
K. Coordinate the installation of framing with the gypsum board installer to ensure support at board
edges. Provide framing immediately either side of expansion joints.
L. Stud splicing not permissible.
M. At non-load bearing full height partitions subject to compression caused by overhead structural
deflection, and where proprietary compensating channel system is not used, cut studs 1/2 inch short
from full height. Do not rigidly connect stud to top runner.
N. Furring at Rigid Insulation:
1. Space "Z" furring channels at a maximum of 24 inches on center, and no more than 3 inches
from corners.
2. Unless indicated otherwise, install framing vertically with fasteners at 24 inches on center.
Provide shims as required to meet tolerance requirements specified. Anchor to concrete with
powder driven fasteners spaced not more than 24 inches on center.
3. Coordinate installation of framing to allow installation of rigid insulation as specified in another
Section.
O. Stud Bridging:
1. At interior partitions greater than 4 feet in length, and with rigid facing material on one stud flange
only, provide 3/4" bridging channels in horizontal rows at a maximum of 5'-0" on center for the full
height of the partition.

092200-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092200 – LIGHT GAUGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING

2. Interior full height partitions (studs extending from the floor to the structure above) with rigid
facing material stopping 3'-0" or more below top of studs - Provide one row 3/4" bridging channel
horizontally at termination of gypsum board material, and one additional row for each 5'-0" of
exposed studs.
3. Install stud bridging channels in long lengths, wire tying and lapping the joints a minimum of
12 inches. Attach bridging channel to each stud as shown in manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.4 BACKING
A. Provide steel or fire treated wood backing, unless indicated otherwise, for the support of wall mounted
items.
B. Unless indicated otherwise, steel backing shall consist of minimum 4 inch wide 16 gauge steel plate
screwed rigidly to the studs.
3.5 CEILING , SOFFIT, AND FASCIA FRAMING
A. Coordinate locations of hangers and supports with the work of other Sections.
B. Ceiling framing shall consist of stud and runner framing or suspended framing, unless indicated or
specified otherwise.
C. Stud and Runner Framing:
1. Secure runners to structure above with fasteners at a maximum of 24 inches on center. Size
fasteners and use reinforcements as necessary to support the dead loads applied.
2. Screw fasten framing at each flange joint.
3. Space studs at 16 inches on center at horizontal locations.
4. Select members to meet the structural requirements specified.
D. Lightgage Suspended Framing:
1. Install in accordance with ASTM C754, unless indicated or specified otherwise.
2. Suspend ceiling from overhead structural elements only. Do not support from any electrical,
HVAC, plumbing, or sprinkler system components.
3. Space carrying channels 4 feet on center with splices lapped 12 inches and tied.
4. Support cold rolled carrying channels with hanger wires spaced at 3 feet on center for lath and
plaster ceilings and 4 feet on center for gypsum board ceilings. Loop hanger wire around
support element and tightly wrap around vertical wire 3 times; cut off neatly.
5. Space furring channels 16 inch on center with splices lapped 12 inch, minimum and tied; clip or
saddle tie to runner channels with 16-gauge tie wire.
6. Where overhead obstructions prevent the regular spacing of hangers, provide secondary
carrying members for indirect support of the suspension system, or reinforce the nearest
adjacent hangers and related framing components as required to span the required distance.
E. Stabilize suspended ceiling, soffit, and fascia framing against lateral movement by means of diagonal
bracing. At locations where partitions extend to ceiling only, install supplementary bracing at
maximum 8 feet on center along length of partition, and above each door hinge and strike jamb. Form
openings in ceilings and frame openings for recessed light fixtures, air diffusers, access doors,
hatches, etc.
F. Install supplementary hanger wires for support of ceiling mounted equipment, such as speaker
support bracket, as required and as detailed.
3.6 TOLERANCES
A. Install members to provide surface plane with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any
direction.
B. Locate assemblies within 1/4 inch of required locations.
C. Locate framing on the center of the joint between gypsum board panels, within a tolerance of 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

092200-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092350 – GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM (GFRG) FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Products manufactured or shop-fabricated of glass fiber reinforced gypsum (GFRG), as indicated on
the drawings.
B. Hardware and accessories required for GFRG products installation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 061000 – Rough Carpentry
C. 079200 – Joint Sealants
D. 092200 – Lightgage Metal Support Framing
E. 092900 – Gypsum Board.
F. 099100 – Paints
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 840 – Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; latest
version.
2. ASTM D 256 – Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of
Plastics; latest version.
3. ASTM D 638 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; latest version.
4. ASTM D 785 – Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Electrical Insulating
Materials; latest version.
5. ASTM D 790 – Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced
Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials; latest version.
6. ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
latest version.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including dimensions,
finishes, storage, handling and installation requirements and recommendations.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings showing dimensions, layout, joints, details, and interface with
adjacent work; include field-measured dimensions of the spaces where items are to be installed, if
critical to proper installation.
D. Regulatory Requirements:
1. For projects requiring the inclusion of products within this Section within fire resistance rated
assemblies, submit manufacturer’s documentation indicating compliance.
2. Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated and specified. Assemblies shall be
approved by the local jurisdictional authorities.
3. Fire rating requirements take precedence over the construction requirements indicated. In the
event of conflict, notify the Architect, and do not begin construction in the area of conflict until the
conflict has been resolved.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Transport, lift, and handle units with care, avoiding excessive stress and preventing damage; use
appropriate equipment.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation, in a clean dry area
protected from weather, moisture, and damage. Store units upright and not stacked unless permitted
by manufacturer.

092350-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092350 – GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM (GFRG) FABRICATIONS

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A single manufacturer specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section shall provide all GFRG components, and shall have a minimum of five years
experience manufacturing these products.
B. Installer qualifications.
1. Employ skilled technicians who are experienced and knowledgeable in GFRG product installation
application, and familiar with the requirements of the specified work.
2. Successful completion of minimum of three projects of similar scope and complexity to the
specified project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Stromberg Architectural Products Inc, Greenville, Texas; www.strombergarchitectural.com.
B. RWM Inc., Murray, Utah; www.rwm-inc.com.
C. Formglas Products, Ltd., Ontario, Canada; www.formglas.com.
D. DMI. Adelanto, California; www.dmivictory.com.
E. First Class Building Products, Marietta, Georgia; www.firstclassbp.com.
F. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Fabrications: High density gypsum reinforced with continuous
filament glass fiber mat and structural reinforcing as required.
1. Glass Content: 5 to 6 percent by weight.
2. Density: 103 to 112 pcf (1650 to 1795 kg/cu m).
3. Shell Thickness: 1/8 to 3/16 inch (3 to 5 mm), nominal.
4. Flame Spread Index: 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
5. Flexural Strength: 3200 to 4000 psi (22 to 27.5 MPa), when tested in accordance with ASTM D
790.
6. Modulus of Elasticity: 2.1 to 2.2 x 10^5 psi (1450 to 1515 MPa), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790.
7. Tensile Strength: 1200 to 1400 psi (8.3 to 9.6 MPa)), when tested in accordance with ASTM D
638.
8. Impact Strength: 8.0 to 8.8 ft lb/sq in (13 to 14.4 J/sq mm), when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 256.
9. Hardness: M 72, ), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 785, Rockwell.
10. Variation from Dimensions Indicated on Drawings: Plus and minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), maximum.
11. Variation from Plane Along Edge or Surface: Plus and minus 1/16 inch per linear foot (1.5 mm in
300 mm), maximum.
12. Outside Corner Radius: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch (1.5 to 3 mm).
13. Draft Angle: 3 degrees, minimum, on returns, setbacks, reveals, and grooves.
14. Items Too Large or Heavy to be Adhesively Installed: Provide concealed anchorage points for
plaster type wire anchors.
B. Joint Cement: Liquid Nails, or equivalent.
C. Joint Tape and Compound: Types recommended for gypsum wallboard work.
D. Joint Sealant: refer to Section 079200.
E. Suspension system: metal framing, cables and hardware, galvanized steel; size and type to suit
application and supporting materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. EXAMINATION

092350-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092350 – GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM (GFRG) FABRICATIONS

1. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly constructed; verify that substrates
are plumb and true.
2. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify GC of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3. Check field dimensions before beginning installation. If dimensions vary too much from design
dimensions for proper installation, notify Architect and wait for instructions before beginning
installation.
B. PREPARATION
1. Clean substrate surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
2. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3. Install supplementary, temporary, and permanent supports as required for proper installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with applicable code and manufacturer's recommendations, plumb and true to
line; shim where necessary.
B. Coordinate work with related gypsum wallboard work.
C. Join pieces with cemented butt joints except at control and expansion joints.
D. Finish exposed joints the same as specified for adjacent gypsum board work in Section 092900.
E. Finish joints and surfaces as required for Level 5 in ASTM C 840.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

092350-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092423 – PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Materials and installation of exterior stucco wall covering backed with air/moisture barrier, water-
resistive barrier, and drainage mat.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.
C. 042000 – Unit Masonry.
D. 061000 – Rough Carpentry.
E. 061643 – Exterior Gypsum Sheathing.
F. 072113 – Board Insulation.
G. 072500 – Weather Barriers.
H. 075400 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing.
I. 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
J. 076526 – Self-adhering Sheet Flashing.
K. 079200 – Joint Sealants.
L. 081113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
M. 084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts.
N. 084400 – Curtain Wall and Glazed Assemblies.
O. 092200 – Light Gauge Metal Support Framing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards, latest edition unless noted otherwise.
1. A 641 – Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized ) Carbon Steel Wire.
2. A 653 – Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,
Commercial Quality.
3. B 69 – Specification for Rolled Zinc.
4. C 144 – Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
5. C 297 – Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich Constructions.
6. C 578 – Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
7. C 847 – Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
8. C 897 – Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plasters.
9. C 926 – Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster.
10. C 1063 – Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement Plaster.
11. C 1177 – Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum for Use as Sheathing.
12. C 1513 – Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel Framing
Connections.
13. D 226 – Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing.
14. D 1784 – Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
15. D 4541 – Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers.
16. E 84 – Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
17. E 96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
18. E 283 – Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

092423-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092423 – PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO

19. E 330 – Test Method for Structural Performance of Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform
Static Air Pressure Difference.
20. E 331 – Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain
Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
21. E 783 – Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed Exterior
Windows and Doors.
22. E 2178 – Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials.
23. E 2357 – Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies.
24. E 2430 – Standard Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (“EPS”) Thermal Insulation Boards For
Use in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (“EIFS”).
25. G 154 – Recommended Practice for Operating Light-and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Fluorescent
UV-Condensation Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.
B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
1. AISI S200 – 2007 North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-General Provisions
C. APA Engineered Wood Association, latest edition unless noted otherwise.
1. PS 1 – Voluntary Product Standard, Structural Plywood.
2. PS 2 – Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels.
3. E 30 – APA Engineered Wood Construction Guide.
D. International Code Council (ICC), latest edition unless noted otherwise.
1. 2012 and 2015 International Building Code (IBC).
2. ES, ESR – International Code Council Evaluation Service Report.
3. AC 11 – Acceptance Criteria for Cementitious Exterior Wall Coatings.
4. AC 212 – Acceptance Criteria for Water-resistive Coatings used as Water-resistive Barriers over
Exterior Sheathing.
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards, latest edition unless noted otherwise.
1. NFPA 285 – Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Exterior
Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies containing Combustible Components Using the Intermediate-
Scale, Multistory Test Apparatus.
F. United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Standards.
1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 40 Part 59 – National Volatile Organic Compound
Emission Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural.
1. Stucco support systems shall provide for maximum allowable deflection of L/360, normal to the
plane of the wall.
2. Stucco support systems shall be designed for wind load in conformance with building code
requirements.
3. Refer to applicable ICC ESR for wind load limitations that may apply.
B. Moisture control.
1. Prevent the accumulation of water into or behind the stucco, either by condensation or leakage into
the wall construction, in the design and detailing of the wall assembly.
2. Adjust wall assembly components accordingly to minimize the risk of condensation.
3. Exclude the use of vapor retarders on the interior side of the wall in warm, humid climates.
4. Provide a weather barrier over sheathing, concrete and masonry per the requirements of Section
072500 – Weather Barriers, positioned as indicated in the drawings.
5. At through-wall expansion joints and at joints formed with back-to-back casing beads, back joints
with a moisture-resistant membrane.
6. Seal stucco terminations, accessory butt joints and penetrations with appropriate sealant, or backer
rod and sealant, as dictated by joint type.
C. Grade condition.
1. Do not install stucco below grade or on surfaces subject to continuous or intermittent water
immersion or hydrostatic pressure. Provide minimum 4 inch (100 mm) clearance above earth
grade, and minimum 2 inch (51 mm) clearance above paved surfaces. Provide increased
clearance in freeze/thaw climate zones.

092423-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092423 – PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO

D. Projecting architectural features.

1. Stucco shall not be installed on weather-exposed surfaces of less than 1:2 slope.
2. Projections shall be constructed of rigid expanded polystyrene (EPS) boards as indicated in
Section 072400 – Exterior Insulation and Finish System.
3. All projecting architectural features shall have a minimum 1:2 slope along their top surface. All
foam horizontal reveals must have a minimum 1:2 slope along their bottom surface to prevent
accumulation of ice/snow
4. Where projection exceeds 2 inches (51 mm) from the face of the wall plane, apply waterproof
membrane compliant with Section 076526 - Self-Adhering Sheet Flashing to the top surface of the
substrate.
5. Limit foam thickness to a maximum of 4 inches (102 mm).
6. Support all EPS boards with framing or other structural support
E. Joints and accessories.
1. Refer to drawings for general positioning of joints and accessories.
2. Provide two-piece expansion joints in the stucco assembly where building movement is anticipated:
a. At joints in the substrate or supporting construction.
b. Where the system is to be installed over dissimilar construction or substrates.
c. At changes in building height.
d. At floor lines, columns and cantilevered areas.
3. Provide one-piece expansion joints every 144 ft2 (13 m2) of stucco surface area. Position
expansion joints so as not to exceed length-to-width ratio of 2.5, with a maximum joint spacing of
18’ in any single direction.
a. Cut and wire-tie lath to the expansion joint accessory so lath is discontinuous at or beneath
the accessory.
b. Where casing bead is used back-to-back as the expansion joint, back the joint with a
moisture-resistant membrane.
4. Provide minimum 3/8 inch (9 mm) wide one-piece expansion joints where the system abuts
windows, doors and other through-wall penetrations.
5. Provide appropriate accessories and sealants at stucco system terminations and joints. Refer to
Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.
6. Provide horizontal channel reveal trim as specified and detailed in the construction drawings.
F. Fire Protection
1. Refer to Construction Types in drawings for fire-resistance-rated construction requirements.
G. Solid substrates (concrete and CMU).
1. Provide surface plane tolerance not to exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3.0 m).
2. Concrete masonry shall be open-texture units with flush joints.
3. Do not install air/moisture barrier materials over efflorescence, weak surface conditions, painted,
coated, non-absorbent, salt-contaminated, or any concrete or CMU substrate where adhesion is in
question. Proof-test adhesion to prepared poured-in-place or precast concrete surfaces and
impose a regimen of quality control tests to verify adhesion throughout the project.
H. Stucco thickness not including primer or textured finish coat.
1. Stucco thickness shall be uniform throughout the wall area, 3/4” - 7/8” (18-22 mm).
2. Stucco shall be applied in 2 coats, scratch and brown coat, to achieve the prescribed thickness.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Air/Moisture Barrier
1. The substrate shall include a vapor-permeable Air Barrier Sheet compliant with Section 072500 –
Weather Barriers, as indicated in the drawings.
B. Drainage Mat
1. As provided or recommended by the stucco system manufacturer.
2. Surface burning characteristics per ASTM E 84: flame spread less than 25, smoke developed less
than 450, Class A building material.
C. Stucco base
1. Stucco scratch and brown coat material in compliance with ASTM C 926 and manufactured or
recommended listed by the finish coat manufacturer.

092423-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092423 – PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO

2. Single-coat stucco material in compliance with ICC AC 11, listed by ICC ES, and manufactured or
recommended listed by the finish coat manufacturer.
D. Primer: alkaline-resistant primer for freshly placed (minimum 4 day old) stucco surfaces.
1. Resistant to alkaline surfaces with pH of 13 or less.
2. Surface burning characteristics per ASTM E 84: flame spread < 25, smoke developed < 450, Class
A building material.
3. VOC: less than 50 g/L.
E. Acrylic finish
1. Accelerated weathering per ASTM G 154: 2000 hours, no blistering, checking, cracking, crazing, or
other deleterious effects.
2. Water vapor permeability per ASTM E 96, Method B: > 30 perms [1722 ng/(Pa・s・m2)].
3. Surface burning per ASTM E 84: flame spread < 25, smoke developed < 450, Class A building
material.
4. VOC: less than 50 g/L.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data.
1. For each product, manufacturer's specifications, details, installation instructions and product data.
B. Code-compliance documents.
1. Weather barrier manufacturer’s code compliance report.
2. Stucco manufacturer’s code compliance report where ICC-listed one-coat stucco is used.
3. EPS board manufacturer's certificate of compliance with ASTM E 2430-05.
4. Where fire-resistance-rated construction types are applicable, submit weather barrier / drainage
mat manufacturer’s NFPA 285 assembly report or ICC ESR indicating compliance NFPA 285 for
use on applicable rated construction types.
5. Fastener manufacturer’s pull-out or withdrawal capacity testing for frame and solid substrates.
C. Warranty.
1. For each product, manufacturer's standard warranty documents.
D. Samples.
1. Submit to Architect of Record two samples of each finish coat color and texture combination,
minimum 12” x 12” on non-deforming substrate. Samples shall represent the typical full range of
color and texture for each type.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications.
1. A single manufacturer shall provide and install the work of this Section, and shall have a minimum
of twenty years experience manufacturing products in this section shall provide all products listed.
B. Installer qualifications.
1. Licensed, insured and engaged in application of Portland cement stucco for a minimum of three
years.
2. Employ skilled technicians who are experienced and knowledgeable in Portland cement stucco
application, and familiar with the requirements of the specified work.
3. Successful completion of minimum of three three projects of similar scope and complexity to the
specified project.
4. Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the job site to install the system in
compliance with the manufacturer’s published specifications and details and the project plans and
specifications.
C. Insulation board manufacturer requirements
1. All materials used shall be listed by an approved agency. Insulation board shall be manufactured
and labeled in conformance with the stucco manufacturer, the approved listing agency, and the
applicable building code.
D. Inspections
1. Provide independent third party inspection where required by code, contract documents or
manufacturer’s warranty.

092423-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092423 – PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO

2. Conduct inspections in accordance with code requirements and contract documents.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in their original sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name and identification of
product.
B. Protect EPS insulation materials: cover as required to avoid prolonged UV exposure, and keep away
from sources of heat, sparks, flame, flammable or volatile materials. Store on a clean, flat surface, off
the ground, in a dry area.
C. Protect coatings (pail products) from freezing and temperatures in excess of 90°F (32° C). Do not store
products exposed to direct sunlight.
D. Protect portland cement based materials (bag products) from moisture and humidity. Store under cover,
off the ground, in a dry location.
E. Handle all products as directed on labeling.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply stucco materials only during periods with ambient air temperatures above 40°F (4°C) during
application and for 24 hours after set of stucco, and after application of weather barrier and finish
materials.
B. For application of stucco materials during periods with ambient air temperatures less than 40°F (4°C),
provide supplementary heat for installation such that the required material temperatures are maintained.
Prevent concentration of heat, vent fumes and other products of combustion on uncured stucco.
C. Prevent uneven or excessive evaporation of moisture from stucco during hot, dry or windy weather. For
installation under any of these conditions provide special measures to properly moist-cure the stucco.
Do not install stucco if ambient temperatures are expected to rise above 100 deg. F (38oC) within a 24-
hour period.
D. Protect adjacent finish work by other trades from damage during stucco installation.
1.10 SCHEDULING / SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate fabrication, delivery, and installation with the general contractor and other applicable
trades.
B. Protect sheathing from climatic conditions to prevent weather damage until the installation of the
weather barrier.
C. Wherever water can enter the wall assembly, install diverter flashings to direct water to the exterior.
D. Coordinate installation of foundation waterproofing, roofing membrane, windows, doors and other wall
penetrations to provide a continuous weather barrier. Rough openings shall include weather barrier
wraps at all edges, and head and sill flashing prior to stucco work commencing. Notify the General
Contractor immediately if any of this work is incomplete or incorrect, and do not proceed with stucco
installation until corrected.
E. Weather barrier must be covered by exterior cladding system within 180 days.
F. Drainage mat must be covered by stucco cladding within 30 days of installation.
G. Commence the stucco installation only after completion of all floor, roof and other construction that
imposes dead loads on the walls to prevent excessive deflection (and potential cracking) of the
stucco.
H. Install copings and sealant immediately after installation of the stucco and when finish coatings are
dry.
I. Provide structural support to building structure for all elements penetrating the stucco system in order
to eliminate any load bearing on the stucco. Provide air-tight and water-tight sealants and backer
rods conforming to the requirements of Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.

092423-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092423 – PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO

1.11 WARRANTY
A. A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO
A. Manufacturers.
1. Sto Corporation; www.stocorp.com.
2. Parex USA, Inc.; www.parex.com.
3. Dryvit Systems, Inc.; www.dryvit.com.
4. Stuc-O-Flex International, Inc.; www.stucoflex.com
5. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
B. Scratch and brown coats: Portland cement stucco concentrate in compliance with ASTM C 926.
C. Primer: Acrylic-based primer/sealer for freshly placed (minimum 4 day old) and high-pH stucco
surfaces.
D. Finish coat: Integrally-colored, factory-blended, acrylic textured wall finish with graded marble
aggregate.
2.2 FOAM TRIM AND BUILD-OUTS
A. Foam insulation board for trim: Nominal 1.0 lb/ft3 (16 kg/m3) expanded polystyrene (EPS) boards in
compliance with ASTM C 578 Type I requirements, and ASTM E 2430.
B. Adhesive and base coat: as manufactured or recommended by the stucco manufacturer.
C. Reinforcing Mesh
1. General: Nominal 4.5 oz./yd2 (153 g/m2), symmetrical, interlaced open-weave glass fiber mesh
treated with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with portland cement materials to achieves
Standard Impact Classification over foam insulation board.
2. Detail areas: Nominal 4.2 oz/yd2 (143 g/m2), flexible, symmetrical, interlaced open-weave glass
fiber fabric treated with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with portland cement materials for
use as foam backwrapping and aesthetic detailing.
2.3 WEATHER BARRIER
A. As specified in Section 072500 – Weather Barriers.
B. As manufactured or recommended by the portland cement stucco system manufacturer.
1. Minimum No. 15 asphalt saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type 1, or one layer of Grade
D kraft building paper, or paper-backed stucco lath.
2.4 DRAINIAGE MEMEMBRANE
A. As manufactured or recommended by the portland cement stucco system manufacturer.
2.5 LATH
A. Minimum 2.5 lb./yd2 (1.4 kg/m2) self-furred galvanized steel diamond mesh metal lath in compliance
with ASTM C 847.
2.6 MECHANICAL FASTENERS
A. Non-corroding fasteners in compliance with AISI S200 – 2007 and ASTM C 1513.
1. Wood framing.
a. Minimum 11-gauge, 7/16 inch (11 mm) diameter head galvanized roofing nails with minimum
3/4 inch (19mm) penetration into studs.
b. Minimum #8 Type S wafer head fully threaded corrosion resistant screws with minimum 3/4
inch (19 mm) penetration into studs.
2. Steel framing: Minimum #8 Type S or S-12 wafer head fully threaded corrosion-resistant screws
with minimum 3/8 inch (10 mm) and three-thread penetration into studs.
3. Concrete or unit masonry: Minimum # 8 wafer head fully threaded corrosion-resistant screws for
masonry with minimum 1 inch (25 mm) penetration into substrate.

092423-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092423 – PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO

2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Weep screed, casing bead, corner bead, corner lath, expansion/control joint and similar edge and joint
accessories.
1. All accessories shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1063 and its referenced documents.
2. Where permitted by building code, PVC plastic in compliance with ASTM D 1784, cell classification
13244C.
3. Zinc in compliance with ASTM B 69.
4. Galvanized steel in compliance with ASTM A 653 with G60 coating.
B. Horizontal Channel reveal trim as specified and detailed in the construction drawings.
C. All accessories shall have perforated or expanded flanges and shall be designed with grounds for the
specified thickness of stucco.
2.8 SITE-MIXED INGREDIENTS
A. Water: clean and potable.
B. Sand: in compliance with ASTM C 897 or ASTM C 144, for use with one coat and ASTM C 926 stucco
concentrates

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MIXING
A. Mix all materials with a clean, rust-free electric drill and paddle to a uniform consistency. Do not thin
materials or dilute with water unless directed by the manufacturer.
B. Mix only as much material as can readily be used.
C. Do not add lime, anti-freeze compounds, or other additives to any of the materials unless directed by
the manufacturer. Where additives are permitted or recommended, use only those specified by the
manufacturer.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Report deviations from the requirements of project specifications or other conditions that might
adversely affect the air/moisture barrier or stucco installation to the General Contractor. Do not proceed
with weather barrier, insulation board, drainage mat or stucco installation until deviations are corrected.
B. Inspect substrate surfaces to receive finishes for the following and correct before proceeding with work.
1. Contamination: Algae, chalkiness, dirt, dust, efflorescence, form oil, fungus, grease, laitance,
mildew or other foreign substances.
2. Surface absorption and chalkiness.
3. Cracks: Measure crack width and record location of cracks.
4. Damage and deterioration.
5. Moisture damage: Record any areas of moisture damage.
C. Inspect sheathing application for compliance with applicable standards.
1. Glass mat-faced gypsum sheathing: ASTM C 1177 - refer to manufacturer’s instructions and/or
ICC evaluation report.
2. Exterior grade and exposure 1 wood-based sheathing: APA Engineered Wood Association E 30.
3. Wood-based sheathing must be gapped 1/8 inch (3mm) at edge and end joints to prevent cracking
in the stucco.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Concrete and concrete masonry (CMU).
1. Remove surface contamination such as oil, grease, dust, dirt, algae, mildew, salts, paint or
coatings. Correct weak surface conditions such as laitance. Use chemical cleaners such as TSP
(trisodium phosphate) detergent to remove oil and grease and rinse with potable water. Use
chemical cleaners to remove efflorescence or other surface contamination in accordance with
manufacturer’s written instructions. Use mechanical methods such as waterblasting, sandblasting,
and wire brushing to remove weak surface conditions.

092423-7 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092423 – PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO

2. Repair cracks up to 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide by raking with a sharp tool to remove loose, friable
material and blow clean with oil-free compressed air. Apply joint treatment material over crack,
embed reinforcement (where applicable), and smooth joint treatment material with a trowel, drywall
or putty knife to cover the reinforcement.
3. Remove projecting fins, ridges, and mortar by mechanical means.
4. Fill honeycombs, aggregate pockets, holes and other voids with the stucco manufacturer’s
patching material.
5. Where the surface is excessively “rough” or out of plane, skim coat the wall surface with the stucco
manufacturer’s base coat material to provide a smooth, level surface.
B. Sheathing.
1. Remove surface contaminants and replace damaged sheathing.
2. All sheathing must be handled and installed in compliance with applicable building code and/or
manufacturer requirements. Sheathing must be clean, dry and free from damage, frost, and all
bond-inhibiting materials. Abut gypsum sheathing joints. Gap wood sheathing 1/8 inch (3 mm) at
joints. Should gaps exceed 1/8 inch (3 mm) up to 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, use stucco
manufacturer’s joint filler to fill joints.
3. Spot-repair surface defects in sheathing with manufacturer’s recommended joint treatment.
3.4 WEATHER BARRIER
A. Refer to Section 072500 – Weather Barriers.
3.5 DRAINAGE MAT
A. Place drainage mat against the wall surface over the insulation and unroll horizontally with the fabric
facing out. Hammer-tack or staple into sheathing with corrosion-resistant fasteners. Use as few
fasteners as needed to hold the mat in place, starting from the bottom of the wall at base flashing or
weep screed and working up.
B. Do not fasten through flashing.
C. Shingle lap-fabric at horizontal courses. Shingle lap drainage mat over flashing at floor lines, decks, roof
lines, window heads, and other areas where flashing is required, to direct water to the exterior.
D. Butt ends of rolls and vertical seams.
E. Trim around windows, doors, vents, or other penetrations through the wall. Do not install behind window
nail flanges.
F. Immediately follow installation of drainage mat with stucco lath installation. Where stucco lath
installation will not immediately follow installation of drainage mat, use corrosion-resistant cap nails, cap
staples, or cap screws every 16 inches (406 mm) on center along framing for more secure attachment.
G. Cover drainage mat with stucco within 30 days of installation.
3.6 STUCCO SYSTEM
A. General.
1. Apply the stucco in discrete panels without interruption to avoid cold joints and differences in
appearance.
2. Abut wet stucco to set stucco at natural or architectural breaks in the wall such as expansion joints,
pilasters, terminations, or changes in plane.
3. Do not install stucco during extremely hot, dry and/or windy conditions.
4. Do not install stucco during freezing conditions or on frozen substrates.
5. Do not install stucco onto grounds of accessories. Completely embed lath and flanges of
accessories and completely cover fastener attachments with stucco.
6. Moist-cure stucco minimum 48 hours for optimum strength gain and resistance to cracking. Allow
final stucco application to completely dry (28 days) before applying primer or finish.
7. The finished installation must be true, plumb and square.
8. Should stucco get into control or expansion joints, remove the stucco from within the joint before
the stucco sets.
B. Weep screeds.

092423-8 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092423 – PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO

1. Install weep screeds in conjunction with flashing and weather barrier to facilitate shingle-lapping of
components at base of wall, soffits and openings as indicated in the drawings.
2. Install weep screed over solid substrate or framing with the appropriate fastener. Locate foundation
weep screed so that it overlaps the joint between the foundation and framing by a minimum of 1
inch (25mm).
3. Lap waterproof air barrier, sheet water-resistive barrier, and drainage mat over the weep screed
attachment flange.
C. Casing beads, reveals, and expansion joints.
1. Refer to drawings for aesthetic joint locations, and coordinate expansion joint placement to
minimize the requirement for additional or conflicting visible façade lines.
2. Install casing beads at stucco terminations: doors, windows and other through-wall penetrations.
3. Install two-piece expansion joints (or back-to-back casing beads) at building expansion joints,
through-wall joints in concrete or CMU, where the stucco is to be installed over dissimilar
construction or substrates, at changes in building height, at floor lines, columns, and cantilevered
areas. Install full accessory pieces where possible and avoid small pieces.
4. Seal adjoining pieces by embedding ends in sealant.
5. Abut horizontal into vertical joint accessories (except where horizontal movement joints exist that
prevent continuous vertical runs of accessories).
6. Attach at no more than 7 inches (178 mm) from edge of substrate/framing with appropriate
fasteners.
7. Air barrier and moisture protection must be continuous behind joints and accessories.
D. Lath.
1. Install metal lath in conformance with ASTM C 1063.
2. Install metal lath with the long dimension at right angles to structural framing (horizontally on solid
substrates).
3. Terminate lath at expansion joints. Do not install continuously at joints.
4. Overlap side seams minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) and end seams minimum 1 inch (25 mm). Stagger
end seams.
5. Do not install lath continuously beneath expansion joints. Overlap casing beads and expansion
joints minimum 1 inch (25 mm) over narrow wing accessories, minimum 2 inches (51 mm) over
expanded flange accessories.
6. Fasten securely into solid substrates or through sheathing into structural framing at 7 inches (178
mm) on center maximum vertically and 16 inches (406 mm) on center horizontally. Wire-tie at no
more than 9 inches (225mm) on center at side laps, accessory overlaps, and where end laps occur
between supports.
7. Paper-backed lath: Follow installation as for diamond mesh metal lath. Lap lath over lath, not paper
over lath. For horizontal overlaps the paper backing must shingle-lap behind the lath-to-lath
overlap.
E. One-piece expansion joints.
1. Install one-piece expansion joints at through-wall penetrations such as doors and windows, and
throughout the façade spaced as required to form panels no greater than 144 ft2 (13 m2).
2. Wire-tie one-piece expansion joints to lath at no more than 7 inches (178 mm) on center. Seal
adjoining pieces by embedding ends in sealant. Lath must be discontinuous at or beneath joints.
F. Inside and outside corners
1. Install corner lath at inside corners and corner bead at outside corners over lath.
2. Fasten through lath into solid substrate or framing at no more than 7 inches (178 mm) on center
with appropriate fasteners.
G. Stucco.
a. Scratch Coat: Apply stucco with sufficient pressure to key into and embed the metal lath.
Apply sufficient material, 3/8 or . inch (9 or 12 mm), to cover the metal lath and to permit
scoring the surface. Score the stucco upon completion of each panel in preparation for a
second coat. Score horizontally.
b. Brown Coat: As soon as the first coat is firm enough to receive the second coat without
damage, apply the second coat. Apply the second coat with sufficient pressure to ensure
intimate contact with the first coat and as needed to bring the stucco to a uniform thickness
that matches the grounds of the accessories. Use a rod or straight edge to bring the surface to

092423-9 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092423 – PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO

a true, even plane. Fill depressions in plane with stucco. Final thickness of stucco shall be
uniform throughout the wall area and shall be 7/8 inch (19 or 22 mm).
c. After the stucco has become slightly firm float the surface lightly to densify and smooth the
surface.
2. Moist cure after the stucco has set by lightly fogging for at least 48 hours. Fog as frequently as
required during the 48 hour period to prevent loss of moisture from the stucco. Avoid eroding the
stucco surface with excess moisture. If relative humidity exceeds 75% the frequency of moist
curing can be diminished.
H. Primer.
1. Apply primer evenly with brush, roller or proper spray equipment over the clean, dry stucco and
foam build-outs, and allow to dry.
2. Final age of primed stucco application must be minimum 7 days before application of finish.
I. Finish.
1. Apply finish only to primed stucco and foam build-outs.
2. Apply finish by spraying or troweling with a stainless steel trowel, depending on the finish specified.
3. Avoid application in direct sunlight.
4. Apply finish in a continuous application, and work a wet edge towards the unfinished wall area.
Work to an architectural break in the wall before stopping to avoid cold joints.
5. Adjust work schedule to conform to temperature and humidity requirements of the stucco finish
manufacturer to ensure the highest-possible finish quality.
6. Do not install separate batches of finish side-by-side.
7. Do not apply finish into or over sealant joints.
8. Apply finish to outside face of wall only.
9. Extend finish onto all surfaces of reveal trims, unless noted otherwise in the construction drawings.
10. Do not apply finish over irregular or unprepared surfaces, or surfaces not in compliance with the
requirements of the project specifications.
11. Do not install finish over high pH (> 10) stucco surfaces or surfaces that have not been fully cured.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them.
B. Protect completed and in-progress work from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and continuous high
humidity until fully dry.
C. Provide sealant and backer material at stucco terminations and at fixture penetrations through the
stucco to protect against air, water and insect infiltration.
D. Provide weeps at floor lines, window and door heads, and other areas to conduct water to the exterior.
3.8 CLEANING, REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
A. Prior to final occupancy by the Owner, clean and maintain the stucco finish for a fresh appearance and
to prevent water entry into and behind the stucco.
B. Repair cracks, impact damage, spalls or delamination promptly.
C. Maintain adjacent components of construction such as sealants, windows, doors, and flashing, to
prevent water entry into the wall assembly.

END OF SECTION

092423-10 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Gypsum soffit board.
B. Related Sections:
1. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: Wood framing.
2. 072117 – Fibrous Insulation.
3. 092200 – Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Support framing for gypsum board; tolerance
requirements.
4. 092843 – Gypsum Sheathing.
5. 093013 – Porcelain Tiling: Finish materials; tile backer board.
6. 098100 – Acoustic Insulation.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction.
2. C557 - Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing.
3. C931 - Standard Specification for Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board.
4. C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board.
5. C1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing
6. C1278 - Specification for Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Panels.
7. C1395 - Specification for Gypsum Ceiling Board
8. C1396 - Specification for Gypsum Board
9. D3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber
B. Gypsum Association (GA):
1. GA-214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.
2. GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
C. Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau (NWCB): LFGB-398 - Recommended Levels for Finishing of
Gypsum Board.
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 752 - Standard for Bullet Resisting Equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Submit complete manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each of the
materials used.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with GA 216, unless specified otherwise, or required otherwise to meet
fire rating requirements.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated and specified. Assemblies shall be
approved by the local jurisdictional authorities.
2. Fire rating requirements take precedence over the construction requirements indicated. In the
event of conflict, notify the Architect, and do not begin construction in the area of conflict until the
conflict has been resolved.

092900-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A. Furnish boards of maximum permissible length for type of installation indicated, tapered edge for
boards to be exposed, taped and finished; square edge for boards in concealed applications; 5/8 inch
thick unless noted or specified otherwise; furnish type X for fire rated partitions.
B. Types:
1. Standard gypsum board
a. Installed at all interior surfaces not designated for water resistant gypsum board.
b. Manufactured in accordance with ASTM C1396; 5/8 inch thickness unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Water resistant gypsum board
a. Installed at all wall and ceiling surfaces to receive gypsum board in:
1) Restrooms.
2) Plumbing Rooms and Janitors Closets.
3) Lounge walls in contact with Kitchenette counter.
4) Walls to which drinking fountains are attached and adjacent within 1’-0”.
b. Manufactured in accordance with ASTM C1396; 5/8 inch thickness unless otherwise
indicated.
c. Shall be easily identifiable by a paper facing color different from other gypsum board
products installed at the project.
3. 3/4 inch Fire Rated Board: Type IP-X3; USG "Sheetrock"; "Ultracode" core.
4. Ceiling Board: ASTM C1395; sag resistant.
5. Abuse Resistant Board: ASTM C1278; USG Corporation "Fiberock VHI Gypsum Fiber Panels";
5/8 inch thickness.
6. Abuse Resistant Board: ASTM C1278; USG Corporation "Fiberock Aqua-Tough Interior Panels";
5/8 inch thickness; Type X; surfaces shall be resistant to mold and mildew growth; score of 10
when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Security Panel: Ballistic panel composed of multiple layers of woven roving ballistic grade fiberglass
cloth impregnated with a thermoset polyester resin and molded into flat rigid sheets. The production
technique and materials used shall provide the controlled internal delamination to permit the
encapture of a penetrating projectile, as necessary for Level 2 protection in accordance with UL 752;
one of the following.
1. Safeguard Security Services Inc. (512-661-8306) "Armortex O.F.200."
2. C.R. Laurence Co, Inc. (Los Angeles CA; 800-421-6144) "BRF200 Bullet Resistant Fiberglass
Panels."
3. Waco Composites Inc. (Waco TX; 254-776-8880; www.armorcore.com) "Armorcore."
B. Adhesive for laminated construction: ASTM C557, unless recommended otherwise by the gypsum
board manufacturer.
C. Interior Gypsum Trim:
1. Conform to GA 216, unless indicated or specified otherwise.
2. Concealed flange crimp-on or tape-on type; metal or PVC at Contractor's option.
3. Control Joint Trim: USG 093 or approved.
4. Reveal Moldings: Fry Reglet Co., Pittcon Industries, Inc., Gordon Inc, or approved; aluminum
extrusions with taping flanges; shapes as indicated.
D. Joint Tapes:
1. Standard: ASTM C475 and GA 216.
2. Mesh Tape for Water Resistant Backing Board: 2-1/2 inch wide glass fiber tape; 10x10 mesh;
self adhesive type.
E. Joint Compound, Tape, and Finishing Compound: ASTM C475; furnish setting type joint compound
for use at water resistant board.
1. Typical: USG "SHEETROCK Brand Taping, All-Purpose, and/or Topping Compound," or
approved.

092900-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

2. Setting Type: USG "SHEETROCK Brand Easy Sand Setting-Type Joint Compound," or
approved.
F. Screws: ASTM C1002.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 216, and fire rated assembly requirements.
B. Erect wallboard so that edges and corners are firmly supported.
C. Use screws to fasten gypsum board to metal furring or framing. Adhesive application of gypsum
board may be used if it is in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and meets fire
rating requirements.
D. Double Layer Applications:
1. Use backing board or standard board for first layer.
2. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.
E. Security Panel: Trim to extend to floor and intersections with adjacent partitions and other
construction as detailed; install into partition prior to covering with gypsum board.
1. Incorporate into partition to minimum height of 8'-0" AFF at partitions indicated for protection.
Shim as necessary above panels to maintain plane of finish. Secure to framing with adhesive,
mastic, or screws unless noted otherwise.
2. Extend panels into metal door and window frames, and as necessary to maintain bullet-resistant
rating at all penetrations.
3. Install shims as necessary to maintain finish plane at portions of the wall where ballistic security
is not required.
F. Trim:
1. Use longest practical lengths, with no piece less than 2 feet long for continuous runs greater than
8 feet. Securely fasten and align trim ends at joints.
2. Place concealed flange corner beads at external corners. At angles other than 90 degrees, bend
the flange to conform to the angle.
3. Place concealed flange type L trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
4. Use J trim at exposed gypsum board edges and at joints where sealant is indicated.
G. Allow a 1/2 inch gap where gypsum board extends to overhead structure and deflection provisions are
incorporated into lightgage metal framing. Do not fasten gypsum board to top runner.
H. Sealant Joints:
1. Coordinate installation of firestopping and sealants at concealed joints between partitions and
structure at fire rated and acoustically insulated partitions.
2. Where sealant joints are indicated at ends or edges of wallboard, install for uniform 1/8 inch joint,
unless otherwise indicated. Installation of sealant in exposed locations is specified in Section
079200.
I. Provide water resistant gypsum board at walls in restrooms, toilets, janitor closets and other areas
subject to similar damp conditions.
J. Install required number of layers of wallboard behind panel boards, fire extinguisher cabinets, and
other recessed elements as necessary to maintain fire rating of walls.

092900-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

3.3 CONTROL JOINTS

A. Discontinue gypsum board and use control joint trim at control joints.
B. Coordinate with the framing installer to ensure that framing is installed immediately on either side of
each control joint.
C. Space control joints as indicated. When not indicated, locate as follows:
1. At maximum 30 foot intervals along continuous wall planes.
2. At maximum 50 foot intervals at continuous ceilings with perimeter relief.
3. At maximum 30 foot intervals at continuous ceilings without perimeter relief.
4. At locations where expansion or control joints occur in the building structure.
5. Locate control joints to form rectangular or square sections, in "L," "U," "T," or other irregularly
shaped areas.
6. Position control joints to intersect light fixtures, air diffusers, door openings, and other areas of
stress concentration.
7. Coordinate with Section 092200 for special requirements at fire rated assemblies.
D. Verify location with the Architect prior to installation. Give the Architect a minimum of 48 hours notice.
3.4 FINISHING
A. Provide finishing in accordance with GA 214.
B. Where necessary to sand, do so without damaging the face of the gypsum board.
C. Levels of Finish:
1. Level 5: Provide at the following locations:
a. Surfaces perpendicular and adjacent to or near (within 24 inches of) exterior windows, and
surface mounted light fixtures.
b. Surfaces to receive deep tone colors and/or semi-gloss or gloss finishes.
2. Level 4: Typical, unless indicated or specified otherwise.
3. Level 3: Provide at the following locations:
a. Surfaces to receive vinyl wall covering.
4. Level 2: Provide at the following locations:
a. Storage rooms.
b. Mechanical rooms.
c. Janitors closets.
d. Surfaces to receive tile or other thick finish materials applied to gypsum board surfaces.
5. Level 1: Provide at the following locations:
a. Surfaces of fire rated assemblies concealed from view in the finished work (“fire-taping”).
b. Surfaces of acoustical assemblies concealed form view in the finished work
D. Level 4 and 5 finishes: Return to the site after primer is applied, and touch-up surface defects.
E. Proprietary skim coat material may be used in lieu of joint compound as skim coat at surfaces
indicated for Level 5 finish.
F. Level 5 Finish Requirements.
1. Surfaces scheduled for Level 5 finishes shall be free of visible eye-catching discrepancies and/or
blemishes from a normal viewing distance under lighting conditions equal to daylight and artificial
light condition for each surface.
a. Proprietary skim coat material, applied at a rate of 100 to 125 sf per gallon, may be used in
lieu of joint compound as skim coat at surfaces indicated for Level 5 finish.
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Install gypsum board with 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum variation from plane in any direction.

END OF SECTION

092900-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 093100 – THIN-SET TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Ceramic, porcelain, glass and natural stone tile for interior finish applications.
B. Trim tile and accessories.
C. Non-tile trim and accessories, including metal level and material transition trims installed as part of tile
installations.
D. Tile adhesives.
E. Grout.
F. Grout sealer.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
C. 079200 – Sealants
D. 092900 – Gypsum Board
E. 096500 – Resilient Flooring
F. 096813 – Tile Carpeting
G. 102801 – Toilet and Utility Room Accessories
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 – American National Specifications for the Installation of
Ceramic Tile; American National Standards Institute; current edition.
B. TCNA (HB) – Handbook for Porcelain Tile Installation; Tile Council of North America, Inc.; current
edition.
C. USGBC LEED-NC – LEED Green Building Rating System for New Construction and Major
Renovations; U.S. Green Building Council; current edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: For each type of each product, provide manufacturers' data sheets. Include instructions
for using grouts and adhesives.
C. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal
methods, and polishes and waxes.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient and substrate minimum temperature of 50 degrees F and maximum of 90 degrees F
during installation of mortar materials.
B. For ambient temperatures above 70 degrees F, do not spread more grout than can be cleaned within
30 minutes of the grout firming.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish 10% attic stock; coordinate with manufacturer for delivery.

093100-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 093100 – THIN-SET TILING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Emser Tile Inc.; refer to drawings for contact information; www.emser.com.
B. Stone Source; refer to drawings for contact information; www.stonesource.com.
C. Custom Building Products; www.custombuildingproducts.com.
D. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Tile, grout, grout sealer, and other accessories and trim as indicated in the Drawings:
1. Interior Finish Materials Schedule.
2. Floor Transition Types details.
3. Flooring Transition Finishes Schedule.
4. Anti-Crack Membrane: Custom Building Products Crack Buster crack prevention underlayment.
2.3 ADHESIVE MATERIALS
A. Thin-set adhesive: ANSI A118.4 or A118.15 Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and adjoining construction, and conditions under which tile work shall be
installed.
1. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units, and
similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.
2. Surfaces to receive tile shall be plumb, level, and true with square corners. Maximum variation
from proper planes shall be:
a. Sub-floor Surfaces: 1/8” (3 mm) in 10’-0” (3000 mm).
b. Vertical Surfaces: 1/8” (3 mm) in 8’-0” (2400 mm).
3. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing
compounds.
4. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture and
alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer
and setting materials manufacturer.
a. Moisture content: Measure moisture content of surfaces using and electronic moisture
meter. Do not apply tile unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following
maximums:
1) Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
2) Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
3) Interior Wood: 15 percent.
b. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours when tested using
calcium chloride moisture kit for 72 hours.
c. Alkalinity: pH range of 7-9.
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of installation
constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces during work of this Section.
B. Prepare substrates to receive tile:
1. Grind or fill concrete substrates as needed to comply with TCNA allowable variations.
2. At locations where concrete has been sealed or otherwise finished, scarify concrete substrates
with rotary grinder as may be needed to completely remove curing compounds or other
substances that would interfere with tile adhesive. Rinse with water to remove grinding laitance
and maintain substrate in a damp condition for application of bond coat and tile.

093100-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 093100 – THIN-SET TILING

3. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with leveling and patching compound according to tile
adhesive manufacturer’s instructions. Use product specifically recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer.
4. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
5. Gypsum board wall surface shall be in proper condition and installed to allow for proper
alignment of tile. Screw heads under areas to receive tile applied over water-resistant gypsum
board shall not be treated with joint compound prior to tile adhesive application.
C. Preparatory treatments of substrates shall be in compliance with adhesive manufacturer
recommendations.
D. Blending:
1. For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that tile
has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range
of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.
2. If not factory blended, blend tiles on-site before installing, such that the range of color and pattern
variation is distributed evenly throughout the job.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of each material, ANSI A108.1 through
A108.13, and TCNA requirements. Tile installation shall comply with requirements as set forth in
TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
a. Slabs-On-Grade: Thin set; TCNA F113, dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, with
standard grout.
b. Structure-Supported Slabs: Thin set; TCNA F122, dry-set or latex-portland cement bond
coat, with standard grout.
c. Walls- Dry Areas: Thin set over water-resistant gypsum board; TCNA W242, dry-set or
latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout.
2. Coordinate setting of tile with installation of accessory items to provide neat installation with
minimum cutting and symmetrical conditions wherever possible. Perform cutting and drilling
without marring visible surfaces.
3. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a complete
covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown.
4. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint
alignments.
5. Accurately form intersections and returns. Carefully grind edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built
in items. Fit tile closely to outlets, piping and other penetration so that plates, collars, or covers
overlap tile.
6. Jointing Pattern:
a. Lay tile to pattern indicated in the drawings, with the pattern starting at the indicated start
points.
b. Layout tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area.
Adjust to minimize tile cutting to avoid tiles less than one half size.
c. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
d. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls and trim are same size, or when
regular alignment is otherwise possible.
e. Provide uniform joint widths as recommended by tile manufacturer.
7. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases
neatly. Align floor joints with penetration centerlines.
8. Set tile to integrated joint spacer that ensures a uniform joint of 3/16”, subject to variation in tile
size tolerance.
9. Maintain minimum of 2/3 of joint depth open for grouting.
10. Average tile contact area with adhesive shall be not less than 80%.
11. Install trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
12. Where tile abuts softer flooring materials, provide metal transition strip as specified in the
drawings to help prevent edge chipping caused by impact.
13. Solidly embed tiles in adhesive so that the top of tiles and transition strips are flush.

093100-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 093100 – THIN-SET TILING

14. A certain amount of lippage is unavoidable with thin-set applications; however, maximum
variation between individual tile units shall be no more than 1/32” (0.8 mm).
15. Stone tiles for each room shall be selected to harmonize in color, vein patterns, and physical
characteristics. Abrupt and unsightly variations shall not be acceptable. Set stone tile with veining
organized in a consistent pattern as approved by Architect.
16. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
17. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
B. THIN-SET TILE ADHESIVE
1. Dampen surface to receive tile units if very dry; do not saturate.
2. Set tile units before skinning occurs. If skinning does occur, scrape off and replace with fresh
adhesive.
C. TRANSITION STRIPS
1. Install metal flooring transitions as indicated in the drawings. Where flooring level change
exceeds the transition dimension indicated in the drawings, request Architect of Record to
provide additional direction in order to maintain accessibility compliance.
2. Trowel thin set mortar over area where flooring transition shall be placed.
3. Press perforated anchoring leg of profile into mortar and align.
4. Trowel additional adhesive over perforated anchoring leg to ensure full coverage and support of
tile edges.
D. CRACK PREVENTION MEMBRANE
1. Install crack prevention membrane throughout all floor areas to receive tile per manufacturer’s
direction.
2. Prepare surfaces as directed, including priming if required.
3. If tile will not be set immediately after curing, protect the application from heavy traffic damages
directed by manufacturer.
E. GROUT
1. Fill joints with grout. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. Install grout to comply with
ANSI A108.10
2. Do not use sanded grout or add sand to grout when grouting polished stone, agglomerates, and
ceramic tiles with soft glazes. Check manufacturer’s literature and test grout on a separate
sample area prior to grouting.
3. Tile shall be firmly set before grouting, allow a minimum of 48 hours.
4. Remove tile adhesive from faces and edges of tile prior to applying grout.
5. Grout joints shall be compacted and free of voids and gaps. Joints shall be filled with grout
material a minimum of 2/3 thickness of tile. Grout joints shall be watertight, without voids, cracks,
excess mortar, or excess grout. Finished joint shall be uniform in color, smooth, without pinholes
or low spots.
6. Clean joints and wipe smudges from tile face with a damp towel.
7. Curing:
a. Follow grout manufacturer’s instructions for curing polymer modified tile grout.
b. Moisture cure portland cement grout for a minimum of 72 hours or as required to sufficiently
hydrate cement.
c. Shade curing grout areas completely from direct or glass-filtered sunlight to prevent rapid
evaporation.
F. GROUT SEALER
1. Allow grout to cure for 72 hours prior to sealer application.
2. Clean tile and grout surface free of waxes, sealers and finishes, and allow to thoroughly dry.
3. Apply sealer per manufacturer’s instructions.
3.4 CLEANING
1. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer’s written
instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by
tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing
on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures
from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

093100-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 093100 – THIN-SET TILING

3. Close and tightly seal partly used adhesive containers and store protected in well-ventilated fire-
safe area at moderate temperature.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Close tiled areas to traffic of any type until setting and grouting materials have cured to
manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Protect walls from impact, vibrations and heavy hammering on adjacent and opposite walls for at least
14 days following installation.
C. Apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors when recommended by tile
manufacturer.
D. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to
prevent staining, damage, and wear.
E. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

END OF SECTION

093100-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B. Acoustical panel units.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 079200 – Joint Sealants: Acoustical sealant.
C. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: - Air diffusion devices in ceiling.
D. Division 26 – Electrical: Light fixtures and speakers in ceiling system.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2004.
B. ASTM C636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical
Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2006.
C. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 1998 (Reapproved 2005).
D. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components.
C. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating material and finish of each acoustical
panel unit.
D. Samples: Submit two samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross
runner, and perimeter molding.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistive Assemblies: Complete assembly listed and classified by UL for the fire resistance
indicated.
B. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this section with minimum 5 years experience.
C. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum 5 years experience.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior
to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat
is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and
approved.
B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. See Section 016000 for additional provisions.

095113-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

B. Furnish 10 percent of total acoustical unit area of each type of acoustical unit for Owner's use in
maintenance of project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Manufacturer: refer to drawings.
B. Acoustical Units
1. General: ASTM E 1264, Class A.
2. Units for Installation in Fire-Rated Suspension System: Listed and classified for the fire-resistive
assembly the suspension system is a part of.
3. Type ACT-1 Acoustical Panels: Plastic faced mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type IV, as specified
on the drawings.
4. Type ACT-2 Acoustical Panels: Plastic faced mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type IV, as specified
on the drawings.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)
A. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer
bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required.
B. Type ACT-1: not used.
C. Type ACT-2: non-customer areas.
1. Refer to drawings for product manufacturer, model, and finish.
2. Fire-rated exposed steel suspension system: formed galvanized steel, commercial quality cold
rolled; Intermediate-duty.
3. 24” x 24” flat acoustical panel in fully exposed 9/16” tee grid.
D. Type ACT-4: customer areas.
1. Refer to drawings for product manufacturer, model, and finish.
2. Fire-rated exposed steel suspension system: formed galvanized steel, commercial quality cold
rolled; Intermediate-duty.
3. 48” x 48” and 4” x 48” beveled-edge flat acoustical panels in fully exposed 9/16” bolt slot tee grid
set in an alternating 48” and 4” linear pattern with continuous mechanical units and light fixtures
in the 4” channels.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling
system flatness requirement specified.
B. Perimeter Moldings:
1. Same material and finish as grid provide matching profile molding for system at same elevation
as face of grid.
C. Integral roller shade housings:
1. Fabricated of extruded Aluminum by the ceiling grid manufacturer, in configurations and sizes as
indicated in the drawings.
2. Finish to match the grid.
D. Metal channel panels
E. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

095113-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

3.2 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636 and manufacturer's instructions and as
supplemented in this section.
B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum
deflection of 1:360.
C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying
members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest
affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to
exceed deflection capability.
G. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support
components independently.
H. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
I. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other
interruptions.
1. Use longest practical lengths.
2. Miter corners.
3.3 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and
function.
C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F. Cutting Acoustical Units: Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. Paint exposed cut
surfaces to match face color.
G. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.
H. Install hold-down clips on each panel to retain panels tight to grid system; comply with fire rating
requirements.
I. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 feet of an exterior door.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION

095113-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT WALL BASE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient wall base.
B. Resilient wall base installation materials.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. 096516 – Resilient Vinyl Sheet Flooring
B. 096520 – Resilient Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring
C. 096813 – Tile Carpeting
D. 093100 – Thin-Set Tiling
E. 099100 – Paints
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM E 84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ;
current edition.
2. ASTM F 137, Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials; current
edition.
3. ASTM E 648, Standard Test method for Critical Radiant Flux; current edition.
4. ASTM F 1515, Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Flooring; current
edition.
5. ASTM F 1861, Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base, Type TP (thermoplastic rubber)
or Type TV (thermoplastic vinyl); current edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan. Include product schedule with designations indicated on
drawings.
1. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 12 inch length, illustrating profile and color, for each
resilient wall base product specified.
D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and
suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications.
1. Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with minimum 5 years of
experience.
2. Employs skilled workers who install products similar to those required for this Project and
whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warranty the installed materials against manufacturing defects for 2 years.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55
deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).

096513-1
 CHASE
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT WALL BASE

B. Store roll materials as directed by manufacturer to avoid damage.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
B. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by Johnsonite, but not less than 65 deg F
(18 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products during installation
and for 48 hours before and after installation.
C. Maintain the ambient relative humidity between 40% and 60% during installation.
D. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
Johnsonite, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Manufacturer: Johnsonite, Inc., Chagrin Falls, Ohio; www.johnsonite.com.
1. Wall base for carpet, thin-set tile, and similar flooring.
a. Johnsonite Tightlock, 4.5” wedge-shaped vinyl wall base.
b. Color as indicated on drawings.
c. Optionally include manufacturer’s pre-formed corners.
2. Wall base for vinyl sheet, VCT, and similar flooring.
a. Johnsonite Tightlock, 4.5” wedge-shaped vinyl wall base.
b. Color as indicated on drawings.
c. Optionally include manufacturer’s pre-formed corners.
3. Wall base for painted or sealed concrete flooring.
a. Johnsonite Traditional, 4” flat vinyl wall base with integral cove.
b. Color as indicated on drawings.
c. Optionally include manufacturer’s pre-formed corners.
B. Physical and performance characteristics.
1. Meets performance requirements for ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall
Base, Type TP (thermoplastic rubber) or Type TV (thermoplastic vinyl), Group 1.
2. ASTM E 648, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts/cm2 or greater,
Class I.
3. ASTM E 84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials,
Class A, Smoke <450.
4. Flexibility: Does not crack, break, or show any signs of fatigue when bent around a 1 1/4"
diameter cylinder when tested according to ASTM F 137 Standard Test Method for Flexibility of
Resilient Flooring Materials protocols.
5. Color Stability: Meets or exceeds ASTM F 1861 requirements for color stability when tested to
ASTM F 1515 Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Flooring
protocols.
C. Substitutions: not permitted.
D. Color and pattern: refer to drawings. If not specified, refer to Submittals section above.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Leveling and patching compound: Trowelable latex-modified, Portland-cement-based formulation.
B. Adhesives: as recommended by manufacturer for specific site conditions and substrates.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Base manufacturer’s preformed corners (optional).

096513-2
 CHASE
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT WALL BASE

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture
content and other conditions affecting performance of the work.
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other
Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that
might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient
wall base.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and
remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48
hours in advance of installation.
D. Vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.
3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent
pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. Preformed corners: Where manufacturer’s pre-formed corners are utilized, install preformed corners
before installing straight pieces.
G. Job-formed corners:
1. Form corners by following manufacturer’s included instructions.
2. Outside corners: Form by bending without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
3. Inside corners: Butt one piece to corner then scribe next piece to fit.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION

096513-3
 CHASE
SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT VINYL SHEET FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient sheet flooring.
B. Resilient flooring installation materials.
C. Resilient flooring accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. 096513 – Resilient Wall Base
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM F 1913 Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing, current
edition.
2. ASTM D 2047, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated
Flooring, current edition.
3. ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit, current edition.
4. ASTM E 648, Standard Test method for Critical Radiant Flux, current edition.
5. ASTM F710, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;
current edition.
6. ASTM F 2170, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor
Slabs Using in situ Probes, current edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan. Include product schedule with designations indicated on
drawings.
D. Samples.
1. Samples for Initial Selection, if required or color / pattern not indicated in drawings: For each
type of product indicated.
2. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for
each resilient flooring product specified.
E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and
suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications.
1. Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with minimum 5 years of
experience.
2. Employs skilled workers who install products similar to those required for this Project and
whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warranty the installed materials against manufacturing defects for 5 years.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55
deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).

096516-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT VINYL SHEET FLOORING

B. Store roll materials as directed by manufacturer to avoid damage.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
B. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by Johnsonite, but not less than 65 deg F
(18 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products during installation
and for 48 hours before and after installation.
C. Maintain the ambient relative humidity between 40% and 60% during installation.
D. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
Johnsonite, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HOMOGENOUS VINYL SHEET FLOORING
A. Basis of Design product: Targett Johnsonite Contract Plus, www.johnsonite.com.
1. Complies with requirements for ASTM F 1913 Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor
Covering Without Backing
2. Non-directional pattern
3. Reinforced wear layer
4. Roll/Sheet Width: 6' 6" (2 m).
5. Wear layer/Overall thickness: .080" (2.0 mm)
6. ASTM D 2047, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring
of 0.6 or greater
7. ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit – 250 PSI
8. ASTM E 648, Standard Test method for Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts/cm2 or greater,
Class I
B. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
C. Color and pattern: refer to drawings. If not specified, refer to Submittals section above.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Subfloor Filler: Trowelable leveling and patching compound; latex-modified, Portland-cement-based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation.
B. Adhesives: as recommended by manufacturer for specific site conditions and substrates.
C. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Wall base: Resilient vinyl base: refer to Section 096513 – Resilient Wall Base.
B. Transition strips, risers, and similar accessories: refer to drawings.
C. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might
telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other
chemicals that might interfere with bonding of athletic flooring to substrate.
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work
and are ready to receive resilient flooring.
C. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are
dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

096516-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT VINYL SHEET FLOORING

D. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.
E. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for
moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following
limits:
1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours when tested using
calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours.
2. Alkalinity: pH range of 7-9.
F. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer’s written instruction to ensure adhesion of resilient
sheet flooring.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate paint, coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives or
contain soap, wax, oil, solvents, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Mechanically remove contamination on the substrate that may cause damage to the resilient
flooring material. Permanent and non-permanent markers, pens, crayons, paint, etc., must not
be used to write on the back of the flooring material or used to mark the substrate as they could
bleed through and stain the flooring material.
4. Prepare Substrates according to ASTM F 710 including the following:
a. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation
only after substrates pass testing.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Must not exceed 80%.
c. A pH test for alkalinity must be conducted. Results should range between 7 and 9. If the test
results are not within the acceptable range of 7 to 9, the installation must not proceed until
the problem has been corrected.
d. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
5. Wood subfloors must have a minimum 18" (45.7 cm) of cross-ventilated space beneath the
bottom of the joist.
a. The floor must be rigid, free of movement.
b. Single wood and tongue and groove subfloors should be covered with ¼" (6.4 mm) or ½"
(12.7 mm) APA approved underlayment plywood.
1) Use ¼" (6.4 mm) thick underlayment panels for boards with a face width of 3" (76 mm)
or less.
2) Use ½" (12.7 mm) thick underlayment panels for boards with a face width wider than 3"
(76 mm).
c. Do not install over OSB (Oriented Strand Board), particle board, chipboard, lauan or
composite type underlayments.
B. Fill cracks, holes, depressions and irregularities in the substrate with good quality Portland cement
based underlayment leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a
uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Floor covering shall not be installed over expansion joints.
D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.

096516-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT VINYL SHEET FLOORING

C. Install with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive specified for the site conditions and follow
adhesive label for proper use.
D. Install rolls in sequential order following roll numbers on the labels.
E. Reverse sheets unless instructed otherwise in manufacturer’s installation instructions.
F. Roll the flooring in both directions using a 100 pound three-section roller.
G. Fit joints tightly.
H. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
I. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color is different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring
under centerline of door.
J. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated.
K. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight
joints.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
1. No traffic for 24 hours after installation.
2. No heavy traffic, rolling loads, or furniture placement for 72 hours after installation.
D. Wait 72 hours after installation before performing initial cleaning.

END OF SECTION

096516-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 096520 - RESILIENT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient vinyl composition tile flooring.
B. Resilient flooring installation materials.
C. Resilient flooring accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. 096513 – Resilient Wall Base
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM E 648, Standard Test method for Critical Radiant Flux; current edition.
2. ASTM F 710, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;
current edition.
3. ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit; current edition.
4. ASTM F 1066, Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; current edition.
5. ASTM F 1869, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete
Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; current edition.
6. ASTM F 2170, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor
Slabs Using in situ Probes, current edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan. Include product schedule with designations indicated on
drawings.
D. Samples.
1. Samples for Initial Selection, if required or color / pattern not indicated in drawings: For each
type of product indicated.
2. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for
each resilient flooring product specified.
E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and
suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications.
1. Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with minimum 5 years of
experience.
2. Employs skilled workers who install products similar to those required for this Project and
whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warranty the installed materials against manufacturing defects for 10 years.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55
deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).
B. Store roll materials as directed by manufacturer to avoid damage.

096520-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 096520 - RESILIENT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
B. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by Johnsonite, but not less than 65 deg F
(18 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products during installation
and for 48 hours before and after installation.
C. Maintain the ambient relative humidity between 40% and 60% during installation.
D. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
Johnsonite, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING
A. Basis of Design products.
1. Targett Johnsonite Textile, www.johnsonite.com.
a. Complies with requirements for ASTM F 1066, Class 2 (Through Pattern) Standard
Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile.
b. Wear layer/Overall thickness: 1/8" (3.2 mm).
c. Tile sizes: 12" x 12" (30.5 cm x 30.5 cm) and 12" x 24" (30.5 cm x 61 cm) .
d. Slip Resistance: ADA Compliant.
e. ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit – 150 PSI.
f. ASTM E 648, Standard Test method for Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts/cm2 or greater,
Class I.
2. Targett Johnsonite Azrock VCT, Solids, and Feature Strips, www.johnsonite.com.
a. Complies with requirements for ASTM F 1066 Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition
Floor Tile, Class 1 (Solid Color) and Class 2 (Through Pattern).
b. Wear layer/Overall thickness: 1/8" (3.2 mm).
c. Tile sizes: 12" x 12" (30.5 cm x 30.5 cm)
d. Slip Resistance: ADA Compliant.
e. ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit – 150 PSI.
f. ASTM E 648, Standard Test method for Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts/cm2 or greater,
Class I.
B. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
C. Color and pattern: refer to drawings. If not specified, refer to Submittals section above.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Subfloor Filler: Trowelable leveling and patching compound; latex-modified, Portland-cement-based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation.
B. Adhesives: as recommended by manufacturer for specific site conditions and substrates.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Wall base: Resilient vinyl base: refer to Section 096513 – Resilient Wall Base.
B. Transition strips, risers, and similar accessories: refer to drawings.
C. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might
telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other
chemicals that might interfere with bonding of athletic flooring to substrate.

096520-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 096520 - RESILIENT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING

B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work
and are ready to receive resilient flooring.
C. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are
dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
D. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.
E. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for
moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following
limits:
1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours when tested using
calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours.
2. Alkalinity: pH range of 7-9.
F. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer’s written instruction to ensure adhesion of resilient
sheet flooring.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate paint, coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives or
contain soap, wax, oil, solvents, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Mechanically remove contamination on the substrate that may cause damage to the resilient
flooring material. Permanent and non-permanent markers, pens, crayons, paint, etc., must not
be used to write on the back of the flooring material or used to mark the substrate as they could
bleed through and stain the flooring material.
4. Prepare Substrates according to ASTM F 710 including the following:
a. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation
only after substrates pass testing.
1) Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Results must not exceed 5
lbs. Moisture Vapor Emission Rate per 1,000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
2) Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Must not exceed
80%.
b. A pH test for alkalinity must be conducted. Results should range between 7 and 9. If the test
results are not within the acceptable range of 7 to 9, the installation must not proceed until
the problem has been corrected.
c. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
5. Wood subfloors must have a minimum 18" (45.7 cm) of cross-ventilated space beneath the
bottom of the joist.
a. The floor must be rigid, free of movement.
b. Single wood and tongue and groove subfloors should be covered with ¼" (6.4 mm) or ½"
(12.7 mm) APA approved underlayment plywood.
1) Use ¼" (6.4 mm) thick underlayment panels for boards with a face width of 3" (76 mm)
or less.
2) Use ½" (12.7 mm) thick underlayment panels for boards with a face width wider than 3"
(76 mm).
c. Do not install over OSB (Oriented Strand Board), particle board, chipboard, lauan or
composite type underlayments.
B. Fill cracks, holes, depressions and irregularities in the substrate with good quality Portland cement
based underlayment leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a
uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Floor covering shall not be installed over expansion joints.
D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.

096520-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 096520 - RESILIENT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing VCT flooring.
C. Install with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive specified for the site conditions and follow
adhesive label for proper use.
D. Follow manufacturer’s recommendation for positioning “quarter turn” pattern tiles when applicable.
E. Open enough cartons of floor tiles to cover each area, and mix tile to ensure shade variations do not
occur within any one area.
F. Roll the flooring in both directions using a 100 pound three-section roller.
G. Fit joints tightly.
H. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
I. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color is different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring
under centerline of door.
J. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated.
K. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight
joints.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
1. No traffic for 24 hours after installation.
2. No heavy traffic, rolling loads, or furniture placement for 72 hours after installation.
D. Wait 72 hours after installation before performing initial cleaning.

END OF SECTION

096520-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Carpet tile, fully adhered.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 096500 – Resilient Flooring: Resilient base.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and Rug
Institute; current edition.
B. CRI (GLA) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Adhesive Products; www.carpet-rug.org;
current edition.
C. CRI (GLC) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Product Categories for Carpet; www.carpet-
rug.org; current edition.
D. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Carpet Testing Program - Approved Products; www.carpet-rug.org;
current edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and
suggested schedule for cleaning.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. InterfaceFLOR, LLC. Product: Coming Along (http://www.interfaceflor.com; Contact account
representative Joe Foley; 312-961-7046.).
1. Furnish CPT-300 including 10% attic stock and is responsible for coordinating with Interface Mills
for delivery of this material.
B. Sbemco Product: Ultra Dry Entry Carpet (http://www.sbemco.com; Contact account representative
Mark Tucci; 800-468-0860 EXT:51).
1. Furnish CPT-301 and is responsible for coordinating with Sbemco for delivery of this material.
C. InterfaceFLOR, LLC. Product: Mind Map, Cushionbac (http://www.interfaceflor.com; Contact account
representative Joe Foley; 312-961-7046.).
1. Furnish CPT-304 including 10% attic stock and is responsible for coordinating with Interface Mills
for delivery of this material.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Carpet Tile Type CPT-300: Tufted Textured Loop, manufactured in one color dye lot, and as
indicated on drawings.
1. VOC Content: Provide CRI Green Label Plus certified product; in lieu of labeling,
independent test report showing compliance is acceptable.
B. Entry Carpet Type CPT-301: As indicated on drawings.
1. VOC Content: In lieu of labeling, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable.
C. Carpet Tile Type CPT-304: Cushionbac,Tufted Textured Loop, manufactured in one color dye lot

096813-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

and as indicated on drawings.

1. VOC Content: Provide CRI Green Label Plus certified product; in lieu of labeling,
independent test report showing compliance is acceptable.

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.
B. Edge Strips: As indicated on the drawings.
C. Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet manufacturers, compatible with materials being adhered; maximum
VOC of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified; in lieu of labeled product, independent test report showing
compliance is acceptable.
D. Contact Adhesive: Compatible with carpet material, releasable type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.
B. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for carpet tile installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits:
1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours when tested using
calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours.
2. Alkalinity: pH range of 7-9.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other
defects with sub-floor filler.
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
C. Vacuum clean substrate.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104.
C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.
D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
E. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines.
F. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.
G. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.
H. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION

096813-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 097200 – WALL COVERINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Vinyl wall coverings.
B. Field application of wall coverings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural
Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; current
edition.
C. ASTM G21 – Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi;
current edition.
D. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code; current edition.
E. NFPA 286 – Standards Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contributions of Wall and Ceiling Interior
Finish to Room Fire Growth; current edition.
F. FED CCC-W-408D – Federal Specification – Wall Covering, Weight Standards for Type 1, Type II and
Type III; current edition.
G. FED W-101 – Federal Specification – Wall Covering, Vinyl Coated Quality Standard; current edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.
C. Samples: Submit two samples, 12x12 inch in size illustrating range of pattern for each product
scheduled.
D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of wall covering, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for adhesive.
C. Wall Coverings: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 60 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges
required by the wall covering product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

099000-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 097200 – WALL COVERINGS

C. Minimum Application Temperatures for wall covering adhesives: 60 degrees F; unless required
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Provide lighting level of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. See Section 016000 for additional provisions.
B. Label each roll with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all wall covering products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no
exceptions.
B. Wall Coverings:
1. DL Couch: www.dlcouch.com for interior wall coverings.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Use only water-based adhesive having volatile organic compounds not more than 50 g/l.
B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is located.
c. USGBC LEED Rating System, edition as stated in Section 01355; for interior wall and
ceiling finish (all coats), anti-corrosive paints on interior ferrous metal, clear wood stains and
finishes, sanding sealers, other sealers, shellac, and floor coatings.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart
D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site;
or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.3 WALL COVERINGS - INTERIOR
A. WC-400 – Interior Wall Covering
1. As indicated on drawings.
B. WC-401 – Interior Wall Covering
1. As indicated on drawings.
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically
indicated or not; commercial quality.
B. Edge Guard Material: Concealed feathered edge, stainless steel; maximum of 1 inch wide.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition
that may potentially affect proper application.
C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes
unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.

099000-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 097200 – WALL COVERINGS

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair
existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through.
F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and
bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
G. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.
H. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots,
pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand
between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
C. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to
applying next coat.
D. Mix and apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.
E. Prevent adhesive from getting on face of wall covering.
F. Apply adhesive to wall covering back.
G. Use wall covering of same batch or run in an area. Use rolls in consecutive numerical sequence of
manufacture.
H. Install wall covering completely adhered, smooth, clean, without wrinkles, air pockets, gaps or
overlaps.
I. Extend wall covering continuous behind non-built-in casework and other items which are close to but
not bolted to or touching the walls.
J. Install wall covering before installation of resilient base. Extend wall covering not more than ¼ inch
below top of resilient base.
K. Install panels consecutively in order in which they are cut from the roll including filling spaces above or
below windows, doors, or similar penetrations.
L. Do not install horizontal seams.
M. Except on match patterns, hang fabric by reversing alternate strips, except as recommended by the
manufacturer.
N. Cutting: Cut on a work table with a straight edge.
1. Joints or seams that are not cut clean are unacceptable.
2. Trim additional selvage to achieve a color and pattern match at seams. Overlapped seams are
not allowed.
3. Cut seams as specified by manufacturer.
4. If double cutting on the wall is necessary, place a three inch strip of TYPE II wall covering under
pasted edge.
a. Do not cut into wall surface.

099000-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 097200 – WALL COVERINGS

b. After cutting, remove strip and excess adhesive from seam before proceeding to next seam.
c. Smooth down seam in adhesive for tight bond and joint.
O. Trim strip-matched patterns, which are not factory pre-trimmed.
P. Inside Corners:
1. Wrap wall covering around corner.
2. Do not seam with 2 inches of inside corners.
3. Cut seam as specified by manufacturer.
Q. Outside Corners:
1. Wrap wall covering around corner.
2. Do not seam within 6 inches of outside corners.
3. Cut seam as specified by manufacturer.
R. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to
finishing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.

END OF SECTION

099000-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 098100 - ACOUSTIC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Acoustical insulation in walls.
2. Acoustical sealant.
B. Related Sections:
1. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
2. 072117 – Fibrous Building Insulation: Thermal batt and blanket insulation.
3. 092200 – Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Support framing.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured
Housing.
2. E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Batt Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I; unfaced glass fiber batts, blankets, or rolls; minimum
fire hazard classification rating of 25/50 per ASTM E84; minimum 3-inch thick, unless required
otherwise to meet the STC requirements; 2-3/4 inches thick for installation in 2-1/2 inch stud cavities;
3-5/8 to 4 inches thick for installation in 3-5/8 inch stud cavities;6-1/2 inches thick for installation in
6 inch stud cavities; widths to friction-fit between studs, where indicated for installation in stud walls;
formaldehyde free.
B. Mineral Fiber Batt Acoustical Insulation: Thermafiber (Wabash, IN; 888-834-2371; 260-563-2111)
"SAFB" (Sound Attenuation Fire Blanket); ASTM C665, Type I; unfaced mineral fiber batts; minimum
fire hazard classification rating of 0/0 per ASTM E84; minimum 3-inch thick, unless required otherwise
to meet the STC requirements; 2-1/2 inches thick for installation in 2-1/2 inch stud cavities; 3-1/2 to
4 inches thick for installation in 3-5/8 inch stud cavities; 6 inches thick for installation in 6 inch stud
cavities; widths to friction-fit between studs, where indicated for installation in stud walls;
formaldehyde free.
C. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I; unfaced glass fiber batts, blankets, or rolls; minimum fire
hazard classification rating of 25/50 per ASTM E84; minimum 3-1/2-inch thick, unless required
otherwise to meet the STC requirements indicated or specified; formaldehyde free.
1. For Installation in Stud Walls: Widths to friction-fit between studs
2. For Installation at Partition Head Tracks and Acoustically Insulated Door Frames: Continuous
strips, full width of partition or frame, as detailed.
D. Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening, low-shrinkage; for use in conjunction with gypsum board; similar
to USG "Sheetrock Brand Acoustical Sealant," Tremco "Acoustical Sealant 30CTG," Quiet Solution
(Sunnyvale CA; ; 408-541-8000) "QuietSeal QS-350," or approved; maximum VOC content 250g/L..
E. Accessories: Furnish other accessories such as fasteners and retainers, not specifically described,
but required for a complete installation.

098100-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 098100 - ACOUSTIC INSULATION

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.
B. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify that adjacent materials are secure, properly spaced, dry, and ready to receive installation.
B. Verify that mechanical and electrical services within spaces to be insulated have been installed and
tested.
C. Furnish acoustical insulation to hollow metal installer for installation in hollow metal frames in
acoustical partitions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation in stud cavities in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated.
Coordinate with other trades as necessary to complete acoustical barriers at wall penetrations.
B. Install insulation without gaps or voids.
C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use insulation materials free of damage.
D. Sealant:
1. Install acoustical sealant continuously around perimeter of all acoustically insulated partitions;
one continuous bead at each side of framing member interface with substrate.
2. Where double layer of gypsum board is indicated, provide sealant at butt joints between boards ,
including corner joints, and additional bead at perimeter of base layer prior to installation of finish
layer.
3. Except for penetrations in fire rated construction to receive firestopping or fire rated construction
joint assemblies, seal all penetrations through acoustical assemblies, including cutouts for
lighting fixtures, cabinets, pipes and plumbing, HVAC ducts, and electrical boxes.

END OF SECTION

098100-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 099100 - PAINT

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints.
C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and
unless otherwise indicated, including the following:
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-
applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 055000 – Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural
Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; current
edition.
C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-
Base Materials; current edition.
D. GreenSeal GS-11 - Paints; current edition.
E. NACE (IMP) - Industrial Maintenance Painting; NACE International; Edition date unknown.
F. SSPC (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society for Protective
Coatings; current edition.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.
C. Samples: Submit two samples, 12x12 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available
for each surface finishing product scheduled.
D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes.

099100-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 099100 - PAINT

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions
for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges
required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for
exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. See Section 016000 for additional provisions.
B. Supply 1 gallon of each color; store where directed.
C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no
exceptions.
B. Paints:
1. Sherwin Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com for Exterior painting.
2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com for Exterior painting.
3. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com for Interior painting.
2.2 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly
dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of
drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single
production run.
3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer
categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:

099100-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 099100 - PAINT

a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is located.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart
D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site;
or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Interior and exterior building paint systems shall include one coat primer, 2 coats finish, without
exception.
B. Refer to the drawings for paint manufacturer, model, color, and sheen.
C. Pavement marking paint.
1. Conform to color requirements of local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2. Apply glass beads to painted surface while wet to enhance reflectivity.
3. Products.
a. Sherwin Williams.
1) White, Yellow, Blue: Sherwin Williams Setfast Acrylic Latex Traffic Marking Paint
(tintable).
2) Black, Red: Sherwin Williams Setfast Latex Traffic Marking Paint (not tintable).
b. PPG Pittsburgh Paints.
1) All colors: ZonelineTraffic & Zone Marking Paint, Latex.
c. Rust-Oleum.
1) All colors: Professional Traffic Striping Paint.
4. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically
indicated or not; commercial quality.
B. Patching Material: Latex filler.
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition
that may potentially affect proper application.
C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes
unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

099100-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 099100 - PAINT

D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair
existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and
bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
G. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali
powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate;
rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution
of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
H. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects
after repair.
I. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent.
Apply coat of etching primer.
J. Un-corroded, Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld
splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or
sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring
weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.
K. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust.
Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare
steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
L. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots,
pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand
between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
M. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried;
sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with
thinner.
N. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
C. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
D. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to
applying next coat.
F. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before
set. Wipe excess from surface.
G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to
finishing.
3.4 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
B. Finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work; as indicated on drawings.
C. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to
finishing.

099100-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 099100 - PAINT

3.5 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
3.6 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED
A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted.
2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels.
3. Stainless steel items.
B. Paint surfaces as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished.
1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas.
3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible
through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces.
4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match
face panels.

END OF SECTION

099100-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 099300 – STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Stains and transparent finishes:
1. Surface preparation of substrates.
2. Field and shop application.
B. Wood repair products.
C. Scope: Finish all interior and wood surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished or
otherwise indicated as unfinished or for paint finish.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 062000 – Finish Carpentry.
B. 323100 – Fences and Gates.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural
Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B. GreenSeal GS-11 - Paints; current edition.
C. NACE (IMP) - Industrial Maintenance Painting; NACE International; Edition date unknown.
D. SSPC (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society for Protective
Coatings; current edition.
E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM); latest edition unless otherwise noted.
1. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications.
2. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Base Materials.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mock-up: Prior to beginning work, provide a mock-up on-site of a portion of the completed materials
and assemblies in-place for each of the finish types designated in the Construction Drawings.
1. Mock-up areas shall be designated by the Architect of Record.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until the workmanship, color and sheen are approved by the
Architect of Record.
3. Re-finish the mock-up area as required to produce a consistent finish with the adjacent areas.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product data: Provide manufacturer’s product data on each product to be used, including but not
limited to:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Application conditions and methods.
4. Protection, cleaning, touch-up and repair recommendations.
C. Samples: Submit two 6” x 6” samples for each surface finishing product specified, on a representative
sample of wood specie, grade and graining to be finished.
D. Certification: By manufacturer that all stains and finishes comply with VOC limits specified either in
the Construction Drawings or by jurisdictions having authority.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes.

099300-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 099300 – STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. Store
containers unopened, protected from exposure to weather or direct sunlight, until ready for
application.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of stain or finish, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in
accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges
required by the stain or finish product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity
ranges required by the stain or finish product manufacturer.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Refer to Section 016000 for additional provisions.
B. Supply 1 quart minimum, 1 gallon maximum, of each stain or finish product used; store where
directed.
C. Label each container with color and sheen in addition to the manufacturer's label. Where finishes are
applied to specific materials, components or rooms, include notes on application location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers and products shall be limited to those indicated in the Interior Finish Materials
Schedule in the Construction Drawings. Substitutions are not permitted.
1. Minwax, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey; 800-526-0495; www.minwax.com.
2.2 MATERIALS- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Stains and transparent finishes- general:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-mixed materials. Mix coatings to correct consistency
in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions before application. Do not reduce, thin or reduce
coatings or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer’s
product instructions.
2. Supply each material in the quantities required to complete the entire project’s work from a single
production run.
B. Back-primer for transparent-finished millwork:
1. Same as finish coat.
2. 1 coat nitrocellulose lacquer sanding sealer.
3. 1 coat vinyl toluene copolymer.
C. Wood filler: Use one of the following, as appropriate to repair required. Substitutions not permitted.
1. Shallow nicks and scratches: Minwax Blend-Fil Pencil.
2. Minor scratches, gouges and nail holes: Minwax Wood Putty.
3. Gouges, holes, knot holes and damaged areas:
a. Two-Part Minwax High Performance Wood Filler .
b. Minwax Stainable Wood Filler.

099300-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 099300 – STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES

4. As reinforcement for decayed wood: Minwax High Performance Wood Hardener.

D. Stain touch-up: Minwax Wood Finish Stain Marker.
E. Shellac, lacquer and varnish remover: Minwax Antique Furniture Refinisher.
F. Application accessories: Provide all cleaning agents, primers, sealers, tools, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and cleanup materials required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and work area conditions are as instructed by the
product manufacturer. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work.
Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. Do not begin work until
unsatisfactory conditions are resolved.
B. Test shop-applied stains or finishes for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
C. Measure moisture content of wood application surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not
apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Interior: 15%, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
2. Exterior: 19%, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to finish application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill
nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces
with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Stir before and during application as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Apply without runs, drips, or sags, without brush marks, and with consistent sheen.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

099300-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 102219 – DEMOUNTABLE PARTITION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section
B. Related sections include the following:
1. 06100 – Rough Carpentry
2. 087100 – Door Hardware
3. 088000 – Glazing
4. 088700 – Glazing Surface Films
5. 092200 – Lightgage Metal Support Framing
6. Division 26 – Electrical
7. Division 27 – Communications
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Partition components include but are not limited to:
1. Wall panels complete with ceiling and base trims.
2. Door frames, complete with mortising for hinges and hardware by panel manufacturer.
3. Glass panels, complete with glass, types as indicated on drawings.
4. Electrical outlets, switches, infeeds and harnesses where indicated on drawings.
5. Doors.
6. Door Hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit detailed shop drawings, showing all elements of the system, including fabrication and
installation details, fastenings, accessories, types of material and finishes.
B. Product certificate certifying compliance with specified performance characteristics and criteria, and
physical requirements.
C. Manufacturer’s installation and assembly instructions.
D. Closeout Submittals
1. Warranty documents as specified.
2. Maintenance data. Steelcase Privacy Wall
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installation shall be by manufacturer’s or a qualified dealer's trained personnel.
B. Supplier shall take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where
possible, to ensure proper fitting of the work.
1.5 REFERENCES AND COMPLIANCE
A. ANSI/BIFMA
1. Solid wall units will support a maximum load of 750-pounds per side incompliance with
ANSI/BIFMAX5.6 – 1986.
B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
1. Solid painted wall units have a Class-A rating in accordance with ASTM E84-97a “Standard
Method for Surface Characteristics of Building Materials”.
2. All system is in compliance with ASTM E 72 “Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength
Tests of Panels for Building Construction”.
3. Solid wall units are available with a 41 or 45 STC in accordance with ASTM E 90-90 “ Method for
Laboratory Measurements of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions”.
C. Underwriters Laboratories
1. Pre-wired modular power components shall be UL 183 listed.
D. IBC and UBC Compliance

102219-1
 CHASE
SECTION 102219 – DEMOUNTABLE PARTITION SYSTEM

1. Manufacturer shall provide ICC-ES Evaluation Report to document compliance with 2003
International Building code and 1997 Uniform Building Code.
E. DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
1. Deliver prefabricated partition components containerized, cartoned or crated to provide
protection during transit. Include with bid any necessary storage precautions required for the
product being offered.
2. Partition installer to inspect partition components upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may
be repaired provided the finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the
owner’s representative. Remove and replace damaged items as described.
3. It shall be the responsibility of the movable partition supplier to properly package all components
for storage and define storage program to be provided on site by General Contractor at no
charge, to ensure product performance.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty document.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS
A. Basis of design: Privacy Wall, as designed and manufactured by Steelcase, Grand Rapids, MI;
www.steelcase.com.
B. Substitutions: Other wall systems which meet this criteria may bid providing that all applicable product
specifications, details and certified independent laboratory test reports have been submitted and
approved by the architect or owner at least 10 working days prior to bid. This submission is to clearly
outline areas of compliance and area of failure to comply with function and performance specified.
Indication of approval will be by addendum issued by the architect.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All panel surfaces, glass frames, doorframes, base trim and ceiling track will be cold-formed steel or
extruded aluminum.
B. All exposed steel shall be cold-formed, leveled steel, painted with an electrostatic powder coat paint
process.
C. Fabric Wall Covering: None.
D. Vinyl Wall Covering: None.
E. Where noted in drawings, Aluminum will be extruded Aluminum (6063-T6 Aluminum alloy) with the
manufacturer’s standard black powder coat finish.
2.3 PARTITION REQUIREMENTS
A. Partition panels shall be 2-3/8” thick.
B. Overall system height, mullion heights, and solid and glass panel configurations shall be as noted on
drawings.
C. Design must permit extension in two, three or four way conditions without removal of adjacent panels
or floor track.
D. All solid panels should be capable of field-cutting to accommodate end filler conditions or other
modifications to overall partition length.
E. The system shall provide a 2-1/2" vertical adjustment (+/-1-1/4") in overall height to accommodate
floor and ceiling irregularities.
F. Panel units shall be manufactured in widths as indicated on drawings. Panel intersection shall have a
painted, vinyl, fabric or anodized feature strip to continuously connect adjoining components without
visible connection hardware.

102219-2
 CHASE
SECTION 102219 – DEMOUNTABLE PARTITION SYSTEM

G. All solid panels shall be constructed to allow for vertical routing of concealed conduit and cable
anywhere in the interior of the panel without compromising sound attenuation performance.
H. Panel construction will allow for the field installation of modular electrical devices at standard available
factory heights as well as field installation of termination at other panel heights, as shown on
drawings.
I. Each Solid, Glass, and Clerestory panel shall incorporate integral slotting for direct mounting of panel-
hung components on either or both sides of the panel, including side-by-side mounting. Continuous
feature strip connectors will conceal all slots. Panel verticals and connectors will allow for direct
mounting of panel-hung furniture without the need for any additive, field installed components. Panel
slotting will accommodate a range of component locations up to 83” above the finished floor. Panels
shall accommodate the direct interface of overhead storage, shelving, work surfaces, and marker
boards without the use of any additional adapter/transition brackets.
J. The system shall allow for installation on hard surface, or carpeted flooring, without the use of
destructive fasteners.
K. J. The system can be installed to the underside of suspended ceilings without the use of destructive
fasteners, with a one-piece continuous steel ceiling track.
2.4 PARTITION COMPONENTS
A. Solid wall panel units shall be steel with a powder coat finish enclosing a sound-absorbing filler
material.
B. Each wall panel unit shall have a concealed slotted vertical flange as an integral part of the panel
construction. Slotting shall permit side-by-side mounting of wall hung components. Partition supplier
shall provide compatible panel widths to facilitate wall-hung components as manufactured by
Steelcase in locations shown on drawings.
C. Each steel wall panel shall have an integral screw leveling capability to provide maximum unitized
construction that eliminates shimming and loose parts. The leveler mechanism shall be concealed
behind a steel base.
D. Each Solid wall panel shall weigh no more than 4.6 pounds per square foot.
E. All glass framing components will be constructed of extruded aluminum, powder coat paint, color
manufacturer’s standard black.
F. Ceiling Track shall be one-piece continuous formed steel with continuous factory-installed resilient
light and sound seals and shall overlap the panel face.
G. Each wall panel shall be unitized to include a screw-leveled, panel-attached spring-loaded floor track,
with integral sound seals. Continuous base shall be 5" high-formed steel. Base cover shall be
independently removable from each side of panel to facilitate electrical changes.
H. If specified, pre-wired power shall include:
1. The wall system will include a UL 183 4-circuit, 8-wire prefabricated/pre-wired power distribution
system.
2. The power base system shall be comprised of power blocks, receptacles, power harnesses and
infeeds.
3. Power bases shall be electrified by using either a base infeed, floor infeed, top infeed, or power
harness.
4. The power block shall provide for back to back insertion of receptacles of either the same or
different circuits.
5. Power shall be distributed from the infeed point to other panels through combinations of blank
panels using modular harnesses.
6. Factory installed power components will allow for modular electrical terminations, such that the
circuit assignment for any termination can be easily changed by exchanging modular
receptacles. Modular power blocks and cutouts should be factory installed at locations as
indicated in the drawings. Panel construction will allow for the option of power/data field
installation at these heights as well as field installation and termination at other panel heights, as
shown on drawings.

102219-3
 CHASE
SECTION 102219 – DEMOUNTABLE PARTITION SYSTEM

I. Wall panel units shall be joined together by means of a continuous vertical connector, which serves as
a continuous light and sound seal, and eliminates the need for visible fasteners. This connector shall
be field cut able to provide access to slots as required for furniture, leaving other slots concealed. The
connector shall be flush to the panel surface, and be finished with either paint, vinyl or fabric as
indicated on drawings, for monolithic appearance.
J. Glass wall panels of 60” width or less will be factory glazed and will be constructed with the same
integral leveling ability as specified for solid panels. Glazing frames that are greater than 60” wide will
be field glazed. Butt joints will be sealed with silicone sealant. Where indicated on drawings, glass
corner (L) units shall be factory assembled utilizing a butt-joint glass corner detail.
K. Butt-hinged door frames shall be formed steel and shall include continuous resilient sound seal at
jambs and head. Frame shall be designed to provide vertical adjustment to compensate for floor and
ceiling irregularities without cutting in field. Frames shall be mortised and reinforced for hardware as
specified in the Door Hardware Schedule in the drawings.
L. Butt-hinged door leaf shall be 1-3/4" thick, wood particleboard core with factory finished medium
density overlay face or veneer. Doors shall be primed for filed finish with latex paint.
M. Sliding Door Units shall include fascia, header and track, finished opening frame, sliding door, and
fixed side panel. Track shall be Aluminum. Rollers shall be steel, with high quality ball bearing wheels.
N. End fillers at partition to fixed walls and columns shall be similar in construction to solid wall panel
units and fit into wall channel on the abutting wall. Wall channels or Mini-ends containing a continuous
factory-installed light and sound seal shall not utilize destructive fasteners when attaching to fixed
walls or columns.
O. End fillers may utilize solid panels that are field cut to narrower unit width as indicated on drawings.
Cut panels will be manufactured in the same manner as all other solid panels.
P. Where specified, Aluminum frames shall be powder coated manufacturer’s standard black.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. Hardware for Butt-hinged doors shall be furnished by the finish hardware contractor to the metal
partition contractor for this installation.
B. Hinges shall be 1-1/2 pair of 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" ball bearing butts, for standard height hinged doors, 2 pair
for full height hinged doors.
C. Slide door track, hardware, door pull and lock shall be standard as provided by movable wall
manufacturer.
D. Slide door pulls shall be satin stainless steel finish.
2.6 GLASS
A. The glass and glazing for movable partitions where shown on drawings shall be furnished under this
section.
B. All glass shall comply with Federal Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR, Part
1201).
C. All glass shall be clear.
D. All unitized glass shall be factory installed using extruded non-PVC glazing beads. Foam tape or PVC
glazing is not acceptable.
2.7 LIFE SAFETY
A. Provide laboratory certification confirming wall panel construction flame spread and smoke index of 10
or less, when tested in accordance with the provisions of ASTM Designation E-84-97a, (Standard
Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials) except for methods of
calculating flame spread rates. This test method is technically equivalent to that specified in NFPA No.
225, UBC No. 8-1, ANSI/UL 723 and ASTM E 84-97a.

102219-4
 CHASE
SECTION 102219 – DEMOUNTABLE PARTITION SYSTEM

2.8 ACCOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE

A. Solid Wall panels shall have an STC of 41 or 45, as indicated on drawings, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E90-90. Panel shall achieve specified STC without any additional field
modification to the panel base, panel core, panel header or ceiling track. Cut panels will exhibit the
same acoustical performance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that building conditions are ready to receive wall components and that field measurement
dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify that floor level does not vary by more than plus/minus 3/4” from specified height.
C. Verify that ceiling level does not vary by more than plus/minus 3/4” from specified height.
D. Verify that adjacent surfaces do not exceed 1/8 inch in 8'-0" variation from plumb.
E. Verify that floor flatness complies with the American Concrete Institute (ACI) floor flatness (FF)
requirements per AC117 and ASTM E1155 for Moderately Flat floors (maximum of 3/8” gap over 90%
of samples and 5/8” gap over 100%).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Partition shall be installed without permanent fastenings over finished floor tile, carpeting or raised
floor to provide for complete flexibility of future changes without having to patch floor material (unless
required to meet structural code requirements).
B. Partition shall be scribed and neatly fitted to existing building conditions all in accordance with details
approved on shop drawings.
C. Installer to touch-up all nicks and scratches that may occur to the wall during handling and installation
with touch up paint supplied by the manufacturer in matching color and gloss.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of work, this contractor shall remove all of his cartons, trash, crates, etc. and leave
the premises broom clean.
B. Washdown of walls shall not be part of this section, but shall be considered normal pre-occupancy
cleaning responsibility of the General Contractor.
3.4 MAINTENANCE
A. It shall be the responsibility of the relocatable wall bidder to include in this proposal, the location of the
nearest service facility established to service occupant changes of material requirements.

END OF SECTION

102219-5
 CHASE
SECTION 102600 – CORNER GUARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Corner Guards
B. Mounting hardware, accessories and trim.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 92843 – Gypsum Sheathing
C. 92900 – Gypsum Board
D. 97200 – Wall Coverings
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint System.; current edition.
B. ASTM A 176 – Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip; current edition.
C. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; current
edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s complete and current product data for each product required,
including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Complete installation methods.
C. Samples: Color charts consisting of actual product pieces, demonstrating full range of available color,
for initial color selection.
D. Shop drawings: Show locations of each item and installation details, including mounting and
anchorage. Provide elevations of non standard conditions.
E. Verification Samples: For each product specified, two 8 inch long assemblies, including one end cap,
in actual colors and materials specified.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges
required by the corner guard product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. See Section 016000 for additional provisions.

099000-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 102600 – CORNER GUARDS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all corner guard products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no
exceptions.
B. Corner Guards:
1. KoroGuard: Stainless Steel Corner Guard, 90 degree angle, 1 inch wing size;
www.korogard.com
2. C.R. Laurence Co, Inc: Stainless Steel Corner Molding, 90 degree angle, 3 / 4 inch wing size;
www.crlaurence.com
3. Wallguard: Stainless Steel Corner Guard. 90 degree angle, 1 inch wing size; www.wallguard.com
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Use only water-based adhesive having volatile organic compounds not more than 50 g/l.
B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is located.
c. USGBC LEED Rating System, edition as stated in Section 01355; for interior wall and
ceiling finish (all coats), anti-corrosive paints on interior ferrous metal, clear wood stains and
finishes, sanding sealers, other sealers, shellac, and floor coatings.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart
D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site;
or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition
that may potentially affect proper application.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair
existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and
bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Install products level and plumb, in full compliance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions.

099000-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 102600 – CORNER GUARDS

3.4 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
B. Verify that products are plumb and rigidly secured to substrate; make any adjustments required.
C. Clean products and immediate areas of installation, using materials and methods recommended by
manufacturer. Remove from project site packaging and debris caused by installation.

END OF SECTION

099000-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 102801 – TOILET AND UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Accessories for toilet rooms and utility rooms.
B. Grab bars.
C. Mirrors.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed supports for accessories, including in wall framing and plates.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; current edition.
B. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service; current edition.
C. ASTM A653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; current edition.
D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,
Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; current edition.
E. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus
Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; current edition.
F. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; current edition.
G. GSA CID A-A-3002 - Mirrors, Glass; U.S. General Services Administration; current edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment
methods.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to the Restroom Accessories Schedule in the Drawings.
B. Substitutions: not permitted.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with
anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
B. Keys: Provide two keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories.
C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A 269, Type 304 or 316.
E. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C 1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, copper coating,
and suitable protective organic coating to copper backing in accordance with GSA CID A-A-3002.
F. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.

102801-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 102801 – TOILET AND UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES

G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type.
H. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
component and substrate.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.
2.4 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Waste Receptacle: Wall-mounted, stainless steel.
1. Liner: Removable, heavy-duty vinyl liner, attached at a minimum of 4 points with stainless steel
grommets and hooks.
2. Minimum capacity: 6.4 gallons.
3. Product: Surface Mounted Waste Receptacle B-279 manufactured by Bobrick.
B. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick float glass mirror.
1. Size: 16 inch x 30 inch.
2. Frame: 0.05 inch one piece stainless steel channel shapes, with mitered corners; bright polished
finish.
3. Backing: Full-mirror sized, shock-absorbing, water-resistant, nonabrasive, minimum 1/8 inch
thick polyethylene padding.
4. Fixed Tilt Mirrors: Minimum 3 inches tilt from top to bottom.
5. Product: Tilt Mirror with stainless steel frame B-293-1630 manufactured by Bobrick.
C. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/4 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, satin
finish, exposed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar.
1. Length and configuration: As indicated on drawings.
2. Product: Stainless steel grab bars with exposed mounting B-490 series manufactured by
Bobrick.
2.5 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Mop and Broom Holder and separate Hose Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, hat-
shaped channel.
1. Mop and Broom Holder: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders.
2. Product: Three station mop holder Elkay LK403.
3. Product: One station hose holder Elkay LK404.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on
drawings

END OF SECTION

102801-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 104415 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association; current
edition.
B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features and cabinet physical dimensions.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination
requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes enforced by jurisdictions having
authority, whichever is more stringent.
B. Provide extinguishers labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified and
indicated.
C. Extinguishers shall not contain CFC's or HCFC's.
D. Extinguishers shall be constructed of a heavy-duty steel tank, with pressure gage.
E. Minimum extinguisher rating: 4-A : 80-B : C.
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Cabinets shall be sized to accommodate the required fire extinguisher.
B. Cabinets shall include a full-view frameless door with handle. Door glazing shall be 3/16” clear
acrylic.
C. Cabinet interior surfaces shall be white powder-coated or enamel painted steel with right-angle
inside corners and seams ground smooth.
D. Cabinet door shall be free of lettering.
E. Cabinets exposed to customer view.
1. Fully recessed cabinet type preferred; semi-recessed type shall be installed where wall thickness
will not accommodate a fully recessed cabinet.
2. Cabinet exterior surfaces shall be right-angle formed #4 stainless steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick
minimum.
F. Cabinets concealed from customer view.
1. Cabinet type shall be semi-recessed.
2. Cabinet exterior surfaces shall be right-angle formed powder-coated white steel with right-
angle corners and seams ground smooth.

104415-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 104415 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES

2.3 MANUFACTURERS
1. JL Industries, Inc.; www.jlindustries.com.
a. Extinguisher: Cosmic 10E.
b. Recessed cabinet in customer view: Panorama #1035.
c. Semi-recessed cabinet in customer view: Panorama #1036.
d. Cabinet not in customer view: Panorama #1016.
2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.; www.larsensmfg.com:
a. Extinguisher: MP10.
b. Recessed cabinet in customer view: Gemini #SS-G2409-R2.
c. Semi-recessed cabinet in customer view: Gemini #SS-G2409-6R.
d. Cabinet not in customer view: Gemini G-2409-6R.
3. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Cabinet shall be positioned to provide 48” wide x 30” deep side-approach accessibility clearance area
along an accessible path of travel, mounted such that the top of the fire extinguisher handle (not the
cabinet handle) is no higher than 3’-10” above the finished floor.
C. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings.
D. Secure rigidly in place.
E. Place extinguishers in cabinets.

END OF SECTION

104415-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 105300 – ARCHITECTURAL CANOPIES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work in this section includes furnishing and installation of pre-finished aluminum overhead cantilever-
supported canopies. Canopies may be pre-assembled for installation by the manufacturer or may be
assembled on-site for installation.
B. Hardware, flashing and sealants required for a complete canopy installation.
C. Field measurement prior to ordering, and identification and location of structural connections and
drainage locations, connections, and flow when connection is not required.
D. Coordination with the project Electrician and Sewer and Water contractors for installation of light
fixtures and connection to site drainage system when required.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 014000 – Quality Assurance: Requirements for testing and inspections.
C. 016000 – Product Requirements (Substitutions)
D. 051200 – Structural Steel: Steel elements indicated on the Structural Drawings.
E. 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
F. 077123 – Gutters and Downspouts
G. 079200 – Joint Sealants
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Canopy must conform to local building codes.
B. Canopy shall capture storm water and channel runoff to the storm sewer connection or splash to
grade as indicated in the Construction Documents.
1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENT
A. Confirm dimensions in the field prior to preparation of shop drawings.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 013000.
B. Product Literature: Submit product literature for all prefabricated products.
C. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation; indicate materials, thicknesses,
dimensions, methods of reinforcement and embedment, attachments, shop finishes, provisions for
work of other trades, and other pertinent information as requested by Architect.
D. Quality Control Submittal: Submit written certification that items been designed to meet the specified
requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials of this Section shall be provided by a single manufacturer, including installation
accessories and hardware.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced and regularly engaged in producing metal fabrications of the
type specified; must employ only skilled personnel using proper equipment to produce work.
C. Installer qualifications: Experienced and engaged in installation of metal fabrications and building
appurtenances of the type specified; must employ only skilled personnel using proper equipment to
produce work.

055000-1
 CHASE
SECTION 105300 – ARCHITECTURAL CANOPIES

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

1. Metal fabrications shall be designed to meet the requirements of the jurisdictional code
authorities.
2. PE Stamped calculations are not required. Architect / Engineer of Record is responsible for all
calculations, engineer's stamps, drawings, and other items required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver the products and materials in the manufacturers’ original containers, dry and undamaged,
seals and labels intact.
B. Store products and materials in a weather-protected environment out of direct sunlight, clear of
ground and moisture.
C. Do not double-stack pallets, crates, boxes, etc.
1.9 SEQUENCING
A. Ensure that products of this section and information required for installation of products of this section
is furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.
B. Coordinate installation with adjacent exterior finish materials (siding, stone, fenestration, etc.),
flashing, and sealant.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard written material warranty upon completion of the work.
B. Provide manufacturer’s standard minimum 10-year warranty for manufacturer’s factory-applied finish
against color fade, chalk and film integrity.
C. Installation and assembly workmanship shall be covered by General Contractor’s warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Mapes Canopies, Lincoln, Nebraska; 1-888-273-1132; www.mapescanopies.com.
1. Super Lumidaeck or approved equal.
B. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Decking: Factory-finished Aluminum ceiling panels, channels, or similar shapes, attached with
concealed fasteners, flat in appearance from below, capable of supporting light fixtures and similar
accessories without visible deflection or deformation. Where drainage planes are not provided above
the ceiling deck, panels shall be installed so as to channel storm water to the integral drainage
components.
B. All finish members, framing members, and hardware shall be corrosion-resistant materials such as
Aluminum, G60 or better galvanized steel, or stainless steel, and shall be protected as required from
galvanic corrosion.
C. All components, including cantilever support brackets, shall receive finish on all exposed surfaces,
including those exposed only above. Exposed building attachment hardware may be unfinished
stainless steel or galvanized steel.
D. All components visible from below shall have the dimensions indicated in the Construction
Documents.
E. Aluminum light box covers shall be provided at each integrated light fixture. Integrated light fixtures
shall be provided and installed separately by the Electrician.
F. Drainage components shall be provided by the canopy vendor, including downspout material in
lengths adequate to reach grade as drawn.

055000-2
 CHASE
SECTION 105300 – ARCHITECTURAL CANOPIES

G. Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.

1. Sealants shall be provided and installed by the canopy installer.
H. Flashing: Refer to Section 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
1. Flashing and associated materials and accessories shall be provided and installed by the canopy
installer in quantities and sizes required for a water-tight installation.
2. Exposed flashing shall be Aluminum sheet, finished to match the canopy.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Finish type shall be 2-Coat Kynar Finish, color Black, or as otherwise noted on the Construction
Documents.
B. All components exposed to view from below or above shall receive factory-applied finish to all visible
surfaces.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Canopy may be ordered pre-assembled or shipped with materials pre-cut to size for field assembly.
B. All field connections to the building shall be mechanically assembled utilizing 3/16 corrosion-resistant
fasteners with a minimum shear stress of 350 lb. Pre-welded or factory-welded connections are not
acceptable.
C. Concealed drainage: Storm water shall drain from covered surfaces and be directed to downspout.
An emergency overflow outlet is included and must be installed near the downspout connection.
2.5 PROTECTION
A. For metal in contact with concrete, masonry, or other dissimilar materials, installer shall coat contact
surfaces with an appropriate primer to prevent galvanic corrosion or other deterioration.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the General
Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
C. Confirm dimensions and elevations to be as shown on canopy shop drawings and Construction
Documents.
D. Erection shall be performed by an approved installer and scheduled after all concrete, masonry and
roofing in the area is completed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's shop drawings. Particular attention
should be given to protecting the finish during handling and erection.
B. Protect all finished surfaces from damage during handling and erection.
C. Canopy manufacturer’s attachment hardware shall be used. Contact the canopy manufacturer for
replacement hardware specification if required.
D. Touch-up all surfaces damaged during installation.

END OF SECTION

055000-3
 CHASE
SECTION 105623 - WIRE STORAGE SHELVING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall mounted wire closet shelving.
B. Accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: Blocking in walls for attachment of shelving.
B. 092200 – Light Gauge Metal Support Framing: Blocking in metal stud walls for attachment of
standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of shelving
and attachment to substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wire Storage Shelving: ClosetMaid Corporation (800-874-0008; www.closetmaid.com).
2.2 SHELVING APPLICATIONS
A. Shelf Depth: 12” and 16 inches as indicated in plan.
B. File Room and Janitor Room: Wall-to-wall wire storage shelves, stacked at 15 inch vertically, depth
as shown in plan (16” preferred). See plan and elevations for lengths of shelving.
C. ATM Room and other areas: Wall-to-wall wire storage shelves, stacked at 12 inch vertically, depth as
shown in plan (16” preferred). See plan and elevations for lengths of shelving.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Wire Shelving: Factory-assembled coated wire mesh shelf assemblies for wall-mounting, with all
components and connections required to produce a rigid structure that is free of buckling and warping.
1. Construction: Cold-drawn steel wire with average tensile strength of 100,000 psi resistance
welded into uniform mesh units, square, rigid, flat, and free of dents or other distortions, with
wires trimmed smooth.
2. Coating: White Epoxy, applied after fabrication, covering all surfaces.
3. Epoxy Coating: Non-toxic epoxy-polyester powder coating baked-on finish, 3 to 5 mils thick.
4. “Close-Mesh” Shelves: Cross deck wires spaced at approx. 5/8 inch.
B. Wall-Mounted Standards: Vertically slotted channel standards with double-tab cantilever brackets to
suit shelving; factory finished to match shelving. See elevations for model number.
C. Mounting Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard mounting hardware; include hang track, wall
standards, end clips and other accessories as required for complete and secure installation; factory
finished to match shelving.
D. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting substrates.
E. Refer to Furniture Schedule in drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect areas to receive shelving, to verify that spaces are properly prepared to receive shelf units,
and are of dimensions indicated on shop drawings.

105623-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 105623 - WIRE STORAGE SHELVING

B. Verify appropriate fastening hardware.

C. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with shelf surfaces level.
B. Cap exposed ends of cut wires.

END OF SECTION

105623-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 107113 – EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work in this section includes furnishing and installation of aluminum sunshade systems, including
accessories, mountings, and shims. Sunshades are anchored directly to the vertical curtain wall or
storefront mullions.
B. Hardware, flashing and sealants required for a complete sunshade installation.
C. Field measurement prior to ordering, and identification and location of structural connections.
D. Coordination with the project exterior cladding installer where sunshades overlap those materials.
E. Fabrication of custom hardware elements when required to attach to building components other than
Aluminum-framed storefront systems.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 014000 – Quality Assurance: Requirements for testing and inspections.
C. 016000 – Product Requirements (Substitutions)
D. 051200 – Structural Steel: Steel elements indicated on the Structural Drawings.
E. 054000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing
F. 072500 – Weather Barriers
G. 074243 – Fiber Cement Panels
H. 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
I. 079200 – Joint Sealants
J. 084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
K. 088000 – Glazing
1.3 Definitions
A. Definitions: For fenestration industry standard terminology and definitions refer to American
Architectural Manufactures Association (AAMA) – AAMA Glossary (AAMA AG).
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance:
1. Combined load on sunshade configurations to be determined in accordance with ASCE 7 or
applicable code requirements. Combined load consists of wind, snow and ice loads.
2. Design sunshade configurations to withstand stresses due to combined load. Stresses resulting
from thermal expansion/contraction shall not cause permanent deformation of sunshade
assemblies or disengagement from the glazed system. 30” Wedge outrigger to meet [___] psf
with Circular blades and mullion spacing as indicated in the Construction Documents.
3. The assembled sunshade shall be capable of supporting the specified combined load without
damage, permanent deformation, or disengagement from the glazed system mullion.
4. Blade deflection shall not exceed L/120 of span length.
5.
B. Shading Performance:
1. No minimum requirements.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change
(range) in ambient and surface temperatures:
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (49 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (82 deg C), material
surfaces.

055000-1
 CHASE
SECTION 107113 – EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES

1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENT

A. Confirm dimensions in the field prior to preparation of shop drawings.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum exterior sunshades. Include plans, elevations, sections, blade angles,
blade spacing and attachments to compatible systems.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.
D. Submit test reports verifying compliance with each test requirement required by the project.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who has had successful experience with installation of the same or
similar systems required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating exterior sunshades, and glazed
aluminum curtain walls and storefront systems that meet or exceed performance requirements.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum exterior sunshades and glazed aluminum curtain walls and
storefront system through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to
sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for
review.
E. Convene pre-installation meeting with Architect of Record, General Contractor and fenestration
installer one week before starting work of this section.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for sunshades by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification
labels intact.
B. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle sunshade materials
and components to avoid damage. Protect sunshade materials against damage from elements,
construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty.
B. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however
that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by
manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product:
1. Versoleil™ Sunshade Outrigger System by Kawneer Company Inc.

055000-2
 CHASE
SECTION 107113 – EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES

2. Substitutions: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by the

installed fenestration system manufacturer if not Kawneer, or an equal product compatible with
the installed fenestration system.
3. Substitution Acceptance: Acceptance will be in written form, either as an addendum or
modification, and documented by a formal change order signed by the Owner and Contractor.
B. Materials
1. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by glazed aluminum curtain wall and
storefront system manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required
finish, and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6, 6105-T5, or 6061-T6 alloy and temper. Wall
thickness at any location for the main frame to be not less than 0.070" (1.78 mm).
2. Thermal Barrier: When applied on a thermally broken captured system, sunshade shall be
thermally isolated from the interior aluminum mullions by a nominal 0.25" (6.3 mm) thick low
conductance material.
3. Aluminum sheet alloy: Shall meet the requirements of ASTM B209.
4. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated sunshade system, provide permanently elastic,
non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and
movement.
5. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of
glazed curtain wall and storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum
Standards and Data.
6. Sunshades
a. Sunshade Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded or formed-aluminum framing
members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
b. Fasteners and accessories: Nonmagnetic stainless steel to be non-corrosive and
compatible with aluminum members, anchors, and other components.
c. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material
and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action.
7. Accessory Materials
a. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762 mm) thickness
per coat.
8. Fabrication
a. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
b. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1) Profiles that are straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2) Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3) Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4) Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
5) Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
c. Sunshade: Fabricate components for assembly following approved shop drawings and/or
manufacturer's standard installation instructions.
d. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
approved shop drawings.
9. Aluminum Finishes
a. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
b. Factory Finishing: Kawneer Permanodic™ AA-M10C21A44 / AA-M45C22A44, AAMA 611,
Architectural Class I Color Anodic Coating, Color Black (Kawneer #29).

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

055000-3
 CHASE
SECTION 107113 – EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General.
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Refer to installation instructions of the
compatible curtain wall or storefront system. note that the installation instructions can differ from
one compatible system to another one.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure non-movement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect
glazing surfaces from welding.
7. Seal joints watertight where shown on approved shop drawings and/or manufacturer's standard
installation instructions.
B. Metal Protection.
1. Where Aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers
as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where Aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at
points of contact with other materials.
E. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section “Glazing”.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect installed product’s finish surfaces from damage during construction. Protect
aluminum sunshade system from damage from grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime,
cement, acid and/or acid wash, or other harmful contaminants.
B. Cleaning: Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions prior to owner’s acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site
and legally dispose of debris.

END OF SECTION

055000-4
 CHASE
SECTION 113113 - APPLIANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Lounge appliances as indicated in the Appliance Schedule and plans in the drawings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 061000 – Rough Carpentry: concealed wood blocking, supports, etc.
B. 064116 – Plastic-Laminate Clad Architectural Cabinets.
C. 223000 – Plumbing.
D. 260013 – Electrical General Provisions.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. UL Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; latest
edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each
piece of residential equipment specified.
C. Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty documents and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
D. Equipment manuals: for each type of appliance.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section,
with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. All appliances shall be listed and labeled by UL and compliant with NEMA standards.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver the products and materials in the manufacturers’ original packaging, dry and undamaged,
seals and labels intact.
B. Store products and materials in locked room with a weather-protected environment, out of direct
sunlight, clear of ground and moisture.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800 – Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
B. Minimum manufacturer warranty against material and manufacturing defects
1. Refrigerator: 1 year.
2. Microwave oven: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LOUNGE APPLIANCES
A. Full-size refrigerator/freezer
1. Certifications
a. Energy Star® certified.
b. ADA compliant.
c. UL Listed.
2. Total capacity: 17 cu.ft. minimum.
3. Frost-free or auto-defrost operation.
4. Finish: textured black.

113113-1
 CHASE
SECTION 113113 - APPLIANCES

5. Reversible handles- install to open as indicated in drawings.

6. Manufacturers, models
a. As indicated in the Appliance Schedule in the drawings, or alternate an model by that
manufacturer in lieu of that specified, if discontinued. Product specifications must match or
exceed those above without exceeding the planning parameters indicated in the drawings.
b. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
B. Undercounter refrigerator:
1. Certifications
a. Energy Star® certified.
b. ADA compliant.
c. UL Listed.
2. Total capacity: 4 cu.ft. minimum.
3. Finish: textured black.
4. Reversible or universal handles- install to open as indicated in drawings.
5. Height: 32.5” maximum
6. Manufacturers
a. As indicated in the Appliance Schedule in the drawings.
b. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
C. Microwave
1. Certifications
a. ADA compliant.
b. UL Listed.
2. Capacity: 2 cu.ft. minimum.
3. Power: 1000 W minimum.
4. Required features: turntable.
5. Finish: black.
6. Manufacturers
a. As indicated in the Appliance Schedule in the drawings.
b. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
D. TV/DVD player
1. Certifications
a. Energy Star® certified.
b. ADA compliant.
c. UL Listed.
2. Size: 19” Class
3. Required features: 720p minimum LCD or LED HDTV with built-in DVD player and remote
control.
4. Finish: black.
5. Manufacturers
a. As indicated in the Appliance Schedule in the drawings.
b. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
E. Coffee Maker
1. Owner-provided and installed.
2. Water connection provided by General contractor.
F. Water purifier
1. Owner-provided and installed.
2. Water connection provided by General contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify electrical and plumbing rough-in work is complete and correctly located. Notify the General
Contractor immediately of unsatisfactory conditions.

113113-2
 CHASE
SECTION 113113 - APPLIANCES

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install each appliance in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Position accessibility-compliant appliances such that the required operating space and clearances to
obstructions are provided.
C. Make all final electrical and plumbing connections. Refer to Divisions 22 and 26.
1. Coordinate with electrical contractor for Disposer direct-connection to adjacent disconnect
switch.
2. Coordinate with plumbing contractor for Disposer waste outlet connection to plumbing system.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove protective packing materials and protective surface films from equipment. Dispose of all
packaging, packing and protective surface covering materials in containers provided by the General
Contractor.
B. Wash and clean appliances. Clean any grease, finger marks or stains from appliances per
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Protect installed appliances under provisions of Section 017000.

END OF SECTION

113113-3
 CHASE
SECTION 122413 – ROLLER SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manually-operated window shades and accessories for sun/glare/heat control for non-customer areas.
B. Motorized window shades and accessories for sun/glare/heat control for customer areas and as
otherwise designated on the drawings.
C. Motorized shades and accessories for visibility control at Teller windows.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, product descriptions, installation instructions, detail
sheets, and specifications for each type system specified.
C. Samples for Selection: When not specified in the drawings, provide manufacturer's color chart or
fabric sample set and housing submittal with scaled section drawing.
D. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions and interface with other
products.
1. Room schedule including field-verified dimensions of each opening to receive window shade
systems.
2. Indicate System Series, operator, fabric selection, and mounting type.
3. Indicate control type.
4. Wiring diagrams.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's original cartons.
B. Individually package and mark shades with room number and opening number.
C. Inspect the materials upon delivery to assure that specified products have been received.
D. Store and handle shades to prevent damage to fabrics, finishes, and operators prior to installation.
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Not permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VENDOR
1. Lumenomics, LLC; Lewis Center, Ohio; www.lumenomics.com.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manually-operated window shades.
1. Non-customer areas.
2. As otherwise required in customer areas where openings are too narrow or otherwise insufficient
to accommodate motorized units.
B. Motorized window shades.
1. Customer areas.
2. Single- and double- roller units as indicated in the drawings.
3. Refer to drawings for unit configurations and fabric types.
C. Motorized Teller window “scrims”.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Rollers: 2-1/2 inches diameter by 0.065 inch wall, 20 gage steel; roller assembly easily removable.
B. Mounting brackets: Stamped steel, custom fabricated as required for outside jamb mounting.

122413-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 122413 – ROLLER SHADES

C. Roller motor (motorized shades only): 4-wire, instantly reversible, adjustable limit switches, thermal
overload protector, electric brake, and torque limiter with self-adjusting shut-off.
D. Clutch (manual shades only): Bi-directional, wrap spring clutch made of high-strength fiberglass-
reinforced polyester and high carbon steel.
E. Control chain (manual shades only): Continuous loop, certified No. 10 metal bead chain in appropriate
length. Chain must extend as necessary with accessibility code reach range requirements.
F. Roller idler assembly.
1. Manual shades: Clutch-operated rollers incorporating high-strength fiberglass-reinforced
polyester gudgeon, which snaps-locks into mounting bracket.
2. Motorized shades: Spring-loaded pin for ease of installation; nylon ball, self-aligning bearing.
G. Hem bar.
1. Window shades: Concealed within fabric.
2. Teller scrims: Exposed anodized Aluminum bar with bottom seal and end caps engaged at side
tracks.
H. Shade enclosures.
1. Window shades, in surface-mount housings.
a. Four-sided, interlocking box and cover custom-extruded of 6063-T5 aluminum, 0.062 inch
minimum wall.
b. End Caps: 16 gage steel, electrostatic finish, incorporating mounting brackets.
c. Single-shade enclosures: 5” x 5”.
d. Double-shade enclosures: 5” wide x 7.5” high, with rollers staggered.
e. Finish: Match the adjacent window finish, typically Black electrostatic or anodized for
prototypical projects.
2. Window shades, integrated with acoustic tile ceiling finishes.
a. Refer to Section 095113 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings.
3. Window shades, integrated with gypsum board soffits.
a. Make and model as specified in the drawings.
b. With integral “mud flange” for concealment of edge within gypsum board finish.
c. Removable closure plate finish to match the acoustical ceiling grid.
4. Teller scrims: Refer to details in drawings.
a. Anodized aluminum box housing built into soffit.
b. Anodized aluminum removable bottom cover set flush with soffit finish.
c. Anodized aluminum guide tracks extending from soffit to floor recessed into wall finish.
I. Shade fabrics: Refer to drawings for unit locations and configurations.
1. Fabric for moderate sun / glare / heat control: Phifer SheerWeave 2000; PVC coated fiberglass
and polyester weave, 5 percent open; color: White Platinum.
2. Fabric for high sun / glare / heat control and translucent shade in double-roller units: Phifer
SheerWeave 2410; PVC coated fiberglass and polyester weave, 3 percent open; color: Pearl
Grey / Oyster.
3. Opaque fabric for double-roller units: Indiana Coated Fabrics, Gray.
4. Scrim fabric: Phifer SheerWeave 7000; color Woven P64 – Sand.
J. Controls
1. Window shades: Wireless remote control unit for each shade or synchronized shade group.
Coordinate control mount location with Owner.
2. Teller scrims: Built-in push-button switch unit installed in building electrical system junction box.
Refer to drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install window shade systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and these
specifications.

122413-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 122413 – ROLLER SHADES

B. Assume responsibility for all field dimensions and mounting surfaces. Commencement of installation
work indicates acceptance of field conditions.
3.2 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIAL SETUP
A. Adjust window shade systems for proper operation, including smooth rolling, elimination of fabric
wrinkles, and plumb travel within the opening, without binding at side tracks where present.
B. Adjust teller scims to hang approximately 1/2” above floor finish in the closed position to allow fabric
wrinkles to dissipate.
C. Synchronized operation.
1. Synchronize shade operation between multiple shade units as required for logical control.
Coordinate with Owner on-site. Individual offices or spaces shall have all windows facing a
common compass direction synchronized.
2. Synchronized shades shall have matching start and stop points.
3. Program Teller scrims for individual control.
D. Review shade operation with Owner to verify synchronization settings prior to Owner acceptance of
completed Work.

END OF SECTION

122413-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MAT

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Performance Mat.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating properties of mat, component dimensions and edging
characteristics.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions.
D. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning instructions, stain removal procedures.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
E. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Sbemco. www.sbemco.com
1. Contact: Mark Tucci 800-468-0860 EXT 51; email mtucci@sbemco.com.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Ultra Dry: Recycled Content blown PVC, Anti-Microbial mat as indicated on the drawings.
1. Matting Area: Sized per location to accommodate door width and vestibule depth. Minimum 6
foot left to right by 5 foot front to back.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Size: Fabricate entrance mats as units, but do not exceed manufacturer's size recommendation.
B. Joints: Where joints in the entrance mats are necessary space them symmetrically and away from
normal traffic ways.
C. Entrance Mats with Curved Perimeter: Provide full size templates to the manufacturer to ensure
accurate fabrication.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify size of installation location before fabricating mats.
B. Vacuum clean floor installation location.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Sizes: Shop fabricate units of floor mat to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Where not
indicated otherwise, provide single unit for each mat installation, but do not exceed manufacturer's
maximum size recommendation for units intended for removal and cleaning. Where joints in mats are
necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Where possible, verify sizes by
field measurement before shop fabrication.
B. Accessories: Where indicated for adjacent flooring or wall-to-wall applications, provide anodized
aluminum transition strip as recommended by manufacturer.
C. General: Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.
Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and to prevent tripping
hazards.

124813-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MAT

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. General Cleaning: Refer to Manufacturer's Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions.
B. Owner's Personnel: Instruct Owner's personnel in proper maintenance procedures.
C. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction and until
acceptance.

END OF SECTION

124813-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 129300 – SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bicycle rack.
B. Exterior trash receptacle.
C. Mail box.
D. Exterior seating.
E. Wheel stop.
F. Custom shop- or site-fabricated exterior elements designed and detailed in the construction drawings
and not otherwise addressed in the Project Manual.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 033000 – Cast In Place Concrete.
B. 055000 – Metal Fabrications.
C. 099100 – Paints
D. 099300 – Stains and Transparent Finishes
E. 321313 – Portland Cement Concrete Paving
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each manufactured product to be used, including installation
methods and attachment requirements.
2. For each type of product indicated include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions
of individual components and profiles, finishes, field-assembly requirements, and installation
details.
3. For each type of preserved wood in each type of product, include wood product treatment
certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net
amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards.
C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full
range of available materials, colors, and patterns.
D. Shop Drawings: for custom-designed, shop-fabricated, or filed-fabricated elements detailed in the
drawings. For each type of product indicated include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, field-assembly requirements, and
installation details.
E. Maintenance Data: For Project site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source limitations: Obtain each type of project site furnishing through one source from a single
manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and
finish indicated; free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:
1. Rolled or Cold-Finished Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

129300-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 129300 – SITE FURNISHINGS

3. 3. Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429/B 429M.

4. 4. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
5. 5. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.
C. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:
1. Plates, shapes, and bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Pipe: Standard-weight steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53, or electric-resistance welded pipe
complying with ASTM A 135/A 135M.
3. Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500/A 500M.
4. Mechanical tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-welded carbon or alloy steel tubing complying
with ASTM A 513, or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M
and complying with dimensional tolerances in ASTM A 500/A 500M; zinc coated internally and
externally.
5. Sheet: Commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
6. Perforated metal: From steel sheet not less than0.090-inch (2.3-mm) nominal thickness;
manufacturer's standard perforation pattern.
7. Expanded metal: Carbon-steel sheets, deburred after expansion, and complying with ASTM F
1267.
8. Malleable-iron castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, grade as recommended by fabricator for type of use
intended.
9. Gray-iron castings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 200.
D. Stainless Steel: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:
1. Sheet, strip, plate, and flat bars: ASTM A 666.
2. Pipe: Schedule 40 steel pipe complying with ASTM A 312/A 312M.
3. Tubing: ASTM A 554.
E. Wood: Surfaced smooth on four sides with eased edges; kiln dried, free of knots, solid stock of
species indicated.
1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard transparent wood preservative treatment and sealer.
2. Preservative treatment: Pressure-treat wood according to AWPA U1 and the following:
a. Use preservative chemicals acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise
adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from
untreated materials.
b. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content, respectively,
of 19 and 15 percent. Do not use materials that are warped or do not comply with
requirements for untreated materials.
F. Plastic: Color impregnated, color and UV-light stabilized, and mold resistant.
1. Polyethylene: Fabricated from virgin plastic HDPE resin.
2. Recycled Polyethylene: Fabricated from not less than 90 percent recycled postconsumer waste
by weight content HDPE.
G. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant-coated or
non-corrodible materials; commercial quality, tamperproof, vandal and theft resistant.
1. Antitheft Hold-Down Brackets: For securing site furnishings to substrate; two per unit.
H. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-
gaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for
exterior applications. Refer to Section 055000, 2.1, F. Miscellaneous Materials.
I. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic-
controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create
pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound; resistant to erosion from water exposure
without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating; recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.
J. Galvanizing: Where indicated for steel and iron components, provide the following protective zinc
coating applied to components after fabrication:
1. Zinc-Coated Tubing: External, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 0.9 oz./sq.
ft.(0.27 kg/sq. m) of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, polymer film.

129300-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 129300 – SITE FURNISHINGS

Internal, same as external or consisting of 81 percent zinc pigmented coating, not less than 0.3
mil (0.0076 mm) thick.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: According to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, or ASTM A 924/A
924M.
2.2 BICYCLE RACK
A. Game Time, Inc., www.gametime.com: #F7700.
B. Bicycle Racks: Tubular steel pipe formed to allow at least one bicycle to lock simultaneously on each
bend and each end, securing one wheel and part of the frame.
1. Style: Serpentine rack formed from a continuous “S.”
2. Pipe: Carbon steel, ASTM A 53/A 53M; NPS 2, Schedule 40 (2-3/8 inch O.D., 0.154 inch wall).
3. Capacity: 5 bicycles.
4. Mounting: In-ground anchor.
5. Finish: Powder coat, maintenance-free and weather-resistant.
6. Color: Brown.
7. Accessories: In-ground grout cover.
2.3 MAIL BOX
A. Salsbury Industries, www.mailboxes.com
1. Box #4350S
2. Pedestal #4385S
2.4 TRASH CAN
A. Rubbermaid, www.rubbermaidcommercial.com: #A17 Architek Radius Top, Architectural bronze.
2.5 WHEEL STOP
A. Rubberform, www.rubberform.com: #RF-PWS38.
2.6 EXTERIOR SEATING
A. As specified or detailed in the construction drawings.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and angles.
B. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.
C. Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full-length, full
penetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed connections, finish
surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after finishing and welded
surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
D. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member
throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces
of handrail and railing components.
E. Preservative-Treated Wood Components: Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment if
possible. If cut after treatment, apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces.
F. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs, barbs,
splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.
G. Factory Asssembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field
assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.
2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

129300-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 129300 – SITE FURNISHINGS

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel and Powder-Coat Finishes: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat
finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Inspect for compliance
with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Require correction of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
C. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate with work of Section 321313.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are
indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.
D. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings.
E. Post setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed water.
Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set plumb or at
correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in position during
placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.
F. Posts set into voids in concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to depth
recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and 3/4 inch (19 mm) larger than OD of
post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete
with non-shrink, non-metallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring
material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.
G. Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After
posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with non-shrink,
non-metallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.

END OF SECTION

129300-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 210500 – COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Design and installation of a complete fire sprinkler system meeting the code requirements of local and
state Authorities Having Jurisdiction, as well as requirements otherwise stated in the Construction
Documents.
B. Fees or permits required to furnish and install the fire protection system shall be included as part of
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install an automatic fire sprinkler protection system as described in Contract Documents.
1. System shall be installed beginning with connection to the building fire service main or domestic
service main located as shown in the Construction Documents.
2. For projects in existing buildings, it is mandatory that a site visit be made by the fire sprinkler
system designer to inspect existing conditions before submitting bid.
B. Fabrication and installation must be performed by a Fire Sprinkler Contractor licensed by the
jurisdiction in which the work is performed.
C. Sprinkler system design must be submitted to and approved by the regulatory Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 210553 – Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment
B. Section 211300 – Wet Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Sprinkler systems design.
C. Division 260000 – Electrical
D. Section 283100 – Fire Detection and Alarm
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A 795/A 795M - Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2008.
B. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010.
C. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association;
2010.
D. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
E. UL 262 - Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
F. UL 312 - Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.5 APPLICABLE CODES AND ORDINANCES
A. National Fire Protection Association: Standards of the National Fire Protection Association for the
Installation of Sprinkler and Fire Protection Equipment.
1. Pamphlet No. 13, 13D, 13R, 14, and applicable standards.
2. Pamphlet No. 231, 231C and applicable standards.
B. International Building Code
C. International Fire Code
D. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Publications: List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and
Materials.
E. Applicable state and local codes and ordinances pertaining to fire protection systems and equipment.

210500-1
 CHASE
SECTION 210500 – COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

F. Requirements of state and local Fire Marshal, or other authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Applicable safety codes for elevators and escalators.
H. National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, edition as enforced by local
ordinance.
1.6 VERIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Before beginning work, Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall verify the following at the project site:
1. Adequacy of the water service to the building and compliance with the Construction Documents.
2. Before beginning work, Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall verify the following with the local Authority
Having Jurisdiction:
a. Location and size of fire department connection(s).
b. Location and size of test connection(s).
c. General piping requirements specific to the jurisdiction for bot interior and exterior
installations where applicable.
d. Sprinkler head spacing and positioning requirements specific to the jurisdiction.
1.7 PIPE SIZING
A. Fire Sprinkler Contractor/Designer shall size all piping for this project using the Hydraulic Calculation
Method in accordance with requirements of National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet No. 13 for
Hydraulically Designed Sprinkler Systems.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. See General Section 016000 – Product Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration
seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections.
1. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall submit complete system plans to Architect of Record for approval
prior to submission to Authorities Having Jurisdiction for permit.
a. Particular attention shall be paid in layout to coordination of sprinkler piping and structural
system of beams and mechanical ductwork. Notations shall be made on shop drawings
where pipes are required to pass through.
b. Wall sprinklers shall be used in areas of minimum headroom shall be arranged so as not to
conflict with egress and door swings.
c. Careful coordination shall be given to avoid changing ceiling lighting systems as shown on
drawings.
d. Sprinklers must be spaced equally with lights and ceiling mechanical fixtures, or otherwise
aligned with architectural features so as to minimize their appearance and impact on the
finished space.
e. In areas with exposed structure, piping shall neatly follow and be held tight to the line of the
deck. When approved by the Architect, piping may follow the line of the exposed structure.
f. No fabrication of piping shall be done until piping drawings are approved by the Architect,
the Mechanical Engineer and the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.
3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists.
4. Warranty certificates for all equipment.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: The sub-contractor for the fire protection system shall be duly licensed by the
state, county and city in which the project is being constructed. The fire sprinkler contractor must be
engaged in the installation of the types of automatic fire sprinkler system required for this project and
be fully familiar with all local conditions, specified codes and requirements. Prior to installation, submit
data for approval showing that the Fire Sprinkler Contractor has successfully installed Automatic Fire
Sprinkler Systems of the type and design as specified herein.

210500-2
 CHASE
SECTION 210500 – COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

C. Designer Qualifications: The designer for the fire sprinkler system shall be a staff employee of the
“Installer” and shall be either a licensed Fire Protection Engineer in a relevant jurisdiction, or a
Certified Engineering Technician in Fire Protection, Level III (NICET Level III). Registration or
certification shall be active during the entire contract period. The designer shall certify that the
drawings and installation are in accordance with the intent of the plans and specifications. The
designer shall make a complete and final inspection of the installation, including operating all alarms,
control valves, checking all piping, seismic bracing, hangers, etc. After checking all components of the
system, the designer shall provide a letter stating the installation is complete, operational and in
accordance with approved plans and specifications. If changes have been made in the installation
since the plans were approved, the designer shall correct the shop drawings and provide as-built
drawings to the Owner with the letter.
D. Final Inspection: The Sprinkler Contractor CET or PE responsible for overseeing this project shall
make a complete and final inspection of the installation, checking out all alarms, valves, piping,
seismic bracing, hangers, etc., conduct a final main drain test on the system, and provide
documentation of this final inspection

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
A. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code.
2.2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Valves: Bear UL label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve
body.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified
and indicated.
2.3 BURIED PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 40 or ASTM A 795 Standard Weight, black , with AWWA
C105 polyethylene jacket, or double layer, half-lapped polyethylene tape.
B. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or buttwelded; with double layer, half-lapped polyethylene
tape.
C. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings.
D. Joints: Welded in accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. Casing: Closed glass cell insulation.
2.4 ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795 Schedule 10 or ASTM A 53 Schedule 40, black.
B. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or butt welded.
C. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings, ASME B16.4 and threaded fittings.
D. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3 and threaded fittings.
E. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped
elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe.
2.5 2.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch (15 to 40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches (80 mm): Cast iron hook.

210500-3
 CHASE
SECTION 210500 – COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.
F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
G. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or
steel support.
H. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
2.6 GATE VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 inches (50 mm):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Nibco ; Product Model F-637-31 Flanged Ends.
b. Mueler; Product Model A-2073-6 Flanged Ends.
c. Approved equal.
2. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, solid wedge or disc, threaded ends.
B. Over 2 inches (50 mm):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Nibco ; Product Model F-637-31 Flanged Ends.
b. Mueler; Product Model A-2073-6 Flanged Ends.
c. Approved equal.
2. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre-grooved for mounting tamper switch, handwheel, OS&Y,
solid rubber covered bronze or cast iron wedge, flanged ends.
C. Over 4 inches (100 mm):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Nibco ; Product Model F-637-31 Flanged Ends.
b. Mueler; Product Model A-2073-6 Flanged Ends.
c. Approved equal.
2. Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with bolted bonnet, solid bronze wedge, flanged ends,
iron body indicator post assembly.
2.7 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 inches (50 mm):
1. Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable rubber disc,
threaded ends, with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.
B. Over 2 inches (50 mm): COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 - 6
1. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends, renewable
seat and disc.
2.8 BALL VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 inches (50 mm):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Milwaukee Model BBSC with threaded ends.
b. Nibco Model T-505 with threaded ends.
c. Nibco Model G-505 with grooved ends.
d. Approved equal.
2. Bronze two piece body, brass, chrome plated bronze, or stainless steel ball, teflon seats and
stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, threaded ends with union.
B. Over 2 inches (50 mm):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Milwaukee Model BBSC with threaded ends.
b. Nibco Model T-505 with threaded ends.
c. Nibco Model G-505 with grooved ends.
d. Approved equal.
2. Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle or gear
drive handwheel for sizes 10 inches (250 mm) and over, flanged.

210500-4
 CHASE
SECTION 210500 – COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

2.9 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Bronze Body:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Mueller:
1) Model B-3250-00 Wafer type with valve tamper switch.
2) Model B-3250-52 Grooved ends type with valve tamper switch.
b. Nibco:
1) Model WD3510-4 Wafer type with valve tamper switch.
2) Model GD1765-4 Grooved type with valve tamper switch.
c. Norris Model NW285AC-2K Wafer type with optional tamper switch.
d. Pratt Model IBV
2. Stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded or grooved ends, extended neck,
handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device , and built-in tamper proof switch rated
10 amp at 115 volt AC.
B. Cast or Ductile Iron Body:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Mueller:
1) Model B-3250-00 Wafer type with valve tamper switch.
2) Model B-3250-52 Grooved ends type with valve tamper switch.
b. Nibco:
1) Model WD3510-4 Wafer type with valve tamper switch.
2) Model GD1765-4 Grooved type with valve tamper switch.
c. Norris Model NW285AC-2K Wafer type with optional tamper switch.
d. Pratt Model IBV
2. Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc, resilient
replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive
and integral indicating device, and internal tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.
2.10 CHECK VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 inches (50 mm):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Nibco Model KT-403-W.
b. Walworth Figure 412.
c. Approved equal.
2. Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat, threaded ends.
B. Over 2 inches (50 mm):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Nibco Model F-938-31.
b. Walworth Fig. 883F.
c. Mueller Model A-2120-6.
d. Approved equal.
2. Iron body, bronze trim, swing check with rubber disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends with
automatic ball check.
C. 4 inches (100 mm) and Over:
1. Iron body, bronze disc, stainless steel spring, resilient seal, threaded, wafer, or flanged ends.
2.11 DRAIN VALVES
A. Compression Stop:
1. Bronze with hose thread nipple and cap.
B. Ball Valve:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Milwaukee Model BBSC with threaded ends
b. Nibco
1) Model T-505 with threaded ends
2) Model G-505 with grooved ends
2. Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inch (20 mm) hose thread.

210500-5
 CHASE
SECTION 210500 – COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR
A. Fire Sprinkler Contractor responsibilities include, but are not limited to the following.
1. Inspect the job site prior to fabricating materials.
2. Coordinate the design with all plans and other contractors so as to minimize installation conflicts.
3. Call for a meeting with all trades to coordinate and sequence installation with the progress of
other mechanical and structural systems, and generally coordinate work spaces for all of the
work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 13.
E. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.
F. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.
G. Areas Subject to Freezing Temperatures:
1. Branches serving these areas may contain a cold weather valve and anti-freeze loop or dry
heads.
H. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
J. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
2. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
3. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement
without disengagement of supported pipe.
4. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected
horizontal piping.
5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.
6. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
7. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Painting Section. Hangers and
supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered
exposed.
K. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain bottom of
pipe level.
L. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are
welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to
welding. Refer to General Painting Section.
M. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated and approved in writing by the
Structural Engineer.
N. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, and walls.
O. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to fill
gaps and eliminate air movement. Where pipes pass through fire resistance rated assemblies,
provide manufactured fire resistance rated sleeve assemblies or custom sleeves meeting fire
resistance rating requirements as detailed in the Construction Documents.

210500-6
 CHASE
SECTION 210500 – COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

P. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible
and joined to ensure the integrity of the system, without the possibility of galvanic corrosion. Provide
necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
Q. Die-cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other
non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.
R. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to
installation.
S. Provide gate valves for shut-off or isolating service.
T. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, at low points of piping and apparatus.
U. Work shall be executed and inspected in accordance with laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of
local authorities having jurisdiction over such work. Should any change in the drawings or
specifications be required to conform to these ordinances, Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall notify the
Architect of Record at time of submitting their bid. After entering into the contract, Fire Sprinkler
Contractor shall be held to complete all necessary work to meet local requirements without additional
expense to Owner.
V. Sprinkler system shall be installed such that spacing of sprinkler heads in relation to ceiling shall not
exceed that permitted for type of ceiling construction involved.
W. General Contractor is required under contract stipulations to leave chases and openings in walls,
floors, ceilings, partitions and beams, etc., provided Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall furnish to General
Contractor full information as to locations, dimensions, etc., of such chases and openings including
the provision and proper setting of all sleeves and other equipment in advance of construction of work
so as to cause no delay in work.
X. Should any cutting of walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, etc., be required for proper installation of the
work or apparatus of Fire Sprinkler Contractor due to his failure in giving the General Contractor
proper information at time required, such cutting shall be done at his own expense and in a manner
acceptable to Architect of Record. All drilling and patching for anchor bolts, hangers, and other
supports shall be subject to approval of Architect of Record.
Y. Siamese connections and service mains to sprinkler room shall be provided by Fire Sprinkler
Contractor and connections to sprinkler system shall be by Fire Sprinkler Contractor.
Z. Conduits and wiring for alarm contacts, power wiring from starter to motor, and starter shall be
provided and wired complete by Electrical Contractor for testing by Fire Sprinkler Contractor. Control
wiring from starter to control and safety devices shall be provided and wired by Fire Sprinkler
Contractor.
3.3 FIELD TESTING
A. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall submit to Architect of Record a certificate covering materials and tests,
similar to that specified by National Fire Protection Association, with a request for formal inspection at
least five working days prior to date of inspection. The Authorities Having Jurisdiction shall also be
notified to witness this test. At such inspection any or all of required tests shall be repeated as
directed by the Inspector or Owner’s Representative.
B. All portions of the system shall be hydrostatically tested.
C. Flushing of underground piping shall be done in accord with National Fire Protection Association.
D. On completion of the work, system shall be tested by full flow.
1. Each control valve for each sprinkler system shall be tested by use of an inspector's test valve or
the application of heat to sprinkler head most remote from the valve.
2. All alarms and other devices shall be tested.
3. All appliances and equipment for testing shall be furnished by Fire Sprinkler Contractor.
4. Expenses, except for water and electricity used in connection with the tests, shall be paid by Fire
Sprinkler Contractor.

210500-7
 CHASE
SECTION 210500 – COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

5. On completion of tests by Fire Sprinkler Contractor, any defects detected shall be corrected by
Fire Sprinkler Contractor at his own expense and additional tests made until systems are proved
satisfactory.

END OF SECTION

210500-8
 CHASE
SECTION 220013 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment and services required to execute, install
and complete, ready for use, all plumbing work including sanitary and water systems for the project,
according to the drawings and these specifications.
B. In general, the work to be done includes the furnishing and installing of complete plumbing systems
inside the building.
1. Sanitary waste, vent and storm drain piping
2. Hot and cold domestic water piping
3. Building water service
4. Plumbing fixtures and equipment
5. Natural gas piping
6. All other materials and equipment shown on the drawings and/or specified herein.
C. The installation of the above piping shall be complete with all fixtures, traps, hangers, valves, anchors,
supports, sleeves, insulation and all other necessary material and labor as hereinafter specified and
called for on the drawings, or required to furnish a plumbing system complete in every respect,
according to the meaning and intent of the drawings and specifications and ready for satisfactory use.
D. All work shall be installed in accordance with all applicable rules and regulations of all authorities
having jurisdiction (AHJ).
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 221116 – Domestic Water Supply System.
B. 221316 – Storm Drainage, Sanitary Waste and Vent System.
C. 220700 – Plumbing Insulation.
D. 231123 – Natural Gas Piping.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Section 013000.
B. Product Data: For each type of product. Certify that installed products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
C. Equipment manufacturers’ warranty cards, completed with product data.
D. Water samples, test results, and reports specified in "Testing and Sterilizing" article.
1.5 COMPLIANCE
A. Installation of plumbing systems including fixtures, equipment, materials and workmanship shall be in
accordance with the State and Local Plumbing Code.
1.6 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Drawings for the work consist of a complete set of plans and specifications, to which will be added
during the period of construction any other detail drawings as may be necessary in the opinion of the
Architect or Engineer of Record to show the proper installation of the work.
B. The dimension and ratings of equipment herein specified or indicated on the drawings are intended to
establish the outlined characteristic of such equipment generally.
C. Where manufacturer's catalog numbers or types are mentioned in the specifications or indicated on
the drawings, they are intended to be used. In all cases, the installer shall verify the duty specified

220013-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220013 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

with the particular characteristics of the equipment they intend to supply. The installer is cautioned to
consult other applicable articles in the specification, particularly those in motors, starters, etc.
D. The drawings and accompanying specifications are to be considered as an important and integral part
of same, and anything omitted from one and embodied in the other is to be considered as essential to
the requirements of the Contract and must be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
E. Equipment that does not fit into available building spaces will not be approved regardless of whether
the make is approved.
F. No important dimensions shall be obtained by scaling a drawing; important dimensions and elevations
shall be determined by computing from the established dimensions and reference points given on the
Architect's drawings. Site grade elevations shall be determined from the Civil Engineer’s drawings.
However, it is not the intention of the drawings to indicate all necessary offsets in piping and ductwork
in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, preserve head room and keep all
openings and passageways clear without further construction.
G. It is intended that apparatus shall be located symmetrically with Architectural elements,
notwithstanding the fact that locations indicated by the drawings may be distorted for clearness in
presentation.
H. Where discrepancies are found by the Contractor after signing the Contract between the Specification
sections, or between drawings, or any contradictory sizes or plate numbers describing the
manufacturer's item, such shall be brought to the attention of the Architect of Record, and the
Architect shall determine the proper items to be used with no additional cost to the Owner.
I. Contractor shall refer to the Architectural and Engineering plans for details and large scale drawings
and also to the equipment shop drawings for exact locations of water and waste outlets for equipment
furnished under other sections of these specifications. The above mentioned equipment shop
drawings will be furnished to the Contractor before roughing-in. The Contractor shall not install any
piping for said equipment until he has received approved shop drawings from the Architect for same.
J. The run of all lines shown on drawings is to be regarded as diagrammatic and tentative. Before
running, Contractor shall carefully verify location, depth and size of sewers to which connection is
proposed. Before running any lines within building, this Contractor shall assure himself that they can
be run as contemplated without trapping or interfering with footings, beams, columns, other piping,
fixtures, etc.
1.7 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION
A. Interruption of existing sanitary waste and domestic water services: Do not interrupt service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated.
1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of
service(s).
2. Do not proceed with interruption of service(s) without Construction Manager's written permission.
B. Contractor shall confer with other trades at the site before installation of his work to avoid
interferences so that maximum headroom and clearances may be maintained. In the event that
interferences develop between work and various trades, the Owners decision will be final and no
additional compensation will be allowed for the moving of misplaced work.
C. Particular attentions shall be paid to situations where recessed equipment, pipes and lights occur, or
where the work of several trades occurs together above suspended ceilings, in pipe shafts or in areas
where space is limited.
D. It is presumed that the Contractor has carefully examined the drawings and specifications for the
entire work and the job conditions that will ensue before executing the agreement and has reported to
the Architect in writing any interference of conflicts with his work. If the Contractor has failed to call
such interferences of conflicts relative to this work, the drawings, specifications, the work of other
trades, and job conflicts arise during the construction period, they shall be submitted and subjected to
the Architect's decision, all changes made and all damage to construction shall be repaired by the
Contractor without additional cost.

220013-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220013 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

E. All fixtures, equipment, devices, switches, outlets, pumps, etc., shall be positioned to avoid all
interferences with and to assure proper coordination with the work of all other trades, cases,
partitions, wall, floor and ceiling patterns, architectural features, etc. All recessed devices, fixtures,
etc. shall be coordinated with all wall, floor and ceiling patterns. The Architect will work out the
conflicts and adjustments where such adjustments are warranted.
1.8 WORK PRIORITY OVER OTHER TRADES
A. All trades shall work in cooperation with one another to fit piping and ductwork into the structure as job
conditions may demand. The Architect of Record shall make all final decisions as to right of way and
run of pipe, ducts, etc.
B. In general, priority is to be arranged as follows:
1. Recessed lighting fixtures.
2. Sheet metal ductwork.
3. Plumbing waste lines, downspouts and vents.
C. All reinforcing of framing shall be kept at an absolute minimum, and when it is necessary shall be only
as approved by the Architect of Record and local AHJ. Where notching is permitted, it shall be
minimal.
D. All equipment, devices, ducts, fixtures, hangers, etc. shall be securely and permanently hung from
supporting walls, ceilings, etc. as approved.
1.9 GUARANTEE
A. Each Contractor shall guarantee and warranty all work and material performed and installed by him
directly or by any of his subcontractors against defective and inferior materials and workmanship for a
period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance. All guarantees shall be in writing and delivered to
the Owner before final certificates are issued. Contractor shall make good at his own expense and
without cost of the Owner any and all defective and inferior materials and workmanship that develop
within the guarantee period.
B. Listed manufacturers to provide labeling and warranty of their respective products.
1.10 DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIAL
A. All material or work found to be defective or not in strict conformity with the drawings or different from
the requirements of the drawings and specifications or defaced or damaged through negligence of the
Contractor or his employees, or through the action of fire or weather, will be rejected and shall be
immediately removed from the premises by the Contractor and satisfactory material and work
substituted.
B. Any defective work or imperfect work that may be discovered shall be corrected. No previous
inspection or certificate on account shall behold to relieve the Contractor from his obligation to furnish
sound material and to perform good and satisfactory work.
1.11 CHASES AND OPENINGS
A. Slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings and roofs as specified will be
provided by the various trades in their respective materials, but the trade requiring them shall see that
they are properly located and shall do any cutting and patching caused by the neglect to do so.
1.12 INSERTS AND SLEEVES
A. Lay out the work in accordance with approved shop drawings. Furnish and set in place in advance of
pouring of slabs or construction of walls, all inserts, and sleeves necessary to complete the work.
B. The use of lead shield anchors or power-actuated fasteners and devices is not permitted.
1.13 CLEANING UP
A. Contractor shall keep the premises reasonably free of all debris and waste materials resulting from
the work under this section. All such debris and rubbish shall be removed from the site. On completion
and before final acceptance of the work, all debris, rubbish, leftover materials, tools, and equipment
shall be removed from the site.

220013-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220013 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

B. Machinery, apparatus, exposed piping and insulation shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster
and other materials, grease and oil spots removed with cleaning solvent, surfaces carefully wiped,
cracks and corners scraped clean.
C. Failure of the Contractor to clean up as required will be cause for the Architect to order this work done
by others at the expense of this Contractor.
1.14 PROTECTION
A. Each trade shall keep all of its respective pipe and duct openings closed by means of plugs or caps to
prevent the entrance of foreign matter, and cover the fixtures, equipment and apparatus as required to
protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation.
Any such fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the work shall be
restored to its original condition or replaced by the respective trade at no cost to the Owner.
1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Contractor shall arrange for all technical instruction of Owner’s maintenance personnel, either by the
Contractor or the equipment manufacturer's personnel. A letter shall be written to the Engineer prior to
these instruction days so that he can attend.
B. Manuals: Furnish three (3) sets of manuals, in bound form, hard cover, each containing data covering
capacities, maintenance and operation of each major item of equipment and apparatus. Operation
instructions shall cover all phases of control and shall also include the following:
1. List of Spare Parts: Recommend for normal service requirements.
2. Part List: Identifying the various parts of the equipment for repair and replacement purposes.
C. Instruction books may be standard booklets but should be clearly marked to indicate applicable
equipment and paragraphs.
1.16 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Contractor shall keep on the job one complete set of the contract working drawings on which he shall
record any deviations or changes from such drawings made during construction. Record drawings
shall show change in size, type, capacity, etc. of materials, device or piece of equipment, location of
any outlet or source in building service system, re-routing of any piping or other building services.
B. These drawings shall also record the location of all concealed services, piping and other equipment
by indication of measured dimensions to each such line from readily identifiable and accessible walls
or columns of the building. Drawings shall show elevations of duct runs etc.
C. When the project is completed and as a condition of final payment, the Contractor shall certify to the
accuracy of the record drawings and specifications by endorsement thereof and shall require each
Subcontractor to so certify by endorsement of the record drawings and specifications for his portion of
the work, and deliver same to the Owner, together with copies of all change orders and shop
drawings, in accordance with the General and Supplementary General Conditions.
1.17 MINOR DEVIATIONS
A. The dimensions and ratings of equipment herein specified or indicated on the drawings are intended
to establish the desired outlines and characteristics of such equipment. Minor deviations will be
permitted to allow manufacturers specified to bid their nearest stock equipment.
B. Manufacturers catalog or model numbers and types mentioned in the specifications or indicated on
the drawings are intended to be used as guides and shall not be interpreted as taking precedence
over specific ratings or duty called for or shown. In all cases, the manufacturer shall verify the duty
specified with the particular characteristics of the equipment he intends to offer for approval, and shall
offer only items that comply with specification requirements.

220013-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220013 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

C. Where the equipment furnished differs in physical character from that specified or indicated, or where
Contractor's substituted equipment requires increased services and/or facilities to be provided by
other trades, such substitutions must be approved by the Architect of Record. The Contractors making
the substitutions shall pay for such services and facilities and shall bear all costs for modifying the
building to receive the product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STORM DRAINAGE, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
A. For material and product specifications, refer to Section 221316 – Storm Drainage, Sanitary Waste
and Vent System.
B. Definitions.
1. Above-ground: Occurring 6” or greater above adjacent finished grade or slab-on-grade surface.
2. Below-ground: Occurring 6” or less above adjacent finished grade or slab-on-grade surface.
C. Above-ground storm drainage and sanitary waste piping may be any of the following:
1. Service class cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, hubless-piping couplings, and coupled joints.
3. Copper Type DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
4. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
5. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded nonpressure transition couplings.
D. Above-ground vent piping may be any of the following:
1. Service class cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, hubless-piping couplings, and coupled joints.
3. Copper Type DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
4. Hard copper tube, Type M, copper pressure fittings, and soldered joints.
5. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
6. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded nonpressure transition couplings.
E. Below-ground storm drainage, sanitary waste, and vent piping may be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping.
a. Gaskets and gasketed joints.
b. Caulking materials and calked joints.
2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, hubless-piping couplings, and coupled joints.
3. Solid Wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded nonpressure transition couplings.
F. Above-ground sanitary-sewage force mains may be any of the following:
1. Hard copper tube, Type L, copper pressure fittings, and soldered joints.
2. Galvanized-steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints.
3. Grooved-end, galvanized-steel pipe; grooved-joint, galvanized-steel-pipe appurtenances; and
grooved joints.
G. Below-ground sanitary-sewage force mains may be any of the following:
1. Hard or soft copper tube, Type L, copper pressure fittings, and soldered joints.
2. Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint piping and mechanical joints.
3. Ductile-iron, push-on-joint piping and push-on joints.
4. Ductile-iron, grooved-joint piping and grooved joints.
5. Fitting-type transition coupling for piping smaller than NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and pressure transition
coupling for NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and larger if dissimilar pipe materials.Water
2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING:
A. For material and product specifications, refer to Section 221116 – Domestic Water Supply System.
B. Definitions.
1. Above-ground: Occurring 6” or greater above adjacent finished grade or slab-on-grade surface.
2. Below-ground: Occurring 6” or less above adjacent finished grade or slab-on-grade surface.
C. Above-ground Piping: Copper tubing, Type L hard drawn.

220013-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220013 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

D. Below-ground piping:
1. 4 to 12 Inches: Ductile-iron pipe, ductile-iron or gray-iron fittings, rubber gaskets, and push-on or
mechanical joints.
2. 2-1/2 to 4 Inches: Soft copper tube, Type L, cast-copper-alloy, solder-joint pressure fittings and
soldered joints with Alloy Sn95, Sn95, or E solder.
3. 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 Inches: 3- or 4-inch size, ductile-iron pipe, ductile-iron or gray-iron fittings or
ductile-iron compact fittings, rubber gaskets, and push-on or mechanical joints.
4. 2 Inches and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type L, cast-copper-alloy solder-joint pressure fittings
and soldered joints with Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E solder.
2.3 GAS PIPING SYSTEM
A. Refer to Section 231123 – Natural Gas Piping.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS
A. Pipe Nipples: Copper alloy for use in copper tubing and hot-dip galvanized Schedule 80 steel pipe for
use in steel piping.
B. Unions for use in copper tubing; ANSI B16.39 hot-dip galvanized steel for use in steel piping.
C. Escutcheon Plates: Provide one piece of split hinge type metal plates for piping passing through
floors, walls and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide chromium plated finish on plates in finished
spaces. Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces. Securely anchor plates in place with set
screws or other approved positive means.
D. Pipe Sleeves: Provide where piping passes through walls, floors, roofs and partitions. Secure sleeves
in proper position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass
through entire thickness of walls, floors and partitions. Provide no less than 0.25-inch space between
exterior of piping or pipe insulation and interior of sleeve. Firmly pack space with insulation and caulk
at both ends of the sleeve with plastic water proof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or
provide a segmented elastomeric seal.
1. Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls and Floors: Provide ASTM A53 or ASTM A120,
Schedule 40 or Standard Weight, hot-dip galvanized steel pipe sleeves. Extend sleeves in floor
slabs 3 inches above the finished floor, except sleeves are not required where DWV piping
passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade.
2. Sleeves in Partitions and Other than Masonry and Concrete Walls and Floors: Provide hot-dip
galvanized steel sheet having a nominal weight of not less than 0.90 pounds per square foot.
E. Encasement for underground metal piping: Refer to the following:
1. Section 221316 – Storm Drainage, Sanitary Waste and Vent System.
2. Section 221116 – Domestic Water Supply System.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all exposed storm drainage, sanitary waste, vent, supply, gas, and other piping with applied
labels and tags.
1. Apply manufactured tags and labels compliant with local plumbing code and authorities having
jurisdiction for types and sizes of pipes and valves.
2. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels.
a. Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, pipe size, and flow direction
according to ANSI/ASME A13.1-2007.
b. Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on
Drawings.
B. Identify all valves, exposed or concealed, with a valve tag indicating service type and consecutive
index number
1. General requirements for valve tags.
a. Metal plate with beaded metal chain.
b. Stamped characters or adhesive label with clear, legible hand-printed letters. Terminology
shall match drawings and coordinate with Valve Schedule.
C. Valve Schedules.
1. Provide one Valve Schedule for each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper.

220013-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220013 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

2. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of
valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
3. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
D. Warning Tags.
1. Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte
finish suitable for writing.
2. Size: As determined suitable for the intended use and visibility.
3. Fasteners: Adhesive or grommet and wire.
4. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT
OPERATE."
5. Color: Safety yellow background with black lettering, White with Red/Black "Danger" header,
Yellow with Black "Caution" header, Orange with Black "Warning" header.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Contractor shall provide all excavating, backfilling and removal of unused excavated material not used
for trenches required to install his underground work inside the building.
B. The run of all lines shown on drawings is to be regarded as diagrammatic and tentative. Before
running, Contractor shall carefully verify location, depth and size of sewers to which connection is
proposed. Before running any lines within building, this Contractor shall assure himself that they can
be run as contemplated without trapping or interfering with footings, beams, columns, other piping,
fixtures, etc.
C. Excavate to the required depths and grade bottoms of trenches to secure required openings for pipes
or ducts.
D. The widths of the trenches shall be such as to insure the proper making up of joints
E. Where unstable soil incapable of supporting the pipe is encountered, such soil shall be removed to
firm bearing and the trenches backfilled with compactible material as required and tamped to provide
uniform support.
F. Pipe and ducts shall not be laid on frozen sub-grade.
G. The width of a trench at a point 1" above top of pipe shall not be greater than the O.D. of the pipe or
duct plus 12". Above this point, the sides of a trench shall be kept as nearly vertical as possible and
braced to protect foundations, utility lines, and workmen.
H. Bottoms of trenches shall be accurately excavated by hand to provide firm, uniform bearing for the
bottom quarter of the pipe or duct. Pipe having bells, sleeves or other enlargement at the joints shall
have recesses excavated to accommodate these joints.
I. Trenches shall not be backfilled until piping has been tested by the Contractor as required and
approved by the Owner and/or any AHJ.
J. The placing and tamping or backfill shall be uniform to insure the proper alignment of piping and avoid
injury to any part of the work or the creation of unequal pressure. All backfill for excavations and
trenches shall be clean sand or gravel free from silt, clay and loam. Do not backfill with material
obtained from digging without prior approval. Backfill with clay will be allowed only for exterior
trenches NOT under any paved areas.
K. Tamp and puddle all trenches as required to avoid future settlement. Remove excess materials from
the site, as may be required.
L. All trenches inside the building shall be backfilled to the top with clean sand and compacted by hand
tamping. Backfill of the trench shall be placed in lifts not exceeding 1'-0".
M. All backfill shall be compacted.

220013-7 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220013 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

3.2 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED PIPING

A. Grade trench bottom to provide smooth, firm, stable, and rock-free foundation throughout length of
piping.
B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at surface on which piping is to be laid and backfill
with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level.
C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with tamped-sand backfill. Dig bell
holes at each pipe joint to relieve bells of loads and to ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on
foundation.
3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Each Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching of building materials required for the installation
of work in his contract. No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Architect of
Record and all cutting shall be done in a manner as directed by him.
B. Contractor shall also refer to the Architectural plans for details and large scale drawings and to the
equipment shop drawings for exact locations of water and waste outlets for equipment furnished
under other sections of these specifications. The above mentioned equipment shop drawings will be
furnished to the Contractor before roughing-in. The Contractor shall not install any piping for said
equipment until he has received approved shop drawings from the Architect for same.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation of plumbing systems including fixtures, equipment, materials and workmanship shall be in
accordance with the State and Local Plumbing Code, and with any Authority Having Jurisdiction.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems.
1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.
2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
D. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles
or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
G. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
H. Install piping at indicated slopes.
I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
L. Where required by authority having jurisdiction, install seismic restraints on piping, compliant with the
requirements of that authority.
M. No plumbing fixture, device equipment, or pipe connection shall be installed that will provide a cross
connection or interconnection between potable water supply and any source of non-potable water,
such as a drainage system, a soil or waste pipe.
3.5 SLEEVES
A. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs, partitions, ceilings, and floors.
B. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at service penetrations through foundation wall for
watertight installation.

220013-8 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220013 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

3.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all necessary material and labor to connect to the plumbing system all fixtures and equipment
having plumbing connections, which are furnished under fit-up package work or are specified in other
sections of these specifications.
B. Trap drainage connections.
C. Equipment the supply line to each item of equipment or fixture, except faucets, flush valves, or other
control valves which are supplied with an integral stop with a stop valve to enable isolation of the item
for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Anchor
supply piping to all fixtures, and flush valves to prevent movement. Make connections between the
earthenware of fixtures sand the flanges on soil pipe watertight with one-piece special molded plastic
gasket. Do not use all bulk material including putty and plastics for gaskets. Secure floor drains to the
waterproofing or flashing in watertight manner.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Threaded connections.
1. Jointing compound for pipe threads shall be polytetrfluoroethylene (PTFE) pipe thread tape, pipe
cement and oil, or PTFE powder and oil; apply only on male threads. Provide exposed ferrous
pipe threads with one coat of Fed. Spec. TT-P-645 primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 1.0 mil.
3.9 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide adjustable hangers, saddles, inserts, brackets, rollers, clamps, supplementary steel, etc., as
required for proper support of all pipelines. Hangers shall be designed to allow for expansion and
contraction of pipelines and shall be of adequate size to permit covering to run continuously through
hangers. Coordinate location of hangers with light fixtures as shown on electrical drawings. Hangers
provided under other sections shall not be used for support of piping or equipment provided under this
section unless the Architect grants permission in writing. Hangers shall be of manufacture and type
specified, or approved equal.
1. Single Hangers: Support single pipe runs with clevis type hangers.
2. Trapeze Hangers: Support multiple pipe runs on trapeze type hangers. Provide all necessary
supporting steel rollers to keep pipe in alignment and allow for expansion. Concealed trapeze
hangers shall be Unistrut.
3. Supporting Spacing: Pipe support spacing and sizes of pipe-hanging suspension rods shall
conform to the following table:
Pipe Spacing: Pipe Supporting Spacing
1/2" and 3/4" Not over 6'-6"
1" and 1-1/4" Not over 8'-6"
1-1/2" Not over 10'-0"
2" and 2-1/2" Not over 12'-0"
4" and Larger Not over 16'-0"

Pipe Size Rod Diameter

Up to 2" 3/8"
2-1/2" to 3-1/2" 1/2"
4" and Larger 5/8"
4. For caulked bell-and-spigot piping provide a hanger for each section of pipe, located at shoulder
of bell.
5. Conform to table below for maximum spacing of supports:
Horizontal Vertical
Pipe Material In Feet In Feet
Cast Iron Soil Pipe 5 15
Copper Tubing - 1-1/4 Inches and Smaller 6 10

220013-9 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220013 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

Copper Tubing - 1-1/2 Inches and Larger 10 10

Steel Pipe 12 15
6. Fastening Devices
a. Drilled-In Threaded Inserts: Where supports in beams and slabs are required after concrete
and has been poured, Drilled-In Threaded Inserts or Self Drilling Expansion Shields shall be
provided, installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations as to maximum
loading, but in no case more than 10'-0" apart.
b. Expansion Anchors and Powder-Actuated Fasteners and Devices: The use of lead shield
anchors or powder-actuated fasteners and devices is not permitted.
7. Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor.
8. Pipe Attachments: Install the following:
a. Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8 or Type 42 for vertical runs.
b. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1 for individual straight horizontal runs 100 feet
and less.
c. Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43 for individual straight horizontal runs longer than
100 feet.
d. Spring Cushion Rolls: MSS Type 49, where indicated, for individual straight horizontal runs
longer than 100 feet.
e. Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 44 for multiple straight horizontal runs 100 feet or longer. Support
pipe rolls on trapeze.
f. Spring Hangers: MSS Type 52 for support of base of vertical runs.
B. Supplementary steel: Provide all necessary supplementary steel or proper support or attachment of
hangers. Steel shall be painted with one coat of rust-inhibiting primer.
C. Saddles: Provide protection saddles at hanger points of insulated pipe. Saddles shall be Crawford Fig.
35 or equal.
3.10 PAINTING
A. Prime and paint all exposed piping and related accessories not otherwise concealed within utility
rooms.
B. All priming and painting shall conform to all requirements of the painting specifications and the
Architect shall select all types and colors.
C. Piping, conduit, etc. which are in walls, floors, or above a finished ceiling shall not be painted.
3.11 INSPECTIONS
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be
made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after
roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests
specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make
required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Inspect and test piping systems following the procedures of the authority having jurisdiction.
D. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.12 TESTING AND STERILIZING
A. All new water piping and mains upon completion before being covered shall be treated to a
hydrostatic pressure of 50% more than maximum system pressure, but no less than 100 psig of
pressure for a 2 hour period.
B. Any additional tests, if required by local authorities, to be as directed by them.
C. If tests show any leaks in the pipe or at joints, same are to be made tight and tests repeated; tests to
be made in the presence of the Owner or those in authority and the cost of all tests paid by the
Plumbing Contractor.

220013-10 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220013 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

D. Upon completion of all testing and closing of leads, all new water mains shall be sterilized in
accordance with the requirements of the State Board of Health and those of the local governing
authorities.
3.13 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF PIPE, FIXTURES, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Before being placed in position, carefully clean pipe and fittings internally and externally. Maintain all
pipe in a clean condition. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation.
C. Tightly cover fixtures and equipment and protect against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury.
D. Upon completion of all work, thoroughly clean, adjust, and operate the fixtures, materials and
equipment.
E. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by plumbing system installation.
F. After the completion of the plumbing installation, clean foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers,
etc., from all fixtures, apparatus, equipment and interior piping installed by him.
G. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated from his operations from the premises.
3.14 FIELD DRAWINGS
A. Maintain 2 sets of drawings corrected with colored pencil showing exact locations of equipment,
piping, valves, etc., with such dimensions as re necessary to identify services. Furnish "as built"
drawings to the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel.

END OF SECTION

220013-11 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220700 – PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Perform all work necessary to complete the insulation of the mechanical systems, as
shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The work shall include insulation for but not be limited to
the following principal items.
1. Piping.
2. Equipment.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 221000 - Plumbing Piping.
1.2 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Contractor shall refer to the Architectural plans for details and to the Mechanical Drawings for
locations of ductwork, piping and equipment furnished under other sections of these Specifications.
B. Each Contractor shall do all cutting and patching of building material required for installation work in
his contract. No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Architect and all cutting
shall be done in a manner as directed by him.
1.3 GUARANTEE
A. Insulation Contractor shall guarantee and shall require guarantee from all manufactures furnishing
materials, that materials and installation comply with all the requirements of the drawings and
specifications.
1.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage before, during and after
installation. Any such insulation or covering prior to final acceptance of the work shall be satisfactorily
repaired or replace at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to the following characteristics for insulation including facings, cements, and adhesives,
when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to
the authority having jurisdiction. Label insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory.
B. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less.
C. Exterior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating of 150 or less.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Provide insulation materials of manufacture and type as listed below, or approved equal.
1. Glass Fiber Insulation: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin.
a. Jacket: All-purpose, factory-applied, laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft
paper and aluminum foil having self-sealing lap.
b. Board: ASTM C 612, Class 2, semi-rigid jacketed board.
1) Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 average maximum, at 75 deg F mean temperature.
2) Density: 12 pcf average maximum.
c. Blanket: ASTM C 553, Type II, Class F-1, jacketed flexible blankets.
1) Thermal Conductivity: 0.32 average maximum, at 75 deg F mean temperature.
d. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, rigid pipe insulation, jacketed.
1) Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 average maximum at 75 deg F mean temperature.
2) Density: 10 average maximum.
e. Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and Follow-up service.

220700-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220700 – PLUMBING INSULATION

1) Lagging Adhesive: MIL-A-3316C, non-flammable adhesive in the following Classes and

Grades:
a) Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass fiber
insulation, sealing edges of glass fiber insulation, and bonding lagging cloth to
unfaced glass fiber insulation.
b) Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
2) Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.
f. Vapor Barrier Coating: Waterproof coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for
outside service.
2. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: Flexible expanded closed-cell structure with smooth skin
on both sides.
a. Tubular Materials: ASTM C 534, Type I.
b. Sheet Materials: ASTM C 534, Type II.
c. Thermal Conductivity: 0.30 average maximum at 75 deg F.
d. Coating: Water based latex enamel coating recommended by insulation manufacturer.
e. Adhesive: Solvent-based, contact adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3. Jackets: ASTM C 921, Type 1, except as otherwise indicated.
a. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil.
1) Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum, when tested according to ASTM E 96.
2) Puncture Resistance: 50 beach units minimum, when tested according to ASTM D 781.
b. PVC Jacketing: High-impact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC, 20-mils thick, roll stock ready for
shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.
1) Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
c. PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil-thick, high-
impact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC.
1) Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
4. Accessories and Attachments: Provide the following accessories:
a. Glass Cloth and Tape: Woven glass fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8
ounces per sq. yd.
1) Tape Width: 4 inches.
2) Cloth Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type I.
3) Tape Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type II.
b. Bands: 3/4-inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1) Stainless Steel: Type 304, 0.020 inch thick.
2) Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
3) Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.
c. Wire: 14-gage nickel copper alloy, 16-gage, soft-annealed stainless steel, or 16-gage, soft-
annealed galvanized steel.
d. Corner Angles: 28-gage, 1-inch by 1-inch aluminum, adhered to 2-inch by 2-inch kraft
paper.
e. Anchor Pins: Capable of supporting 20 pounds each. Provide anchor pins and speed
washers of sizes and diameters as recommended by the manufacturer for insulation type
and thickness.
5. Vapor Barrier Compound: Water-based, fire-resistive composition.
a. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.08 perm maximum.
b. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.
6. Weatherproof Sealant: Flexible-elastomer-based, vapor-barrier sealant designed to seal metal
joints.
a. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum.
b. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to 250 deg F.
c. Color: Aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION STANDARDS
A. Workmanship: Insulation shall be installed in first-class, neat, workmanlike fashion. Stapling of vapor-
barrier jackets will not be allowed. Vapor-barrier and canvas shall run continuously through hangers

220700-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220700 – PLUMBING INSULATION

and vapor-barrier shall not be pierced for any reason. ASME stamps, UL labels and similar stamps
and labels shall not be covered. Unsatisfactory installations will be rejected and shall be removed and
replaced.
B. Pipe covering: Insulate piping as specified below. At hanger points of piping insulation with glass fiber,
provide wood blocks as specified.
C. Installation, General: Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and
thicknesses required for each mechanical system.
1. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that do
not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.
2. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes, ducts, and equipment having surface operating
temperatures below 60 deg F.
3. Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
4. Install insulation with smooth, straight, and even surfaces.
5. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier.
6. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation requiring a
vapor barrier.
7. Seal Ends: Except for flexible elastomeric insulation, taper ends at 45 degree angle and seal with
lagging adhesive. Cut ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with
adhesive.
8. Apply adhesives and coatings at manufacturer's recommended coverage-per-gallon rate.
9. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
10. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following systems,
materials, and equipment:
a. Nameplates and data plates.
b. Access panels and doors in air distribution systems.
c. Fire protection piping systems.
d. Sanitary drainage and vent piping.
e. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless indicated otherwise.
f. Below grade piping.
g. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for the disabled.
h. Piping specialties including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and
flow regulators.
D. Pipe Insulation Installation, General: Unless otherwise indicated, install pipe insulation as follows:
1. Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond with adhesive.
2. Stagger joints on double layers of insulation.
3. Apply insulation continuously over fittings, valves, and specialties, except as otherwise indicated.
4. Apply insulation with a minimum number of joints.
5. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
a. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
b. Cover circumferential joints with butt strips, at least 3-inches wide, and of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
butt strip and space 4 inches on center.
c. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with
outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches on center.
1) Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation applied to piping systems with
surface temperatures at or below 35 deg F.
d. Vapor Barrier Coatings: Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply on seams and joints, over
staples, and at ends butt to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
e. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with
vapor barrier coating.
f. Repair damaged insulation jackets, except metal jackets, by applying jacket material around
damaged jacket. Adhere, staple, and seal. Extend patch at least 2 inches in both directions
beyond damaged insulation jacket and around the entire circumference of the pipe.
6. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of the roof
flashing. Seal with vapor barrier coating. Apply insulation for exterior applications butted tightly to

220700-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220700 – PLUMBING INSULATION

interior insulation ends. Extend metal jacket for exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2
inches below top of roof flashing. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor barrier coating.
7. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below grade exterior walls, terminate insulation
flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor barrier coating.
8. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below grade exterior walls, extend metal jacket for
exterior insulation through penetration to a point 2 inches from interior surface of wall inside the
building. Seal ends of metal jacket with vapor barrier coating. Secure metal jacket ends with
metal band. At point where insulation metal jacket contacts mechanical sleeve seal, insert
cellular glass preformed pipe insulation to allow sleeve seal tightening against metal jacket.
Tighten and seal sleeve to jacket to form a watertight seal.
9. Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions. Apply an aluminum jacket with factory-applied
moisture barrier over insulation. Extend 2 inches from both surfaces of wall or partition. Secure
aluminum jacket with metal bands at both ends. Seal ends of jacket with vapor barrier coating.
Seal around penetration with joint sealer. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
10. Fire-Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire-
rated walls and partitions. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Seal around
penetration with firestopping or fire-resistant joint sealer. Refer to Division 7 for firestopping and
fire-resistant joint sealers.
11. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top
of floor.
12. Flanges, Fittings, and Valves - Interior Exposed and Concealed: Coat pipe insulation ends with
vapor barrier coating. Apply premolded, precut, or field-fabricated segments of insulation around
flanges, unions, valves, and fittings. Make joints tight. Bond with adhesive.
a. Use same material and thickness as adjacent pipe insulation.
b. Overlap nesting insulation by 2 inches or 1-pipe diameter, which ever is greater.
c. Apply materials with adhesive, fill voids with mineral fiber insulating cement. Secure with
wire or tape.
d. Insulate elbows and tees smaller than 3-inches pipe size with premolded insulation.
e. Insulate elbows and tees 3 inches and larger with premolded insulation or insulation
material segments. Use at least 3 segments for each elbow.
f. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with PVC fitting covers and seal
circumferential joints with butt strips.
g. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with 2 layers of lagging adhesive to a
minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. Install glass cloth between layers. Overlap adjacent
insulation by 2 inches in both directions from joint with glass cloth and lagging adhesive.
13. Hangers and Anchors: Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor
attachments. Install saddles, shields, and inserts as specified in Division 15 Section "Supports
and Anchors." For cold surface piping, extend insulation on anchor legs a minimum of 12 inches
and taper and seal insulation ends.
a. Inserts and Shields: Cover hanger inserts and shields with jacket material matching
adjacent pipe insulation.
E. Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation Installation: Bond insulation to pipe with lagging adhesive. Seal exposed
ends with lagging adhesive. Seal seams and joints with vapor barrier compound.
F. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation Installation: Slip insulation on the pipe before making
connections wherever possible. Seal joints with adhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible,
cut one side longitudinally and apply to the pipe. Seal seams and joints with adhesive.
1. Valves, Fittings, and Flanges: Cut insulation segments from pipe or sheet insulation. Bond to
valve, fitting, and flange and seal joints with adhesive.
a. Miter cut materials to cover soldered elbows and tees.
b. Fabricate sleeve-fitting covers from flexible elastomeric cellular insulation for screwed
valves, fittings, and specialties. Miter cut materials. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation.
G. Equipment Insulation Installation, General: Unless otherwise indicated install equipment insulation as
follows:
1. Install board and block materials with a minimum dimension of 12 inches and a maximum
dimension of 48 inches.

220700-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220700 – PLUMBING INSULATION

2. Groove and score insulation materials as required to fit as closely as possible to the equipment
and to fit contours of equipment. Stagger end joints.
3. Insulation Thicknesses Greater than 2 Inches: Install insulation in multiple layers with staggered
joints.
4. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joint.
5. Secure sections of insulation in place with wire or bands spaced at 9-inch centers, except for
flexible elastomeric cellular insulation.
6. Protect exposed corners with corner angles under wires and bands.
7. Manholes, Handholes, and Information Plates: Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes,
handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates.
8. Removable Insulation: Install insulation on components that require periodic inspecting, cleaning,
and repairing for easy removal and replacement without damage to adjacent insulation.
9. Pumps: Where insulation is indicated, fabricate galvanized steel boxes lined with insulation. Fit
boxes around pumps and coincide joints in box with the splits in the pump casings. Fabricate
joints with outward bolted flanges.
10. Finishing: Except for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation, apply 2 coats of vapor barrier
compound to a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. Install a layer of glass cloth embedded between
layers.
H. Glass Fiber Equipment Insulation Installation: Secure insulation with anchor pins and speed washers.
Space anchors at maximum intervals of 18 inches in both directions and not more than 3 inches from
edges and joints. Apply a smoothing coat of insulating and finishing cement to finished insulation.
I. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Equipment Insulation Installation: Install sheets of the largest
manageable size. Apply full coverage of adhesive to the surfaces of the equipment and to the
insulation. Butt insulation joints firmly together and apply adhesive to insulation edges at joints.
J. Jackets: Unless otherwise indicated, install jackets as follows:
1. Foil and Paper Jackets (FP): Install jackets drawn tight. Install lap or butt strips at joints with
material same as jacket. Secure with adhesive. Install jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal
joints and 3-inch-wide butt strips at end joints.
a. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor barrier jackets and exposed insulation with
vapor barrier compound.
2. Interior Exposed Insulation: Install continuous PVC jackets.
3. Interior Exposed Insulation: Install continuous glass cloth jackets.
4. Exterior Exposed Insulation: Install continuous PVC jackets and seal all joints and seams with
waterproof sealant.
5. Install the PVC jacket with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal and butt joints and seal with adhesive.
6. Install glass cloth jacket directly over insulation. On insulation with a factory applied jacket, install
the glass cloth jacket over the factory applied jacket. Install jacket drawn smooth and tight with a
2-inch overlap at joints. Embed glass cloth between (2) 1/16-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive.
Completely encapsulate the insulation with the jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
K. Finishes: Paint finished insulation as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
L. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply 2 coats of protective
coating to exposed insulation.
M. Applications: Materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
1. Interior, Exposed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping
systems:
a. Domestic cold water.
b. Storm water. Insulate only roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater leaders of storm water
piping.
c. Domestic hot water.
d. Sanitary drains for fixtures accessible to the disabled.
e. Refrigerant suction.
2. Interior, Concealed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping
systems:
a. Domestic cold water.

220700-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220700 – PLUMBING INSULATION

b. Storm water. Insulate only roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater leaders of storm water
piping.
c. Domestic hot water.
d. Refrigerant suction.
e. Chilled water (35 to 55 deg F).
3. Exterior, Exposed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping
systems:
a. Domestic cold water.
b. Storm water.
c. Refrigerant suction.
4. Exterior, Concealed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping
systems:
a. Domestic cold water.
b. Storm water.
c. Refrigerant suction.
5. Equipment: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following indoor equipment:
a. Domestic cold water equipment, tanks, and pumps.
b. Domestic hot water equipment, tanks, and water heaters.
c. Refrigerated drinking water equipment, tanks, pumps, and heat exchangers.
6. Duct Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following duct systems:
a. Interior concealed supply, return and outside air ductwork.
b. Interior exposed supply, return and outside air ductwork.
c. Exterior exposed supply and return ductwork.
d. Interior exposed and concealed supply fans, air handling unit casings and outside air
plenums.
N. Pipe Insulation Schedules: Abbreviations used in the following schedules include:
1. Field-Applied Jackets: P - PVC, K - Foil and Paper.
2. Pipe Sizes: NPS - Nominal Pipe Size.
O. Domestic Cold Water and Storm Water All Sizes (Interior): 1/2-inch-thick glass fiber, cellular glass, or
flexible elastomeric insulation. Field-applied jacket is not required.

INTERIOR DOMESTIC HOT WATER

VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) MATERIALS IN INCHES REQ'D JACKET

1/2 TO 1-1/4 GLASS FIBER 1/2 NO NONE

FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC 1/2 NO NONE

1-1/2 TO 4 GLASS FIBER 1/2 NO NONE

FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC 3/4 NO NONE

SANITARY DRAINS AND TRAPS EXPOSED AT FIXTURES FOR DISABLED

VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) MATERIALS IN INCHES REQ'D JACKET

1 TO 1-1/2 GLASS FIBER 1 NO NONE

FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC 1/2 NO NONE

220700-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 220700 – PLUMBING INSULATION

INTERIOR REFRIGERANT SUCTION - EXPOSED AND CONCEALED

VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) MATERIALS IN INCHES REQ'D JACKET

1/2 TO 1-1/4 GLASS FIBER 1 YES NONE

FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC 3/4 YES NONE

EXTERIOR REFRIGERANT SUCTION - EXPOSED AND CONCEALED

VAPOR FIELD-
PIPE SIZES THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
(NPS) MATERIALS IN INCHES REQ'D JACKET

1/2 TO 1-1/4 GLASS FIBER 2 YES (P)

FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC 3/4 YES NONE

P. Equipment Insulation Schedules:

INTERIOR EXPOSED DOMESTIC COLD WATER EQUIPMENT, TANKS, AND PUMPS

VAPOR FIELD-
THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
MATERIAL FORM IN INCHES REQ'D JACKET

GLASS FIBER BLOCK OR BOARD 1 YES (P)(K)

FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC SHEET 3/4 YES NONE

INTERIOR EXPOSED DOMESTIC HOT WATER EQUIPMENT, TANKS, AND PUMPS

VAPOR FIELD-
THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
MATERIAL FORM IN INCHES REQ'D JACKET

GLASS FIBER BLOCK 2 NO (K)

VAPOR FIELD-
THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
MATERIAL FORM IN INCHES REQ'D JACKET

GLASS FIBER BLOCK 2 YES (P)

INTERIOR EXPOSED HEATING WATER EQUIP, TANKS, PUMPS, AND HEAT EXCHANGERS
(100 TO 250 DEG F)

VAPOR FIELD-
THICKNESS BARRIER APPLIED
MATERIAL FORM IN INCHES REQ'D JACKET

GLASS FIBER BLOCK OR BOARD 2 NO (K)

END OF SECTION

220700-7 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221000 – PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment and services required to execute, install
and complete, ready for use, all work according to the drawings and specifications.
B. Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
C. Product data for couplings and fittings for grooved-end copper tube and grooved-end copper fittings.
D. Water samples, test results, and reports specified in "Field Quality Control" and "Cleaning" Articles.
E. Comply with ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. The application of the following pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods required for
plumbing piping systems are indicated in "Pipe and Fittings Applications" Paragraph.
1. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.
2. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
3. Copper Drainage Tube: ASTM B306, Type DWV, drawn temper.
4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40, seamless, galvanized, plain ends.
a. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40,
seamless, galvanized, carbon-steel pipe.
5. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, Classes 50 and 51, mechanical joint and push-on joint, with
AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
6. Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C115, ductile-iron barrel, Class 150 or 300 iron-alloy threaded
flanges, with AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
7. Hub and Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Service Class.
8. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI 301. (When approved by municipal codes).
2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.22.
B. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18.
C. Wrought-Copper and Bronze, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 Tube and ASTM B 584 Bronze
Castings.
D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.29.
E. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23.
F. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint, Sovent Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.43.
G. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint, Sovent Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.32.
H. Copper Tube, Grooved-End Mechanical Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube and ASTM B 584 bronze
castings.
I. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Classes 150 and 300.
J. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joint,
metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded ends.
1. Threaded Ends: Threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1.

221000-1
 CHASE
SECTION 221000 – PLUMBING PIPING

K. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Classes 150 and 300, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket
joint, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, and female threaded ends having threads conforming to
ASME B1.20.1.
L. Galvanized, Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Classes 125 and 250, standard pattern, with
threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
M. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 300.
N. Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Gasketed Fittings: AWWA C110 standard pattern or ductile-iron
AWWA C153 compact pattern, 250 psig minimum pressure rating, with AWWA C104 cement-mortar
lining and AWWA C111 rubber gaskets.
O. Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Flanged Fittings: AWWA C110, 250-psig minimum pressure rating, with
AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
P. Hub and Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: ASTM A74, Service Class.
Q. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Solder, brazing, and welding filler metals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
B. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 564 neoprene rubber gaskets and lubricant.
C. Ductile-Iron Pipe and Ductile-Iron or Cast-Iron Fittings: The following materials apply:
1. Push-On Joints: AWWA C111 rubber gaskets and lubricant.
2. Mechanical Joints: AWWA C111 ductile-iron or gray-iron glands, high-strength steel bolts and
nuts, and rubber gaskets.
3. Flanged Joints: AWWA C115 ductile-iron or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber gaskets, and high-
strength steel bolts and nuts.
D. CISPI Couplings for Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 310, having ASTM C 564
neoprene sealing sleeve, with 300 Series stainless-steel corrugated shield-and-clamp assembly.
E. Stainless Steel, Heavy-Duty Couplings for Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 564
neoprene sealing gasket, with Type 304 stainless-steel housing or shield and stainless-steel clamps.
Coupling shall be 3 inches wide in sizes 1-1/2 to 4 inches and 4 inches wide in sizes 5 to 10 inches.
F. Cast-Iron, Heavy-Duty Couplings for Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 564 neoprene
sealing gasket, with cast-iron housing and stainless steel bolts.
G. FM-Type, Heavy-Duty Couplings for Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: FM-approved,
ASTM C 564 elastomeric sleeve, with stainless steel band and strips or cast-iron housing and
corrosion-resistant bolts.
H. Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End, Nonpressure System Pipe: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and
stainless steel band assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined.
I. Sleeves: ASTM C 564, rubber for cast-iron soil pipe and ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal for plastic
pipe. Sleeves for dissimilar or other pipe materials shall be compatible with pipe materials being
joined.
1. Bands: Stainless steel, one at each pipe insert.
J. Gasket-Type Couplings for Plain-End, Nonpressure System Pipe: Rubber or elastomeric compression
gasket, made to match pipe inside diameter or hub and adjoining pipe outside diameter.
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber for cast-iron soil pipe and ASTM F477, elastomeric seal for plastic
pipe. Gaskets for dissimilar or other pipe materials shall be compatible with pipe materials being
joined.
K. Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tube and Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM A536 ductile-iron
or ASTM A 47 malleable-iron housing having copper-colored enamel finish, with synthetic-rubber
gasket having central-cavity, pressure-responsive design and suitable for hot water, with ASTM A183
carbon-steel bolts and nuts.

221000-2
 CHASE
SECTION 221000 – PLUMBING PIPING

2.4 VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves, and Division 15
Section "Plumbing Specialties" for special-duty valves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED PIPING
A. Grade trench bottom to provide smooth, firm, stable, and rock-free foundation throughout length of
piping.
B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at surface on which piping is to be laid and backfill
with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level.
C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with tamped-sand backfill. Dig bell
holes at each pipe joint to relieve bells of loads and to ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on
foundation.
3.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS APPLICATIONS
A. Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.
B. Water Distribution Piping Below Ground: Use the following:
1. 4 to 12 Inches: Ductile-iron pipe, ductile-iron or gray-iron fittings, rubber gaskets, and push-on or
mechanical joints.
2. 2-1/2 to 4 Inches: Soft copper tube, Type L, cast-copper-alloy, solder-joint pressure fittings and
soldered joints with Alloy Sn95, Sn95, or E solder.
3. 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 Inches: 3- or 4-inch size, ductile-iron pipe, ductile-iron or gray-iron fittings or
ductile-iron compact fittings, rubber gaskets, and push-on or mechanical joints.
4. 2 Inches and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type L, cast-copper-alloy solder-joint pressure fittings
and soldered joints with Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E solder.
C. Water Distribution Piping Above Ground:
1. 4 to 12 Inches: Steel pipe; galvanized, cast-iron threaded fittings; cast-iron threaded flanges;
galvanized, flanged steel expansion joints; malleable-iron unions; and threaded or flanged joints.
2. 4 Inches and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type l; wrought-copper or cast-copper-alloy pressure
fittings; copper unions; bronze flanges; and solder joints with Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E solder.
D. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:
1. 5 to 10 Inches: Hubless cast-iron soil pipe; hubless cast-iron soil pipe fittings; cast-iron, heavy-
duty couplings for hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; and hubless joints.
2. 2 to 4 Inches: Hubless cast-iron soil pipe; hubless cast-iron soil pipe fittings; cast-iron, heavy-
duty couplings for hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; and hubless joints.
3. 1-1/2 Inches: Hubless cast-iron soil pipe, hubless cast-iron soil pipe fittings, cast-iron heavy-duty
couplings for hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, and hubless joints.
4. 1-1/4 and 1-1/2 Inches: Copper drainage tube, wrought-copper or cast-copper-alloy drainage
fittings, and soldered joints with Alloy E or Alloy Sn50 solder.
E. Storm Drainage Piping:
1. 5 to 10 Inches: Hubless cast-iron soil pipe, hubless cast-iron soil pipe fittings, cast-iron heavy-
duty couplings for hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, and hubless joints.
2. 2 to 4 Inches: Hubless cast-iron soil pipe, hubless cast-iron soil pipe fittings, cast-iron heavy-duty
couplings for hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, and hubless joints.
3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, use gate, ball,
or butterfly valves for shutoff duty and globe, ball, or butterfly valves for throttling duty.

221000-3
 CHASE
SECTION 221000 – PLUMBING PIPING

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods."
3.6 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Extend water distribution piping and connect to water service piping of size and in location indicated
for service entrance to building. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage,
and test tee with valve, inside building at water service entrance.
B. Ductile-Iron Water Service Pipe: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried pipe inside building
between shutoff valve, wall and floor penetrations, and point 5 feet outside building, with restrained
joints, including anchoring pipe to wall or floor. Provide supports (thrust blocks) at vertical and
horizontal offsets.
C. Extend building storm drain piping and connect to building storm sewer piping of size and in location
indicated for service entrance to building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of
building storm drain and building storm sewer.

D. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping of size and in location
indicated for service entrance to building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of
building sanitary drain and building sanitary sewer.
E. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at service penetrations through foundation wall for
watertight installation.
3.7 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install with 1/32-inch-per-foot (1/4 percent) slope downward toward drain.
3.8 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install cast-iron soil pipe and cast-iron soil pipe fittings according to CISPI 1990 revised and edited
edition of "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook, Volume I," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings."
B. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate Y branches, Y branches
with 1/8 bends, and long-sweep 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, and 1/16 bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep
quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where change in direction of flow is
from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn double-Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings where 2 fixtures are
installed back-to-back or side-by-side and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses
may be used on vent lines. Make no change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees. Where
different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size standard increasers and
reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited.
C. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, except where another slope is
indicated:
1. Sanitary Building Drain: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) for piping 3 inches and smaller; 1/4 inch per
foot (2 percent) for piping 4 inches and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent).
3. Storm Building Drain: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent).
4. Horizontal Storm Drainage Piping: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent).
5. Vent Piping: 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent).
D. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil pipes passing through concrete slab, without membrane
waterproofing, on grade.
3.9 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods."
B. Grooved Copper Tube and Grooved-Tube Fitting Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket,
lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

221000-4
 CHASE
SECTION 221000 – PLUMBING PIPING

C. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fitting Joints: Make joints according to recommendations
in CISPI 1990 revised and edited edition of "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook, Volume I,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Compression Joint: Make with neoprene gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless Joint: Make with neoprene gasket and sleeve or clamp.
3.10 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METER
A. Install roughing-in piping and plumbing specialties specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Specialties" for water meter installation according to utility company's instructions and requirements.
3.11 VALVES
A. Sectional Valves:
1. Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving 2 or more plumbing
fixtures or equipment connections and where indicated.
2. Use gate or ball valves for sectional valves 2 inches and smaller.
3. Use gate or butterfly valves for sectional valves 2-1/2 inches and larger.
B. Shutoff Valves:
1. Install shutoff valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to each plumbing
fixture not having stops on supplies, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. For shutoff valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for shutoff valves 2-1/2 inches
and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.
C. Drain Valves:
1. Install drain valves specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" on each plumbing
equipment item located to drain equipment for service and repair. Install drain valve at base of
each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and where required to drain water distribution piping
system.
D. Check Valves:
1. Install swing check valve on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Use MSS SP-80, Class 125, cast-bronze body for 2-inch and smaller piping and MSS SP-71,
Class 125, cast-iron body for 2-1/2-inch and larger piping.
E. Balance Valves
1. Install valve in each hot-water circulating loop, discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as
indicated.
2. Use ball valve for 2-inch and smaller piping and butterfly valve for 2-1/2-inch and larger piping.
F. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
G. Install stop and waste drain valves where indicated.
3.12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS INSTALLATION
A. Hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors."
B. Install hangers for horizontal piping with following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

221000-5
 CHASE
SECTION 221000 – PLUMBING PIPING

Nom. Pipe Steel Pipe Copper Tube

Size Max. Span Max. Span Min. Rod Diameter
(Inches) (Feet) (Feet) (Inches)
Up to 3/4 7 5 3/8
1 7 6 3/8
1-1/4 7 7 3/8
1-1/2 9 8 3/8
2 10 8 3/8
2-1/2 11 9 1/2
3 12 10 1/2
3-1/2 13 11 1/2
4 14 12 5/8, 1/2 for copper
5 16 13 5/8, 1/2 for copper
6 17 14 3/4, 5/8 for copper
8 19 16 7/8, 3/4 for copper

C. Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor.

D. Conform to table below for maximum spacing of supports:
Horizontal Vertical
Pipe Material In Feet In Feet
Cast Iron Soil Pipe 5 15
Copper Tubing - 1-1/4 Inches and Smaller 6 10
Copper Tubing - 1-1/2 Inches and Larger 10 10
Steel Pipe 12 15

E. Pipe Attachments: Install the following:

1. Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8 or Type 42 for vertical runs.
2. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1 for individual straight horizontal runs 100 feet and
less.
3. Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43 for individual straight horizontal runs longer than 100
feet.
4. Spring Cushion Rolls: MSS Type 49, where indicated, for individual straight horizontal runs
longer than 100 feet.
5. Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 44 for multiple straight horizontal runs 100 feet or longer. Support pipe
rolls on trapeze.
6. Spring Hangers: MSS Type 52 for support of base of vertical runs.
F. Support cast-iron soil pipe and fittings not included in table, at maximum horizontal spacing of 5 feet,
except 10-foot sections of pipe may be supported at 10-foot spacing and at maximum vertical spacing
of 15 feet.
3.13 CONNECTIONS
A. Supply Runouts to Fixtures: Install hot- and cold-water supply piping runouts of sizes indicated, but
not smaller than required by plumbing code to fixtures.
B. Drainage Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts, with approved trap, of sizes
indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code, to plumbing fixtures and drains.
1. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or
drains.
3.14 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated.
B. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection; provide drain valve on drain connection.
C. Use flanges instead of unions for connections 2-1/2 inches and larger.

221000-6
 CHASE
SECTION 221000 – PLUMBING PIPING

3.15 TESTING
A. Inspect and test piping systems following the procedures of the authority having jurisdiction.
3.16 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping following procedures of the authority having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION

221000-7
 CHASE
SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.
B. Encasement for piping.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions.
B. 220700 – Plumbing Insulation.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The latest issue of the standard referred to shall apply to these materials.
B. ANSI: American National Standard Institute.
1. Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions: B16.39.
C. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
1. Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch: ASME B1.20.1
2. Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18.
3. Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.22.
4. Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24.
5. Building Services Piping: ASME B31.9.
D. ASTM: American Society for Testing Materials.
1. Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47.
2. Seamless Copper Tube: ASTM B75
3. Ductile Iron Castings: ASTM A536.
4. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or Other Liquids: ASTM A674.
5. Seamless Copper tubing: ASTM B88.
6. Liquid and Paste Fluxes: ASTM B 813.
7. Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings: ASTM B828.
8. Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications: ASTM B584.
9. Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable: ASTM D1248.
10. Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80: ASTM F441.
11. Plastic-Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe, Fittings, and Flanges: ASTM F1545.
12. Non-Reinforced Extruded Tee Connections for Piping Applications: ASTM F2014
E. AWWA: American Water Works Association.
1. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems: AWWA C105/A 21.5.
2. Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10.
3. Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings: AWWA C111/A21.11.
4. Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast: AWWA C151/A21.51.
5. Ductile Iron Compact Fittings: AWWA C153/A21.53.
6. Bolted, Sleve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe: AWWA C219.
7. Installation of Ductile-Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances: AWWA C600.
8. Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: AWWA C606.
9. Disinfecting Water Mains: AWWA C651.
10. Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities: AWWA C652
11. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: AWWA M41.
F. CDA: Copper Development Association.

221116-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

1. Copper Tube Handbook.

G. ASSE: American Society of Sanitary Engineers.
1. Performance Requirements for Dielectric Pipe Unions: ASSE 1079.
H. IAPMO: International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Engineers.
1. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: IAPMO PS 66.
I. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society.
1. Non-Ferrous Threaded and Solder-Joint Unions for Use with Copper Water Tube: SP-123.
J. NSF: National Sanitation Foundation
1. Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials: NSF 14
2. Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects: NSF 61
1.5 SUBMITALS
A. Refer to 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions for applications of pipe,
tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping compo-
nents shall be marked with "NSF-pw."
C. Exposed piping in finished areas shall be chrome plated brass pipe or Type L copper tubing to the
shutoff or stop valve of each fixture.
D.
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L water tube, annealed temper.
C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18.
D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
F. Copper Unions:
1. MSS SP-123.
2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.
3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.
4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.
G. Copper-Tube, Extruded-Tee Connections: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014.
H. Appurtenances for Grooved-End Copper Tubing:
1. Bronze Fittings for Grooved-End, Copper Tubing: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M) copper tube or
ASTM B 584 bronze castings.
2. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tubing:
a. Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606.
b. Ferrous housing sections.
c. EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water.
d. Bolts and nuts.
e. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).

221116-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe:
1. AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged
ends are indicated.
2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
B. Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:
1. AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron.
2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
C. Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:
1. AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron.
2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
D. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe:
1. AWWA C151/A21.51.
2. Push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
E. Standard-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings:
1. AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron.
2. Gaskets: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber.
F. Compact-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings:
1. AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron.
2. Gaskets: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber.
G. Plain-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.
H. Appurtenances for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe:
1. Fittings for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron castings or
ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions that match pipe.
2. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Piping:
a. AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions.
b. Ferrous housing sections.
c. EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water.
d. Bolts and nuts.
e. Minimum Pressure Rating:
1) NPS 14 to NPS 18 (DN 350 to DN 450): 250 psig (1725 kPa).
2) NPS 20 to NPS 46 (DN 500 to DN 900): 150 psig (1035 kPa).
2.4 CORROSION PROTECTION ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND IRON PIPING
A. Material: Linear low-density polyethylene film manufactured of virgin polyethylene material conforming
to the requirements of ASTM D 1248, and a minimum thickness of 0.008-inch thickness or, high-
density, cross-laminated polyethylene film manufactured of virgin polyethylene material conforming to
the requirements of ASTM D 1248, and a minimum thickness of 0.004-inch.
B. The film shall be marked showing trademark, year of manufacture, type of resin, specification con-
formance, applicable pipe sizes and a corrosion protection warning.
C. Install tubular polyethylene per ASTM A674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.
2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. General Requirements:
1. Same size as pipes to be joined.
2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.
3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

221116-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.

2.6 WATER VALVES
A. Provide valves suitable for minimum of 125 psig and minimum of 180 degrees F hot water. Valves
shall have flanged end connections, except sizes smaller than 2.5 inches may have threaded end
connections for connections between bronze valves and copper tubing. Copper alloy and bronze
valve body shall be ASTM B61 or ASTM B62 copper alloy.
B. Provide a shutoff valve at each equipment connection and at other points in the piping systems where
indicated or reasonably required to stop or control flow. Contractor shall review piping layout before
installation to assure positive control.
C. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following
requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or
gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or
ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated or Memory-stop balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
D. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.
E. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
2.7 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS
A. Provide at connections between copper and ferrous metal piping materials. ASTM F 441, Schedule
80, CPVC threaded pipe nipples, 4-inch minimum length, may be provided for dielectric connections
in pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller.
1. DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
a. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be
joined.
b. Dielectric Unions:
1) Standard: ASSE 1079.
2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
c. Dielectric Flanges:
1) Standard: ASSE 1079.
2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
3) Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint
copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
d. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
e. Dielectric Nipples:
1) Standard: IAPMO PS 66.
2) Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.
3) Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

221116-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

2.8 FIXTURES, FITTINGS, ACCESSORIES AND SUPPLIES

A. Provide control-stop valves in each supply to each fixture. The finish of fittings, accessories, and sup-
plies exposed to view shall be chromium-plated. Center-set faucets shall be top-mounted with inlets
on not greater than 4-inch centers. Provide special roughing-in for the elderly and wheelchair fixtures.
1. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule in drawings.
2.9 HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMPS
A. Bronze body, in-the-line centrifugal type with resiliently mounted 1750 RPM motor, built-in thermal
overload protection, spring type flexible coupling, oil lubricated bearings, mechanical seal and flanged
connections.
B. Pump motor cradles shall be supported from the building structure independent for the piping in an
approved manner.
C. 10 Gal/Min at 10 ft. head 1/6 HP, 120V, 1-phase.
D. Bell and Gossett 1" PR. TACO, or approved equal.
2.10 GAS FIRED OR ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
A. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule in drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic wa-
ter piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, ex-
pansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on coordination drawings.
B. Piping shall be installed as indicated in the drawings. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements
established at the building by the Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forc-
ing. Piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building. Branch pipes from service lines may be
taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as required by installation condi-
tions. Supply pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other
service to permit not less than 1/2 inch between finished covering and other work not less than 1/2
inch between finished covering on the difference services. The hot water and cold water piping sys-
tems shall be installed so as to be drained.
C. Install water systems with a fall towards the shut-off valve of the lowest fixture.
D. Provide valve branches on hot and cold water lines to all fixtures, water heating units, and outlets as
indicated on drawings or as noted in specifications.
E. Install valves in accessible places and locate as follows: shut-off valves on each supply to each piece
of equipment, at the bottom of each riser and at each branch connection off the main piping system.
F. Air chambers shall be provided on hot and cold water supplies and shall be accessible. Air chambers
shall consist of 12-inch length of pipe of the same diameter as the branch supply, capped.
G. Where the possibility of back-siphonage exists, water supplied to the fixture shall be introduced
through a suitable vacuum breaker installed at a minimum of 7'-6" above the floor, or integral with fau-
cet.
H. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

221116-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

I. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and
AWWA M41.
J. Install underground [copper tube] [and] [ductile-iron pipe] in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674
or AWWA C105/A21.5.
K. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the
building at each domestic water-service entrance.
L. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
M. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves.
N. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
O. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's require-
ments.
P. Where required by code, install seismic restraints on piping.
Q. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless
otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
R. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles
or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
S. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordi-
nate with other services occupying that space.
T. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
U. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the
system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
V. Install piping free of sags and bends.
W. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
X. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.
Y. Where booster pumps are included, install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each
plumbing pump and packaged booster pump.
Z. Hot water recirculation pumps, when included, and thermostatically controlled.
1. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping.
2. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater.
3. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
AA. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for
sleeve seals specified in Section 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions.
BB. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for
escutcheons specified in Section 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before as-
sembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full
and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe
fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

221116-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints"
chapter.
E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join cop-
per tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools rec-
ommended by fitting manufacturer.
G. Push-on Joints for Copper Tubing: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with manufacturer's
depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth.
H. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed
for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze
branch tube into collar.
I. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Roll
groove ends of tubes. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of tubes or tube and fitting. Install cou-
pling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in tubing grooves. Install and tighten housing
bolts.
J. Joint Construction for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Cut
round-bottom grooves in ends of pipe at gasket-seat dimension required for specified (flexible or rigid)
joint. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sec-
tions over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.
K. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thick-
ness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
L. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both pip-
ing systems.
3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.
2. Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Plastic-to-
metal transition [fittings] [or] [unions].
3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings, nipples, or unions.
C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges, flange kits, or
nipples.
D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and mainte-
nance.

221116-7 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar
piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the
following:
1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps (if present): Cold-water suction and discharge piping.
2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that
required by plumbing code.
4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment
connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions
for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3.8 EXPANSION SWINGS
A. At connections of branches to mains and risers at connections to equipment provide sufficient number
of elbow swings to allow for proper expansion and contraction of piping. Provide adequate elbow
swings through building expansion joints to allow for proper expansion and contraction of piping
mains.
3.9 IDENTIFICATION
A. Refer to Section 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Section 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide
hot-water flow in each branch.
b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application
where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Refer to Section 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions.
B. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
C. If disinfection of potable water systems is required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), clean
and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired
before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods
are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow
procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of
chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

221116-8 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L)
of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after
the standing time.
d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. If disinfection of potable water systems is not required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ),
clean domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired
before using.
2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not
prescribed, follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.
b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures
if biological examination shows contamination.
3. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample
approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION

221116-9 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221316 – STORM DRAINAGE, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
B. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
C. Ductile-iron pipe and fittings.
D. Copper tube and fittings.
E. PVC pipe and fittings.
F. Galvanized-steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints.
G. Encasement for underground metal piping.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions
B. 220700 – Plumbing Insulation.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The latest issue of the standard referred to shall apply to these materials.
1. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
a. Cast Iron Flanged Joint Fittings: ASME B16.1.
b. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Class 150 and 300, ASME B16.3.
c. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: Class 125 and 250, ANSI B16.4.
d. Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
e. Cast Iron Screwed Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.12.
f. Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings: Class 125 and 250, B16.15.
g. Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18.
h. Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges: ASME B16.21.
i. Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.22.
j. Cast Bronze Solder Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23.
k. Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage: ASME B16.23.
l. Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24.
m. Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.29.
n. Cast Cooper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes: ASME B16.26.
o. Hex Head Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
2. ASTM: American Society for Testing Materials.
a. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A74.
b. Steel Pipes: ASTM A120.
c. Ductile Iron Castings: ASTM A536.
d. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or Other Liquids: ASTM A674.
e. Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A888.
f. Refined Lead: ASTM B29.
g. Solder Metal: ASTM B32.
h. Seamless Copper Pipe: ASTM B42.
i. Seamless Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43.
j. Seamless Copper tubing: ASTM B88.
k. Copper Drainage Tube (D.W.V.): ASTM B306.
l. Liquid and Paste Fluxes: ASTM B 813.
m. Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C564.
n. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Piping Systems: ASTM C 1173.

221316-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221316 – STORM DRAINAGE, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

o. Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 1277.
p. Shielded Transition Couplings for Use with Dissimilar DWV Pipe and Fittings Above Ground:
ASTM C1460.
q. Preparation and Preliminary Testing of Water-Formed Deposits: ASTM D2321.
r. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40: ASTM D2466.
s. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D2665.
t. Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns: ASTM D3311.
u. Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Gaskets for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV), Sewer, Sanitary,
and Storm Plumbing Systems: ASTM D5926.
v. Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe: ASTM F477.
w. Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings: ASTM F 656.
x. Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications:
ASTM F1476.
3. AWWA: American Water Works Association .
a. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems: AWWA C105/A 21.5.
b. Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10.
c. Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings: AWWA C111/A21.11.
d. Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast: AWWA C151/A21.51.
e. Ductile Iron Compact Fittings: AWWA C153/A21.53.
f. Bolted, Sleve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe: AWWA C219.
4. CISPI: Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute.
a. Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm
Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications: CISPI 301.
b. "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook.
5. CDA: Copper Development Association.
a. Copper Tube Handbook.
6. ASSE: American Society of Sanitary Engineers.
a. Performance Requirements for Dielectric Pipe Unions: ASSE 1079.
7. IAPMO: International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Engineers.
a. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: IAPMO PS 66.
8. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society.
a. Non-Ferrous Threaded and Solder-Joint Unions for Use with Copper Water Tube: SP-123.
1.5 SUBMITALS
A. Refer to 220013 – Plunbing General Provisions.
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions for applications of pipe,
tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
B. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
2. Waste, Force-Main Piping: 50 psig.
C. Fittings shall be radius fittings, except fittings in vent piping may be short radius fittings.
D. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.
E. Minimum size piping shall be 4 inches for buried piping and 1.5 inches for aboveground piping.
F. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil
Pipe Institute (CISPI), and listed by NSF International.
2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS (Below Grade)
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.
B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, neoprene rubber and lubricant.
C. Caulking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

221316-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221316 – STORM DRAINAGE, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

D. Tensile Strength: 21,000 psig minimum.

E. Pipe, and fittings shall be manufactured in USA by a member of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
(CISPI).
F. Each length of pipe and each fitting shall be plainly marked with size, country of origin, and name of
manufacturer, or manufacturer’s registered trademark by which the manufacturer can be readily
identified after installation.
G. 5’ Service Electro-Coated, Coating: Chemically deposited zinc-phosphate pretreatment layer followed
by an electrically deposited, high performance cationic epoxy top coat, similar to PPG 6100HE. This
coating must pass the following performance specifications:
1. 350 hours of salt spray testing per ISO 7253
2. Resistance to wastewater for 30 days at 203⁰ F
3. Chemical resistance from pH 2 to pH 12 for 30 days at 203⁰ F
2.3 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS (Above Grade)
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B. Tensile Strength: 21,000 psig minimum.
C. Pipe, and fittings shall be manufactured in USA by a member of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
(CISPI).
D. Each length of pipe and each fitting shall be plainly marked with size, country of origin, and name of
manufacturer, or manufacturer’s registered trademark by which the manufacturer can be readily
identified after installation.
E. Joining Materials
1. CISPI Couplings for Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 310, having ASTM C 564
neoprene sealing sleeve, with 300 Series stainless-steel corrugated shield-and-clamp assembly.
2. Stainless Steel, Heavy-Duty Couplings for Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 564
neoprene sealing gasket, with Type 304 stainless-steel housing or shield and stainless-steel
clamps. Coupling shall be 3 inches wide in sizes 1-1/2 to 4 inches and 4 inches wide in sizes 5 to
10 inches.
3. Cast-Iron, Heavy-Duty Couplings for Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 564
neoprene sealing gasket, with cast-iron housing and stainless steel bolts.
4. FM-Type, Heavy-Duty Couplings for Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: FM-approved,
ASTM C 564 elastomeric sleeve, with stainless steel band and strips or cast-iron housing and
corrosion-resistant bolts.
2.4 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Ductile-Iron, Mechanical-Joint Piping:
1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot ends unless
grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
2. Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, mechanical-joint, ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern or AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile-iron compact pattern.
3. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
B. Ductile-Iron, Push-on-Joint Piping:
1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot ends unless
grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
2. Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, push-on-joint, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or
AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile-iron compact pattern.
3. Gaskets: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber.
C. Ductile-Iron, Grooved-Joint Piping: AWWA C151/A21.51, with round-cut-grooved ends according to
AWWA C606.
D. Ductile-Iron, Grooved-End Pipe Appurtenances:

221316-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221316 – STORM DRAINAGE, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

1. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 536 ductile-iron castings, with dimensions matching
AWWA C110/A 21.10 ductile-iron pipe or AWWA C153/A 21.53 ductile-iron fittings, and
complying with AWWA C606 for grooved ends.
E. Grooved Mechanical Couplings for Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM F 1476, Type I. Include ferrous housing
sections with continuous curved keys; EPDM-rubber center-leg gasket suitable for hot and cold water;
and bolts and nuts.
F. Ductile-Iron Pipe and Ductile-Iron or Cast-Iron Fittings: The following materials apply:
1. Push-On Joints: AWWA C111 rubber gaskets and lubricant.
2. Mechanical Joints: AWWA C111 ductile-iron or gray-iron glands, high-strength steel bolts and
nuts, and rubber gaskets.
3. Flanged Joints: AWWA C115 ductile-iron or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber gaskets, and high-
strength steel bolts and nuts.
2.5 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Type DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint
fittings.
C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type B and Type C), water tube,
drawn temper.
D. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed temper.
E. Copper Pressure Fittings:
1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint
fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-
metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
F. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.
1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-
mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.
H. Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tube and Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM A536 ductile-iron
or ASTM A 47 malleable-iron housing having copper-colored enamel finish, with synthetic-rubber
gasket having central-cavity, pressure-responsive design and suitable for hot water, with ASTM A183
carbon-steel bolts and nuts.
2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.
C. PVC Pressure Fittings: ASTM D 2466, Socket Type
D. PVC Joining Materials:
1. Primer: ASTM F 656.
a. Primer shall have a VOC content of 550g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24)
b. In the state of California, Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services “Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers”
2. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
a. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)
b. In the state of California, solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services “Standard Practice for the

221316-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221316 – STORM DRAINAGE, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale

Environmental Chambers”
2.7 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.
1. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a. Standard: ASTM C 1173.
b. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and
corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
c. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.
d. Sleeve Materials:
1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
2. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a. Standard: ASTM C 1460.
b. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield
and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
c. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.
3. Pressure Transition Couplings:
a. Standard: AWWA C219.
b. Description: Metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to, and
ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.
c. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard.
d. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
e. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
B. Dielectric Fittings:
1. Dielectric Unions:
a. Standard: ASSE 1079.
b. Pressure rating as required.
c. End connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
2. Dielectric Flanges:
a. Standard: ASSE 1079.
b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
c. Pressure rating as required.
d. End connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint
copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
3. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
b. Pressure rating as required.
c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
d. Bolt sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
4. Dielectric Nipples:
a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.
b. Electroplated steel nipple.
c. Pressure rating as required.
d. End connections: Male threaded or grooved.
e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS JOINING MATERIALS
A. Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End, Nonpressure System Pipe: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and
stainless steel band assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined.
B. Sleeves: ASTM C 564, rubber for cast-iron soil pipe and ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal for plastic
pipe. Sleeves for dissimilar or other pipe materials shall be compatible with pipe materials being
joined.

221316-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221316 – STORM DRAINAGE, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

1. Bands: Stainless steel, one at each pipe insert.

C. Gasket-Type Couplings for Plain-End, Nonpressure System Pipe: Rubber or elastomeric compression
gasket, made to match pipe inside diameter or hub and adjoining pipe outside diameter.
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber for cast-iron soil pipe and ASTM F477, elastomeric seal for plastic
pipe. Gaskets for dissimilar or other pipe materials shall be compatible with pipe materials being
joined.
2.9 VALVES
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, use gate, ball,
or butterfly valves for shutoff duty and globe, ball, or butterfly valves for throttling duty.
2.10 CORROSION PROTECTION ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND IRON PIPING
A. Material: Linear low-density polyethylene film manufactured of virgin polyethylene material conforming
to the requirements of ASTM D 1248, and a minimum thickness of 0.008-inch thickness or, high-
density, cross-laminated polyethylene film manufactured of virgin polyethylene material conforming to
the requirements of ASTM D 1248, and a minimum thickness of 0.004-inch.
B. The film shall be marked showing trademark, year of manufacture, type of resin, specification
conformance, applicable pipe sizes and a corrosion protection warning.
C. Install tubular polyethylene per ASTM A674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.
2.11 CLEANOUTS
A. Provide cleanouts in soil, waste and sewer lines at all changes of direction, dead-ends, and at 50 ft.
intervals on horizontal runs. All cleanouts shall be full size of pipe but need not be larger than 4".
B. Cleanout extensions to unfinished floors inside building walls shall terminate in brass counter-sunk
cleanout plugs set flush with the surface; provide JR Smith 4240 cast iron body, adjustable cast iron
top.
C. Cleanout extensions to finished floor inside building walls, shall terminate in standard brass cleanout
plugs set below the floor and shall be provided as follows:
1. Tile Finished Floor Areas.
a. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule in drawings.
b. JR Smith 4160 or equal cast iron ferrule with nickel brass square frame and secured cover
recessed.
2. Cleanouts – Walls.
a. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule in drawings.
b. JR Smith 4452 cast iron ferrule or equal, counter-sunk brass plug and round stainless steel
cover. Coordinate location with Architect.
D. Use blanked tees at 90 degree bends to provide cleanout capability. Locate cleanouts in floor a
minimum of one foot from walls and installed equipment in order to provide proper access. Provide
ample space for piping and take particular care to avoid structural interference and conflicts between
mechanical and electrical work.
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches,
bends, and long-sweep bends.
1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of
flow is from horizontal to vertical.
2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or
side by side with common drain pipe.
3. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.
4. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.
5. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected.
6. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
B. Lay buried building waste piping beginning at low point of each system.

221316-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221316 – STORM DRAINAGE, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends
of piping upstream.
2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,
cements, and other installation requirements.
3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
C. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, except where another slope is
indicated:
1. Sanitary Building Drain: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) for piping 3 inches and smaller; 1/4 inch per
foot (2 percent) for piping 4 inches and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent).
3. Storm Building Drain: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent).
4. Horizontal Storm Drainage Piping: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent).
5. Vent Piping: 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent).
D. Changes in pipe size on soil, waste and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in
direction shall be made by the use of fittings.
E. All fixtures not specified to be provided with traps as integral parts of their outfits and all drains shall
have separate traps with cleanouts.
F. Waste lines shall be not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
G. Individually vent all fixtures or connect to a vented soil or waste line.
H. Horizontal vents shall slope down from waste or soil branch or stack. Grade horizontal soil and waste
piping 1/4 inch per foot for 3-inch size and smaller and 1/8 inch per foot for 4 inch and larger
increasers shall be installed on the top of each soil stack and vent stack before same passes through
roof.
I. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system, except grease
interceptors, shall be equipped with a trap. Each trap shall be placed as near the fixtures as possible
and no fixture shall be double-trapped. Traps installed on cast iron soil pipe shall be cast iron. Traps
installed on steel pipe or copper tube shall be recess-drainage patter, or brass-tube type.Sleeves are
not required for cast-iron soil pipes passing through concrete slab, without membrane waterproofing,
on grade.
J. Install cast iron soil pipe according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV,
"Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
K. Bell and spigot cast iron soil piping.
1. Lay non-pressure pipe with the bell ends in the upgrade position.
2. Adjust spigots in bells to give a uniform space all around. Blocking or wedging between bells and
spigots is not permitted. Replace by one of proper dimensions any pipe or fitting that does not
allow sufficient space for proper caulking or installation of joint material.
3. Make joints with the rubber gaskets previously specified for joints with this piping, except that
where it is impractical to install rubber gasket joints, use leaded joints. Install rubber gasket joints
in accordance with the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer.
4. Make leaded joints in the following manner.
a. Pack braided or twisted oakum or hemp gaskets into the annular space between bell and
leading.
b. Do not allow gaskets to project into the bore of finished joints.
c. After gaskets are placed, clean the joints and fill the remaining space with one pouring of
lead.
d. Caulk lead in a manner that will assure a tight joint without overstraining the iron of the bell,
and so that after caulking, the lead will be practically flush with the base of the ball.
L. Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code.
M. Install stainless-steel piping according to ASME A112.3.1 and applicable plumbing code.
N. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
O. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

221316-7 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221316 – STORM DRAINAGE, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

P. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

Q. Install engineered soil and waste and vent piping systems as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
R. Install underground, ductile-iron, force-main piping according to AWWA C600.
1. Install buried piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to
sanitary sewer piping outside building with restrained joints.
2. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
S. Where determined by the Mechanical Engineer based on soils reports indicating aggressively
corrosive soils, provide encasement protection wrap at buried ductile iron or cast iron pipe and fittings.
T. Install underground copper force-main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.
U. Install force mains at elevations indicated.
V. Install backwater valves in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
W. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary
sewers in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.
1. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping.
2. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping
Specialties."
X. Install drains in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.
3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints.
C. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.
D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
2. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as
follows:
a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
c. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E. Join stainless-steel pipe and fittings with gaskets according to ASME A112.3.1.
F. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813, water-
flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.
G. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AWWA C606. Lubricate and install gasket over
ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket, with keys seated in
piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.
H. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install
gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.
I. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.
2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendixes.

221316-8 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221316 – STORM DRAINAGE, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

3.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:
1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs.
2. In Waste Drainage Piping: [Unshielded] [Shielded], nonpressure transition couplings.
3. In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings.
4. In Underground Force Main Piping:
a. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings.
b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.
B. Dielectric Fittings:
1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
2. Dielectric Fittings for [NPS 2 (DN 50)] <Insert pipe size> and Smaller: Use dielectric [nipples]
[unions].
3. Dielectric Fittings for [NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100)] <Insert pipe size range>: Use
dielectric [flanges] [flange kits] [nipples].
4. Dielectric Fittings for [NPS 5 (DN 125)] <Insert pipe size> and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Shutoff Valves:
1. Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge.
2. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
3. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
B. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage pump
discharge.
C. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves unless drain has integral backwater valve.
3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
4. Comply with requirements for backwater valve specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste
Piping Specialties."
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
B. Extend building storm drain piping and connect to building storm sewer piping of size and in location
indicated for service entrance to building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of
building storm drain and building storm sewer.

C. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping of size and in location
indicated for service entrance to building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of
building sanitary drain and building sanitary sewer.
D. Connect waste and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by
plumbing code or authorities having jurisdiction. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as
possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code or authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code or authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with
floor.
5. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor.
6. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated.
a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection.

221316-9 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221316 – STORM DRAINAGE, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

b. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
E. When indicated in drawings, connect force-main piping to the following:
1. Sanitary Sewer: To exterior force main.
2. Sewage Pump: To sewage pump discharge.
F. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.
G. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Refer to 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions for identification requirements.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Refer to Section 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions.
B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with
dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex
paint.
3.8 INSPECTIONS
A. Refer to 220013 – Plumbing General Provisions for identification requirements.
3.9 TESTING
A. Test sanitary waste and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in
absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test,
complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced waste and vent piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was
tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test waste and vent piping except outside leaders on
completion of roughing-in.
a. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-
foot head of water (30 kPa).
b. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not
drop.
c. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with
water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight.
a. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce
air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa).
b. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure.
c. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of
inspection.
d. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
B. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of
published procedures, as follows:

221316-10 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 221316 – STORM DRAINAGE, SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping until it
has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was
tested.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.
a. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours.
b. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

END OF SECTION

221316-11 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 223000 - PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment and services required to execute, install
and complete, ready for use, all plumbing work including sanitary and water systems for the project,
according to the drawings and these specifications.
B. In general, the work to be done includes the furnishing and installing of all soil, waste, vent and drain
piping; all hot and cold water lines and sanitary sewers inside the building, water service, gas piping
and all other materials and equipment shown on the drawings and/or specified herein.
C. The installation of the above piping shall be complete with all fixtures, traps, hangers, valves, anchors,
supports, sleeves insulations and all other necessary material and labor as hereinafter specified and
called for on the drawings, or required to furnish a plumbing system complete in every respect, ac-
cording to the meaning and intent of the drawings and specifications and ready for satisfactory use.
D. All work shall be installed in accordance with all applicable rules and regulations of the City
of Charlotte, State of North Carolina or Federal agencies or other authorities having lawful jurisdiction.
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Cutting, Patching and Digging:
1. All cutting, drilling and patching of masonry, woodwork or plaster belonging to the building must
be done by this Contractor in order that his work may be properly installed and all disturbed
construction or finish must be made good but under no conditions must structural work be cut.
2. Contractor shall also refer to the Architectural plans for details and large-scale drawings and to
the equipment shop drawings for exact locations of water and waste outlets for equipment
furnished under other sections of these specifications. The above-mentioned equipment shop
drawings will be furnished to the Contractor before roughing-in. The Contractor shall not install
any piping for said equipment until he has received approved shop drawings from the Architect
for same.
B. Excavation:
1. This Contractor shall do all excavating and backfilling that may be required for the installation of
any and all parts of this work requiring excavation.
2. All excavations are to be so conducted that no walls or footing shall be disturbed or injured in any
way.
C. Trenches and Backfilling:
1. Pipe trench excavation shall be made to required lines and grades. The width of the trench shall
be such as to insure the proper making up of joints.
2. The placing and tamping or backfill shall be uniform to ensure the proper alignment of piping and
avoid injury to any part of the work or the creation of unequal pressure. All backfill for
excavations and trenches shall be clean sand or gravel free from silt, clay and loam. Do not
backfill with material obtained from digging without prior approval. Backfill with clay will be
allowed only for exterior trenches NOT under any paved areas.
3. Tamp and puddle all trenches as required to avoid future settlement. Remove excess materials
from the site, as may be required.
D. Verification:
1. The run of all lines shown on drawings is to be regarded as diagrammatic and tentative. Before
running, Contractor shall carefully verify location, depth and size of sewers to which connection is
proposed. Before running any lines within building, this Contractor shall assure himself that they
can be run as contemplated without trapping or interfering with footings, beams, columns, other
piping, fixtures, etc.

223000-1
 CHASE
SECTION 223000 - PLUMBING

1.4 GUARANTEE
A. Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee and shall require guarantees from all manufactures furnishing
equipment that furnishings comply with all the requirements of the drawings and specifications.
1.5 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. Piping Materials: The latest issue of the standard referred to shall apply to these materials. Abbrevia-
tions are:
1. "ANSI": American National Standard Institute
2. "ASTM": American Society for Testing Materials
3. "FS": Federal Specifications and Standards
4. "AWWA": American Water Works Association
B. Pipe and Fittings:
1. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A74.
2. Copper Drainage Tube (D.W.V.): ASTMB306.
3. Cast Bronze Solder Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23.
4. Steel Pipes: ASTM A120.
5. Cast Iron Screwed Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.12.
6. Cast Iron Flanged Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.1
7. Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.5.
8. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: Class 125 and 250, ANSI B16.4.
9. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Class 150 and 300, B16.3. ANSI
10. Seamless Copper tubing: ASTM B88.
11. Wrought Copper and Cooper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings: ANSI B16.22
12. Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage: ANSI B16.23.
13. Cast Cooper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes: ANSI B12.26.
14. Seamless Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43.
15. Seamless Copper Pipe: ASTM B42.
16. Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings: Class 125 and 250, B16.15.
17. Bronze Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Class 150 and 300, ANSI

PART 2 - - PRODUCTS
2.1 SANITARY, STORM, GAS, WASTE AND VENT PIPING
A. Fittings shall be radius fittings, except fittings in vent piping may be short radius fittings.
B. Minimum size piping shall be 4 inches for buried piping and 1.5 inches for aboveground piping.
C. Buried Piping
1. Buried piping includes piping up to but not more than 6 inches above ground or floor slab on
grade.
2. Cast-Iron Hub and Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A74 with ASTM C564 rubber compression
gasket joints, or caulked lead and oakum joints.
D. Aboveground Piping:
1. PVC Pipe & Fittings: SCH.40, solvent welded ASTM D-2241 and ASTM D-1785. (Where
approved.)
2. Cast-Iron Hub and Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A74 with ASTM C 564 rubber compression
gasket joints, or caulked lead and oakum joints.
3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 120, Schedule 40, hot-dip galvanized, threaded end
connections; with ANSI B16, 12 hot-dip galvanized threaded fittings.
4. Gas Piping: Black iron pipe ASTM A53 or ASTM 120 schedule 40 with malleable iron fittings.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Provide cleanouts in soil, waste and sewer lines at all changes of direction, dead-ends, and at 50 ft.
intervals on horizontal runs. All cleanouts shall be full size of pipe but need not be larger than 4".

223000-2
 CHASE
SECTION 223000 - PLUMBING

B. Cleanout extensions to unfinished floors inside building walls shall terminate in brass counter-sunk
cleanout plugs set flush with the surface; provide JR Smith 4240 cast iron body, adjustable cast iron
top.
C. Cleanout extensions to finished floor inside building walls, shall terminate in standard brass cleanout
plugs set below the floor and shall be provided as follows:
1. Tile Finished Floor Areas: JR Smith 4160 cast iron ferrule with nickel brass square frame and
secured cover recessed.
2. Cleanouts - Walls: JR Smith 4452 cast iron ferrule, counter-sunk brass plug and round stainless-
steel cover. Coordinate location with Architect.
2.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING:
A. Aboveground Piping: Piping aboveground shall be of the following materials:
B. 4 Inches and Smaller: Copper tubing, Type L hard drawn, conforming to ASTM B88, with brazed or
solder joint copper, brass or bronze fittings conforming to ANSI B16.18 or ANSI B16.22 or brass pipe,
standard weight IPS, 85 percent copper content conforming to ASTM B43 with standard weight
threaded cast brass fitting conforming to ANSI B16.15.
C. Exposed piping in finished areas shall be chrome plated brass pipe or Type L copper tubing to the
shutoff or stop valve of each fixture.
2.4 WATER VALVES
A. Provide valves suitable for minimum of 125 psig and minimum of 180 degrees F hot water. Valves
shall have flanged end connections, except sizes smaller than 2.5 inches may have threaded end
connections for connections between bronze valves and copper tubing. Copper alloy and bronze
valve body shall be ASTM B61 or ASTM B62 copper alloy.
B. Provide a shutoff valve at each equipment connection and at other points in the piping systems where
indicated or reasonably required to stop or control flow. Contractor shall review piping layout before
installation to assure positive control.
C. The following valve figure numbers, taken from the current catalogs of valve manufacturers are in-
tended to establish the general type and quality of valves required. Refer to Section 15050.
D. 4 inches and smaller (copper pipe):
1. Ball valves - Bronze boy, chrome plated bronze ball, bronze stem, steel handle, Teflon seat,
400lb WOG; Watts No. B-6001 or Apollo No. 70-200, solder ends.
2. Check valves - 200 lb., bronze body, regrinding bronze disc, swing check, solder ends; Crane
No. 1342, Nibco No. S-413B, Stockham No. B-309, Walworth No. 3406-SJ.
A. 2-1/2 in. and larger (steel pipe):
3. Gate valves - 125lb., IBBM, solid wedge, OS&Y, rising stem, flanged; Crane No. 465-1/2, Nibco
No. F-617-0, Stockham No. G-623, Walworth No. 8726-F.
4. Globe valves - 200 lb., IBBM replaceable composition disc for 200-degree max., flanged; Crane
No. 359, Nibco No. F-718-Y, Stockham No. G-514, Walworth No. 8914-F.
5. Check valves - 125 lb., IBBM, swing check, re-grind renew bronze disc and seat ring, bolted
cover, flanged; Crane No. 373, Nibco No. F-918-B, Stockham No. G-931, Walworth No. 8929-F.
6. Gas solenoid valves equal to ASCO's.
E. Balancing valves - Bell & Gossett circuit setter. Set at 1.0 GPM per circuit setter.
F. Flow Control Valves - Provide flow restrictors for lavatories, sinks and showers without flow restrictors
in accordance with all applicable codes.
2.5 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS
A. Provide at connections between copper and ferrous metal piping materials. ASTM F 441, Schedule
80, CPVC threaded pipe nipples, 4-inch minimum length, may be provided for dielectric connections
in pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller.

223000-3
 CHASE
SECTION 223000 - PLUMBING

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS

A. Pipe Nipples: Fed. Spec. WW-N-351, copper alloy for use in copper tubing and hot-dip galvanized
Schedule 80 steel pipe for use in steel piping.
B. Unions: Fed. Spec. WW-U-516 for use in copper tubing; ANSI B16.39 hot-dip galvanized steel for use
in steel piping.
C. Escutcheon Plates: Provide one piece of split hinge type metal plates for piping passing through
floors, walls and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide chromium plated finish on plates in finished
spaces. Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces. Securely anchor plates in place with set
screws or other approved positive means.
D. Pipe Sleeves: Provide where piping passes through walls, floors, roofs and partitions. Secure sleeves
in proper position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass
through entire thickness of walls, floors and partitions. Provide no less than 0.25-inch space between
exterior of piping or pipe insulation and interior of sleeve. Firmly pack space with insulation and caulk
at both ends of the sleeve with plastic water proof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or
provide a segmented elastomeric seal.
1. Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls and Floors: Provide ASTM A53 or ASTM A120,
Schedule 40 or Standard Weight, hot-dip galvanized steel pipe sleeves. Extend sleeves in floor
slabs 3 inches above the finished floor, except sleeves are not required where DWV piping
passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade.
2. Sleeves in Partitions and Other than Masonry and Concrete Walls and Floors: Provide hot-dip
galvanized steel sheet having a nominal weight of not less than 0.90 pounds per square foot.
E. Pipe Supports (Hangers): Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 or 6, of the adjustable type,
except as indicated or specified herein. Provide Type 40 insulation protection shields for insulated pip-
ing. Provide steel support rods. Provide nonmetallic, hair felt, or plastic piping isolators between cop-
per tubing and the hangers.
2.7 FIXTURES, FITTINGS, ACCESSORIES AND SUPPLIES
A. Provide control-stop valves in each supply to each fixture. The finish of fittings, accessories, and sup-
plies exposed to view shall be chromium-plated. Center-set faucets shall be top-mounted with inlets
on not greater than 4-inch centers. Provide special roughing-in for the elderly and wheelchair fixtures.
1. See drawings for plumbing fixture schedule.
2.8 HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMPS
A. Bronze body, in-the-line centrifugal type with resiliently mounted 1750 RPM motor, built-in thermal
overload protection, spring type flexible coupling, oil lubricated bearings, mechanical seal and flanged
connections.
B. Pump motor cradles shall be supported from the building structure independent for the piping in an
approved manner.
C. 10 Gal/Min at 10 ft. head 1/6 HP, 120V, 1-phase.
D. Bell and Gossett 1" PR. TACO, or approved equal.
2.9 GAS FIRED WATER HEATER
A. See Schedule on drawing.
2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. See Schedule on drawing.

223000-4
 CHASE
SECTION 223000 - PLUMBING

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of plumbing systems including fixtures, equipment, materials and workmanship shall be in
accordance with the State and Local Plumbing Code.
3.2 CROSS CONNECTIONS AND INTERCONNECTIONS
A. No plumbing fixture, device equipment, or pipe connection shall be installed that will provide a cross
connection or interconnection between potable water supply and any source of non-potable water,
such as a drainage system, a soil or waste pipe.
3.3 CLEANOUTS, CLEARANCE AND PROTECTION
A. Use blanked tees at 90-degree bends to provide cleanout capability. Locate cleanouts in floor a mini-
mum of one foot from walls and installed equipment in order to provide proper access. Provide ample
space for piping and take particular care to avoid structural interference and conflicts between several
types of mechanical and electrical work.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF PIPE, FIXTURES, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Before being placed in position, carefully clean pipe internally as well as externally and fittings. Main-
tain all pipe in a clean condition. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Tightly
cover fixtures and equipment and protect against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. Upon
completion of all work, thoroughly clean, adjust, and operate the fixtures, materials and equipment.
3.5 BELL AND SPIGOT CAST IRON SOIL PIPING
A. Lay non-pressure pipe with the bell ends in the upgrade position. Adjust spigots in bells to give a uni-
form space all around. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots is not permitted. Replace by
one of proper dimensions any pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient space for proper caulking or
installation of joint material. Make joints with the rubber gaskets previously specified for joints with this
piping, except that where it is impractical to install rubber gasket joints, use leaded joints. Install rub-
ber gasket joints in accordance with the recommendations of the pipe manufacture. Make leaded
joints in the following manner: Pack braided or twisted oakum or hemp gaskets into the annular space
between bell and leading. Do not allow gaskets to project into the bore of finished joints. After gaskets
are placed, clean the joints and fill the remaining space with one pouring of lead. Caulk lead in a
manner that will assure a tight joint without overstraining the iron of the bell, and so that after caulking,
the lead will be practically flush with the base of the ball.
3.6 SANITARY SYSTEMS
A. Provide sanitary systems where practicable, with Y fittings and 1/8- or 1/16-bends or combination Y-
and 1/8-bends. All fixtures not specified to be provided with traps as integral parts of their outfits and
all drains shall have separate traps with cleanouts. Waste lines shall be not less than 1-1/2 inches in
diameter. Individually vent all fixtures or connect to a vented soil or waste line. Horizontal vents shall
slope down from waste or soil branch or stack. Grade horizontal soil and waste piping 1/4 inch per
foot for 3-inch size and smaller and 1/8 inch per foot for 4 inch and larger increasers shall be installed
on the top of each soil stack and vent stack before same passes through roof.
3.7 FITTINGS
A. Changes in pipe size on soil, waste and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in
direction shall be made using fittings.
3.8 TRAPS
A. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system, except grease in-
terceptors, shall be equipped with a trap. Each trap shall be placed as near the fixtures as possible
and no fixture shall be double trapped. Traps installed on cast iron soil pipe shall be cast iron. Traps
installed on steel pipe or copper tube shall be recess-drainage patter, or brass-tube type.

223000-5
 CHASE
SECTION 223000 - PLUMBING

3.9 WATER SYSTEMS

A. Install water systems with a fall towards the shut-off valve of the lowest fixture. Provide valve branch-
es on hot and cold-water lines to all fixtures, water heating units, and outlets as indicated on drawings
or as noted in specifications.
3.10 MAINS, BRANCHES AND RUNOUTS
A. Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the
building by the Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Piping shall be
run parallel with the lines of the building. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bot-
tom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as required by installation conditions. Supply pipes,
valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other service to permit not
less than 1/2 inch between finished covering and other work not less than 1/2 inch between finished
covering on the difference services. The hot water and cold-water piping systems shall be installed so
as to be drained.
3.11 AIR CHAMBERS
A. Air chambers shall be provided on hot and cold-water supplies and shall be accessible. Air chambers
shall consist of 12-inch length of pipe of the same diameter as the branch supply, capped.
3.12 VALVES
A. Install valves in accessible places and locate as follows: shut-off valves on each supply to each piece
of equipment, at the bottom of each riser and at each branch connection off the main piping system.
3.13 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES
A. Provide all necessary material and labor to connect to the plumbing system all fixtures and equipment
having plumbing connections, which are furnished under fit-up package work or are specified in other
sections of these specifications. Trap drainage connections. Equipment the supply line to each item of
equipment or fixture, except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied with an
integral stop with a stop valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without inter-
fering with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Anchor supply piping to all fixtures, and flush
valves to prevent movement. Make connections between the earthenware of fixtures sand the flanges
on soil pipe watertight with one-piece special molded plastic gasket. Do not use all bulk material in-
cluding putty and plastics for gaskets. Secure floor drains to the waterproofing or flashing in watertight
manner.
3.14 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Jointing compound for pipe threads shall be polytetrfluoroethylene (PTFE) pipe thread tape, pipe ce-
ment and oil, or PTFE powder and oil; apply only on male threads. Provide exposed ferrous pipe
threads with one coat of Fed. Spec. TT-P-645 primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0
mil.
3.15 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide adjustable hangers, saddles, inserts, brackets, rollers, clamps, supplementary steel, etc., as
required for proper support of all pipelines. Hangers shall be designed to allow for expansion and con-
traction of pipelines and shall be of adequate size to permit covering to run continuously through
hangers. Coordinate location of hangers with light fixtures as shown on electrical drawings. Hangers
provided under other sections shall not be used for support of piping or equipment provided under this
section unless the Architect grants permission in writing. Hangers shall be of manufacture and type
specified or approved equal.

223000-6
 CHASE
SECTION 223000 - PLUMBING

1. Single Hangers: Support single pipe runs with clevis type hangers.
2. Trapeze Hangers: Support multiple pipe runs on trapeze type hangers. Provide all necessary
supporting steel rollers to keep pipe in alignment and allow for expansion. Concealed trapeze
hangers shall be Unistrut.
3. Supporting Spacing: Pipe support spacing, and sizes of pipe-hanging suspension rods shall
conform to the following table:
Pipe Spacing: Pipe Supporting Spacing
1/2" and 3/4" Not over 6'-6"
1" and 1-1/4" Not over 8'-6"
1-1/2" Not over 10'-0"
2" and 2-1/2" Not over 12'-0"
4" and Larger Not over 16'-0"

Pipe Size Rod Diameter

Up to 2" 3/8"
2-1/2" to 3-1/2" 1/2"
4" and Larger 5/8"
For caulked bell-and-spigot piping provide a hanger for each section of pipe, located at shoulder of
bell.
4. Fastening Devices
a. Drilled-In Threaded Inserts: Where supports in beams and slabs are required after concrete
and has been poured, Drilled-In Threaded Inserts or Self Drilling Expansion Shields shall be
provided, installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations as to maximum
loading, but in no case more than 10'-0" apart.
b. Expansion Anchors and Powder-Actuated Fasteners and Devices: The use of lead shield
anchors or powder-actuated fasteners and devices is not permitted.
3.16 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL
A. Provide all necessary supplementary steel or proper support or attachment of hangers. Steel shall be
painted with one coat of rust-inhibiting primer.
3.17 SADDLES
A. Provide protection saddles at hanger points of insulated pipe. Saddles shall be Crawford Fig. 35 or
equal.
3.18 EXPANSION SWINGS
A. At connections of branches to mains and risers at connections to equipment provide sufficient number
of elbow swings to allow for proper expansion and contraction of piping. Provide adequate elbow
swings through building expansion joints to allow for proper expansion and contraction of piping
mains.
3.19 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Where the possibility of back-siphonage exists, water supplied to the fixture shall be introduced
through a suitable vacuum breaker installed at a minimum of 7'-6" above the floor, or integral with fau-
cet. This is based on municipal codes.
3.20 TESTING AND STERILIZING
A. All new soil, waste and vent piping before covered up to be stopped at outlets and tested with a water
pressure of 5 lbs. for a period of one hour.
B. All new water piping and mains upon completion before being covered shall be treated to a hydrostat-
ic pressure of 50% more than maximum system pressure, but no less than 100 psig of pressure for a
2 hour period.
C. Any additional tests, if required by local authorities, to be as directed by them.

223000-7
 CHASE
SECTION 223000 - PLUMBING

D. If tests show any leaks in the pipe or at joints, same are to be made tight and tests repeated; tests to
be made in the presence of the Owner or those in authority and the cost of all tests paid by the
Plumbing Contractor.
E. Upon completion of all testing and closing of leads, all new water mains shall be sterilized in accord-
ance with the requirements of the State Board of Health and those of the local governing authorities.
3.21 CLEANING UP
A. After the completion of the plumbing installation, this Contractor shall clean foreign paint, grease, oil,
dirt, labels, stickers, etc., from all fixtures, apparatus, equipment and interior piping installed by him.
Contractor shall remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated from his operations from the premises.
3.22 FIELD DRAWINGS
A. Maintain 2 sets of drawings corrected with colored pencil showing exact locations of equipment, pip-
ing, valves, etc., with such dimensions as re necessary to identify services. Furnish "as built" drawings
to the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel.

END OF SECTION

223000-8
 CHASE
SECTION 230013 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material and equipment called for in these Specifications and
accompanying Drawings and shall install the system complete in every respect. All purchased
equipment to comply with local system complete in every respect.
B. HVAC equipment and devices shall be controlled and monitored by the Building Energy Management
System (BMS) installed by the electrician. Refer to Section 260943.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections 220700 through 238239
B. 260943 – NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)
1.4 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The following general rules and requirements apply to the interpretation of all phases of the drawings
and specifications.
B. Drawings for the work consist of a complete set of plans and specifications, to which will be added
during the period of construction any other detail drawings as may be necessary in the opinion of the
Architect to show the proper installation of the work.
C. The dimension and ratings of equipment herein specified or indicated on the drawings are intended to
establish the outlined characteristic of such equipment generally.
D. Where manufacturer's catalog numbers or types are mentioned in the specifications or indicated on
the drawings, they are intended to be used. In all cases the manufacturer shall verify the duty
specified with the particular characteristics of the equipment they intend to supply. The manufacturer
of equipment is cautioned to consult other applicable articles in the specification, particularly those in
motors, starters, etc.
E. The drawings and accompanying specifications are to be considered as an important and integral part
of same, and anything omitted from one and embodied in the other is to be considered as essential to
the requirements of the Contract and must be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
F. Equipment that does not fit into available building spaces will not be approved regardless of whether
the make is approved.
G. No important dimensions shall be obtained by scaling a drawing; important dimensions and elevations
shall be determined by computing from the established dimensions and reference points given on the
Architect's drawings. Site grade elevations shall be determined from the Architect's site drawings.
However, it is not the intention of the drawings to indicate all necessary offsets in piping and ductwork
in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, preserve head room and keep all
openings and passageways clear without further construction.
H. It is intended that apparatus shall be located symmetrically with Architectural elements,
notwithstanding the fact that locations indicated by the drawings may be distorted for clearness in
presentation.
I. Where discrepancies are found by the Contractor after signing the Contract between the
Specification, Sections, or between drawings, or any contradictory sizes or plate numbers describing
the manufacturer's item, such shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and the Architect shall
determine the proper items to be used with no additional cost to the Owner.
1.5 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION
A. Coordinate procurement and installation of HVAC control devices with the project electrician.

230013-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 230013 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS

B. Contractor shall confer with other trades at the site before installation of his work to avoid
interferences so that maximum headroom and clearances may be maintained. In the event that
interferences develop between work and various trades, the Owners decision will be final and no
additional compensation will be allowed for the moving of misplaced work.
C. Particular attentions shall be paid to situations where recessed equipment, pipes and lights occur, or
where the work of several trades occurs together above suspended ceilings, in pipe shafts or in areas
where space is limited.
D. It is presumed that the Contractor has carefully examined the drawings and specifications for the
entire work and the job conditions that will ensue before executing the agreement and has reported to
the Architect in writing any interference of conflicts with his work. If the Contractor has failed to call
such interferences of conflicts relative to this work, the drawings, specifications, the work of other
trades, and job conflicts arise during the construction period, they shall be submitted and subjected to
the Architect's decision, all changes made and all damage to construction shall be repaired by the
Contractor without additional cost.
E. All fixtures, equipment, devices, switches, outlets, pumps, etc., shall be positioned to avoid all
interferences with and to assure proper coordination with the work of all other trades, cases,
partitions, wall, floor and ceiling patterns, architectural features, etc. All recessed devices, fixtures,
etc. shall be coordinated with all wall, floor and ceiling patterns. The Architect will work out the
conflicts and adjustments where such adjustments are warranted.
1.6 WORK PRIORITY OVER OTHER TRADES
A. All trades shall work in cooperation with one another to fit piping and ductwork into the structure as job
conditions may demand. The Architect shall make all final decisions as to right of way and run of pipe,
ducts, etc.
B. In general, priority is to be arranged as follows:
1. Recessed lighting fixtures.
2. Sheet metal ductwork.
3. Plumbing waste lines, downspouts and vents.
C. All reinforcing of joists and studs shall be kept at an absolute minimum, and when it is necessary shall
be only as approved by the Architect and local code. Where notching is permitted it shall be narrow
and as shallow as possible. The Contractor as required for his work shall do all notching unless
otherwise noted on the drawings.
D. All equipment, devices, ducts, fixtures, hangers, etc. shall be securely and permanently hung from
supporting walls, ceilings, etc. as approved.
1.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Each Contractor shall do all cutting and patching of building materials required for the installation of
work in his contract. No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Architect and all
cutting shall be done in a manner as directed by him.
1.8 DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIAL
A. All material or work found to be defective or not in strict conformity with the drawings or different from
the requirements of the drawings and specifications or defaced or injured through negligence of the
Contractor or his employees, or through the action of fire or weather will be rejected and shall be
immediately removed from the premises by the Contractor and satisfactory material and work
substituted therefore without delay.
B. Any defective work or imperfect work that may be discovered shall be corrected immediately on
notice. No previous inspection or certificate on account shall behold to relieve the Contractor from his
obligation to furnish sound material and to perform good and satisfactory work.
1.9 CHASES AND OPENINGS
A. Slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings and roofs as specified will be
provided by the various trades in their respective materials, but the trade requiring them shall see that
they are properly located and shall do any cutting and patching caused by the neglect to do so.

230013-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 230013 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.10 INSERTS AND SLEEVES

A. Layout the work in accordance with approved shop drawings. Furnish and set in place in advance of
pouring of slabs or construction of walls, all inserts, and sleeves necessary to complete the work. The
use of lead shield anchors or power-actuated fasteners and devices is not permitted.
1.11 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
A. Contractor shall provide all excavating, backfilling and removal of unused excavated material not used
for trenches required to install his underground work inside the building.
B. Trenching: Excavate to the require depths and grade bottoms of trenches to secure required slit for
pipelines or ductwork. Where mud or otherwise unstable soil is encountered in the bottom of the
trenches which is incapable of supporting the pipe such soil shall be removed to firm bearing and the
trenches backfilled with sand and the proper grade and tamped to provide uniform firm support. Pipe
and ducts shall not be laid on frozen sub-grade.
C. Sides of trenches at a point 1" above top of pope shall not be more than the O.D. of the pipe or duct,
expressed in inches, plus 12". Above this point the sides of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical
as possible and braced and shorted to protect foundations, utility pipe lines and workmen.
D. The bottom of the trench shall be accurately excavated by hand to provide firm, uniform bearing for
the bottom quarter of the pipe or duct. Pipe having bells, sleeves or other enlargement at the joints
shall have recesses excavated to accommodate these joints.
E. Backfilling: Trenches shall not be backfilled until piping has been tested by the Contractor as required
and approved by the Owner and/or any local authorities having jurisdiction.
F. All trenches inside the building shall be backfilled to the top which clean sand and compacted by hand
tamping.
G. Backfill for the remainder of the trench shall be of selected excavated material placed in layers which,
when compacted, will not exceed 1'-0". All backfilling shall be well rammed in place at the sides and
puddled every foot in height.
1.12 CLEANING UP
A. See General Conditions, which form a part of this section.
B. Contractor during the process of the work shall keep the premises reasonably free of all debris and
waste materials resulting from the work under this section. All such debris and rubbish shall be
removed from the site. On completion and before final acceptance of the work, all debris, rubbish,
leftover materials, tools, and equipment shall be removed from the site.
C. Machinery, apparatus, exposed piping and insulation shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster
and other materials, grease and oil spots removed with cleaning solvent, surfaces carefully wiped,
cracks and corners scraped clean.
D. Failure of the Contractor to clean up as required will be cause for the Architect to order this work done
by others at the expense of this Contractor.
1.13 PROTECTION
A. Each trade shall keep all of its respective pipe and duct openings closed by means of plugs or caps to
prevent the entrance of foreign matter, and cover the fixtures, equipment and apparatus as required to
protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation.
Any such fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the work shall be
restored to its original condition or replaced by the respective mechanical trade at no cost to the
Owner.
1.14 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Contractor shall arrange for all technical instructions of Owners maintenance personnel, either by this
own or the equipment manufacturer's personnel. A letter shall be written to the Engineer prior to these
instruction days so that he can attend.

230013-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 230013 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS

B. Manuals: Furnish three (3) sets of manuals, in bound form, hard cover, each containing data covering
capacities, maintenance and operation of each major item of equipment and apparatus. Operation
instructions shall cover all phases of control and shall also include the following:
1. Performance Curves: For fans and similar equipment at the operating conditions.
2. Lubrication Schedule: Indicating type and frequency of lubrication required.
3. List of Spare Parts: Recommend for normal service requirements.
4. Part List: Identifying the various parts of the equipment for repair and replacement purposes. In
particular, sheaves, V-belts, bearings and similar items should be clearly identified as to
manufacturer, size, and type and stocking points.
C. Instruction books may be standard booklets but should be clearly marked to indicate applicable
equipment and paragraphs.
1.15 APPROVALS
A. Prior to the commencement of work or the installation of any equipment this contractor must obtain
approval from the Architect/Engineer. Requests for approvals shall be made through the Architect. No
less than six (6) copies are required. No portion of the work requiring approval shall be commenced
until said portion has been returned bearing the Architect/Engineer's approval or a letter stating it has
been accepted and approved.
1.16 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. See General Conditions that form a part of this section.
B. All shop drawings shall have the following information:
1. Date Submitted.
2. Name and location of the project.
3. Name of the Architect and Consulting Engineer.
4. Name of the equipment manufacturer and supplier.
5. Specification reference - Division, Section and Paragraph.
6. System and area being served by the item being submitted.
7. Plan location (either room name and number or column line cross reference) of the item being
submitted.
8. Capacity of item being submitted (CFM, GPM, HP, MBH, RPM, etc.)
9. Outline dimensions.
10. Operating clearance.
11. Engineering data to include substantial compliance with the specifications.
C. Where equipment data forms a part of a larger catalog containing other unrelated apparatus, the
pertinent pages shall be removed and submitted separately with marking to indicate the specific item
offered for approval.
D. Each manufacturer's shop drawings submitted shall also have a typewritten short description of
general maintenance required weekly, monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, and annually (NOT
STANDARD MAINTENANCE MANUALS). The following information shall also be shown: equipment
model, serial number, phone number of service company, sizes, type, and numbers of motors, coils,
filters, pumps, belts, bearings, type of lubrication used, etc.
E. Also submit piping and duct layout shop drawings showing clearances, etc.
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Contractor shall keep on the job one complete set of the contract working drawings on which he shall
record any deviations or changes from such drawings made during construction. Record drawings
shall show change in size, type, capacity, etc. of materials, device or piece of equipment, location of
any outlet or source in building service system, re-routing of any piping or other building services.
B. These drawings shall also record the location of all concealed services, piping and other equipment
by indication of measured dimensions to each such line from readily identifiable and accessible walls
or columns of the building. Drawings shall show elevations of duct runs etc.
C. When the project is completed and as a condition of final payment, the Contractor shall certify to the
accuracy of the record drawings and specifications by endorsement thereof and shall require each

230013-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 230013 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS

Subcontractor to so certify by endorsement of the record drawings and specifications for his portion of
the work, and deliver same to the Owner, together with copies of all change orders and shop
drawings, in accordance with the General and Supplementary General Conditions.
1.18 GUARANTEE
A. Each Contractor shall and hereby does guarantee and warranty all work and material performed and
installed by him directly or by any of his subcontractors against defective and inferior materials and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance. All guarantees shall be in
writing and delivered to the Owner before final certificates are issued. Contractor shall make good at
his own expense and without cost of the Owner any and all defective and inferior materials and
workmanship that develop within the guarantee period.
1.19 PAINTING
A. The following equipment shall have a manufacturer's standard finish, equivalent to baked enamel, of
the type and color approved by the Architect, and shall not be job painted:
1. HVAC Units
2. Grilles, Registers & Diffusers
3. Control Panels
4. Fans
5. Motors
6. Electric Wall Heater
7. Unit Heaters
B. All priming and painting shall conform to all requirements of the painting specifications and the
Architect shall select all types and colors.
C. Piping, conduit, ductwork, etc. which are in walls, floors, or above a finished ceiling shall not be
painted.
D. Exposed ductwork.
1.20 BELT AND COUPLING GUARDS
A. Guards shall be provided for all belt-driven units and at chairs, gears, couplings, keys projecting set
screws, and other rotating or moving parts. Belt guards shall be made to enclose both pulleys and
belts on exposed sides, and shall be constructed of galvanized steel top and bottom with expanded
metal front pittsburgh locked into rim. The entire assembly shall be rigidly supported with all
necessary supplementary steel, and shall be provided for greasing, oiling, adjusting, checking of
equipment, etc. Provide coupling guards on direct connected units. Guards shall be designed for easy
removal for service and shall comply with Underwriters' Safety Requirements, and OSHA
Requirements.
1.21 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES
A. On all exposed pipes passing through floors, walls, partitions, plaster furring, etc., provide 1" split-type
steel plates around them. In unfinished rooms, plates shall be prime coated, in furnished rooms,
plates shall be chrome plated.
1.22 MINOR DEVIATIONS
A. The dimensions and ratings of equipment herein specified or indicated on the drawings are intended
to establish the desired outlines and characteristics of such equipment. Minor deviations will be
permitted to allow manufacturers specified to bid their nearest stock equipment.
B. Manufacturers catalog or model numbers and types mentioned in the specifications or indicated on
the drawings are intended to be used as guides and shall not be interpreted as taking precedence
over specific ratings or duty called for or shown, which modify stipulations in such catalogs. In all
cases, the manufacturer shall verify the duty specified with the particular characteristics of the
equipment he intends to offer for approval, and shall offer only items that comply with specification
requirements.

230013-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 230013 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS

C. Where the equipment furnished differs in physical character from that specified or indicated, or where
Contractor's substituted equipment requires increased services and/or facilities to be provided by
other trades, and such substitutions is acceptable to the Owner. The Contractors making the
substitutions shall pay for such services and facilities and shall bear all costs for modifying the
building to receive the product.

END OF SECTION

230013-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 230593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material and equipment called for in these Specifications and
accompanying Drawings and shall install the system complete in every respect.
B. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems:
1. Supply air systems, all pressure ranges;
2. Return air systems;
3. Exhaust air systems;
4. Verify temperature control system operation.
C. Test systems for proper sound and vibration levels.
D. This Section does not include:
1. Testing boilers and pressure vessels for compliance with safety codes;
2. Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems;
3. Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing devices. If devices must
be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the respective system sections for
materials and installation requirements.
4. Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests.
E. Certified Reports:
1. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the Test and
Balance Engineer.
2. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in
accordance with the referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems
have been installed; are a true representation of how the systems are operating at the
completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are an accurate record of all
final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems.
3. Follow the procedures and format specified below.
F. Report Format:
1. Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the referenced standard for each
respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced.
2. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in reinforced, vinyl,
three-ring binders.
3. Provide binding edge labels with the project identification and a title descriptive of the contents.
4. Divide the contents of the binder into the below listed divisions, separated by divider tabs:
a. General Information and Summary
b. Air Systems
c. Temperature Control Systems
d. Special Systems
e. Sound and Vibration Systems
G. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms and data:
1. General Information and Summary:
a. Inside cover sheet to identify testing, adjusting, and balancing agency, Contractor, Owner,
Architect, Engineer, and Project.
b. Include addresses, and contact names and telephone numbers.
c. Also include a certification sheet containing the seal and name address, telephone number,
and signature of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer.
d. Include in this division a listing of the instrumentations used for the procedures along with
the proof of calibration.

230593-1 02/03/10
 CHASE
SECTION 230593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

H. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing as a minimum, the
information indicated on the standard report forms prepared by the AABC and NEBB, for each
respective item and system. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to
accompany each respective report form.
1.3 TEST AND BALANCE ENGINEER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. A Professional Engineer (either on the installer's staff or and independent consultant), registered in
the State in which the services are to be performed, and having at least 3-years of successful testing,
adjusting, and balancing experience on projects with testing and balancing requirements similar to
those required for this project.
1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."
B. AABC: "National Standards For Total System Balance".
C. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 1984 Systems Volume, Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing.

PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 SYSTEMS OPERATION
A. Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning procedures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Test, adjust, and balance the air systems before steam and refrigerant systems.
B. Test, adjust and balance air conditioning systems during summer season and heating systems during
winter season, including at least a period of operation at outside conditions within 5 deg. F wet bulb
temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10 deg. F dry bulb temperature of
minimum winter design condition. Take final temperature readings during seasonal operation.
C. Before operating air systems, perform these steps:
1. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to determine variations
of installation from design.
2. Check filters for cleanliness.
3. Check dampers (both volume and fire) for correct and locked position, and temperature control
for completeness of installation before starting fans.
4. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required outlet volumes to permit
a crosscheck with required fan volumes.
5. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct traverses.
6. Place outlet dampers in the full open position.
7. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" ductwork and piping layouts to facilitate
reporting.
8. Lubricate all motors and bearings.
9. Check fan belt tension.
10. Check fan rotation.
D. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the tolerances
specified in the referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly maintained and protected against
damage.
E. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards.
F. Use only those instruments that have the maximum field measuring accuracy and are best suited to
the function being measured.
G. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer.

230593-2 02/03/10
 CHASE
SECTION 230593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

H. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale ranges proper for the
value being measured.
I. When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings, which will result in a repeatability error
of less than 5 percent. When measuring a single point, repeat readings until 2 consecutive identical
values are obtained.
J. Take all reading with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax.
K. Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved in estimating average of rapidly
fluctuation readings.
L. Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task.
M. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the detailed
procedures outlined in the referenced standards.
N. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to
allow adequate performance of procedures.
O. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed.
P. Seal ducts and piping, and test for and repair leaks.
Q. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.
R. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control
levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable,
permanent identification materials.
S. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test
results.
T. Test and adjust mechanical systems for sound and vibration in accordance with the detailed
instructions of the referenced standards.
U. Record all data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance with, and on the forms
recommended by the referenced standards.
V. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when
system cannot be successfully balanced.

END OF SECTION

230593-3 02/03/10
 CHASE
SECTION 230713 – DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.
4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.
5. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
6. Indoor, exposed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
7. Indoor, concealed oven and warewash exhaust.
8. Indoor, exposed oven and warewash exhaust.
9. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
10. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
11. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.
12. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Equipment Insulation."
2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Piping Insulation."
3. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation
and hanger.
2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each type of
insulation.
3. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing iden-
tical products according to ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-
tion. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material
containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50
or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of
150 or less.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation
Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where in-
sulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than
50 ppm when tested according to ASTM 871.

230713-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 230713 – DUCT INSULATION

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to
ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply
with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type II with factory-applied vinyl jacket. Factory-
applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.
G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply
with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with fac-
tory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Arti-
cle.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
2.2 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS
A. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is tested and
certified to provide a 1-hour fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; FlameChek.
b. Johns Manville; Firetemp Wrap.
c. Nelson Fire Stop Products; Nelson FSB Flameshield Blanket.
d. Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap.
e. 3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products.
f. Unifrax Corporation; FyreWrap.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insula-
tion to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-
19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.5 SEALANTS
A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
CP-76.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 95-
44.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

230713-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 230713 – DUCT INSULATION

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.

4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C).
5. Color: Aluminum.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
7. Use sealants that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department
of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-
applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with
ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with
ASTM C 1136, Type II.
4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying
with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
5. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms (0.86 metric perm) when tested
according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
2.8 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, comply-
ing with ASTM C 1136.
2.9 SECUREMENTS
A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14,
0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, wing seal.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting
spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated
when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers.
2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
2.10 CORNER ANGLES
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), PVC according to
ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), aluminum
according to ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will ad-
versely affect insulation application.

230713-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 230713 – DUCT INSULATION

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of
voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item
of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accesso-
ries that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, sup-
ports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs
from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal
ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation
inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and
dry film thicknesses.
K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Clean and dry surface to
receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50
mm) 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends
adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thick-
ness.
M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to
thermal movement.
N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend
patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
3.3 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

230713-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 230713 – DUCT INSULATION

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal
with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for
outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of
roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal
with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for
outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2
inches (50 mm).
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install in-
sulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to
match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm).
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and
fire-resistive joint sealers.
E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves
and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap
damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for
100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end
joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16 inches (400
mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional
pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation
surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken
vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by
removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to
adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c.
Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic,
and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

230713-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 230713 – DUCT INSULATION

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-
foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-
shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation
thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints.
At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each
surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut
to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-
(150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for
100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end
joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space pins 16 inches (400
mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional
pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation
surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken
vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by
removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to
adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c.
Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic,
and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-
foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-
shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation
thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each
surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of
elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to
fit the elbow.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-
(150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide joint
strips at end joints.

230713-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 230713 – DUCT INSULATION

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with
vapor-barrier mastic.
B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and
vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish
bead along seam and joint edge.
C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300
mm) o.c. and at end joints.
3.6 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and sup-
ports to maintain a continuous fire rating.
B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.7 FINISHES
A. Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below
and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and
finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of
the completed Work.
C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation
in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location
for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompli-
ance with requirements.
3.9 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.
4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.
5. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
6. Indoor, exposed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
7. Indoor, concealed oven and warewash exhaust.
8. Indoor, exposed oven and warewash exhaust.
9. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
10. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
11. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.
12. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.

230713-7 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 230713 – DUCT INSULATION

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.
2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
3.10 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

INTERIOR CONCEALED HVAC SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTS AND PLENUMS,

RECTANGULAR/SQUARE

VAPOR
THICKNESS BARRIER
MATERIAL FORM IN INCHES REQ'D

GLASS FIBER LINER 1 (MATT-FACED)

INTERIOR EXPOSED HVAC SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTS AND PLENUMS

VAPOR
THICKNESS BARRIER
MATERIAL FORM IN INCHES REQ'D

GLASS FIBER BLANKET 1 (FOIL-FACED)

END OF SECTION

230713-8 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material and equipment called for in these Specifications and
accompanying Drawings and shall install the system complete in every respect. Work shall include but
not be limited to the following:
1. Piping
2. Valves
B. Approximate values of natural gas that will be supplied for these systems have heating value of 1000
BTU/cu. ft.
C. System Performance Requirements: Except where otherwise indicated, the minimum pressure re-
quirements for these systems are 0.3 psig.
D. Submittals: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sec-
tions.
1. Product data for each type of natural gas specialty and special-duty valve. Include pressure
rating in psig, rated capacity in cu.ft. per hour (CFH), and settings of selected models.
E. Comply with NFPA 54 "National Fuel Gas Code" for piping materials and components; installations,
and inspections, testing and purging.
F. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for electrical connections between wiring and electri-
cally operated control devices.
G. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified standards.
H. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories that are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As Defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"
(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use in corro-
sive atmosphere. Coating properties include:
1. Applied to pipe and fittings treated with a compatible primer prior to application of tape.
2. Overall Thickness: 20 mils, synthetic adhesive.
3. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: Maximum 0.10 gallon per 100 square inches.
4. Water Absorption: 0.02 percent maximum.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E, Electric-Resistant Welded or Type S, Seamless, Grade B, Schedule
40, black.
C. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt-welding type; and ASME B16.11, forged steel.
D. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
E. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, black malleable iron; female pattern; brass-to-iron seat; ground
joint.
F. Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined.
G. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
for joining materials not included in this Section.
H. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

231123-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING

I. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.
J. Manual Valves: Conform to standards listed, or where appropriate, to ANSI Z21.15 and ANSI
Z21.15a.
K. Gas Stops, 2 Inches and Smaller: AGA-certified design for 2 psig or less natural gas, with AGA
stamp, plug or ball type, bronze body and bronze plug or chrome-plated brass ball. Include flat head,
square head, or lever handle and threaded ends. Include locking (tamperproof) feature.
L. Gas Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: ASME B16.33, 125 psi WOG, cast-iron body, bronze plug,
straightaway pattern, square head, tapered-plug type, with threaded ends. Include locking (tam-
perproof) feature.
M. Gas Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-78, Class 125 or 175 WOG, lubricated plug type,
semi-steel body, wrench operated, with flanged ends. Include locking (tamperproof) device feature.
N. Automatic Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.21 or ANSI Z21.21a, for operation by appliance automatic shutoff
device. Valves 2 inches and smaller shall have threaded ends and 2-1/2 inches and larger shall have
flanged ends. Provide for mechanical or automatic operation as indicated.
O. Solenoid Valves: Cast-iron body; 120 volts a.c., 60 HZ, Class B continuous-duty molded coil; UL la-
beled and FM approved. Include ISC 6, NEMA 4 coil enclosure and electrically opened and electrical-
ly closed dual coils. Valve position is normally closed. Include threaded ends for 2 inches and smaller
and flanged ends for 2-1/2 inches and larger.
P. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24 or ANSI Z21.24a, copper alloy.
Q. Strainers: Y patter, full size of connecting piping. Include Type 304 stainless-steel screens with 3/64-
inch perforations except where other screens are indicated.
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum steam or 175 psig WOG working pressure except where
otherwise indicated.
2. Sizes 2 Inches and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends.
3. Sizes 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Cast-iron body, with flanged ends.
4. Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown and pipe plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Precautions: Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to the premises or section of pip-
ing. Perform leakage test to determine that all equipment is turned off in the piping section to be af-
fected.
B. Comply with NFPA 54 "Prevention of Accidental Ignition."
C. Extend natural gas piping and connect to gas distribution system (gas service) piping in location and
size indicated for gas service entrance to building.
1. Gas distribution system piping, service gas pressure regulator, and gas meter will be provided by
gas utility.,
D. Install shutoff valve, downstream of gas meter, outside building at gas service entrance.
E. Pipe Applications: Flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings
same or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, except where speci-
fied otherwise.
1. 2 Inches and Smaller: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
2. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints.
3. Natural Gas Systems, Buried within Building: Use steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded
joints. Encase gas carrier piping in containment conduits.
4. Underground Containment Conduits: Use steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints.

231123-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING

F. Use low-pressure gas stops, tapered plug or ball type, for shutoff to appliances with 2-inch or smaller
gas supply.
G. Use gas valves for shutoff to appliances.
H. Use gas valves of sizes indicated for gas service piping, meters, mains, and where indicated.
I. Joint Construction: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic
piping joint construction.
1. Use materials suitable for natural gas service.
J. Refer to Division 22 for basic piping installation requirements.
K. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in an air-tight conduit
constructed of Schedule 40 seamless black steel with welded joints. Vent conduit to the outside and
terminate with a screened vent cap.
1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible above-ceiling spaces
(subject to approval of the authority having jurisdiction), whether or not such spaces are used as
a plenum. Do not locate valves in such spaces.
2. In Floors: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping may be installed in floors,
subject to approval of authority having jurisdiction. Surround piping cast in concrete slabs with a
minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic
structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in
concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.
3. In Floor Channels: Gas piping may be installed in floor channels (subject to approval of authority
having jurisdiction). Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation.
4. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing against physical
damage when it is installed inside partitions or hollow walls. This does not apply to tubing
passing through partitions or walls.
5. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping may be installed in the masonry
walls (subject to approval of authority having jurisdiction).
6. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash
shuts, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. This
does not apply to accessible above-ceiling space specified above.
L. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of gas
meters. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where con-
densate would be subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use
minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size as
connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap.
M. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors,
and in floor channels, except where indicated to be exposed to view.
N. Install gas piping at a uniform grade of 1/4 inch in 15 feet, upward toward risers. Install piping upward
from service risers to meters, service regulator when meter is not provided, and equipment.
O. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down.
P. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
Q. Install unions in pipes 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece
of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
R. Install dielectric fittings (unions and flanges) with 1 ferrous and 1 brass or bronze-end connections,
separated by insulating material, where piping of dissimilar metals are joined.
S. Install dielectric fittings (unions and flanges) with 2 ferrous end connections, separated by insulating
material, at outlet from gas meter and, where indicated, for ferrous piping.
T. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and larger connections.

231123-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING

U. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, gas pressure regulator, solenoid valve, and
elsewhere as indicated.
V. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of piping expansion and contraction. Install expansion joints,
expansion loops, and pipe guides as indicated.
W. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to at-
mosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect
screens in large end.
X. Install containment conduits for buried gas piping within building in gas-tight conduits extending 4
inches minimum outside building and vented to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, re-
ducing elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end. Prepare and paint outside of
conduits with coal tar epoxy-polyamide paint according to SSPC Paint 16.
Y. Refer to Division 22 for hanger and support devices.
Z. Install hangers for horizontal piping with following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

Nominal Steel Pipe Copper Tube Min. Rod

Pipe Size Max. Span Max. Span Diameter
(Inches) (Feet) (Feet) (Inches)
3/8 --- 4 3/8
1/2 6 6 3/8
5/8 --- 6 3/8
3/4 8 7 3/8
7/8 --- 7 3/8
1 8 8 3/8
1-1/4 9 9 3/8
1-1/2 to 2 10 10 3/8
2-1/2 to 3-1/2 10 10 1/2
4 --- 10 1/2
4 and Larger 10 --- 5/8

1. Support vertical pipe at each floor.

AA. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with a metal tag at-
tached with a metal chain indicated the piping systems supplied.
BB. Install a gas valve upstream of each gas pressure regulator. Where two gas pressure regulators are
installed in series in a single gas line, a manual valve is not required at the second regulator.
CC. Install pressure-relief or pressure-limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if
valve is free; test to determine pressure at which they will operate; and examine for leakage when in
closed position.
DD. Install gas piping next to gas-utilizing equipment and appliances to allow servicing and maintenance.
EE. Connect gas piping to gas-utilizing equipment and appliances with shutoff valves and unions. Make
connections downstream of valves and unions, with flexible connectors where indicated.
FF. Electrical Connections: Wiring is specified in Division 16.
GG. I
nstall a gas valve upstream and within 6 feet of each gas-utilizing appliance. Install a union or flanged
connection downstream from the valve to permit removal of controls.
HH. Sediment Traps: Install tee fittings forming drips, as close as practical to gas appliance inlets. Cap or
plug bottom outlet.
II. Install aboveground portions of natural gas piping systems that are upstream from equipment shutoff
valves, electrically continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode according to NFPA 70.
JJ. Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode.

231123-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING

KK. Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems according to NFPA 54, Part 4 "Gas Piping Inspection,
Testing and Purging" and local gas utility requirements.
1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest system until satisfactory
results are obtained.
2. Report test results promptly and in writing to the Architect and the authority having
jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION

231123-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material and equipment called for in these Specifications and
accompanying Drawings and shall install the system complete in every respect. Work shall include but
not be limited to the following:
1. Pipes, tubing, fittings and specialties.
2. Special duty valves.
3. Refrigerants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for the following products:
1. Each type valve specified.
2. Each type refrigerant piping specialty specified.
B. Shop Drawings showing layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings including, but not neces-
sarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, wall
and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship be-
tween piping and proximate to equipment.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify brazing processes and brazing operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Ves-
sel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:
1. ANSI B31.5: ASME Code for Pressure Piping - Refrigerant Piping.
2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
3. BOCA Basic National Mechanical Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TUBING AND FITTING
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, hard-drawn straight lengths, and soft-annealed coils, seam-
less copper tubing. Tubing shall be factory cleaned, ready for installation, and have ends capped to
protect cleanliness of pipe interiors prior to shipping.
B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (Silver).
2.3 VALVES
A. General: Complete valve assembly shall be UL-listed and designed to conform to ARI 760.
B. Globe: 450 psig maximum operating pressure, 275 deg. F maximum operating temperature; cast
bronze body, with cast bronze or forged brass wing cap and bolted bonnet; replaceable resilient seat
disc; plated steel stem. Valve shall be capable of being repacked under pressure. Valve shall be
straight through or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.
C. Check Valves - Smaller Than 7/8 inch: 500 psig maximum operating pressure, 300 deg. F maximum
operating temperature; cast brass body, with removable piston, Teflon seat, and stainless steel

232300-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

spring; straight through globe design. Valve shall be straight through pattern, with solder-end connec-
tions.
D. Solenoid Valves: 250 deg. F temperature rating, 400 psig working pressure; forged brass, with Teflon
valve seat, two-way straight through pattern, and solder end connections. Provide manual operator to
open valve. Furnish complete with NEMA 1 solenoid enclosure with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24
volt, 60 Hz. normally closed holding coil.
E. Evaporator Pressure Regulating Valves: pilot-operated, forged brass or cast bronze; complete with
pilot operator, stainless steel bottom spring, pressure gage tappings, 24 volts DC, 50/60 Hz, standard
coil; and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections.
F. Thermal Expansion Valves: thermostatic adjustable, modulating type; size as required for specific
evaporator requirements, and factory set for proper evaporator superheat requirements. Valves shall
have copper fittings for solder end connections; complete with sensing bulb, a distributor having a
side connection for hot gas bypass line, and an external equalizer line.
G. Hot Gas Bypass Valve: adjustable type, sized to provide capacity reduction beyond the last step of
compressor unloading; and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections.
2.4 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. General: Complete refrigerant piping specialty assembly shall be UL-listed and designed to conform
to ARI 760.
B. Strainers: 500 psig maximum working pressure; forged brass body with monel 80-mesh screen, and
screwed cleanout plug; Y-pattern, with solder end connections.
C. Moisture/liquid Indicators: 500 psig maximum operation pressure, 200 deg. F maximum operating
temperature; forged brass body, with replaceable polished optical viewing window, and solder end
connections.
D. Filter-driers: 500 psig maximum operation pressure; steel shell, flange ring, and spring, ductile iron
cover plate with steel capscrews, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Furnish
complete with replaceable filter-drier core kit, including gaskets, as follows:
1. Standard capacity desiccant sieves to provide micronic filtration.
2. High capacity desiccant sieves to provide micronic filtration and extra drying capacity.
E. Suction Line Filter-Drier: 350 psig maximum operation pressure, 225 deg. F maximum operating
temperature; steel shell, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Permanent filter ele-
ment shall be molded felt core surrounded by a desiccant. For removal of acids and moisture for re-
frigerant vapor.
F. Suction Line Filters: 500 psig maximum operation pressure; steel shell, flange ring, and spring, duc-
tile iron cover plate with steel capscrews, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Fur-
nish complete with replaceable filter core kit, including gaskets.
G. Flexible Connectors: 500 psig maximum operating pressure; seamless tin bronze or stainless steel
core, high tensile bronze braid covering, solder connections, and synthetic covering; dehydrated,
pressure tested, minimum 7 inch in length.
2.5 REFRIGERANT
A. Refrigerant No. 22, in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 34.
2.6 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A. Use Type ACR drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints above ground,
within building. Use Type K, annealed temper copper tubing for 2 inch and smaller without joints, be-
low ground and within slabs. Mechanical fittings (crimp or flair) are not permitted.

232300-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 - "The Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
B. Install piping in as short and direct arrangement as possible to minimize pressure drop.
C. Install piping for minimum number of joints using as few elbows and other fitting as possible.
D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and servicing of compressor and other equipment. Install
valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for servicing and inspection.
E. Provide adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hanger, or between pipes for insu-
lation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full
thickness insulation.
F. Insulate suction lines. Liquid lines are not required to be insulated, except where they are installed ad-
jacent and clamped to suction lines, where both liquid and suction lines shall be insulated as a unit.
1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been
eliminated.
G. Install branch tie-in lines to parallel compressors equal length, and pipe identically and symmetrically.
H. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed to
mechanical injury.
I. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot gas discharge piping with 1/2" per 10 feet downward slope away from the
compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with 1/2 inch per 10 feet downward slope to the compressor, with
no long traps or dead ends which may cause oil to separate from the suction gas and return to
the compressor in damaging slugs.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated, and where required to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be install level.
J. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
K. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, un-
less expressly indicated.
L. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation
applications.
M. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
N. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the build-
ing. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1-inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow
sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.
O. Locate groups of piper parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of
valves.
P. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechani-
cal sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall
be sheet metal.
Q. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors,
maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.
R. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down.
S. Install strainers immediately ahead of each expansion valve, solenoid valve, hot gas bypass valve,
compressor suction valve, and as required to protect refrigerant piping system components.

232300-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

T. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter/driers and thermostatic expansion valves
and in liquid line to receiver.
1. Install moisture/liquid indicators in lines larger than 2-1/8 inch OD, using a bypass line.
U. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure regulating valves, expansion valves, and
at connections to compressors and evaporators.
V. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection of compressors.
3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 15 Section "SUPPORTS AND
ANCHORS." Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports:
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
C. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length.
D. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
E. Pipe rollers complete supports for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet or longer supported by a trapeze.
F. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
G. Install hangers with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:

Nom. Pipe Size Max. Span-Ft. Min. Rod Size Inches

1 7 3/8
1-1/2 9 3/8
2 10 3/8
3 12 1/2
3-1/2 13 1/2
4 14 5/8
5 16 5/8
6 17 3/4
8 19 7/8
10 22 7/8
12 23 7/8
H. Support vertical runs at each floor.
3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual."
1. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes when
heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation.
2. CAUTION: When solenoid valves are being installed, remove the coil to prevent damage. When
sight glasses are being installed, remove the glass. Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves,
and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties before brazing. Do no apply heat near the
bulb of the expansion valve.
B. Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing, with an inert gas (ie., nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to prevent
formation of scale.
C. Heat joints using oxy-acetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform brazing temperature.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install refrigerant valves where indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
B. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and driers, in liquid and suction lines at evaporators, and
elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install a full sized, 3-valve bypass around each drier.

232300-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

D. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid
valves in horizontal lines with coil at the top.
1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16. Coordinate electrical requirements
and connections.
E. Thermostatic expansion valves may be mounted in any position, as close as possible to the evapora-
tor.
1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount the distributor directly on the expansion valve
outlet.
2. Install the valve in such a location so that the diaphragm case is warmer than the bulb.
3. Secure the bulb to a clean, straight, horizontal section of the suction line using two bulb straps.
Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required make the connection where it will clearly reflect the
pressure existing in the suction line at the bulb location.
F. Install pressure regulating and relieving valves as required by ASHRAE Standard 15.
3.5 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow servicing and maintenance.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect, test, and perform corrective action of refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME Code
B31.5, Chapter VI.
B. Repair leaking joints using new materials, and retest for leaks.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Charge system using the following procedure:
1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump; until temperature of 35 deg F is indicated on
vacuum dehydration indicator.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum pump
and system.
5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allow pressure to build up to 2 psi.
6. Complete charging of system, using new filter dryer core in charging line. Provide full operating
charge.

END OF SECTION

232300-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment and services required to execute, install
and complete, ready for use, all plumbing work including sanitary and water systems for the project,
according to the drawings and these specifications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data on duct liner, sealing materials, and fire-stopping materials.
1.4 COMPLIANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,"
except as indicated otherwise.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Provide the following materials where indicated. Package and mark sheet metal materials as specified
in ASTM A 700.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality, ASTM A527, Coating Designation G90, mill
phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT SHAPES AND PLATES
A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel reinforcing where installed on galvanized sheet
metal ducts.
2.3 TIE RODS
A. Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter
for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.4 JOINT AND SEAM TAPE
A. 2 inches wide, glass-fiber-fabric reinforced.
2.5 TAPE SEALING SYSTEM
A. Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a modified acrylic/silicone
activator to react exothermically with the tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.
2.6 JOINT AND SEAM SEALANT
A. One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying with FS TT-S-001657,
Type I; formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
2.7 FLANGED JOINT MASTICS
A. One-part, acid-curing, silicone elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 25, Use O.
2.8 FIRE-STOPPING
A. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
2.9 FIRE-RESISTANT SEALANT
A. Provide two-part, foamed-in-place, fire-stopping silicone sealant formulated for use in a through-
penetration fire-stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors,

233113-1 02/03/10
 CHASE
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

having fire-resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per

ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2.10 FIRE-RESISTANT SEALANT
A. Provide one-part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a through-penetration fire-stop system for
filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors, having fire-resistance ratings
indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory,
Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam"; Dow Corning Corp.
2. "Pensil 851"; General Electric Co.
3. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Sealant"; Dow Corning Corp.
4. "3M Fire Barrier Caulk CP-25"; Electrical Products Div./3M.
5. "RTV 7403"; General Electric Co.
6. "Fyre Putty"; Standard Oil Engineered Materials Co.
2.11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide the following hanger and support components as indicated.
B. Building Attachments:
1. Concrete inserts, powder actuated fasteners, or structural steel fasteners appropriate for building
materials.
2. Do not use powder actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concretes or for slabs
less than 4 inches thick.
C. Hangers:
1. Galvanized sheet steel, or round, uncoated steel, threaded rod.
2. Hangers Installed In Corrosive Atmospheres:
a. Electro-galvanized, all-thread rod or hot-dipped-galvanized rods with threads painted after
installation.
3. Straps and Rod Sizes:
a. Conform to Table 4-1 in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1985 Edition, for
sheet steel width and gage and steel rod diameters.
D. Duct Attachments:
1. Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws, compatible with duct materials.
2.12 TRAPEZE AND RISER SUPPORTS
A. Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A36.
B. Where galvanized steel ducts are installed, provide hot-dipped-galvanized steel shapes and plates.
C. For stainless steel ducts, provide stainless steel support materials.
D. For aluminum ducts, provide aluminum support materials, except where materials are electrolytically
separated from ductwork.
2.13 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel, in accordance
with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Tables 1-3 through 1-19, including their
associated details.
B. Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and
intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals.
C. Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for
pressure classification.
D. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
stains, and discolorations.

233113-2 02/03/10
 CHASE
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

2.14 RECTANGULAR DUCT FITTINGS

A. Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in accordance
with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard," 1985 Edition, Figures 2-1 through 2-10.
2.15 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCT FABRICATION
A. "Basic Round Diameter" as used in this article is the diameter of the size of round duct that has a
circumference equal to the perimeter of a given sized of flat oval duct. Except where interrupted by
fittings, provide round and flat oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet.
B. Round Ducts:
1. Fabricate round supply ducts with spiral lockseam construction, except where diameters exceed
72 inches.
2. Fabricate ducts having diameters greater than 72 inches with longitudinal butt-welded seams.
3. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3-2 for galvanized steel
gages.
C. Round Ducts:
1. Fabricate round supply ducts using seam types identified in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards," 1985 Edition, Figure 3-1, RL-1, RL-4, or RL-5.
2. Seams Types RL-2 or RL-3 may be used if spot-welded on 1-inch intervals.
3. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3-2 for galvanized steel
gages.
D. Flat Oval Ducts:
1. Fabricate flat oval supply ducts with standard spiral lock seams (without intermediate ribs) or with
butt-welded longitudinal seams in gages listed in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards," Table 3-4.
E. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to conform to SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards," 1985 Edition, Figures 3-4 and 3-5 and with metal thickness specified for
longitudinal seam straight duct.
F. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material
projecting from the body onto branch tap entrance.
G. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate the bend radius of
die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows 1.5 times the elbow diameter.
1. Round Elbows - 8 Inches and Smaller: Die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and
pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle
configurations or 1/2-inch-diameter (e.g. 3-1/2- and 4-1/2-inch) elbows with gored construction.
2. Round Elbows - 9 Through 14 Inches: Gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees,
except where space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle
configurations or 1/2-inch-diameter (e.g. 9-1/2- and 10-1/2-inch) elbows with gored construction.
3. Round Elbows - Larger Than 14 Inches and All Flat Oval Elbows: Gored elbows, except where
space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
4. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes Through 8 Inches and All Pressures: 20 gage with 2-piece welded
construction.
5. Round Gored Elbows Gages: Same as for non-elbow fittings specified above.
6. Flat Oval Elbows Gages: Same as longitudinal seam flat oval duct.
7. Pleated Elbows Sizes Through 14 Inches and Pressures Through 10 Inches: 26 gage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS
A. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install ducts with the fewest possible joints.
B. Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.

233113-3 02/03/10
 CHASE
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

C. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at connections kept to a minimum.
D. Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to
building lines; avoid diagonal runs. Install duct systems in shortest route that does not obstruct
useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.
E. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
F. Provide clearance of 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, plus
allowance for insulation thickness, if any.
G. Install insulated ducts with 1-inch clearance outside of insulation.
H. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall
construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as
specifically shown.
I. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
3.3 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SPACES
A. Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and
enclosures.
3.4 NON-FIRE-RATED PARTITION PENETRATIONS
A. Where ducts pass interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space
between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as
duct.
B. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
3.5 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. Seal duct seams and joints as indicated in this specification.
B. Pressure Classifications Greater Than 3 Inches Water Gage:
1. All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct penetrations.
C. Pressure Classification 2 and 3 Inches Water Gage:
1. All transverse joints and longitudinal seams.
D. Pressure Classification Less than 2 Inches Water Gage:
1. Transverse joints only.
E. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation.
3.6 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install and support ducts as follows unless indicated otherwise:
B. Rigid Round, Rectangular, and Flat Oval: As indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards," Tables 4-1 through 4-3 and Figures 4-1 through 4-8.
C. Horizontal Ducts: Within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch intersection.
D. Vertical Ducts: At a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.
E. Upper Attachments To Structures: Allow for a load not exceeding 1/4 of the failure (proof test) load,
but are not limited to the specific methods indicated.
F. Install concrete insert prior to placing concrete.
G. Install powder actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Make duct connections as specified below unless indicated otherwise:

233113-4 02/03/10
 CHASE
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

B. Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in accordance with Division 15
Section "Duct Accessories."
C. Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2-7 and
2-8.
D. Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures
2-16 through 2-18.
E. Terminal Units Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figure 2-
19.
3.8 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEAN-UP
A. Adjust volume control devices as required by the testing and balancing procedures to achieve
required airflow.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING" for requirements and
procedures for adjusting and balancing air systems.
C. Vacuum ducts systems prior to final acceptance to remove dust and debris.

END OF SECTION

233113-5 02/03/10
 CHASE
SECTION 233300 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment and services required to execute, install
and complete, ready for use, all work for the project, according to the drawings and these
specifications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
1. Product data for backdraft dampers, manual volume control dampers, fire and smoke dampers,
duct-mounted access panels and doors, and flexible ducts and connectors.
2. Shop drawings for special fittings and volume control damper installations and fire and smoke
damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted access door and panel installations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
B. NFPA 90B, "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Suitable for horizontal or vertical installation.
B. Frame: 18-gage galvanized steel, with welded corners.
C. Frame: 0.063-inch-thick 6063T extruded aluminum.
D. Blades: 0.025-inch-thick roll-formed aluminum.
E. Blades: 0.050-inch-thick 6063T extruded aluminum.
F. Blade Seals: Felt.
G. Blade Seals: Vinyl.
H. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
I. Blade Axles: Nonferrous.
J. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
K. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
L. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
M. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
N. Chain Operator: 15-foot-long galvanized-steel sash chain and pulley.
O. Wing-Nut Operator: Galvanized steel, with 1/4-inch galvanized-steel rod.
2.2 MANUAL VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Factory-fabricated multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, standard
leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. Stiffen damper blades to provide
stability under operating conditions. Provide locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with
pressure class. Provide end bearings or other seals for ducts with pressure classifications of 3 inches
or higher. Extend axles full length of damper blades. Provide bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

233300-1 02/03/10
 CHASE
SECTION 233300 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

B. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, minimum of 16 gauges, and with mitered and
welded corners. Provide frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls. Provide flangeless
frames where indicated for installation in ducts.
C. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 16-gage galvanized steel.
D. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
E. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
2.3 DAMPER CONTROL HARDWARE
A. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with a heavy-gage dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel,
and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Provide center hole to suit damper operating rod size. Provide
elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.4 ACTUATORS
A. Provide motors for smooth modulating or 2-position action.
B. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: Provide with oil-immersed and sealed gear trains.
C. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose
entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running
torque rating of 150 inch-pounds and breakaway torque rating of 150 inch-pounds.
D. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make
motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus
40 deg F.
E. 2-Position Motor: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
F. 2-Position Motor: 230 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
G. 2-Position Motor: 230 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz.
H. Turning Vanes: Fabricate turning vanes according to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards,
Figures 2-2 through 2-7.
I. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch-wide, curved blades set at 3/4 inch on center,
support with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2 inches on center, and set into side strips suitable for
mounting in ducts.
J. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and
fiberglass fill.
2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL Standard 181,
Class 1.
B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide
attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 24-gage, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-gage aluminum
sheets. Select metal compatible with connected duct system. Fold and crimp metal edge strips onto
fabric as illustrated in SMACNA HVAC Duct Standard, 1st Edition, Figure 2-19.
C. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connectors Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
polychloroprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz. per sq yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lb per inch in the warp and 360 lb per inch in the filling.
D. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connectors Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with DuPont's
HYPALON or other synthetic-rubber weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and
ozone environment.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz. per sq yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 530 lb per inch in the warp and 440 lb per inch in the filling.

233300-2 02/03/10
 CHASE
SECTION 233300 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

3. High-Temperature System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber and
having a minimum weight of 16 oz. per sq yd and tensile strength of 285 lb per inch in the warp,
and 185 lb per inch in the filling.
4. High-Corrosive-Environment System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with a chemical-
resistant coating.
5. Minimum Weight: 14 oz. per sq yd.
6. Tensile Strength: 450 lb per inch in the warp and 340 lb per inch in the filling.
2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Flexible Ducts - Uninsulated: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing.
C. Flexible Ducts - Uninsulated: Corrugated aluminum.
D. Flexible Ducts - Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-
1/2-inch-thick, glass fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.
1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in the inner liner.
2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral fiber glass
tape, and nylon hanging cord.
3. Outer Jacket: Polyethylene film.
4. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
2.7 INSTRUMENT TEST HOLES
A. Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket and a flat mounting
gasket. Size to allow insertion of pivot tube and other testing instruments and provide in length to suit
duct insulation thickness.
2.8 SPLITTER DAMPER ACCESSORIES
A. Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 1/4-inch; zinc-plated operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint
bracket with flat rubber gasket and square-head set screw.
2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCT CLAMPS
A. Stainless steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action. Provide
in sizes from 3 to 18 inches to suit duct size.
2.10 ADHESIVES
A. High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to manufacturer's installation instructions and applicable portions of
details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards.
B. Install volume control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to avoid
erosion of duct liner.
C. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.

END OF SECTION

233300-3 02/03/10
 CHASE
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 260943 – NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)
1.3 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment and services required to execute, install
and complete, ready to use, all work for the project, according to the drawings and these
specifications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following:
1. Product data for selected models, including certified fan performance curves certified fan sound
power ratings, motor ratings and electrical characteristics, materials gages and finishes, including
color charts, and dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
2. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions,
weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of field connections.
3. Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed wiring and field-installed wiring.
4. Maintenance data for air-handling units, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual
specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements."
1.5 STANDARDS AND COMPLIANCES
A. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled.
B. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components
shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National
Electrical Code."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Sound Power Level Rating:
1. Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory
Test Data."
2. Test fans in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating."
3. Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings:
1. Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests
and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods
of Testing Fans for Rating.
2.2 FANS, GENERAL
A. Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished with
indicated capacities and characteristics.
B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

233423-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of
the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.
C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1. Service Factor: 1.4.
D. Belts: Oil-resistant, non-sparking, and non-static.
E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed pitch for use
with motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.
F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" (AFBMA L(50)) of 200,000,
calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA Standard 11 for roller
bearings.
G. Factory Finish: The following finishes are required:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coating prior to final assembly.
2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
2.3 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Belt-driven or direct-drive as indicated, centrifugal consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings,
motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
hinged aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following features:
1. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
3. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.
E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:
1. Disconnect Switch: Non-fusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory-wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
2. Bird Screens: Removable 1/2-inch mesh, 16-gage, aluminum or brass wire.
3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, back-draft dampers mounted in curb base, factory
set to close when fan stops.
4. Dampers: Motor-operated, parallel-blade, volume control dampers mounted in curb base.
a. Blades: Die-formed sheet aluminum.
b. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with waterproof, felt blade seals.
c. Linkage: Nonferrous metals, connecting blades to counter weight or operator.
d. Operators: Manufacturer's standard electric motor.
e. Operators: Manufacturer's standard pneumatic motor.
5. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated, heavy-gage, galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 2-inch-
thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; built-in cant and mounting flange for flat
roof decks; and 2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.
a. Overall Height: 12 inches.
2.4 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS
A. Centrifugal fan designed for installation in ceiling, wall, or concealed inline applications.
B. Housing: Galvanized steel lined with acoustical insulation.
C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel
shall be removable for service.
D. Grille: Stainless steel, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan
housing.

233423-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor
plug-in.
F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard roof jack, wall cap, and transition fittings as indicated.
2.5 MOTORS
A. Sufficient to accelerate the driven loads satisfactorily. Minimum sizes and electrical characteristics as
indicated. If not indicated, large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in
the service factor range.
B. Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for continuous duty at
full load (Class A Insulation).
C. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
D. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B. Provide
permanent-split capacitor classification motors for shaft-mounted fans and capacitor start
classification for belted fans.
1. Bases: Adjustable.
2. Bearings: The following features are required:
a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
b. Grease lubricated.
c. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial
thrust in motor.
3. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:
a. Open drip-proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
b. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.
4. Overload protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection.
5. Noise rating: Quiet.
6. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance
with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher
efficiency than "average standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test
Method B.
7. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction,
and special features.
E. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 26.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support units as
described below, using the vibration control devices indicated. Vibration control devices are specified
in Division 15 Section "Vibration Controls."
B. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.
1. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7.
C. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods and
vibration isolation springs.
D. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air- handling units for service and
maintenance.
E. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 23 sections. Make final duct
connections with flexible connections.
3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 26.
B. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring are specified in Section 230900

233423-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

C. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following:
B. Inspect the field assembly of components and installation of fans including ductwork and electrical
connections.
C. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.
3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign
material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.

END OF SECTION

233423-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 233713 – DIFFUSERS, RESIGSTER, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material and equipment called for in these Specifications and
accompanying Drawings and shall install the system complete in every respect. All purchases equip-
ment to comply with local system complete in every respect.
1.3 COMPLIANCE
A. ADC Compliance: Test and rate registers, grilles, and diffusers in accordance with ADC Equipment
Test Code 1062, provide Certified Ratings Seal on each unit.
B. ARI Compliance: Test and rate registers, grilles, and diffusers in accordance with ARI Standard 650.
C. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers, dampers, and shutters in accordance with AMCA Standard
500, provide Certified Ratings Seal on each unit.
D. NFPA Compliance: Construct and install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A, and 90B.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data, assembly-type shop drawings, and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers where
shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indi-
cated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses,
throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.
C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling
systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and ade-
quate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems
that will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser.
D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as specified. The
following requirements shall apply to nomenclature indicated on schedule:
1. Diffuser Faces:
a. Square (SQ): Square housing, core of square concentric louvers, square or round duct
connection.
b. Rectangular (RCT): Rectangular housing, core of rectangular concentric louvers, square or
round duct connection.
c. Linear (LR): Extruded aluminum continuous slot, single or multiple.
2. Diffuser Mountings:
a. Stepped-Down (S-D): Diffuser housing below ceiling with perimeter flange and gasket to
seal against ceiling construction.
b. Flush (FL): Diffuser housing above ceiling surface with flush perimeter flange and gasket to
seal against ceiling.
c. Lay-In (L-I): Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling exposed suspension tee bars and
rest on top surface of tee bar.
d. Snap-In (S-I): Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling concealed suspension runners,
and snap into runners.

233713-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 233713 – DIFFUSERS, RESIGSTER, AND GRILLES

3. Diffuser Patterns:
a. Fixed (FX): Fixed position core with concentric rings or louvers for radial air flow around
entire perimeter of diffuser.
b. 2 Position (2-P): Manual 2 position core with concentric rings or louvers, upper position for
horizontal air flow, lower position for vertical air flow.
c. Adjustable (ADJ): Manual adjustable core with concentric rings or louvers, fully adjustable
for horizontal to vertical air flow.
d. 1 Way (1-Way): Fixed louver face for 1 direction air flow, direction indicated on drawings.
e. 2 Way (2-W): Fixed louver face for 2 direction air flow, directions indicated on drawings.
f. 3 Way (3-W): Fixed louver face for 3 direction air flow, directions indicated on drawings.
g. 4 Way (4-W): Fixed louver face for 4 direction air flow, directions indicated on drawings.
h. Rearrangeable Core (R-C): Modular directional core which can be rearranged for selected
air pattern.
4. Diffuser Dampers:
a. Opposed Blade (O-B): Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly, key operated from face
of diffuser.
b. Supply and Return (S & R): For supply and return diffusers, butterfly type damper in return
neck, annular adjustable dampers in supply duct.
c. Integral (ITGL): Combination volume control and pattern adjustment for linear diffusers.
d. Fire Damper (F-D): Combination adjustable opposed blade damper and fusable link fire
damper with UL approved link and assembly designed to meet requirements of NFPA 90A.
5. Diffuser Accessories:
a. Equalizing Deflectors (E-D): Adjustable parallel blades in frame for straightening air flow.
b. Smudge Ring (S-R): Extension perimeter frame around diffuser, sized so induced air
impinges on frame and not on ceiling.
c. Plaster Ring (P-R): Perimeter ring designed to act as plaster stop and diffuser anchor.
d. Extractor (EXTR): Curved blades mounted on adjustable frame to produce air scooping
action in duct at diffuser take-off.
e. Blank-off Baffles (B-O-B): Arc segments designed to fit into diffuser housing to divert air flow
from impinging on obstruction.
f. Operating Keys (OP-KY): Tools designed to fit through diffuser face and operate volume
control device and/or pattern adjustment.
6. Diffuser Finishes:
a. Aluminum Enamel (A-E): Air-dried aluminum enamel prime finish.
b. White Enamel (W-E): Semi-gloss white enamel prime finish.
c. Aluminum Anodize (A-A): Aluminum etched and anodized, covered with clear lacquer finish.
E. Manufacturers: Carnes; Titus; or Tuttle & Bailey.
2.2 WALL REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard wall registers and grilles
where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components
as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide wall registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity
traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's
current data.
C. Wall Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent
wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with accurate fit and
adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall con-
struction that will contain each type of wall register and grille.

233713-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 233713 – DIFFUSERS, RESIGSTER, AND GRILLES

D. Types: Provide wall registers and grilles of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed
on register and grille schedule. The following requirements shall apply to nomenclature indicated on
schedule.
1. Register and Grille Materials:
a. Steel Construction (ST): Manufacturer's standard stamped sheet steel frame and adjustable
blades.
b. Aluminum Construction (AL): Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum frame and
adjustable blades.
2. Register and Grille Faces:
a. Horizontal Straight Blades (H-S): Horizontal blades, individually adjustable, at
manufacturer's standard spacing.
b. Vertical Straight Blades (V-S): Vertical blades, individually adjustable, at manufacturer's
standard spacing.
c. Horizontal 45 Degree Fixed Blades (H-45 Degrees): Horizontal blades, 45 degrees fixed, at
manufacturer's standard spacing.
3. Register and Grille Patterns:
a. Single Deflection (S-D): 1-set of blades in face.
b. Double Deflection (D-D): 2-sets of blades in face, rear set at 90 degrees to face set.
4. Register and Grille Dampers:
a. Opposed Blade (O-B): Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly, key operated from face
of register.
b. Opposed Blade Fusible Link (OBFL): Opposed blade damper with spring closing and UL-
listed fusible link for 160 degrees F (71 degrees C).
5. Register and Grille Accessories:
a. Extractor (EXTR): Curved blades mounted on adjustable frame to produce air scooping
action in duct at register or grille take-off.
b. Plaster Frame (P-F): Perimeter frame designed to act as plaster stop and register or grille
anchor.
c. Operating Keys (OP-KY): Tools designed to fit through register or grille face and operate
volume control device and/or pattern adjustment.
6. Register and Grille Finishes:
a. Aluminum Enamel (A-E): Air-dried aluminum enamel prime finish.
b. White Enamel (W-E): Semi-gloss white enamel prime finish.
c. Aluminum Anodize (A-A): Aluminum etched and anodized, covered with clear lacquer finish.
E. Manufacturers: Carnes; Titus; or Tuttle & Bailey.
2.3 LOUVERS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, General Contractor shall provide louvers where shown; of
size, shape, capacity constructed of materials and components as indicated on Architectural Drawings
and Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in ac-
cordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions.
B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface instal-
lation of air outlets and inlets with other work.
C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceil-
ing Plans" and "Interior Elevations". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical
ceiling modules.

END OF SECTION

233713-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 236400 - CONDENSING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 260943 - NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation and start-up instructions, wiring diagrams,
and maintenance data, in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Capacity ratings for condensing units shall be in accordance with ARI Standard 360 "Standard for
Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment".
B. Refrigeration system of condensing units shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Standard ASHRAE 15
"Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
C. Condensing units shall meet or exceed the minimum COP/Efficiency levels as prescribed in ASHRAE
90A "Energy Conservation in New Building Design".
D. Condensing units shall be listed by UL and have UL label affixed.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period,
motors/compressors with inadequate or defective materials and workmanship, including leakage,
breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions
for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period.
Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and does not include labor for removal and
reinstallation.
B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
A. Factory-assembled and tested, consisting of casing, compressors, condensers, coils, condenser fans
and motors, and unit controls. Capacities and electrical characteristics shall be as scheduled.
2.2 UNIT CASINGS
A. Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components and controls. Casings shall
have removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and
drives. Additional features:
B. Galvanized or zinc-coated steel for exposed casing surfaces, treated and finished with manufacturer's
standard paint coating.
C. Units shall have lifting lugs to facilitate rigging of units.
D. Metal grilles, factory-installed, for protection of condenser coil during shipping, installation, and opera-
tion.
E. Control panel door, hinged and gasketed.
2.3 COMPRESSOR
A. Reciprocating hermetic-type compressor, 1,750 RPM, designed for air-cooled condensing with com-
pressor lubrication, crankcase sight glass and crankcase heater; back-seating service access valves
on suction and discharge ports. Capacity control shall be through cylinder unloading.
B. Crankcase heater in well within crankcase.

236400-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 236400 - CONDENSING UNITS

C. Capacity steps as scheduled, or greater number.

D. Compressor of same manufacturer as condensing unit.
2.4 CONTROLS
A. Provide operating and safety controls shall include high and low pressure cutouts, oil pressure cutout,
compressor winding thermostat cutout. Provide 3-leg compressor overload protection. Protect con-
denser fan motors with thermal and overload cutouts. Provide control transformer if required for 115-
volts control power. Provide magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors. Addition-
al features:
1. Reset relay circuit for manual resetting of cutouts from remote thermostat location.
2. Automatic non-recycling pump-down, and timing device to prevent excessive compressor
cycling.
3. Un-fused disconnect switch, factory-mounted and wired, for single external electrical power
connection.
B. Coordinate with project electrician to provide BMS controls and sensors as indicated in the project
drawings.
2.5 CONDENSING SECTION
A. Seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to heavy-duty, configurated aluminum fins with sepa-
rate and independent refrigeration circuit for each compressor, liquid accumulator and sub-cooling cir-
cuit, and back-seating liquid line service access valve. Factory-test condenser coils at 450 psig and
vacuum dehydrate.
2.6 CONDENSER FANS AND DRIVES
A. Propeller-type condenser fans for vertical air discharge; either direct drive or belt drive fans and mo-
tors. Include:
1. Permanent lubricated ball bearing condenser fan motors.
2. Separate motor for each condenser fan.
3. Constant speed condenser fan motors.
2.7 LOW AMBIENT CONTROL
A. Low ambient damper assembly, fan speed control, or fan cycling control; factory-installed.
2.8 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air-cooled condensing units of the following: Carrier
Air Conditioning

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install condensing units in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions. Install units plumb
and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clear-
ances.
B. Install BMS controls and sensors as indicated in the project drawings. Refer to Section 260943.
3.2 SUPPORT
A. Install ground-mounted units on 4" thick reinforced concrete pad, 4" larger on each side than con-
densing unit. Anchor unit to pad using inserts or anchor bolts. Install roof-mounted units on mechani-
cal equipment stand, constructed in accordance with NRCA Handbook. Anchor unit to structural frame
with removable fasteners.
3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING
A. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish
copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.

236400-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 236400 - CONDENSING UNITS

B. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation
requirements of Division-16 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation
is acceptable to equipment Installer.
3.4 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
A. Connect refrigerant piping to unit; run piping so as not to interfere with access to unit.
B. Install furnished field-mounted accessories.
3.5 TESTING
A. Charge systems with refrigerant and oil, and test for leaks. Repair leaks and, place lost refrigerant and
oil.
B. Start-up condensing units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of
manufacturer's representative.
C. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
3.6 TRAINING
A. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative to instruct Owner's personnel in operation
and maintenance of condensing units.

END OF SECTION

236400-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 237223 - PACKAGED AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY-RECOVERY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
A. The unit shall be packaged static plate energy recovery ventilator.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The energy recovery core shall be certified by ARI under its Standard 1060 for Energy Recovery
Ventilators.
B. Unit shall be listed under UL 1812, Standard for Ducted Air to Air Heat Exchangers. Specific UL-1812
Listing Standards for outdoor units including rain testing, UV exposure testing, corrosion resistance
and temperature extremes testing shall be required for these models.
C. The energy recovery core shall meet NFPA 90A and 90B requirements for flame spread, not to
exceed 25, and smoke generation, not to exceed 50, through an on going testing and verification
program using UL Standard 723.
D. The core shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its functional
characteristics, under circumstances of normal use, for a minimum period of five years from the date
of purchase. Balance of Unit shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its
functional characteristics, under circumstances of normal use, for a period of two years from the date
of purchase.
1.3 PERFORMANCE
A. ENERGY TRANSFER: The energy recovery core shall be capable of transferring both sensible and
latent energy between air streams. Latent energy transfer shall be accomplished through molecular
transport by hydroscopic resin.
B. PASSIVE FROST CONTROL: The energy recovery core shall perform without the occurrence of
condensation or frosting under normal operating conditions (defined as outside temperatures above -
10ºF and inside relative humidity below 40%). Occasional extreme conditions shall not affect the
usual function or performance of the energy recovery core.
C. POSITIVE AIR STREAM SEPARATION: Exhaust and fresh airstreams shall at all times travel in
separate passages, and airstreams shall not mix. The exhaust air transfer ratio (EATR) shall be ARI-
1060 certified as 0% at balanced pressure.
D. LAMINAR FLOW: Airflow through the energy recovery core shall be laminar, avoiding deposition of
particulates on the interior of the exchange plate material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. The energy recovery core shall be of static plate, cross-flow construction, with no moving parts.
B. The unit shall be capable of operating in winter and summer conditions without generating
condensate. No condensate pan or drain shall be required.
C. The unit shall have single-point power connection.
D. The exhaust and fresh air streams shall both be protected by MERV 8 rated, 2 inch plated, disposable
filters positioned before the ERV core.
E. Weather hoods shall be screened to exclude birds and animals. Inlet weatherhood shall be sized to
maintain inlet velocities below 500 FPM, and equipped with rain excluder baffles.
2.2 CONFIGURATION
A. Unit shall be available from factory with vertical or horizontal return air and/or vertical or horizontal
supply air duct connection openings.

237223-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 237223 - PACKAGED AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY-RECOVERY UNITS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED

END OF SECTION

237223-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 237436 - ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 260943 – NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)
1.2 STANDARDS AND COMPLIANCES
A. Gas-fired furnace section construction shall be in accordance with AGA safety standards. Furnace
shall bear the AGA label.
B. Testing and rating rooftop heating and cooling units of 135,000 btu/hr capacity or over shall be in
accordance with ARI 360 "Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning
Equipment".
C. Testing and rating of rooftop heating and cooling units under 135,000 btu/hr capacity shall be in
accordance with ARI 210 "Standard for Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment", and provide Certified
Rating Seal. Sound testing and rating of units shall be in accordance with ARI 270 "Standard for
Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment". Units shall bear Certified Rating Seal.
D. Refrigerating system construction of rooftop units shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 15 "Safety
Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
E. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) and Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) of rooftop units shall be
equal to or greater than specified within this section.
F. Gas-fired rooftop units shall be tested and listed by UL in accordance with ANSI Z21.47 and have UL-
label as a unit.
G. Rooftop units shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL requirements.
1.3 WARRANTY ON COMPRESSOR AND HEAT EXCHANGER
A. Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace or repair, within warranty
period, compressors and heat exchangers with inadequate and defective materials and workmanship,
including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided
manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been
adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and does
not include labor for removal and reinstallation.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of substantial completion.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each rooftop heating and cooling unit:
1. One set of matched fan belts for each belt-driven fan.
2. One set filters for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFTOP UNITS
A. General: Units shall be factory-assembled and tested, designed for roof or slab installation, and
consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, natural gas heat exchangers, condenser
and evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, dampers; capacities and electrical
characteristics as scheduled.
B. Casing: standard casing construction, having corrosion protection coating, and exterior finish. Casings
shall have removable panels or access doors for inspection and access to internal parts, a minimum
of 1/2" thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, and an exterior
condensate drain connection.
C. Evaporator Fans: forward-curved, centrifugal, belt-driven fans with adjustable sheaves or direct-driven
fans; and permanently lubricated motor bearings.
D. Condenser Fans: propeller-type, direct-driven fans with permanently lubricated bearings.

237436-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 237436 - ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

E. Coils: For evaporator and condenser, provide non-ferrous construction with aluminum plate fins
mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes with brazed tubing joints.
F. Filters: MERV 13
G. Refrigerant: R-410A
H. Compressors: serviceable, semi-hermetic, or fully hermetic compressors. Provide vibration isolators
and crankcase heaters.
I. Efficiencies: Minimum ARI ratings of 13.0 SEER for units 3 tons through 6 tons: Minimum 80% AFUE.
J. Efficiencies: Minimum ARI ratings of 11.0 EER for units 7.5 tons through 12.5 tons: Minimum 80%
AFUE.
K. Safety Controls:
1. Low-pressure cutout.
2. High-pressure cutout.
3. Compressor motor overload protection.
4. Gas-fired heat exchangers: manufacturer's standard construction for gas-fired heat exchangers
and burners.
5. Controls:
a. BMS controls and sensors as indicated in the project drawings.
b. Redundant gas valve.
c. Intermittent pilot ignition.
d. Electronic spark ignition system.
e. High limit cutout.
f. Forced draft proving switch.
L. Economizer Control: economizer control consisting of return and outside air dampers, outside air filter,
fully modulating electric control system with enthalpy control, and adjustable mixed-air thermostat.
Design system for 100 percent outside air capability. Provide automatic changeover through
adjustable enthalpy control device.
M. Accessories: the following accessories as indicated and/or scheduled:
1. Thermostat: assembly shall be for staged heating and cooling with manual or automatic
changeover on standard sub-base.

PART 3 - - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install BMS controls and sensors as indicated in the project drawings. Refer also to Section 260943.
3.2 START UP AND TRAINING
A. Start-Up rooftop heating and cooling units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions.
Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
B. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for one-half day to instruct Owner's
personnel in operation and maintenance of rooftop heating and cooling units.
1. Schedule training with Owner; provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and Engineer of
training date. See Section 017900 – Demonstration and Training.

END OF SECTION

237436-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION238126 - SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 260943 - NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed
mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-system units
and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004,
Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
E. Efficiencies: Minimum ARI ratings of 13.00 SEER for the combination of the indoor unit and
condensing unit.
F. Unit Sizes: Unit sizes of 2 ton, 3 ton, 4 ton and 5 ton.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corporation.
2.2 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on back
of panel.
1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
2. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated and complying with ASHRAE
62.1-2004.
3. Air-stream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the air-stream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

238126-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION238126 - SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240,
and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor.
D. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
1. Special Motor Features: Multi-tapped, multi-speed with internal thermal protection and
permanent lubrication.
E. Disposable Filters: 1 inch thick, in fiberboard frames with ASHRAE 52.2 MERV rating of 6 or higher.
F. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.3 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for
access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service
valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay,
and contactor.
1. Compressor Type: Reciprocating.
2. Refrigerant: R-410A.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240,
and with liquid sub-cooler.
D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
F. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F.
G. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
H. Minimum Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, "Energy Standard for Buildings
except Low-Rise Residential Buildings." Also see Section 1.04 Quality Assurance
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 15 Sections "HVAC
Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation."
B. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
C. Coordinate with project electrician to provide BMS controls and sensors as indicated in the project
drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened
to building structure.
C. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Divi-
sion 7 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasten-
ers.
D. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static de-
flection of 1 inch. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Re-
straints."

238126-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION238126 - SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

E. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing
to allow access to unit.
F. Install BMS controls and sensors as indicated in the project drawings. Refer to Section 260943.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Coordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on Drawings and with
requirements specified in piping systems. If Drawings are explicit enough, these requirements may be
reduced or omitted.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
E. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches,
and motor controls.
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Delete this Article if factory-authorized service representative is not required.
B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION

238126-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 238239 - UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Perform all work necessary to complete the heating ventilation and air-conditioning systems as shown
on the drawings and specified herein.
B. Submittals: Submit product data according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
1.2 LISTING AND LABELING
A. Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled as defined in the National
Electrical Code, Article 100.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UNIT HEATERS
A. Propeller-type, horizontal and vertical discharge heating units, with heating coils, fans, motors, and
self-contained controls.
1. Casing: Steel or aluminum with removable access panels to remove, service, and maintain major
components.
2. Electric Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium heating wire element; free from expansion noise and
60-Hz hum; embedded in magnesium oxide, insulating refractory; and sealed in high-mass steel
or corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends are
enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature does not exceed 550 deg F at any point during
normal operation.
a. Electric Heater Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection
and limit controls for over-temperature protection of heaters.
3. Fan and Motor: Direct-drive propeller fan and manufacturer's standard motor. Motors sized 1 hp
and less includes motor overload protection.
4. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
5. Discharge Configuration: Horizontal discharge with horizontal, adjustable louvers.
6. Discharge Configuration: Vertical discharge with radial louver diffuser.
7. Optional Accessories: Include the following:
a. Timer switch.
b. Integral thermostat.
c. Safety-switch disconnect on cover of terminal box.
d. Mercury contactors.
e. Fan-delay relay.
2.2 CABINET UNIT HEATERS
A. Surface-mounting cabinet with front grille air inlet and front air outlet.
1. Electric Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium heating wire element; free from expansion noise and
60-Hz hum; embedded in magnesium oxide, insulating refractory; and sealed in high-mass steel
or corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends are
enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature does not exceed 550 deg F at any point during
normal operation.
a. Heater Circuit Protection: One-time f uses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit
controls for over-temperature protection of heaters.
2. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal blower, direct driven by a single-phase, 2-speed electric motor with
inherent overload protection and resilient motor/fan mount.
3. Wiring Terminations: match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
4. Filter: Manufacturer’s standard throwaway filter, 1 inch thick, on inlet of each fan.
5. Unit Controls: Contactor rated for 100,000 duty cycles, control transformer, fan ON-AUTOMATIC
switch.

238239-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 238239 - UNIT HEATERS

6. Optional Accessories: Include the following:

a. Timer switch
b. Integral thermostat
c. Disconnect switch
d. Mercury contactor
e. Fan-delay relay
f. Kick-plate base for floor-mounted units.
7. Finish cabinet with manufacturer’s standard enamel, color as selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install unit heaters as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 90A.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect unit heaters and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instructed by
manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's
torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening
requirements specified in UL 486A.

END OF SECTION

238239-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260013 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract for the Construction of Buildings, Standard Form of the
American Institute of Architects, current edition, the Supplementary General Conditions, and the
"Special Conditions for Mechanical & Electrical Work" are a part of these specifications.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. This specification and accompanying plans cover and shall govern the installation of a complete
electrical system, all as specifically set forth herein, and as indicated in the plans.
B. The drawings and these specifications are complementary each to the other, and what is called for by
one shall be as binding as if called for by both. They are intended to include everything requisite and
necessary to the entire finishing of the work notwithstanding that every item necessarily required by
such work is not especially mentioned or shown.
C. This Contractor shall furnish all labor and material necessary for the complete system and items of
work including:
1. Panelboards including feeders
a. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by Cutler Hammer, GE, ITE, Square D, or
Westinghouse.
2. Lighting fixtures complete with lamps
3. Exterior lighting
4. All branch circuit wiring
5. Exit and emergency system
6. Contactors, relays and the clocks.
7. Network Building Control and Energy Management System (BMS), a web-enabled HVAC,
lighting, and landscape irrigation wireless control and monitoring system, consisting of central
control, processing, and communication hardware and related wireless control devices, relays,
and contactors throughout the facility.
8. Coordination with local utility companies regarding both power and communication service for
this project and providing all required raceways, wiring and installation work
9. Temporary light and power
10. Furnish, install and connect all conduit, fittings, outlet boxes and junction boxes, complete with
wiring as required and as shown on the plans, banking equipment drawings, etc. and as
hereinafter specified
11. Set, wire and connect all motors as specified and as noted on the drawings. The Contractor shall
make final connections to all equipment and devices requiring electrical power furnished under
this or other sections. Final connections shall be interpreted to include connections from
roughing-in to any and all items requiring service
12. System of empty conduit, outlets, junction and pull boxes, etc. for telephone/communications and
Data Cable system
13. Furnish, install and connect all switches, receptacles, recessed floor boxes and miscellaneous
electrical equipment as required and as shown on the plans and as hereinafter specified
14. Disconnect (safety) switches and motor controllers
15. Metering equipment
16. 8’x8’x3/4” fire rated telephone backboard
17. 8’x8’x3/4” fire rated backboard for security equipment
D. Contractor will distinctly understand that the work described herein is to be a finished job, and the
whole completed in a workman-like manner. The omission from either the drawings or specifications
of minor details that ordinarily form a part of first class work of this character and are necessary to the
completion of the project as contemplated and described, shall not be a cause for any extra cost, but
shall be included by this Contractor as if specifically mentioned or shown.
E. Before ordering any materials or proceeding with the work, this Contractor shall verify all
measurements at the site and be responsible for correctness of the same. No extra compensation will
be allowed because of difference between the actual measurements and dimensions indicated on the

260013-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260013 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

drawings. Any difference that may be found shall be submitted to the Architect's Superintendent on
the job for rectification before proceeding with the work.
F. It is specifically understood that all items of work and systems are to be furnished complete in all
details, including all conduit, wiring, necessary specialties and other appurtenances required for a
complete operating system.
G. Where two types of similar equipment are specified or shown on the drawings, the Base Bid will be
based on the higher quality or greater number.
H. Definitions:
1. The term "Contractor", wherever used in the Contract Documents, shall be understood to mean
the Electrical Contractor or Electrical Sub-Contractor.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Related work not covered by this Section includes, but not necessarily limited to the following:
1. See Division 1, 22 and 23 for additional electrical work.
1.4 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Temperature control equipment and system wiring will be work installed by the Temperature Control
(HVAC) Contractor. Coordinate with the HVAC Contractor for procurement of HVAC sensors and
controls.
B. Telephone/Communications/Data system equipment and wiring shall be installed by the Telephone
Company and/or communication system contractor.
1.5 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall confer with other trades at the site before installation of his work to avoid interference
so that maximum headroom and clearances may be maintained. In the event that interferences
develop between work and the various trades, the owner's decision will be final and no additional
compensation will be allowed for the moving of
B. Particular attention shall be paid to situations where recessed equipment, pipes and lights occur or
where the work of several trades occurs together above suspended ceilings, in pipe shafts or in areas
where space is limited.
C. It is presumed that the Contractor has carefully examined the drawings, equipment drawings and
specifications for the entire work and the job conditions, which will ensue before executing the
agreement and has reported to the Architect in writing any interferences or conflicts with his work. If
and as a result problems arise during the construction period regarding the drawings, specifications or
work of the other trades, the resolutions of which shall be decided upon by the Architect. All changes
made and all damage to construction shall be repaired by the Contractor without additional cost.
D. All fixtures, equipment, devices, switches, outlets, etc. shall be positioned to avoid all interferences
and assure proper coordination, with the work of all other trades, cases, partitions, wall, floor and
ceiling patterns, architectural features, etc. All recessed devices, fixtures, etc. shall be coordinated
with the wall, floor and ceiling patterns. The Architect will resolve conflicts and make adjustments
where such are warranted.
E. Contractor to refer to architectural floor plans, reflect ceiling plans, details, sections, room finish
schedules, structural drawings, civil drawing, banking equipment drawings, mechanical, plumbing and
fire protection drawing for additional work applicable to this project including project specification
book.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Only products of reputable manufacturers will be acceptable.
2. The Electrical contractor and his Sub-Contractors shall employ only workmen who are skilled in
their respective trades.
B. Requirements of regulatory agencies:

260013-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260013 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

1. All electrical work shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical code,
latest edition, and other governing bodies that have jurisdiction over this project.
2. Where applicable, all fixtures, equipment and materials shall be as approved or listed by the
following agencies:
a. Factory Mutual Laboratories.
b. National Fire Protection Association.
c. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
C. Allowable tolerances:
1. Inspect Architectural, Structural, Mechanical Drawings and Equipment Drawings for all
dimensions, locations of equipment, partitions and walls, structural details, and location of
mechanical pipes and ducts so that the electrical installation shall be in harmony with that of the
other trades.
2. Exact location of equipment furnished by the other trades and wired by this Contractor shall be
obtained from the Drawings of the other trades and coordinated with the installing contractor in
the field.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings for all fixtures, equipment, materials, etc., shall be submitted as specified in Division 1.
B. Installation, maintenance and operating manuals and instructions for all equipment shall be provided
as specified in Division 1.
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Exercise care in transporting and handing to avoid damage to fixtures, equipment and materials.
B. Store materials on the site so as to prevent damage.
C. Keep fixtures, equipment and materials clean, dry and free from deleterious conditions.
D. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 016600. (Product Storage and Handling)
E. Where items of electrical equipment and/or materials are furnished by others for installation by
Electrical Contractor, Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for the unloading of such
equipment and/or materials from the delivery truck. Electrical Contractor shall check equipment and/or
materials upon receipt and notify party furnishing items of any damaged or missing equipment.
1.9 INSTALLATION, PERFORMANCE, ERECTION
A. In the event that conflicts, if any, cannot be settled rapidly and amicably between the affected trades,
with work proceeding in a workmanlike manner, then the Owner’s Field Representative shall decide
which work is to be relocated, and his judgment shall be final and binding on this Contract.
B. No measurements of a Drawing by scale shall be used as a dimension to work by. The Drawings are
not intended to show complete or accurate details of the building in every respect. Exact locations and
relation are to be defined in the field and shall be satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer and Owner’s
Field Representative. This Contractor shall take all field measurements and shall be responsible
therefore.
C. Contractor shall compare Drawings and Specifications, checking all measurements and determine
intent of the contract Documents. Discrepancies shall be brought to the Architect/Engineer's attention
for interpretation.
D. The right is reserved to make any reasonable change in location of outlets and equipment prior to
roughing-in without involving additional expense. Any change from the Electrical Drawings, as is
necessary to make the work of this Contractor conform to the building as constructed and to fit the
work of other trades, shall be included in Contractor's Contract and installed without extra costs.
E. Electrical contractor shall install and run initial setup of central BMS equipment following the simple
“Plug-and-Play” instructions provided with the equipment, and hand off final system programming to
the Owner. Refer to Section 260943.
1.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing:

260013-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260013 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

1. After wires are in place and connected to devices and equipment, the systems all be tested for
shorts and grounds.
2. All hot wires, if shorted or grounded, shall be removed and replaced.
3. All grounds, shorts and high resistance splices shall be rectified.
4. Any wiring devices, electrical apparatus or lighting fixture furnished under this Contract, if
grounded or shorted on any integral "live" part, shall be removed and the trouble rectified by
replacing all defective parts or materials as directed or as required.
5. Service ground to be tested per Electrical Code requirement. Provide Architect with written test
report.
6. All motors shall be tested under load with ammeter readings taken in each phase. All motors
shall be tested for correct direction or rotation. Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for
testing and running of all motors, and shall verify that proper overload devices have been
installed.
7. This Contractor at his own expense shall furnish all meters, instruments, cable connections,
equipment or apparatus necessary for making all tests.
8. Provide tests as specifically mentioned in other Sections of these Specifications.
1.11 CLEANING
A. Cleaning equipment, completed work and premises: After the completion of all installation, each
system shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all paint, oil and other foreign material. Contractor shall
also clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels and stickers, etc., from all fixtures, equipment etc.
The Contractor shall remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated from his operations from the
premises. Comply with pertinent provisions.
B. Demonstration: At the conclusion of his work and before final contract payment is made, the Electrical
Contractor shall demonstrate and explain to the Owner’s personnel the function, operation and
maintenance of all equipment and systems installed by him.
1.12 SCHEDULES
A. Equipment Schedules: See Drawings for Schedules of lighting fixtures, electrical panels, and related
items.
1.13 BROCHURES
A. Prior to final acceptance, provide bound brochures containing copies of the following:
1. Approved submittal data.
2. Equipment guarantees.
3. Contractor guarantees.
4. Maintenance and other operating instructions and spare parts lists for all equipment.
5. Control diagrams.
1.14 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING
A. Provide all distribution switches and/or circuit breakers, motor controllers, whether individually
mounted or in panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, etc., with suitable identifications as
to both the designation of the feeder controlled and load served, using nomenclature shown on
drawings.
B. Provide all feeders with suitable identification as to their designation in all junction boxes, pull boxes,
gutter spaces through which they pass, and at their terminal points of connection.
C. Identification of distribution switches or circuit breakers in panelboards shall be by means of
panelboard directories. Identification of distribution switches, circuit breakers or motor controllers,
individually mounted or in switchboards or motor control centers shall be by means of engraved
lamacoid nameplates permanently fastened on the front face of the housing showing 1/4" high white
lettering on a black background.
D. Identification of feed cables shall be by means of engraved fiber tags suitably fastened to the cables.
1.15 SLEEVES
A. Contractor shall provide sleeves in walls and floor slabs for the passage of all conduits, pipes and
ducts installed by him. Sleeves shall be set in place in sufficient time ahead of the concrete and

260013-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260013 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

masonry work so as not to delay that work. Coordinate this work with the contractors for the
respective construction materials to be penetrated.
B. Sleeves through floor shall extend three inches above finished floor level and shall be made
watertight.
C. When many conduits pass through a wall at a single location, that opening shall be completely closed
by grouting with concrete, the full thickness of the wall.
1.16 PAINTING
A. All equipment, panelboards, switchboards, etc., shall be factory finished in baked enamel or lacquer,
or as specified. Standard factory finished shall be approved. The installing Contractor shall neatly
touch up any scratches.
B. All metal work installed by this Contractor, exposed to the weather and not factory finished, shall be
painted with one coat of primer and two coats of oil base paint of color selected by Architect.
1.17 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1.
B. Provide equipment Shop Drawings which includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Panelboards
2. Contactors, relays and time clocks
3. Disconnect switches
4. Interior and exterior light fixtures, including lamps (furnished by E.C.)
5. Wiring devices
6. Metering equipment
7. Motor controllers
1.18 PERMITS
A. Contractor to provide all permits and fees for the performance of his work. The building permit will be
by others.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide necessary drawings to Fire Prevention Bureau and Electrical
Inspection Bureau for approval.
C. Contractor shall obtain all approvals from the bodies which have jurisdiction over this project.
1.19 SLEEVES, CUTTING, PATCHING AND SUPPORTS
A. Contractor shall furnish and set sleeves, inserts, etc., required for installation of his work and be
responsible for the final and permanent locations.
B. Contractor shall give the General Contractor complete information as to size of openings in floors,
walls, etc., so that such openings may be provided as the building progresses.
C. If openings are omitted or incorrect through failure to follow above instructions, the Contractor shall
engage the Contractor for general construction to cut the patch at his own expense to the satisfaction
of the Architect.
D. Conduits passing through roofs or other surfaces exposed to weather shall be properly flashed as
specified in Roofing and Waterproofing Sections of the General Specifications. This flashing shall be
paid for as part of the electrical work.
E. Sleeves installed through slabs shall be packed or filled as directed after conduit is in place. Filling
shall provide a waterproof and fireproof packing around conduit to prevent leakage of liquids, smoke
or fire from floor above into ceiling.
F. Sleeves for conduits shall be mild steel tube, galvanized inside and outside, equal to rigid conduit.
G. All supports will be galvanized angles or channels supported with 3/8" threaded rods anchored to the
building construction.
H. Height of outlets and devices is indicated on the drawings. Use the following as a guide for mounting
of outlet boxes where not clearly indicated in the drawings. Final mounting height to be field verified

260013-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260013 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

with architect and/or owners representative. Refer to local code and ADA requirements for specific
device heights.

Device Height Above Finished Floor to Center of Box

Receptacles (Office and Corridors) 18"

Receptacles (Counters and unfinished areas) 44"
Switches 44"
Clock Outlets 88"
Telephone/Data Outlet
Wall 44"
Desk 36"
Public 44"
Fire Alarm Break Glass Stations 44"
Fire Alarm Horns/Lights 96"
I. Coordinate height of outlets with drawings and equipment installations drawings prior to rough-in and
properly locate height of all outlets.
1.20 SEALING
A. Fire Seals
1. Seal penetrations of fire-rated walls, all floors or ceilings at raceways for compliance with NEC
300-21. Fill void around raceway. Sleeves shall be heavy wall steel pipe, anchored to building
construction and finished plumb with wall, ceiling or floor lines.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Dow Corning - Fire Stop
2. Nelson - Flameseal
3. T&B - Flamesafe
4. 3M - Fire Barrier
C. Smoke and Fire stop fittings may be used instead of above sealant.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. O Z/Gedney, Series CFS
E. Thermal Seal: Seal penetrations of thermally insulated equipment or rooms to prevent heat transfer.
Seal exterior of raceway with fiberglass or other material compatible to equipment or room and
approved by Architect/Engineer. Seal interior of raceway with duct sealing compound at entry to
equipment or room.
F. Water Seal: Seal penetrations of perimeter walls or floors below grade to prevent entry of water. Use
materials compatible with wall or floor construction and approved by Architect/Engineer. Seal roof
penetrations with flashings compatible with roof design and approved by Roofing and System
Manufacture and Architect/Engineer.
1.21 NAME PLATES AND EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS
A. In addition to nameplates specified elsewhere herein, furnish and install engraved white core
laminated micarta nameplates for all motor starters and disconnect switches, safety switches, time
switches, magnetic contactors, relays, overhead door operator, push button stations, etc., furnished
under this Contract.
B. Others will furnish nameplates to this contractor for equipment furnished under their particular branch
of work. Electric Wiring Contractor shall install all such nameplates on equipment for which such
nameplates are intended.
C. Nameplate designations shall be as later directed by the Engineer.
D. Provide stick-on "voltage" name tags on the following equipment:
1. On all starters, on outside covers
2. On all disconnect switches, on outside covers.
3. On all panels (on inside of door for recessed panels).

260013-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260013 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

4. On timers, relays, contactors, etc.

E. Timers, relays and contactors indicating their function.
F. All lettering of voltage and motor number designations shall be minimum 1/4" high.
G. Provide stick-on name tags on all motor starters giving pump or fan number designation, and on all
timers, relays and contactors indicating their function.
H. All lettering of voltage and motor number designations shall be minimum 1/4" high.
1.22 EXAMINATION OF SITE
A. Visit the site to ascertain the complete scope of work before submitting bid.
1.23 OCCUPANCY
A. Owner, or others whom he may designate, shall be privileged to enter and occupy the building or
portions thereof, at any time prior to completion, without prejudice.
1.24 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Upon completion of the job, the contractor shall submit a clean set of prints marked in red pen or
pencil to indicate all deviations from the Drawings and Specifications.
B. A record of deviations shall be kept throughout the progress of the job and shall be used in the
preparation of the "record" Drawings.
C. The "record" Drawings shall indicate all changes in branch circuit work, feeders, and location of
apparatus, lighting fixtures and wiring devices.
1.25 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Within 30 days after construction is complete and at a time convenient to the Owner, the Contractor
shall furnish qualified mechanics for a period of one (1) day to thoroughly familiarize the Owner's
personnel with the operation and maintenance of the electrical systems.

END OF SECTION

260013-7 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Product Data for supporting devices and electrical identification.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING WIRE
A. Single conductor, copper. Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded conductor for larger
than No. 10 AWG.
1. Thermoplastic Insulated Wire: Conform to NEMA WC 5.
2. Cross-Linked, Polyethylene Insulated Wire: Conform to NEMA WC 7.
3. Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class suitable for
service indicated. Select to comply with Project's installation requirements.
2.2 GENERAL SUPPORT FOR ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A. Channel and angle support systems, hangers, anchors, sleeves, brackets, fabricated items, and
fasteners are designed to provide secure support from the building structure for electrical
components.
1. Material: Steel, except as otherwise indicated, protected from corrosion with zinc coating or with
treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative finish or inherent material
characteristics.
2. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel, except as
otherwise indicated.
2.3 STEEL CHANNEL SUPPORTS
A. Steel channel supports have 9/16-inch diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1
surface.
1. Fittings and accessories mate and match with channels and are from the same manufacturer.
2.4 NONMETALLIC CHANNEL AND ANGLE SYSTEMS
A. Structural-grade, factory-formed, fiberglass-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch diameter holes
at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1 surface.
1. Fittings and accessories mate and match with channels or angles and are from the same
manufacturer.
2. Fitting and Accessory Material: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be
stainless steel.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet-metal sleeves: 0.0276-inch or heavier galvanized sheet steel, round tube, closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
C. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
D. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
E. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.
F. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less
than 3 mils thick by 1 inch wide.

260500-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

G. Underground Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape with the
following features:
1. Size: Not less than 4 mils thick by 6 inches wide.
a. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
2. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
a. Printed Legend: Indicates type of underground line.
H. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and
letters.
I. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
J. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted, aluminum, baked-enamel finish signs, punched for
fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application.
K. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose acetate
butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch, galvanized steel backing. Colors, legend, and size appropriate to the
application and 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
L. Fasteners for Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
M. Meter Sockets: Comply with serving utility company requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting
heights or other location criteria are not indicated.
B. Install items level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components,
except where otherwise indicated.
C. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
D. Give right of way to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
E. The complete electrical installation, light fixtures, conduit, boxes, wiring, etc. in plenum ceiling areas
shall be done in strict compliance with all state, national and local codes which have jurisdiction over
this project.
3.2 FEEDERS
A. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN or XHHW, copper conductor, in raceway, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Feeders: Type XHHW, copper conductor, 90C insulation, in raceway, except as
otherwise indicated.
3.3 CIRCUITS
A. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
B. Class 2 and Class 3 Control Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
3.4 WIRING, RACEWAYS AND SUPPORTS
A. Damp Locations and Outdoors Supports: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel
system components.
B. Dry Locations Supports: Steel materials.
C. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry all present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least
4; 200-lb-minimum design load.
D. Install wires in raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's "Standard of
Installation."

260500-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

E. Conductor Splices: Keep to the minimum and comply with the following:
1. Install splices and taps that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation
ratings than unspliced conductors.
2. Use splice and tap connectors that are compatible with conductor material.
F. Wiring at Outlets: Install with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet.
G. Connect outlets and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instructed by
manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's
torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening
requirements specified in UL 486A.
H. Install devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
I. Raceway Supports: Comply with NFPA 70 and the following requirements:
1. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U
bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing
hanger rods and conduits.
2. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
3. Spare Capacity: Size supports for multiple conduits so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.
4. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable iron pipe hangers or clamps.
5. Hanger Rods: 1/4-inch diameter or larger threaded steel, except as otherwise indicated.
6. Spring Steel Fasteners: Specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. May be
used in lieu of malleable iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and
receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to channel and
slotted angle supports.
7. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the
enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports, with no weight load on raceway
terminals.
J. Miscellaneous Supports: Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects,
control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices except where
components are mounted directly to structural features of adequate strength.
K. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported, except
where used for fixture support; support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar
hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and
support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.
3.5 SLEEVES
A. Install for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls, except where core-drilled holes
are used. Install for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all
other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry
walls.
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Perform firestopping
as specified in Division 7 Section "Penetration Firestopping" to reestablish the original fire-resistance
rating of the assembly at the penetration.
3.7 FASTENING
A. Unless otherwise indicated, securely fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware to the
building structure. Perform fastening according to the following:
1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood; toggle bolts on hollow masonry
units; concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry; and by machine screws,
welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel.
2. Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be
used instead of expansion bolts, machine screws, or wood screws.

260500-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

3. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or
any other items.
4. In partitions of light steel construction use sheet-metal screws.
5. Drill holes in concrete beams so holes more than 1-1/2 inches deep do not cut main reinforcing
bars.
6. Drill holes in concrete so holes more than 3/4 inch deep do not cut main reinforcing bars.
7. Fill and seal holes drilled in concrete and not used.
8. Select fasteners so the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof-test
load.
3.8 CONCRETE PADS AND METERING EQUIPMENT
A. Install concrete pads and bases according to requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
B. Install utility-metering equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide
grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company.
3.9 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install identification devices where required.
1. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
2. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification
with corresponding designations indicated on the Contract Documents or required by codes and
standards. Use consistent designations throughout the Project.
3. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films
before applying.
4. Tag or label power circuits for future connection and circuits in raceways and enclosures with
other circuits. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull box, junction box, and
outlet box. Color-coding may be used for voltage and phase indication.
5. Identify Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground
power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line
marker located directly above power and communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200
mm) below finished grade. Where multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete
envelope do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches, use a single line marker.
6. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and
identification of items controlled by each individual breaker.
3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for
electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved. Repair disturbed
surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces.

END OF SECTION

260500-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260519 – LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, A.I.A., A201, Latest Edition, and the
Supplementary General Conditions are a part of the Contract for this work. Contractor shall consult
them and General Requirements, Division 1, for instructions pertaining to work under this Section. All
notes on the Drawings applying to this work are also a part of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment, including incidental items required for a complete
and proper installation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All wire and cable shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and bear the Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) label.
B. All conductors shall be not less than indicated on Drawings and not less than required by the N.E.C.
C. All wire and cable shall be copper, 98% conductivity, with 600 volt insulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wire and cable for building interior: Sizes #14 through #10 shall be type THHN/THWN solid copper;
sizes #8 and larger shall be type THHN/THWN or XHHW stranded copper.
B. Where light fixtures are wired in continuous rows, wire pulled through fixtures shall be THHN 90
degrees Centigrade copper, 600 volt insulation.
C. All wire and cable installed in inaccessible locations shall be installed in conduit systems, GRS, IMC,
or EMT. Concealed flexible conduits are permitted only at the ends of conduit runs, as equipment or
fixture “whips”. The use of metal-sheathed cables (Type MC) shall not be permitted within concealed
wall, ceiling, or other cavities not easily accessed by removable ceiling tiles or access panels.
D. Type MC Metal-Clad Cable:
1. Metal-clad cable may be installed where permitted by code for branch circuit wiring not
concealed within inaccessible wall and ceiling construction, and shall be installed in strict
accordance with building management standards where applicable.
2. Type MC cable may be used for lighting and receptacle branch circuit wiring in accordance with
applicable electrical codes.
a. Use shall be limited to dry locations with cables suitable secured at intervals not exceeding
42 inches.
b. Cable shall be installed in such a manner as to preclude resting upon finished ceiling
construction or so as to impair removal of any accessible ceiling tile.
c. Cable shall be continuous between electrical devices.
d. Connection fittings shall be of the lock-nut type.
e. Wiring from the first device powered from the branch circuit (“homerun”) shall be installed to
the panelboard in RGS, rigid IMC or EMT conduit, minimum 3/4” diameter.
f. Type MC cable shall not be used for homerun connections to lighting fixture supply leads, or
embedded in concrete or masonry.
3. Provide Type MC Cables that are minimum 90 degrees C rated, with components and fittings
listed for grounding, compliant with NEC Articles 250 and 330.
4. Provide cable formed from continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked zinc coated or
galvanized (inside and outside) strip steel or aluminum jacket. Provide cables with full parity
insulated equipment ground conductor.
5. Provide compatible steel fittings with integral red plastic insulated throat bushings, compliant with
NEC 330.
E. Type AC armored cable with uninsulated grounding conductor is not permitted.

260519-1
 CHASE
SECTION 260519 – LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

F. Non-metallic sheathed cables (generically “Romex”), Types NM, NMC, and NMS, are not permitted.
G. Flat or under-carpet type cable is not permitted under any circumstances.
H. Connectors and Splices:
1. Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for
application and service indicated. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater
than those of the wires upon which used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Wire and Cables:
1. All wiring shall be installed in approved metal raceway systems, conduits, or integrally
manufactured metallic sheaths.
2. Wire shall not be installed in conduit or raceways until they are free from moisture and foreign
matter.
3. Where exterior conduits enter the inside of the building, the end of the conduit must be sealed
after all conductors have been installed.
4. All joints shall be made in boxes where they will be accessible.
5. Pull or junction boxes as required by the N.E.C. must be provided as required to facilitate
installation of conductors.
6. Support of vertical conductors shall be in accordance with the N.E.C.
7. #8 and smaller conductor joints shall be thoroughly cleaned to bright metal and joined with
indenture-compression or screw-on compression type connectors as permitted by the N.E.C.
Sizes shall be as recommended by the manufacturers of the connectors for the quantities and
sizes of wires being connected.
8. All exposed wires, clamps or connectors shall be completely insulated with vinyl plastic tape.
9. All branch circuit wires shall be permanently identified with circuit numbers, securely fastened to
wire at cabinets at the time the wires are pulled in and tested.
10. Sufficient wire shall be left at each junction box and outlet to accommodate future taps. Leave
minimum 6" loops or ends at each location.
11. For panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches and equipment assemblies, neatly form and tie
the wiring with sturdy cable ties and straps which will withstand substantial temperature rises
without becoming loose.
12. Branch circuit conductors shall be color-coded as follows:
120/208 Volts Phase
Black A
Red B
Blue C
White Neutral
Green Ground
13. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Use of wire pulling lubricant is optional, but if needed to prevent damage
to the conductors, it must be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and be of such
consistency that it will leave no obstruction nor tackiness that will prevent pulling out old wires or
pulling in new wires or additional wires.
14. Conductors larger than #8 shall be thoroughly cleaned to bright metal and joined with indenture-
compression type connectors.
15. Special attention shall be given to connections and terminations where dissimilar metals are
used as copper to aluminum. Only the use of pressure type solderless connectors that are
suitable for the use shall be installed.
16. Prior to final inspection, test the installed cables and wires. Prior to energizing the wires and
cables, check them for correct connections and test them for short circuits, ground faults,
continuity and insulation.
17. Final connections to all light fixtures shall be made with minimum #12 THHN solid copper wire.
18. Home runs over 100 feet for 120v, 1 phase shall have a minimum size of #10 AWG for home run.
19. Main service and feeder connections shall be made using two bolt lugs with back washer.
20. Minimum size branch circuit conductor shall be #12 AWG.

260519-2
 CHASE
SECTION 260519 – LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

END OF SECTION

260519-3
 CHASE
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a completely grounded system. All electrical equipment, conduits, supports, cabinets,
panelboards shall be grounded in accordance with the NEC and/or as shown on the Drawings. The
intent is a system and an equipment ground.
B. Extent of Work is as shown on the Drawings or herein specified in Division 26.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1. NFPA 70.
2. NEMA.
3. U.L. Listed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Connectors:
1. Burndy Corp.
2. O.Z. Electrical Mfg. Co.
3. Buchanan Electrical Products Corp.
4. Penn-Union Electric.
5. Anderson Electric Corp.
B. Ground rods:
1. Anderson Electric Corp.
2. Copperweld Corp.
3. Penn Union Electrical Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Ground rods shall be copper weld rods 3/4" in diameter as specified or required length as noted on
the Drawings.
B. Connectors shall be industry standard type for connecting grounds, splicing, taping and the like.
C. Electrode clamps, connectors, mechanical lugs or wire terminals shall be used to bond ground wires
together or to junction and panel boxes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before connections are made to insure good metal
contact.
B. Grounding conductors shall be so installed as to permit shortness and most direct path from
equipment to ground; be installed in metal conduit with both conductor and conduit bonded at each
end; have connections accessible for inspection and made with approved solderless connectors
braced (or bolted) to the equipment or structure to be grounded; in NO case be a current carrying
conductor; have a green jacket unless it is bare copper; be run in conduit with power conductors or in
the case of multi-conductor cable run inside the cable sheath.
C. All exterior grade mounted equipment shall have their enclosures grounded directly to a separate
driven ground at the equipment in addition to the building ground connection. This includes grade
mounted light fixtures.

260526-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

D. A main building ground, bare copper conductor, NEC sized but in no case less than #3/0, shall be run
in conduit from the main service panel to a driven ground field outside the building. This ground shall
be extended to the main water service metal pipe and to a main structural steel member of the
building. Provide a properly sized bonding shunt strap around the meter and all dielectric unions in the
water pipe.
E. Tests: The resistance between ground and absolute earth shall not exceed 25 ohms and shall be
measured by the Electrical Subcontractor in the presence of the Architect before equipment is placed
in operation.

END OF SECTION

260526-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260531 - CONDUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, A.I.A. A201, Latest Edition, and the
Supplementary General Conditions are a part of the Contract for this Work. Contractor shall consult
them and the General Requirements, Division 1, for instructions pertaining to work under this Section.
All notes on the Drawings applying to this work are also a part of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment, including incidental items required for work of their
Section as shown on the Drawings specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper
installation.
1. Furnish and install conduits for all wiring of type called for and as required for this project.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All conduits shall bear label of the Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., and sized in accordance with the
N.E.C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Conduit:
1. Galvanized rigid steel (GRS): Hot dipped galvanized rigid steel with threaded ends. Meet ASTM
standard A-153 galvanized after fabrication.
2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid mild steel tube with welded seams, hot dipped
galvanized with threaded ends.
3. Thin Wall: Electro-galvanized electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
4. Flexible: Hot dipped galvanized material of mild steel of uniform width and thickness.
5. Flexible Liquid Tight: Hot dipped galvanized material of mild shell of uniform width and thickness
with extruded moisture and oil proof PVC jacket.
B. Conduit Fittings:
1. GRS Conduit: Threaded type.
2. IMC Conduit: Threaded type.
3. Thinwall or EMT: Rain-tight and concrete-tight, gland compression type, insulated nylon throat
with die-cast body and steel nut, Appleton type 86T series or equal. For conduit sizes 3" and
larger (where not required to be rain or concrete tight) set-screw type is acceptable.
4. Flexible Conduit: Single or two piece squeeze type.
5. Flexible Liquid Type: Compression type.
C. Prohibited materials:
1. Armored and metal-sheathed cables, types AC and MC, shall not be permitted.
2. Non-metallic sheathed cables, types NM, NMC and NMS, shall not be permitted.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Conduit to be Republic Steel Corporation, Triangle, Youngstown Sheet and Tube, or Allied.
B. Conduit fittings to be Appleton Electric Co., Raco, Inc., or Thomas & Betts Co.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
A. Conduit Installation - Conduit Layout:
1. Where conduit is exposed, give special attention to appearance of completed installation.
2. Run parallel or perpendicular to exterior walls of buildings.
3. Locate to avoid equipment, fixtures, ductwork, piping, etc.

260531-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260531 - CONDUITS

4. Lay out and install work in advance of the laying of floors, walls, etc., and furnish and install all
sleeves that may be required for openings through floors, walls, etc.
5. Where Plans call for conduit to be run exposed, furnish, and install all inserts and clamps for the
supporting of conduit.
6. If Contractor does not properly install all sleeves and inserts required, he will be required to do
the necessary cutting and patching later, at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and Owner.
7. Do not obstruct openings or passageways.
8. Where conduit passes through floors, or through smoke and fire walls, perform firestopping as
specified in division 7, section "Firestopping" as reestablish the original fire resistance rating of
the assembly at the penetration.
9. Radius of bends shall be not less than six (6) internal diameters. Any run of conduit shall not
include more than the equivalent of three (3) quarter bends. Provide pull box if a greater number
of bends are required.
10. All conduits shall be concealed, except where specifically indicated as exposed.
11. Outside diameter of any conduit run in concrete slab shall not exceed 1/3 of thickness of slab.
12. Install accessible pull boxes in all conduit runs exceeding 150 ft.
13. All conduits install under concrete slab in grade shall be encased in 3" concrete envelope.
14. Conduits crossing building expansion joints shall be provided with approved grounding
expansion fittings where they cross these joints.
15. Underground conduits shall be blown and swabbed before conductors are pulled.
16. Provide fish wire in all empty and spare conduits.
17. Conduit shall be a minimum of ½".
18. All wiring shall be run in conduit. Where heavy wall galvanized rigid steel (GRS) is not required,
thin wall (EMT) may be used.
19. Provide concrete encasement of service conduits when required by local authorities and/or utility
companies.
20. Install raceway sealing fittings according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings
at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For
concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a
finished similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the
following points and elsewhere indicated:
a. Where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations.
b. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of
refrigerated spaces and air-conditioned spaces.
c. Where otherwise required by the National Electrical Code.
B. Cutting:
1. Measure and cut conduit from job site conditions, not from Drawings.
2. Conduit shall be cut square, reamed and butted solidly into fittings.
3. On GRS and IMC conduit, cut thread full and clean with sharp dies. Ream ends of pipe after
threading and before assembly to remove burrs.
4. Ream thin-wall conduit (EMT) after it is cut.
5. Use tapered threads where conduit cannot be coupled using standards couplings; use OZ or
Erickson split type coupling.
6. Threaded joints in concrete slabs or underground shall receive a coat of pipe sealant or pipe
jointing compound.
7. All conduit ends shall be plugged with an approved device to prevent the entrance of foreign
material.
C. Type of Conduit: Conduit buried in floors on or below grade, service conduit, and conduit on building
exterior or exposed to moisture shall be GRS or IMC; other conduit may be IMC or thinwall (EMT).
Conduit must be installed as a complete system, continuous from outlet to outlet and shall be
mechanically and electrically connected. The entire conduit system must be grounded. Minimum size
conduit shall be ½ inch conduit.
D. Supporting of Conduit:
1. Supports to be at least ten feet (10') maximum intervals.
2. Conduit to be independently supported from building structure and not from water piping,
ductwork, etc.

260531-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260531 - CONDUITS

3. Conduit shall be installed to avoid moisture traps.

4. Where conduit is to be installed in poured concrete floors or walls, securely fasten conduits to
forms or reinforcing to prevent conduit misplacement.
5. Supply exposed conduits with galvanized metal straps or clips. Where grouped, conduit shall be
neatly racked, supported by suitable trapeze or pipe hangers; run parallel with and at right angles
to beams and walls. Perforated straphangers are not approved.
E. Flexible Conduit:
1. Provide liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit connections to all motors and movable equipment
and where required to prevent transmission of vibration or to permit flexibility for movement of
equipment.
2. Flexible connections to recessed fixtures in dry locations may be flexible metallic tubing without
liquid-tight jackets.
3. Provide bonding jumper wire where required by code.
4. Where required by local code, provide liquid-tight flexible conduit in plenum ceiling areas for
connection to lighting fixtures, speakers, etc.
F. Surface Metal Raceway:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide surface metal raceways with associated fittings,
boxes, devices and supports as manufactured by Wiremold, Walker Duct or National Electric Co.
2. Raceways shall be sized in accordance with NEC to accommodate the number and size of
conductors being installed.

END OF SECTION

260531-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260532 - BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Conditions of the contract for Construction, AIA. A201, Latest Edition, and the
Supplementary General Conditions are a part of the Contract for this work. Contractor shall consult
them and the General Requirements, Division 1, for instructions pertaining to work under this Section.
All notes on the drawings applying to this work are also a part of this section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment, including incidental items required for work of this
Section as shown on the drawings, specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper
installation.
1. Furnish and install outlet boxes as called for, where required and as shown on the Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Dimensions shall be not less than required by N.E.C. and not less than indicated on the drawings.
B. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. shall list all outlet boxes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Boxes shall be 12 gauge or heavier steel, sheradized or galvanized to prevent rusting and shall have
readily removable knockouts. Cast metal boxes shall be rustproof.
B. Boxes shall:
1. Match conduit construction.
2. Be provided with more conduit terminations than required.
3. Accommodate required joints and conductors.
4. In or on wall (not WP) - galvanized steel one gang box for one conduit termination; two gang
boxes or larger or deep masonry box for conductors, conductor joints and conduit terminations;
cover as required for device.
5. In or on ceiling (not WP) - galvanized steel; 4" octagonal (or larger) for one fixture; fixture studs;
supported independently of conduit.
6. In or on walls of damp locations, rooms below 50 degrees F, in or on exterior side of wall, floor or
roof - gasketed, watertight (WP), galvanized, cast iron or non-ferrous.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Outlet boxes to be Appleton, Raco or Steel City

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Outlet Boxes:
1. Boxes for concealed conduits and EMT shall be flush mounted. Other boxes may be flush or
surface type.
2. Install plaster rings at plastered surfaces.
3. Install tile cover rings (extensions) for devices at non-plastered surfaces.
4. In addition to boxes indicated, install enough boxes to prevent damage to cables and wires
during pulling operations.
5. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast
metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.
6. Boxes shall be supported independently of conduit.
7. Fit boxes into available space, construction and surface materials.
8. For additional conduit termination, more conductors and more conductor joins, provide additional
boxes in keeping with code requirements.

260532-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260532 - BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

9. For gang installations: Switches mounted in a common box for gang installation shall be so
arranged that the voltage between adjacent switches does not exceed 300 volts, or permanent
barriers must be installed between the adjacent switches.
10. Mount all boxes at height shown on the drawings, or as directed.
11. The approximate location of outlet boxes is shown on the Drawings, but care shall be taken to
install all outlets with proper relation to equipment or material to be installed by other trades.
12. Where required by local code, provide special gasketed outlet boxes with special knockouts in
plenum ceiling areas.
13. In Fan and Machinery Rooms and areas, exact locations and mounting height of fixtures shall be
coordinated so as to clear all ducts, fan housings, tanks, pipes, etc., and obtain uniform light
distribution; therefore, all outlets and conduits serving same in these rooms shall be run exposed
in a neat symmetrical manner after this equipment is installed in place.

END OF SECTION

260532-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260533 - PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, A.I.A. A201, Latest edition, and the
Supplementary General Requirements, Division 1, for instructions pertaining to work under this
Section. All notes on the Drawings apply to this work are also part of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment, including incidental items required for work of this
Section as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper
installation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Dimensions shall be not less than required by N.E.C. and not less than indicated on the Drawings.
A. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. standards shall apply.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Boxes shall be made of galvanized sheet steel of code thickness with screw covers, unless otherwise
specified.
B. Boxes shall be cast metal where required by code or where indicated on the Drawings. Cast metal
boxes shall be rustproof.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Junction and pull boxes shall be Appleton, Arlington Sheet Melat Corp., Crouse-Hindes, EPI-Electrical
Enclosures or Hoffman.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Junction and Pull Boxes:
1. Pull or junction boxes shall be installed in all conduit runs having the equivalent of three (3) 90
bends, and/or more than 150 feet in length. This shall be the minimum requirement. Additional
pull boxes shall be installed as required for a workmanlike job and/or as to prevent damage to
cables and wires during pulling operations.
2. Install pull or junction boxes concealed except in unfinished areas or exposed work.
3. Field-drill the boxes for conduit sizes and locations as required.
4. All cables entering or leaving metal boxes shall be protected by the use of insulated throat
bushing and double locknuts on GRS or IMC conduit, and by insulation throat box connectors for
EMT conduit.
5. Common boxes used for gang installation shall include barriers between power and low voltage
circuits.

END OF SECTION

260533-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260534 - SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, A.I.A. A201, Latest Edition, and the
Supplementary General Conditions are a part of the Contract for this work. Contractor shall consult
them and the General Requirements, Division 1, for instructions pertaining to work under this Section.
All notes on the Drawings applying to this work are also part of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment, including incidental items required for work of this
Section as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, or as required for a complete and proper
installation.
1. Provide wiring devices as scheduled herein and as called for on the Drawings.
2. Provide device plates for all wiring devices.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wiring devices shall be Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. listed and rated per N.E.C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wall Switches:
1. Hardwired wall switches: Single unit, toggle, butt contact, quiet type with integral mounting strap,
rated for 15 or 20 amps, 120/277 volts, installed 44 inches above finished floor, or as noted,
(specification grade).
2. Wireless wall switches: Refer to Section 260943.
B. Receptacles:
1. Duplex convenience receptacles shall be polarized grounding type, rated 20 amps at 120 volts
and installed 18" above finished floor, unless noted otherwise (specification grade).
2. Isolated ground receptacles, equipment-grounding contacts are connected to the green
grounding screw terminal of the device and have inherent electrical isolation from the mounting
strap.
a. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated ground receptacles.
b. Isolation Method: Integral to the receptacle construction and not dependent on removable
parts.
3. Ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles, UL standard 943, "Ground Fault Circuit
Interrupters", feed-through type, with integral NEMA 5-20 R Duplex receptacle.
C. Occupancy sensors shall include the following features or characteristics
1. Passive infrared motion detection.
2. Compatibility with incandescent, magnetic or electronic low voltage, and magnetic or electronic
fluorescent, as well as motor loads.
3. Occupancy detection within a 180-degree field of view.
4. Manual on/off control.
5. Manual configuration of range and time settings.
6. Refer to Section 260943.
D. Timer switches shall include the following features or characteristics
1. Buttons for 5- 10- 15- 30-minute ON and OFF.
2. 3-way circuit compatibility.
3. Minimum 1/6 HP fan capacity.
E. Wall plates:
1. Plates for boxes, switches, outlets, devices, etc., in all finished areas shall be identical and shall
be of high impact plastic material.
2. Plates in unfinished areas shall be galvanized steel.

260534-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260534 - SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES

F. Device and wall plate color:

1. In all finished areas, a all wiring devices and cover plates shall be identical and shall be of high
impact plastic material the color as noted in the Electrical Device Finishes schedule in the
drawings, unless noted otherwise or as directed. Final color selection to be coordinated with the
Architect prior to ordering devices.
2. Devices in unfinished areas shall be white, unless otherwise noted in the drawings.
2.2 MANUFACTURER'S & CATALOG NUMBERS
A. Hardwired wall switches (Fed. Spec. WS-896E):
1. Single pole, toggle type:
15 AMP Devices 20 AMP Devices
P&S #20ACI P&S #20AC1
Hubbell #1221 or #1201 Hubbell #1221
Eagle #1201 Eagle #2221
2. 3-way toggle type:
15 AMP Devices 20 AMP Devices
P&S #20AC3 P&S #20AC3
Hubbell #1223 Hubbell #1221
Eagle #1203 Eagle #2223
B. Wireless wall switches: refer to the drawings and Section 260943.
C. Receptacles:
1. Duplex Convenience Receptacle (Fed. Spec. WC-590-F).
15 AMP Devices(NEMA #5-15R) 20 AMP Devices(NEMA #5-20R)
P&S #5262 P&S #5362
Hubbell #5262 Hubbell #5362
Eagle #5262 Eagle #5362
2. Isolated Ground Type Duplex Receptacle
15 AMP Devices(NEMA #5-15R) 20 AMP Devices(NEMA #5-20R)
P&S #IG6200 P&S #IG6300
Hubbell #IG5262 Hubbell #IG5362
Eagle #IG5262 Eagle #IG5362
3. GFI Receptacle
15 AMP Devices(NEMA #5-15R) 20 AMP Devices(NEMA #5-20R)
P&S #1591-FI P&S #2091-F
Hubbell #GF-5262-I Hubbell #GR-5362
Eagle #646-2 Eagle #647-2
D. Wall occupancy sensor, single circuit
1. Where required by jurisdictions having authority to provide manual-on operation, switches with a
“vacancy” mode option, or alternate “vacancy” function models shall be provided.
2. Where required by jurisdictions having authority to provide bi-level operation, the manufacturer’s
matching switches with bi-level control shall be provided.
3. Refer to the drawings. Listed model numbers are based on product availability, and are subject
to change without notice. Verify compatibility of suggested model numbers with project-specific
circuiting and control requirements, and adjust as necessary to achieve design intent
E. Wall occupancy sensor, 3/4-way
1. Where required by jurisdictions having authority to provide manual-on operation, switches with a
“vacancy” mode option, or alternate “vacancy” function models shall be provided.
2. Refer to the drawings. Listed model numbers are based on product availability, and are subject
to change without notice. Verify compatibility of suggested model numbers with project-specific
circuiting and control requirements, and adjust as necessary to achieve design intent.
F. Wall occupancy sensor, dual circuit, 3/4-way
1. Where required by jurisdictions having authority to provide manual-on operation, switches with a
“vacancy” mode option, or alternate “vacancy” function models shall be provided.
2. Refer to the drawings. Listed model numbers are based on product availability, and are subject
to change without notice. Verify compatibility of suggested model numbers with project-specific
circuiting and control requirements, and adjust as necessary to achieve design intent.

260534-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260534 - SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES

G. Ceiling occupancy sensor

1. Refer to the drawings. Listed model numbers are based on product availability, and are subject
to change without notice. Verify compatibility of suggested model numbers with project-specific
circuiting and control requirements, and adjust as necessary to achieve design intent.
H. Wall plates shall be as manufactured by the device manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WIRING DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Each outlet, device or piece of equipment of every kind shall be located approximately as called for
and as directed. Outlet locations shall be checked for interference with all plumbing, heating,
ventilating, other work and with Architectural Drawings. Outlets must be located in harmony with
architectural design of ceilings, wall sand floors. Switches shall be located on latch side (jamb) of
door. Receptacles must be located to avoid interference with all other equipment provided under all
other divisions.
B. Any outlet and/or device, which does not conform to the above, shall be relocated by the Electrical
Contractor at no increase in Contract price.
C. Unless otherwise noted or directed, switches, receptacles, devices etc., shall be carefully recessed
with boxes and plates properly arranged to cover all cracks or spaces between box and wall finish.
D. All outlets 18" above floor shall be mounted horizontally. All outlets mounted 44" and higher shall be
mounted vertically. All receptacles above counter-top height shall be mounted horizontally and
switches above counter-top height shall be mounted vertically.
E. Switches shall be installed 44” to centerline of switch plate.

END OF SECTION

260534-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260943 – NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. This section supersedes Section 230900 – INSTRUMENTATON AND CONTROL FOR HVAC.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 230013 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
B. 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
C. 236400 – CONDENSING UNITS
D. 237436 – ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
E. 238126 – SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
1.3 SUMMARY
A. The control system specified in this section shall provide controls based on time, location, sensor data
(both occupancy, daylighting and other environmental information), and manual interaction.
B. The system shall be capable of advanced lighting control (on/off and dimming).
C. The system shall be capable of managing packaged HVAC units capable of utilizing certified ZigBee
interoperable thermostats.
D. The system shall be capable of advanced plug load control.
E. The system shall enable the monitoring and recording of sensor information and power measurement.
F. All system devices shall be networked together.
G. Control communications between devices shall be primarily achieved wirelessly.
H. The system shall be capable of being managed and controlled remotely via a standard Web browser.
I. The system shall be capable of creating and adjusting control zones, as granular as a single luminaire
and as broad as a full facility.
J. The system shall not require any installation of dedicated control wiring to a central controller or panel.
K. The system shall utilize open, standardized communications between devices, and allow control
devices from multiple vendors to interoperate.
L. The system shall be capable of managing automated demand response connection and action using
industry standard Open ADR elements.
1.4 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment, including incidental items required for work of this
Section as shown on the drawings, specified herein, and as required for a complete and proper
installation.
B. Provider to furnish and install, a web-enabled HVAC, lighting, and landscape irrigation control and
monitoring system to perform the following functions:
1. Monitor all parameters necessary to provide feedback to all control, alarm and reporting functions
described below.
2. Control DX type HVAC systems and lighting circuits to conserve energy while maintaining
required space temperature and illumination levels as described below.
3. Provide 24/7/365 remote monitoring, alarming, interpretation, reporting and dispatching services
for all systems monitored and/or controlled.
4. Other specific functions as defined elsewhere in the specification or the drawings.

260943-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260943 – NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)

C. The system as a whole shall be installed, programmed, tested, and warranted under a single contract
with the installer.
D. The installer shall coordinate with the system vendor to connect and hand-over control to the Owner’s
web-based control software.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturing facility must meet ISO9001 requirements.
B. All applicable products must be UL / CSA / FCC Listed or other acceptable testing organization.
C. Comply with NFPA 90A.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Where fire alarm systems are required, coordinate equipment selection with the fire alarm system
vendor and installer to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.
F.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. All devices in networked control system including the Area Controller shall have a 5 year warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The devices in the solution shall utilize certified standards-compliant ZigBee® architecture and 100%
standard communication clusters. No proprietary clusters or architecture will be accepted.
2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. System shall utilize a large-scale wireless mesh network using the open ZigBee® industry standard
for wireless communications to communicate between all controls devices throughout the building. All
components shall utilize that standard (as written) for communications.
B. System shall be capable of using a variety of standards-based control devices from multiple vendors.
These devices shall include occupancy sensors, environmental sensors, photocell sensors, manual
switches/dimmers, ballasts, LED drivers, embedded luminaires, thermostats, plug load controllers,
personal handheld devices and others. Any combination of the above devices shall be possible, and
all devices within the site shall be networked and accessible via a single interface.
C. System shall be capable of controlling most standard fluorescent and LED luminaires, both separately
and together as part of a single system.
D. All system settings, controls settings, status monitoring and zone strategies shall be manageable from
a standard Web-based software interface. This interface shall be accessible from any remote location
with network access.
E. Control areas shall consist of one or more intelligent control components, be capable of operation
within the area, and be capable of being connected to a higher level network backbone. System shall
be capable of creating and reconfiguring multiple zones within each area, or adding new devices to an
existing zone, all from the software interface and without wiring.
F. System shall be able to accommodate up to 100 devices for each area, without requiring a “bridge”
device. Multiple such areas can be integrated via a higher level network backbone to build out a larger
system.
G. Devices within a control area can be installed in any order and can be flexibly assigned to zones in
any combination as needed.
H. Control areas must continue to provide control in the event of a system communication failure with the
backbone network or the management software becoming unavailable.

260943-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260943 – NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)

I. System shall have a controller (the Area Controller) that manages the operation of each control area.
This controller must be wall or ceiling mounted, capable of accessing and controlling wirelessly
connected system devices and linking into an Ethernet network.
J. System shall provide an energy management dashboard that displays real-time and historical energy
usage data by zone.
K. System shall be capable of operating each lighting control zone according to one of the following
control strategies. The control strategies should be utilized only in a manner consistent with local
energy codes.
1. Auto-On / Auto-Off with
a. Centrally adjustable off-delay
b. Configurable on and off dimming levels and transition times for zones that have dimmable
luminaires, enabling task tuning
c. Manual override timeout
2. Manual-On / Auto-Off with
a. Centrally adjustable off-delay
3. Scheduled On with
a. Configurable dimming level and transition times for zones that have dimmable luminaires,
enabling task tuning
4. Scheduled Off
5. Auto-to-Override On
6. Manual-to-Timed On

L. Daylighting shall be configurable centrally. It shall be possible to enable or disable daylighting for
zones with a photocell sensor, calibrate and configure the setpoint from a central location.
M. It shall be possible to vary control strategies at different times of the day and to do so for each zone.
N. Control profiles shall be available optionally to allow many zones to be configured to use the same
control profile. This will allow rapid adjustments to the control strategy used for each zone. Control
profiles shall allow specification of the control strategy, and control settings for each control strategy
(such as the off-delay for an Auto-On strategy).
O. Personal control shall be available through a web-based user interface, allowing configuration from
any computer and operating system.
P. Control software shall enable logging of power consumption, zone and space utilization (occupancy),
System shall display system performance data in a web-based graphical format, and make such data
available for download to .CSV, .PDF, .PNG and .SVG files.
Q. Control software shall enable integration with a BMS via BACnet IP.
R. System shall monitor the health and state of control devices, and provide the means to display this
information, generate reports on space utilization and provide the means to notify select individuals,
either through a web interface, or via emails, of important issues.
S. System shall have a mechanism to restrict access by individual users or groups of users, by zones or
by feature groups through the web user interface.
T. System shall have a backup and restore mechanism to deal with controller and system-level
component failure. This mechanism shall ensure that the system can be returned to the original state
at the time of backup.
U. System shall have an upgrade mechanism to ensure that controllers and system-level components
can be upgraded. For control devices that support over-the-air wireless upgrade, the system shall
provide a mechanism to upgrade the firmware of these devices.
V. System shall be capable of managing control devices across multiple facilities and be approved to
operate on the State of Tennessee IT network.
W. System shall be capable of interfacing with MODBUS power meters, having a minimum capacity of 3
phases and an option for 24 phases per meter, to be used in conjunction with current transformers for
monitoring of any load up to 5000 Amps.

260943-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260943 – NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)

X. System shall be capable of reading and recording pulse meter output from certified interoperable
pulse devices.
2.3 NETWORK DEVICE SPECIFICATIONS
A. Area Controller (Gateway)
1. Device shall be capable of connecting to control devices via the open ZigBee industry standard
for wireless communication.
2. Device shall be powered by a standard 120V receptacle to enable flexible placement in normal
spaces and optional power over Ethernet.
3. Device shall have two RJ-45 ports to enable daisy chaining of device to other area controller
devices further upstream or downstream.
4. Device shall have USB ports for PC-based and USB memory stick configuration and
maintenance.
5. Device shall be capable of being a DHCP client or be set to a fixed IP address.
6. The Device shall be capable of receiving automatic time updates from an internet NTP server if
connected
7. Device shall be capable of managing up to 100 wireless devices and presenting them to the
management software. Multiple such devices can be used to support a larger system.
8. Device shall have visual feedback (eg., LEDs) to enable rapid identification of the device’s state
and health.
2.4 WIRELESS DEVICE SPECIFICATIONS
A. All Wireless Devices
1. All wireless device parameters shall be adjustable via software.
2. Devices shall be capable of communicating via an open ZigBee industry standard for its wireless
communications.
3. It shall be possible to monitor battery powered devices from the control and monitoring software.
Battery powered devices shall last 5 years under normal operating conditions.
B. Wireless Adapter
1. Wireless adapter shall be designed to easily connect to standard junction boxes with ¾ ”
knockouts
2. Device shall be powered by 120-277VAC, be capable of switching 120-277VAC with loads rated
to 15A and be able to measure current flow of connected loads with 2% accuracy from 30ma to
15A.
3. Device shall have 0-10VDC to control dimmable ballasts and LED drivers, with a maximum
sourcing of 5mA, typically enabling control of 10 or more ballasts or drivers.
4. Device shall have 24VDC (input/output) and 0-10VDC (input) to power and control auxiliary
relays, occupancy sensors, photocells but not limited to other low voltage devices.
C. Wireless Fixture Adapter
1. Wireless fixture adapter shall be designed to easily integrate into commonly available lighting
fixtures for installation at the manufacturer or on site
2. Device shall be powered by 120-277VAC and be capable of switching 120-277VAC with loads
rated to 2A
3. Device shall have 0-10VDC to control dimmable ballasts and LED drivers, with a maximum
sourcing of 5mA, typically enabling control of a single ballast or driver
4. Device shall have 24VDC (input/output) and 0-10VDC (input) to power and control auxiliary
relays, occupancy sensors, photocells but not limited to other low voltage devices.
D. Wireless General Purpose Adapter
1. Wireless general purpose adapter shall be designed to easily connect to standard junction boxes
with ½” knockouts for connecting to non-lighting loads.
2. Device shall be powered by 120-277VAC and be capable of switching 120-277VAC with loads
rated to 15A.
3. Device shall have a 0-10Vdc output to control general purpose actuators with a maximum sinking
of 5mA
4. Devices shall have 24VDC (input/output) and 0-10VDC (input) to power and control low voltage
devices including binary and analog sensors

260943-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260943 – NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)

E. Wireless Sensor Adapter

1. Device shall be powered by 24V AC/DC
2. Device shall provide (4) 10k Type 3 thermistor inputs and (2) 0-10Vdc inputs from analogue
sensors
3. Device shall have an internal battery backup and data storage to allow logging of thermistor data
for 14 days at 5 minute intervals
F. Wireless Occupancy Sensors
1. The device shall use Passive Infra-Red (PIR) sensors to detect motion. Wall mount and ceiling
mount with different range and lens angles must be available.
2. The device shall be configurable as an occupancy or vacancy sensor via software.
G. Wireless Photo Sensor
1. The device shall measure light levels from 1 to 2000 lux (0.1 to 185 FC) in a 60° cone.
H. Wireless Wall Dimmer/Switch
1. Device shall provide dimming and switching depending on configuration.
2. Device shall wall mount and be compatible with standard switch box mounting.
I. Wireless Plug Load Adapter
1. Wireless adapter shall be designed to easily mount to standard NEMA duplex receptacles via 3
tamper proof mounting screws using existing wall outlet cover plate holes.
2. Device shall be powered by 106-127VAC and be capable of switching loads up to 15A
3. Device shall be able to switch either receptacle independently and measure power consumption
of connected loads.
4. The device shall automatically turn off empty sockets to prevent shock
J. Wireless Thermostat
1. Device shall be compatible with the following systems:
a. 1 Stage Heat / 1 Stage Cool Conventional System
b. 2 Stage Heat / 2 Stage Cool Conventional System
c. 3 Stage Heat / 2 Stage Cool Conventional System
d. 1 Stage Heat / 1 Stage Cool Heat Pump System (without Auxiliary Heating)
e. 2 Stage Heat / 1 Stage Cool Heat Pump System (with Auxiliary Heating)
f. 2 Stage Heat / 2 Stage Cool Heat Pump System (without Auxiliary Heating)
g. 3 Stage Heat / 2 Stage Cool Heat Pump System (with Auxiliary Heating)
2. Device shall be surfaced mounted with manual user display and interface
3. Device shall conform with ZigBee standard as defined above.
4. Device shall interoperate with compatible system devices.
2.5 MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
A. Software interface shall be made available to networked computing devices via standard Web
browser, without requiring local installation on computers or other access devices.
B. Software shall have online help that explains the use and operation.
C. Software shall be able to connect with the system under management via LAN (local area network),
WAN (wide area network) or the Internet.
D. Software shall require that all users login with a User Name and Password and shall also support a
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) client to authenticate users against a LDAP directory.
E. Software shall provide at least four permission levels including System Administrator, Facility
Administrator, Tenant and Individual User. Access to different parts of the application will be
appropriately limited on the basis of permission levels.
F. Software shall provide individual or group access to specific zones or collections of zones to allow
flexible restriction of access.
G. Software shall have means to enable backup and restore of all essential system state data that is
required to recover from hardware failure in controllers.
H. Software shall provide the means to commission devices, networks, zones and facilities including
defining facilities, defining the network settings (eg. channel mask, network ID), adding new devices to

260943-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260943 – NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)

the system, creating zones, creating hierarchical zone structures and assigning devices to zones,
labeling devices, networks, zones and facilities.
I. Software shall provide the flexibility to add or remove devices from zones to adjust the operational
control behavior of a zone. For example adding an occupancy sensor or switch to a parent zone
allows occupancy or manual control to be applied to all fixtures in all child (and descendent) zones.
J. Software shall provide the means to commission controls including defining control profiles
(commonly used control strategies and settings), control strategies (eg. OFF, ON, Auto ON/Auto OFF,
Manual ON/Auto OFF, Timed ON, Auto OFF), and control settings (eg. sensor off-delay, dimming
level percentage etc.).
K. Software shall provide the means to commission controls on a schedule including varying control
profiles or strategies with control settings at different times of the day for each day. This can be done
for each zone independently or for groups of zones. Calendar settings shall include start and end
day/hour/minute.
L. Daylight savings time adjustments shall be performance automatically.
M. Software shall provide an easy-to-use view of all scheduled settings across all zones.
N. Software shall provide the means to commission daylighting set points (including daytime and night
time set points) and to schedule daylight calibration to automatically at night.
O. All control settings shall be stored on the area controller and the host server.
P. Changes made to the operation of the system shall be done in real-time as they are applied in the
software.
Q. Software shall allow the luminaire ballast profile to be defined for each ballast model used in a facility.
This ballast profile will be used to determine energy consumption at different dimming levels for
greater energy consumption calculation accuracy.
R. Software shall show cost savings, energy savings and CO2 emissions reduced, in comparison with
baseline data. Baseline data shall be calculated based on opening/closing times and luminaire power
consumption prior to a controls upgrade.
S. Software shall provide inputs for variable energy rates including at least four time of day rates as well
as winter and summer rates for calculation of baseline and current energy use.
T. Software shall show a dashboard summarizing the state and health of the system, utilization of the
lights, the current state of demand-response, and the facility and user-selectable zone energy usage
on a daily, weekly, monthly or annual basis. The data shall be presented graphically on screen and
available for print or export to .CSV, .PDF, .PNG and .SVG formats.
U. Software shall show a list of all zones, their location within the facility, any active alarms associated
with each zone, their active control profile or control strategy, the state of the zone (eg.,
occupied/vacant, dim level) and the devices within the zone.
V. Software shall allow manual operations of each zone including on/off and dimming control or device
identification (blink identification).
W. Software shall provide a floor plan view allowing floor pans to be uploaded as .JPEG, .PNG, .BMP or
.GIF formats. Zones can be placed on floor plan to show the current state including the current
dimming light level and occupancy state, the control setting and strategy and the current energy
consumption. Multiple floor plans can be uploaded per facility.
X. Energy comparison, usage, savings, zone utilization and facility utilization reports shall be available
displayed on a user friendly graphical display, exportable to .CSV and printable.
Y. Reports shall be available per zone, per facility and custom user specified.
Z. Reports shall have user-definable timescale and timeframe (hourly, daily, monthly, and annually).
AA. Energy comparison, usage and savings reports shall be available in kWh, $, CO2 emissions and
percentages.
BB. Energy and zone usage reports shall be available with minimum, average and maximum values.

260943-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260943 – NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)

CC. Zone utilization reports shall be made available for minutes occupied, average zone light level and
manual overrides. Facility utilizations shall be made available for minutes occupied, percent
occupancy and load utilization as a percentage.
DD. Software shall show, for all devices: device ID, model, location, wattage, last alarm associated with
the device, zone membership, area controller associated with the device and the last event (with time
of occurrence) associated with the device (eg., switched on/off, occupied/vacant, light level detected,
depending on device type). The list of information provided shall be user customizable.
EE. Software shall allow on/off flash device identification.
FF. Software shall provide all events and alarms for devices, facilities, schedules, area controllers and
zones providing information on the state and any alterations made within the system.
GG. Software shall allow events and alarms to be filtered by severity and sorted by timeframe, type,
category, classification, area controller, zone or device.
HH. Software shall allow notification of events and alarms to be presented through the web user interface
or via email notification. Software shall provide the means to configure the mail server settings, and to
create rules (eg. send emails whenever an event occurs or configuration change).
II. Software shall allow interfacing of controls with demand-response programs, and in particular, use the
OpenADR v1.0 and 2.0 protocol.
JJ. Software shall allow specification of control strategy for the three demand-response severity levels
(moderate, high and very high). Control strategies can be changed to turn lights off, to reduce the
current light level by a specified dimming level percentage (with an optional minimum level
requirement for safety), or to set the light level to a specified dimming level percentage. The off-delay
can also be adjusted as part of the response to the demand-response severity level.
KK. Software shall allow the adjustment of the control strategy and control setting for any zone
independently, or multiple zones or all zones collectively.
2.6 BMS COMPATIBILITY
A. System shall incorporate a RESTful API as an optional feature capable of live data interface with
other systems.
B. System API will utilize the Project Haystack data mapping standard to identify points of information.
2.7 MONITORING – STATUS, CONDITION AND VALUE
A. The following points will be monitored or calculated from monitored points:

Supply Temperature Limit Control Status Cool Recovery Time, Stage 1

Return / Space Temperature Limit Cycle Period Cool Recovery Time, Stage 2
Ambient Temperature Limit Off Period Heat Recovery Time, Stage 1
Space Relative Humidity Temperature In Celsius Heat Recovery Time, Stage 2
Compressor Suction Avg. Daily Compressor Cooling Kw,
Temperature, Stage 1 & 2 Setback Control Status Stage 1
Outdoor Coil Liquid Temperature, Avg. Daily Compressor Cooling Kw,
Stage 1 & 2 Cool/Heat Call Status Stage 2
Avg. Daily Compressor Heating kW,
Indoor fan current - A phase HVAC Unit Short Cycling Stage 1
Avg. Daily Compressor Amps, Stage 1
Indoor fan current - B phase Hourly Return Air Temp - A Phase
Avg. Daily Compressor Amps, Stage 1
Indoor fan current - C phase Hourly Ambient Air Temp - B Phase
Hourly Space Relative Avg. Daily Compressor Amps, Stage 1
Compressor Current - A phase
Humidity - C Phase
Hourly Supply Air Avg. Daily Compressor Amps, Stage 2
Compressor Current - B phase
Temperature - A Phase
Avg. Daily Compressor Amps, Stage 2
Compressor Current - C phase Day of Week
- B Phase

260943-7 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260943 – NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)

Avg. Daily Compressor Amps, Stage 2

System Voltage - A phase Setback Override Time
- C Phase
System Voltage - B phase Space Temperature Avg. Daily ID Fan Amps, A Phase
System Voltage - C phase Indoor Fan Power Avg. Daily ID Fan Amps, B Phase
15 Min Indoor Fan Amps Setback Override Enable Avg. Daily ID Fan Amps, C Phase
15 Min Compressor Amps 7-Day Setback Temperatures Hourly Total kWh
15 Min Indoor Fan KW Hourly Heating Runtime Daily Total Cooling Runtime, Stage 1
15 Min Compressor KW, Cooling HVAC Call Reset Daily Total Cooling Runtime, Stage 2
Indoor Fan KWh Unit Cycles, Stage 1 Daily total Heating Runtime, Stage 1
Compressor KWh Expected Indoor Fan Power Daily total Heating Runtime, Stage 2
Temperature Limiting Average Daily Compressor Suction
Indoor Fan Run Time Deadband Temperature
Lighting Relay State Average Daily Compressor Discharge
Compressor Run Time, Cooling Notification Temperature
Expected Cooling Split, Stage
Micro State Daily ID Fan Runtime in Setback
1
Expected Heating Split, Stage Daily Cooling Runtime, Stage 1 in
Test Mode Status
1 Setback
Low Ambient Compressor Daily Cooling Runtime, Stage 2 in
Test ER Status
Lockout Enable Setback
Expected Heating Split, Stage Daily Heating Compressor Runtime,
Test Runtime 2 Stage 1 in Setback
Daily Heating Compressor Runtime,
Cooling Call Time, Stage 1 Heating Run Time Stage 2 in Setback
Daily Heating Gas Valve Runtime,
Cooling Call Time, Stage 2 Indoor Fan KWh, Heating Stage 1 in Setback
Daily Heating Gas Valve Runtime,
HP Defrost Time Indoor Fan KWh, Cooling Stage 2 in Setback
ER Status Compressor KWh, Heating Daily ID Fan kWh in Setback
Daily Compressor Cooling kWh in
Heating Call Time, Stage 1 Setback Override
Setback
Daily Compressor Heating kWh in
Heating Call Time, Stage 2 Setback Settings
Setback
Circuit Relay Operation Daily Avg. Ambient Temperature in
(Normal/Pulse) Daily KWh, Override Setback
Daily Avg. Ambient Temperature
Cooling Recovery Time, Stage 1 Daily Gas Run Time, Override Outside Setback
Low Heating Split Temp Alarm, Daily Avg. Space Return Temperature
Cooling Recovery Time, Stage 2 Stage 2 in Setback
Low Compressor Suction Daily Avg. Space Return Temperature
Heating Recovery Time, Stage 1 Alarm Compressor Off Time Outside Setback
Low Compressor Suction HVAC Loss of AC Power Alarm
Heating Recovery Time, Stage 2
Alarm Enable Trigger Period
HVAC Loss of AC Power Alarm
Heater Type Board Power Up
Enable
Avg. Daily Cooling Split, Stage
Humidity Check Status HVAC Loss of AC Power Alarm
1
Avg. Daily Cooling Split, Stage
Temperature Limiting Status 7 day Setback Schedule
2
Avg. Daily Heating Split, Stage
Heat Max Temp
1
Cool Min Temp

260943-8 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260943 – NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)

2.8 MONITORING – ALARM CONDITION.

A. At a minimum, the following points will be alarmed (alarm parameters to be adjustable to be
customized for client’s needs):

Alarm Description Unit Alarm Purpose & Example

Air Filter Condition Percent To optimize filter changes based on avg volt X amp
draw at blower motor, e.g. at 60% of filter capacity;
saves energy and filter costs
Low Cooling Temp, Stage 1, & Deg F To indicate inefficient cooling based on temp
Stages 1 & 2 difference between return and supply air, compared to
baseline avg daily delta T
Low Heating Temp Deg F To indicate inefficient heating based on temp
difference between return and supply air, compared to
baseline avg daily delta T
Equipment Lockout Heat/Cool Unit not responding to call for heat or cooling from
T’stat
System Short Cycling Cycles/period If cycles/period exceeds set point; indicates inefficient
cooling
Indoor Fan Inoperative On/Off Fan not operating on call for heat or cool or start/stop
schedule, based on amps measured at indoor fan
motor
Low Compressor Suction Deg F When thermistor on the compressor refrigerant suction
Temperature line measures 30oF or less; indicates compressor
malfunction
Space Temperature Deg F When space temp strays beyond setting and dead
band for occupied and unoccupied modes, indicating
loss of control; saves energy
Space Relative Humidity Percent When the return air relative humidity approaches 60%
, the system disables the recovery cycle to allow the
HVAC unit to keep cooling to reduce high humidity
levels in the space.

2.9 CONTROL OF HVAC EQUIPMENT

A. The System shall track system component operational data and, using a wireless communication
protocol, transmit the data to a dedicated remote server. The acquired data will be reformatted for
Web access on a website with a dedicated address for the client’s sites, and a dedicated points list for
each DX unit at each site. For HVAC control, the System will be installed between the native
thermostat and the corresponding HVAC unit, and will filter the existing thermostat heating and
cooling calls. This filter will provide three methods of improved energy performance:
1. Temperature Limiting: Utilizing 0.5 degree sensitive thermistors, the System will enable precise
setting of both lower cooling limits and upper heating limits.
2. System Setback: The System will enable HVAC unit run times. Set back operation schedules will
be maintained and verified by Web accessible inputs.
3. Refrigeration Cycle Optimization: The System software will anticipate the rate at which space
conditions are satisfied, ensuring optimal thermodynamic efficiency of the HVAC unit’s refrigerant
cycle.
B. In addition, System shall be capable of performing duty cycling of direct expansion (DX) compressors
remotely.
2.10 CONTROL OF LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
A. The System shall be connected to lighting panel contactors and deployed to maintaining a verifiable
lighting operating schedule. A minimum of four (4) lighting circuits shall be controllable by a single
controlling unit, and shall have two spare points to capture site kWh consumption at the utility service.
B. The lighting control must be compatible with both momentary and maintained relay output contacts for
integration of control with pulse operated and maintained lighting contactor panels.

260943-9 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 260943 – NETWORK BUILDING CONTROL AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)

C. The controller must provide local override control of the lighting schedules to allow the occupants to
turn the lights on for a predetermined duration during scheduled off time periods.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Wireless devices will not require any wiring between them (although some may require local wiring).
B. Area controllers shall be networked via standard Ethernet (LAN or WAN) for commissioning.
C. All wireless devices shall attempt to join control network when initially powered.
D. Once the software is installed the system shall allow all wireless devices to join the system and auto-
discover all devices without requiring commissioning.
E. Once devices are associated to zones and zones to area controllers the software shall automatically
determine and adjust membership of wireless devices to area controllers (or wireless networks)
without requiring commissioning.
F. All system devices shall be capable of being given user-defined names and assigned to any zone
within the system.
G. Upgrade via software shall be supported for control devices that support over the air updates.
H. All control devices shall have LEDs providing device status including normal operation and improperly
configured.
I. All control devices shall have means to restore to factory-defaults.
J. Wireless adapters shall have self-test mode for verification of correct wiring to wired devices, including
occupancy sensors photocells, ballasts and drivers.
3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTIONS
A. Provide and install HVAC control wiring in accordance with Section 260519 – Low Voltage
Conductors and Cables.
B. Install all HVAC control wiring within a complete grounded conduit system according Sections 260526
– Grounding for Electrical Systems, 260531 – Conduits, 260532 – Boxes For Electrical Systems, and
260533 – Pull and Junction Boxes.

END OF SECTION

260943-10 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 262001 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract for construction, A.I.A. A201, Latest Edition, and the
Supplementary General Conditions are a part of the Contract for this work. Contractor shall consult
them and the General Requirements, Division 1, for instructions pertaining to work under this Section.
All notes on the Drawings applying to this work are also a part of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work under this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all labor, equipment,
material and performing all operations for the connection and installation of all distribution systems as
shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings for all distribution equipment shall be submitted for approval.
B. Shop Drawing shall include the following:
1. Panelboards.
2. Dimensions.
3. Material and construction.
4. Contactors and relays.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall be dead front, dead rear flush-mounted or surface-mounted as noted on the
drawings with main circuit breaker, main lugs and branch circuit breakers as shown on panel
schedule, hinged, lockable doors, typewritten index card-holders, proper bussing and main lugs,
double lugs or main breakers as required. Lugs shall be sized for feeders.
B. Busses shall be copper, full panel height, and shall be rigidly supported with bus supports and all
phase busses shall be identified. Solderless, silver-plated lugs shall be provided for all required cable
connections. Minimum bus rating shall be as large as the setting of the feeder protective devices.
Incoming service panelboard shall be service entrance labeled and braced for a minimum interrupting
capacity of 42,000 amps RMS. Actual available short-circuit current to be coordinated with utility
company and adjusted accordingly.
C. Provide oversize gutters for feed-through, where indicated or required. Where double lugs are not
permitted by local code, provide suitable pull box or gutter adjacent to panels for connections.
D. All panelboards shall have flush catch and corbin lock and shall be keyed to operate from one key.
E. Panelboard trim and door shall be finished shop prime where exposed to public view (e.g., corridors,
offices, etc.) and hammertone gray in equipment rooms.
F. Panelboards (other than the service entrance panelboard) shall incorporate circuit breakers with a
minimum interrupting rating of 10,000 AMP RMS.
G. Lighting Panel. Shall have galvanized cabinets with a minimum width of 20". Rating shall be of the
voltage, phase and number of wires as indicated on schedules and panel shall have a solid neutral
bar.
H. Circuit Breakers. Shall be automatic, molded case, trip-free, quick-make, quick-break, thermal-
magnetic type, bolted to the bus, with handles clearly indicating tripped position. Breaker handles
shall indicate size. Breakers shall be of size and arrangements as shown on schedules. Multiple
breakers shall have common internal trip. Breakers shall be sequenced phased with odd numbers on
the left and even numbers on the right.

262001-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 262001 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

I. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by Cutler Hammer, GE, ITE, Square D, or Westinghouse.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used)

END OF SECTION

262001-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 262419 – MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for products specified in this Section. Include dimensions, ratings, and data on
features and components. Include standard wiring diagrams.
B. Submit certified reports of field tests and observations.
C. Submit maintenance data for products for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in
Division 1 and in Division 26 Section "General Provisions."
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Motor controllers shall bear the label of the Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc., and shall be sized in
accordance with the N.E.C.
1.3 COMPLIANCE
A. Components and Installation: NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in the National Electrical Code,
Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"
(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
C. NEMA Compliance: NEMA ICS 2, "Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies."
D. UL Compliance: UL 508, "Electric Industrial Control Equipment."
E. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain similar motor-control devices from a single manufacturer.
F. Coordinate features of controllers and control devices with pilot devices and control circuits provided
under Division 230900 Sections covering control systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Cutler-Hammer.
2. General Electric Co.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D Co.
2.2 MOTOR CONTROLLER FEATURES
A. Provide controllers consistent with the ratings and characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the
required control sequence, the duty cycle of the motor, drive, and load, and the pilot device, and
control circuit affecting controller functions. Controllers shall be horsepower rated to suit the motor
controlled.
1. Contacts shall open each ungrounded connection to the motor.
2. Overload Relays: Ambient compensated type with inverse time-current characteristic, with
heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of the specific motor to
which connected, with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
3. Enclosures for Individually Mounted Motor Controllers and Control Devices: Suitable for the
environmental conditions at the controller location. Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosures except as
otherwise indicated and/or required.
B. Manual Motor Controllers: Quick-make, quick-break toggle action.

262419-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 262419 – MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Manual Controllers: Use for single-phase motors except as indicated. Use for manually controlled
three-phase motors up to 5-horsepower at 208-240 V a.c. and up to 7-1/2 horsepower at 480 V.
B. Install independently mounted motor control devices in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Location: Locate controllers as indicated and within sight of motors controlled.
D. Identify motor control components and control wiring in accordance with recognized industry
standards.
E. Install control wiring between motor control devices.
3.2 TESTING AND FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Conform to the following:
1. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least one week's
advance notification.
2. Make continuity tests of circuits.
3. Inspect for defects and physical damage, NRTL labeling, and nameplate compliance with current
project drawings.
4. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Correct deficiencies and retest motor control devices.
C. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to
match original finish. Clean devices internally using methods and materials as recommended by
manufacturer.
3.3 TRAINING
A. Conduct a minimum of 4 hours of training in operation and maintenance as specified under
"Instructions to Owner's Employees" in Division 017000 Section "Project Closeout." Include training
relating to equipment operation and maintenance procedures.

END OF SECTION

262419-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Submit product data according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for components and installation.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"
(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Cartridge Fuses: NEMA FU 1 nonrenewable cartridge fuse, class as specified or indicated, current
rating as indicated, voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.
1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 time delay.
2. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK5 non-time delay.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices as required. Arrange fuses so that fuse ratings are readable without
removing fuse.
B. Install typewritten labels on the inside door of each fused switch to indicate fuse replacement
information.

END OF SECTION

262813-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 262819 - DISCONNECTS (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT)

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, A.I.A. A201, Latest Edition, and the
Supplementary General conditions are a part of the Contract for this work. Contractor shall consult
them and the General Requirements, Division 1, for instructions pertaining to work under this Section.
All notes on the Drawings applying to this work are also a part of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide disconnect switches for motors or circuits where indicated on the Drawings, specified herein
and as required for a complete and proper installation.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Related work not covered by this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: See
Section 260500 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Disconnect switches shall bear the label of the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., and shall be sized in
accordance with the N.E.C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Disconnect switches shall be:
1. Heavy duty, quick-make and quick load break.
2. Switches shall have NEMA Type 1 enclosures except in areas where environmental conditions
are not suitable in which case suitable enclosures of the NEMA type required shall be installed.
3. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the
handle is in the "On Position".
4. Lock-open padlock provisions and indication of on/off positions on the door.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Disconnect switches shall be Cutler-Hammer, G.E., Siemens, Square D or Westinghouse.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used)

END OF SECTION

262819-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 265000 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, A.I.A. A201, Latest Edition, and the
Supplementary General Conditions are a part of the Contract for this work. Contractor shall consult
them and the General Requirements, Division 1, for instructions pertaining to work under this section.
All notes on the drawings applying to this work are also a part of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnishing and installing lighting fixtures, with lamps, trims, extension trims, collars, hangers, supports
and controls as required for a complete and proper installation.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Room Finish Schedules and Architectural and
Structural details to determine conditions and finishes affecting the installation of this work; and he
shall include all items of labor and materials necessary or required for adjustment of fixtures due to
surrounding finished construction.
C. All lighting fixtures shall be ordered and installed based on both the "Lighting Fixture Schedule" and
the electrical drawings and the architect's "Reflected Ceiling Plan". See Reflected Ceiling Plan for
location, type and thickness of ceiling material.
D. Contractor to coordinate for proper application of IC rated and non-IC rated recessed fixtures for each
area prior to ordering fixtures.
E. Contractor to provide appropriate enclosure around fixtures when required to comply with local and/or
national code requirements.
F. Contractor to provide appropriate ceiling thickness and adaptors as required for proper installation of
recessed light fixtures and trim.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Related work not covered by this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, all sections
260013 through 262819.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for all lighting fixtures and controls shall be submitted for approval. Comply with
pertinent provisions of Division 1.
B. Shop drawings shall include the following data:
1. Catalog data: Manufacturer's literature and illustrations.
2. Dimensions.
3. Materials and construction.
4. Ballast data.
5. Lamp data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lighting fixtures are identified on the Drawings by type letters adjacent to the symbol on the Plan, or
by area location on the Fixture - Schedule. Fixtures are identified in the foregoing and Designated by
manufacturer's number on the Fixture Schedule and Drawings. Color and finishes to be as specified
in the Fixture Schedule.
B. All fixtures shall comply with the rules and regulations of the National Electrical Code. Any material
required in connection with the installation of all fixtures in a rigid and efficient manner shall be
furnished and installed whether or not same is specifically mentioned herein. Wiring for final
connection shall be minimum #14 solid type THHN wire. All fixtures shall bear Underwriters'
Laboratories labels.

265000-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 265000 - LIGHTING

C. All fluorescent fixtures shall be provided with electronic ballasts of proper wattage, and voltage rating,
high power factor Type "A" sound rating and ETl/CBM approval. Ballast to incorporate all Type "P",
internal protection. All 32 Watt R.S. ballasts shall be as manufactured by G.E., Advance or Universal.
D. Lamps: All lamps shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor, unless otherwise indicated in the
Light Fixture Schedule in the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Fixture Types: The Contractor shall furnish the various types of fixtures as indicated in the Fixture
Schedule on the Drawings. See Fixture Schedule for fixtures furnished by this contractor. All fixtures
shall be located to suit the Architectural details of the areas involved.
B. Recessed Fixture Installation: Recessed fixtures shall be of type suitable for mounting in the type of
ceiling as scheduled on the Drawings. Variations to catalog numbers indicated shall be made to
assure proper mounting and fitting arrangements, prior to fabrication.
C. Supports:
1. Each lighting fixture shall be rigidly supported from the building construction, and the Electrical
Contractor shall be responsible for providing suspension hangers, stems and extra steel work for
fixture support where required.
2. Electrical Contractor shall confer with Ceiling Contractor to determine modifications required to
make fixtures suitable for ceiling as installed.
3. Where recessed fixtures are called for, each shall be provided with the proper plaster frame or
suitable adapter to receive the finished ceiling construction.
4. Where suspended acoustical tile ceilings on steel channels occur, outlets and fixtures shall be
supported on members resting on the channel framework. In no case shall fixtures be supported
from plaster or acoustic material.
5. Suspended fixtures shall be hung on suspension hangers furnished by the fixture manufacturer
and shall be adjusted as necessary during installation to insure that all fixtures in the same room
or area are at uniform height from the floor. Mounting height shall be as specified, detailed or
noted on the Drawings. Any electrical lighting fixture that weighs more than 50 lbs shall be
supported independently of the outlet box.
D. Fixture Wiring:
1. Fixtures shall be wired with white wire for the neutral and color wire for phase wires; See Section
260519 (Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.)
2. Housing of all fixtures must be grounded to conduit system.
3. BMS System wireless control adapters shall be installed mounted directly to individual fixtures,
mounted to a junction box ahead of a parallel-wired group of fixtures, or at a fixture circuit
contactor or relay, as indicated in the drawings.
4. Each fixture to be complete with holders, screws, sockets, wires, lamps, etc., as is necessary for
a complete installation.
5. Fluorescent lighting shall be wired as circuited on the Plan Drawings.
E. Operation and Controls:
1. Local switches as shown and wired.
2. Wireless controls and adapters as indicated on the drawings.
3. Panel switched lighting as indicated on Drawings.
4. Emergency lighting for egress purposes shall be provided.
5. Momentary contact switches as indicated on the drawings.
6. Exit and directional signs shall be provided. Provide battery operated exit and directional signs
where shown.
7. Provide emergency and exit lighting systems as required to conform to Code. Emergency and
exit lighting shall be provided on separate circuits where required.

END OF SECTION

265000-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 270500 – QUALITY ASSURNCE FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This specification provides the requirements for all structured cabling installation contractors.

1.2 INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR REQUIRMENTS

A. Certifications/Training
1. The Contractor must have five years minimum experience in structured cabling
installations.
2. The contractor shall be a CommScope SYSTIMAX certified contractor in order to provide a
minimum twenty (20) year extended Product and Applications Assurance warranty on parts
and labor associated with the UTP cabling infrastructure.
3. The contractor shall be a Berk-Tek/Leviton certified contractor in order to provide a
minimum twenty (20) year extended Product and Applications Assurance warranty on parts
and labor associated with the F/UTP cabling infrastructure.
4. The contractor shall be a Corning certified contractor in order to provide a minimum twenty
(20) year extended Product and Applications Assurance warranty on parts and labor
associated with the fiber cabling infrastructure.
5. The Contractor must have at least one employee that is a BICSI certified Installer 1,
Installer 2, or Technician on site during the installation of structured cabling.

B. Union Affiliation
1. If required based on the location of the project, the contractor shall be a member of the
locally recognized union. This may include, but not limited to, IBEW or CWA.

1.3 APPROVED CONTRACTORS

A. Preferred Cabling Contractor Master List

1. JPMC utilizes a list of pre-qualified contractors to perform all structured cabling
installations. In order for a contractor to provide pricing for a structured cabling installation
project, the contractor must be on this list.
2. JPMC’s Structured Cabling Design Team maintains the Preferred Cabling Contractor
Master List that identifies cabling contractors that are properly and technically qualified to
install products specified within this Standard, have the financial strength to perform
projects without disruptions, and have a documented history of success in previous
projects. The Structured Cabling Design Team is the subject matter expert within
JPMorgan Chase, regarding matters including, but not limited to qualifying certified
contractors. The list identifies if a contractor is qualified to perform work in our corporate
facilities, and/or our retail facilities. Great care and constant attention is given to the
maintenance of this list, and conditions for probation and elimination from our list based on
contractor performance is contained within the Preferred Contractor Master List.

B. Subcontractors
1. JPMC structured cabling projects as defined by this Standard shall only be implemented by
contractors on the Preferred Cabling Contractor Master List. The installation contractors on
this list shall not subcontract work to others without prior written OPR approval. Failure to
comply with this requirement may result in removal from consideration for future JPMC
projects. Contractor shall evaluate staffing requirements for contemplated JPMC projects,
and submit request for said OPR approval at the time that they tender their initial proposal.

C. New Contractor Probation

270503-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 270500 – QUALITY ASSURNCE FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

1. A contractor that has been added to the preferred contractor list is automatically placed on
probation. The new contractor probation period is the greater of 1) 90 days, and 2) after
two or more projects have been accepted via an on-site inspection by OPR. The new
Contractor shall be immediately and permanently removed from the preferred contractor list
if a) the results of an on-site inspection are judged by the inspector to be unsatisfactory, or
b) upon the occurrence of one probation event as defined under Existing Contractor
Probation in this Standard. At the successful conclusion of the probation period, the new
Contractor shall be added to the preferred contractor list.

D. Existing Contractor Probation

1. An existing contractor probation Event occurs when the structured cabling design team
determines, in their sole discretion, that the Contractor has failed to adhere to installation
requirements as defined by the Retail Structured Cabling Design Standard and affiliated
documents. Contractor shall be notified in writing regarding the probation event, including
details of the Event, date of the Event, and contact information for the OPR that is
responsible for administration of the probation. Existing contractor probation period is the
greater of 1) 90 days, and 2) after two or more projects have been accepted via an on-site
inspection by OPR, and deviations associated with the probation Event have been
corrected and accepted in writing by OPR. Contractor shall be immediately and
permanently removed from the preferred contractor list if a) two probation Events occur in
any rolling 18-month period, or b) Contractor fails to correct deviations from installation
requirements as specified in this clause within 45 calendar days of notification, or c)
Contractor has subcontracted in whole or in part a project without prior Owner notification
and written approval thereof, or d) in the sole judgment of Owner, Contractor has falsified
test results. Contractor shall be notified in writing regarding probation status change,
including but not limited to placement on probation, lifting of probation, and removal from
the preferred contractor list.

E. Other Contractor Changes

1. Upon unanimous vote by the structured cabling team, Contractor may be removed from the
preferred contractor list at the sole discretion of the JPMC structured cabling team at any
time, and without advance notice by JPMC. Reasons include, but are not limited to:
a. Contractor loss of proper manufacturer certification
b. Contractor assessment of MACD (Move Add Change Disconnect) fees, which, in the
sole judgment of the JPMC structured cabling team, are determined to be
consistently excessive
c. Falsifying test results.
2. Upon execution of this clause, the JPMC structured cabling team may or may not issue
notification to Contractor regarding said removal.

1.4 OTHER CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Omissions
1. Contractor omission of any requirement described in Project Documents shall not be
construed as to relieve Contractor of any responsibility or obligation required to affect the
complete and satisfactory delivery, operation, and support of any and all materials or
services.

B. Contractor advertising
1. Contractor shall not solicit written or verbal testimonials from JPMC personnel at any time.
Contractor shall not install or post in JPMC properties any form of signage that contains
Contractor name, address, telephone number, or logo. Photographs within JPMC buildings
including technology spaces are strictly prohibited without prior approval of JPMC IT Risk
Management and the local JPMC Site Manager. All requests shall be submitted to the
OPR for routing.

270503-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 270500 – QUALITY ASSURNCE FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. New Materials
1. All cable and materials shall be new, unless previously approved in writing by OPR. New
equipment and materials shall be without blemish or defect. New equipment and materials
shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) labeled and/or listed where specifically called
for, or where normally subject to such U.L. labeling and/or listing services.

B. Equivalents
1. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all products installed at this
facility are compatible with the application. The Owner makes no representation regarding
the accuracy of the part numbers listed.

C. Substitutions
1. Materials shall be as listed. No substitutions are allowed without written consent from the
JPMC structured cabling engineering team. Proposals for equivalent products must be
presented to the OPR via RFI’s, Submittals, and/or Shop Drawings. OPR written approval
is required before any substitutions are made. Materials must be compatible with the end-
to-end solution being proposed

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

A. Extreme care shall be taken by Contractor to protect all components of the property from damage.
Contractor shall replace any damaged ceiling tiles that are broken during cable installation.
Contractor shall provide all protective devices and coverings required to protect areas adjacent to
the work area. Contractor shall repair damage to areas adjacent to the work area at no cost to the
Owner, or the Owner shall make the repairs and back charge against the Telecom Contractor.
Contractor shall assume complete responsibility for damages to third parties incurred as a result
of Contractor’s work in this project. Protection of property shall include, but not be limited to, the
following protective measures:
1. Keeping the RMER or RTR free of food and drink at all times.
2. Leaving RMER or RTR doors closed at all times.
3. Employing HEPA vacuum whenever drilling, cutting, coring, or performing any work that will
impact air quality.

B. It is Contractor’s sole responsibility to secure, read and understand all relevant JPMC Standards,
and execute installations in accordance with said Standards.

3.2 DOCUMENTATION

A. Upon request by JPMC, the contractor shall provide proof of any certifications, training, or union
affiliations.

END OF SECTION

270503-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 270503 – TECHNOLOGY SPACE CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This specification provides the requirements for final cleaning of technology spaces, inclusive of Retail
Main Equipment Rooms (RMERs), Retail Telecommunications Rooms (RTRs), and Stand Alone
ATMs.
1.2 STANDARDS OF OPERATION
A. Cleaning personnel are required to observe the technology room Standards of Operations at all times.
At a minimum, this includes:
1. No food or drink in the room
2. No propping technology room doors
3. No interfering with the operation of technology room equipment
4. No unauthorized/un-badged personnel in technology room
B. Workers must wear clothing that easily identifies them as members of the cleaning company.
C. During the cleaning, workers are responsible for conducting themselves in such a manner as to
protect the owner’s equipment and infrastructure and to avoid creating hazards for employees who
enter the work area.
D. Signage or safety cones should be used to surround open floor tiles, electrical cords strung along the
floor, and any areas that are being damp-mopped.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Approved Equipment & Materials
A. The contractor will use the following approved equipment and supplies:
1. Triple-filtration high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) or S-Class vacuums, capable of removing
99.97 percent of particles 0.3 microns or larger.
2. Cleaning chemicals that are pH neutral, static dissipative, and approved or qualified by computer
hardware manufacturers.
3. Material Safety Data Sheets must be provided to the owner prior to performing work.
4. Canned air.
5. Lint-free mops that are approved or qualified by computer hardware manufacturers. Mops should
have nonmetal handles and sewn ends, to prevent snagging. Mop heads should have looped
ends, not ends that are open or stringy or both.
6. Lint-free, antistatic wipes and towels that are approved or qualified by computer hardware
manufacturers.
7. Low-speed floor scrubbing machines.
8. Electrical cords that are in good condition and possess appropriate ground configuration.
9. A stable stepladder with non-marking rubber feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Equipment Cleaning Procedures
A. A HEPA vacuum will be used to clean the horizontal surfaces of all equipment.
B. Cloths treated with antistatic property chemical will be used to wipe down all external surfaces of all
cabinets, polystyrene end-row sheets, servers, networking devices, and storage units.
C. Chemicals will not be sprayed directly onto equipment.
D. Keyboards will not be touched during cleanings.
E. Cleaning activities should generally progress downward from the ceiling and outward from the room’s
air handlers.

270503-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 270503 – TECHNOLOGY SPACE CLEANING

3.2 High Level Cleaning Procedures

A. All cable trays, ladder racks, unistrut, beams, etc. to be blown through with compressed air and wiped
down with appropriate cloths and chemicals.
3.3 Low Level Cleaning Procedures
A. Vacuum surface dust and particles from the top of all raceways and cable trays that are secured
below the room’s deck or ceiling.
B. Make note of any unusual conditions—loose brackets, damaged cable bundles, condensation, and so
on—and include them in the final report to be provided to the CM and owner.
3.4 Cleaning of Technology cabinets/racks
A. Wipe down the external surfaces of all cabinets using lint-free cloths treated with antistatic chemical.
Avoid disturbing patch cords or power cables, touching keyboards, moving hardware, or spraying
chemicals directly onto equipment.
B. Use canned air to dislodge dust in areas that cannot be reached by hand.
3.5 Floor Surface Cleaning Procedures
A. When cleaning the raised floor, avoid disturbing any cables that are routed through the notched
opening of floor tiles.
B. Vacuum surface dust and particles from the top of all accessible portions of the floor, including blank,
notched, and perforated floor tiles.
C. Treat smudges, stains, black marks, and so on, with an approved solution and scrub with a medium-
grade scrub pad. Use an approved floor machine to clean all accessible portions of the floor.
D. Last, mop the floor with a damp—not wet—mop using clean, warm water. Use a two-bucket system,
one for mopping and one for rinsing. Change water frequently in both buckets.

END OF SECTION

270503-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 270526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. JPMC’s Real Estate group is responsible for proper installation of a grounding (earthing)
backbone that has been designed and installed in accordance with J-STD-607 or equivalent
regional Standard. If such grounding (earthing) backbone does not appear to be in place,
Contractor shall inform OPR, who will take action as appropriate.

B. All bonding and grounding (earthing) shall track methods and procedures described in J-STD-607
or equivalent regional Standard.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Components: See the grounding schematic on drawings for manufacturers and part numbers.

B. All grounding/bonding conductors shall be copper (no aluminum allowed).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 See the grounding schematic on drawings for contractor requirements.

END OF SECTION

270526-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 270528 – PATHWAYS FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section specifies technology infrastructure equipment including the following:
1. J-Hooks.
2. Conduits and Boxes.
3. Innerduct
4. Pull Boxes.
5. Fire-rated sleeves.
6. Misc. Accessories

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. New Materials
1. All cable and materials shall be new, unless previously approved in writing by OPR. New
equipment and materials shall be without blemish or defect. New equipment and materials shall
be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) labeled and/or listed where specifically called for, or
where normally subject to such U.L. labeling and/or listing services.
B. Equivalents
1. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all products installed at this facility are
compatible with the application. The Owner makes no representation regarding the accuracy of
the part numbers listed.
C. Substitutions
1. Materials shall be as listed. No substitutions are allowed without written consent from the JPMC
structured cabling engineering team. Proposals for equivalent products must be presented to the
OPR via RFI’s, Submittals, and/or Shop Drawings. OPR written approval is required before any
substitutions are made. Materials must be compatible with the end-to-end solution being
proposed.
D. Fire Rating
1. Innerduct shall be rated for the purpose. Innerduct listed in this section is not plenum rated.
Contractor shall exercise diligence in ensuring that the innerduct installed meets the
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Local or national codes may or may not require plenum or Low Smoke Zero Halogen in some
applications. It is Contractor’s responsibility to install materials that are appropriate to the
environment. If Contractor installs innerduct or Soft Duct that is inappropriate to the environment
(e.g. plenum-rated in spaces that do not require plenum, or non-plenum-rated in spaces that
require plenum), Contractor shall be expected to remove the inappropriate innerduct or Soft Duct
and install appropriate innerduct or Soft Duct at their sole expense.
2.2 J-HOOKS
A. Requirements:
1. Above all accessible ceilings, J-Hooks are required for proper cable support.
2. J-Hooks shall be specifically designed for interior use with data cables.
3. J-Hooks shall be provided as required with all the manufacturer’s recommended installation
hardware for the installation application.
4. Approved J-Hook manufacturers are Cooper, Caddy, or Panduit.
B. See the open cable support detail on the construction drawings for manufacturers and part numbers
for J-Hook mounting components.
2.3 CONDUITS AND BOXES
A. CONDUIT

270528-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 270528 – PATHWAYS FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

1. All wiring in the building interior, including horizontal distribution, vertical riser conduits and
auxiliary wiring may be run in EMT conduit unless otherwise specified. Conduit sizes larger than
4” shall be rigid metallic conduit.
2. EMT shall not be used in poured concrete, underground, in utility tunnels or exposed in
mechanical equipment room below 48”.
3. All EMT connectors and couplings shall be of the setscrew type. All fittings shall be steel. No die
cast fittings will be allowed.
B. BOXES
1. The outlet backboxes shall be 5” square by 2.875” deep with a single gang reducer and integral
cable management. The depth of the raised single gang reducer shall be determined by the
thickness of the wall material that the outlet box will be installed within. The contractor shall
coordinate this dimension with the general contractor.
2. See the symbols list on the construction drawings for manufacturers and part numbers.
2.4 INNERDUCT
A. Innerduct is a nonmetallic raceway placed within a larger raceway. For this project, fabric innerduct
shall be used. Hard sided innerduct shall not be used unless permission is explicitly provided by the
Structured Cabling Engineer. If multiple cables are to be pulled through a single innerduct cell, they
should be pulled at the same time. Fabric innerduct provides multiple sleeves within conduits and
empty cells should be provided for future growth.
1. Fabric innerduct shall be installed within conduit.
2. Contractor should coordinate a site visit from the fabric innerduct manufacturer to oversee the
installation when 1) the contractor has never utilized this product in the past; or 2) when the
aggregate length of the installation exceeds 1,500 m (5,000 ft.).
B. Fabric Innerduct Sizing
1. The fabric innerduct shall be sized for the conduit it is being installed within.
C. Fabric Innerduct
1. Standard Outdoor Fabric Innerduct: Micro (33mm), 2-inch, 3-inch and 4-inch single or multi-cell
polyester/nylon fabric innerduct containing 1250 lb. polyester flat woven pull tape.
2. Detectable Outdoor Fabric Innerduct: Micro (32mm), 2-inch, 3-inch and 4-inch single or multi-cell
polyester/nylon fabric innerduct containing 1250 lb. polyester flat woven pull tape, and a solid
copper, polyvinyl color coated conductor (19AWG minimum) for tracing and rated for a minimum
of 6 amps and 600 volts. Conductor shall be placed in the sidewall edge fold of the textile sleeve.
Detectable fabric innerduct shall be utilized when running fiber optic cabling within non-metallic
underground conduits.
3. Indoor Fabric Innerduct (Riser-listed): Micro (32mm), 2-inch, 3-inch and 4-inch single or multi-cell
nylon fabric innerduct containing 1250 lb. polyester flat woven pull tape which meets UL2024A
for flame propagation and smoke density values for general applications.
4. Plenum-Listed Fabric Innerduct: Micro (32mm), 2-inch and 3-inch single or multi-cell nylon fabric
innerduct containing 200lb nylon-resin flat woven pull tape which meets UL2024A for flame
propagation and smoke density values for use in air handling spaces.
D. Fabric Innerduct Fittings
1. Conduit Plugs: Compression-type conduit plugs with locking nuts for sealing and securing one or
more fabric innerducts within a 4-inch inside diameter conduit, e.g.:
a. 4-inch plug with nine holes for cables in a 3 pack (9-cell) configuration
2. Termination Bags: Inflation-type bags for sealing and securing around one or more fabric
innerducts and cables within 2-inch outside diameter or larger conduit.
2.5 PULL BOXES
A. Pull boxes shall be manufactured for use as a junction box and pull box in commercial and general
industrial applications.
B. Covers shall be secured to the enclosure body with plated screws through keyhole slots provided in
the cover.
C. Finish shall be a phosphate undercoat with ANSI 61 gray acrylic finish.

270528-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 270528 – PATHWAYS FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

D. Pull boxes shall comply with NEMA standards Type 1.

E. Pull boxes shall be provided in the sizes as indicated on the plans. Pull boxes shall have holes
punched or cored through the enclosure body to provide access into the enclosure for the conduits
indicated on the plans.
2.6 FIRE-RATED SLEEVES
A. Cables passing through RMER/RTR floors or walls shall pass through fire-rated wiring devices which
contain an intumescent insert material that adjusts automatically to cable additions or subtractions.
B. The device (per code requirements) shall include both internal and external firestopping.
C. Cables penetrating through RMER/RTR floors or walls shall utilize fire-rated pathway devices capable
of providing an F rating equal to the rating of the barrier in which the device is installed.
D. The device shall be tested for smoke leakage (L rating) and shall not require the use of any optional
sealing materials to achieve the published rating.
E. The device shall utilize a fire and smoke sealing system that automatically adjusts to the addition or
removal of cables.
F. Wire devices shall be of a sufficient size to accommodate the quantity and size of data cables
required and shall be suitable for use with new or existing cable installations.
G. The installed device (in normal use) shall require no maintenance and shall accommodate future
cable changes without mechanical adjustment and/or removal or replacement of protective materials.
H. Wire devices to be provided with steel wall plates allowing for single or multiple devices to be ganged
together.
I. The device shall be modular and shall provide mechanical installation options for common wall and
floor constructions as well as common construction conditions including over-sized or damaged
openings or existing sleeves.
J. Install radius control modules (RCM) on all horizontal devices. The RCM’s provide a 1” minimum
bending radius for cables.
K. Components
1. Wall or Floor sleeves: Specified Technologies Inc. EZ-PATH series
2. Cable radius control waterfalls: Specified Technologies Inc. RCM series
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Pull String
1. Pull strings: constructed of synthetic fiber.
B. Pull Tape
1. Pull Tape: measuring and pulling tape constructed of synthetic fiber, printed with accurate
sequential footage marks. Color-coded.
C. Penetration Sealing Materials
1. Duct Water Seal: products suitable for closing underground and entrance conduit openings
where innerduct or cable is installed, to prevent entry of gases, liquids, or rodents into the
structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. J-Hooks shall be installed within (1) one foot of the bushed conduit ends stubbed above the ceiling
and within (1) one foot of any bend greater than 60 degrees.
B. J-Hooks shall be installed with a maximum center to center distance of (4) four feet.

270528-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 270528 – PATHWAYS FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

C. All J-Hooks shall be attached securely to the ceiling joists or concrete deck above utilizing the
manufacturer’s recommended hardware and installation practices. Contractor shall utilize unistrut and
threaded rod assemblies to maintain the (4) four-foot center to center requirement between ceiling
joist members as required.
3.2 CONDUIT AND BOXES
A. All conduits entering cabinets, pull boxes, junction boxes or outlet boxes shall be secured with set-
screw type box connectors.
B. The ends of all conduits utilized for communications cabling shall be provided with nylon push-on
bushings and a pull string provided throughout.
C. Exterior conduits for Telecommunications Service Providers (Carriers) shall have a pull tape installed
by the electrical contractor.
D. All exterior conduits shall be sealed at the opening within the building by the electrical contractor.
E. All conduit runs shall have a maximum of two (2) 90-degree bends per conduit run. When more
bends are necessary in a single run a pull box shall be installed. Pull boxes shall not be installed in
place of a 90-degree bend. Pull boxes shall also be installed in long runs at a maximum separation of
100’.
F. All conduits, except in concrete slab or earth, shall be routed parallel and perpendicular to the column
lines of the building.
G. Conduits that are not installed plumb and routed perpendicular to the structural column supports of
the building will not be accepted.
H. Unless otherwise noted, all conduits shall be run concealed within the building construction when
installed in finished interior or exterior areas.
I. All conduits shall be substantially supported by use of pipe straps, suitable clamps or hangers
attached to elements of the building structure to provide a rigid installation. Under no circumstance
shall conduit be attached or supported from adjoining pipe or installed in such a manner as to prevent
the readily removal of other pipe for repairs.
J. Unless otherwise noted, install all outlet boxes vertically.
K. Install outlet boxes at the mounting heights indicated on the plans. Communication outlet boxes
adjacent to electric outlets shall be installed at the same mounting height. Any discrepancy shall be
brought to the attention of the Architect and Engineer prior to rough-in.
3.3 PULL BOXES
A. Pull boxes shall be provided in the sizes as indicated on the plans.
B. Pull boxes shall have holes punched or cored through the enclosure body to provide access into the
enclosure for the conduits indicated on the plans.
C. All conduits entering the pull box shall be secured with set-screw type box connectors.
D. Pull boxes shall be installed in such a manner that provides easy access into the installed enclosure
through the removable cover.
E. Under no circumstance shall a pull box be installed with the cover facing up. Unless conduits entering
the box must be stacked vertically, all pull boxes shall be installed with the cover facing down.
F. Pull box locations shall be coordinated with other trades to provide adequate clearance between the
pull box cover and any other object. The minimum clearance required shall be six times the diameter
of the largest conduit entering the pull box.

END OF SECTION

270528-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 270553 – IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. System Acceptance shall be withheld until OPR has reviewed and approved all labeling as
defined elsewhere in this section.

B. In cases where 100 percent of the cabling infrastructure is new, all labeling shall be performed in
accordance with this Section 27 05 53. In cases where new infrastructure is being added to an
existing (Legacy) infrastructure that follows an earlier version JPMC cabling standard, Contractor
shall furnish to OPR a detailed description of deviations from the prevailing Retail Structured
Cabling Standard, and upon OPR written approval, follow instead the Legacy labeling standard.

C. Because the cable infrastructure is a comprehensive, integrated design, proper and

comprehensive labeling is critical. To ensure the success of this component of the system
design, all labels shall be fully compliant with the requirements set forth in this section. Contractor
is responsible for furnishing and installing all labels and label holders as specified herein.

D. All labels shall be installed in accordance with information contained in project drawings and as
specified in this Section.

E. This specification sets forth general requirements for infrastructure identification, not specific
numbering schemes. Before the labeling process begins, Contractor shall submit a written plan
that includes specific numbering sequences for each telecommunications element, and shall not
proceed with the plan until OPR furnishes written approval of said plan which may contain
standards-based modifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All labels shall be indelible, pre-printed (not hand-written), and permanent, using Brady printer or
equivalent, Arial font or equivalent. The text color shall be black with a white background, unless
affixed on a black surface, in which case the label background shall be black and text shall be
white.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The following infrastructure components shall be included and fully labeled in the identification
schema:
1. Information outlet faceplates
2. Horizontal cabling
3. Copper patch panels
4. Backbone cabling
5. Fiber patch panels
6. Racks
7. Power Distribution Units and Power Strips
8. IT equipment asset tags
9. Conduit and sleeve pathways

270553-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 270553 – IDENTIFICATION

3.2 INFORMATION OUTLET FACEPLATES

A. Each information outlet identifier shall be numbered in accordance with the Faceplate Labeling
Configuration detail, using paper labels and clear windows included with each appropriate
information outlet faceplate. Where clear windows are not applicable, Contractor shall coordinate
a compliant label that is resistant to damage or degradation over time (e.g. vinyl). Text height and
positioning shall be in accordance with the Faceplate Labeling Configuration detail.

B. Voice and Data outlets shall be located in each faceplate in accordance with the Faceplate
Labeling Configuration detail.

3.3 HORIZONTAL CABLING

A. Labels to be affixed at every used patch panel and on each horizontal cable on both ends.
1. Nomenclature: X#Y##
a. Where X = RMER/RTR designation, use "M" for RMER and "T" for RTR.
b. Where # = Rack designation (numeric).
c. Where Y = A single sequential alpha character, beginning with "A", identifying the
patch panel.
d. Where ## = Two-Digit sequential number beginning with "01", identifying patch panel
port number.

B. Copper patch panel port identification shall be fully compliant with the Faceplate Labeling
Configuration detail.

C. If label is affixed to a black or dark gray surface, label information shall be white in color. If label
is affixed to beige or light-colored surface, label information shall be black in color.

D. Copper patch panel labels shall employ manufacturer-supplied labeling materials and covers (if
applicable), affixed to each panel in accordance with manufacturer specifications.

E. Copper patch panel labels shall be white in color.

3.4 BACKBONE CABLING

A. The cable shall be labeled on both ends.

B. Nomenclature: Source = X-#-ZZ and Destination = X-Y-ZZ-##/##-TTT

1. Where X = RMER or RTR designation.
2. Where # = Rack designation.
3. Where ZZ = Patch Panel designation (rack unit # from upper left corner when panel is
installed).
4. Where ##/## = Starting strand number/end strand number.
5. Where TTT = Fiber type, OM2, OM3, or OM4 for multimode or OS2 for single mode.

C. Where route diversity is employed designation strips located on termination panels for each route
shall be of distinctly different colors.

3.5 FIBER PATCH PANELS

A. The patch panel shall be labeled on the front door.

1. Nomenclature: ZZ

270553-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 270553 – IDENTIFICATION

a. Where ZZ = Patch panel designation (Rack unit # from the upper left corner where
the panel is installed.
b. Within the patch panel (behind the front door).
c. Nomenclature: Source = X-#-ZZ and Destination = ZZ-##/##-TTT
d. Where X = RMER designation, which is "M".
e. Where # = Rack designation.
f. Where ZZ = Patch Panel designation (rack unit # from upper left corner when panel
is installed).
g. Where ##/## = Starting strand number/end strand number.
h. Where TTT = Fiber type, OM2, OM3, or OM4 for multimode or OS2 for single mode.

3.6 RACKS

A. Labels to be affixed to top front and top rear of rack

1. Nomenclature: X#
a. Where X = RMER/RTR designation, use "M" for RMER and "T" for RTR.
b. Where # = Rack designation (numeric)
c. Type: 1.5 in. (38 mm) text; machine printed text. Black text on white background.

3.7 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS AND POWER STRIPS

A. Power Distribution Units and Strips shall be labeled with the breaker panel ID and circuit number
it is served from.

3.8 IT EQUIPMENT ASSET TAGS

A. All powered IT equipment, aside from audio-visual or carrier equipment must be labeled with the
devices hostname and a yellow asset tag on the front (cold aisle) side of the device. A machine
generated label indicating the serial number of the device shall also be placed on the front (cold
aisle) side of the device. All racks must have a yellow asset tag at the top front in a visible area
that can be easily accessed with a barcode scanner.

B. These asset tags will be provided by someone other than the structured cabling contractor.

3.9 CONDUIT AND SLEEVE PATHWAYS

A. Conduit pathway labeling shall be labeled as follows.

1. 1.5 in. (38 mm) tall text placed in visible location on plastic bushing or on the conduit itself
near the end.
2. Nomenclature <size>.<path A/B>to<Distant end room ID>. Example: 4” A to I-1

B. Sleeve pathway labeling shall be labeled as follows.

1. 1.5 in. (38 mm) tall text placed in visible location on plastic bushing or on the sleeve itself
near both ends.
2. Nomenclature <size>.<pathway type>. Example: 4” Sleeve

END OF SECTION

270553-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 271100 – EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section includes RMER/RTR equipment racks, cable managers, ladder racks, power distribution
units, plywood backboards, and associated components.
B. This specification contains all products currently approved by JPMC. The contractor should not
assume that all of the materials listed in the specifications must be installed because they are listed in
the specification. Project-specific required materials are further defined in the project construction
drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. In locations that require Seismic bracing, consult with the OPR for guidance and product
requirements.
B. As part of their base quotation, the Contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing all
miscellaneous hardware (e.g. cage nuts, screws), required to accomplish a complete working
installation.
C. Where one equipment rack is installed, mount one 6” vertical cable manager on both sides of the
equipment rack.
D. Where two equipment racks are installed, mount one 6” vertical cable manager on both ends of the
row, and one 10” vertical cable manager between racks.
E. Where a wall mounted equipment cabinet is installed, provide internal vertical cable managers.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. See the rack elevations and rack equipment schedule on the construction drawings for manufacturers
and part numbers for the following equipment:
1. Equipment rack and associated components
2. Cable management – Rack Mounted
3. Ladder Rack and associated components
4. Power Distribution Units (PDUs) for RMERs and RTRs
5. Power Distribution Units (PDUs) for Stand Alone ATM locations
6. Equipment cabinet and associated components
7. Cable management – Cabinet Mounted
8. Power Strips for wall mounted cabinets
B. Plywood backboards
1. Provide void-free, fire-rated plywood mounted vertically on the wall. Plywood boards shall be ¾”
thick, 8’ tall, and width as shown on the plans to fit the room.
2. Either fire rated (with a UL FR-S classification), or if non-fire-rated - and if acceptable to the AHJ
- covered with two coats of fire-retardant paint on both sides and edges. For fire-rated plywood
the classification stamp must not be obscured.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All relay racks, ladder rack, and cable tray shall be bonded to ground in accordance with manufacturer
specifications, and prevailing codes and standards. See Section 27 05 26 for further grounding and
bonding information.

270553-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 271100 – EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

B. Relay racks shall be assembled and mounted in locations shown in the drawings and as described
herein. Each rack shall be assembled in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Each rack shall be mounted such that the side rails are plumb. Bolts shall be
tightened to the extent that it holds the mounting hardware firmly, but not so tight as to distort the
hardware or strip the threads. Equipment racks are to be co-located with power outlets to allow for
easy connection of rack-mounted equipment to the power system. Racks and cable management
hardware shall be securely bolted together.
C. The rack should be attached to RMER/RTR floors with ⅜ in. lag screws or equivalent hardware. The
floor under the rack should be level within 3/16 in. Use a floor-leveling cement compound if
necessary.
D. Cable trays must be installed in a manner that allows at least 305 mm (12 in) of clearance above the
top of the tray.
E. Cable trays must be installed a minimum of 101.6 mm – 152.4 mm (4 in – 6 in) above cabinets and
racks, with 304.8 mm (12 in) being preferred..
F. Metallic cable tray must be compliant with the NEMA VE-1 standard. Installation should follow the
guidelines and recommendations – as applicable – in the NEMA VE-2 standard.
G. All metallic ladder racks must be bonded to ground per NEC requirements. When sections are not
mechanically continuous, bonding conductors must be installed across the sections. This includes
ladder rack whose section connecting hardware is not approved as a means for providing ground
continuity.
H. A minimum of 915 mm (3 ft) of clearance in front and in back of racks. More clearance must be
provided when deemed prudent or necessary for use, installation, and removal of equipment, or to
meet thermal requirements.
I. A minimum of 1219 mm (3 ft) of clearance at the end of a row of racks or cabinets.
J. A minimum of 305 mm (1 ft) additional clearance from a Carrier (Service Provider) wall field beyond
the minimums specified for racks and cabinets.
K. At least 610 mm (2 feet) of clearance above racks and cabinets, with cable support systems being the
only allowable exception.

END OF SECTION

270553-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 271300 – BACKBONE CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section includes inside plant multimode fiber, outside plant multimode fiber, single mode fiber
for carrier circuit extension, and Category 6 cables for carrier circuit extension.

B. All Retail standards regarding identification apply to this section. See 27 05 53 of this Standard
for additional detail.

C. The National Electric Code defines distance limitations for OSP cable runs within buildings not in
conduit, at 50 ft. maximum. All such requirements shall be complied with at all JPMC facilities.

D. Extended network cables are typically comprised of six 4-pair Category 6 cables, or via 12-strand
Single-mode fiber if the service is Switched Ethernet.

E. Except for the purposes of extending T.1, Switched Ethernet, or analog services, in no case shall
Category 6 cable runs exceed 90m (295 ft) in length. In cases where T.1 service is extended
over Category 6 cables, the cable distance shall not exceed 677 ft.

F. Switched Ethernet service is extended over Single-mode fiber by the Carrier to the JPMC RMER.
Primary service (circuit) shall be routed underground in two 2" schedule 80 PVC conduits. Once
the conduit enters the building, if over 50 feet from the entrance and within JPMC controlled
space transition to EMT conduit. Terminate conduit in the RMER. Secondary service (circuit) is
cellular. Provide EMT conduit from the cellular donor antenna location to the RMER, if the
antenna location is on the roof or outside. If conduits are run inside the building but outside of
JPMC controlled space, transition is required to RMC through non-JPMC space.

G. Extended Network Cables are used to extend analog dial tone service and/or high-speed data
(e.g. T-1, SwE) service from the ILEC’s presence in the building to the JPMC RMER.

H. This specification contains all products currently approved by JPMC. The contractor should not
assume that all of the materials listed in the specifications must be installed because they are
listed in the specification. Project-specific required materials are further defined in the project
construction drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL FIBER CABLING REQUIREMENTS

A. CABLE RATING
1. Local or national codes may require specific cable grading in specific applications. It is
Contractor’s responsibility to install cable that is appropriate to the environment. If
Contractor installs cable that is inappropriate to the environment (e.g. riser-rated cable in
spaces that require plenum cable), Contractor shall be expected to remove the
inappropriate cable and install appropriate cable at their sole expense.

B. TERMINATION TYPE
1. Only factory terminated fiber patch cords may be utilized in JPMC facilities. Fiber patch
cords created by personnel not directly employed by the manufacturer is not permissible.
2. Field-terminated connectors for the fiber backbone is the preferred termination method.
Fusion-spliced or Corning UniCam terminations are permitted.
3. Multimode & single mode fiber shall be terminated into LC connectors unless noted
otherwise.

271300-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 271300 – BACKBONE CABLING

C. CABLE JACKETING
1. Cable jacketing may or may not be armored, depending upon the environment and the
application.
a. Non-armored cable shall be used when the fiber will be installed within conduit or for
a point-to-point connection within the RMER.
b. Armored cable shall be used when the fiber is not installed within conduit.

D. CABLE GRADE
1. OM3 multimode backbone fiber shall be used for cable distances up to 300m (984ft.).
2. Single mode backbone fiber shall be used for distance greater than 300m (984ft.) or for
Telecommunications Carrier circuit extensions.
3. Single mode & Category 6 shall be used for Telecommunications Carrier circuit extensions.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. See the cable schedule and rack equipment schedule on the construction drawings for
manufacturers and part numbers for the following equipment:
1. Single mode fiber materials (for extension of carrier circuit)
2. Fiber termination panels.
3. Multimode fiber materials (for backbone to a RTR if applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL CABLING INSTALLATION

A. Sleeves shall not be over-populated with cables. Sufficient spare capacity shall be allowed in
each sleeve to accommodate appropriate firestopping materials in accordance with manufacturer
specifications and the UL Fire Resistance Directory. Note that manufacturers typically specify a
20% to 40% fill for their products.

B. Manufacturer’s Standard pulling tension and minimum bend radii shall be complied with at all
times. Cables shall be dressed-in, Velcro® or Millepede® Mille-Ties releasable cable tied, and
secured to the ladder rack, plywood backboard, and/or other suitable surfaces so as to ensure a
professional appearance, run straight, level, and aligned with building lines, with 90° corners
where possible, bearing in mind manufacturer's recommended bend radii.

C. Contractor shall furnish and install adequate cable strain relief (e.g. cable dropouts) to
accommodate the anticipated magnitude of cabling. Wherever fiber and copper cables are
segregated, dedicated multimode strain relief shall be provided, including adequate provision for
cable route diversity where applicable.

3.2 FIBER CABLING INSTALLATION

A. After fiber cable has been successfully tested in accordance with this Standard, all connector dust
covers shall be securely restored.

B. Empty adapter panel ports shall be equipped with blank panels.

C. All fiber strands are terminated into LC patch panels at both ends unless noted otherwise.

D. In spaces where any airborne dust or contaminants may be present, especially during
construction, Contractor shall fully and properly protect any and all connectorized cables to avoid
transmission performance degradation associated with dust coming in contact with connector
contact points. If at all possible, and where allowed by the project timeline, Contractor’s first
choice should be to avoid this problem by refraining from installing any such components until the

271300-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 271300 – BACKBONE CABLING

risk of airborne dust and contaminants is eliminated (e.g. after floors and ceilings are treated, and
walls receive the final coat of paint).

3.3 CARRIER CIRCUIT EXTENSION INSTALLATION

A. Carrier circuit extension cables shall be installed by Contractor. The cable terminations may be
performed either by Contractor, or by the ILEC, depending upon the customary practice in that
ILEC’s region. Contractor shall coordinate this portion of the project with OPR.

B. If the route for the carrier circuit extension cables passes through space that is not controlled by
JPMC, it is vulnerable to accidental or intentional service interruption, and should be installed in a
properly-designed conduit infrastructure. The conduit sizing shall be based on a 40% fill of all
cable types being installed within the conduit.

C. In the RMER, the Category 6 cable is typically terminated into a Smart Jack or NTE (Ciena and
Beasbox) furnished by the ILEC. In the unlikely event that the Smart Jack is not located in the
RMER, Contractor shall coordinate connectivity requirements with the OPR.

D. Category 6 cables shall not be kinked or unduly twisted, nor shall the integrity of the cable sheath
be compromised in any fashion. Cable bundles shall not be clinched or tied together with
excessive force, thereby holding jacket deformation to a minimum. Individual cable bend radii may
be no less than four times the cable diameter or 0.6 inches, whichever is greater. Tie wraps shall
not be employed for securing Category 6 cables.
During termination, UTP pair twists shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination
point. In any case, the amount of untwisting must not exceed .5 inches at the point of termination.

3.4 FIBER TESTING

A. Tests shall be carried out at 850nm
and 1300nm for multi-mode testing and 1310nm and 1550nm for single-mode testing in one
direction.
B. The fiber manufacturer’s warranty
conditions shall be used to perform all fiber testing. These standards are more stringent than
International and National standards. The contractor is required to perform custom tests using the
tester and is therefore to adjust the contactor loss values in the tester software accordingly.
C. Should installed fibers be required to
be connected directly into a switch in a harness link topology, all fibers will be patched prior to
testing commencing, then individually un-patched, tested, and finally re-patched. This is to
mitigate polarity concerns.
D. When referencing fiber optic testers
the 1 jumper (Method B) methodology shall be employed.
E. Fiber testers shall be compliant with
encircle flux launch sources/ conditions. Encircled flux testing patch leads shall be used and
should not be mated beyond the maximum of 500 times.
F. Delivered cable tests are not
required, however a Certificate of Conformance shall be supplied with each trunk cable and
copies made available on site and provided in the final handover documentation.
G. Individual cable runs shall be
traceable to the delivered trunk certification.

3.5 CATEGORY 6/6A UTP AND CATEGORY 6A F/UTP TESTING

271300-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 271300 – BACKBONE CABLING

A. See Section 27 15 00 – Horizontal

Cabling for testing requirements.

3.6 DOCUMENTATION
A. All test results are to be issued in PDF format a maximum of two days after final completion of the
testing. The project will not be considered complete and invoices will not be paid until this is
achieved.
B. PDF file sizes are to be no greater than 10Mb as email is the only option of issuing them. Paper
copies are not required.
C. The test results in the pdf document are to be sequenced in numerical order, and the port
description should match the labelling nomenclature. It is imperative that the test results detail the
local length measurement units.
D. It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure all ports have been 100% tested prior to submitting the
test results.
E. Contractor shall provide in electronic format:
1. A final as-built floor plan drawings detailing the labeling of all data outlets.
2. All fiber optic and copper test results as noted above.
3. Manufacturer’s performance and application warranty.
F. The project will not be considered complete and all invoices will not be paid until this is achieved.

END OF SECTION

271300-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 271500 – BACKBONE CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Category 6 horizontal cable infrastructure shall be installed for all standard wall outlets and ATM
cable runs unless noted otherwise. These cables shall be terminated in the RMER or RTR on a
24-port or 48-port patch panel with Category 6, RJ-45 jacks, employing T568B terminations.

B. Category 6A horizontal cable infrastructure shall be installed for all wireless access point and
security camera locations. These cables shall be terminated in the RMER or RTR on a 24-port
patch panel with Category 6A, RJ-45 jacks, employing T568B terminations.

C. Foiled/Unshielded Twisted Pair Category 6A horizontal cable infrastructure shall be installed for
all video monitor locations where identified to support HDBase-T technology. These cables shall
be terminated in the RMER or RTR on a 24-port shielded patch panel with Category 6A, Shielded,
RJ-45 jacks, employing T568B terminations.

D. Telepresence controller locations will be equipped with point-to-point F/UTP Category 6A

horizontal cables and audio cables.

E. In no case shall Category 6 / 6A, and F/UTP Category 6A cable runs exceed 90m (295 ft) in
length. In the event that a cable runs exceeds 90m (295ft) but no more than 300m (984ft), then
50-micron, OM3-rated multimode fiber shall be installed with fiber-to-copper media converters on
both ends of the cable run.

F. This specification contains all products currently approved by JPMC. The contractor should not
assume that all of the materials listed in the specifications must be installed because they are
listed in the specification. Project-specific required materials are further defined in the project
construction drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLENUM REQUIREMENTS

A. Local or national codes may allow non-plenum (PVC) cable in some locations, in which case
Contractor shall inform OPR that plenum rated cable is not required. If the use of PVC cable is
approved by OPR, contractor shall quote and install PVC cable. If no information exists regarding
plenum/PVC cable requirements, Contractor shall quote and install plenum rated cable.

2.2 PATCH CORDS – GENERAL

A. Only factory terminated patch cords may be utilized in JPMC facilities. UTP patch cords that are
pre-terminated (e.g., created by personnel not directly employed by the manufacturer) are not
permissible, unless previously approved in writing by OPR.

B. Quantities, types, and lengths of patch cords are specified by OPR.

C. All patch cords for printers, multi-function devices (MFD), etc. shall be 7 ft. in length.

D. RMER/RTR patch cords shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor, to ensure appropriate
lengths and timely material procurement. Patch cords shall have no more than 1’ of slack.

E. Patch cords shall be colored as follows:

1. Category 6: Gray
2. Category 6A: White

271500-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 271500 – BACKBONE CABLING

3. Category 6A F/UTP: White

2.3 MATERIALS

A. See the work area outlet schedule, cable schedule, and rack equipment schedule on the
construction drawings for manufacturers and part numbers for the following equipment:
1. Category 6 UTP materials
2. Category 6A UTP materials
3. Category 6A F/UTP materials
4. Category 6 OSP UTP materials
5. Category 6A OSP UTP materials
6. Faceplates
7. Outside Plant Horizontal Multimode Fiber Materials

2.4 COPPER AND FIBER OPTIC TESTING EQUIPMENT

A. The Following products should be used when testing Structured Cabling Infrastructure:
1. Test equipment which is capable of electronically storing test result data. The tester shall
exceed ANSI/TIA-1152 Level 2G

2. Category 6 and Category 6A permanent and channel adapters

3. Single-mode and multi-mode fiber adapters

4. Encircled flux reference cords

5. Fiber inspection probe/ microscope

6. Appropriate connector cleaning tools/ tapes

7. 2m Category 6 patch leads if channel testing Category 6 cabling

8. 2m Category 6A patch leads if channel testing Category 6A cabling

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All RJ45 terminations employ 568B terminations.

B. All cables and outlets shall be labeled in accordance with Section 27 05 53.

C. Completed horizontal cables shall be tested in accordance with Part 3.2 – TESTING below.

D. Contractor shall populate the patch panel with outlet terminations to support initial work area
outlet requirements, and leaving a growth factor of 10% as open positions.

E. To ensure optimum cable performance, bundles of 4-pair cables shall not be tightly bundled and
carefully aligned for desirable aesthetic appearance.

F. Category 6/6A cables shall not be kinked or unduly twisted, nor shall the integrity of the cable
sheath be compromised in any fashion. Cable bundles shall not be clinched or tied together with
excessive force, thereby holding jacket deformation to a minimum. Individual cable bend radii may
be no less than four times the cable diameter or 0.6 inches, whichever is greater.

271500-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 271500 – BACKBONE CABLING

G. During termination, pair twists shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point.
In any case, the amount of untwisting must not exceed .5 inches at the point of termination.

H. Cables shall be dressed-in, Velcro® or Millepede® Mille-Ties releasable cable tied, and secured
to the ladder rack, plywood backboard, and/or other suitable surfaces to ensure a professional
appearance and run straight, level, and parallel to building lines, with 90° corners where possible.
Contractor shall comply with manufacturer’s Standard pulling tension and minimum bend radii at
all times.

I. In the RMER/RTR, cables associated with a given work area shall be terminated into contiguous
positions in the patch panel. For example, if each work area is equipped with two Category 6
cables, the first work area shall be terminated on positions 1 and 2 of the patch panel, the second
work area shall be terminated on positions 3 and 4 of the patch panel, and so forth.

J. In the RMER/RTR, a floor plan map illustrating the telecom outlets, WAPs and IP Camera
locations and numbers shall be made readily available and viewable.

K. Wherever practical, jacks that are installed at modular furniture locations shall be fully integrated
into furniture raceway locations that are designed for the purpose, avoiding the use of biscuit
jacks. Where the furniture system does not contain an integral raceway, and no apparent cable
management method is provided, cabling shall be neatly dressed and concealed upon review and
approval by the OPR. Velcro, double sided tape or other adhesive materials will only be accepted
if previously approved in writing by the OPR.

L. Cabling to wall mounted workstation outlets shall terminate in a single- or double-gang box
provided by others. Contractor shall provide the necessary connectors (as described elsewhere)
under a single-gang faceplate. The type of faceplate to be used shall be coordinated with the
architect for color, finish, etc.

M. Cabling to floor mounted workstation outlets shall be terminated in a flush or surface mounted
poke-thru or service fitting provided by others. All cabling and connectors shall remain within the
poke-thru or service fitting housing. If necessary, the Contractor shall modify the blank plates
provided with the poke-thru or service fitting in order to accommodate the connectors.

N. For horizontal FTP cabling, grounding of the shield should be made on the RMER end only.

O. For all horizontal cable runs that run exterior to the main building, install OSP-rated UTP or fiber
cable. Conduit shall be provided from the outlet to the RMER/RTR. OSP cabling shall not be
installed in a plenum-rate ceiling space.

P. For each UTP OSP cable that terminates outside the roof line of the building, furnish and install
one OSP protector, mounted to the plywood backboard in the equipment room, and bonded to the
grounding busbar via a minimum 14 AWG green jacketed ground wire. Terminate the UTP OSP
cable at the protector per manufacturer specifications. Where the OSP cable is terminated in an
RJ45 jack at an ATM, protection is furnished by others, and a 6 ft service loop shall be provided
so that the surface mounted RJ45 single-outlet jack can be dressed into the interior of the ATM by
others.

Q. All outlet jacks, cable, patch panel, patch cords must match the Category or Fiber Grade of cable
being deployed.

3.2 TESTING
A. DESCRIPTION

271500-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 271500 – BACKBONE CABLING

1. Prior to the testing commencing, the Contractor is to provide a comprehensive testing

methodology document for approval, prior to any testing commencing. This document shall
include the following information:

2. Brief overview of the project (location, scope etc.)

3. Overview of the testing procedure including supporting documentation, onsite equipment

calibration/ referencing and cleaning procedure.

4. Details of the equipment to be used.

5. Calibration requirements and certification for the equipment to be used

6. Test result backup procedure

7. Details of procedure for remediating any test results which do not pass the required tests

8. A program of works for the testing, should this not be clear in the overall installation
program

B. All electronic and optical measuring (test) equipment shall be within 12 months of a calibration
that has been carried out by an approved calibration house. All calibration certificates shall be
available on site during the testing phase. All test results shall identify the equipment serial
number (local and remote) of test equipment used

C. The “Store plot data” function of the tester must be enabled prior to any testing commencing.
This is to enable electronic re-testing at a later date should this be required. Test results issued
without the plot data enabled will be considered non-compliant and re-testing will be required at
the contractors cost.

D. All marginal (or star *) passes shall be considered fails and will require remediation until a pass
is achieved.

E. Once all products (i.e. cables and associated hardware) have been fully installed in their final
locations and labelled, testing of all cores/ cables may commence.

F. All cables/ cores shall be 100% tested in accordance with the sections below.

G. It is the contractor’s responsibility to remediate all faults found whilst testing at its own expense.
All test equipment shall be by the contractor.

H. JPMC may choose to witness test random elements of the installation, which should have
already been allowed for in the costs. The contractor shall provide 2 testing engineers and all
equipment required to undertake the witness testing (including fully charged test equipment).
Channel testing (including existing previously installed infrastructure may also be required as
part of the witness testing, to ensure that the full channel is compliant.

I. The project shall not be considered complete until all SCS infrastructure has been 100% tested
and test result issued to JPMC in both tester and PDF format. Test results are to be broken
down into 10Mb file sizes and emailed (FTP sites, CDs or flash drives are not permitted).

3.3 FIBER TESTING

A. Tests shall be carried out at 850nm and 1300nm for multi-mode testing and 1310nm and
1550nm for single-mode testing in one direction.

271500-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 271500 – BACKBONE CABLING

B. The fiber manufacturer’s warranty conditions shall be used to perform all fiber testing. These
standards are more stringent than International and National standards. The contractor is
required to perform custom tests using the tester and is therefore to adjust the contactor loss
values in the tester software accordingly.

C. Should installed fibers be required to be connected directly into a switch in a harness link
topology, all fibers will be patched prior to testing commencing, then individually un-patched,
tested, and finally re-patched. This is to mitigate polarity concerns.

D. When referencing fiber optic testers the 1 jumper (Method B) methodology shall be employed.

E. Fiber testers shall be compliant with encircle flux launch sources/ conditions. Encircled flux
testing patch leads shall be used and should not be mated beyond the maximum of 500 times.

F. Delivered cable tests are not required, however a Certificate of Conformance shall be supplied
with each trunk cable and copies made available on site and provided in the final handover
documentation.

G. Individual cable runs shall be traceable to the delivered trunk certification.

3.4 CATEGORY 6 AND CATEGORY 6A

TESTING

A. Permenant link and channel testing should be performed in accordance with the following
standrads per region:

1. ISO/IEC 11801

2. ANSI/TIA 568

B. Permanent link testing should be performed between a patch panel and an RJ45 outlet.

C. Channel testing should be performed between a patch panel and a factory terminated RJ45
plug (when a Harness link or consolidation point has been deployed). Channel testing between
two RJ45 outlets is not typically required.

D. System acceptance tests for Category 6 are detailed below:

Category 6 Category 6A & Category 6A (Catagory6A

Shielded/Foiled cables for Audio-Video
Cables Only)

1. Wire Map 1. Wire Map

2. Length 2. Length

3. Propagation Delay 3. Propagation Delay

4. Delay Skew 4. Delay Skew

5. DC Loop Resistance – recorded for 5. DC Loop Resistance

information only
6. DC Resistance Unbalance within a pair
6. DC Resistance Unbalance – recorded for

271500-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 271500 – BACKBONE CABLING

information only
7. DC Resistance Unbalance between pairs
7. Insertion Loss
8. Insertion Loss
8. NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk)
9. NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk)
9. PS NEXT (Power Sum Near-End Crosstalk)
10. PS NEXT (Power Sum Near-End Crosstalk)
10. ACR-N (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio
11. ACR-N (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio
Near-End) – recorded for information only
Near-End)
11. PS ACR-N (Power Sum Attenuation to
12. PS ACR-N (Power Sum Attenuation to
Crosstalk Ratio Near-End) – recorded for
Crosstalk Ratio Near-End)
information only
13. ACR-F (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-
12. ACR-F (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-
End)
End)
14. PS ACR-F (Power Sum Attenuation to
13. PS ACR-F (Power Sum Attenuation to
Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)
Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)
15. Return Loss
14. Return Loss
16. TCL (Transverse Conversion Loss)
15. TCL (Transverse Conversion Loss) –
recorded for information only
17. ELTCTL (Equal Level Transverse
Conversion Transfer Loss)
16. ELTCTL (Equal Level Transverse
Conversion Transfer Loss) – recorded for
information only 18. PS ANEXT (Power Sum Alien Near-End
Crosstalk)

19. Average PS ANEXT (Average Power Sum

Alien Near-End Crosstalk)

20. PS AACR-F (Power Sum Alien Attenuation

to Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)

21. Average PS AACR-F (Average Power Sum

Alien Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)

22. Shield/Foil Continuity (for Catagory6A

Shielded/Foiled cables only)

E. All marginal (or star *) passes shall be considered fails and will require remediation until a pass
is achieved

3.3 DOCUMENTATION
A. All test results are to be issued in PDF format a maximum of two days after final completion of the
testing. The project will not be considered complete and invoices will not be paid until this is
achieved.

271500-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 271500 – BACKBONE CABLING

B. PDF file sizes are to be no greater than 10Mb as email is the only option of issuing them. Paper
copies are not required.

C. The test results in the pdf document are to be sequenced in numerical order, and the port
description should match the labelling nomenclature. It is imperative that the test results detail the
local length measurement units.

D. It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure all ports have been 100% tested prior to submitting the
test results.

E. The contractor shall provide an electronic copy of the test results and the final as-built drawings
showing all horizontal cable labels at each outlet location. The final as-built cable label shall be
identical to the cable identifier in the test results.

F. The contractor shall provide the final manufacturer performance and assurance warranty, test
results and final as-built drawings as a complete close out submittal. The project will not be
considered complete and invoices will not be paid until this is achieved.

END OF SECTION

271500-7 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 275319 – CELLULAR ANTENNA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Cellular antennas are deployed for Branches.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. JPMC’s cellular antenna deployment utilizes the following major materials:

1. Outdoor Omnidirectional Antenna for 2G/3G/4G Cellular (JPMC supplied)
2. 4G Lightning Suppressors/Arrestors for outdoor antenna installs
3. Ceiling mount bracket (JDTeck) for indoor panel antennal installs
4. Directional (panel or log periodic style) antennas (JPMC supplied)
5. LMR-240 Flexible Low Loss Communications Coax or LMR-400 Flexible Low Loss
Communications Coax
6. TNC Connectors (to router), N connectors to antenna

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Cable & Antenna Installation

1. Rooftop installation:
a. Perform RF assessment from the roof for Verizon Wireless and AT&T Wireless LTE
service to confirm banking center has a useable LTE signal by the time it reaches
JPMC router in the Retail Main Equipment Room (RMER);
1) GNS Signal Strength & Quality Guidelines:
a) RSSI: > -80 dBm (signal strength - LTE or 3G)
NOTE: SS Power can be used in place of RSSI on the cell survey to
indicate signal strength. SS Power reading must be ≥ 97 dBm.
b) RSRP: > -105 dBm (signal strength specific to LTE)
c) RSRQ: > -13 dB (signal quality specific to LTE)
d) SNR: > 5 dB (signal quality - LTE or 3G)
b. Perform initial speed tests with a LTE modem technology that is equal to Retail
network Standard (LTE Category 3, Category 6, or Category 18). Record local
frequency bands and transmit/receive channels in use for each provider, for use with
more precise testing equipment. (i.e., Anritsu device). Contact Retail network team
for current LTE standard being used.
c. Provide JPMC real estate with a recommendation for antenna placement – JPMC to
approve final antenna placement prior to placement
d. Install (1) cellular antenna (TBD). Install (1) LMR 240 (or LMR 400) coax cable from
the RMER/RTR to the Lightning Arrestor location using existing rooftop penetration
wherever feasible
1) Terminate both ends of the LMR 240 (or LMR 400) coax cable with the
Lightning Arrestor protected end utilizing (TBD) connector to Cisco 819 end
utilizing TNC-Type Male connector)
2) Provide 2 feet of slack at the midpoint of the vertical cable manager, to assure
bend radius and connectivity to the router.
e. Attach the antenna-end of the cable to the Cisco 4G Lightning Arrestor
f. Extend from surge protector to antenna to the 4G compatible lightning protector.
1) Terminate both ends of the LMR 240 (or LMR 400) coax cable with the
Antenna end utilizing N-type Male connector, and the Lightning Arrestor
unprotected end utilizing TNC-Type Male connector).

275319-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE

SECTION 275319 – CELLULAR ANTENNA

g. Ground the surge protector with a #6 AWG ground wire to nearest ground source.
The ground cable may not exceed 20 inches.
h. Weatherize any outdoor connections and fire-stop all penetrations

2. Ceiling-mount installation:
a. Install (1) JPMC-supplied cellular antenna [CommScope CELLMAX-D-CPUSE-O)]
with ceiling mount bracket JDTeck (CMB-YAMB-1) at JPMC-designated location
within the banking center, in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines.
b. Install (1) LMR 240 (or LMR 400) coax cable from the RMER/RTR to the cellular
antenna location
1) Provide 2 feet of slack at the midpoint of the vertical cable manager, to assure
bend radius and connectivity to the router.
c. Terminate both ends of the LMR 240 (or LMR 400) coax cable with the antenna end
utilizing TNC-Female connector and the Cisco 819 end utilizing TNC-Type Male
connector)
B. Testing/Remediation/Documentation
1. Test coaxial (LMR 240 or LMR 400) cable from router end to antenna end for; continuity,
shorts, signal loss, etc.
2. Test RF signal strength/quality at the RTR/RMER end of the connection delivered by
antenna
3. Compare signal levels at router to design values
4. Remediate any system issues (antenna or cabling) that deviate from planned values
5. Provide photos of antenna installation and RMER/RTR termination along with final test
results for sweep and RF signal level tests to JPMC (requirement for final acceptance)

END OF SECTION

275319-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The scope covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all labor, equipment,
materials, and performing all operations in connection with the installation of the fire alarm systems
and emergency voice/alarm communications systems as shown on the drawings, as hereinafter
specified, and as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Each fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of State and local codes and ordinances, with
American with Disabilities Act (ADA), local accessibility codes, with other authorities having
jurisdiction, and with NFPA-70, NFPA-72, N.E.C. Article 760, NFPA 90A, NFPA-101. The fire alarm
system equipment shall be UL listed for the purpose intended.
C. System Description:
1. Non-coded, addressable system; multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service
only.
2. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required for, and
reasonably incidental to, the providing of a fire alarm system.
D. System Scope:
1. Where a Fire Alarm System is required by local ordinance, the installed system shall comply with
the minimum requirements of that code.
2. Where a Fire Alarm System is not required by local ordinance, a complete and functioning Fire
Alarm System consisting of the devices listed in Section 2.3 Devices and Equipment, B.
Minimum System Devices shall be provided.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.
2. LED: Light-emitting diode.
3. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.
1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND SECTIONS
A. The conditions of the Contract, including the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, and
Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to work covered by this Section.
B. The following Specification Sections apply to the work specified in this Section.
1. 260500 – Common Work Results for Electrical.
2. 260519 – Low Voltage Conductors and Cables.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of
units required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
1.5 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
A. The following supervision of installation shall be provided by a trained service technician from the
manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment. The technician shall be U.L. certified and have a minimum
of two (2) years service experience in the fire alarm industry. The technician's name shall appear on
the equipment submittals and a letter shall be sent to the project engineer. The manufacturer's
service technician shall be responsible for the following items:
1. Pre-installation visit to the job site to review equipment submittals and verify method by which the
system should be wired.
2. During job progress, make periodic job site visits to verify installation and wiring of system.
3. Upon completion of wiring, final connections shall be made under the supervision of this
technician, and final checkout and certification of the system.

283100-1
 CHASE
SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

4. At the time of final checkout, technician shall give operational instructions to the owner and/or his
representative on the system.
B. All job site visits shall be dated and documented in writing and signed by the electrical contractor. Any
discrepancy shall be noted on this document and a copy kept in the system job folder which shall be
turned over to the project engineer any time during the project.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of
operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and
automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for
generic systems are not acceptable.
2. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
3. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire types and sizes.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for
system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color code.
5. Batteries: Size calculations.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
E. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for submittals
specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to authorities having
jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict
component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On
receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review.
F. Documentation:
1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to NFPA 72 to
Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to NFPA 72 to
Owner. Format of the written sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix.
a. Hard copies on paper to Owner.
1.7 PRODUCT DELEVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive equipment at job site. Verify applicable components and quantity delivered.
B. Handle equipment to prevent internal components' damage and breakage, as well as denting and
scoring of enclosure finish.
C. Do not install damaged equipment.
D. Store equipment in a clean, dry space and protect from dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and
physical damage.
E. After installation, protect equipment from damage by work of other trades.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. The fire alarm installer shall furnish a warranty in writing for labor and materials to be free from
electrical and mechanical defects for a period of one (1) year commencing with start-up and
beneficial use of any portion of the system.
B. The fire alarm manufacturer shall furnish in writing a one (1) year warranty listing all equipment in the
system and state that equipment to be free from inherent and mechanical defects due to
workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from start up and beneficial use of system.

283100-2
 CHASE
SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. System shall be a zoned, non-coded, continuous sounding, U.L. listed, electrically supervised
system, fully installed, tested and left in first class operating condition.
B. Comply with the International Fire Code with local amendments and NFPA 72.
C. Premises protection includes a Group B occupancy.
D. Actuation of an alarm initiating device shall:
1. Initiate a March Time Tone device within the fire alarm control panel and cause the respective
red zone alarm LED on the control panel to flash, until the acknowledge switch is actuated at the
control panel.
2. Once acknowledged, the zone LED will be constantly illuminated and the tone silenced until the
actuating device is restored to normal and the system is reset.
E. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
1. Manual stations (at FACP only).
2. Smoke detectors (at FACP only).
F. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously.
2. Identify alarm at the FACP and remote annunciator at the main entrance.
3. Transmit an alarm signal to an Owner-approved fire alarm monitoring company.
4. Power shut-down of gaming systems.
5. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alarm mode.
6. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was initiated.
7. Record events in the system memory.
G. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-
appliance circuits.
2. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices.
3. Loss of primary power at the FACP.
4. Ground or a single break in FACP internal circuits.
5. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP.
6. A break in standby battery circuitry.
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at the FACP or annunciator.
H. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble bell and annunciate at the FACP and
remote annunciator. Record event.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire Alarm system shall be Non-Proprietary, with all components compatible. Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. FACP and Equipment:
a. Edwards Systems Technology Inc.
b. Honeywell Gamewell/FCI
c. NOTIFIER; a GE-Honeywell Company.
d. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; a Cerberus Division.
e. Silent Knight; a GE-Honeywell Company.
f. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International Company.
g. Other manufacturers in accordance with Section 016000 Subsection 3.1 Substitution
Procedures.
2. Wire and Cable:
a. Comtran Corporation.
b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company.
c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company.
d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.

283100-3
 CHASE
SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

e. Other manufacturers in accordance with Section 016000 Subsection 3.1 Substitution

Procedures.
3. Audible and Visual Signals:
a. Amseco; a division of Kobishi America, Inc.
b. Commercial Products Group.
c. Gentex Corporation.
d. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company.
e. Other manufacturers in accordance with Section 016000 Subsection 3.1 Substitution
Procedures.
2.3 DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT
A. General
1. All fire alarm system devices shall comply with the requirements of the Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA).
B. Minimum system devices: JPMorgan Chase & Co, as a best practice and leader in the industry,
installs a fully code compliant fire alarm system for all retail locations throughout the United States for
the safety and protection of employees, customers and property. These code compliant, UL listed fire
alarm systems provide initiation, occupant notification and 24hr monitoring to our buildings regardless
of floor area or lack of jurisdictional requirements. JPMorgan Chase & Co will follow all AHJ
requirements.
1. (1) Addressable smoke detector to be located within each room containing building mechanical
equipment or electrical service or distribution equipment or panels.
2. (1) Addressable smoke detector in each Lobby.
3. (1) Addressable smoke detector in each 24-Hour Vestibule.
4. (1) Manual pull station at the primary entrance.
5. Notification devices in accordance with NFPA 72 due to size and plan of the space.
6. (1) Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) monitored by an authorized and approved UL listed central
monitoring station with the primary phone line being a cellular dialer.
7. Additional accessories and equipment as required to ensure a fully functioning system.
C. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)
1. General Description:
a. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed.
b. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
2. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
the FACP and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display
alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.
a. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, one line of 40 characters, minimum.
b. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands.
3. Circuits:
a. The system wiring and installation shall be in compliance with applicable codes, project
drawings and as required by the manufacturer. All wiring shall be color coded, tagged and
checked to assure that it is free from shorts and grounds.
4. Smoke-Alarm Verification:
a. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP.
b. Activate a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the detector.
c. Record events.
d. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.
e. Cancel FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.
5. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for
supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for the dc
component shall be from the ac supply.
6. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACP and remote
annunciator after initiating devices are restored to normal.
a. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an
"alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained.

283100-4
 CHASE
SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

b. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances
until silencing switch is operated again.
c. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated,
notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
7. Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of initiating
devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The FACP and
annunciators shall display a test indication while the test is underway. If testing ceases while in
walk-test mode, after a preset delay, the system shall automatically return to normal.
8. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trouble, and
supervisory signals to a remote alarm station through a digital alarm communicator
transmitter/cellular dialer and telephone lines.
9. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating
devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory and digital alarm
communicator transmitter shall be powered by the 24-V dc source.
a. The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the
power-supply module rating.
b. Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at the service
entrance equipment. Paint the switch box red and identify it with "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
POWER."
10. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger and an
automatic transfer switch.
a. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.
11. Surge Protection:
12. Install surge protectors recommended by FACP manufacturer. Install on all system wiring
external to the building housing the FACP.
D. Manual pull boxes
1. Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in
contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted on recessed outlet
box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
a. Single-action mechanism, type. With integral addressable module, arranged to
communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP and remote
annunciator.
E. Smoke detectors
1. General Description:
a. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
b. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to the FACP.
2. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested
according to UL 268A.
3. Duct Smoke Detectors:
a. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1) Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
2) Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested
according to UL 268A.
b. UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
c. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to the FACP.
d. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
F. Notification appliances
1. Description: The system shall utilize UL listed and FM approved fire alarm notification
appliances as shown on the drawings.
G. Remote annunciator

283100-5
 CHASE
SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

1. Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble
indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including acknowledging,
silencing, resetting, and testing.
a. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Class 1.
2. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP. Controls
with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing functions for alarm,
supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.
H. Addressable interface device
1. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a system address for
listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
I. Digital alarm communicator transmitter
1. Listed and labeled according to UL 632.
2. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the FACP,
and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number for a remote
central station, primary line shall be a cellular dialer. When contact is made with the central
station(s), the signal is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where
supervising 2 lines, if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit
initiates a local trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the
remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit
automatically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines,
the local trouble signal is initiated.
3. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery capacity is
adequate to comply with NFPA 72 requirements.
4. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.
J. Wire and cable
1. The system wiring and installation shall be in compliance with applicable codes, project drawings
and as required by the manufacturer. All wiring shall be color coded, tagged and checked to
assure that it is free from shorts and grounds.
2.4 MONITORING SERVICES
A. Fire Alarm system vendor shall include and initiate 24-hour monitoring service with Owner’s approved
monitoring service vendor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which fire alarm system is to be installed and notify Engineer in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 POWER REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide system power with 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 wire, 60 HZ on separate fuse with lock-out.
3.3 CONDUIT, WIRING, AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring as specified in Section 16120. All wiring shall be color coded as follows and any wiring
carrying 32 VAC, 50/60 HZ or greater, must be in conduits separate from those containing stations,
detectors, or signal circuits.
1. Fire alarm control panel - 120 Volt, 2 #12 AWG.
2. Alarm initiating devices - 2 #14 AWG per zone (1) brown, one (1) violet.
3. Audio/visual devices - 2 #14 AWG per zone, one (1) red, one (1) black.
4. Slave fan relay - 2 #14 AWG blue from fire alarm control to fan relay.
5. Remote annunciator/graphic devices - 2 pairs #18 AWG twisted shielded. One pair for power,
one pair for zone data transmission.
B. Install conduit and wiring to telephone terminal cabinet for central station or municipal connections,
and coordinate hookup with supplier of central station network systems.

283100-6
 CHASE
SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

C. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main
service ground to the FACP.
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend
the full width of the duct.
E. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and
horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.
F. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6
inches below the ceiling.
G. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
H. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16.
B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.
C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement using the form for
Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in NFPA 72. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built drawings and
system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly located, damaged, or nonfunctional
equipment, and correct before beginning tests.
4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in NFPA 72.
a. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.
b. System shall test free from grounds, opens, and short circuits.
5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including demonstration of
sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFPA 70.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions for protecting installed devices during
construction activities. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
3.7 MONITORING SERVICE
A. Initiate 24-hour monitoring service with Owner’s approved monitoring service vendor.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and devices. Refer to Division 1 sections.

END OF SECTION

283100-7
 CHASE
SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The scope covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all labor, equipment,
materials, and performing all operations in connection with the installation of the Fire Alarm System as
shown on the drawings, as hereinafter specified, and as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General conditions of the Division 1 General Requirements shall apply the work specified in this
section.
B. Sections 260500 and 260519 apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.3 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
A. System shall be a zoned, non-coded, continuous sounding, U.L. listed, electrically supervised system,
fully installed, tested and left in first class operating condition.
B. All fire alarm system devices to be "ADA" compliant.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of regulatory agencies:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. NFPA-70 National Electrical Code
b. NFPA-101 Life Safety Code
2. Federal, state, and local codes and ordinances
3. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
B. Reference Standards:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. NFPA-72A Local Protective Signaling Systems
b. NFPA-72B Auxiliary Signaling Systems
c. NFPA-72C Remote Station Systems
d. NFPA-72D Proprietary Signaling Systems
e. NFPA-72E Automatic Fire Detectors
2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
C. All equipment specified shall be U.L. listed and cross listed for use with the main fire alarm control
panel and shall bear the same manufacturer's name on the main control panel as well as all the
remote devices. Systems with equipment of various manufacturer names are not acceptable.
D. Equipment must be manufactured by a firm who has been actively manufacturing fire alarm systems
for a minimum of ten (10) years.
1.5 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
A. The following supervision of installation shall be provided by a trained service technician from the
manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment. The technician shall be U.L. certified and have a minimum
of two (2) years service experience in the fire alarm industry. The technician's name shall appear on
the equipment submittals and a letter shall be sent to the project engineer. The manufacturer's service
technician shall be responsible for the following items:
1. Pre-installation visit to the job site to review equipment submittals and verify method by which the
system should be wired.
2. During job progress, make periodic job site visits to verify installation and wiring of system.
3. Upon completion of wiring, final connections shall be made under the supervision of this
technician, and final checkout and certification of the system.
4. At the time of final checkout, technician shall give operational instructions to the owner and/or his
representative on the system.

283100-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

B. All job site visits shall be dated and documented in writing and signed by the electrical contractor. Any
discrepancy shall be noted on this document and a copy kept in the system job folder which shall be
turned over to the project engineer any time during the project.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 1.
1. Product data sheets and equipment description.
2. Bill of materials listing all components and devices.
3. System wiring and interconnection diagrams.
4. Operating instructions and maintenance manuals detailing component and general system
operating description.
5. Battery backup calculations.
1.7 PRODUCT DELEVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive equipment at job site. Verify applicable components and quantity delivered.
B. Handle equipment to prevent internal components' damage and breakage, as well as denting and
scoring of enclosure finish.
C. Do not install damaged equipment.
D. Store equipment in a clean, dry space and protect from dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and
physical damage.
E. After installation, protect equipment from damage by work of other trades.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. The electrical contractor shall guarantee all wiring and equipment to be free from inherent and
mechanical defects due to workmanship and materials used for a period of one (1) year from date of
accepted installation.
B. The fire alarm manufacturer, and not distributor or electrical contractor, shall furnish in writing a one
(1) year warranty. Warranty shall list all equipment in the system and state that equipment to be free
from inherent and mechanical defects due to workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year
from start up and beneficial use of system.
C. Warranty service for the equipment shall be provided by the system supplier's factory trained
representative during normal working hours, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. Emergency
service provided at times other than as stipulated above shall be available from the same source at
additional cost to owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The fire alarm system specified is manufactured by the Simplex Time Recorder Co. Catalog and
model numbers are intended to establish the type and quality of equipment and system design as well
as extract operating features required. The manufacturer's specification sheets of each item so listed
shall be considered to be part of the specification and binding therein.
B. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers:
1. Edwards
2. Notifier
3. Reliable Fire Equipment Company
2.2 DEVICES
A. Alarm initiating devices shall be grouped in zones.
B. Actuation of any alarm initiating device shall automatically cause the following operations when
furnished as a part of this system:
1. Activate audio-visual devices continuously.
2. Indicate on the control panel the zone initiating the alarm.

283100-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

3. Indicate the zone of the reporting device on the remote annunciator.

4. Transmit a signal to the local fire department (via leased telephone lines).
5. Automatically control re-circulating fans.
C. Fire Alarm Control Panel
1. Shall be 400 Series, surface mounted where indicated on drawings with key operated, locked
door and shatter-resistant viewing window.
2. The panel shall use light emitting diodes (LED) throughout and shall include the following
features:
a. Operator interface switches for alarm:
1) Acknowledge/silence (with resound)
2) Trouble acknowledge/silence (with resound)
3) System reset
4) Manual evacuation
5) City disconnect
6) Auxiliary one bypass (master fan disconnect).
7) Auxiliary two bypass.
b. Visible LED indicators:
1) AC power-on (green)
2) Power trouble (yellow)
3) System trouble (yellow)
4) Earth ground trouble (yellow)
5) City trouble (yellow)
6) Alarm for each zone (red)
7) Trouble for each zone (yellow)
8) Signal circuit trouble for each circuit (yellow)
c. To accommodate and facilitate job site and future changes, the control panel shall be
microprocessor based to allow custom field programming to meet specific applications and
local code requirements. This on-site field programming shall provide for:
1) Selective signaling
2) Relay control
3) Fan/damper cross zoning
4) Timing functions
5) Non-alarm monitoring
6) Point sensing
7) Elevator recall control
8) Zone coding (PNIS)
9) Stage 1 and stage 2 alarm operations.
d. These features shall be dip-switch selectable in non-volatile memory:
1) Desired signal circuit type of operation: march time code, temporal code, selective
code, alarm silence inhibit (to prevent silencing of signals before the selected minimum
time has expired), signal circuit cut out, manual evacuation.
2) Waterflow/sprinkler supervisory operation (where applicable) on two (2) designated and
distinct zones of the system.
3) A supervisory audible and visible "valve tamper" signal indication at the fire alarm
control panel and remote annunciator (for each water flow and main).
4) Off site monitoring output capability for: reverse polarity, local energy, shunt trip, or a
form C contact output.
5) Alarm verification to reduce unwanted alarms in smoke detectors. This feature shall
allow smoke detectors that have alarm verification while residing on the same zone
with heat detectors and manual stations that do not have alarm verification.
6) Functional system test capability which, when in the test mode, will enable any
activated initiating device to report their individual resident zone at the control panel
and audibly over the signal circuit via a zone code pattern for four (4) seconds and then
automatically reset panel.
e. Metal oxide varistors (MOV's) shall be provided on the system power supply and municipal
connection circuit to provide transient suppression protection to the control panel.
f. The zoning of fire alarm system shall be pre local fire prevention authorities having
jurisdiction over this project.

283100-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

D. Standby Batteries
1. Furnish and install, as part of the Fire Alarm Control Panel, type 2081 series batteries, sealed
rechargeable, lead calcium and capable of providing sixty (60) hours of complete fire alarm
operation in the event of loss of commercial power.
2. Batteries shall have low/no battery supervision and shall be kept fully charged by the control
panel automatic charger. Charger shall be capable of recharging batteries to 70% capacity in 12
hours. Minimum battery size shall be 10 AH.
E. Remote Annunciator
1. Furnish and install type remote unit, electrically supervised, with same number of zones and
custom nomenclature as the main control panel. Panel to be flush mounted where shown on
drawings, with rear illuminated high-brilliance LED's Lamp Test, and have all labeling protected
from tampering. (Rub-on characters or stick-on labels shall not be acceptable). All zone data
shall be transmitted from the Fire Alarm Control Panel to the Annunciator via one pair of
#18AWG twisted shielded wires.
2. Status Command Unit shall also contain a green "Power-On" LED, a visual trouble LED and
audible trouble indicator, and contain the following control switches: trouble silence, system reset
and manual evacuation. No additional wiring shall be required for these functions.
F. Signal Initiating Devices: Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings, the following signal
initiating devices.
1. Station: Furnish and install type 2099-9754 single action manual pull stations with raised white
lettering and a smooth high gloss finish. The break-glass station shall have a hinged front with
key lock. Stations which utilize screwdrivers, allen wrenches, or other commonly available tools
shall not be accepted. Stations shall be keyed alike with the fire alarm control panel. When the
station is operated, the handle shall lock in a protruding manner to facilitate quick visual
identification of the activated station. Provide type 2099-9800 red wire guards where shown on
drawings.
2. Thermodetectors: Furnish and install white, low-profile, type 2098-9439 thermodetectors rated at
135 degree rate of rise and fixed temperature in all areas except where noted on the drawings,
which shall be rated at 200 degrees fixed temperature.
3. Smoke Detectors: Furnish and install type 2098-9201, ceiling mounted, photoelectric smoke
detectors. Detectors shall have a completely closed back to restrict entry of dust and air
turbulence and 20 mesh to protect insect screen. Electrons of unit shall be shielded to protect
against false alarms from E.M.E. and R.F.I. Unit shall contain a red LED which shall pulse to
indicate power on and which shall glow continuously to indicate alarm. Detector shall have a
magnetically operated functional test switch and be capable of being supplied with a remote
alarm LED indicator. Unit shall have a separate mounting base with terminal strip for ease of
wiring, changing, and cleaning. Remote Alarm Indicator shall be type 2098-9788 with red light
emitting diode (LED) mounted on a single gang stainless steel plate.
4. Duct Smoke Detectors: Furnish and install type 2098-9649 photoelectric duct smoke detector.
Duct housing base assembly shall be provided with an auxiliary relay from Form C contacts,
rated at 1 AMP. Necessary sample tubes shall be provided across the enter width of duct work.
Provide remote duct detector test switch with LED for each unit mounted adjacent fire alarm
control panel. Exact location of the remote duct smoke detector test switches to be coordinated
and located as directed by the local governing authorities.
G. Alarm Indication Devices: Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings, the following audible or
audible/visual devices:
1. Audible Device: Furnish and install type 2901-9840 audible units, semi-flush mounted on 4" x 4"
electrical outlet box.
2. Visual Devices: Furnish and install type 4904-9501 visual only device, semi-flush mounted on 4"
x 4" electrical outlet box with single gang mud ring. The side viewing white translucent lens shall
have the word "FIRE" in red imprinted on it. Flash rate shall be 1 to 3 flashes per second with
100 candela flash intensity.
H. Remote Devices: Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings, the following remote devices.
I. Slave Fan Relays: Furnish and install type 2088-9011 fan relay with required contacts. Cabinet shall
have key lock assembly the same as main control cabinet. Minimum contact rating shall be 10 AMP
resistive.

283100-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which fire alarm system is to be installed and notify Engineer in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 POWER REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide system power with 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 wire, 60 HZ on separate fuse with lock-out.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring as specified in Section 16120. All wiring shall be color coded as follows and any wiring
carrying 32 VAC, 50/60 HZ or greater, must be in conduits separate from those containing stations,
detectors, or signal circuits.
1. Fire alarm control panel - 120 Volt, 2 #12 AWG.
2. Alarm initiating devices - 2 #14 AWG per zone (1) brown, one (1) violet.
3. Audio/visual devices - 2 #14 AWG per zone, one (1) red, one (1) black.
4. Slave fan relay - 2 #14 AWG blue from fire alarm control to fan relay.
5. Remote annunciator/graphic devices - 2 pairs #18 AWG twisted shielded. One pair for power,
one pair for zone data transmission.
B. Install conduit and wiring to telephone terminal cabinet for central station or municipal connections,
and coordinate hookup with supplier of central station network systems.
C. Adjustment and cleaning: Clean system equipment and enclosures of dirt and debris.
D. Field Quality Control:
1. System shall test free from grounds, opens, and short circuits.
2. Upon completion of installation of fire alarm equipment, electrical contractor shall provide to the
Engineer a signed, written statement substantially in the form as follows:

"The undersigned having been engaged as the Electrical Contractor on the __________________
Building confirms that the fire alarm equipment was installed in accordance with wiring diagrams,
instructions, and directions provided to us by the manufacturer."

END OF SECTION

283100-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 312200 - GRADING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Removal of topsoil.
B. Rough grading the site for site structures, building pads, and paved areas.
C. Finish grading.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 015713 – Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by horizontal
dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protect above- and below-grade utilities that remain.
B. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain as a portion of final
landscaping.
C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs
from grading equipment and vehicular traffic.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities.
C. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage.
3.3 ROUGH GRADING
A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded, without mixing with
foreign materials.
B. Do not remove topsoil when wet.
C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded.
D. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture content.
E. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.
F. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill.
3.4 SOIL REMOVAL
A. Stockpile topsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site.
B. Stockpile subsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site.

312200-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 312200 - GRADING

C. Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 8 feet; protect from erosion. See
Section 015713 for Rules for Stockpile.
3.5 FINISH GRADING
A. Before Finish Grading:
1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected.
2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted.
B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove soil contaminated with
petroleum products.
C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches.
D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches.
E. Place topsoil in areas indicated.
F. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade.
G. Place topsoil to thickness as scheduled.
H. Place topsoil during dry weather.
I. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.
J. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage.
K. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of
subgrade.
L. Lightly compact placed topsoil.
3.6 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot from required elevation.
B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water.
B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.

END OF SECTION

312200-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 312318 – EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 1 Sections

1.2 REFERENCES

ASTM D422 – Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.

ASTM D698 – Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard
Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3).

ASTM D1556 – Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-
Cone Method.

ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-
Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

ASTM D4318 – Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Granular Subbase: Fill directly beneath slabs-on-grade.

B. Backfill: Fill immediately behind foundation elements or retaining walls.

C. Structural Fill: Fill under the structure other than the granular subbase.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Upon request, submit soil test reports performed by the Structural Testing/Inspection Agency.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to the Structural Quality Assurance Plan in the Structural Drawings.

1.6 SURVEY

A. Prior to construction, have structure location staked and certified by a licensed surveyor. If
discrepancies between actual lines and elevations exist, notify Architect/Structural Engineer
before proceeding with layout of structure.

1.7 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Copies of a subsurface investigation of the site will be made available upon request. The data is
not intended as a representation or warranty of the continuity of such conditions. Owner will not
be responsible for interpretation or conclusions drawn by the Contractor. The data is made
available for the convenience of the Contractor and is not guaranteed to represent all conditions
that may be encountered.

312318-1
 CHASE
SECTION 312318 – EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES

B. Contractor may examine the site and make his own subsurface explorations at no additional cost
to the Owner. Notify Owner prior to making any subsurface explorations.

1.8 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Locate existing underground utilities by careful hand excavation. If utilities are to remain in place,
provide protection from damage during construction operations.

B. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in
operation. Do not interrupt existing utility service facilities occupied and used by Owner or others,
unless written permission is given by the Architect and then only after temporary utility services
have been provided.

C. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation,
consult the Architect immediately for directions.

D. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.

1.9 NOTICE

A. Notify the Architect/Structural Engineer 48 hours prior to the beginning of any excavation work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GRANULAR SUBBASE

A. Granular Subbase: Clean, fine-graded material with at least 10 to 30 percent of particles passing
a No. 100 sieve but not contaminated with clay, silt, or organic material. The material shall have a
uniform distribution of particle sizes ranging from No. 4 to the No. 200 sieve. Refer to ASTM C 33,
Table 1, for limitation of deleterious material finer than No. 200 sieve. Unwashed size No. 10 per
ASTM D 448 and manufactured sand from a rock-crushing operation is acceptable.

2.2 BACKFILL

A. Backfill: Sound and free-draining, such as sand, gravel or crushed stone with less than 10%
passing the 200 sieve. Maximum diameter shall be 1-1/2 inches.

2.3 STRUCTURAL FILL

A. Structural Fill: Inorganic soils classified at CL, ML, SM, SC, SW, SP, GW, GP, GM and GC or a
combination of these groups with LL less than 50 and a plasticity index of less than 30.

B. Structural Fill shall be free of organics, debris and deleterious materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 STRIPPING

A. Strip vegetation, topsoil, roots, and other unsuitable material to a depth determined by the
Structural Testing/Inspection Agency but not less than one foot, nor less than 10 feet outside the
perimeter of the structure.

312318-2
 CHASE
SECTION 312318 – EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES

B. Stockpile sufficient amounts of topsoil as required to cover areas to be landscaped with a

minimum of six inches of material.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation shall be considered unclassified. Excavations shall comply with U.S. Department of
Labor, Occupation Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations.

B. Perform excavation to the depths and limits on the Drawings and as specified herein.

C. Do not excavate to full depth when there is probability of frost forming or ground freezing in
excavation before concrete is placed.

D. Ground water may be encountered during the foundation excavation. Provide a system for
controlling the ground water to a level at least three feet below the lowest point of the excavation.

E. Keep excavations dry by sloping ground away from holes and trenches.

3.3 PROOFROLLING

A. After stripping or excavation and before any fill placement, fill areas shall be proofrolled with a
minimum of two coverages of a loaded dump truck or scraper in each of two perpendicular
directions.

B. Areas found to be soft or pumping shall have the soft soil removed and replaced with structural fill
and compacted as outlined herein.

3.4 PLACEMENT OF STRUCTURAL FILL

A. Do not place structural fill on subgrade that contains frost, mud or is frozen.

B. Structural fill shall be placed and compacted in 8-inch thick loose layers.

C. Compact structural fill to 98 percent of the maximum dry density as measured by Standard
Proctor, ASTM D698, with water content within +3/-2 percent of the optimum moisture content.

3.5 PLACEMENT OF BACKFILL

A. Backfill behind wall shall be placed in layers of six inches.

B. Compact backfill behind walls to 95 percent of the maximum dry density as measured by
Standard Proctor, ASTM D698, with water content within +3/-2 percent of the optimum moisture
content.

3.6 PLACEMENT OF GRANULAR SUBBASE

A. Do not place granular subbase on subgrade that contains frost, mud or is frozen.

B. Compact granular subbase to 95 percent of the maximum dry density as measured by Standard
Proctor, ASTM D698, with the water content within +3/-2 percent of the optimum moisture
content.

312318-3
 CHASE
SECTION 312318 – EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES

3.7 CLEAN UP

A. Remove excess excavated materials from job site and upon completion leave site in clean
condition.

END OF SECTION

312318-4
 CHASE
SECTION 023610 – TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for termite control:

1. Soil treatment with termiticide.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency.

B. PCO: Pest control operator.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Service Life of Soil Treatment: Soil treatment by use of a termiticide that is effective for not less
than five years against infestation of subterranean termites.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA-Registered Label.

B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying that treatments
furnished comply with requirements.

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

D. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for
Owner's record information, including the following as applicable:

1. Date and time of application.

2. Moisture content of soil before application.
3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.
6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

002113-1
 CHASE
SECTION 023610 – TERMITE CONTROL

A. Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having

jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced and has completed termite control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and
whose work has a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration
number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products through one source.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen.
Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA-Registered Label requirements and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting
operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs, before
construction.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and
run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.

B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite
control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean
termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil
and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

C. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Continuing Service: Provide a proposal for continuing service, including monitoring, inspection, and
retreatment for occurrences of termite activity, from applicator to Owner, in the form of a standard
yearly (or other period) continuing service agreement, starting on the date of Substantial Completion.
State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL TREATMENT

A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or

002113-2
 CHASE
SECTION 023610 – TERMITE CONTROL

foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are
not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the
maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EPA-
Registered Label.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AgrEvo Environmental Health, Inc.; a Company of Hoechst and Schering, Berlin.

2. American Cyanamid Co.; Agricultural Products Group; Specialty Products Department.
3. Bayer Corp.; Garden & Professional Care.
4. DowElanco.
5. FMC Corp.; Pest Control Specialties.
6. Zeneca Professional Products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation
work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with
application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources of
wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes,
formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations.

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could
decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be
treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be
applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer.

C. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.

3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT

A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of
termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous
horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building
construction. Distribute the treatment evenly.

002113-3
 CHASE
SECTION 023610 – TERMITE CONTROL

1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Underground-supported slab construction, including

footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before
concrete footings and slabs are placed.

2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along
both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab,
and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along entire outside perimeter,
from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.

3. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated.

B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.

C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-
supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label
instructions.

D. Post warning signs in areas of application.

E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping,
or other construction activities following application.
.

END OF SECTION

002113-4
 CHASE
SECTION 320190 - MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Maintain plants in manner that promotes health, growth, color and appearance, to quality levels
specified; replace dead, dying, and damaged plants at no extra cost to Owner.
B. Maintain newly planted landscape plants, including turf (lawns), trees, shrubs, ground cover,
perennials, flowering bulbs, and annuals.
C. Maintenance Period: The time frame covered by these requirements is:
1. Time Frame: From date of installation until date of turnover or 14 days from installation,
whichever is longer.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. 015713 – Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control
B. 312200 – Grading.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A300 Part 1 - American National Standard for Tree Care Operations -- Tree, Shrub and Other
Woody Plant Maintenance -- Standard Practices; 2001.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE - GENERAL
A. Protect existing vegetation, pavements, and facilities from damage due to maintenance activities;
restore damaged items to original condition or replace, at no extra cost to Owner.
B. Keep all dirt areas free from weeds during construction, and after landscaping is complete until date of
turnover.
C. Watering, Soil Erosion, and Sedimentation Control: Comply with federal, state, local, and other
regulations in force; prevent over-watering, run-off, erosion, puddling, and ponding.
1. Repair temporary erosion control mechanisms provided by others.
2. Repair eroded areas and replant, when caused by inadequate maintenance.
3. Prevent sediment from entering storm drains.
D. Trees: Exercise care to avoid girdling trees; provide protective collars if necessary; remove protective
collars at end of maintenance period.
E. Drainage Channels: Remove obstructions in gutters, catch basins, storm drain inlets, yard drains,
swales, ditches, and overflows.
1. Remove grates from catch basins to clean.
2. Prevent encroachment of other vegetation on turfed surface drainage channels.
F. Replanting: Perform replacement and replanting immediately upon removal of dead plant.
3.2 IRRIGATION
A. Irrigation: Do not allow plants to wilt; apply water as required to supplement rainfall; do not waste
water; do not water plants or areas not needing water; do not water during rainfall; shut off water flow
when finished; repair leaks.
1. No automatic irrigation system is available; provide hoses and other equipment as required.
2. Do not drive water trucks over turf, seeded areas, or planting beds.
3. Provide backflow preventers on hose bibbs used for irrigation hoses.

320190-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 320190 - MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING

3.3 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain turf in manner required to produce turf that is healthy, uniform in color and leaf texture, and
free from weeds and other undesirable growth.
B. Mowing: During growing season(s) mow turf to uniform height, in manner that prevents scalping,
rutting, bruising, and uneven or rough cutting.
1. Prior to mowing clean all debris and leaves from turf surface.
2. Schedule frequency of mowing so that no more than one-quarter to one-third of grass leaf length
is removed during a cutting.
3. Make each successive mowing at approximately 45 degrees to the previous mowing, if practical.
4. Cool Season Grasses:
a. Reduce mowing height in fall and spring.
b. Use rotary type mowers; mulcher type mowers may be used.
5. Warm Season Grasses:
a. Increase mowing height slightly as fall approaches.
b. Use reel type mowers; do not use mulcher mowers.
C. Trimming: Immediately after each mowing, neatly trim perimeter of each turf area and around
obstructions within turf area; match height and appearance of adjacent turf.
1. Adjacent to Pavements: Cut edges of turf to form a distinct, uniform turf edge.
2. Adjacent to Planting Beds and Permanently Mulched Areas: Cut edges of turf to form a
distinct, uniform turf edge.
3. Around Other Trees and Poles: Where no planting bed or mulched area exists, trimming
with string trimmer is acceptable.
4. At Fences: Trim on both sides of fence.
5. Irrigation Heads and Valve Boxes: Trim neatly so grass doesn't interfere with operation.
3.4 PLANTING BED MAINTENANCE
A. Planting beds include all planted areas except turf.
B. Begin maintenance immediately after plants have been installed; inspect at least once a week and
perform needed maintenance promptly.
3.5 TREE AND SHRUB MAINTENANCE
A. Trees will be considered dead when main leader has died back or when 25 percent or more of crown
has died.
B. Shrubs will be considered dead when 25 percent or more of plant has died.
C. Adjust stakes, guys and turnbuckles, ties, and trunk wrap as required to promote growth and avoid
girdling.
3.6 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. 2 days prior to end of maintenance period, submit request for final inspection.
B. Final inspection will be conducted by Owner.

END OF SECTION

320190-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321123 – AGGREGATE BASE COURSES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section includes furnishing and placing one or more courses of aggregate base on a prepared
surface for concrete sidewalks, stair steps, integral curbs, gutters, parking areas, and roads.
B. Subgrade preparation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. 079200 – Joint Sealants: Sealant for joints.
D. 099000 – Paints and Coatings: Pavement markings.
E. 321216 – Asphalt Paving
F. 321313 – Portland Cement Concrete Paving
G. 211413 – Unit Paving
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
1. AASHTO T027: Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
2. AASHTO T096: Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
3. AASHTO T176: Standard Method of Test for Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by
Use of the Sand Equivalent Test
B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM D1557: Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3))
2. ASTM D2041: Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of
Bituminous Paving Mixtures
3. ASTM D2419: Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate
4. ASTM D2922: Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth)
C. [State or local authority having jurisdiction for specification of aggregate base courses and subgrade
preparation]
D. WAQTC: Western Alliance for Quality Transportation Construction
1. WAQTC TM-1: Determining the Percentage of Fracture in Coarse Aggregate
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Maximum Density Test (MDT): Theoretical maximum density of the bituminous mixture determined
by multiplying the theoretical maximum specific gravity, determined by ASTM D2041, by 62.4 pounds
per cubic foot.
B. Moving Average Maximum Density (MAMD): A moving five-test average of the most recent MDT’s.
The moving average starts with the theoretical maximum density determined during the mix design.
The mix design density is included in the average until five MDT’s have been completed.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit aggregate qualification reports and tests for approval by Engineer of Record in accordance
with [standard of authority having jurisdiction] for aggregate used in aggregate base.
1. Gradation reports.
2. Compaction tests.

3211236-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321123 – AGGREGATE BASE COURSES

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Furnish material from a single source throughout the course of the work.
B. Compaction test(s) shall be conducted by an independent testing laboratory.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store aggregate base material on-site covered or in a location where material will not be
contaminated.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Unfavorable Weather: When weather is such that satisfactory results cannot be secured, suspend
operations until the weather is considered favorable.
B. Wet Subgrades: Do not place material on wet or muddy subgrade.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Warrant Work for a period of one year from the Date of Final Completion against defects in materials
and workmanship.
B. Additional Items Covered: Warranty shall also cover repair of damage to other materials and
workmanship resulting from defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 - MATERIAL
2.1 AGGREGATE
A. Aggregate base course(s) shall consist of crushed gravel or crushed stone, conforming to the quality
requirements of AASHHTO T 027. The aggregate shall be free from lumps, balls of clay, or other
objectionable matter, and shall be durable and sound.
B. Base course material shall conform to one of the following gradations as specified in the drawings:
BASE COURSE GRADATIONS
(Percent passing by weight)
Sieve
TBD TBD TBD
Design
4 TBD TBD TBD
2 TBD TBD TBD
1 1/2 TBD TBD TBD
1 TBD TBD TBD
3/4 TBD TBD TBD
3/8 TBD TBD TBD
No. 4 TBD TBD TBD
No. 10 TBD TBD TBD
No.40 TBD TBD TBD
No.200 TBD TBD TBD
C. [Specify additional technical requirements as necessary.]
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish all necessary equipment for production, stockpiling, moisture conditioning, and hauling
aggregate, preparing the surface on which the aggregate base will be placed, and placing, spreading,

3211236-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321123 – AGGREGATE BASE COURSES

compacting, finishing and maintaining the aggregate base per the Engineer of Record’s requirements
as outlined in the Drawings.
B. Perform blending and mixing of aggregates and adjustment of moisture content as required for
compaction in a central mixing plant.
C. Place and spread the blended and mixed aggregates to the width and thickness specified using
approved mechanical spreading equipment. Do not use motor graders for spreading.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE
A. Meet requirements of Project Geotechnical Report recommendations for subgrade preparation prior
to placement of aggregate base or cement-treated base.
B. Grade subgrade with uniform slope between points where elevations are given.
C. Use equipment of proper size and appropriate type to achieve grades required.
D. Grade subgrade surface to within 0.05-foot (15 mm) of elevations indicated by the Drawing details.
E. Fill and compact any depressions and remove loose material to finish true to line and grade,
presenting a smooth, compacted and unyielding surface, except where indicated otherwise.
F. Remove debris, loose dirt and other extraneous materials.
3.2 PLACEMENT, AND SPREADING, and COMPACTION OF AGGREGATE
A. Hauling:
1. Transport the aggregate to the work site, add water to obtain proper moisture content, and place
on the prepared surface or material by means acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Use of dragline equipment to transport aggregate from stockpiles to elevators or other loading
devices will not be permitted.
3. Distribute hauling over the area to be paved in such a manner as to be most effective in the
compacting of the surfacing.
4. Hauling over any of the surfacing in process of construction will not be permitted when, in the
opinion of the University, the effect will be detrimental.
5. Uniformly load hauling vehicles when it is practicable.
B. Thickness and Number of Layers:
1. Base: If the required compacted depth of the base course exceeds 6 inches, construct it in two
or more layers of nearly equal thickness. The maximum compacted thickness of any one layer
shall not exceed 6 inches.
2. Place each layer in spreads as wide as practical and to the full width of the course before a
succeeding layer is placed.
C. Compacting and Shaping:
1. Obtain the Engineer of Record’s acceptance of the foundation layer for aggregate base course
before beginning construction of the aggregate base course.
2. Compact each layer of material placed in shoulder and base areas by rollers. Produce a uniform
texture and firmly key the aggregates. Apply water over the materials for proper compaction
according to these specifications. Continue compaction until there is no reaction or yielding
observed under the compactor.
3. Compact each lift to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM
D1557.
4. Density of in-place compacted aggregate base course will be measured in accordance with
ASTM D2922.
D. Surface Tolerance:
1. The finished top of base course, when tested with a Contractor-furnished 12-foot straightedge,
shall not vary from the testing edge by more than 0.04 foot at any point, and shall be within 0.04
foot of specified grade.

END OF SECTION

3211236-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321313 – PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete sidewalks, stair steps, integral curbs, gutters, parking areas, and roads.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary.
B. 033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. 079200 – Joint Sealants: Sealant for joints.
D. 099000 – Paints and Coatings: Pavement markings.
E. 321123 – Aggregate Base Courses
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; latest edition.
2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; latest edition.
3. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
Concrete Institute International; latest edition.
4. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; latest edition.
5. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; latest edition.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete; latest edition.
2. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; latest edition.
3. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; latest edition.
4. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; latest edition.
5. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; latest edition.
6. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; latest edition.
7. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; latest edition.
8. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; latest edition.
9. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; latest edition
.
10. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); latest edition.
11. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; latest edition.
12. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete; latest edition.
13. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; latest
edition.
14. ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete; latest edition.
15. ASTM C1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened
Concrete; latest edition.
16. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink); latest edition.
17. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); latest edition.
18. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; latest edition.

321313-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321313 – PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with
specified requirements.
C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.
D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components
that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or
frozen.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301.
B. Joint Filler: Preformed; non-extruding bituminous type (ASTM D 1751); thickness 1/2 inch.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A 615M Grade 40 (280); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish.
B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plain type, ASTM A185/A185M; in flat sheets; unfinished.
C. Dowels: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 033000.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Sealant: Type F as specified in Section 079200.
2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended
by manufacturer.
C. Normal Weight Concrete:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: As
indicated on drawings.
2. Slag 50% Maximum pound for pound cement replacement.
3. Check with concrete provider for information on amount of curing time required.
4. Use recycled aggregates as available.
5. Cement Content: Minimum 564 lb per cubic yard.
6. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
7. Total Air Content: 4 to 6 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.
8. Maximum Slump: 3 inches.
2.6 MIXING
A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.

321313-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321313 – PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
3.2 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
A. Provide Aggregate Base materials conforming to ASTM D 2940 and Section 321123 – Aggregate
Base Courses.
B. Prepare Aggregate Base Course(s) in accordance with State of [ ] Highways standards and
Section 321123 – Aggregate Base Courses.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.
B. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement.
3.4 FORMING
A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.
B. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.
3.5 REINFORCEMENT
A. Place reinforcement at top of slabs-on-grade.
B. Interrupt reinforcement at contraction joints.
C. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed.
3.6 COLD AND HOT WEATHER CONCRETING
A. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
C. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or
frozen.
3.7 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete
placement.
C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction
joints.
3.8 JOINTS
A. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.
B. Place 3/8 inch wide expansion joints at 20 foot intervals and to separate paving from vertical surfaces
and other components.
1. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/2 inch of finished
surface.
2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
C. Provide scored control joints at 5 foot intervals. Control joints shall be tooled, not sawn.
3.9 FINISHING
A. Area Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to pavement direction.
B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and radiused
edge 1/4 inch radius.

321313-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321313 – PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

C. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, texture parallel to pavement direction.

D. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Broomed perpendicular to slope.
3.10 JOINT SEALING
A. See Section 079200 for joint sealant requirements.
3.11 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 014000.
1. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
2. Submit proposed mix design to testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete
operations.
B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M.
1. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu
yd or less of concrete placed.
2. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same
conditions as concrete it represents.
3.13 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Do not permit vehicular traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after finishing.
3.14 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within
24 hours of test.
B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or
specified requirements.
C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.

END OF SECTION

321313-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321413 – UNIT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete Pavers
B. Joint Sand
C. Setting Bed Sand
D. Base and Subbase Aggregates
E. Geotextiles
F. Edge restraints
G. Cleaners and Sealers
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 033000 – Cast In Place Concrete
B. 321123 – Aggregate Base Courses
C. 321313 – Portland Cement Concrete Paving
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International, latest edition:
1. C 33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
2. C 67, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile, Section 8,
Freezing and Thawing.
3. C 136, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
4. C 140, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related
Units.
5. C 144 Standard Specifications for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
6. D 448, Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction.
7. C 936, Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units.
8. C 979, Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
9. D 698 Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a
5.5 lb (24.4 N) Rammer and 12 in. (305 mm) drop.
10. Only for projects including geotextiles:
a. D 5261, Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass per Unit Area of Geotextiles
b. D 4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles
c. D 4533, Standard Test Method for Index Trapezoidal Tearing Strength of Geotextiles
d. D 4833, Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles,
Geomembranes and Related Products
e. D 4491, Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity
f. D 4751, Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile
g. D 4354, Standard Practice for Sampling of Geosynthetics for Testing
h. D 4759, Standard Practice for Determining the Specifications Conformance of
Geosynthetics
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal procedures and documents
1. See Section 013000 for submittal procedures.
2. Manufacturer’s catalog product data, installation instructions, and material safety data sheets for
the safe handling of the specified materials and products.
3. Test results from an independent testing laboratory for compliance:
a. Pavers: ASTM C 936.
b. Joint and setting bed sand: sieve analysis per ASTM C 136 conforming to the grading
requirements of ASTM C 144.
c. Base and Subbase Aggregate: sieve analysis per ASTM C 136.

321314-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321413 – UNIT PAVING

4. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and

suggested schedule for cleaning.
B. Product samples
1. Pavers: three representative full-size samples of each paver type, thickness, color and finish that
indicate the range of color variation and texture expected upon project completion.
2. Joint Sand: three representative one pound samples in containers.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Utilize a Manufacturer having at least ten years of experience manufacturing concrete pavers on
projects of similar nature or project size.
B. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain Concrete Pavers from one source location with the resources to provide products of
consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
2. Obtain Joint and Setting Bed Sands from one source with the resources to provide materials and
products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
C. Paving Contractor Qualifications:
1. Utilize an installer having successfully completed concrete paver installation similar in design,
material, and extent indicated on this project.
D. Mockups:
1. Install a 5 ft x 5 ft paver area per each paving pattern.
2. Use this area to determine surcharge of the Setting Bed Sand layer, joint sizes, lines, laying
pattern(s) and levelness. This area will serve as the standard by which the workmanship will be
judged.
3. Subject to acceptance by owner, mock-up may be retained as part of finished work.
4. If mock-up is not retained, remove and dispose legally.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. In accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Product Requirement Section.
B. Deliver Concrete Pavers in manufacturer’s original, unopened and undamaged container packaging
with identification labels intact.
1. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of streets and
sidewalks adjacent to paver installation.
2. Deliver Concrete Pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded or plastic wrapped packaging
capable of transfer by forklift or clamp lift.
3. Unload Concrete Pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product or
adjacent surfaces.
C. Store and protect materials free from mud, dirt and other foreign materials.
D. Prevent Joint and Setting Bed Sand from exposure to rainfall or removal by wind with secure,
waterproof covering.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Install Concrete Pavers only on unfrozen and dry Setting Bed Sand.
2. Install Setting Bed Sand only on unfrozen and dry Base or Subbase Aggregate materials.
3. Install Aggregate Base Courses only over unfrozen subgrade.
4. Install Setting Bed Sand or Concrete Pavers when no heavy rain or snowfall are forecast within
24 hours.
1.8 CONCRETE PAVER OVERAGE AND ATTIC STOCK
A. Provide a minimum of 5% additional material for overage to be used during construction.
B. Manufacturer to supply maintenance and reinstatement manuals for Concrete Paver units.

321314-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321413 – UNIT PAVING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE PAVERS
A. Provide pavers meeting the minimum material and physical properties set forth in ASTM C 936,
Standard Specification for Interlocking Concrete Paving Units. Efflorescence is not a cause for
rejection.
B. Average compressive strength 8000 psi (55MPa) with no individual unit under 7,200 psi (50 MPa).
C. Average absorption of 5% with no unit greater than 7% when tested according to ASTM C 140.
D. Resistance to 50 freeze-thaw cycles, when tested according to ASTM C1645, with no breakage
greater than 1.0% loss in dry weight of any individual unit. Conduct this test method not more than 12
months prior to delivery of units.
E. Accept only pigments in concrete pavers conforming to ASTM C 979. ACI Report No. 212.3R
provides guidance on the use of pigments.
F. Basis-of-Design Product: The Concrete Paver shapes are based on: Unilock: [Courtstone / Copthorne
/ Richcliff / Belpasso / Umbriano / Series 3000 / IL Campo / Holland Premier].
Unilock (Add location), Address, City, State and Zip
Contact: [insert Unilock representative name and phone number]
https://www/unilock.com
G. The specified products establish minimum requirements that substitutions must meet to be considered
acceptable.
1. To obtain acceptance of unspecified products, submit written requests at least 7 days before the
Bid Date.
H. Concrete Paver Type 1: [product manufacturer and name]
1. Color: []
2. Finish: []
3. Edge:[]
4. Size: []. Manufacture the sizes indicated with a maximum tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 in all
directions.
2.2 JOINT SAND
1. Provide natural Joint Sand as follows:
2. Washed, clean, non-plastic, free from deleterious or foreign matter, symmetrically shaped,
natural or manufactured from crushed rock.
3. Do not use limestone screenings, stone dust, or sand for the Joint Sand material that does not
conform to conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 144.
4. Utilize sands that are as hard as practically available where concrete pavers are subject to
vehicular traffic.
2.3 SETTING BED SAND
A. Provide Setting Bed Sand as follows:
1. Washed, clean, non-plastic, free from deleterious or foreign matter, symmetrically shaped,
natural or manufactured from crushed rock.
2. Do not use limestone screenings, stone dust, or sand material that does not conform to conform
to the grading requirements of ASTM C 33.
3. Do not use mason sand or sand conforming to ASTM C 144.
4. Utilize sands that are as hard as practically available where concrete pavers are subject to
vehicular traffic.
2.4 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
A. Provide Aggregate Base materials conforming to ASTM D 2940 and installed per Section 321123 –
Aggregate Base Courses.
2.5 SUBBASE
A. Provide Subbase aggregate as designed per the structural or civil engineer.

321314-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321413 – UNIT PAVING

2.6 GEOTEXTILE
A. Provide geotextile material conforming to the following performance characteristics, measured per the
test methods referenced:
1. 4 oz., nonwoven needle punched geotextile composed of 100% polypropylene staple fibers that
are inert to biological degradation and resists naturally encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids.
2. Grab Tensile Strength: ASTM D 4632: 115 lbs.
3. Grab Tensile Elongation: ASTM D 4632: 50%
4. Trapezoidal Tear: ASTM D4533: 50 lbs.
5. Puncture: ASTM D4833: 65 lbs.
6. Apparent Opening Size: ASTM D 4751: 0.212 mm, 70 U.S. Sieve
7. Permittivity: ASTM D 4491: 2.0 sec -1
8. Flow Rate: ASTM D 4491: 140 gal/min/s.f.
B. As supplied by [Unilock].
2.7 EDGE RESTRAINTS
A. The provision of suitable edge restraints is critical to the satisfactory performance of interlocking
concrete block pavement. Abut pavers tightly against the restraints to prevent rotation under load and
any consequent spreading of joints. Install sufficiently stable edge restraints that are, in addition to
providing suitable edge support for the paver units, able to withstand the impact of temperature
changes, vehicular traffic and/or snow removal equipment.
B. Curbs, gutters or curbed gutter, constructed to the dimensions of municipal standards (noting that
these standards generally refer to cast-in-place concrete sections), are considered to be acceptable
edge restraints for heavy duty installations. Where extremely heavy industrial equipment is involved
such as container handling equipment, review the flexural strength of the edge restraint carefully
particularly if a section that is flush with the surface is used and may be subjected to high point
loading.
C. Concrete Edge Restraint as indicated in drawings.
D. Plastic and Metal Edge Restraints, including accessories as required:
1. Pave Tech
a. Material Type: Plastic
b. Model No.: Pave Edge Rigid, Pave Edge Flexible, Pave Edge Industrial
2. Snap Edge
a. Material Type: Plastic
b. Model No.: One Piece Edging, 96 inches
3. Permaloc
a. Material Type: Aluminum

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance for the following items before placing the Concrete Pavers.
B. Verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and elevations conform to specified
requirements.
C. Verify that Geotextiles, if applicable, have been placed according to drawings and specifications.
D. Verify that the Base and Subbase Aggregate materials, thickness, compacted density, surface
tolerances and elevations conform to specified requirements.
E. Provide written density test results for soil subgrade, Base and Subbase Aggregate materials to the
Owner, General Contractor and paver installation subcontractor.
F. Verify location, type, and elevations of edge restraints, concrete curbing, concrete collars around
utility structures, and drainage inlets.
G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

321314-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321413 – UNIT PAVING

H. Beginning of Bedding Sand and Concrete Paver installation signifies acceptance of Base and edge
restraints.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify that the subgrade soil is free from standing water.
B. Stockpile Setting Bed Sand, Joint Sand, Base and Subbase Aggregate materials such that they are
free from standing water, uniformly graded, free of any organic material or sediment, debris, and
ready for placement.
C. Remove any excess thickness of soil applied over the excavated soil subgrade to trap sediment from
adjacent construction activities before placing the Geotextile and Subbase Aggregate materials.
D. Keep area where pavement is to be constructed free from sediment during entire job. Remove and
replace all Geotextile, Joint Sand, Setting Bed Sand, Base and Subbase Aggregate materials
contaminated with sediment with clean materials.
E. Complete all subdrainage of underground services within the pavement area in conjunction with
subgrade preparation and before the commencement of Base or Subbase Aggregate construction.
F. Prevent damage to underdrain pipes, overflow pipes, observation wells, or inlets and other drainage
appurtenances during installation. Report all damage immediately.
G. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of Standard Proctor Density per ASTM D 698
for pedestrian areas. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 98 percent Modified Proctor per
ASTM D 1557 for vehicular areas. Stabilization of the subgrade and/or base material may be
necessary with weak or saturated subgrade soils.
H. Backfill all service trenches within the pavement area to the sub- grade level with approved material
placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 4 in. (100 mm) loose thickness. Compact each lift to at least 100
percent Standard Proctor Density as specified in ASTM D 698.
I. Trim the subgrade to within 0 to ½ in. (0 to 13mm) of the specified grades. Do not deviate the surface
of the prepared subgrade by more than 3/8 in. (10mm) from the bottom edge of a 39 in. (1m) straight
edge laid in any direction.
J. Proof-roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" to
identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and
areas of excessive pumping or rutting and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
K. Do not proceed with further pavement construction, under any circumstances, until the subgrade has
been inspected by the Architect/Engineer.
L. Base compaction of the subgrade soil on the recommendations of the Design Engineer. Request the
Architect/Engineer to inspect subgrade preparations, elevations and conduct density tests for
conformance to specifications.
M. Mechanical tampers (jumping jacks) are recommended for compaction of soil subgrade and
aggregate base around lamp standards, utility structures, building edges, curbs, tree wells and other
protrusions. Compact areas, not accessible to roller compaction equipment, to the specified density
with mechanical tampers. CAUTION – Proceed with care around the perimeters of excavations,
buildings, curbs, etc. These areas are especially prone to consolidation and settlement. Do not place
wedges of backfill in these areas. If possible particularly in these areas, proceed with backfilling and
compacting in shallow lifts, parallel to the finished surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. EDGE RESTRAINTS
1. Provide concrete edge restraints as indicated.
2. Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."
3. Provide concrete edge restraint along the perimeter of all paving as indicated. Install the face of
the concrete edge restraint, where it abuts pavers vertical down to the subbase.
4. Construct concrete edge restraint to dimensions and level specified and support on a compacted
subbase not less than 6 in (150 mm) thick.

321314-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321413 – UNIT PAVING

5. Provide plastic or metal edge restraints as indicated and supported on a minimum of 6 inches
(150 mm) of Base Aggregate. Provide 10” spiral galvanized or stainless steel spike to fasten
plastic edge restraint at 24 inches on center for straight sections and 12 inches on center for
curved sections.
B. GEOTEXTILES (when specified)
1. Provide separation geotextile on bottom and sides of prepared soil subgrade. Secure in place to
prevent wrinkling or folding from equipment tires and tracks.
2. Overlap ends and edges a minimum of 18 in. (450 mm) in the direction of drainage.
C. BASE AND SUBBASE AGGREGATE
1. Provide the Subbase Aggregate in uniform lifts not exceeding 6 in., (150 mm) loose thickness
and compact to at least 100 percent Standard Proctor Density as per ASTM D 698.
2. Compact the Subbase Aggregate material with at least two passes in the vibratory mode then at
least two in the static mode with a minimum 10 ton vibratory roller until there is no visible
movement. Do not crush aggregate with the roller.
3. Tolerance: Do not exceed the specified surface grade of the compacted Subbase Aggregate
material more than ±3/4 in. (20 mm) over a 10 ft. (3 m) long straightedge laid in any direction.
4. Provide the Base Aggregate material in uniform lifts not exceeding 6 in. (150 mm) over the
compacted Subbase Aggregate (or Subgrade) material and compact to at least 100 percent
Standard Proctor Density as per ASTM D 698.
5. Compact the Base Aggregate material with at least two passes in the vibratory mode then at
least two in the static mode with a minimum 10 ton vibratory roller until there is no visible
movement. Do not crush aggregate with the roller.
6. Tolerance: Do not exceed the specified surface grade of the compacted Base Aggregate material
more than ±3/8 in. (10 mm) over a 10 ft. (3 m) long straightedge laid in any direction.
7. Compact and grade the upper surface of the base sufficiently to prevent infiltration of the bedding sand into the ba
D. SETTING BED SAND
1. Provide and spread Setting Bed Sand evenly over the Base Aggregate course and screed to a
nominal thickness of 1 in. (25 mm).
2. Protect screeded Setting Bed Sand from being disturbed by either pedestrian or vehicular traffic.
3. Screed only the area which can be covered by pavers in one day.
4. Do not use Setting Bed Sand material to fill depressions greater in the base surface.
5. Keep moisture content constant and density loose and constant until Concrete Pavers are set
and compacted.
6. Screed the Setting Bed Sand using either an approved mechanical spreader (e.g.: an asphalt
paver) or by the use of screed rails and boards.
7. Carefully maintain spread Setting Bed Sand in a loose condition, and protected against incidental
compaction, both prior to and following screeding. Loosen any incidentally compacted sand or
screeded sand left overnight before further paving units are placed.
8. Provide lightly screeded Setting Bed Sand in a loose condition to the predetermined depth, only
slightly ahead of the paving units.
9. Fully protect screed Setting Bed Sand against incidental compaction, including compaction by
rain. Remove any screeded Setting Bed Sand that is incidentally compacted prior to laying of the
paving units.
10. Inspect the Setting Bed Sand course prior to commencing the placement of the Concrete Pavers.
Acceptance of the Setting Bed Sand occurs with the initiation of Concrete Paver placement.
E. CONCRETE PAVERS
1. Replace Concrete Pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might
be visible in finished work.
2. Mix Concrete Pavers from a minimum of three (3) bundles simultaneously drawing the paver
vertically rather than horizontally, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and
textures. (Color variation occurs with all concrete products. This phenomenon is influenced by a
variety of factors, e.g. moisture content, curing conditions, different aggregates and, most
commonly, from different production runs. By installing from a minimum of three (3) bundles
simultaneously, variation in color is dispersed and blended throughout the project).
3. Exercise care in handling face mix concrete pavers to prevent surfaces from contacting backs or
edges of other units.

321314-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321413 – UNIT PAVING

4. Provide Concrete Pavers using laying pattern as indicated. Adjust laying pattern at pavement
edges such that cutting of edge pavers is minimized. Cut all pavers exposed to vehicular tires no
smaller than one-third of a whole paver.
5. Use string lines or chalk lines on Setting Bed Sand to hold all pattern lines true.
6. Set surface elevation of pavers 1/8 in. (3 mm) above adjacent drainage inlets, concrete collars or
channels.
7. Place units hand tight against spacer bars. Adjust horizontal placement of laid pavers to align
straight. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with
spacer bars on sides of each unit.
8. Provide space between paver units of 1/32 in. (1 mm) wide to achieve straight bond lines.
9. Prevent joint (bond) lines from shifting more than ±1/2 in. (±13 mm) over 50 ft. (15 m) from string
lines.
10. Fill gaps between units or at edges of the paved area that exceed 3/8 inch (10 mm) with pieces
cut to fit from full-size unit pavers.
11. Cut Concrete Pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full
units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
12. Prevent all traffic on installed Concrete Pavers until Joint Sand has been vibrated into joints.
Keep skid steer and forklift equipment off newly laid Concrete Pavers that have not received
initial compaction and Joint Sand material.
13. Vibrate Concrete Pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a to
5000-lbf (22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving
with vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions:
a. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is
exposed to rain.
b. Compact installed Concrete Pavers to within 6 feet (2 meters) of the laying face before
ending each day's work. Cover Concrete Pavers that have not been compacted and
leveling course on which pavers have not been placed, with nonstaining plastic sheets to
prevent Setting Bed Sand from becoming disturbed.
14. Protect face mix Concrete Paver surface from scuffing during compaction by utilizing a urethane
pad.
15. Remove any cracked or structurally damaged Concrete Pavers and replace with new units prior
to installing Joint Sand material.
F. JOINT SAND
1. Provide, spread and sweep dry Joint Sand into joints immediately after vibrating pavers into
Setting Bed Sand course until full. Vibrate pavers and add Joint Sand material until joints are
completely filled, then remove excess material. This will require at least 4 passes with a plate
compactor.
2. Leave all work to within 3 ft. (1 m) of the laying face fully compacted with sand-filled joints at the
completion of each day.
3. Remove excess Joint Sand broom clean from surface when installation is complete.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify final elevations for conformance to the drawings after sweeping the surface clean. Prevent final
Concrete Paver finished grade elevations from deviating more than ±3/8 in. (±10 mm) under a 10 ft (3
m) straightedge or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
B. Lippage: No greater than 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) difference in height between Concrete Pavers and
adjacent paved surfaces.
3.5 REPAIRING, CLEANING AND SEALING
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or
that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same
manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.
B. Cleaning: Remove excess dirt, debris, stains, grit, etc. from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub
clean. Clean Concrete Pavers in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations.

321314-7 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321413 – UNIT PAVING

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect completed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.

END OF SECTION

321314-8 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321716 – TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cast-in-place cast iron detectable warning tiles.
B. Surface-applied polymer composite / fiberglass detectable warning tiles.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 033000 – Cast In Place Concrete
C. 079200 – Joint Sealants.
D. 321313 – Portland Cement Concrete Paving
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) documents:
1. ADA Standards for Accessible Design – 2010 (9/05/11, DOJ).
2. ADA Accessibility Guide (ADAAG): Sections 705 and 810.
B. Proposed Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities in the Public Right-of-Way; US Access Board;
7/23/2011; sections R208, R304, R305, R308, and R309; published as 36 CFR Part 1190.
C. California Code of Regulations (CCR 2007) Title 24 Part 1 Articles 2, 3 and 4, and Part 2 Section 205
definition of “Detectable Warning”, Section 1127B.5 for “Curb Ramps”, and Section 1133B.8.5 for
“Detectable Warnings at Hazardous Vehicle Areas”. California Department of Transportation
Detectable Warning Surface Authorized Material List. Division of the State Architect IR 11B-3
(1/26/05) and IR 11B-4 (1/01/11). IR 11B-4 (1/01/11) removed the requirement for a “staggered”
pattern and now calls for the “square grid” (in-line) pattern.
D. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
1. AASHTO M105 – Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; current edition.
E. AASHTO HM-35 – Standard Specifications for Transportation Materials and Methods of Sampling and
Testing; current edition.
F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A48 / A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; latest edition.
2. Test Methods B117, C501, C1028, D543, D570, D638, D695, D790, G151, G155, and E84;
latest editions.
G. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: For each type of product, submit manufacturer's literature describing products.
B. Material test reports: Submit current test reports from qualified, accredited independent testing
laboratory in accordance with ASTM guidelines and indicating that materials proposed for use are in
compliance with specification requirements and the meet properties indicated.
C. Samples for verification: For each type of tactile warning surface, in manufacturer's standard sizes
unless otherwise indicated, showing edge condition, truncated-dome pattern, texture, color, and cross
section; with fasteners and anchors.
D. Jurisdictional approvals as applicable.
E. Installer references: Provide written contact information for the general contractor or property owner
for a minimum of five previous projects.
F. Installer certification: For each type of tactile warning surface, provide manufacturer’s written
certification indicating installer’s qualifications.

321725-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321716 – TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Warranty documents.
B. Maintenance Instructions: Include copies of manufacturer's specified maintenance practices for each
type of tactile warning surface tiles and accessories.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer minimum warranty: 5 years. Manufacturer agrees to provide replacement components
of tactile warning surfaces with failures including, but not limited to, manufacturing defects, breakage,
deformation, deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering and wear, and separation or
delamination of materials and components.
B. Installer minimum warranty: 1 year. Installer agrees to repair or replace components of tactile warning
surfaces with, breakage, deformation, or release from substrate (either wholly or partially) due to
adhesive or fastener failure or other installation defect.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Each type of product of this Section shall be sourced from a single manufacturer, and installed by a
single vendor.
B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of products of this Section for a minimum of ten
years.
C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer, certified in writing by tactile warning surface
manufacturer, who has successfully completed tactile warning surface installations similar in material,
design, and extent at a minimum of five previous projects.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered to the site and stored in the manufacturer’s original, labelled
packaging.
B. Upon receipt of panels and other materials, installer shall examine the shipment for damage and
completeness.
C. Materials should be stored in a clean, dry location, out of direct sunlight. One end should be elevated
to allow moisture to run off. Stack all materials to prevent damage and to allow for adequate
ventilation.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.
Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by
frost or freezing.
B. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:
1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Provide artificial shade and windbreaks, and use cooled materials
as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) or
higher.
3. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or when wind velocity exceeds 8
mph (13 km/h) and ambient temperature exceeds 90 deg F (32 deg C), set unit pavers within 1
minute of spreading setting-bed mortar.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING, GENERAL
A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible
Design for tactile warning surfaces.

321725-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321716 – TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

1. For tactile warning surfaces composed of multiple units, provide units that when installed provide
consistent side-to-side and end-to-end dome spacing that complies with requirements.
2.2 DETECTABLE WARNING TILES
A. Cast-in-place metal detectable warning tiles: accessible truncated-dome detectable warning metal
tiles configured for setting flush in new concrete walkway surfaces, with slip-resistant surface
treatment on domes and field of tile.
1. Manufacturers, products
a. Basis-of-Design Product: EJ USA, Inc.; www.ejco.com; Duralast series.
b. Neenah Foundry; www.nfco.com; Detectable Warning Plates, 4984 series.
c. Deeter Foundry; www.deeter.com; Detectable Warning Plates, 4984 series.
d. TufTile, Inc.; www.tuftile.com; Wet-Set Cast Iron (Replaceable) Tiles.
e. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2. Material: cast iron: gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, CL 35.
3. Finish and color: Uncoated, natural finish.
4. Shapes and sizes
a. Provide tiles in the largest consistent sizes available from any given manufacturer.
b. Provide radiused tiles to match radiused curbs.
c. Truncated dome spacing and configuration: Center to center spacing shall be
manufacturer’s standard compliant spacing, 1.4” minimum and 2.4” maximum.
5. Mounting: permanently embedded detectable warning tile wet-set into freshly poured concrete.
B. Surface-applied detectable warning tiles (RETROFIT CONDITIONS AT EXISTING SITES ONLY):
accessible truncated-dome detectable warning tiles configured for surface application on existing
concrete walkway surfaces, with slip-resistant surface treatment on domes, field of tile, and beveled
outside edges.
1. Manufacturers, products
a. TufTile, Inc.; www.tuftile.com; Surface Applied (Replaceable) Polymer Tiles.
b. Armorcast Products Company; www.armorcastprod.com; ;
c. Engineered Plastics Inc.; Armor-Tile.
d. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2. Color: Safety yellow.
3. Shapes and Sizes:
a. Rectangular panel, 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
b. Radius panel, nominal 24 inches (610 mm) deep, radius as required to match site
conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine delivered tactile warning plates to verify correct size, attachment type, surface texture and
finish prior to placing concrete.
B. Inspect individual units to ensure they are undamaged prior to installation.
C. Clean the underside of units free of loose debris and all organic material.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. For installations with multiple adjacent plates, connect plates together using the manufacturer’s
hardware if required, or hardware as otherwise specified.
B. Place the concrete slab, with required slopes, only after tactile warning plates are prepared for setting.
C. Use supplied lifting springs and a construction 2x4 or pipe to lift plates into position.
D. Set plates in wet concrete at final position. Do not reposition plates in-place, in order to avoid voids in
the concrete below the plates. If repositioning is required, fully remove the plates from the wet
concrete, re-level the slab, and re-set the plates.
E. Remove lifting springs.

321725-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321716 – TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

F. Press assembly into wet concrete to final elevation.

G. Finish concrete around assembly
H. Remove any wet concrete that may have spilled on to the plate surface.
I. Refer to section 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete for slab curing procedures.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove all scrap and construction debris from the site.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 017000.
B. Do not permit traffic over plates until underlying slab is capable of supporting traffic without damage.

END OF SECTION

321725-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 321716 – TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cast-in-place cast iron detectable warning tiles.
B. Cast-in-place powder-coated galvanized steel detectable warning tiles.
C. Surface-applied polymer detectable warning tiles (FOR RETROFIT CONDITIONS AT EXISTING
SITES ONLY).
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 013564 – Green Requirement Summary
B. 033000 – Cast In Place Concrete
C. 079200 – Joint Sealants.
D. 321313 – Portland Cement Concrete Paving
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) documents:
1. ADA Standards for Accessible Design – 2010 (9/05/11, DOJ).
2. ADA Accessibility Guide (ADAAG): Sections 705 and 810.
B. Proposed Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities in the Public Right-of-Way; US Access Board;
7/23/2011; sections R208, R304, R305, R308, and R309; published as 36 CFR Part 1190.
C. California Code of Regulations (CCR 2007) Title 24 Part 1 Articles 2, 3 and 4, and Part 2 Section 205
definition of “Detectable Warning”, Section 1127B.5 for “Curb Ramps”, and Section 1133B.8.5 for
“Detectable Warnings at Hazardous Vehicle Areas”. California Department of Transportation
Detectable Warning Surface Authorized Material List. Division of the State Architect IR 11B-3
(1/26/05) and IR 11B-4 (1/01/11). IR 11B-4 (1/01/11) removed the requirement for a “staggered”
pattern and now calls for the “square grid” (in-line) pattern.
D. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
1. AASHTO M105 – Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; current edition.
E. AASHTO HM-35 – Standard Specifications for Transportation Materials and Methods of Sampling and
Testing; current edition.
F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A48 / A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; latest edition.
2. Test Methods B117, C501, C1028, D543, D570, D638, D695, D790, G151, G155, and E84;
latest editions.
G. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: For each type of product, submit manufacturer's literature describing products.
B. Material test reports: Submit current test reports from qualified, accredited independent testing
laboratory in accordance with ASTM guidelines and indicating that materials proposed for use are in
compliance with specification requirements and the meet properties indicated.
C. Samples for verification: For each type of tactile warning surface, in manufacturer's standard sizes
unless otherwise indicated, showing edge condition, truncated-dome pattern, texture, color, and cross
section; with fasteners and anchors.
D. Jurisdictional approvals as applicable.
E. Installer references: Provide written contact information for the general contractor or property owner
for a minimum of five previous projects.

321725-1
 CHASE
SECTION 321716 – TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

F. Installer certification: For each type of tactile warning surface, provide manufacturer’s written
certification indicating installer’s qualifications.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty documents.
B. Maintenance Instructions: Include copies of manufacturer's specified maintenance practices for each
type of tactile warning surface tiles and accessories.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer minimum warranty: 5 years. Manufacturer agrees to provide replacement components
of tactile warning surfaces with failures including, but not limited to, manufacturing defects, breakage,
deformation, deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering and wear, and separation or
delamination of materials and components.
B. Installer minimum warranty: 1 year. Installer agrees to repair or replace components of tactile warning
surfaces with, breakage, deformation, or release from substrate (either wholly or partially) due to
adhesive or fastener failure or other installation defect.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Each type of product of this Section shall be sourced from a single manufacturer, and installed by a
single vendor.
B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of products of this Section for a minimum of ten
years.
C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer, certified in writing by tactile warning surface
manufacturer, who has successfully completed tactile warning surface installations similar in material,
design, and extent at a minimum of five previous projects.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered to the site and stored in the manufacturer’s original, labelled
packaging.
B. Upon receipt of panels and other materials, installer shall examine the shipment for damage and
completeness.
C. Materials should be stored in a clean, dry location, out of direct sunlight. One end should be elevated
to allow moisture to run off. Stack all materials to prevent damage and to allow for adequate
ventilation.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.
Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by
frost or freezing.
B. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:
1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Provide artificial shade and windbreaks, and use cooled materials
as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) or
higher.
3. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or when wind velocity exceeds 8
mph (13 km/h) and ambient temperature exceeds 90 deg F (32 deg C), set unit pavers within 1
minute of spreading setting-bed mortar.

321725-2
 CHASE
SECTION 321716 – TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING, GENERAL
A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible
Design for tactile warning surfaces.
1. For tactile warning surfaces composed of multiple units, provide units that when installed provide
consistent side-to-side and end-to-end dome spacing that complies with requirements.
2.2 DETECTABLE WARNING TILES
A. Cast-in-place metal detectable warning tiles: accessible truncated-dome detectable warning metal
tiles configured for setting flush in new concrete walkway surfaces, with slip-resistant surface
treatment on domes and field of tile.
1. Manufacturers, products
a. Basis-of-Design Product: EJ USA, Inc.; www.ejco.com; Duralast series.
b. Neenah Foundry; www.nfco.com; Detectable Warning Plates, 4984 series.
c. Deeter Foundry; www.deeter.com; Detectable Warning Plates, 4984 series.
d. TufTile, Inc.; www.tuftile.com; Wet-Set Cast Iron (Replaceable) Tiles.
e. TufTile, Inc; www.tuftile.com; 10 Gauge Galvanized Steel (Replaceable) Tiles, powder-coat
finished Patina (code PCP).
f. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2. Material
a. Cast iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, CL 35.
1) Finish and color: Uncoated, natural finish.
b. Galvanized steel
1) 10 Gauge minimum.
2) Finish and color: Manufacturer’s simulated patina color powder coat.
3. Shapes and sizes
a. Provide tiles in the largest consistent sizes available from any given manufacturer.
b. Provide radiused tiles to match radiused curbs to comply with coverage requirements of
accessibility code.
c. Truncated dome spacing and configuration: Center to center spacing shall be
manufacturer’s standard compliant spacing, 1.4” minimum and 2.4” maximum.
4. Mounting: permanently embedded detectable warning tile wet-set into freshly poured concrete.
B. Surface-applied detectable warning tiles (RETROFIT CONDITIONS AT EXISTING SITES ONLY):
accessible truncated-dome detectable warning tiles configured for surface application on existing
concrete walkway surfaces, with slip-resistant surface treatment on domes, field of tile, and beveled
outside edges.
1. Manufacturers, products
a. TufTile, Inc.; www.tuftile.com; Surface Applied (Replaceable) Polymer Tiles.
b. Armorcast Products Company; www.armorcastprod.com; ;
c. Engineered Plastics Inc.; Armor-Tile.
d. Substitutions: refer to Section 016000.
2. Color: Safety yellow.
3. Shapes and Sizes:
a. Rectangular panel, 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
b. Radius panel, nominal 24 inches (610 mm) deep, radius as required to match site conditions
and comply with coverage requirements of accessibility code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine delivered tactile warning plates to verify correct size, attachment type, surface texture and
finish prior to placing concrete.
B. Inspect individual units to ensure they are undamaged prior to installation.
C. Clean the underside of units free of loose debris and all organic material.

321725-3
 CHASE
SECTION 321716 – TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. For installations with multiple adjacent plates, connect plates together using the manufacturer’s
hardware if required, or hardware as otherwise specified.
B. Place the concrete slab, with required slopes, only after tactile warning plates are prepared for setting.
C. Use supplied lifting springs and a construction 2x4 or pipe to lift plates into position.
D. Set plates in wet concrete at final position. Do not reposition plates in-place, in order to avoid voids in
the concrete below the plates. If repositioning is required, fully remove the plates from the wet
concrete, re-level the slab, and re-set the plates.
E. Remove lifting springs.
F. Press assembly into wet concrete to final elevation.
G. Finish concrete around assembly
H. Remove any wet concrete that may have spilled on to the plate surface.
I. Refer to section 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete for slab curing procedures.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove all scrap and construction debris from the site.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 017000.
B. Do not permit traffic over plates until underlying slab is capable of supporting traffic without damage.

END OF SECTION

321725-4
 CHASE
SECTION 328010 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Irrigation controller shall be a Weathermatic “SmartLine” Controller utilizing a daily calculation from the
Hargreaves ET formula to maximize water savings and provide healthy plant material sustainability.
B. The Point-of-Connection shall utilize a master valve and flow sensor to shut down high flow events
and to protect the property from damage and save water in the event that there is a break in the
irrigation mainline.
1.2 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide the following as part of the irrigation system design and installation:
1. Calculate estimated water use goals based on geographic location and plant type. Estimate to
be completed prior to installation using Weathermatic calculation tools.
2. Weathermatic Sustainability Services shall be responsible for site inspection to review installation
according to specification and provide periodic site inspection to monitor system efficiency
including recommendations of repairs and verification of prior repairs.
3. Weathermatic Sustainability Services shall train irrigation contractor and Owner’s property
manager on installed equipment and proper standards for repair and maintenance.
1.3 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES
A. Plastic, Automatic Control Valves, molded-plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual-
flow adjustment, and operated by 24-VAC solenoid.
1. CONSTRUCTION: Contamination resistant remote control valves shall be MAX-DW Black Bullet
as manufactured by Weathermatic Sprinkler Division of Telsco Industries, with hand operated
manual internal bleed and flow control. Valve shall be solenoid-operated, diaphragm, reverse
flow globe type, with 220 psi CWP rating, having NPT threads (1-inch, 1-1/2-inch and 2-inch)
(optional ISO) and be suitable for underground burial without protection.
2. Valve shall have glass-filled, high strength plastic body and cover with stainless steel spring.
Cover shall be secured to body with stainless steel cover bolts having mating brass body inserts.
Diaphragm shall be chlorine/ chloramine resistant, molded material with seat to form an integral
unit.
3. OPERATION: Solenoid shall be energized to open the valve hydraulically and de-energized to
close. Pressure to the hydraulic chamber shall be supplied internally through non-metallic,
corrosion-free orifices in the diaphragm with stroke of diaphragm causing a cleansing action of
the orifices. There shall be no screens, filters, or strainers that can “clog up” and cause the valve
to fail in the open position. There shall be no external bleeding or external tubing to furnish
actuating pressure.
4. WARRANTY: Valve shall have a manufacturer’s warranty of five (5) years.
1.4 PRESSURE REGULATING DRIP CONTROL ZONE KIT
A. Pressure Regulating Drip Control Zone Kit shall be model SCZ-MAX-DW-10 as manufactured by
Weathermatic Sprinkler Division of Telsco Industries.
1. CONSTRUCTION: Pressure regulating drip control zones shall be pre-assembled units including
a remote control valve, wye filter and pressure regulator. Remote control valve shall be model
MAX-DW-10 with 1” NPT (ISO) inlet and outlet threads and standard flow adjustment. Valve
body shall glass-filled, high strength plastic body and cover with stainless steel spring and have a
pressure activated diaphragm seal to resist leaks between the body and bonnet under high static
and operating pressures. Remote control valve shall have a manual internal bleed lever on the
downstream side of the valve capable of operating the valve without adjustment to the solenoid
assembly and without leaking or flooding water in the valve box. Valve shall be reverse flow in
design causing automatic closure in the event of diaphragm failure.
2. Wye filter shall include a standard 150 mesh stainless steel filter and ¾” hose end male threaded
outlet and cap. Optional 200 mesh stainless steel filter screens shall be available from the
manufacturer and the filter unit shall be capable of upgrade to the Spintech vortex filter for dirty
water applications for extending the service life of the filter and eliminating flow restriction and
pressure loss through the filter assembly.

328010-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 328010 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM

3. The pressure regulator shall be constructed of high-impact engineering glade plastics using a
tamper-proof housing design that will deliver a constant outlet pressure over a wide range of inlet
pressures with low friction loss. Standard outlet pressure for the regulator assembly shall be 25
psi (1,73 bar)
4. OPERATION: Pressure regulating drip control zones shall be solenoid or manually actuated.
Solenoid actuator shall require 9.48 VA inrush current and 5.11 VA holding current at 24VAC/60
Hz. Inrush and holding current at 24VAC/50Hz shall be 10.66 VA and 5.97VA. Control zone
shall a minimum and maximum flow range of 1-20 gpm. Maximum operating pressure shall not
exceed 150 psi. Control zone shall deliver a constant outlet pressure of 25 psi (1,73 bar) over an
inlet pressure range of 25-100 psi.
5. WARRANTY: Drip control zone assemblies have a manufacturer’s limited warranty of two (2)
years.
1.5 CONTROLLERS
A. Controller(s) shall be SmartLine Controller(s), models SL1600 or SL4800 as manufactured by
Weathermatic Sprinkler Division of Telsco Industries. Controller(s) shall be a four (4) program
controller(s) with capability of 4 - 48 zones. The SL1600 will be 4 zones expandable by the addition of
4 zone modules to 16 zones. The SL4800 will have a base zone count of 12 zones expandable
through the addition of 12 zone modules to 48 zones.
1. Controller shall be capable of standard timed watering or auto adjust watering times when
equipped with an optional SLW weather monitor manufactured by Weathermatic. Auto Adjust
watering shall be based on real time, on-site weather data and system audit data entered by the
user. Auto adjust timing shall be based on the Hargreaves ET calculation formula. Controller
shall provide reviewable watering deficits, scheduled run times by zone and a total run time
recap for each zone which is resettable by the user. A “more or less” function shall be provided to
allow run time adjustment by zone for shade/sunlight, system efficiency and other local factors.
Auto adjust mode shall also include automatic calculation of run/soak times based on both soil
type and zone elevation.
2. Each program shall have eight independent start times, calendar schedules, watering budgets by
month and a soak/cycle for varying soil percolation rates.
3. Controller shall have a pump start/master valve position, which shall be programmable to operate
on demand from any selected zone. A programmable safety delay shall be included for zone to
zone delay and master valve to zone delay for opening and closure.
4. Controller shall have input for rain and freeze sensor devices selectable by zone. SLW weather
monitor shall incorporate the rain and freeze shutdown functions and shall incorporate a 48-hour
delay (adjustable 0 – 99 hours) after closure of the rain sense switch.
5. Controller shall have self-diagnostic capabilities to detect “short” or “open” zones and the ability
to display lists of faults on an LCD display for the user. Diagnostics shall also include LCD
display of volt/amp readings by zone and for transformer output as well as backup battery
reading. A chatter function shall also be provided to assist in locating buried valves. The
controller shall automatically prevent master valve opening or pump start when the valve locator
diagnostic is used.
6. Controller display shall be backlit for clear viewing in all lighting conditions. Zone timing shall be
settable from 1 minute to 9 hours and 55 minutes.
7. Program D shall operate concurrently with programs A, B and C. Programs A, B and C shall
stack in sequence of start time operation.
8. Program schedules shall include options for days of the week, odd date, even date or an interval
of 1 to 30 days. A ‘no water’ window shall be available to inhibit daily operations of a program
between two selected times on a given day; omission of up to 15 specified calendar dates or
specific days of the week. Adjustments for leap year shall be automatic.
9. Manual operation shall be provided by program, by station, or on a programmable test program
with durations from ten (10) seconds to ten (10) minutes. The programmable test program shall
also check for short and open conditions on each zone each time it is run.
10. A ”non-volatile” memory shall retain all programming and real-time clock shall be provided to
maintain date and time.
11. Controller shall be capable of incorporating Weathermatic SmartLink Aircard allowing for web-
based interface into controller to allow communications between SmartLink web site and
controller.

328010-2 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 328010 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM

B. Controller shall be enclosed in a U.L., CE and C-Mark Listed rainproof plastic enclosure with optional
key lock. Enclosure shall be a wall mount (pedestal mount) model with removable knockouts on the
lower side and back of the housing for choice of wiring location. The operating panel shall be a totally
enclosed module that is removable from the housing for programming at a separate location. A test
post for 24VAC operation shall be accessible with or without the operating panel.
1. Controller shall be completely electric in operation. Controller shall be installed and wired in accordance with ma
C. Controller shall have a manufacturer’s warranty of two (2) years.
1.6 WIRELESS LANDSCAPE NETWORK
A. Wireless Landscape Network (SmartLink) shall be a custom model # SL-AIRCARD-CHASE as
manufactured by Weathermatic Sprinkler Division of Telsco Industries. SL-AIRCARD-CHASE is
comprised of the SL-AIRCARD and custom JP Morgan Chase SL-PLAN for cloud services. Optional
package to be available with flow monitoring.
B. SL-AIRCARD-CHASE shall be housed in an indoor/outdoor housing. It shall incorporate an L.E.D.
visible externally to indicate operating conditions of the SL-AIRCARD. The SL-AIRCARD-CHASE
shall be connected to the SmartLine Control, as manufactured by Weathermatic, through a cable from
the SL-AIRCARD-CHASE terminating in the SmartLine Control with the use of a plug-in RJ11
connector.
C. SL-AIRCARD-CHASE communications protocol will be cellular (either GSM or CDMA) allowing
connection through secure web based servers to smartlinknetwork.com.
1. SmartLink will not require software to be installed locally on a web-enabled appliance.
Connection to SmartLink through the web shall be through a web-enabled appliance such as a
PC, Smart Phone, Tablet, etc.
a. SmartLink will not require software to be installed locally on a web-enabled appliance.
b. User access to smartlinknetwork.com has password secured access to the users account.
c. Security to the account with access to individual sites and controllers is defined by the
account administrator.
d. Each account will have the capability of unlimited users, sites and controllers.
2. At the controller page of the SmartLink web, the user will be able to review, change, or establish
all programs available in the SmartLine Controller.
3. User defined names for Sites, Controllers, and individual zones will be available.
4. System/Controller/zone alerts will be sent to prescribed user by text or e-mail.
5. SmartLink will be enabled with Global Commands for complete/partial system control.
6. SmartLink will be enabled with AT-A-Glance Dashboard for easy review of SmartLine Controller
parameters and manual watering operations.
D. SL-AIRCARD-CHASE shall have a manufacturer’s warranty of two (2) years.
1.7 WEATHER STATION
A. Wireless weather station shall be model SLW5 manufactured by Weathermatic Sprinkler Division of
Telsco Industries. Weather stations must be compatible for use with SmartLine irrigation controls.
1. Weather station shall be wireless in design using bi-directional communication. Weather station
shall have integrated on-site sensors for rain-shut off, freeze shut-off and calculation of daily
evapotranspiration irrigation deficits. Weather station shall have an integral mounting bracket
with a two-point articulating arm made from high-impact molded resin. Weather station shall be
suitable for outdoor mounting in commercial or residential environments. Weather station shall be
capable of two-way communications with the SmartLine controls and have independent power
supply, self-diagnostic circuit and microprocessor.
B. Weather stations rain sensor shall be adjustable to interrupt irrigation after a user selected
precipitation amount of 1/8 inch, 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch. Weather station shall be capable of interrupting
irrigation after temperatures reach below 37 degrees Fahrenheit. Weather station shall provide instant
notification to the controller of either a rain or freeze event and upon clearing of the same.
Evapotranspiration deficits shall be calculated daily and transferred to the SmartLine controller each
day.
C. Weather station shall have a manufacturer’s warranty of two (2) years.

328010-3 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 328010 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM

1.8 FLOW SENSOR

A. Flow Sensor shall be model SLFSL-T or SLFSL-S manufactured by Weathermatic Sprinkler Division
of Telsco Industries. The Model number shall include the Series designation followed by a three
character group beginning with T (Tee Mounted) or S (Saddle Mounted) and followed by a two digit
code referencing line size followed by a three digit electronic version designator. Therefore, the model
number for a one inch size flow sensor with standard electronics would be written as: FSI-T10. Flow
sensors must be compatible for use with SmartLine irrigation controls.
B. The flow sensor shall be installed with a minimum of 10 diameters of straight pipe upstream, and a
minimum of 5 diameters of straight pipe downstream to eliminate irregular flow profiles caused by
valves, fittings or pipe bends.
C. The flow senor shall have an output Frequency Range of 0.3 Hz to 200 Hz.
D. Flow sensors shall have a manufacturer’s limited warranty of five (5) years.
1.9 SHORT RANGE ROTARY SPRINKLERS (ROTORS)
A. ROTARY SPRINKLER HEAD(S) shall be the Turbo 3 (Options: N and/or -CV) as manufactured by
Weathermatic Sprinkler Division of Telsco Industries, or approved equal. Sprinkler shall be a 4” pop-
up type with positive gear drive for full-circle and part-circle coverage and 3/4” NPT riser connection
1. CONSTRUCTION: Head shall be made of high-strength, non-corrosive plastics and metals to
ensure long-life performance. The sprinkler head shall have a sealed, lubricant-packed drive
housing to assure long-life performance. Sprinkler head shall have a threaded screw-on cover
and include a (Option: A Non-potable Alert) rubber cover. Sprinkler head shall utilize a double lip
pressure activated wiper seal in conjunction with a stainless steel spring to assure positive head
retraction. A slip clutch shall be included to protect gear train from damage. Reversing
mechanism shall utilize an independent filtration system to prevent stalling. A check valve shall
be provided to prevent low head drainage. Arc degree settings shall be clearly marked on
adjustment ring to permit ease of adjustment.
2. OPERATION: The arc adjustment ring on nozzle flow tube shall permit quick adjustment of arc
size from 40 degrees to 360 degrees without the use of tools or the removal of the inner
assembly. A set of field changeable nozzles shall be provided with each sprinkler to adapt
performance to site conditions. The nozzle set shall include standard 26 degree trajectory and 13
degree low angle trajectory. Radius range shall be 23 to 61 feet. The sprinkler shall have an
automatic adjusting stator to correctly match the flow required at the impeller with the nozzle
selected and to regulate speed of rotation. Sprinkler shall momentarily dwell at the end of both
arcs to provide uniform precipitation to border areas. Sprinkler head shall accept the vandal
cover lock (XVT3) to lock cover to body.
3. WARRANTY: The rotary sprinkler head shall have a manufacturer’s limited warranty of not less
than five (5) years.
1.10 MEDIUM RANGE ROTARY SPRINKLERS (ROTORS)
A. ROTARY SPRINKLER HEAD(S) shall be the Turbo 35 (Options: N, SS and/or -CV) as manufactured
by Weathermatic Sprinkler Division of Telsco Industries, or approved equal. Sprinkler shall be a 4”
pop-up type with positive gear drive for full-circle and part-circle coverage and 1” NPT riser
connection. Specify “-ISO” for International threads.
1. CONSTRUCTION: Head shall be made of high-strength, non-corrosive plastics and metals to
ensure long-life performance. The sleeve of the flow tube and nozzle Turret shall have (Option to
be encased in stainless steel). The sprinkler head shall have a sealed, lubricant-packed drive
housing to assure long-life performance. Sprinkler head shall have a threaded screw-on cover
and include a (Option: A Non-potable Alert) rubber cover. Sprinkler head shall utilize a double lip
pressure activated wiper seal in conjunction with a stainless steel spring to assure positive head
retraction. A slip clutch shall be included to protect gear train from damage. Reversing
mechanism shall utilize an independent filtration system to prevent stalling. A check valve shall
be provided to prevent low head drainage. Arc degree settings shall be clearly marked on
adjustment ring to permit ease of adjustment.
2. OPERATION: The arc adjustment ring on nozzle flow tube shall permit quick adjustment of arc
size from 40 degrees to 360 degrees without the use of tools or the removal of the inner
assembly. A set of field changeable nozzles shall be provided with each sprinkler to adapt

328010-4 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 328010 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM

performance to site conditions. The nozzle set shall include standard 26 degree trajectory and 13
degree low angle trajectory. Radius range shall be 23 to 61 feet. The sprinkler shall have an
automatic adjusting stator to correctly match the flow required at the impeller with the nozzle
selected and to regulate speed of rotation. Sprinkler shall momentarily dwell at the end of both
arcs to provide uniform precipitation to border areas. Sprinkler head shall accept the vandal
cover lock (XVT3) to lock cover to body.
3. WARRANTY: The rotary sprinkler head shall have a manufacturer’s limited warranty of not less
than five (5) years.
1.11 LONG RANGE ROTARY SPRINKLERS (ROTORS)
A. ROTARY SPRINKLER HEAD(S) shall be the CT70 (Options: -N, -SS and/or -CV) as manufactured by
Weathermatic Sprinkler Division of Telsco Industries, or approved equal. Sprinkler shall be a 4” pop-
up type with positive gear drive for full-circle and part-circle coverage and 1” NPT riser connection
(Optional ISO).
1. CONSTRUCTION: Head shall be made of high-strength, non-corrosive plastics and metals to
ensure long-life performance. The sleeve of the flow tube and nozzle Turret shall have (Option to
be encased in stainless steel). The sprinkler head shall have a sealed, lubricant-packed drive
housing to assure long-life performance.
2. Sprinkler head shall have a threaded screw-on cover and include a (Option: A Non-potable Alert)
rubber cover. Sprinkler head shall utilize a double lip pressure activated wiper seal in conjunction
with a stainless steel spring to assure positive head retraction. A slip clutch shall be included to
protect gear train from damage. Reversing mechanism shall utilize an independent filtration
system to prevent stalling. A check valve shall be provided to prevent low head drainage. Arc
degree settings shall be clearly marked on adjustment ring to permit ease of adjustment.
3. OPERATION: The arc adjustment ring on nozzle flow tube shall permit quick adjustment of arc
size from 40 degrees to 360 degrees without the use of tools or the removal of the inner
assembly. A set of field changeable nozzles with a flow range of 8.1 to 28.0 GPM and a radius
range of 49 to 74 feet, shall be provided with each sprinkler to adapt performance to site
conditions. The sprinkler shall have an automatic adjusting stator to correctly match the flow
required at the impeller with the nozzle selected and to regulate speed of rotation Sprinkler shall
momentarily dwell at the end of both arcs to provide uniform precipitation to border areas.
Sprinkler head shall accept the vandal cover lock (XVT3) to lock cover to body.
4. WARRANTY: The rotary sprinkler head shall have a manufacturer’s limited warranty of not less
than five (5) years.
1.12 SPRAYHEAD SPRINKLERS
A. LAWN SPRAY HEAD shall be a MAX4, MAX6, MAX12 (Options: -CV, -PRS30 and/or -NP) as
manufactured by Weathermatic Sprinkler Division of Telsco Industries, or approved equal. Heads
shall pop up not less than 4, 6, or 12 inches with spring retraction. Heads shall accept a plastic
matched precipitation rate nozzle, a fixed arc milled brass nozzle, or an adjustable plastic nozzle.
Heads shall have ratcheted flow tube for arc location purposes and shall be check valve adaptable.
1. CONSTRUCTION: Body, cover and flow tube shall be high-impact ABS. A stainless steel spring
shall provide retraction force. Outside entry of sand and dirt shall be prevented with a pressure-
activated wiper seal that provides for zero flow by at 5 psi or greater. 4, 6, 12 inch pop-ups shall
be equipped with both side and bottom inlets. Arc location shall be by means of a positive stop-
ratcheting device permitting the arc to be located by depressing flow tube while sprinkler is in
operation. (Option -CV: The sprinkler shall be equipped with factory installed check valve and
shall hold back 9.5 ft./hd. with a minimum pop up and seal pressure of 18 psi and/or a model
MAX-NP purple, snap-on non-potable alert ring shall be provided on all installations requiring the
use of non-potable water supplies and/or pressure regulating device to maintain a constant 30psi
pressure rating within normal operating range of 30-70psi)
2. OPERATION: The nozzles shall either provide adjustable flows and areas of coverage at rated
pressure requirements in both full-circle and part-circle types or shall be fixed arc in both full and
part circle types. All nozzles series must have matched precipitation to the extent that full and
part circle nozzles can be valved together.
3. WARRANTY: The MAX spray head shall have a manufacturer’s limited warranty of not less than
five (5) years.

328010-5 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 328010 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM

END OF SECTION

328010-6 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 347100 – BOLLARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Plastic bollard covers.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B. 055000 – Metal Fabrications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers shall have been engaged in the production of specified products for not less than 5
years.
B. Installer shall have documented experience installing this type of product on at least 5 prior projects of
similar or greater scope.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store packaged materials under cover and out of direct sunlight.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Installer labor warranty shall be as indicated in Section 007200 – General Conditions or as
supplemented or modified in section 007300 – Supplementary Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Ideal Shield, 2525 Clark Street, Detroit, Michigan; www.idealshield.com.
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 016000 -
Product Requirements.
2.2 STEEL PIPE BOLLARDS
A. Steel pipe: Type XS hot-dip galvanized steel pipe; nominal 4” and 6” diameter and length as indicated
in the drawings steel. Refer to Section 055000 – Metal Fabrications.
B. Concrete fill: Field-placed Normal Weight Concrete, mix and placement adjustments as required to
ensure the absence of voids in the tube. Refer to Section 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2.3 PLASTIC BOLLARD COVERS
A. 1/4” thick thermoplastic polyethylene (HDPE) post sleeve with dome cap of 1/4” low-density
polyethylene thermoplastic (LDPE).
B. Color to match Benjamin Moore #2064-30 “Ol’ Blue Eyes”.

347100-1 XX/XX/XX
 CHASE
SECTION 347100 – BOLLARDS

C. Length ordered or field-cut as required to cover steel tube bollards without exposing steel and with
minimal height above steel.
D. Diameter as required to fit steel pipe bollards snugly.
1. 6” nominal steel pipe: Ideal Shield #BPD-OBE-6-XX, where XX = length in inches. Fits steel
tubes with 6 5/8” O.D.
2. 4” nominal steel pipe: Ideal Shield #BPD-OBE-4-XX, where XX = length in inches. Fits steel
tubes with 4” – 4 1/2” O.D.
E. Surface of sleeve to be smooth with round top, no ribbed or two piece systems accepted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to bollard cover installation, verify that the steel tubes were installed with proper position, size,
height and visible installation detailing indicated in the drawings. Verify that all masonry, painting and
sealant work adjacent to bollard locations are complete. Do not proceed with bollard cover installation
until this work is completed. Where adjacent work is incomplete, installer is to stop work and notify
the General Contractor.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide shims as required to eliminate bollard cover movement. If shimming is required, bollard
covers shall be positioned tangent with the face of the island curb.
C. Secure bollard cover to steel tube with manufacturer’s neoprene adhesive tape. Do not use screws,
glue or clamps.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed bollard covers until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged bollard covers prior to the Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

347100-2 XX/XX/XX